Amyx-Petroleum Reservoir Engineering

PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
Physical Properties
McGraw-Hill Classic Textbook Reissue Series

AMYX, BASS and WHITING: Petroleum Reservoir Engineering:
Physical Properties
CHOW: Open-Channel Hydraulics
DAVENPORT: Probability Random Process: An Introduction for
Applied Scientists and Engineers
DRAKE: Fundamentals of Applied Probability Theory
GOODMAN: Introduction to Fourier Optics
HARRINGTON: Time-Harmonic Electromagnetic Fields
HINZE: Turbulence
KAYS and CRAWFORD: Convective Heat and Mass Transfer
KRYNINE and JUDD: Principles of Engineering Geology
and Geotechnics
MEIROVITCH: Methods of Analytical Dynamics
MELSA: Linear Control Systems
MICKLEY: Applied Mathematics in Chemical Engineering
PAPOULIS: The Fourier Integral and Its Applications
PHELAN: Fundamentals of Mechanical Design
SCHLICHTING: Boundary Layer Theory
SCHWARTZ and SHAW: Signal Processing: Discrete Spectral Analysis,
Detection, and Estimation
TIMOSHENKO: Theory of Plates and Shells
TIMOSHENKO and GOODIER: Theory of Elasticity
TIMOSHENKO and GERE: Theory of Elastic Stability
TREYBAL: Mass-Transfer Operations
TRUXAL: Introductory Systems Engineering
WARNER and McNEARY: Applied Descriptive Geometry
WELLMAN: Technical Descriptive Geometry
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR
ENGINEERING
Physical Properties
JAMES W. AMYX
DANIEL M. BASS, JR.
ROBERT L. WHITING
The Agricultural and Mechanical College of Texas
efill'>'APITtn
McGRAW-HILL
CLASSIC
TEXTB<PK
REISSUE
McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

New York St. Louis San Francisco Auckland Bogota Caracas
Colorado Springs Hamburg Lisbon London Madrid Mexico
Milan Montreal New Delhi Oklahoma City Panama Paris
San Juan Sao Paulo Singapore Sydney Tokyo Toronto
- - - - - - - - - -------------
PREFACE

Copyright 1960 by the McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. Reissued
1988 by the McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed
in the United States of America. Except as permitted under the United
States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a data
base or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 59-13191
15 16 VBAVBA 8 9 3 2 I 0 9 8
ISBN
0-07-001600-3
This book, the first of two volumes on petroleum-reservoir engineering,

presents concepts and applications of rock and fluid properties which are
fundamental to engineering analyses of petroleum reservoirs. In addition
the organization and evaluation of laboratory and field data for reservoir
analyses are presented together with applications of such ordered data to
the determination of the volume of hydrocarbons "in place."
The book is arranged so that it can be used as a text or as a reference
work. If it is used as a text, the organization of material permits flexibility
in designing course offerings. Although planned for use in a course or
courses comprising a total of four semester hours <;>f work and presuming
a prerequisite course in oil-field development, the book can be used in a
first course in petroleum engineering if desired.
Chapter 1 is comprised of an introductory discussion of hydrocarbon
accumulations, oil-field development, and production methods. Chapters
2 and 3 present rock properties in a complete and cohesive independent
unit. Chapters 4 to 6 present a study of fluid properties also as a complete, cohesive independent unit. Chapter 7 deals with evaluation of rock
and fluid properties both from laboratory and field data. Chapter 8 presents the derivation of the material balance and the applications of such
balances to the determination of volume of hydrocarbon in place.
This volume is a direct outgrowth of a multilithed book used in a series
of summer schools in reservoir engineering offered to industry personnel
during 1956 and 1957.
Much of the material on which the book is based was drawn from the
litersture published by the Society of Petroleum Engineers of the American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers, the
Division of Production of the American Petroleum Institute, the Natural
Gasoline Association of America, and the American Association of Petroleum Geologists. In addition, the authors are indebted to the host of
authors who have contributed to the petroleum literature in various other
publications. Core Laboratories, Incorporated, and Shell Oil Company
provided additional data not generally available in the literature.
The authors are indebted to the following companies who supported the
industry summer courses: Argo Oil Corporation, The California Company,
v
TI
PREFACE
The California Standard Company, Canadian Seaboard Company,

Champlin Oil and Refining Company, Core Laboratories, Inc., DelhiTaylor Oil Corporation, Honolulu Oil Corporation, Humble Oil and
Refining Company, Kewanee Oil Company, Lion Oil Company, Magnolia
Petroleum Company, Mound Company, Murphy Corporation, McAlester
Fuel Company, Plymouth Oil Company, Pure Oil Company, Railroad
Commission of Texas, Republic National Bank of Dallas, Richmond
Exploration Company, Rotary Engineers Laboratories, Shell Oil Company,
Southern Minerals, Inc., Sun Oil Company, Sunray-Mid-Continent Oil
Company, Standard Oil Company of California, Standard Oil Company of
Texas, Western Leaseholds, Ltd., and Western Operations.
Mr. Donald A. Flanagan, Mr. Robert L. Ridings, and Dr. Denton R.
Wieland worked out many of the numerical examples. Mrs. Wilmoth
Boring, Mrs. Lora Watson, Mrs. Joan Hodges, Mrs. Gloria Conrad, and
Mrs. Betty Short typed and retyped the many drafts of the manuscript.
We are especially indebted to our wives, Mrs. Louise Amyx, Mrs.
Dorothy Bass, and Mrs. Sharon Whiting, for their patience and encouragement during the preparation of this volume.
Jame. W. Amyx
Daniel M. Bass, Jr.
Robert L. Whiting
CONTENTS
Preface .
Key to Symbols
xi
1. Introduction
General Composition of Petroleum-Physical Properties of HydrocarbonsOrigin of Petroleum-Traps-Distribution of Hydrocarbon Fluids in TrapsLithology of Petroleum Reservoirs-Drilling-Cable-tool Drilling-Rotary
Drilling-Well Completion and Production-Reservoir Performance.
2. Fundamental Properties of Fluid Permeated Rocks
36
36
Introduction
Porosity
. . . . . .
36
Laboratory Measurement of Porosity-Precision of Porosity ~feasurements
Carbonate Rocks-Compressibility of Porous Rocks.
Permeability . . . . .
.
64
Horizontal Flow-Vertical Flow-Radial Flow-Permeability of Combination
Layers---cb.annels and Fractures in Parallel-Analogy of Darcy's Law and
Other Physical Laws-Measurement of Permeability-Factors Affecting Permeability Measurements-Factors in Evaluation of. Permeability from Other
Parameters.
100
Fluid Saturations
. . .
Methods of Determining Fluid Saturation-Determination of Fluid Saturations from Rock Samples-Factors Affecting Fluid Saturations of Cores-The
Use of Core-determined Fluid Saturations.
110
Electrical Conductivity of _Fluid Saturated Rocks
Resistivity Relations-Measurement of Electrical Resistivity of Rocks-Empirical Correlation of Electrical Properties.
S. Properties of Porous Media Containing Multiple Fluid Saturations
133
133
Surface Forces and Capillary Pressure .
Fundamentals of Surface and Capillary Forces-Laboratory Measurements of
Capillary Pressure-Interstitial Water Saturations-Calculation of Wettability-Pore--size Distribution and Calculation of Permeability from Capillarypressure Data.
174
Effective and Relative Permeability
. .
Laboratory Investigations of Relative Permeability-Three-phase Relative
Permeability-Measurement of Relative Permeability Data-Use of Effective
and Relative Permeability Data.
4. Fundamentals of the Behavior of Hydrocarbon Fluids
211
Introduction
Basic Concepts of Phase Behavior .
211
212
vii
viii
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Single-component Systems-Binary Systems-Multicomponent Systems.

Properties of the Gaseous State
.
. . 229
Ideal Gas Laws-Impurities in Natural Gas-Viscosity of Gases-Summary
of Properties of Gases.
'Properties of the Liquid State .
. . .
. . . 287
Volumetric Behavior of Liquids-Density of Hydrocarbon Mixtures in the
Liquid State-Surface Tension-Viscosity of Liquids-Vapor Pressure.
.. . .
. . . 315
Properties of Two-phase Systems
Equilibrium Relations-Development of Equations for Calculating Equilibrium
Relations-Separ.ator Problems.
5. Determination and Application of Reservoir Fluid Properties
359
Introduction
Sampling Reservoir Fluids
Bottom-hole Sampling-~combination Samples-Split-stream Sampling.
Laboratory Analysis of Reservoir-fluid Samples
.
Relative Total Volume-Differential Oil Formation Volume Factor and Gas in
Solution-Flash Separation Test-Gas Compressibility-Fluid VIScosityDifferential-flash Oil Formation Volume Factors and Gas in SolutionEquilibrium Ratios-Fluid Composition-Presentation of a Fluid Analysis
for .a Gas-Crude-oil System.
Preparation of Fluid-analysis Data for Use in Reservoir Calculations
.
Smoothing Laboratory Data-Correction of Laboratory Sample Data for Separator Conditions-Total Volume Factors-Correcting Fluid-analysis Data to
Reservoir Bubble-point Pressure.
Fluid-analysis Data on Gas-condensate Systems
Laboratory Measurements.
Applications of Fluid-analysis Data
. .
. . .
Fitting Published Equilibrium-ratio Data to Laboratory Fluid-analysis Data
Other Methods of Determining Hydrocarbon Fluid Properties .
Modified Ideal Solutions-Empirical Methods-Calculating Reservoir Volumes for Gas-condensate Systems-Correlations for Fluid \Tiscosities.
359
6. Properties of Water
360
365
8. The Material Bale.nee .
411
415
417
425
448
473
Introduction
473
Field Records .
475
Completion and Workover Records-Production Records-Well Tests.
497
Average Fluid Properties
Reservoir Fluids Existing in the Gaseous State-Reservoir Fluids Existing in
the Liquid State.
Evaluation of Rock Volume
517
Areal Extent-Isopach Maps.
561
561
562
Introduction
Derivation of Material-balance Equation
Solution-gas Drive-Solution-gas-Gas-cap Drive-Simple Solution-gas-Gascap-Water-drive Reservoirs-Solution-gas-Gas-cap-Wa~er-drive with F~uid
Injection-Slightly Compressible Hydrocarbon Reservorrs--Gas ReservorrComparison of Drives.
575
Data for Material Balance . . .
Fluid-production Data-Reservoir Temperatures-Reservoir Pressures-Fluid
Analysis-Core Analysis and Laboratory Rock Data.
589
Calculation of Oil in Place Using the Material-balance Equation .
Estimation of Oil in Place for a Solution-gas-drive Reservoir-Estimation of
Oil in Place for Slightly Compressible Fluids-Estimates of Gas in Place from
Material Balance.
599
Name Index
Subject Index
383
Introduction
448
Physical Properties of Water
450
Solubility of Natural Gas in Water-Compressibility of Water--Thermal Expansion of Water-Water Formation Volume Factor-:--Density, Specific Volume,
and Specific Gravity-Viscosity of Water-Solubility of Water in Natural
Gas-Electrical Resistivity of Water.
470
Chemical Properties of Water
7. Data Evaluation for Reservoir Calculations
Hydrocarbon Volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation of Porosity and Permeability-Water Saturation-Calculation of
Hydrocarbon Volume.
ix
536
603
KEY TO SYMBOLS
ENGLISH LETI'ER SYMBOLS
a
A
A
AT
Aa
b
B
Bfl
Bae
B;
Bo
B,
B.,,
c
C
C
co
1
Cg
Co
c,,
c,.
c,.
c'UI
C'
d
D
e,
e.
ew
constant in equation of state

area
Avogadro's number
adhesion tension
actual area
constant in equation of state
formation voulme factor
gas formation volume factor
gas-cap formation volume factor
injected gas formation volume factor
oil formation volume factor
total formation (two-phase) volume factor
water formation volume factor
compressibility
constant
flow coefficient
bulk compressibility
formation (rock) compressibility
gas compressibility
oil compressibility
pore-volume compressibility
compressibility of rock
pseudo-reduced compressibility
water compressibility
function of tortuosity
diameter
depth
diffusion coefficient
influx (encroachment) rate
gas-influx (encroachment) rate
oil-influx (encroachment) rate
water-influx (encroachment) rate
friction factor
xi
xii
f
F
F
F
f'
g
G
G
g,
Gdh
G.,
G,
t;.G,
G,
t;.G,
G,
t;.G,
G,,.
G,,.
G,.
h
h
H
h,
H,
H,
H,
i
I
I
i,
iw
I,
J
J,
k
K
K
k,
k,
k.
k,,
ENGLISH LETTER SYl-fBOLS
fraction (such as the fraction of a flow stream consisting of a particular phase)

formation factor
frequency
force
fugacity
acceleration of gravity
total initial gas in place in reservoir
gas gravity (air = 1)
geothermal gradient
gradient of heavier fluid
gradient of lighter fluid
cumulative gas influx (encroachment)
gas influx (encroachment) during a time period
cumulative gas injected
gas injected during a time period
cumulative gas produced
gas produced during a time period
cumulative gas-cap gas produced
cumulative solution-gas produced
oil gradient
height
net pay thickness
gross pay thickness
closure of structure
depth to interface
depth of perforations
depth to top of interval
injection rate
amperes (electric current)
injectivity index
gas-injection rate
water-injection rate
specific-injectivity index
productivity index
specific-productivity index
absolute permeability
equilibrium ratio (y/x)
constant of proportionality
effective permeability to gas
permeability to a single liquid phase
effective permeability to oil
relative permeability to gas
ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS
k ..
k,w
kw
k,
L
L
L,
m
m
m
m
m
m
M
n
n
n
N
N,
t;.N,
N,
t;.N,
p
p
P,
P~
p,
p,
P,
P,
P,r
Po.
P ..
p,
PD
P,
Pr
p,
P,
P,.
P,,
p,
xiii
relative permeability to oil

relative permeability to water
effective permeability to water
Kozeny constant
moles of Ii quid phase
length
actual flow pa th
mean hydraulic radius
mass
mass rate of flow
ratio initial-reservoir free gas volume to initial-reservoir oil volume
exponent
total number of moles of a mixture existing in two phases
molecular weight
exponent
total moles of a mixture in the gas state
number of tubes
initial oil in place in reservoir
cumulative oil influx (encroachment)
oil influx (encroachment) during a time period
cumulative oil produced
oil produced during a time period
pressure
external pressure
average pressure
atmospheric pressure
areal weighted pressure
bubble-point (saturation) pressure
pressure at bottom of interval
critical pressure
capillary pressure
casing pressure, flowing
parachor
casing pressure, static
dew-point pressure
dimensionless pressure
pressure at external boundary
pressure at the front of interface
initial pressure
reduced pressure
pressure at standard conditions
separator pressure
pressure at top of interval
xiv
P ,1
Pt
PVL
P,,,
p wf
p w
Q
qD
q,
qo
qw
r
r
R
R
R
R
rn
r,
r,
rw
Re
RL
R.
R..
R11
R,
Raw
RT
R.
0
S
S
sq
Sac
Sa.,.
S0
Sor
SP
SP
S,
S,,,
tubing pressure, flowing

tubing pressure, static
volumetrically weighted pressure
bottom-hole pressure, general
bottom-hole pressure, flowing
bottom-hole pressure, static
volumetric flow rate
dimensionless production rate
gas-production rate
oil-production rate
water-production rate
radial distance
resistance (electrical logging symbol)
producing gas-oil ratio
radius of curvature
universal gas constant (per mole)
resistivity (electrical logging symbol)
dimensionless radial distance
external-boundary radius
oil-field radius
well radius or internal boundary of a cylindrical flow system
resistivity of clay
liberated gas-oil ratio
resistivity of rock saturated with water (electrical logging symbol)
resistivity of shaley sand saturated with water
cumulative gas-oil ratio
solution-gas-oil ratio (gas solubility in oil)
gas solubility in water
total gas-oil ratio
resistivity of water (electrical logging symbol)
degrees Rankine
direction
saturation
standard deviation
gas saturation
critical gas saturation
residual gas saturation
oil saturation
residual oil saturation
internal surface per unit pore volume
shrinkage due to change in pressure
shrinkage due to change in temperature
water saturation
Swc
SW'r'
t
t
T
tD
Tc
T,
Tse
u
v
v
V
V
Vs
v2:
VB
Vm
VP
V.
w
w
W
We
D.W,
W;
D.W;
WP
.6. WP
x
X
y
Y
z
XY
critical water saturation

residual water saturation
temperature, Fahrenheit
time
temperature, 'Rankine
dimensionless time
critical temperature
reduced temperature
temperature, standard conditions
volumetric velocity (flow rate per unit area)
velocity
specific volume
moles of vapor phase
volume
velocity along direction s
velocity along direction x
bulk volume
volume per mole
pore volume
solid volume
width
weight
initial water in place in reservoir
cumulative water influx (encroachment)
water influx (encroachment) during a time period
cumulative water injected
water injected during a time period
cumulative water produced
water produced during a time period
mole fraction of a component in liquid phase
salinity correction factor
mole fraction of a component in vapor phase
salinity of water
mole fraction of a component in mixture
gas deviation factor (compressibility factor, Z ~ PV/nRT)
GREEK LEITER SYMBOLS

a
(alpha) mobility ratio'
fl
'Y
(beta) thermal expansion coefficient

(gamma) specific gravity
1 When the mobilities involved are on opposite sides of an interface, the mobility
ratio is defined as the ratio of the displacing phase mobility to the displaced phase
mobility or as the ratio of the upstream mobility to the downstream mobilit.y.
-----------
xvi
'Yo
"tu
il.
e
~
>.
>.
Au
>-.
Aw
I'
l'u
l'o
l'w
v
p
Pu
P
Pw
"
"r
"'
<l?
'1'
ENGLISH LETTER SYl\.IBOLS
(gamma) oil specific gravity (water ~ 1)

(gamma) gas specific gravity (air ~ 1)
(delta) difference (il.x ~ x, - x 1 or X1 - X2)
(theta) angle
(eta) hydraulic diffusivity (k/cl')
(lambda) mobility (k/ I')
(lambda) lithology factor
(lambda) gas mobility
(lambda) oil mobility
(lambda) water mobility
(mu) viscosity
(mu) gas viscosity
(mu) oil viscosity
(mu) water viscosity
(nu) kinematic viscosity
(rho) resistivity (electrical logging symbol)
(rho) density
(rho) gas density
(rho) oil density
(rho) water density
(sigma) surface tension (interfacial tension)
(sigma) conductivity
(tau) tortuosity
(phi) porosity
(phi, capital) potential
(psi, capital) stream function
SUBSCRIPT LETTER SYMBOLS
av
a
a
a
b
b
B
c
c
c
cf
cp
cs
d
d
average
atmospheric
air
actual
bubble point, or saturation
base conditions
bulk (used with volume only)

capillary (used in P only)
cumulative
critical
casing, flowing (used with pressure only)
critical point
casing, static (used "ith pressure only)
datum
dew point
0
d
D
e
e
f
f
f
f
g
he
i
i
i
L
L
m
m
m
max
min
M
nwt
0
p
p
p
p
p
pv
r
r
r
r
R
R
s
s
s
SC
sp
st
SW
t1 T
differential separation
dimensionless qun.ntity
cumulative influx or encroachment
external boundary conditions
flash separation
front, or interface
formation or rock
flowing
gas
hydrocarbon
initial value, or conditions
ith component, etc.
cumulative injected
laboratory
liquid
mean
mercury
mixture
maximum
minimum
molal
nonwetting
oil
pseudo (preceding)
cumulative produced
pure
perforations
pore (used with volume only)
pore volume
reduced
relative
reservoir
residual
residual
reservoir
gas-oil solution (used in R, only)
shut-in
solid
standard conditions
separator conditions
stock tank
gas-water solution (used in R,w only)
total
xvii
xviii
T
T
if
ts
v
VL
w
wt
w
wf
ws
threshold
tension (used with adhesion tension)
tubing, flowing (used with pressure only)
tubing, static (used with pressure only)
vapor.
volumetric
water
wetting
well conditions
bottom hole, flowing (used with pressure only)

bottom hole, static (used with pressure only)
MATHEMATICAL NOTATIONS
dx
notation of derivative of x
f( )
g( )
In
log
function of
function of
logarithm to the base e (natural logarithm)
logarithm to the base 10 (common logarithm) or with appropriate
subscript to base indicated by subscript.
s
distance along direction of flow
x,y, z notation of coordinate axes in three-dimensional space
ax
notation of partial derivative of x
finite increment
2:
(sigma, capital) summation
ABBREVIATIONS
av
0
API
bbl
cc
cm
cp
cu
ft
FVF
gm
GOC
GOR
gpM
lb
M
MM
Mscf
PI
PSI
res
scf
sec
sep
SG
SPI
sq
STO
woe
average
degrees on the American Petroleum Institute modified Baume

scale for liquids
barrel (oil field, 42 U.S. gallons per barrel)
cubic centimeter
centimeter
centipoise
cubic
feet
oil formation volume factor
gram
gas-oil contact
gas-oil ratio, standard cubic feet per stock-tank barrel
gallons per thousand standard cubic feet
pound
thousands
millions
thousands of standard cubic feet

productivity mdex
pounds per square inch
reservoir
standard cubic feet

second
separator
specific gravity
specific productivity index
square
stock-tank oil
water-oil contact
xix
MODIFYING SIGN
average, or mean, value of a quantity x
CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION
Beginning with the Industrial Revolution of the early nineteenth century, man has turned more and more to the use of mineral fuels to supply
the energy to operate his machines. The first commercial well drilled
solely for oil was completed in the United States in 1859. The drilling was
supervised by Col. Edwin L. Drake; thus the well came to be known as the
Drake Well. Following the success of the Drake Well, petroleum production and processing rapidly grew into a major industry in the United
States. In the early history of the petroleum industry, petroleum products
were largely used for lubricants and for illuminating fuel.
With the development of internal-combustion engines and other devices, the use of petroleum for fuel became increasingly important. In
1900, the total mineral energy production in the United States was 7,643
trillion British thermal units (Btu); of this, 92 per cent came from coal,
about 5 per cent from oil, and 3 per cent from natural gas. By 1925, mineral energy production in the United States reached 21,000 trillion Btu, ol
which 73 per cent was from coal, 21 per cent from oil, and 6 per cent from
natural gas. In 1950, the demand for energy reached 33,000 trillion Btu
in the United States; of this, 45 per cent was supplied by coal, 35 per cent
from oil, and 20 per cent from natural gas. 1*
Through 1956, the cumulative crude-oil production for the world was
95 billion barrels, of which about 55 billion barrels was produced in the
United States. Today, petroleum is used not only as a fuel and a source
of lubricants but as a raw material for many modern industrial materials,
such as paints, plastics, rubber, and so forth.
General Composition of Petroleum
What is petroleum? Petroleum is a mixture of naturally occurring hydrocarbons which may exist in the solid, liquid, or gaseous states, depending
upon the conditions of pressure and temperature to which it is subjected.
Virtually all petroleum is produced from the earth in either liquid or gaseous form, and commonly, these materials are referred to as either crude
oil or natural gas, depending upon the state of the hydrocarbon mixture.
*Superscript numbers refer to references at end of chapter.
1
PETROLEUM RESERVOm ENGINEERING
INTRODUCTION
Crude oil is the material most sought after of these naturally occurring
hydrocarbons, but natural gas is commonly produced along with the crude
oil. In the early years of the petroleum industry, natural gas was considered to be a nuisance and was burned at the well site. In recent years with
the advent of transcontinental transmission lines and petrochemical industries, the demand for natural gas as a fuel and a raw product has increased the value of natural gas to the point where it is no longer a nuisance
but a valuable raw material.
Petroleum consists chemically of approximately 11 to 13 wt % hydrogen
and 84 to 87 wt % carbon. Traces of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, and helium
may be found as impurities in crude petroleum. Although all petroleum is
constituted primarily of carbon and hydrogen, the molecular constitution
of crude oils differs widely. About 18 series of hydrocarbons' have been
recognized in crude petroleum. In Table 1-1 are listed the group formulas
carbon atoms but with word endings and prefixes designating the group to
which the compound belongs. The word ending "ane" designates saturated
hydrocarbons while "ene" designates unsaturated hydrocarbons that have
double bonds between carbon atoms. If more than one double bond exTABLE 1-2. CLA.sSIFICATION OF HYDROCARBONsS
Marsh gas
Gaseous
Natural gas
Petroleum{
Crude oil
Fluid
Mineral tar (asphaltum)

Viscous
Bituminous
Asphaltite
Brea
Gilsonite: uintahite
TABLE 1-1. HYD:aocARBON SERIES FoUND IN PET:aoLEtJMf
Hydrocarbo
No. of
carbon atoms
Pennsylvania
Mid-Continent
California and
Gulf Coast
lid Coal
C,.H21<+2
IO
c.H...,
15
20
25
40
C,.H2n+t
C,.H2,.
C ..H2.. and CJI2n-2
C,.Hta and C..H:z..--'
C..H2n-4 and C..Hi..-8
C,.H2..-1 and C,.H2n--8
50
80
C,.H2n-s
CnH:m-a
30
illi
C,.IL,.+2
CJI2n+2 and C..H:..
C,.H,,._,
C,.H2>1.--'
L"gnite
bbituminous
tuminous
mibituminous
thracite
C,.Ht and C,.H21>+2
c ..~ and C,.H2n-'

C.If,,._,
C,.H2n--'
C.H2n--"
C..H:n-a
C..H:m-tt
CJI:m-12 and C..H:z..-11
C,.ffi,.-t
C,.H,,...,
C,.H2n....s and C,.H2n-u
CJitn-a and C..H2-12
C,.H2n-8 and CnH:i-u
C,.H:z,,.-1a
CJI:z..._14
C..H:..-20
of series identified in petroleum. Of these series, the most commonly encountered are the paraffins, the olefines, the polymethylenes, the acetylenes,
turpenes, and benzenes. Natural gas is composed predominantly of the
lower-molecular weight hydrocarbons of the paraffin series.
Hydrocarbons can be classified into essentially four categories depending
on the structural formula. Two of the categories refer to the structural
arrangement of the carbon atoms in the molecule. These are (1) open
chain and (2) ring or cyclic compounds. The remaining two categories
refer to the bonds between the carbon atoms. These are (1) saturated or
single bond and (2) unsaturated or multiple-bond compounds.
The names of the various individual hydrocarbon molecules are derived
in a systematic fashion from rules established by the International Union
of Chemistry. The established names of the individual hydrocarbons of
the paraffin series are utilized for compounds having the same number of
Kerogen
Bituminous shale
Petroliferous
Mineral wax (ozocerite)
Cereous
ists in unsaturated hydrocarbons, the ending is modified to indicate the

number of double bonds; thus, two double bonds are designated by "diene,"
three double bonds by "triene," etc.
Ring or cyclic compounds are designated by adding the prefix "cyclo"
to the name of the compound as derived from the above rules. However,
the cyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, benzenes, retain the customary names
except that the ending "ene" is used rather than the older form~, benzol,
etc. The structural formulas of various hydrocarbons that have SIX carbon
atoms are shown below. The group name and group formula of each series
are designated
Paraffin (alkane),
c..H211+2
H H H H H H
I I
H-C-C-C-C-C-C-H
H H H H H H
Normal Hexane, CJI14
Olefin (alkene), C.H,,.
H H H H H H
H-C-C-C-C-C~
H H H H
Normal Rexene, CJI1:r
-----
-------
INTRODUCTION
PEI'ROLEUM RE.SERVOm ENGINEERING
Polymethylene (cycloalkane), C,.Hin
H-0
/I
H/
~~
H/
"/ H
0
~
/"
"
Cyclohexane, C6H 12
Benzene, CaH6
Alkadiene, C,.H211-:
H H
H H H
Degrees
API
0-H
I"
H
0-H
H-0
~ /H
H" /
/H
I I
H H
I
H
Hexadiene-1,5, CJI1n
Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons

The detailed analysis of a crude oil is virtually impossible to obtain.
Therefore, crude oils are classified according to their physical properties.
Among the physical properties commonly considered in various classifications are color, refractive index, odor, density, boiling point, freezing point,
flash point, and viscosity. Of these, the most important physical properties from a classification standpoint are the density (specific gravity)
and the viscosity of the liquid petroleum. The specific gravity of liquids
is defined as the ratio of the density of the liquid to the density of water,
both at specified conditions of pressure and temperature.
The specific gravity of crude oils ranges from about 0.75 to 1.01. Since
crude oils are generally lighter tban water, a Baum&.type scale is used in
the petroleum industry. This scale is referred to as the API or (American
Petroleum Institute) scale for crude petroleum and relates the specific
gravity through a modulus to an expression of density called API gravity.
Expressed mathematically
141.5
'Y = 131.5 + 0 API
OAP! = 141.5 - 131.5
or
'Y
where
'Y
is the specific gravity and 0 API is the API gravity. It may be
Degrees Weight
of
of
specific gallon,
lb
gravity
SPECIFIC GRAVITY, A.ND WEIGHT

.
API
of
of
Degrees
API
specific
gallon,
gravity
lb
Weight
of
Degrees
Degrees Weight
Degrees
of
specific
gravity
gallon,
lb
8.962
8.895
8.828
8.762
8.698
8.634
36
37
38
39
40
0.8448
0.8398
0.8348
0.8299
0.8251
7.034
6.993
6.951
6.910
6.870
71
72
73
74
75
0.6988
0.6953
0.6919
0.6886
0.6852
5.817
5.788
5.759
5.731
5.703
1.0000
8.571
8.509
8.448
8.388
8.328
41
42
43
44
45
0.8203
0.8155
0.8109
0.8063
0.8017
6.830
6.790
6.752
6.713
6.675
76
77
78
79
80
0.6819
0.6787
0.6754
0.6722
0.6690
5.676
5.649
5.622
5.595
5.568
11
12
13
14
15
0.9930
0.9861
0.9792
0.9725
0.9659
8.270
8.212
8.155
8.099
8.044
46
47
48
49
50
0.7972
0.7927
0.7883
0.7839
0.7796
6.637
6.600
6.563
6.526
6.490
81
82
83
84
85
0.6659
0.6628
0.6597
0.6566
0.6536
5.542
5.516
5.491
5.465
5.440
16
17
18
19
20
0.9593
0.9529
0.9465
0.9402
0.9340
7.989
7.935
7.882
7.830
7.778
51
52
53
54
55
0.7753
0.7711
0.7669
0.7628
0.7587
6.455
6.420
6.38/i
6.350
6.316
86
87
88
89
90
0.6506
0.6476
0.6446
0.6417
0.6388
5.415
5.390
5.365
5.341
5.316
21
22
23
24
25
0.9279
0.9218
0.9159
0.9100
0.9042
7.727
7.676
7.627
7.578
7.529
56
57
58
59
60
0.7547
0.7507
0.7467
0.7428
0.7389
6.283
6.249
6.216
6.184
6.151
91
92
93
94
95
0.6360
0.6331
0.6303
0.6275
0.6247
5.293
5.269
5.246
5=
5.199
26
27
28
29
30
0.8984
0.8927
0.8871
0.8816
0.8762
7.481
7.434
7.387
7.341
7.296
61
62
63
64
65
0.7351
0.7313
0.7275
0.7238
0.7201
6.119
6.087
6.056
6.025
5.994
96
97
98
99
100
0.6220
0.6193
0.6166
0.6139
0.6112
5.176
5.154
5.131
5.109
5.086
31
32
33
34
35
0.8708
0.8654
0.8602
0.8550
0.8498
7.251
7.206
7.163
7.119
7.076
66
67
68
69
70
0.7165
0.7128
0.7093
0.7057
0.7022
5.964
5.934
5.904
5.874
5.845
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.076
1.068
1.060
1.052
6
7
8
9
10
1.029
1.022
1.014
1.007
C=C-0-0-0=0
I
H
AP!,
PER GALLON OF CRUDE On}
"cf
H" /
TABLE 1-3. RELATION OF
Benzene (aromatic), C..H!n-1
1.044
1.037
-- ---
----
----------
--------
INTRODUCTION
TABLE 1-4. VALUES FOR CONVERTING KINEMATIC VISCOSITY TO
noted that the API gravity yields numbers greater than 10 for all materials
having specific gravities less than 1. Since the density of a liquid is a func-
SAYBOLT UNIVERSAL Vrscos1TY2
Equivalent Saybolt
Universal viscosity, sec
Equivalent Saybolt
Universal viscosity, sec
Kinematic
viscosity,
cs
At 100F
(basic
values,
see Note)
At
130F
At
210F
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
32.6
34.4
36.0
37.6
39.1
32.7
34.5
36.1
37.7
39.2
32.8
34.6
36.3
37.9
39.4
4.55.0
40.7
42.3
40.8
42.4
41.0
42.6
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
45.5
48.7
52.0
55.4
58.8
45.6
48.8
52.1
55.5
58.9
45.8
49.0
52.4
55.8
59.2
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
62.3
65.9
69.6
73.4
77.2
62.4
66.0
69.7
73.5
77.3
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
81.1
85.1
89.2
93.3
97.5
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
Kinematic
viscosity,
cs
31
32
33
34
35
_..\.t 100F
(basic
values,
see Note)
145.3
149.7
154.2
158.7
163.2
130F
At
210F
145.6
150.0
154.5
159.0
163.5
146.3
150.7
155.3
159.8
164.3
At
tion of temperature and pressure, it is necessary to designate standard
conditions for reporting specific grayity and API gravity. The petroleum
industry has adopted as standards a temperature of 60F and atmospheric
pressure. Table 1-3 lists the refationship between API gravity and other
commonly used expressions of the density of petroleum liquids.
The viscosity of crude oil ranges from about 0.3 centipoise for a g'd.Ssaturated oil at reservoir conditions to about 1,000 centipoises for a gasfree crude oil at atmospheric pressure and 100F. Viscosities of crude-oil
and liquid-petroleum products are frequently reported in terms of the time
of efflux, in seconds, of a known volume of liquid through a standardized

orifice. The times reported depend on the instrument employed such as
Saybolt Universal, Saybolt Furol, Engler, or other similar device. The
time of efflux from such instruments has a complex functional relationship
39
40
167.7
172.2
176.7
181.2
185.7
168.0
172.5
177.0
181.5
186.l
168.9
173.4
177.9
182.5
187.0
62.7
66.4
70.l
73.9
77.7
41
42
43
44
45
190.2
194.7
199.2
203.8
208.4
190.6
195.1
199.6
. 204.2
208.8
191.5
196.1
200.6
205.2
209.9
81.3
85.3
89.4
93.5
97.7
81.7
85.7
89.8
94.0
98.2
46
47
48
49
50
213.0
217.6
222.2
226.8
231.4
213.4
218.0
222.6
227.2
231.8
214.5
219.1
223.8
228.4
233.0
101.7
106.0
lI0.3
l14.6
l18.9
101.9
106.2
110.5
114.8
119.1
102.4
106.7
lII.l
l15.4
l19.7
55
60
65
70
254.4
277.4
300.4
323.4
254.9
277.9
301.0
324.0
256.2
279.3
302.5
325.7
123.3
127.7
132.1
136.5
140.9
123.5
127.9
132.4
136.8
141.2
124.2
128.6
133.0
137.5
141.9
Over 70
Saybolt
Saybolt
see = cs
x 4.629
36
37
38
sec =cs
x 4.620
Saybolt
= cs
x 4.652
sec
NOTE: To obtain the Saybolt Universal viscosity eauivalent to a kinematic viscosity

determined at tF, multiply the equivalent Saybolt ~Universal viscosity at 100F by
I + (t - 100)0J)00064; for example, 10 cs at 210F is equivalent to 58.8 X 1.0070 or
59.2 Sa.ybolt Universal seconds at 2I0F.
6
to the kinematic viscosity, which is usually expressed in centistokes. The

absolute viscosity in centipoises is obtained by multiplying the kinematic
viscosity in centistokes by the density of the fluid in grams per cubic centimeter. Table 1-4 gives the relationship between the Saybolt Universal
viscosity and centistokes. Viscosity is dependent on temperature. There-
fore, standard tests with the Saybolt viscosimeter are conducted at 100F.
Other physical properties of liquid petroleum are frequently correlated
with API gravity and viscosity. In general, such correlations have rather
limited application.
Crude oils are frequently classified by "base." The earliest such classification system provided three classifications:
1. Paraffin-base, or oils containing predominantly paraffin series hydrocarbons
2. Asphalt-base, or oils containing predominantly polymethylene or
olefin series hydrocarbons
3. Mixed-base, or oils containing large quantities of both paraffin and
polymethylene series hydrocarbons
The U.S. Bureau of Mines' introduced a somewhat more elaborate system of classification which provides for nine possible classifications. This
system is based on a modified Hempel distillation of the crude oil and upon
the API gravity of certain fractions obtained upon distillation.
The distillation is conducted in two phases: one at atmospheric pressure
and one at an absolute pressure of 40 mm of mercury. The fraction boiling
between 482 and 527F at atmospheric pressure is key fraction 1. The
fraction boiling between 527 and 572F at 40 mm absolute is key fraction 2.
The nine possible classifications of a crude oil are summarized in Table 1-5.
The U.S. Bureau of Mines reported the average results of distillations of
PEI'ROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
TABLE 1-5. U.S. BUREAU OF MINES CLASSIFICATION OF CRUDE 0ILs3
Key fraction 1, F
Key fraction 2, F
Paraffin
40 or lighter
Paraffin-intermediate
Intermediate-paraffin
Intermediate
Intermediate-naphthene
Naphthene-intermediate
Naphthene
40 or lighter
30 or lighter
2()-30
30 or lighter
2()-30
20 or heavier
2()-30
20 or heavier
20 or heavier
30 or lighter
Oil
Para:ffin-naphthene
N aphthene-paraffin
33-40
33-40
33-40
33 or heavier
33 or heavier
40 or lighter
33 or heavier
303 crude-oil samples from throughout the world. These results appear in
Table 1-6. Analyses of this type are useful in evaluating crude oils for refining purposes. Note that of the 303 samples analyzed, 109 samples are
classified as intermediate and 83 samples are naphthene base.
Natural gas is composed largely of hydrocarbons of the paraffin series.
Methane and ethane frequently comprise 80 to 90 per cent by volume of a
natural gas. Other hydrocarbons, ranging in molecular weight from 44
(propane) to in excess of 142 (decane), together with impurities compose
the remaining percentage. Carbon dioxide, nitrogen, and hydrogen sulfide
are the more common impurities found in natural gas. Helium and other
inert rare gases occasionally occur in small concentrationf? in natural gases.
Gas gravity is widely used to characterize natural gases. Gas gravity is
the ratio of the density of a gas at atmospheric pressure and temperature
to the density of air at the same condition of pressure and temperature.
Since at atmospheric pressure and temperature the densities of gases are
directly proportional to the molecular weight, the gravity is the ratio of
the molecular weight of the gas to the molecular weight of air. The molecular weight of methane is 16. Therefore, the gravity of pure methane is
0.55 or 16 + 29. Gas gravities for natural gases range from 0.6 to 1.1, depending on the relative concentration of the heavier hydrocarbons present
in the gas.
Compositional analyses of natural gases are readily obtained by lowtemperature distillation, chromatography, or mass spectrometry. Volume
or mole percentages of the individual components present are ordinarily
reported through heptanes plus. The heptanes-plus fraction includes heptane and all heavier hydrocarbons.
Natural gases are also described as dry or wet gases depending on the
amount of condensable hydrocarbons present in the mixture. Pentane
and heavier components are considered to be condensable hydrocarbons,
as at atmospheric pressure and temperature pure pentane exists as a liquid.
"'
"'
"'.,,
oci c:i
--
<a
.,,
oci
"'
1~
.....
co
00
u;;
co
u;;
~i.q
10""1"
ai
oci
"'
1~
"'
"'
0
10
PETROLEUM BESE&VOIR ENGINEERING
The lighter hydrocarbons-methane, ethane, propane, and butane-exist

in the gaseous state at atmospheric conditions.
Origin of Petroleum
Petroleum is a mineral substance and is produced from the earth. How,
then, does petroleum exist in the earth? The liquid or gas, as the case
might be, is contained in the pore space or interstices of rock materiais.
These rock materials are referred to as rE:Servoir rocks. The rocks in which
petroleum is found are sedimentary materials, generally sandstones or

limestones. Crude petroleum has been found at various depths throughout
the great sedimentary basins of the earth at depths as shallow as 40 and
as deep as 21,000 ft. Crude oil and natural gas are produced from oil
and/or gas reservoirs by a number of well bores drilled to the reservoir
rock. It is well known that oil and gas do not underlie all the surface of
the earth but rather are found in localized accumulations under certain
conditions of geologic environment.
Two questions, in general, arise in considering the distribution of petroleum accumulations. One, what is the origin of petroleum; the other, what
geologic conditions are required in order that the oil or gas can accumulate
in a localized area? Many theories of the origin of petroleum have been

advanced. As yet, a definite solution of the problem has not been obtained.
The theories of the origin of petroleum may be classified as either inorganic
or as organic. The inorganic theories attempt to explain the formation of
petroleum by assuming chemical reactions among water, carbon dioxide,
and various inorganic substances, such as carbides and carbonates, in the
earth. The organic theories assume that petroleum evolved from decomposition of vegetable and animal organisms that lived during previous
geologic ages. The various theories of petroleum formation are summarized
in Table 1-7.
Although some of the inorganic theories appear to be plausible and, in
fact, petroleum can be produced in the laboratory by reactions of inorganic
materials, geologic evidence indicates that these materials are not present
in the earth in sufficient quantities to produce petroleum accumulations.
In general, scientists have abandoned the inorganic theory as untenable.
The organic theory, conversely, is supported by much geologic evidence.
Oil and gas are commonly found in sedimentary basins, and furthermore,
these accumulations are found in the vicinity of beds which contain large
amounts of organic matter. Beds which are rich in organic material are
called source beds.
To have a petroleum accumulation it is necessary to have source beds
and a reservoir or storage bed. A suitable reservoir rock is porous and
permeable. That is, the pores interconnect so that fluids can migrate
through the rock. The occurrence of petroleum further indicates that the
"o.- -:ab
.
-5~
"-"
0 d
-os
s~
z~
-" 0
-~
.. 0
~]
-"
~d
;io
"'
-
d
0
""
"""
>
~ >,
oo
~
~
.s
d
0
0
>
i:: b
do
.;~
o~
s=
az
>.~
-~
~~
0
0
-~
_.g b
- >,
> g
..
~~
00
~] g
=d~
;:;
11
-a
>,
"'~~~
- 0
-.
~r5b
""5b;::
.0
l'il
:0 >,
.;J
,g
~""
.~
~:-~
c:oo""' !!
~:S g
~
<Cl
~<*
&'ii 2> E
o-.o+>
""'d""'
-g_g~s
:i;
:i;
----.--
12
petroleum must migrate from the source beds to the reservoir rock in order
that sufficient quantities accumulate to form the commercial deposits that
the petroleum industry exploits. This evidence of migration indicates a
third requirement: a carrier bed. The carrier bed may be a part of the
reservoir rock in which the accumulation occurs, or it may be an adjacent
reservoir rock having interconnected pores.
4. Monocline-homocline flexure
5. Plunging syncline
6. Absence of controlling structural
Figure 1-1 shows elementary reservoir traps in sectional view.

The structural environment indicators are as follows:
1. Dome and anticline, representing the most important types of uplifts
in reservoir structures
2. Structural salient, nose, arch, or promontory
3. Structural terrace or platform
Pinchout refers to the wedging out of the formation against another.
condition~
Figure 1-2 presents contours of structural environments.
A complete classifica-tion, then, of a petroleum trap is a combination of
Traps
The primary forces causing the migration of petroleum are bouyancy
and capillarity. As oil and gas are lighter than the ground water which
permeates the porous rocks below the water table, it is evident that the
upward movement of petroleum must be restricted in order that accumulations exist at depth. A natural barrier, or trap, must exist for a petroleum accumulation to form. Traps associated. with oil fields are, in general,
complex.
Wilhelm' proposed a classification system for traps which differentiates
between factors indicating the structural environment of a reservoir in an
area and the actual attitude or situation of the reservoir bed. The classification system is expressed by means of a group of structural environment
indicators and by a group of trap indicators.
Trap indicators are grouped as follows:
A. Convex trap reservoirs, which are completely surrounded by edgewater, as the porosity extends in all directions beyond the reservoir areas.
The reservoir peripheries are therefore defined by uninterrupted edgewater
limits. The trap is due to convexity alone.
B. Permeability trap reservoirs, with a periphery partly defined by edgewater and partly by the barrier resulting from the loss of permeability in
the reservoir layer. In the extreme case, the reservoir may be entirely surrounded by such a permeability barrier.
C. Pinchout* trap reservoirs, with the periphery partly defined by edgewater and partly by the margin due to the pinchout of the reservoir bed.
F. Fault trap reservoirs, with the periphery partly defined by edgewater
and partly by a fault boundary.
G. Piercement trap reservoirs, with the periphery partly defined by
edgewater and partly by piercement contact.
13
INTRODUCTION
PETROLEUM RESERVOffi ENGINEERING
~~
"' ~ '"
(C)
lei
{d)
!di
(el
!fl
(g)
~]
{f)
rnmtrnf:t(
Porous bed
F1G. 1-1. Elementary traps in

sectional view. (a) Simple
convex trap (by folding); (b)
simple convex trap (by differential thickness); (c) permeability trap; ( d) pinchout
trap; (e) fault trap; (f) piercement trap. (From Wilhelm."-)
FrG. 1-2. Contours of structural environments. (a) Dome; (b) anticline; (c)
piercement salt dome; (d) structural
salient; (e} structural terrace; (f} monocline; (g.} plunging syncline. (From Wilhelm:'}
one of the elementary reservoir traps and one of the structural environment indicators. That is, the structure in the area in which the trap exi>3ts
defines the structural environment; the actual attitude or configuration of
a petroleum reser-roir determines the trap clas.....tjfication. Some reservoirs,
14
of course, a.re complex and result from a combination of two or more of the
elementary trap features.
For an accumulation of oil or gas to exist, there must be closure* in the
trap. The classification ~ystem discussed recognizes this requirement for
closure and further recognizes that the reservoir rock must be overlain by
impermeable beds so that oil or gas accumulation cannot seep from the
trap and migrate to higher beds in the stratigraphic sequence. The classification system allows differentiation between an oil field and a reservoir.
An oil field is defined simply by its areal extent on the surface of the ground,
while a petroleum reservoir involves a continuity of reservoir rock and
fluid. An oil field may encompass several oil reservoirs.
In general, in petroleum exploration, it is possible to evaluate and define
structural environment indicators from geophysical and regional geologic
information. Furthermore, it is possible to define from such information
some of the trap indicators, such as a convex trap, a fault trap, or a piercement trap. The permeability trap and the pinchout trap, however, are
disclosed only by the drill. Even though traps exist, there is no assurance
that a commercial petroleum accumulation exists. A trap is a necessary
but not sufficient condition for a petroleum accumulation. Therefore, not
a.11 traps form petroleum reservoirs.
Distribution of Hydrocarbon Fluids in Traps
Porous rocks are fluid-permeated, containing oil, gas, or water. Gravitational and capillary forces largely control the distribution of these fluids
in petroleum accumulations.
The gravitational forces cause the less dense fluids to seek the higher
positions in the trap. Capillary forces tend to cause a wetting fluid to rise
into pore space containing a nonwetting fluid. Water, in general, is a
wetting fluid with respect to oil and gas, and oil is a wetting fluid with
respect to gas. Capillarity tends to counteract the force of gravity in
segregating the fluids. Prior to the disturbance of the accumulation, an
equilibrium exists between the capillary and gravitational forces.
Typical fluid distributions resulting from the equilibrium of these forces
are shown schematically by sectional views of a domal trap in Fig. 1-3.
Also illustrated in the figure are the possible modes of occurrence of gas:
(1) solution gas, (2) associated free gas, (3) nonassociated free gas.
The accumulation of crude oil is shown in Fig. l-3a. At the conditions
of pressure and temperature existing in the trap, only oil and water are
present. The oil is accumulated in the top of the trap and is underlain by
water. Between the oil zone and the water zone, an oil-water transitional
zone exists. The pore space of the rock in the oil zone contains a small
amount of water (commonly called connate water). The fraction of the
*Closure is the height between the lowermost closed contour and the top of the trap.
15
INTRODUCTION
pore space occupied by water increases with ~epth in the transitional zone
so that the base of the transitional zone is delineated by completel.y
water-saturated pore space. Natural gas initially occurs in such a reservoir
only as solution gas.
Oil- wafer
~.,
transiflon zone
_ _1~::
tronstf1on zone~~~~~~.;:~,
1~~""'''''
(C)
FIG. 1-3. Sketch showing typical fluid di~tributions in hy~rocarbon reserv?irs (a) Oil
-P,servoir; (b) associated oil-gas reservoir; (c) nonassoc1ated gas reservoir.
An accumulation in which both crude oil (liquid phase) and natural ?as
(free gas phase) occur at the conditions of pressure and tem~erature _exist;n~ in the trap is shown in Fig. I-3b. The natural gas occup~es the highest
position of the trap and for:r:is a Hgas cap.". The crude 011 occupies an
intermediate position and is, Ill turn, underlain by water.
Transitional zones are shown both between the gas and the oil and between the oil and water. These are zones of variable saturation in the wetting and nonwetting fluids. Connate ~ate: exists in the gas ca~ as _well as
in the oil zone. The natural gas occumng in such an accu~ula~1on is co~
prised of the associated free gas in the gas cap and the solut10n gas d1&solved in the crude oil.
----
16
---
An accumulation of only natural gas is shown in Fig. 1-3c. The gas zone
is underlain by a gas-water transitional zone and water. The gas zone contains connate water, which increases with depth in the transitional zone to
complete water saturation in the water zone. The gas in this accumulation
is nonassociated gas, as no crude oil exists in the accumulation.
17
INTRODUCTION
classified sandstones into ortboquartzite, graywacke, and arkose. An orthoquartzite is a sedimentary quartzite developed as a result of excessive
silicification without the impress of metamorphism and is comprised primarily of quartz and other stable minerals. The cementing material is
Sandstone
100%
The hydrocarbon fluids which occur in a given trap depend on unknown

factors involved in the origin and accumulation of the hydrocarbons. The
fluids which occur in a trap may be disclosed only by the drill.
Shaly sandstone
Limy sandstone
Lithology of Petroleum Reservoirs

A petroleum reservoir may be defined according to Uren' as:
: .. a body of porous and permeable rock containing oil and gas through which
flwds n:8'Y move toward recovery openings under the pressures existing or that may
be applied. All communicating pore space within the productive formation is properly a part of the rock, which may include several or many individual rock strata
and may encompass bodies of impermeable and barren shale. The lateral expanse
of such a reservoir is contingent only upon the continuity of pore space and the
ability of the fluids to move through the rock pores under the pressures available.
It is appropriate therefore in the study of petroleum-reservoir engineering to review briefly some of the rocks with which engineers must deal.
Virtually all oil- and gas-bearing rocks are sedimentary in origin. Therefore, this discussion is confined to sedimentary rocks. While it is possible
to classify sedimentary materials according to their mineralogical composition or other similar classifications, it is convenient to blassify them according to their origin. Two major subdivisions, then, can be considered: the
Sandy limestone
Limestone
100"/o
L.------..---....,--.,..-,---'
Shaly limestone
Limy shale
Shale
100/o
F1G. 1-4. Three-component diagram of sedimentary rock constituents. (From Vance_.)
primarily carbonate or silica, and the orthoquartzites are relatively clean

sediments, that is, free from shales and clay. Figure 1-5 shows the composition of quartzite sediments and the minerals present in such a rock material. Such sediments, according to Krynine, are derived from relatively
dominant'.y fragmental sediments and the partly fragmental, partly precipitated sediments. The dominantly fragmental sediments can conveniently
be subdivided according to textural considerations into the conglomerates
sandstones, siltstones, and shales, or mudstones. Of these materials, sand~

stones are the most important reservoir rock material. Limestones and
dolomites are important petroleum reservoir rocks which are partly fragmental, partly precipitated in origin. Limestones and dolomites may be of
mechanical or chemical origin or may be developed as a result of both
processes of deposition.
1:-:=-:~I Quartz groins
[IlDJ Secondary SiOz overgrowth

~Dolomite
W~~?;f
Pyrite
CJ
Pore space
The three most common sedimentary rocks associated with petroleum
0.1 0.2 0.3
reservoirs are sandstone, shale, and limestone. In fact, these sedimentary

rocks are so common in the subsurface with respect to petroleum reservoirs
that it is convenient to think of all the sedimentary rocks as being com-
Scale in mm
posed of these materials. Figure 1-4 shows litho!ogic relationship of these

common rock materials. The nomenclature used is common to the oil field
and indicates the gradation from one type of rock to another.

sa:idstones can further be divided into three classifications with respect
to ongm, as proposed by Krynine' and described by Pirson.' Kyruine has
FIG. 1-5. Dolomite quartzite of Wilcox, Okla., oil-sand type. (From Pirson.')
low-lying coastal plains bordered by shallow seas in periods of quiescence.

In general, quartzites are extensive in area and, owing to the relative quiescence of the depositional environment, are usually quite uniform. Local
variation in properties may be due to secondary cementation with gypsum,
---
18
----
19
PETROLEUM RESERVom ENGINEERING
INTRODUCTION
glauconite, or other such material. The idealized conditions giving rise to

orthoquartzite sediments are illustrated in Fig. 1-6.
The second subdivision of sandstones is graywacke, which is composed
of large angular grains, mainly quartz, feldspar, and rock fragments. The
The Frio formation of the Gulf Coast of Texas and Louisiana is a typical
graywacke.
An arkose or arkosic sandstone contains 25 per cent or more feldspar
---.--Contrnentol shelf---
and occur as numerous thin sand bodies in a thick sequence of sediments.
- - - Land of low relief --+-
Old sediments
Coast line
Scale in mm
FIG. 1-6. Idealized land and sea conditions which give rise to quartzose-type sediments. (From Pirson.i)
cementing materials are clays and carbonate. The land and sea conditions
which give rise to graywacke-type sediments are depicted in Fig. 1-7.
Note that the land from which the sediments are derived is of moderate
relief. Because of the more rapid erosion and transport of the rock fragments from the land area to the site of deposition, a greater variety of rock
-Land of moderate
relief~
Old sediments
Short
-+---Geosyncline
-+-continental shelf-+-
Sond bar.
Thin limestone
_ ... -
,,,....
Metamorphic
,.., "'basement
,,,.
~ complex """ ""
v
~
Fro. 1-7. Idealized land and sea conditions which give rise to graywacke-type sediments. (From Pirson.8 )
fragments remains unaltered than in an orthoquartzite. Figure 1-8 illustrates the rocks and rock materials comprising a typical graywacke such
as encountered in the Gulf Coast area. Note in particular the occu~ence
of clay and other micaceous material. Illite is believed to be the principal
clay mineral occurring in graywacke. Graywackes are frequently lenticular
C::J Quartz
~ Carbonate
t~:!!fr~~ Chert
c=J Pore space
~.,.! Micoceous "clayey pasteH
~ Mica flake
EIEJ
l.c:rzllll
Quartzite fragment
l~ol Phyllite fragment

!Hite replacing quartz
F1a. 1-8. Graywacke of the Bradford and Guif Eocene oil-sand type. (From Pirson.8 )
derived from acid igneous rock. Arkose is usually coarse grained and is
derived from lands of steep relief during periods of intense diastrophism.
Since transport of the materials from the uplands to the site of deposition
is relatively rapid, many unstable minerals do not decompose. The cementing material is chiefly clay containing a large percentage of kaolinite but
also high proportions of reactive clays, such as montmorillonite. The
sediments are characterized by thick sections of poorly sorted material.
Because of the poor sorting and the variety of minerals composing arkose,
the physical properties of the rock are quite variable. Figure 1-9 illustrates
the conditions giving rise to arkosic sediments, while Fig. 1-10 illustrates
the minerals and rock materials comprising a typical arkose. Note the
poor sorting and the relative angularity of the materials comprising an
arkose.
Limestones, dolomites, and other carbonate reservoir rock materials are
frequently derived by precipitation. Limestones are typically extensive
and massive. A pure limestone or dolomite rarely occurS-owing to the
presence of varying amounts of detrital material. Carbonate reservoir
rocks can be divided into the following lithologic types: oolitic limestone,
limestone, chalk, dolomitic limestones, dolomites, and cherty limestones
and dolomites. Of these materials the physical properties of only the oolitic
limestone are largely determined by the depositional environment. The
remaining carbonate rocks are largely finely crystalline, and their physical
properties depend greatly on such processes as deformation and solution
after deposition. A limestone has little resistance to tension, and when it
20
INTRODUCTION
is subjected to tension forces, fractures develop, thus allowing subsurface

waters to percolate through those fractures, subjecting the carbonate material to processes of secondary solution and deposition.
Shales are of little importance as reservoir rocks but comprise a large
~lend
of step relief-.,
Ve!'}'-short or
non existent
continental shelf
- - - - Deep geosyncline ---~-...LSeo level
- -- ,,,.
--
.....
Metomcirphic
basement
complex
FrG. 1-9. Idealized

land and sea conditions which give rise to arkose-type sediments.
(From Pirson.8 )
~- ~
1~-:- .) Quartz
W't
~
~ 0 o@
- MicmcHne (fresh)
~
rt:JI& ==:~iii~close
Microcline (weathered)
~Po?
.
CJ ~~~:;;0::teriol
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Scale in mm
FIG. 1-10. Arkose of the Stevens, Calif., oil-sand type. (From Pirson.8 )
proportion of the caprock or impermeable seals which are necessary for

any petroleum reservoir. Shales are quite fine-grained and offer high resistance to migration of fluids. Since shales behave as plastics under loading, fracturing occurs infrequently.
Wilhelm' presented the following list of reservoir rocks:
21
LIST OF RESERVOIR ROCKS

L Sand, conglomeratic sand, and gravel in varying state of consolidation,
porosity due to fragmental textures, common
a. Clean sands, etc., pore space between sand grains uncontaminated
b. Argillaceous sands, etc., pore space partly filled with argillaceous
matter
c. Silty sands, etc., pore space partly filled with silt
d. Lignitic sands, etc., pore space partly filled with lignitic matter
e. Bentonitic sands, pore space partly filled with volcanic ash
2. Porous calcareous sandstone and siliceous sandstone, porosity due to
incomplete cementation, frequent
3. Fractured sandstone and fractured conglomerate, porosity due to
fracturing in tight sandstones or hard conglomerates caused by fault.
ing or sharp folding, infrequent
4. Arkosic (feldspathic) sand, arkose, arkosic conglomerate (granite
wash), porosity due to fragmental texture, infrequent
5. Detrital limestone (calcitic and dolomitic), porosity due to fragmental
texture and frequently increased by solution, comm.on
6. Porous crystalline limestone (calcitic and dolomitic), porosity due
mainly to solution, common
7. Cavernous crystalline limestone (calcitic and dolomitic), porosity due
to strong solution effect 3, common. Note: 5, 6, and 7 are not sharply
separable
8. Fractured limestone (calcitic, dolomitic, and siliceous), porosity due to
open fissures along fracture patterns, frequent
9. Sugary dolomite, "saccharoidal" porosity possibly due to volume
shrinkage in the process of formation of dolomite from calcitic sediment, common
10. Oolitic limestone, porosity due to oolitic tenure with uncemented or
partially cemented interstices, frequent
11. Coquina and shell breccia, porosity due to fragmental texture, infrequent
12. Crinoidal limestone, a variety of coquina, porosity due to fragmental
texture, infrequent
13. Porous cap rock on shallow salt plugs, porosity due to solution, infrequent
14. Honeycombed anhydrite, porosity due to leaching, rare
15. Fractured shale, porosity due to fracturing of brittle siliceous shale
under sharp folding, rare
16. Fractured chert, porosity due to fracturing under sharp folding, rare
17. Porous tectonic breccia, formed along fault and thrust zones, porosity
mainly due to incomplete cementation or subsequent solution, rare
22
23
INTRODUCTION
PETROLEUM RF.SERVOm ENGINEERING
18. Contact-metamorphic shales, porosity due to volume shrinkage after

"baking," rare
19. Porous igneous rock, porosity primary as in tuffs or due to fract~
as in basalt or due to decomposition, rare
The references-common, frequent, infrequent, rare=-following each

major rock type indicate the relative frequency of occurrence.
It is apparent that as the formations are penetrat:'1, the fluids contained

within those formations may readily enter the well bore, since the ~ressure
in the bore hole is only that of a low head of fluid. It is necessary m many
SHEAVES
CROWN SLOCK
Drilling
on and gas are producea from the earth by means of wells drilled to the
reservoir rock. Any drilling method must meet two requirements: (1) a
means of breaking or abrading the formations to be penetrated and (2) a
means of removing the cuttings or the rock fragments which are produced
in the drilling operation. Although many methods may be conceived which
can accomplish these two purposes, oil-well drilling has been restricted
largely to two methods. These methods may be identified as (1) churn
drilling and (2) rotary drilling. A third category is sometimes included, a
combination of the two foregoing drilling methods.
Cable-tool Drilling
While there are many variations of the churn-drilling method, that commonly used in the United States is known as cable-tool drilling. Approximately 15 per cent of all the holes drilled in the United States each year
are drilled by the cable-tool method. Cable-tool drilling is used to a great
extent in the Appalachian area. The cable-tool rigs used are spudders,
drilling machines, or American Standard cable-tool rigs. The principal
components of the cable-tool drilling rig together with a sectional view of
the hole with the drilling tools are shown in Fig. 1-11. The drilling tools
are comprised of ?- bit, a drill stem, jars, and rope socket suspended on a
wire rope. To drill, the tools are lowered to the bottom of the hole and the
drilling line attached to the walking beam which imparts a reciprocating
motion to the tools. This reciprocating motion causes the tools to strike
repeated blows on the formations at the bottom of the hole, thus causing
breaking or abrading of the formation by a simple pounding or chipping
action. After a certain amount of material has been broken from the formation, the drilling motion is interrupted and the drilling tools are removed
from the hole.
After the tools l1ave been retrieved to the surface and set back, a bailer
is lowered into the hole to remove the broken formation material or cuttings. Water is added to the hole periodically as drilling progresses. Thus
the cuttings in cable-tool drilling are suspended in a thin mud slurry. In
" cable-tool drilling, the fluid to suspend the cuttings is maintained at a low
level, only partially filling the hole. More effective blows are struck by
the tools if a low head of fluid is maintained during the drilling operation.
B""L
WHEEL
CASLE
ROPE
TOOL
SOCKET
JOINT
JARS
TOOL
DRIL?.
JOINT ~STEM
t-SlT
FIG. 1-11. Principal components of a cable-tool drilling rig with drilling tools in the
hole. (From Uren.9 )
areas to insert casing in the hole as the drilling operation pro~eed~ to

exclude water from the well bore in order that the hole be mamtamed
relatively free of fluid and the drilling operation be unimpeded. In cable-
tool drilling, commercial oil- or gas-bearing sands are indicated by the

entry of oil and gas into the well bore. For many engineering and geological purposes, however, the mere
knowledge of the presence of oil
and gas is not sufficient. Certain
physical measurements are required
on the reservoir rock material.
Circulation holes
The cuttings from normal drilling
operations are quite small. In addiA
Bock pressure valve
tion, materials such as shales and
open on upstroke
clays, which may be included in the
rocks penetrated, become readily
dispersed in water. Two techniques
are used in cable-tool drilling to
obtain larger formation samples.
The first is cable-tool coring; the
second is chip coring. Cable-tool
coring is conducted by attaching to
the string of tools, not a bit, but a
cable-tool core banel, such as the
Baker cable-tool core barrel illustrated in Fig. 1-12. The Baker
cable-tool core barrel is composed
of an inner barrel and an outer
barrel. The drilling motion drives
the inner barrel into the formation
while causing the outer barrel to
excave formation from around the
inner barrel, allo,ving a cylindrical
section of rock to enter the inner
barrel. The core barrel is approximately IO ft in length. After that
amount of formation has been cut,
the core barrel is retrieved to the
surface, where the cylindrical core
is extruded from the inner core
barrel.
Chip coring utilizes a bit specially
Fm. 1-12. Baker cable-tool core barrel. sharpened to wedge point so that,
(Cour)tesy of the Baker Oil Tool Com- in the drilling action, the fragments
pany.
d will be someof f ormat1ons

obtaine
what larger than those obtained during the regular drilling motion. In addition, the hole is bailed more frequently with a device known as a sand
25
pump. The sand pump is so designed that a suction is created to aid in
INTRODUCTION
picking up rock fragments contained in the well bore.

While core samples represent satisfactorily the physical properties of
the formations penetrated, the fluid contents of the core are not those of
the undisturbed rock. The core has been subjected to two processes \vhich
disturb the fluid contents of the rock. The processes are (I) pressure reduction, allo,ving the fluids contained 'vithin the formation to expand and
be expelled from the core, and (2) flushing by the drilling fluid as the contents of the rock tend to come to pressure equilibrium with the well bore
fluid. If the rock contains gas and oil and the well fluid is W'1ter, the water
will tend to enter the rock and occupy space voided by oil or gas. Thus,
the core sample obtained does not contain the original reservoir fluid.
Rotary Drilling
The rotary drilling method has, in the last fifty years, largely supplanted
the cable-tool drilling method in the United States. About 85 per cent of
the wells drilled in the United States are drilled by the rotary method. As
its name implies, the rotary drilling method utilizes the rotational motion
of a bit operating in the hole to break or abrade the formations. This bit
is attached by means of one or more drill collars to a string of drill pipe
which extends to the surface. At the surface, a rotary motion is imparted
to the drill pipe by means of a rotary table and a special joint of pipe
known as the Kelly joint. The cuttings are removed from the hole by means
of a circulating fluid, commonly a water-base fluid or drilling mud. In
normal circulation, the drilling fluid is pumped down through the Kelly
joint, drill pipe, and the bit, returning to the surface in the annular space
between the drill pipe and the wall of the hole. The cuttings are transported t.o the surface by the circulating fluid in the annular space. A
typical rotary rig is shown in Fig. 1-13.
In contrast to cable-tool drilling, the hole in rotary drilling is filled with
a fluid. This fluid exerts a hydrostatic pressure on the formations penetrated which is much greater than the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the
relatively low head of fluid used in cable-tool drilling. The formation, as
it is drilled, is broken into small fragments and can be recovered at the
surface from the drilling fluid. It may be noted that these cuttings are
subjected to flushing throughout their transport from the bottom of the
hole to the surface, and in fact, owing to the pressure exerted by the column
of drilling fluid, there is flushing ahead of the bit. Also, the cuttings are
aubjected to pressure reduction as they rise in the drilling fluid and are
brought to the surface. Therefore, cuttings obtained from rotary drilling
are flushed in the same fashion essentially as are the cuttings from cabletool drilling. In the normal course of rotary drilling, the formation fluids
cannot enter the well bore, as the hydrostatic pressure of the mud column
26
27
PETROLE"CM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
INTRODUCTION
is greater than formational fluid pressures. Therefore, it is possible to drill

through oil- and gas-bearing formations without detecting them in the
course of drilling.
Rotary drilling fluids can be grouped into three broad categories, de-
fluid. When a porous formation is penetrated, the dispersed solids form a

filter cake which restricts the entry of the drilling fluid into the formation.
A portion of the liquid phase, however, is filtered out in forming the cake.
This liquid phase is called filtrate
and is 'vater and oil for water-base
and oil-base muds, respectively.
The formation cuttings are flushed
primarily with filtrate.
In order to obtain samples of
sufficient size for the measurement
of physical properties of the formation rock, it is necessary in rotary
drilling to core the formations.
There are essentially two types of
{b)
rotary coring devices: (I) the
bottom-hole type device and (2) the
side-wall-type device. The bottomhole coring device, as the name implies, is used to core formations as
the hole is drilled deeper. The sidewall coring device is used to obtain
samples of formations that have
previously been penetrated by the
drill. Figure 1-14 shows a conventional rotary core barrel used for
bottom-hole coring. This type of
device obtains a sample approximately 3 in. in diameter and up to
!cl
70 ft in length. Side-wall coring
devices, however, obtain smaller
{al
samples, ranging from about~ in.
in diameter and 2 in. long to about F1a. 1-14. Rotary core barrel and bits.
(a) Core barrel; (b) hard-formation cut1 in. in diameter and about 6 in. ter head; (c) soft-formation cutter head.
long. It is apparent that cores cut (Courtesy of the Hughes Tool Company.)
either with bottom-hole coring
devices or with side-wall coring devices are subjected to the same processes
that the cuttings are subjected to, that is, flushing and expulsion of fluids
on pressure reduction. In the early 1940s, a pressure core barrel was developed in order to investigate the original fluid contents of formations cut
with rotary core barrels. Numerous field tests with the pressure core
barrel proved that flushing occurred ahead of the bit.
A more detailed discussion of drilling methods and drilling fluids is included in other texts such as Uren' and Brantly.a
Rotary table
Drow works
Mud-flow lines
Arrows iildicote direction

of mud flow
F'1G.
1-13. Rotary drilling rig. (Adapted from "Primer of Oil Well Drilling." 10)
pending upon the base of the drilling fluid. These categories are (1) waterbase fluids, (2) oil-base fluids, and (3) air or gas in the order of frequency of
use. Both water-base and oil-base muds consist of a continuous liquid
phase, the base, and dispersed solids. The dispersed solids increase the
density of the fluid and impart desirable colloidal properties to the mud
28
29
INTRODUCTION
In rotary-drilled wells, examination of the cuttings and core samples

is not sufficient to evaluate fully the formations penetrated. Various
"logging" methods, such as electrical logging and radioactive logging,
yield additional information useful to the engineer and geologist. These
devices reflect physical properties of the formations and of the formation
fluids. Therefore, it is possible to identify the lithologic units penetrated
by the drill and further to evaluate the fluid content of these formations.
The evidence on fluid contents as determined from cores and from logging
methods can further be confirmed by use of the drill-stem test. The drillstem test is essentially a means of making a temporary completion using
the drill pipe. By making such a temporary completion, the hydrostatic
head of drilling fluid may be relieved from the formation and the formation
fluids allowed to produce under control into the drill pipe.
removing the water from the well stream. Water is removed by gunbarrel
or other types of water knockouts and then siphoned off from the liquid
petroleum. The generalized production system for an oil well is shown in
Fig. 1-15.
Well Completion and Production

After the oil- or gas-bearing formation has been identified, in the case
either of cable-tool or rotary drilling, it is necessary to complete the \Vell.
To complete the well, a string of casing is ordinarily run to or through the
formation of interest. The string of casing is simply steel pipe of sufficient
diameter that operations can be conducted within it. The casing supports
the walls of the well, excludes fluids from intervals other than that in which
it is desired to produce, and confines the produced fluids to the '\Vell bore.
The annular space between the wall of the well bore and the outside of the
casing is commonly filled with cement. If the casing has been set through
a formation, it is necessary to perforate the casing and the cement in the
annular space so that the fluid contained within the objective formation
can enter the well bore. In addition to the string of casing, an auxiliary
and smaller string of pipe is usually suspended in the string of casing. This
string is referred to as the tubing and is used to conduct the produced fluids
to the surface. Fluid from oil wells may be expelled to the surface by the
available energy of the reservoir fluids or may be artificially lifted. The
reservoir pressure and gas in solution determine the available energy.
Artificial lift is accomplished either by pumping or by introducing extraneous gas into the well bore to gas-lift the fluid.
Since the fluid produced from an oil well is comprised of both crude oil
and natural gas, provisions must be made at the surface for separating the
fluids when they are obtained. The fluid normally flows from the well
head to an oil and gas separator, '\Vhere the gas is separated from the oil.
The oil is then conducted to stock tanks for lease storage. The gas is normally gathered and sent to a gasoline plant, where it is processed further
into liquid components and into residue gas, which is either returned to
the formation or sold for fuel. Quantities of water are also normally produced during the life of a well. Therefore, provisions must be made for
Gun barre! tonk
Gos-oil separator
Wei! head
Oil,
woter
L'='~t.F-To
gos
pipeline
Oil, water
Oi! to
pipeline
Well stream
gos, oil, water mixture
___
,,,--..........
Qi I reservoir
FrG. 1-15. Generalized production system. (Adapted from "Primer of Oil and Gas
Production." 12)
Crude oil is normally gauged in the stock tanks in which it is gathered

and stored after being separated from the gas and water with which it may
have been produced. Crude-oil production in the United States is reported
in barrels of stock-tank oil. An oil field barrel is defined as 42 U.S. gal. The
standard conditions for reporting oil volumes are 60F and atmospheric
pressure.
The gas off the separator is ordinarily metered by means of an orifice
meter and is reported in cubic feet at standard conditions of pressure and
temperature. Standard conditions for gas measurement are defined by
statute in the various states but approximates atmospheric pressure and
temperature. In Table 1-8, statutory standards are shown for several
states. In most fields, the stock-tank vapors, that is, gas released from the
oil in the stock tank, is not measured, so that the measured gas volumes
reflect the volume of gas produced from the separator. Water, of course,
is an extraneous fluid of no value and is rarely measured with precision.
Water volumes are reported in barrels. Accurate records of the produced
30
31
INTRODUCTION
TABLE 1-8. STANDARD PRESSURES FOR GAS MEASUREMENT
tion of fluids within the formation, and the data requirements of the reservoir engineer. While this text is essentially a text on reservoir engineering,
its purpose is also to report and discuss those subjects in which reservoir
engineering, drilling engineering, and production engineering have common interests.
IN VARIOUS STATES
State or
province
Base
presaure,
Base
temp.,
OF
Arkansas
California
Colorado
Illinois
Kansas
Louisiana
Michigan
Mississippi
New Mexico
Oklahoma
Texas
Utah
West Vrrginia
Wyoming
14.65
14.73
15.025
14.65
14.65
15.025
14.73
15.025
15.025
14.65
14.65
15.025
14.85
15.025
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Canada:
Alberta
British Columbia
Saskatchewan
14.4
14.4
14.65
60
60
60
Correction for deviation

fiom Boyle's.law
4,000
'""'
~
a. 3,00 0
Above 100 psig

Above 200 psig
,,[
~
~
Q_
Above 200 psig

Above 100 psig
'~
" " ---
2,000
1,000
Pressure
3,00 0
If deviation is more than 1 %

If deviation is more than 13
Compiled from data supplied by state agencies, U.S. Bureau of Mines, and
Phillips Petroleum Company.
SOURCE:
fluid volumes and of reservoir pressu1e are necessary for engineering analysis of well and reservoir problems. Typical field data are shown graphically
in Fig. 1-16.
2,00 0
:a
/'-.
/: _,,.-
;g' i,000
qjjs-oil ratio
\)
>---'
Cumu!ah've
qas-oi! ratio
'
!:"'"
"'
'
15,000
~
'~
10,000
e
:I
..,_
L u
Reservoir Performance
The reservoir engineer is, of course, concerned with the production of
oil ~nd ga~ from the reservoir and primarily with the methods of stimulating
or increasing the recovery from the reservoir as a whole. A basic understanding of drilling and production operations is required in reservoir engineering, as the hydrocarbon fluids are withdrawn from the earth through
the well bore. In addition, virtually all the information upon which a
reservoir engineer can base his studies must be obtained from these same
well bores in terms of well logs, formation samples, samples of oil and gas
'
oil- and gas-production statistics, and reservoir pressures.
Efficient drilling and completion operations depend upon the physical
properties of the rocks which are penetrated and in particular upon the
properties of the producing formation. In addition, efficient production
operations depend on a knowledge of formation characteristics, distribu-
r'-- /nsfantoneou5
5,000
Q_
I/
''.
V
~L
Cumulative 011
production
Ooilyoil
producflon {av) - 2
>
"'
10 x 10 6 ~
/
..
40x10 6
. -'
.....
/Daily wafer production

Cumulative water prod.
'
'
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E
u
~~~c~~~o~~~o~~~c~~~c~~~c~~~c
1937
1938
1939
1940 1941
1942
1943
FIG. 1-16. Typical field production history.
An oil field is comprised of an aggregate of well bores penetrating one

or~ more
petroleum reservoirs in the subsurface. Modem development

methods involve drilling of wells on a spacing of one well to each 20 to 40
acres. The question then arises, What forces the petroleum hydrocarbons
to the well bore so that they can be produced to the surface? Several
32
33
PETROLEUM BESERVOm ENGINEERING
INTRODUCTION
sources of energy exist in the formation. One of these sources is the expansive energy of the hydrocarbon fluid. In the case of gas the material is
confined under pressure, and when the formation is opened to a well bore
existing at a lower pressure, the fluid will tend to expand and flow toward
the pressure sink. This, too, is true of crude oil or liquid petroleum. If the
well constitutes a pressure sink, then fluid will migrate through the porous
reservoir material to the well bore. In the case of liquid petroleum, the
natural energy is the expansive energy of the liquid petroleum and the gas
dissolved in the liquid petroleum at the elevated pressure at which the
petroleum was confined. Frequently oil fields are found in which a part of
the reservoir is liquid-saturated and a part of the reservoir rock is gassaturated. This type of accumulation is referred to as an oil reservoir with
a gas cap. The liquid petroleum may be forced toward the well bores by
the expansive energy not only of the liquid petroleum and the dissolved gas
but of the overlying gas cap. In addition to the expansive energy of the
reservoir almost as rapidly as the hydrocarbon fluid is withdrawn, therefore preventing any substantial decline in pressure.
The force of gravity does not become important as a driving mechanism
until the reservoir becomes substantially depleted. However, as previously
mentioned, gravitational forces are present in all the three preceding mechanisms and play a substantial role in the distribution of the fluids in that
gravity tends tO promote segregation of the fluids contained within the
petroleum hydrocarbons, all petroleum. accumulations are associated with
water. The oil accumulation may be surrounded by water-bearing formations. This water also is subjected to elevated pressures in the subsurface,
and upon withdrawal of fluid from the petroleum reservoir, the reservoir
reservoir.
The various drives are characterized by pressure-production history.

Typical pressure-production histories of the three major drives are compared in Fig. 1-17. The solution-gas drive is characterized by a rapid pres-;100
0
2
0 80
60
---\
' drive
Water
~
'
--
' \.Gas-cop drive
becomes a pressure sink and the contiguous water expands into the petro-
leum reservoir, thus displacing oil or gas toward the well bores. In addition
to the expansive energies present, there is also the force of gravity acting
at all times upon the fluids. The primary effect of the force of gravity
throughout most of the history of petroleum reservoirs is to promote the
segregation of the various fluids. That is, gas tends to occupy the higher
places in the accumulation; oil, being more dense than gas and less dense
~ 20
::
~
"'
20
', Oiss<?lved gas drive

40
60
80
100
Oil produced, 0/o oT originol oil in place
Fra. 1-17. TYPical pressure-production histories of the three major drives. (From
Clark.1/J)
than water, tends to occupy the intermediate position; and water, of course,
tends to underlie the petroleum accumulation.

Some reservoirs may be closed, owing to the geologic environment in
which they were formed, so that the associated volume of water is quite
small. In this case the energy available to displace the hydrocarbon to the
well bores is solely that of the hydrocarbon itself. A petroleum reservoir in
which originally no free gas cap and no associated active water existed is
referred to as a solution-gas-drive reservoir; the principal energy for pro-
sure decline and a low recovery efficiency. In the gas-cap-drive reservoir
pressure is maintaioed at higher levels than io the solution-gas drive, and

recovery efficiency is thus improved. The degree of improvement depends
on the size of the gas cap relative to the oil zone and on the production
procedure used. Water drive is the most efficient in maintaining reservoir
pressure and usually yields the highest recovery efficiency. However, a
ducing the petroleum is that of the gas in solution io the oil.

A petroleum reservoir containing an original free gas cap but with no
gas-cap drive, managed to secure the greatest aid from gravitational forces,
may yield a greater recovery efficiency than a water drive.
Most petroleum reservoirs are suQjected to one or more drives either
associated active water produces by a process or drive which is referred to
simultaneously or at various times throughout the life of the reservoir.
as solution-gas-gas-cap drive.
For instance, a large reservoir after initial discovery may behave in its
A petroleum reservoir which is associated with water-bearing formations

that are so active that little or no pressure drop occurs in the petroleum
reservoir on the withdrawal of hydrocarbon fluids is referred to as a waterdrive reservoir. That is, water from the surrounding aquifer enters the
early life as if it were solution-gas drive. Then after a short period of

production, the associated gas cap becomes effective and contributes sub-
stantially to the energy of the reservoir. Furthermore, after substantial

withdrawals have been made, enough pressure drop may have been estab-
34
INTRODUCTION
lished in the adjacent aquifer so that water drive may become an important
part of the reservoir mechanism. Reservoirs having more than one type of
drive present are referred to as combination-drive reservoirs. Petroleum
reservoirs 'Containing only material in the gaseous phase at reservoir conditions are generallY referred to as gas or condensate reservoirs.
The reservoir engineer must identify the drive mechanisms of a reservoir
and develop production procedures to secure the maximum economic recovery efficiency. The production procedures recommended may include
supplementation of natural energy by fluid injection. The fluid injection
may involve the return of gas, water, or gas and water to the reservoir.
One of the many possible injection procedures is shown schematically in
Fig. 1-18.
Woter-injection
Oil-producing
well
well
Gos-injection
well
2. Hager, Dorsey: "Practical Oil Geology," 6th ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Inc., New York, 1951.
3. Kraemer, A. J., and E. C. Lane: Properties of Typical Crude Oil from Fields of
the Eastern Hemisphere, U.S. Bur. Mines Bull. 401, 1937.
4. Wilhelm, 0.: Classification of Petroleum Reservoirs, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petro.
Geologists, vol. 29, 1945.
5. Uren, L. C.: "Petroleum Production Engineering: Oil Field Exploitation," 3d ed.,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953.
6. Vance, Harold: "Elements of Petroleum Subsurface Engineering," Educational
Publishers, Inc., Saint Louis, Mo., 1950.
7. Krynine, P. D.: Sediments and the Search for Oil, Mineral Ind., vol. 13, no. 3,
December, 1943.
8. Pirson, S. J.: "Elements of Oil Reservoir Engineering," 1st ed., McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950.
9. Uren, L. C.: "Petroleum Production Engineering: Oil Field Development," 4th
ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1956.
10. "Primer of Oil Well Drilling,'' Industrial and Business Training Bureau, and the
A.A.0.D.C., Texas Education Agency, July, 1951.
11. Brantly, J. E.: "Rotary Drilling Hand Book," 4th ed., Palmer Publications, Los
Angeles, 1948.
12. "Primer of Oil and Gas Production," American Petroleum Institute, New York,
1954.
13. Clark, N. J.: Review of Reservoir Engineering, World Oil, May, 1951.
F1a_ 1-18. Diagram showing the supplementing of natural reservoir energy by water
injection into the water zone and gas injection into the gas cap.
If fluid injection is undertaken prior to the substantial depletion of the

natural reservoir energy, the process is usually referred to as pressure
'maintenance. Fluid injection into a depleted reservoir is usually termed
secondary recovery.
This text and its companion volume will develop systematically the
fundamental concepts from which reservoir analyses can be made. The
measurement, collection, and reduction of data will be discussed. Methods
of evaluating well and reservoir performance will be developed, and applications presented. These methods will be extended to the prediction of
reservoir performance under various modes of operation.
REFERENCES
1. Petroleum Productive Capacity: A Report of the National Petroleum Council,
1952.
35
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
CHAPTER
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF
FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
INTRODUCTION
Naturally occurring rocks are in general permeated with fluid, water, oil,
or gas or combinations of these fluids. The reservoir engineer is concerned
with the quantities of fluids contained within the rocks, the transmissivity
of fluids through the rocks, and other related properties.
These properties depend on the rock and frequently upon the distribution
or character of the fluid occurring within the rock. In this and the following chapter, properties of rocks containing fluids will be discussed.
This chapter deals with the properties which are considered fundamental
and from which other properties and concepts can be developed. The
properties discussed are the porosity-a measure of the void space in a
rock; the permeability-a measure of the fluid transmissivity of a rock;
the fluid saturation-a measure of the gross fluid distribution within a
rock; and the electrical conductivity of fluid-saturated rocks-a measure
of the conductivity of the rock and its contained fluids to electrical current.
These properties constitute a set of fundamental parameters by which the
rock can be quantitatively described.
POROSITY
From the reservoir-engineering standpoint, one of the most important

rock properties is porosity, a measure of the space available for storage of
petroleum hydrocarbon. Porosity is defined as the ratio of the void space
in a rock to the bulk volume of that rock multiplied by 100 to express
in per cent. Porosity may be classified according to the mode of origin
as (1) original and (2) induced. Original porosity is that developed in the
deposition of the material, while induced porosity is that developed by
some geologic process subsequent to deposition of the rock. Original porosity is typified by the intergranular porosity of sandstones and the intercrystalline and oolitic porosity of some limestones. Induced porosity i
36
37
typified by fracture development as found in some shales and limestones

and by the vugs or solution cavities commonly found in limestones. Rocks
having original porosity are more uniform in their characteristics than
. those rocks in which a large part of the porosity is induced. For direct
quantitative measurement of porosity, reliance must be placed on formation samples obtained by coring.
Early investigations of porosity were conducted to a large extent by
investigators in the fields of ground-water geology, chemical engineering,
and ceramics. Therefore, much of the interest was centered on the investigation of the porosity of unconsolidated materials. In an effort to determine approximate limits of porosity values, Slichter1 and, later, Graton
and Fraser' computed the porosity of various packing arrangements of
uniform spheres. Unit cells of two of the packings studied are shown in
Fig. 2-1. The porosity for cubical packing (the least compact arrangement)
is 47.6 per cent, and that for rhombohedral (the most compact arrangement) is 25.96 per cent. Considering cubic packing, the porosity can be
calculated as follows:
Porosity= 47.6/o
Porosity= 25.96/o
(bl
(a)
FIG. 2-1. Unit cells and groups of uniform spheres for cubic and rhombohed.ral packing. (a) Cubie, or wide-packed; (b) rhombohedral, or close-packed. (After Graton
and Frru;er .~)
The unit cell is a cube with sides equal to 2r where r is the radius of the
sphere. Therefore,
Bulk volume
= (2r) 3 = Sr'
Since there are 8 (%) spheres in the unit cell,

Sand-grain volume =
4;
-------------
38
the porosity, therefore, is
Pore volume X
_ bulk volume - grain volume
100
Bulk volume
bulk volume
X lOO
8r3 - %71'1"3
=
Sr'
7r
X 100 = 1 - 2 ( ) X 100 = 47 .6 per cent

3
Silt
Framework
/-- fraction
~
:;;
E
0
0
"'
Clay
Decreasing---
Grain diameter
F1G. 2-4. Generalized texture of sand deposits. (From Nanz.3 )

0
1.0
0.01
Q001
Diam, mm
0.2
Pore space
);OJ Cloy
IE) Calcite cement
Qtz-Quartz
Kf -Potash feldspar
Plogioclose
feldspar
Ch -Chert
Pf
Ls -Limestone
FIG. 2-2. Thin section of sandstone illustrating grain and pore configuration.
(From Nanz.a)
100
Sand
Silt'
Clay
~
~
.
u
50
0
1.0
0.1
fraction and interstitial material. Other physical measurements on the

rocks indicate that increasing interstitial material reduces the pore space
of the rock.
(al
c
c
~Modal size
Legend
Mox
o'--"-"'--~.....L~~~~-=~--,~--'
8 50
Nicols cr:ossed
50
1!c
mm
Interstitial material
and mud fragments
:;::
'
39
The particle-size-distribution curves of Fig. 2-3 were obtained by Nanz'

in the study of the origin and genesis of a Gulf Coast graywacke. The
nomenclature sand and shaly sand is used in the common oil-field sense
and implies firm sandstone and shaly sandstone, respectively. The shaly
sand may be represented, as in Fig. 2-4, as being composed of a framework
Of particular interest is the fact that the radii cancel and the porosity of
packings of uniform spheres is a function of packing only.
The investigators recognized that naturally occurring materials were
composed of a variety of particle sizes and that not only the arrangement
but the angularity and distribution of particle size would affect porosity.
The angularity of particles comprising a sandstone is shown in the thin
section of Fig. 2-2. The configuration of the pore space is obviously dif100
- - -..
0,01
0.001
Diam, mm
{bl
F1a. 2-3. Cumulative grain-size distributions of graywacke. (a) Sand; (b) shaly
sand. (From N anz.3 )
f~rent from that which would be obtained from the packing of uniform
spheres. Furthermore, a portion of the space is filled with clay and cement-
ing material. The diversity of particle size characteristic of a graywacke
sandstone is illustrated by the particle-size-distribution curves of Fig. 2-3.

The data were obtained by a standard sieve analysis.
Grain-size distributions may be characterized in part by skewness of the

distribution. Skewness is a statistical measure of the uniformity of the
distribution of a group of measures. Tickell4 has presented experimental
data indicating that for packings of Ottawa sand, porosity was a function
of skewness of the grain-size distribution (see Fig. 2-5). Other investigators
have measured the effects of distribution, grain size, and grain shape. In
general, smaller grain size and greater angularity tend to increase the porosity while an increase in range of particle size tends to decrease porosity.
In dealing with reservoir rocks (usually consolidated sediments) it is
necessary, because the cementing materials may seal off a part of the pore
volume, to define (1) total porosity and (2) effective porosity. Total porosity
is the ratio of the total vaid space in the rock to the bulk volume of the rock;
effective poroS'ity is the ratio of the interconnected void space in the rock to the
bulk volume of the rock, each expressed in per cent. From the reservoirengineering standpoint, effective porosity is the quantitative value desired,
as this represents the space which is occupied by mobile fluids. For intergranular materials, poorly to moderately well cemented, the total porosity
is approximately equal to the effective porosity. For more highly cemented
materials and limestones, significant difference in total porosity and effective porosity values may occur.
40
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERl\IEATED ROCKS
41
In Fig. 2-6 are presented photographs of impregnated rocks having

essentially intergranular porosity. 5 The pore configuration is complex, but
the pores are relatively uniformly distributed. Complex pore configurations
arise from the interaction of many factors.in the geologic environment of
the deposit. These factors include the packing and particle-size distribution
38
37
/
/
34
33
/ .
\
\.,"
!"' r-;.._
32
-0.10 -0.0B -0.06 -0.04 -0.02
+0.02 +0.04 +0.06 +0.08
(a)
Skewness
FIG. 2-5. Variation of porosity with skewness of Ottawa sand. (From Tickell et al.4 )
of the framework fraction, the type of interstitial material, and the type
and degree of cementation. The influence of these various factors can be
evaluated as statistical trends. Hovvever, a quantitative evaluation of the
porosity resulting from the interaction of the various factors is possible
only by laboratory measurements.
Materials having induced porosity such as the carbonate rocks shown in
Fig. 2-7 have even more complex pore configurations. In fact, two or more
systems of pore openings may occur in such rocks. The basic rock material
is usually finely crystalline and is referred to as the- matrix. The matrix
contains uniformly small pore openings which comprise one system of pores.
This system is the result of the crystalline structure of the rock. One or
more systems of larger openings usually occur in carbonate rocks as a result
of leaching or fracturing of the primary rock material. Vugular pore openings are frequently as large as an ordinary lead pencil and are usually attributed to leaching of the rock subsequent to deposition. Fractures also
may be quite large and contribute substantially to the volume of pore
openings in the rock. Both fractures and vugs may be closed or partially
closed by precipitated calcite or other similar material. Vugs and fractures
are highly variable in size and in distribution. Therefore, even more than
lb!
F1a. 2-6. Cast of pore space of typical reservoir rocks. (a) Fine. i~te~granular sandstone; (b) coarse intergranular sandstone. (From Nuss and Whiting.)
42
43
for intergranular materials, laboratory measurements are required for quantitative evaluation of porosity.
Laboratory Measurement of Porosity

Numerous methods have been developed for the determination of the
porosity of consolidated rocks having intergranular porosity. Most of the
methods developed have been designed for small samples, roughly the size
of a walnut. As the pores of intergranular material are quite small, a determination of the porosity of such a sample involves measuring the volume
of literally thousands of pores. The porosity of larger portions of the rock

is represented statistically from the results obtained on numerous small
samples.
In the laboratory measurement of porosity it is necessary to determine
only two of the three basic parameters (bulk volume, pore volume, and
grain volume). All methods of determination of bulk volume are, in general, applicable to determining both total and effective porosity.
Bulk Volume. Although the bulk volume may be computed from measurements of the dimensions of a uniformly shaped sample, the usual procedure utilizes the observation of the volume of fluid displaced by the
sample. This procedure is particularly desirable, as the bulk volume of
irregular-shaped samples can be determined as rapidly as that of shaped
samples.
The fluid displaced by a sample can be observed either volumetrically or
gravimetrically. In either procedure it is necessary to prevent fluid penetration into the pore space of the rock. This can be accomplished (1) by
coating the rock with paraffin or a similar substance, (2) by saturating the
rock with the fluid into which it is to be immersed, or (3) by using mercury,
which by virtue of its surface tension and wetting characteristics does not
tend io enter the small pore spaces of most intergranular materials.
Gravimetric determinations of bulk volume can be accomplished by observing the loss in weight of the sample when immersed in a fluid or by
observing the change in weight of a pycnometer when filled with mercury
and when filled with mercury and the core sample. The details of gravimetric determinations of bulk volume are best summarized by example
calculations.
F~o. 2-? Typic3:1 carbonate reservoir rocks. (a) Vugular porosity; (b) vugular with
pm-point porosity;
(c) fractured dense dolomite (d) conglornerate. (From Core
1
Laboratories, Inc.6 )
Example 2-1. Coated Sample Immersed in Water.

A = weight dry sample in air = 20.0 gm
B = weight dry sample coated with paraffin = 20.9 gm (density of
paraffin = 0.9 gm/cc)
C = weight coated sample immersed in water at 40F = 10.0 gm
(density of water= 1.00 gm/cc)
Weight of paraffin = B - A = 20.9 - 20.0 = 0.9 gm
44
Volume of paraffin= 0.9/0.9 = 1 cc

Weight of water displaced = B - C = 20.9 - 10.0 = 10.9 gm
Volume of water displaced = 10.9/1.0 = 10.9 cc
Volume of water displaced - volume of paraffin = 10.9 - 1.0 = 9.9 cc
Bulk volume of rock = 9.9 cc
Example 2-2. Water-saturated Sample Immersed in Water.
A = weight dry sample in air = 20 gm
D = weight saturated sample in air = 22.5 gm
E = weight saturated sample in water at 40F = 12.6 gm
Weight of water displaced = D - E = 22.5 - 12.6 = 9.9 gm
Example 2-3. Dry Sample Immersed in Mercury Pycnometer.
A = weight dry sample in air = 20.0 gm
F = weight of pycnometer filled with mercury at 20C = 350.0 gm
G = weight pycnometer filled with mercury and sample at 20C =
235.9 gm (density of mercury = 13.546 gm/cc)
Fie. 2-8. Electric pycnometer for measurement of bulk volume of small samples.
(Courtesy of Refinery Supply Co.)
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIF.S OF FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
45
Weight of sample + weight of pycnometer filled with mercury =

A+F=20+350=370gm
Weight of mercury displaced= A+ F -G = 370 -235.9 = 134.1 gm
Volume of mercury displaced = 134.1/13.546 = 9.9 cc
Determination of bulk volume volumetrically utilizes a variety of specially constructed pycnoroeters or volumeters. .A.n electric pycnometer
from which the bulk volume can be read directly is shown in Fig. 2-8. The
sample is immersed in the core chamber, which causes a rise in the level
of the connecting U tube. The change in level
is sensed by the micrometer screw. The resultBulb
ing change in level is read directly in volume
from the micrometer scale. Either dry or
saturated samples may be used in the device.
The Russell volumeter shown in Fig. 2-9 also
Graduated
stem
provides for direct reading of the bulk volume.
Fluid
A saturated sample is placed in the sample
level
bottle after a zero reading is established with
Zero point
fluid in the volumeter. The resulting increase
in volume is the bulk volume. Only saturated
Ground-gloss
or coated samples may be used in the device.
)Oint
An evaluation of the foregoing and other
Bottle
methods of determining bulk volume is pre- Sample
sented in Table 2-1. Careful procedure with
all the methods listed yields sufficiently reliable FIG. 2-9. Russell volumeter
for determining grain and
results for engineering purposes.
bulk volumes of rock samSand-grain Volume. The various porosity ples. (From Russell.9 )
methods are usually distinguished by the
means used to determine the grain or pore volume. Several of the
oldest methods of porosity determination are based on determination of
grain volume.
The grain volume can be determined from the dry weight of the sample
and the sand-grain density. For many purposes, results of sufficient accuracy can be obtained by using the density of quartz (2.65 gm/cc) as the
sand-grain density.
For more rigorous determination either the Melcher-Nutting8 or Russell9
methods can be employed. In each, the bulk volume of a sample is determined, then either that sample or an adjacent sample is reduced to grain
size, and the grain volume determined. In the Melcher-Nutting technique,
all the measurements are determined gravimetrically, utilizing the principle
of bouyancy. The Russell method utilizes an especially designed volumeter (Fig. 2-9), and the bulk volume and grain volume are determined
TABLE 2-1. A COMPARISON OF METHODS FOR DETERMINING BuLK VoLUME1
(Bulk volume based on cubical cores, about 10 cc; round cores, about 7 cc)
Method
Accuracy, cc
(estimated)
Time
Precision on
90%ofdeter-. required
minatioIU1, cc per core,
min
Saturation
with tetrachloroethane
0.03
0.02
'
Mercury
pyonometer
:;1:;0.02
0.01
10
RU811ell volumeter W1ing

tetfachlol'Oethane
0.06
0.06
'
Rlllll!ell volumeter using

mer Oury
0.015 to 0.20
(with correction
(actor of
0.16 co)
O.Oli
0.03
0.6
:!;
F.Jfects
Preparation
Possible oil
exttaction
Reclamation
dev~~f~~~~om
saturation or
mercury
pycnomoter
method
Cylindrical
Hi h
Cubical
Drainage
0.0Hi
Drainage
0.03
Cores with
Nil-very slight None-except
high permefor satumercurr
abUity aatucontamrnarated corea
rate with
tion, satutettaehlororation
etlui,ne to
elfecte
prevent
mercury
penetfation
Trapped air,
0.01
Tr8.~~ed air,
Saturate with
tettachloroethane
Drainage
0.lli
Drainage
0.03
Trapped air,
0.20
Trapped air,
0.20
Saturate with
teUachloroethane
Core must be
dried2 hr at
100 alld
evacuated
30 min
Poaaible errors in bulk volume, cc

Shape
Poesible oil
extraction
Core must he 0.02 co

(round
dried 2 brat
IOOQ and
cores)
0.04 co
evacuated
(square
30 min
cores) of
mercury
pycnometer
value
Cores witli
Nil-very slight None-except 0.16 cc higher
high permefor aatu
than rnel'mercury
oury pycability satucontarnirated cores
rate with
nation,
nometer
method
tetfaohlorosaturation
eUL&.ne to
(with eorcffectli
rection
jl'event
mercury
factor
penetration
0.04 cc)
0.10 co higher Measures

Method not
maximum
applicable
than
to squf\l'e
mercury
dimell.l!ions
(higb
corea
pycnomctor
spots) O.lli
method
0.0{1 co higher Trapped air, Trapped air,
0.04
0.20
than saturation method
}tight cores)
or cores
with hith
permea ility
(-0.01 to
-0.26co)
permea~ility
Ex001:111ive
drai11age
-0.05
This method may be used

only on round cores with
smooth, Oat surfaces.
Surfaces must be at 00
augles
Mercury
Filling pyonometer with
mercury 0.01 cc
penetration
-0.30
None
Grind surface
to 90Q
angles
None
Nolle
0.03
None
Nil-slight
mercurf
contamm11tion
None
Insufficient expcrimentul work has been

conducted to r,rfect this method.
Accuracy woul depend upon K and
F instrnment and errors in con.ting
procedure
0.10
0.08
Coatin~-
None
Extraction of
coating
Method not
applicaWe
Lo:is
of wei~t
m water y
Ins11fficient experimental
data
Eat. 0.04
C-Oating
Conl11mina
tion with
paraffin
Extraction or
paraffin
Not
applleable
paraffin
penetration
D~ri:~~ent
-0.10 to
+o.30
Saturat'lon
with wllter
Poasible leach Intermittent

drying and
ing or diainevacuation
tegration
Ruaka inetrument
Coatln~ with
cello ion:
volume by
Kand F
instrumento
paraffincoated core
-0.30 to
+0.20
dippmg and
drying
0.03
"'
Instfument devised by Kaye and Freeman. Not available commercially,
Ree.ding11aver- Drainage
0.03
a~e 0.20 oc
higher than
Ruska instrument
and lluSBell
volumeter
Drainage
0.06
1. Cores with rough or ir-
POS11ible mer- Cores trap varying amounts

cury peueof air up to 0.20 cc
tr at ion,
-0.05
incomplete
drainage
saturated
cores,
-0.03 cc.
0.1/i
Miseellaneoll!I
regular surfaces are mo:re

difficult to drain than
thooe with smooth
surfaces
2. This method overcomes
error of posgible incornpJete saturation
3. Temperature-density
errors of saturant,
0.02 cc
Possible mer- Care must be taken not to
cury penetrap an air bubble in the
tration
pyonometer0.03 cc
-0.0li
Incomplete
Temperature-density errors
of mercury 0.02 cc
drainage of
saturated
cores,
-0.03
1. TediouB procedure
Possible
2. Volumeter drainage, and
CXCellSiVe
air trapped by glass
drainage
-0,0li
joint 0.03 co
0.08
Mechanical
lllOl'lllUrement
Effects on physical properties of core
Excessive
drainage
-0.0li
This method ls not reeommended for accurate work

in porosity determinations. Combined errors of
two readings and errors
in coati~ procedure
would r uce accuraoY
to approximately 2%
Imperfect eeal-water penekation while weighting
suspended in water
1. Etrol'll in reading gr11duate 0.0li cc

2. Thi.6 method givee high
""'""
--
----------------------~
49
PETROLEUM RESERVOIB ENGINEERING
volumetrically. The porosity determined is total porosity. In sands of

relatively uniform characteristics, the grain density can be determined
from the above measurements, and that density, together with an observed
dry weight and bulk volume, can be used to calculate the porosity of adjacent samples of the same lithology. The results are highly reproducible.
The Melcher-Nutting method is illustrated by Example 2-4.
vacuum is established in the system by manipulating the mercury reser-
48
Example 2-4. Sand-grain Volume by Melcher-Nutting Method.

A = weight dry crushed sample in air = 16.0 gm
A' = weight crushed sample plus absorbed water = 16.l gm
B _= weight pycnometer filled with water at 40F = 65.0 gm
C = weight pycnometer filled with sample and water at 40F = 75 gm
Weight of pycnometer filled with water plus weight of crushed sample = B + A = 65.0 + 16.0 = 81.0 gm
Weight of water displaced = B + A - C = 81.0 - 75 gm = 6.0 gm
Grain volume of sample = 6.0 cc
voir; the air in the core and chamber is expanded into the evacuated system
and then measured at atmospheric pressure in the graduated tube. The

difference in volume of the core chamber and of the air extracted is th~
Mercury
reservoir.
The porosity is then computed by combining results of the grain-volume

determination (Example 2-4) and the bulk-volume determination (Example
2-1). Such a solution for porosity is given in Example 2-5.
Example 2-5. Determination of Total Porosity.
From Example 2-4,
Sand-grain density 16/6.0 = 2.67 gm/cc
From Example 2-1,
Weight of dry sample in air = 20 gm
Bulk volume of sample = 9.9 cc
1
f
wt of dry sample in air
20
G ram voume o sample=
d
. d .
= - - = 7.5 cc
san -grain ens1ty
.t _ _,_ _ bulk volume - grain volume

T ota! poros1 y - .,,, b Ik .
1
u voume
2.67
100
9.9 -_ 7.5 X 100 = 24. 2 per cent

99
The methods of determining grain volume described above when combined with an observation of bulk volume yield total porosity values. The
Stevens porosimeter is a means of measuring the "effective 11 grain volume.
The porosimeter, shown in Fig. 2-10, consists of a core chamber which can
be sealed from atmospheric pressure and closed from the remaining parts
of the porosimeter by a needle valve. The volume of the core chamber is
known accurately. In operation a core is placed in the core cha=3l00r; a
FIG. 2-10. Stevens porosimeter. (From Stevens.
10
)
"effective" grain volume, the volume of the grains plus any sealed pore
space. Thus if the effective grain volume is subtracted from the bulk volume, the volume of interconnected or effective pore space is obtained. The
Stevens method is an adaptation of the Washburn-Bunting procedure,
which will be described in the section on measurement of pore volume.
Example 2-6. Determination of Grain Volume by Gas Expansion.

Stevens porosimeter:
A = volume of core chamber ~ 15 cc

Volume of air (1st reading) = 6.970
50
Pressure
bomb
FUNDAME.i."fTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
51
Volume of air (2d reading) = 0.03

Volume of air (3d reading) = 0
B = total of readings = 7.00 cc
Effective grain volume = A - B = 8 cc
Bulk volume of sample (from pycnometer) = IO cc
Effective porosity = q, = [(IO - 8)/IO] X 100 = 20 per cent
The Bureau of Mines gas expansion porosimeter (see Fig. 2-11) also
measures the effective grain volume and thus yields effective porosities.
Pore Volume. All the methods of measuring pore volume yield effective
Mercury
reservoir
~I
Detail of
pressure bomb
Surette
10
Fra. 2-12. Washburn-Bunting porosimeter. (From Stevens.

F1G. 2-lt Dureau of Mines gas-expansion porosimet.er. (From Rall and Taliaferro.n)
porosity. The methods are based on either the extraction of a fluid from
the rock or the introduction of a fluid into the pore space of the rock.
The Washburn-Bunting porosimeter, shown in Fig. 2-12, measures the
volume of air extracted from the pore space by creating a partial vacuum
52
in the porosimeter by the manipulation of the attached mercury reservoir.

The core is exposed to contamination by mercury and is therefore not suitable for additional testing. The
Stevens method previously illustrated is a modification of the Washburn-Bunting procedure especially
designed to prevent contamination
of the core.
A number of other devices have
been designed for measuring the
pore volume, including the Kobe
porosimeter and the mercury pump
porosimeter. The mercury pump
porosimeter is so designed that the
bulk volume may be obtained as
well as the pore volume.
The saturation method of deterFra. 2-13. Schematic sketch of Kobe po- mining porosity consists of saturatrosimeter. (From Beeson.)
ing a clean dry sample with a fluid
of known density and determining
the pore volume from the gain in weight of the sample. The sample is
usually evacuated in a vacuum flask to which the saturation fluid may be
admitted by means of a separatory funnel. If care is exercised to
achieve complete saturation, this procedure is believed to be the best
available technique for intergranular materials.
The Kobe porosimeter and the mercury pump are illustrated in Fig.
2-13 and 2-14. An example problem will illustrate the saturation techmque.
Example 2-7. Effective Porosity by the Saturation Method. From
the data of Example 2-2:
A = weight dry sample in air = 20 gm
D = weight saturated sample in air = 22.5 gm
Density saturating fluid (water) = 1.00 gm/cc
Weight of water in pore space = D - A = 22.5 - 20 = 2.5 gm
Volume of water in pore space = 2.5 gm/(1 gm/cc) = 2.5 cc
Effective pore volume = 2.5 cc
Bulk volume (Example 2-2) = 9.9 cc
Effective porosity = (2.5/9.9) X 100 = 25.3 per cent
A comparison of several methods of determining effective porosity is

summarized in Table 2-2.
53
Fra. 2-14. Mercury porosimeter and capillary-pressure apparatus. (CO'Urtesy of Core

Laboratories, Inc.)
Precision of Porosity Measurements

To investigate the precision with which porosities were determined, five
major comp3.ny laboratories participated in a porosity c~eck program. 12
Ten selected samples were circulated among the laboratones, and the P?""
rosity of each sample determined by routine methods normally used m
each laboratory. The methods used were either gas-expansion or saturation techniques. Figure 2-15 and Table 2-3 summarize the .results of the
check. Note that the gas-expansion method is consistently higher than the
saturation method. This is undoubtedly due to the fact that the errors
inherent in each tend to be in opposite directions. In the case of gas expansion, errors due to gas adsorption would cause high valu_es to be obtained while incomplete saturation of the sample would result in low values
in the ~ase of the saturation methods. The difference in the average values
obtained by the two methods is about 0.8 per cent porosity. The spread
between the high and low values ranges from 0.07 to almost 2. per ~ent
porosity. While the differences in the average values are no~ disturbmg,
the spread in high and low is of sufficient magnitude to contnbute appreciable errors if single observations and a small number of samples are used
rABLE 2-2. METHODS OF DETERMINING POROSITY
Effeotivo poroaity
Effective poroaity
Effective poroaity
Effective poroaity
(be11t method)
Effective poroaity
Effective porosity
Total )l-Orosity
'
Method
W1111hburn
Bunting
Stevena
Kobe porosimeter
Boyle's law
poroeimeter
Typo
One to several piecoo

per increment
(usually one)
One to aeveral pieroo

per increment
(usually one)
One to several pieces

per increment
,(usuiil!y one)
One to several piece11 One to several pieces Several pieces for

per increment
per increment
retort. one for
(uaually one)
(usually ono)
mercury pump
Preparation
&!vent extraction
and oven drying.
Occasionally use
retort samples
&!vent extraction
and oven drying.
Occa.11ionally use
retort samples
Solvent extraction
and oven d~ying.
Oecasionally \Jae
retort samplea
Solvent extraction
and oven drying.
Ckcasio11ally uae
retort samples
Solvent extraction
and oven dryiog.
Occa.11ionally WIB
retort samples
None
One to several pieces Several pieces per

per increment
increment
(usually one)
Extraction, then in
Solvent exkaotion
\ 2d step, crueh
and oven drying.
'sample to gdan
Oecll6ionally use
size
retort samples
FunctioDS
measured
Pore volume a11d

bulk volume
Saud-grain volume
and unconnected
P-Ore volume and
bulk volume
Sand-grain volume
and unconnected
,pore volume and
bulk volume
Sand-grain volume
i:md unconnected
pore volume and
bulk volume
Pore volume and

bulk volume
Volumes of gae
space, oil and
water, and bulk
voJume
Sand-grain volume
and unconnected
pore volume a11d
bulk volume
Man11cr or
me1111ure
mtmt
Reduction of preio
sure on a confi11ed
sample and meas
urement of air
evolved. Bulk
volume from mer-cury pye11ometer
Difference in volume Difference fo volume Difference in

Weight of dry
Weight of retort
Difference in
of air evolved from
of air evolved from
volume of air
sample, weight or
sample, volume of
volume of air
evolved from a
oil and water
a constant-volume
a constant-volume
evolved from a
saturated nmple
constant-volume
chamber when
chamber when
in air, weigbt of
from retort nm
constant-volume
empty and when
empty and wben
cbamber when
pie, gas volume
saturated sample
chamber when
occupied by
occupied by
empty a11d when
empty and when
immersed in satu
and bulk volume
occupied by
nmple. Bulk
occupied by
sample. Bulk
rant
of M.P.S.
sample. Bulk volaample
volume by Russell
volume by RU1:111ell
ume by Russell
tube
tube
tube
sampling
ft:
'
Errors
Saturation
Core laboratories
Wot sample
Air from dirty merMercury does not

Mercury does not
Mercury doea not
Possible incomplete
cury, possible leak&
become dirty.
become dirty,
become dirty.
saturation
in system, inoom
Possible leaks in
Possible leaks i11
P01sible leaks in
plete evacuation
system, incomplete
system, incom
eyatem, incomplete
due to rapid
plete evacuation
evacuation due to
evacuation due to
operation or tight
rapid operation
rapid operation
due to upid
sample
or tight sample
or tight sample
operation or tight
sample
2-3.
c ---
Cure laboratorioo
Dry sample
STICS OF SAMPLES USED IN PoROSITYMEASUREMENT CoMPARl80NS
Type of
material
Sample
No.
Approximate
gas permeability,
roillidarcys
Limestone
Fritted glass
Sandstone
Sandstone
Semiqua.rtzitic
sandstone
Serriiquartzitic
sandstone
Alundum
Alundum
Chalk
Sandstone
1
2
3
4
1
2
20
1,000
Sand density
Bulk volume of
sample and
volume of saod
grains
Weight of dry
sample, weight of
saturated sample
imm8flled weight,
and volume of
sand grains
Possible loss of sand

Obtain excll8$ water Possible leaks in
system, incom
graina in crush
from shalea. Loss
plete evacuation
ing. Can be
of vapors
due to rapid
reproduced most
through
accurately
condensers
operation or tight
sample
Porosity,
g:
Effective porosity
11
Value from
Average from
saturation methods high observation
Value from
low observation
Average
Average from
gas methods
17.47
28.40
14.00
3029
17.81
28.68
14.21
31.06
16.90
27.97
13.70
29.13
18.50
29.30
15.15
31.8
16.72
27.56
13.50
26.8
0.2
3.95
4.15
3.66
4.60
3.50
BZE
BZG
0.8
1,000
3
1.6
45
3.94
28.47
16.47
32.67
19.46
4.10
28.78
16.73
33.10
19.68
3.71
28.00
16.08
32.03
19.12
4.55
29.4
17.80
33.8
20.2
3.48
27.8
16.00
31.7
18.8
61-A
722
1123
1141-A
.... ----------------~
-----
35
--::---
-----
30
..
.-
,_
_-
-"
:~
25
--
~ ~
20
~
e
g__ 15
L-..----
~
~
~~
~ ~
~
IO
~-
Ii:;1 ""1 '
~-,....,
- .....,-n-
-~l~~I ~!Pf~
2
Matrix porosity is that determined from small samples; total porosity is

that determined from the larger whole core. Whole-core analysis satisfactorily evaluates most carbonate rocks.
100
However, no satisfactory technique
90
:...1--t
is available for the analysis of exten80
Matrix
porosity
"'-sively fractured materials.
70
Total porosity
In coring materials which in situ
60
are extensively fractured, the core fre- ~ 50
quently breaks along the natura1
40
fracture planes. Therefore, it is diffi30
cult to determine the fraction of pore
t20 -~Ht
4
space contributed to the reservoir
Group: 123
10
by such a fracture system. Recent
1 I
0o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
developments in formation evaluaTota! porosity, /o
tion by production tests indicate
that laboratory determinations on F1G. 2-16. Comparison of large core
highly fractured pays give minimum analysis with 8 conventional analysis.
(After Kelton.1 )
values of porosity.
0
,
0
57
56
SZE
BZG
61-A
722
_ff23
1141-A
Sample no.
Fra. 2-15. Results of porosity check. Dot-cl.a.sh lines represent maximum values dash
lines represent minimum values. Compare with Table 2-3 for more informati~n on
the samples. (After Dotson et al. 12 )
to characterize a reservoir rock. However, it is felt that all the methods

commonly used to determine effective porosity yield results with desired
degree of accuracy if carefully performed.
Carbonate Rocks
The foregoing discussion is applicable to materials of intergranular-type
porosity. Carbonate rocks are more heterogeneous, as was shown in Fig.
2-7. Small samples, such as used in the routine techniques, yield values
of porosity which do not include the effect of vugs, solution cavities, etc.
The saturation methods of determining pore volume and bulk volume ar
unsatisfactory, as drainage will occur from the larger pore spaces. Th
various other techniques also have inherent errors when applied to vugular
materials. It is necessary, therefore, to use larger core samples and to determine the bulk volume by measurement of the core dimensions. The
effective grain volume is obtained by using a large gas-expansion porosimeter similar to the Bureau of Mines type. Kelton13 reported results of
whole core analysis, a method utilizing large sections of the full diameter
core. Figure 2-16 and Table 2-4 summarize a part of Kelton's work.
TABLE 2-4. MATRIX AND WHOLE-CORE DATA FOR

13
ELLENBURGER, FULLERTON FIELD
Group
Matrix porosity, % bulk
1.98
1.58
2.56
Total porosity, % bulk
2.21
2.62
3.17
7.92
-8.40
Compressibility of Porous Rocks

The porosity of sedimentary rocks has been shown by Krumbein and
Sloss" to be a function of the degree of compaction of the rock. The compacting forces are a function of the maximum depth of burial of the rock.
The effect of natural compaction on- porosity is shown in Fig. 2-17. The
porosity of shales are greatly reduced by compaction largely because
"bridging" is eliminated by the greater forces. The effect illustrated in
Fig. 2-17 is principally due to the resulting packing an:angemen'. after
compaction. Thus sediments which have been deeply burJe~, even if subsequently uplifted, exhibit lower porosity values than sed=ents which
have not been buried a great depth.
Apart from the effect of compaction on grain ~rrangement, roc~s. ~e
also compressible. Geerstma15 states that three kinds of compressibility
must be distinguished in rocks: (1) rock matrix compressibility, (2) rock
bulk oompressibility, (3) pore compressibility.
--------------
58
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PEfu'1EATED ROCKS
~ock matrix compressibility is the fractional change in volume of the

solid roe~ ?;aterial (grains) with a unit change in pressure. Rock bulk
compress1bihty IB the fractional change in volume of the bulk volume of
the rock with a unit change in pressure. Pore compressibility is the frac50
o[\
,.__
---.
\
___ ---
...,, Sandstones
--~,..
10
~
...........
i ,000
59
c, = (1/V,) (dV,/dP), where V, is the volume of solids and Pis the hydrostatic pressure. The value of c, for a particular rock can be determined
simply by saturating the rock with a fluid, immersing the saturated rock
in a pressure vessel containing the saturating fluid, then imposing a hydrostatic pressure on the fluid and observing the change in volume V, of.
the rock sample. The compressibility of the solids is considered for most
rocks to be independent of the imposed pressure.
Reservoir rocks are subjected to other conditions of loading than described above. Therefore, it is necessary to introduce other compressibility
concepts. A rock buried at depth is
Inferno!
subjected to an overburden load due
pressure.
to the overlying sediments. This
gouge
overburden load may be considered
to exert an external hydrostatic
!0
Reservoir
stress, which is in general greater
than the internal hydrostatic stress
0
0
of the formation fluids.
0
0
In the laboratory it is possible to
0
2,000
3,000
4,000
r--
5,000
6,000
Depth of burial, ft
Frc. 2-17. Effect of natural compaction on porosity. (From Krumbein and Sloss.1')
tional chang~ in pore volume of the rock with a unit change in pressure.
Ro?ks b'.'ned at depth are subjected to internal stress exerted by fluids
contamed .m the pores and to external stress which is in part exerted by
the overlymg rocks. The internal stress is hydrostatic, while the external
stresses may have different values in different directions.
The depletion of fluids from the pore space of a reservoir rock results in
a change in the internal stress in the rock,. thus causing the rock to be subjected to~ different resultant stress. This change in stress results in changes
m the gram, pore, and bulk volume of the rock. Of principal interest to the
;eservoir engineer is the change in the pore volume of the rock. The change
m bulk volume may be of importance in areas where surface subsidence
could cause appreciable property damage.
Geerts1Il3;" and o_thi;rs have developed a theory of rock compressibility
which provides an ms1ght into the mechanics of rock deforniation under
oil-field conditions.
. The th~ory can best be explained in terms of experimental techniques.
First co.ns1der the material forming the grains or solid portion of the rock.
The solids when subiected to a hydrostatic stress will deform uniformly.
The bulk deforniation of this material can be expressed as a compressibility
- - -
design an experiment utilizing equip-
Gland nut
Overburden
pressure
ment such as illustrated in Fig.

g}JUge
2-18. 16 A core sample is enclosed
in a copper jacket which is then
placed in a pressure vessel and connected to a Jerguson sight gauge.
The hydraulic-pressure system is
arranged so that a saturated core
can be subjected to variable internal Fra. 2-18. Experimental equipment for
pressures and overburden or exter- measuring pore volume compaction and
nal pressures. The resulting inter- compressibility. (From Fatt.1 6 )
nal volume changes are indicated
by the position of the mercury slug in the sight gauge. Carpenter and
Spencer17 used similar equipment; however, in their equipment the internal pressure was maintained at atmosph.eric pressure.
It is possible with the equipment illustrated to vary either the external
or internal pressure or both.
Carpenter and Spencer in testing Woodbine cores with similar equipment varied only the external pressure. Typical curves obtained are shown
in Fig. 2-19. The ordinate is the reduction in pore space resulting from a
change in overburden load. The change in pore space VP was determined
by measuring the volume of water expelled from the jacketed core on increasing the overburden pressure. VB is the bulk volume, and <P the porosity fraction. Therefore, Vs.P = V., the pore volume. The slope of the
curves shown is a compressibility of the form (1/V,)(aV,/oP*)p where P*
60
is the external pressure and P is the internal pressure. It may be noted

that the slope of the curves can be considered constant over most of the
pressure range above 1,000 psi.
Hall18 performed tests. similar to those of Carpenter and Spencer. The
compressibility term (l/V,)(aV,/aP*)P, he designated as the formation
3.5
,,
3.0
,#
7
2. 5
'/
.,
o Limestone
0
...-
g6
-1---1---l-+--l--+--l---l--
~;;
i'\.~
O::g-~5-~
~
"q;-+--f--l-:::::
...
~
~
~E~4- ~--\---"!..-->
-.J.--f--!-iS ......_ "
8~
'~-IOI
'
c:g3
~~
..
~ g_ 2 ~e-
o=
ct
LL.~
~
g 1
"q;
-r
B
0o
'
&
~ -
-~
~ -~
~... -~"' -~-.g_-.:g_~;~

1:5
"'
~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~=
<:)
<:) .....
'
o-i>--+-+-+-+--+---l--+-+--1
~J.:
~-.
:::.-~
10
-+-+-+--f---1--+--+-+---I
<:3 ~
I
6
~
-~
I I
I I
~
: :.
...
12
/
/
~--'-_.L--1
Sandstone
(Bureau of Mines data )
'
14 f6 f8
Porosity, 0/o
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
FIG. 2-20. Formation compaction component of total rock compressibility. (From
Hall.1 8 )
,.. x,:Ii'...
g_
';;- 7\---1---l-+--l--+--l---l--+-+-+-'' Sondston_e
7!/
Core No. I
61
<J
2.0
~~
1i
, ,
"
15
.~ 1.5
c
.'
I
//
"
compaction component of the total rock compressibility. In Fig. 2-20 is

presented a correlation of this function with porosity. The correlation includes the data of Carpenter.
In addition, Hall investigated the compressibility (l/Vp)(aV,/oP),,. at
constant overburden pressure. This he designated as effective rock compressibility and correlated with porosity. The correlation is presented in
Fig. 2-21. In both Figs. 2-20 and 2-21, it may be noted that the compressibility decreases as the porosity increases.
,'
111.
~
u
'I I
I I
f.0
t0
';;
x0
O
98 -
::;... :>
~ ~ 7-
~g_
e~
<t>.j..
0.5
OE
Woodbine sand
4,000
Pressure, psi
6,000
8,000
FIG. 2-19. Rock compressibility. Curve A: average of two compressibility tests at

91F; curve B: compressibility test No. 3 at 146F. Core data: Magnolia Petroleum
Co., John Radford well No. 5, Margaret Tennison Survey, Gregg County, Tex.;
top of producing stratum, 3,708 ft; total depth of well, 3,715 ft; depth at which core
was cut, 3,711 ft; initial daily production, 12,000 bbl. (From Carpenter and
Spencer.11 )
1;a.
~ ..s 2
'---
Vj
.,,
-+---+-+o_;p=i=+-+-~--1
~ -+-----l---'--f---l--\--1 ~
i"
~ -~
- ~
~Q;; - -_...,...._a,:..,
~ ~ 1----+-+---l :::::.
~
~-o;;;_g
.,.,r::.
q,
--....,!Q;)
~~~
~e 3,1---1-+-+--"-;--~ - ~ 2.~ '@ ~~c1:t:i==t="'~"i"~

~
~-
.,,p
~
""-
"<;[
6--~
~
~< 5
o Limesrone
g Sandstone
"IS
c::
O.;u
2,000
ft-x"o-
~10~~-~-~~-~-~~-~-~~-~-~~
..... e:;-::;.':'
.;:; : .....
~.s: ~r~
ij<;\i
~ 1-+-+---l-+-+--l
~
f""
&
'---l-+-+----1-+-+---.Jl--1---l----1-+-+--I
c 1
0
<3
0'---'---'--~'--'---'---'-~--'---'--.,0,~.,.,__,'--'
0
2
4
6
8 fO f2 f4 f6 f8 20 22 24 26
Porosity, 0/o
Fro. 2-21. Effective reservoir rock compressibilities. (From H all.u)
62
In the theory presented by Geertsma, the rock bulk compressibility c,

is defined as (l/VB)(aVB/aP*)p, which is, in general, a function of P and
P*. The value of c, can be determined by measuring the change in bulk
volume of a jacketed sample by varying the external hydrostatic pressure
while maintaining a constant internal pressure.
For sandstones and shales, it can be shown that
;:.
~\
:l
~ 25
20
~?,\
dV' ;::; <:; (dP* - dP)
v,
30
</>
and that
15
\\
d;: ""'c,(dP* - dP)
>
10
e
0
a.
provided that c, is much less than c,,. Therefore,
' ~
,.._
'..:::::: ~
......
r--- r--_
dV,~!dVB
v,
since
v, =</>VB
~ </>
VB
2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000
dV,"" dVB
This states simply that the total change in volume is equal to the change
in pore volume. Carpenter made use of this principle in his experimental
technique.
Furthermore, if the external hydrostatic pressure P* on a rock is constant
in all directions as in a laboratory test of a jacketed core, dP* = 0, and
dV, = _'!!>. dP
or
_ _!_ dV, = '!!>.
V,
</>
V, dP
</>
such that co/</> may be defined as the pore volume compressibility c,.
Geertsma has stated, however, that in a reservoir only the vertical component of hydrostatic stress is constant and that the stress components in
the horizontal plane are characterized by the boundary condition that there
is no bulk deformation in those directions. For these boundary conditions,
he developed the following approximation for sandstones:
Net overburden p.ressure, psi
F10. 2-22. Pore volume compressibility as a function of net overburden pressure

(P*-0.85P). (A) Unconsolidated sand, 28- to 35-mesh flint shot, porosity 36 per
cent; (B) basal Tuscaloosa sandstone, Mississippi, porosity 13 per cent; (C) sandstone from wildcat, Santa Rosa County, Fla., porosity 15 per cent; (D) sandstone
from Ventura Brusin Field, Calif., porosity 10 per cent; (E) sandstone from West
Montalvo Area Field, Calif., porosity 12 per cent. (From Fatt.16 )
,.... 10
1
-c
2 '
1'
!'-...
~r---
r---
~ r---
>
1''
~
\~\""'
~~
Thus, the effective pore compressibility for reservoir rocks on the depletion
of internal pressure is only one-half of that determined by present methods
in the laboratory.
Fatt reported results of tests on a limited number of samples having porosities ranging from 10 to 15 per cent with one sample having a porosity
near 20 per cent. The results of these studies are presented in Figs. 2-22
and 2-23. Fatt, 16 in effect, determined (I/V,)(aV,/aP)P* for .a range of
values of P*. The data reported are correlated with a so-called "net overburden pressure" defined as (P* - 0.85P). The factor 0.85 is introduced
to take into account that the internal pressure does not wholly react against
'f
;;
~
:<;
ldV
le, __
::::..!.J!,..._,, __
V, dP ~ 2 </> -
2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000

Net overburden pressure, psi
FIG. 2-23. Pore volume compressibility as a function of net overburden pressure

(P*-0.85P). (A) Weber sandstone, Rangely Field, Colo., porosity 12 per cent;
(B) sandstone from Nevada wildcat, porosity 13 per cent; (C) Strawn sandstone,
Sherman Field, Tex., porosity 13 per cent; (D) Bradford sandstone, Pennsylvania,
porosity 15 per cent. (From Fatt.u)
63
-----
65
the external pressure. The factor is believed to be dependent on the structure of the rock and to range from 0.75 to 1.00 with an average of 0.85.
Fatt found, as illustrated in the curves, that the pore compressibility
was a function of pressure. Within the range of data considered, he did
not find a correlation with porosity.
In summary, it can be stated that pore volume compressibilities of consolidated sandstones are of the order of 5 X 10- to 10 X 10- reciprocal
psi.
flow in cubic centimeters per second, and the other terms are as previously
defined.
If the reservoir rock system is considered to be a bundle of tubes such
that the flow could be represented by a summation of the flow from all the
tubes, then the total flow would be
t;p
Q, = n "''
8L
where n is the number of tubes of radius r. If the rock consists of a group

of tubes of different radii, then
PERMEABILITY
The previous section of this chapter discussed the storage capacity of

underground formations. It is the purpose of this section to discuss the
ability of the formation to conduct fluids. From usage the name for fluid
conductance capacity of a formation is permeability. In the introduction
to API Code 27 19 it is stated that permeability is a property of the porous
medium and is a measure of the capacity of the medium to transmit fluids.
The measurement of permeability, then, is a measure of the fluid conductivity of the particular material. By analogy with electrical conductors,
the permeability represents the reciprocal of the resistance which the porous
medium offers to fluid flow.
The reader is familiar with the concept of fluid flow in circular tubes and
conduits as described by Poiseuille's and Farming's equations.
Poiseuille's equation for viscous flow:
d2 t;P
v = 32L
\'
,,,.i. t;p
j=l
Q,=Ln'8L
where
ni
= number of tubes of radius Tf
k = number of groups of tubes of different radii
The previous equation reduces to

1r
Qt
t;p
l
k
8 L
n3r;4
(2-4)
i=l
i ,l..."1';' is treated as a flow coefficient for the particular grouping of

k
If
tubes, the equation reduces to
(2-5)
(2-1)
k
Fanning's equation for viscous and turbulent flow:
where
= ~l
4
n3Tj
(2-6)
j=l
v'
2d11P
fpL
(2-2)
where v = fluid velocity, cm/sec

d = diameter of conductor, cm
l1P = pressure loss over length L, dynes/sq cm
L = length over which pres.sure loss is measured, cm
. = fluid viscosity, centipoises
p = fluid density, gm/cc
f = friction factor, dimensionless
A more convenient form of Poiseuille's equation is
Q = 7r'f' t;P
8L
(2-3)
where r is the radius of the conduit in centimeters, Q is the volume rate of
If the fluid-conducting channels in a porous medium could be defined as

to the dimension of the radii and the number of each radii, it might be possible to use Poiseuille's flow equation for porous media. As there are numerous tubes and radii involved in each segment of porous rock, it is an
impossible task to measure these quantities on each and every porousrock sample.
In the attempt to use Poiseuille's flow equation to define flow in a porous
rock, it was assumed that a series of tubes of length L comprised the flow
network. If these tubes are interconnected and are not individual tubes
over the length L, then the derivation would have to account for the interconnection of the flow channels.
A cast of the flow channels in a rock formation is shown in Fig. 2-24. It
is seen that the flow channels are of varying sizes and shapes and are randomly connected. It is impossible to define the exact dimension of all the
----------
66
PETROLEUM RESERvom ENGINEERING
flow channels and their flow relationship to one another. It becomes appar
ent that some means other than Poiseuille's law had to be found to define
the flow coefficient of a rock.
In the preceding section on porosity, it was shown that the porosity was
independent of sand-grain size but dependent on the mode of packing. Iri
the same section, it was shown that the size of the openings between the
sand grains decreased as the sand-grain size decreased. Therefore, perhaps
consolidated or unconsolidated. As this is not possible, it again becomes

evident that another method of expressing fluid conductance of rocks must
be used.
10'
108
107
10
~1
...
"
Sample.No.
~
.
'
'~
~ '>
'~
"
~1~ 10'
"~
"
2
3
4
5
,,
7
8
'
.>~.,
-~
~'~
to
""
'
t3
t4
..
15
~~
17
<9
"...
Leed
shot~
24
25
26
27
-..::::: {9
~' ~
'
10
.........
~
K
"
Fra. 2-24. Metallic cast of pore spaces in a consolidated sand. (Courtesy of Humble
Oil & Refining Co.)
u nconsolidoted sand/
102
0.001
0.01
Porosity
~2.5
f2.3
16.9
37.0
20.3.
37.8
{9.7
15.9
H.9
19.5
18.4
22.3
t6.3
f9.2
2t.4
20.6
33.2
21.9
23.8
26.9
27.7
22.t
28.8
Unccnsolidotecl
~~ ~K ~
<
22
23
~'\
21
"'~'
"...
Sond
Consolidated
Sroclfonl
Srodford
3rd Venango
Ceramie A
Robinson
Ceromie B
Woodbine
WHeo:t
3rd Venango
Robinson
Robinson
3rd Venango
Wileox
Warran
3rd Venango
Robinson
Ceromie C
3rcl venongo
Woodbine
20
~z;.
104
it is possible to derive a flow equation in terms of the mean diameter of the

'sand grain. Fancher, Lewis, and Barnes20 conducted experimental work on
porous systems to determine the relationship between sand-grain size and
fluid conductance of porous media. The resulting data were correlated
using Fanning's flow equation so as to account for both turbulent and
viscous flow. The results of their study are shown in Fig. 2-25.
For unconsolidated sands it was found that an expression of tP,e friction
factor f could be obtained in terms of Reynolds number. But for consolidated sandstones it was found that a different relationship existed between
the friction factor and Reynolds number for each sample investigated. If
a single relationship could have been obtained for consolidated sandstones
as was obtained for unconsolidated sandstones, then it would have been
necessary to classify rocks only as to average grain diameter and whether
67
385
Ottawo
20-30 Ottawa
Lead shot
34.5
34.5
3-0.9
~.
<
"'" '
10
0.1
Flint
r--. ,_
100
10
00
dp
R=yF10. 2-25. Correlation of friction factor wit~ Reynqlds numbe_r for flow of homogeneous fluids through porous media, where d is defined as the diameter of the av~rag~
grain and v is the apparent velocity, i.e., volume rate of flow/total cross-sectiona
area. (After Fancher, Lewis, and Barnes.ro)
The preceding attempts to determine a means of calculatin!' .the cond'.'ctance of a rock were made to augment or supplant the empirical relationship of permeability as developed by Darcy. 21 The pore structure of rocks
----
68
does not permit simple classification, and therefore empirical data are required in most cases.
In 1856, Darcy" investigated the flow of water through sand filters for
water purification. His experimental apparatus is shown schematically in
Fig. 2-26." Darcy interpreted his
observations so as to yield results
essentially as given in Eq. (2-7).
0
Q=KAh,-h,
(2-7)
Here, Q represents the volume rate of

flow of water downward through the
cylindrical sand pack of cross-sectional area A and height l. h1 and h,
are the heights above the standard
datum of the water in manometers
located at the input and output
faces respectively and represent the
hydraulic head at points 1 and 2. K
is a constant of proportionality and
was found to be characteristic of the
sand pack.
Dorey's law
Darcy's investigations were con0-= K,4 h1-hz
l
fined to flow of water through sand
orf2=q=K~
packs which were 100 per cent satuA
l
rated with water. Later investigators found that Darcy's law could
FIG. 2-26. Schematic drawing of Henry
Darcy's experiment on flow of water be extended to other fluids as well
through sand. (From Hubbert.22 )
as water and that the constant of
proportionality K could be written
as k/ where is the viscosity of the fluid and k is a property of the rock
alone. The generalized form of Darcy's law as presented in API Code 27
is Eq. (2-8).
k(dP pg dz
)
v, = - ; ds 1.0133 ds X 1()-<
Here,
(2-8)
s = distance in direction of flow and is always positive, cm

volume flux across a unit area of the porous medium in
unit time along flow paths, cm/sec
z = vertical coordinate, considered positive downward, cm
p = density of the fluid, gm/cc
g = acceleration of gravity, 980.665 cm/sec'
dP Ids = pressure gradient along s at the point to which v. refers,
atm/cm
Va =
---
ft9
= viscosity of the fluid, centipoises

k = permeability of the medium, darcys
1.0133 X 106 = dynes/(sq cm)(atm)
dz/ds can be expressed as sin 8 where 8 is the angle between s and the
horizontal. v, can further be defined
-z
as Q/A where Q is the volume rate
of flow and A is the average crosssectional area perpendicular to the
lines of flow. The coordinate system
5 ,.. ... I
applicable to Eq. (2-8) is shown in
/
I
I
Fig. 2-27. The convention of sign is
that v. should be positive when the
fluid is flowing toward increasing
values of the coordinate s. The
quantity of Eq. (2-8) in parentheses
can be interpreted as the total
pressure gradient minus the gradi+.r
+z
ent due to a head of fluid. Thus if
FIG. 2-27. Coordinate system ,to which
generalized Darcy's law is referred.
the system is in hydrostatic equilibrium, there is no flow and the
quantity inside the parentheses will be zero. Equation (2-8) can be
written as follows:
k d (pgz X 10-6
)
v. = ;. ds
1.0133 - p
c2-9l
...
The quantity (d/ds)[(pgz X l(J-'/l,0133) - P] can be considered to be

the negative gradient of a function </>, where
q, = p _ pgz X 10-<
(2-IO)
1.0133
q, is a potential function such that flow will occur from higher values
of q, toward lower values of 1'. M. King Hubbert" defines a potential
function
p
1''=gz+-
(2-11)
which is equivalent to the above except the positive direction of z is taken

upward. Muskat23 defines a velocity potential function
q,u = -k (P pgz)
(2-12)
where the plus sign corresponds to the upward direction of the positiv~ z
coordinate and the minus sign to the downward direction of the positive
z coordinate. The concept of a flow potential is shown to be useful in later
applications.
---
70
The dimensions of permeability can be established by substituting the

units of the other terms into Eq. (2-8).
Let L = length
M =mass
T =time
then
Va=
M
=LT
M
= L'
M
P =LT'
dP
M
ds = L'T'
L
g = T'
dz
. 1ess
ds = dimenSion
Substituting the dimensions in Eq. (2-8)
T=
k
( M
ML)
M/LT L'T' - L' T'
-------------------
-----------
FCNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
----
71
and the porous medium must not react; that is, ~ a reactive fluid fl~ws
through a porous medium, it alters the porou~ medium, therefore changing
the permeability of the medium as flow contmues.
Equation (2-8) is a useful generalization of Darcy's law. However, several simple flow systems are so frequently encountered in the measurement
and application of permeability that it
0
is appropriate to obtain the integrated
form for these systems.
Horizontal Flow
Horizontal rectilinear steady-state
flow is common to virtually all meas0
urements of permeability. Consider a
block of a porous medium as in Fig.
2-28. Here Q, the volume rate of flow, FrG. 2-28. Sand model for rectilinear
is uniformly distributed over the inflow flow of fluids.
face of area A. If the block is 100 per
cent saturated with an incompressible fluid and is horizontal, then
dz/ds = O, dP/ds = dP/dx, and Eq. (2-8) reduces to
kdP
V:.:
M M)
kLT(
= M L'T' - L'T'
-;dx
(2-13)
=LT
separating variables,
g_dx =
k = L'
A rational unit of permeability in the English system of units would be
the foot squared and in the cgs system, the centimeter squared. Both
were found.to be too large a measure to use with porous media. Therefore,
the petroleum industry adopted as the unit of permeability, the darcy,
which is defined as follows:
A porous medium has a permeability of one darcy when a single-phase fluid of
one centipoise viscosity that completely fills the voids of the medium will flow
through it under conditions of viscous flow at a rate of one cubic centimeter per
second per square centimeter cross-sectional area under a pressure or equivalent
hydraulic gradient of one atmosphere per centimeter.
Conditions of viscous flow mean that the rate of flow will be sufficiently
low to be directly proportional to the pressure or hydraulic gradient.
Darcy's law holds only for conditions of viscous flow as defined above.
Furthermore, for the permeability k to be a property of the porous medium
alone, the medium must be 100 per cent saturated with the flowing fluid
when the determination of permeability is made. In addition, the fluid
-~ dP
integrating between the limits 0 and Lin x and P1 and P,, where P, is the
pressure at the inflow face and P2 the pressure at the outflow face,
Q
A
Q
A
f,L dx
- (L - O)
or
= -
f,p, dP
P1
= --k (P,
= -k
- P 1)
_ kA(P1 - P,)
QL
(P, - P,)
(2-14)
If kA is permitted to equal the flow coefficient C defined with Poiseuille's

equation (2-5), it is seen that the two expressions are identical such that
kA =
i l
nfr;
j=l
If a compressible fluid flows through a porous medium, Darcy's law, as
---
72
expressed in. Eq. (2-8), is still valid. However, for steady flow, the mass
rate of flow 1s constant through the system rather than the volume rate of
flow:.. Therefore, the integrated form of the equations differs. Considering
rectilinear flow and steady flow of compressible fluids, Eq. (2-8) becomes
pv. = _ kp dP
dx
pV:
Qo = kA P1 - P2
therefore
since v. =
pressed as
po13cP
(2-16)
differentiating with respect to x
dP
since p
V:i: =
9.
dx =
1"
- (L - 0) = - - (p, - pi)
A
c
m=kAp1 -p,
c
P1 = Po
P2 = Po
then
Pl -
P,Q,
or
Pl
+ PoCP1
+ PoCP2
p, = PoC(P, - P2)
poQo = m = kA PoC(P1 - P 2)
c
L
2L
P,
(2_20)
P2')
PQ
(2-17)
dp
kA (P1
Define P as (P1 + P2)/2 and Q as the volume rate of flow at P. Then

= P,Q,. Substituting in (2-20) above
\cpdx
_.E_
P,2)
Q,
-~ ..! dp)
-~PdP
dx
P,Q, L = '!_ (P12
-dx = --dp
A
C
then
dx
separating variables and integrating,
by definition pQ = m = mass rate of flow; separating variables,

m
k
if
-~pdP
(2-19)
but pQ = p,Q, = constant where Q and Q, are defined at flowing temperature, and p = p,(P /P,).
A
substituting the above quantities in Eq. (2-15),
PA!.J. =
P,Q,
A
by definition
xJ.L
dP
dx
--p-
QIA,
= p,,ecP
1 dp
dP
cpdx = dx
= Cp dx
integrating,
(2-18)
Therefore
dp
dP
- = Cpc13cP_
dx
dx
p 9. =
A
pV;1;
is a constant.
For a slightly compressible liquid the equation of state can be ex-
73
For isothermal flow of ideal gases Eq. (2-15) again applies.
(2-15)
w~ere both the right-hand and left-hand members of Eq. (2-8) are multiplied by the density.
For steady flow
P,
PQ
P, Q =
:;i, (P1
P,2 )
~i (P1 - P,) (P1
Q = kA (P1 - P,)
P2)
(2-21)
which is the same form as (2-14). Therefore flow rates of ideal gases can
be computed from the equations for incompressible liquids as long as the
volume rate of flow is defined at the algebraic mean pressure.
Vertical Flow
Figures 2-29 to 2-31 illustrate three vertical flow systems frequently encountered in practice. Each system is of uniform cross-sectional area A. (In
the developments which follow the fluids are considered incompressible.)
First consider the case when the pressures at the inlet and outlet are
74
PETROLEUM RESERVOffi ENGINEERlNG
equal (free flow) such that only the gravitatioual forces are driving the
fluids (Fig. 2-29).
s-= z
and
dz= 1
ds
For these conditions

:
75
=;(~+pg)=~
=k: pg(~+ 1)
(2-23)
When the flow is upward and the driving head is h (Fig. 2-31) (z defined
as positive downward),
= 0 by definition of flowing conditions
dz
ds
Flow under
head h
dP
ds
-1
v =
Flow under
dP
pgh
-dz= -y--pg
+;( +ef +pg-pg)
head h
Free flow
- kpgh
i
---
~--
]-
. . . . . 1
g_
'~
Q = kApgh
Therefore
::.:~;:.
... ,
'.'
.L
(2-24)
.L
Example 2--8. Linear Vertical Flow. In a city water-filtration plant, it

was desired to filter 5,000 gal of water per hour through a sand filter bed
to remove all the suspended matter and solids from the water. A vertical
cross-sectional view of the filtration unit is shown in Fig. 2-32.
/-~~ ~'. JL
/ : ..~:~;:
i
- ....
FIG. 2-29. Ver-
F1G. 2-30. Verti-
FIG. 2-31. Vertical flow
tical free flow
cal flow downward with head.
upward with head.
downward.
/
/
T
h
-----------
-'-1---------------_--14~-
Therefore Eq. (2-8) reduces to
- Fit~erbed
//
4tJ/
1==-=-==...:.-==--='---=l~
k
Q
v. =-pg= .
kA
Q =-pg
.
FIG. 2-32. Vertical flow through filter bed with constant head.
(2-22)
Next consider the case of downward flow when the driving head (difference
in hydraulic head of inlet and outlet) is h (Fig. 2-30). Then
dz
;I:;
Therefore from Eq. (2-8)
= 1
Data:
Quantity of water to be filtered = 5,000 gal/hr
Thickness of sand filter bed = 4 ft
Permeability of sand filter bed = 1,200 millidarcys
Cross-sectional area of pit (also sand filter bed) = 1,800 sq ft
Viscosity of water at 20C = 1.0 centipoise
Barometric pressure = 14.7 psi, 760 mm Hg, 29.92 in. Hg
----------------- -
76
What level of water must be kept in the pit above the sand filter bed b.
order to filter 5,000 gal of water per hour? Assume that the solids temoved
from the water do not alter the permeability of the bee::.
By definition
Therefore, from Eq. (2-8)
(!J- + 1)
v, = +~dP
dr
5,000 (3,785) = 1.2 (1,800)(30-48) (1)(980) ("'- I- 1)

3,600
1 (1.0133 X 10')
L
y, + 1 =
2.12
h = 1.72 (4) = 6.88
dz= O
ds
ds = -dr
_
kApg
Q - 1.0133 X 10' L
77
9. =
A
--51._
2m-h
(2-25)
+v,
--51._ = ~ dP
Therefore
2m-h
dr
Separating variables and integrating,
_9._ (' dr
27rh
Radial Flow
Jr,,,
A radial-flow system, analogous to flow into a well bore from a cylindrical

drainage region, is idealized in Fig. 2-33.
= 1!_ {
P,
dP
.} P,,,
Q = 2,,-kh(P, - P w)
(2-26)
In (r./rw)
where Q = volume rate of fl.o,v, cc/sec

k = permeability, darcys
h = thickness, cm
. = viscosity, centipoises
Pe= pressure at external boundary, atm
P w = pressure at internal boundary, atm
re = radius to external boundary, cm
rw = radius to internal boundary, cm
In = natural logarithm, base e
Equation (2-26) can be appropriately modified for the flow of compressible fluids. The details of modifying the foregoing equation are omitted,
as they are essentially the same as the ones used in the horizontal, rectilinear-flow systems.
After modification for variations in flowing volumes with changing
pressures Eq. (2-26) becomes
1. Slightly compressible fluids:
m=
or
Considering the cylinder horizontal and radial flow inward as equal ';or,
it is possible to integrate Eq. (2-8) and obtain an equacion ~nrtoady-state
mdfal flow of an incompressible fluid.
(2-27)
Q _ 2,,-kh(P, - P w)
0
-
F1a. 2-33. Sand model for radial flow of fluids to central well bore.
2,,-kh(p, - Pw)
c Jn (r ,/rw)
. ln (re/rw)
where Q, is defined at the pressure P, where the density is

2. Ideal gases:
p,.
(2-28)
78
PETROLEUM RES:S:RVOIR ENGINEERING
Q = 27rkh(P, - P w)
Qr
In (r,/rw)
(2-2g)
where Q is the volume rate of volume at the algebraic mean pressure
Pe+ Pw
Conversion of Units in Darcy's Law. In Darcy's law and the special
.Row equations developed therefrom, the units \Vere presumed to be either
B. consistent set or those obtained from the definition of the darcy, the
accepted unit for the petroleum industry.
It is convenient in many applica.tions of Darcy's law to introduce
commonly used oil-field units. The following is a summary of the more
common equations with the conversion factors to convert to oilfield terminology.
Linear Flow: Liquids (or Gases with Volume at Mean Pressure).
79
where Q is the volume rate of flow, P" and P w are in pounds per square
inch, k is in darcys, is in centipoises, his in feet, and re and r 10 are in consistent units.
The above equations describe the flow in the porous medium when the
rock is 100 per cent saturated with the flowing fluid. Appropriate modifications will be discussed in later sections to take into account presence of
other fluids. Since the above equations describe the flow in the medium,
appropriate volume factors must be introduced to account for changes in
the fluids due to any decrease in pressure and temperature from that of
the medium to standard or stock tank conditions.
Example 2-9 lists various unit conversions to change from the unit of
the darcy to other systems of units.
Example 2-9.
Permeability Conversion Factors.
1 darcy = 1,000 millidarcys; 1 millidarcy = 0.001 darcy
Rate in barrels per day:
kA(P, - P,)
Q = 11271
.
L
1 dare
Rate in cubic feet per day:
Q = 6.3230 kA(P~L- P,)
(2-31)
where Q is the volume rate of flow, P 1 and P 2 are in pounds per square inch,
k is in darcys, is in centipcise, A is in square feet, and L is in feet.
Gases at Base Pressure P& and Average F"lawing Temperature T 1.
Linear:
_ 3.1615kA(P22
Q -
P 22)
P,,L
= 19.88kh(P.' - P w 2 )
P, Jn (r,/rw)
(cc/sec)(cp)
(sq cm)(atm)/cm
= 9 869 X 10-'
(cc/sec)(cp)
sq cm[dyne/(sq cm)(cm)]
= 9.869 X lo-" sq cm
= 1.062 X 10-11 sq ft
(2-32)
(2-33)
where Qb is in cubic feet per day at pressure Pb and flowing temperature

Th Pb is in psia, is in centipoises, L is in feet, k is in darcys, r,, and r w
are in consistent units, A is in square feet, h is in feet, and P 1 , P 2, Pe,
and P w are in psia.
Radial F/qw: Liquids (or Gases with Volume at Mean Pressure).
Rate in barrels per day:
Q=
= 7 324 X Hr' [cu ft/(sec)](cp)
Radial:
Q.
.= (A)(M')/L
k'
(2-30)
_
kh(P, - Pw)
7 082
In (r,/rw)
(2-34)
Q = 39.76 kh(P, - p w)
In (r,/r.)
(2-35)
Rate in cubic feet per day:
(sq ft)(psi)/ft
9 _679 X lQ-4
[bbl/(day)](cp)
1127
(sq ft)(psi)/ft
= 1424 X 10-2
[cu ft/(sec)](cp)
(sq cm)(cm water)/cm
[gal/(min)](cp)
(sq ft)(ft water)/ft
Permeability of Combination Layers

The foregoing flow equations were all derived on the basis of one continuous value of permeability between the inflow and outflow face. It is
seldom that rocks are so uniform. Most porous rocks will have space
variations of permeability. If the rock system is comprised of distinct
layers, blocks, or concentric rings of fixed permeability, the avera"ge
80
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF
permeability of the flow system can be determined by one of the several

averaging procedures.
Consider the oase where the flow system is comprised of layers of porous
rock separated from one another
by infinitely thin impermeable
-.,,._P..:.'--~---">?,
barriers as shown in Fig. '2-34.
h,
The average permeability 7i can be
Q-+~,''!-,.'2--LICh;:-2--1-Q computed as follows:
Q, = Q,
+ Q, + Q,
h, = h,
+ h, + h, =
f':w
~L----<
FIG. 2-34. Linear flow, para11el combination of beds.
FLUID~PERMEATED
BOCKS
81
As all these terms are the same in each of the parallel layers, an evaluation
of the parallel radial system would yield the same solution as obtained in
the linear case.
Example 2-10. Average Permeability of Beds in Parallel. What is the

equivalent linear permeability of four parallel beds having equal widths
and lengths under the following conditions?
Bed
ft
20
15
10
5
1
2
3
4
_ 7iwh,(P1 - P,)
Q' .L
Horizontal permeability,
millidarcys
Pay thickness,
100
200
300
400
where wh, =A.

n
_ k 1wh1(P1 - P2)
Q' Q,
7i =
= k,wh,(P, - P,)
L
so
7i = 100
Therefore
L
and
7ih,
w(P~"i,
or
+ k,wh,(P1 -
L
P2)
P2)
+ k,wh,(P1 -
P,) (k1h1
P,)
.L
w(P~"i,
+ k,,h, + k,h,)
7iih;=Ik;h;
i=l
R,
j=l
,.,,,,,, ,,,,,.,,,,,,.,,,..
Q,-
then generalizing,
l k;h;
l h;
20
+ 200 x 15 + 300 x 10 + 400 x 5 =

20 + 15 + 10 + 5
1-------<P,
(},_
(2-36)
= 200 millidarcys
Another possible combination for flow systems is to have the values of

different permeability arranged in
series as shown in Fig. 2-36. In
P,
case~ of linear flow the average
series permeability for the total
volume can be' evaluated as follows:
P, - p,
f!.P,
Q-+--
+ f!.P, + f!.P,
3
L = L 1 + L, + L, =
L;
FIG. 2-35. Radial flow, parallel

tion of beds.
combina~
same terms appear in the radial-fl.ow
network as in the linear system. The only difference in the two systems is
the manner of expressing the length over which the pressure drop occurs.
Q, = 7iwh(P1 - P,)
.L
Q, = k,wh fJ.P2
.L,
F1G. 2-36. Linear flow, series combination
of beds.
;=l
;-1
From Fig. 2-35 it is noted that the
10,000
50
Q, = Q, = Q, = Q,
T'.
i=l
"=
-n - -
i=l
Q, = k,wh,(P, - P,)
7iwh,(P1 - P 2) = k 1wh 1(P 1 - P2)
l k;h;
l h;
~i=~'~
Q _ k 1wh tJ.P,
1
Q3
Li
_ k 3whtJ.P3
-
.L,
I
82
Linear system
Solving for pressure and substituting for t!.P in the equations above,
Q,L = Q1L 1
'fwh
k,wh
+ Q,,,L, + Q,,,L,
k,wh
k,wh
or
and
250 + 250 + 500 + 1,000

250 + 250 + 500 + 1,000
25
50
100
200
If
f= i=l
2 000
=25=
then generalizing,
r:
n
l~--'-I-'
k, = ____!,__
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_b
(2-37)
I
I
equation
(2-37)
log r,/r w
k, =
L, kJ
The same reasoning can be used

in the evaluation of the radial system (Fig. 2-37) so as to yield the
80 millidarcys
2 000
10+5+5+5
Radial system
j=l
83
f.
L,
il
log r1/r;-1
k
J
lo 2,000/0.5
log 250/0.5 +log 500/250 +log 1,000/500 +log 2,000/1,000
25
50
100
200
= 30.4 millidarcys
(2-38)
=
k, =
Fic. 2-37. Radial flow, series combination

of beds.
log r,/rw
log r;/r,_,
L,
;-1
k]
(2-38)
Channels and Fractures in Parallel

Only the matrix permeability has been discussed in the analysis to this
point. In some sand and carbonate reservoirs the formation frequently
contains solution channels and natural or artificial fractures. These chan-
Example 2-11. Average Permeability of Beds in Series. What is the
eq~ivalent permeability of four beds in series, h3.ving equal formation

thicknesses under the following conditions: (1) for a linear system and
(2) for a ra?ial system if the radius of the penetrating well bore is 6 in.
and the radius of effective drainage is 2,000 ft?
Bed
I
2
3
4
Length of hed,
ft
Horizontal permeability,
millidarcys
250
250
500
1000
25
50
100
200
Assume bed 1 adjacent to the well bore.
nels and fractures do not change the permeability of the matrix but do
change the effective permeability of the flow network. In order to determine the contribution made by a fracture or channel to the total conductivity of the system, it is necessary to express their conductivity in terms
of the darcy.
Channels. Recalling Poiseuille's equation for fluid conductivity of
capillary tubes,
Q = "'"' t!.P
8,,
The total area available to flow is
"1"'
So that the equation reduces to
Q=Act!.P
8 L
(2-3)
--
84
------------------------
Ptn'RoLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERIN"<l
From Darcy's law it is also known that
where h is the thickness of the slot. By analogy to Darcy's law where
t:,.p
Q = Ak L
k = 54.4 X lO'h'
10'(2.54)'r2
:r,
- 0.785(2254.2)(0.0001)
144
0 785
i4!2542) = 0.00122 bbl/day
Therefore the combined rate is 0.012491, or an increase of about 11 per

cent. If the cube matrix has 1-millidarcy permeability, the increase would
be 108 per cent.
Fractures. For flow through slots of fine clearances and unit width
Buckingham (see Croft") reports that
!J.P
= l2vL
h'
The permeability of a fracture 0.01 in. in thickness would be 5,440

darcys or 5,440,000 millidarcys. .
.
.
f _
Under the same flowing conditions used for the circular openmg, .a rac
ture 0.01 in. in thickness across the width of the block would contribute a
flow rate Q", computed as
Q" = 1.1271
kA~
(0.01/12) (1) (1)
1(1)
1.1271(5,440)
1.1271(5,440)(0.00083)
5.1095 bbl/day
Th
b . ed rate is 5 12077 bbl per day, or an increase of 45,437 per
situ fractures and so1ut1on
cavities contribute
t e Itcom
m
bvious that in
cen.
iso
.
substantially to the productivity of any reservoir.
,,-d'
l
1.1271(2,000) 4(144) 1(1)
(2-41)
When h is in inches and k is in darcys,
= 80 x lO'r' = 20 x 10'd2
where d is the diameter of the opening in inches.
Therefore, the permeability of a circular opening 0.005 in. in radius is
2,000 darcys or 2,000,000 millidarcys.
Consider a cube of reservoir rock 1 ft on the side and having a matrix
permeability of 10 millidarcys. If a liquid of 1-centipoise viscosity flows
linearly through the rock, under a pressure of gradient I psi per ft, the rate
of flow will be 0.011271 bbl per day. If a circular opening 0.01 in. in
diameter traverses the same rock, then the rate of flow can be considered
to be the above value plus the rate of flow Q' through the circular opening.
Then
Q' = l.l271kA
12
h'
= 84.4 X lO'h'
k = 12(9.869) (10--')
x lO'r'
where 9.869 X 10-- is a conversion factor from Example 2-9.

Then if r is in inches,
k = 12.50
h'
k=-
then
where h is in centimeters and k in darcys. The permeability of the slot is

given by
where k and r a-re in consistent units.

If r is in centimeters, then k in darcys is given by
r2
vL
D _
=-k
Equating Darcy's and Poiseuille's equations for fluid flow in a tube,

r2
k = 8
(2-39)
k = 8(9.869) (lQ--9) = 12.50
85
( -40)
2
Analogy of Darcy's Law and Other Physical Laws

In using Darcy's Jaw to define fluid flow in porous ~edia it is of~n found
that complex flow systems make a solution practically 1mposs1bl;. In
analyzing Darcy's law it was found that it was comparab_le to Ohms 1aw
for conductance of electrical current and Fourier's equation for conductance of heat in a solid.
Ohin's law as commonly written is
l=T
where I
current, amp
voltage drop, volts
r = resistance of the circuit, ohms
(2-42)
- -------- - - - - -
------
l
I
86
but
or
where
= resistivity, ohm-cm
= I/p = conductivity
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PER::\1EATED ROCKS
cussed in this section pertain to the permeability determinations on small
r=uA
samples of media.
Two methods are used to evaluate the permeability of cores. The method
most used on clean, fairly uniform formations utilizes small cylindricai
samples, perm plugs, approximately 7i in. in diameter and 1 in. in length.
length of flow path, cm

Cross-sectional area of conductor, sq cm
Therefore
AE
pL
(2-43)
The second method uses full-diameter core samples in lengths of 1 to Hf ft.

The fluids used with either method may be gas or any nonreactive liquid.
Perm Plug Method. As core samples ordinarily contain residual oil and
(2-44)
tion prior to the determination of the permeability. Perm plugs are drilled
from the larger cores parallel to the bedding planes. The perm plugs are
dried in an oven or extracted by a soxhlet extractor and then subsequently
Comparing to Darcy's law for a linear system
Q=~Alll'
L
note that
k
!!.P
~-;;=uy~z
(2-45)
water saturation, it is necessary that the sample be subjected to prepara-
dried. The residual fluids are thus removed, and the core sample becomes
100 per cent saturated with air. The perm plug is then inserted in a core
U~ing the _analogue between fluid and electrical systems it is possible to

obtain solut10ns of complex fluid-flow networks by use of electrical networ~. Further analogies of fluid systems with electrical parameters are
poSSible.
The Fourier heat equation can be written as
q = k'A !!.T
L
where
(2-46)
q = rate of heat flow, Btu/hr

= cross-sectional area, sq ft
!!.T = temperature drop, F
L = length of conductor ft
k' = thermal conductivity, Btu/ (br) (ft) (F)
From (2-44)
.,
~~k'
f!.P ~f!.T
87
(2-47)
As in t~e case of Ohm's law, further analogies are possible and will be
discussed in later sections.
The above-listed analogies are useful in that many complex problems of
both heat and _electrical conduction have been solved.analytically so that
the mathe~at10s can ?~ extended readily to problems of flow through
porous media. In add1t1on, many fluid-fio,v problems involving complex
~eometry _can b~ solved by appropriate electrical or heat models scaled
own in Size or time for convenient laboratory performance.
Measurement of Permeability
The permeability of a porous medium can be determined from samples
extracted from the formation or by in-place testing. The procedures dis~
25
FIG. 2-38. Permeability apparatus. (From Stevens.
------------
88
F"CNDA~IENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PER~IEATED ROCKS
holder of a permeability device such as illustrated in Fig. 2-38. An appropriate pressure gradient is adjusted across the perm plug, and the rate of
flow of air through the plug is observed. The requirement that the permeability be determined for conditions of viscous flow is best satisfied by
obtaining data at several flow rates and plotting results as shown in Fig.
2-1!9 from either Eq. (2-20) or (2-21). For conditions of viscous flow, the
6
I I
.~-------
Turbulence-
89
A permeameter designed for the determination of the permeability of

rocks with either gas or liquid is illustrated in Fig. 2-40. Data are ord1-
Viscous/ V"
2
I/"'
o 0 .l
0.2
Q3
0.4
0.5
Q6
Q7
0.8
0.9
1.0
IP,-P,l/L
(a)
I/
FrG. 2-40. Ruska universal permeameter: (A) Rubber stopper; (B) core-hol~er
sleeve (C) core holder; (D) How-meter selector valve; (E) pressur~-regulat1ng
valve.' (F) pressure gauge (G) fill nipple; (H) liquid-gas valve; (I) discharge-fill
valve~ (J) burette. (From Stevens.-:.)
Viscous/
,V
~
M M
IP'- P'J/2L
'
(bl
FrG. .2-39. (a) Plot of experimental results for calculation of permeability, from
k=QL/A(P1-P:1.); (b) plot of experimental result.s for calculation of permeability,
from k=2Q,,Pi,L/A(P~ -P~). (From Stevens.)
data should plot a straight line, passing through the origin. Turbulence is
indicated by curvature of the plotted points. The slope of the straight!ine portion of the curve is equal to k/, from which the permeability can
be computed. To obtain k in darcys, Q must be in cubic centimeters per
second, A in square centimeters, P1 and P 2 in atmospheres, L in centimeters, and . in centipoises.
narily taken from this device at only one flow rate. To assure conditions
of viscous flow, it is the ln\vest possible rate which can be accurately
measured.
Example 2-12. Permeability Measurement. 1. The following da'.3-. were
obtained during a routine permeability test. Compute the permeability of
this core.
Flow rate = 1 000 cc of air at 1 atm abs and 70F in 500 sec
Pressure, do~tream side of core = 1 atm abs, flowing temperature,
70F
Viscosity of air at test temperature = 0.02 centipoise
Cross-sectional area of core = 2.0 sq cm
Length of core = 2 cm
Pressure, upstream side of core = 1.45 atm abs
p,v,
P,v, = Pv
90
p,
+ p, =
2
x 1,000
1.45 + 1 = 1.225
2
In the case of the clamp-type permeameter, the geometry of the flow

paths is complex and an appropriate shape factor must be applied to the
data to compute the permeability of the sample. The shape factor is a
function of the core length and the size of the gasket opening.
The values of permeability obtained from large core measurements to
those for perm plugs (designated as matrix samples) are compared in
Table 2-5. Measurements of permeability on large core samples generally
1.225V
v 815 cc
-Q = tv = 815
500 =
=
L 53
k=9._!:_,.
TABLE
AM'
=
~
1.6;i~~i~)02) x
1,000
k =
15~0 =
Q L
AM'
COMPARISON OF MATRIX AND WHOLE-CORE PERMEABILITY
Core group
Maximum whole core permeability

Whole core permeability,
measured at 90 to fl.ow
direction of maximum value
Matrix permeability
from perm plugs
10
409
0.6
1.2
.0.3
0.2
23
94
10
38
0.3
3.7
2.0
2(1)(2)
..
= 2 (0.4S) X 1,000 = 4.450 millidarcys
Whole-core Measurement. The core must be prepared in the same

manner as perm plugs. The core is then mounted in special holding devices as shown in Fig. 2-41. The measurements required are the same as
for the perm plugs, but the calculations are slightly different.
MetcTI plug
pressurelOJ
r;:::
Low ar"r
Rubber
tubing
Core
Screen
Low air
~~~11
Vacuum
Rubber diSC-!JL_.J\!,
To f/owmefer
Vertical flow
(o)
---
72.5 millidarcys
2-5.
OBSERVATIONS FOR ELLENBURGER LIMESTONE13
2. Assuming that the data indicated above were obtained but water
was used as the flowing medium, compute the permeability of the core.
The viscosity of water at test temperature was 1.0 centipoise.
91
Horizontal flow
(bl
Fra. 2-41. Permeameters for large core samples. (a) Clamp type; (b) Hassler type.
(From Kelton.13 )
yield better indications of the permeability of limestones than do the small

core samples. However, rocks which contain fractures in situ frequently
separate along the natural planes of weakness when cored. Therefore, the
conductivity of such fractures will not be included in the laboratory data.
In general, the laboratory measurement of permeability represents a minimum value except in the case of highly argillaceous materials.
Factors Affecting Permeability Measurements
In the techniques of permeability measurement previously discussed,
certain precautions must be exercised in order to obtain accurate results.
When gas is being used as the measuring fluid, corrections must be made
for gas slippage. When liquid is the testing fluid, care must be taken that
it does not react with the solids in the core sample. Also corrections can
be applied for the change in permeability because of the reduction in confining pressure on the sample.
Effect of Gas Slippage on Permeability Measurements. Klinkenberg"
has reported variations in permeability as determined using gases as the
flowing fluid from that obtained when using nonreactive liquids. These
variations were ascribed to slippage, a phenomenon well known with respect to gas flow in capillary tubes. The phenomenon of gas slippage
occurs when the diameter of the capillary openings approach the mean
free path of the gas.
The mean free path of a gas is a function of the molecular size and the
kinetic energy of the gas. Therefore, the "Klinkenberg effect" is a function
92
93
of the gas with which the permeability of the porous medium is determined.
Figure 2-42 is a plot of the permeability of a porous medium as determined
at various mean pressures using hydrogen, nitrogen, and carbon dioxide as
the flowing fluids. Note that for each gas a straight line is obtained for the
The constant b in the above equation depends on the mean free path of
the gas and the size of the openings in the porous medium. Since permeability is, in effect, a measure of the size openings in a p.orous medium, it is
found that b is a function of permeability. Figure 2-43 represents a corre-
~
~
5.o~-------------~--~
~
0
:<e 4.51--+---+----,l'--+----t,..-f--+-l
3
2
4.0l--+--f;..-+---,7"-f--+--1--+-J
:c
t; D.5
3.5j--:b"~f>"'-Jb--'9--;::=:::=::;--J
.E
e' 0.3
Hydrogen
8_
l:
c
~,~<""'-'-+---+--+--j o Nitrogen
0.4
0.6
Reciprocal
0.8
mean
1.0
1.2
.: o.
"
1.4
pressure, ATM-t
observed permeability as a function of the reciprocal of the mean pressure

of the test. The data obtained with lowest molecular weight gas yield the
straight line with greater slope, indicative of a greater slippage effect. All
the lines when extrapolated to infinite mean pressure (1/P = 0) intercept
the permeability axis at a common point. This point is designated kL, or
the equivalent liquid permeability. Klinkenberg and others established
that the permeability of a porous medium to a nonreactive homogeneol.1."'
single-phase liquid was equal to the equivalent liquid permeability.
The linear relationship between the observed permeability and the reciprocal of mean pressure can be expressed as follows:
L -
+ (b/P)
k, -
mp1
(2-48)
permeability of medium to a single liquid phase completely

filling the pores of the medium
k, = permeability of medium to a gas completely filling the pores
of the medium
P = mean flo-\ving pressure of the gas at which kg was observe6
b = constant for a given gas in a given medium
m = slope of the curve
where kL
'
-...... ......
'-.
- ..........
-.......
-~
r-... ....
r...... ,....._
0.05
0.03
FIG. 2-42. Permeability of core sample L to hydrogen, nitrogen, and carbon dioxide
at different pressures. Permeability to isooctane, 2.55 millidarcys. (From Klinkenberg.:rr)
0.2
!1
.o. Carbon dioxide

0.2
'
'
....
0.02
o.o
'
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.1
0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0

2 3
5
10 20 30 50 100 200 300 500 1,000
Permeability to nonreacting liquid kL, millidarcys
FIG. 2-43. Correlation of Klinkenberg factor b with permeability. (From American

Petroleum lnstitute? 9 )
lation of b with kL, determined from measurements made on 175 samples. 19

The factor b increases with decreasing permeability as slippage effects become proportionately greater for smaller openings.
To obtain accurate permeability measurements on small samples requires approximately 12 flow tests. Permeability values should be determined for four flow rates, each at three different values of mean pressure.
This procedure permits the obtaining of three values of permeability under
viscous flow conditions at three mean pressure values, from which the permeability to liquid can be graphically determined.
Effect of Reactive Liquids on Permeability. While water is commonly
considered to be nonreactive in the ordinacy sense, the occurrence of swelling clays in many reservoir rock materials results in water being the most
frequently occurring reactive liquid in connection with permeability determinations. Reactive liquids alter the internal geometry of the porous
medium. This phenomenon does not vitiate Darcy's law but-rather results
in a neW porous medium the permeability of which is determined by the
new internal geometcy.
The effect of clay swelling in the presence of water is particularly important in connection with the determination of the permeability of the
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----------------------
94
95
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED BOCKS
graywackes common to the Gulf Coast and the arkosic sediments of California. The degree of hydration of the clays is a function of the salinity of
the water. Permeability changes of 50-fold or more may be noted between
that determined with air and that determined with fresh water. The effect
of water salinity on the observed permeability is illustrated in Table 2..fl
Overburden Pressure. When the core is removed from the formation,

all the confining forces are removed. The rock matrix iS permitted to expand in all directions, partially
1,000
changing the shapes of the fluid-flow
600
paths inside the core.
Core-5 - 400
Core-6 - - Compaction of the core due to
200
.
!\
100
overburden pressure may cause as
;i
60 '.
much as a 60 per cent reduction in
40
: I :11
the permeability of various formao~
I 11'
'
tions, as shown in Fig. 2-46. It is
10
I j i't,
11
I To<
6
noted that some formations are
wi1h
4
woter
'I
much more compressible than others;
'
2
11 I
I
.1 1 I
thus more data are required to
1
'
I
I I I r
I
develop empirical correlations which
0.6
''
'
0.4 '
will permit the correction of sur,
:
'
I
iJ
1
!111
I
:
I
' I
face permeability for overburden
I I
11
n111
:
''
0. 1
preSffilres.
0.06
' ' I I 'I I l I I!!
0.04
'
' ' ' ''
o ! w I o isw! w o ! \Alc.Wwl llllW; iAloM
0.0 2
Factors in Evaluation of PermeaFluid sequence 0.0 1
bility from Other Parameters
Permeability, like porosity, is a Fro. 2-44. The permeability history of
two Stevens sand cores when subjected to
variable which can be measured for and
measured with various fluids. (From
each rock sample. To aid better in Muskat.m)
the understanding of fluid flow in
rocks and possibly to reduce the number of measurements required on
rocks, correlations among porosity, permeability, surface area, pore size,
TABLE 2-6. EFFECT OF WATER SALINITY ON PERMEABILITY OF
N ATU.RA.L
CoREszs (Grains per gallon of chloride ion as shown")

Zone
K.
Kum
Kwo
K,.
s
s
s
s
s
34
34
34
34
34
4,080
24,800
40,100
39,700
12,000
1,445
11,800
1,290
10,000
23,0-00
20,400
5,450
1,380
10,600
18,600
17,600
4,550
s
s
s
s
s
34
34
34
34
34
4,850
22,80-0
34,800
27,000
12,500
1,910
13,60-0
23,600
21,0-00
4,750
1,430
6,150
7,800
15,400
2,800
925
4,010
5,460
s
s
s
s
13,60-0
7,640
11,100
5,160
1,788
4,640
4,250
2,520
1,500
866
6,500
2,630
2,380
2,180
2,080
1,585
34
34
34
34
36
2,140
2,080
1,230
2,150
T
T
T
T
T
36
36
36
36
36
3,340
2,640
2,820
2,040
2,500
3,180
2,080
2,730
1,920
2,400
2,900
1,900
2,700
1,860
2,340
2,860
Field
K,,.
K,.,
K.
1,190
885
7,400
---
3,360
4,020
3,090
1,840
15,300
17,300
4,600
13,100
1,680
4,200
2,010
1,750
17,100
4,510
14,300
3,280
17.2
147
270
1,680
167
736
3,490
326
1,970
3,860
10,90-0
157
5.0
19.5
9.9
1,030
2.4
2,790
2,020
180
794
197
119
6.2
4.1
1,960
9,000
13,800
5,220
12,900
973
4,150
2,540
8,200
2,010
2,690
1,860
2,490
2,340
2,820
1,630
2,280
2,650
1,860
1,490
2,460
1,550
2,060
2,460
1,040
,,
"'
While fresh water may cause the cementation material in a core to swell
owing to hydration it is a reversible process. A highly saline water can be
flowed through the core and return the permeability to its original value.
The reversibility of the effect of reactive liquids is illustrated in Fig. 2-44.
Care must be taken that laboratory permeability values are corrected
to liquid values obtained with water whose salinity corresponds to formation water. An example of the variation of air permeability and formation
water permeability is shown in Fig. 2-45. California and Gulf Coast sands
will normally exhibit lower formation permeabilities than those measured
by air in the laboratory.
1
"
. .. .y.
640
~320
"For example. K,. means permeability to air; K 000 means permeability to 500 grains
p'er gal chloride solution; K,,, means permeability to fresh water.
160
80
:c0 40
1'
~
,/
20
,,.
\
10
20
v.
v. '
,. ,/
40
80
160 320 640 1,280 2,560
Air permeability, millidarcys
Fra. 2-45. Relationship of permeabilities measured with air to those measured with
water having a concentration of 20,000 to 25,000 ppm chloride ion.
9i
:PETROLEUM RESERVOffi ENGINEERING
and other v ..rial>les have been made. The reasoning behind some of the
correlations among porosity, permeability, and surface area are presented
here to enable the reader to gain some understanding of the interrelation
of the physical properties of rocks. Although these relations are not
Darcy's law, holds for viscous conditions of flow. It has previously been
shown that
r'
(2-39)
k=8
96
"--
,,F
.~
>:::::
'-....
G,
H
C"
If a porous system is conceived to be a bundle of capillary tubes, then

it can be shown that the permeability of the medium depends on the pore
size distribution and porosity.
Consider a medium formed of a bundle of capillary tubes with the spaces
between the tubes sealed by a cementing material. If the conductors are
all of the same size and are arranged in cubic arrangement, then, neglecting
wall thickness of the tubes, the number of tubes per unit area is given by
Porosity _ ~/4 _ .!...
Area/tube - .,,.,.. - 4r'
The rate of flow is then given by
.,,.,..
Therefore
!il
(ol
~ 100
~
Q. 90
~ ....._
A;
-- _,_- -
~""
'--..:::: .....~ ;...__
!" c
:~
~.e 80
o~
~
;=:
D
4r' 8
Overburden pressure, psi
Q = .!._m-'AP = kAP
3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
e<D
if
where the porosity
</> =
si: 600
Therefore
gE
32
If the arrangement of the tubes is the most compact possible, the number of tubes per unit area is given by
~
1
4 sin 60 + .,,.,.. = 3.46r'
70
~ 0 60
~ ~
&'.~
50
k =
1,000 2,000 3i000 4,000
~000
(bl
FIG. 2-46. Changes in permeability with overburden pressure. (a) Curve A-Colorado; 3.96 millidarcys; B---Southern California coast, 40.9; C---San Joaquin Valley,
Calif., 45.0; D-Arizona, 4.36; E-Arizona, 632; F---San Joaquin Valley, Calif., 40.5;
G-SanJoaquin Valley, Calif., 55.5; H-Southern California coast, 318.8. (b) A-basal
Tuscaloosa, Miss., 229 millidarcys, 15 per cent porosity; B-basal Tuscaloosa, Miss.,
163, 24; C---Southern California coast, 335, 25; D-Los Angeles basin, Calif., 110, 22.
(From Patt and Davis.30 )
quantitative, they are indicative of the interdependence of rock characteristics.

Use of Capillary Tubes for Flow Network. The simplest expression for
the rate of flow jn a circular conduit is Poiseuille's equation, which, like
Note, therefore, that the permeability for this simple case is a function
not only of the pore size but of the arrangement of the tubes. The arrangement of the tubes is defined by the porosity </> for these simple cases.
Consider a system comprised of a bundle of capillary tubes of the same
radii and length; k, the permeability, can be written as a function of porosity as follows:
k = <Pr'
8
The internal surface area per unit of pore volume can be derived as
follows:
Surface area = n21'TL
Pore volume = n.,,.,..L
2
n21'TL 2
r=Therefore S = - - = S,
n.,,.,..L
r
----------------
l
98
where SP is the internal surface area per unit pore volume. Substituting
the above into the preceding expression gives
flow path L. as compared with the length L across the porous medium.
Then
v =vL.
--
I 
4
(2-49)
k.S.'
which is the Kozeny equation where k, is the Kozeny constant.

Wyllie" derived the Kozeny relation from Poiseuille's law as follows
(symbols in cgs units):
where
"L=koL.
v = <t>m'
or
(!:..)'
f;.p
ko L L.
In a porous medium, m is equal to the ratio of the pore space per unit
volume of the medium q, to the surface per unit volumes, so that
s
The surface per unit volume of the medium s is related to the surface
per unit volume of pore space SP as follows:
s = q,S,
Introducing the concept of mean hydraulic radius m, where

volume of conduit
m = area of wetted surface
for a circular pipe,
-irr'L
m2 6.P
m = p_
v = velocity of flow, cm/sec

d = diameter of conduit, cm
11P = pressure loss, dynes/sq cm
. = fluid viscosity, poises
L = average path length, cm
m = 2..-rL =

Correcting Poiseuille's lawfor the actual flow conditions gives
I/k, is substituted,
99
m=-
therefore
S,
v_
Then
From Darcy's law
k f;.p
v=--
which when substituted into Poiseuille's laws yields
(2-14)
m' 11P
v=--2 L
Poiseuille's law in this form is applicable to noncircular conduits.

Wyllie" then suggests that the factor 2 in the denominator of the above
expression be generalized and replaced by a shape factor ko, which takes
on values for porous materials ranging from 2.5 to 3.0.
The conduit in a porous medium is conceived by Wyllie to be of a crosssectional area ct>A, where 4> is the fractional porosity and A is the crosssectional area of the porous medium. A further correction must be applied
to the length of the conduit, for the average distance traversed by the
.fluid is greater than the distance L between two mutually perpendicular
faces across which flow is occurring. The actual fluid velocity Va within the
pores of the medium is greater than the macroscopic velocity v, such as implied by Q/A, where Q is the volume rate of flow and A is the cross-sectional
area of the porous medium. The increased velocity is due to the decreased
area actually available for flow and to the increased length of the actual
_p__11P(L)'
- koS.' L L.
(L )'

koS.'
L.
where k is the permeability of the porous medium.

Let
then
(L./L)'
kz
r = tortuosity of the porous medium
= koT
= Kozeny constant
(2-49)
Carman" reported that the value of k, was in all cases about 5. To apply
Eq. (2-49) to the calculation of permeability, the porosity </>, the surface
area per unit pore volume Sp, and the Kozeny constant kz must be kn~~
Rapoport and Leas" have reported a method of calculation of permeability
based on Eq. (2-49) and determination of S, from capillary data. Other
investigators have reported discrepancies in the assumpti~n that kz = 5.
In consolidated porous media there is little reason to believe k, to be a
constant, but rather, k, depends on ko and r for the particular medium.
l
101
Wyllie" and ot.hers have report.ed that k, can be evaluat.ed from electrical
properties of the porous material when saturated with an electrolyt.e.
2-47. The retort method has several disadvantages as far as commercial

work is concerned. First in order to remove all the oil, it is necessary to
approach temperatures on the order of !~ to. l~00F. At t_em"'.'ratures
of this magnitude the wat.er of crystallizat10n withm the rock IS driven off,
100
FLUID SATURATIONS
In the previous sections of this chapter the storage and conduction capacity of a porous rock were discussed. To the engineer there is yet another
important factor to be determined. What is the fluid content of the rock?
In most oil-bearing formations it is believed that the rock was completely
saturat.ed with wat.er prior to the invasion and trapping of petroleum. The
les.i dense hydrocarbons are considered to migrate to positions of hydrostatic and dyoamic equilibrium, thus displacing water from the interstices
of the structually high part of the rock. The oil will not displace all the
water which originally occupied these pores. Thus, reservoir rocks normally will contain both petroleum hydrocarbons and water (frequently
referred to as connate water) occupying the same or adjacent pores. To
determine the quantity of hydrocarbons accumulated in a porous rock formation, it is necessary to determine the fluid saturation (oil, water, and
gas) of the rock material.
Methods of Determining Fluid Saturation
There are two approaches to the problem of determining the original
fluid saturations within a reservoir rock. The direct approach is the selecting of rock samples and measuring the saturations of these samples as they
are recovered from the parent formations. The indirect approach is to determine the fluid saturation by measuring some other physical property of
the rock. The direct approach is all that will be discussed here. The indirect approach, such as using electric logs or capillary-pressure measurements, will be discussed in later chapt.ers.
Determination of Fluid Saturations from Rock Samples
In det.ermining fluid saturations directly from a sample removed from a
reservoir, it is necessary to understand first how these values are measured;
second, what these measured values represent; and third, knowing what
they represent, how they can be applied.
In order to measure values of original rock saturations there have been
essentially three methods devised. These methods involve either the evaporation of the fluids in the rock or the leaching out of the fluids in the rock
by extraction with a solvent.
One of the most popular means of measuring the initial saturations is
the retort method. This method takes a small rock sample and heats the
sample so as to vaporize the water and the oil, which is condensed and
collected in a small receiving vessel. An electric retort is shown in Fig.
Fla. 2-47. Retort distillation apparatus. (From Stevens.z)
causing the water-recovery values to be great.er ~n i'.181' the interstitial

water. An example of such a syst.em is illustrat.ed m F1~. 2-48._ ;s:ere the
the first 30 rm n was approximat.ely the mt.erst1tial
wat er removed m
. . water.
As the application of heat was continued, the water of crystallization was
removed amounting to approximat.ely 2 cc of water out of a total recovery
of g cc. Thus, it is seen that an error of 33 per cent is possi?le if the wat.er
of crystallization is not accounted for. The second error V:h1ch occurs from
retorting samples is that the oil itself when heated to high temperatures
has a tendency to crack and coke. This change of a hydrocarbon molecule
102
103
tends to decrease the liquid volume and also in some cases coats the internal
walls of the rock sample itself. The effect of cracking and coking in a retort is shown in Fig. 2-49, wherein 0.4 cc of oil actually in the sample yields
about 0.25 cc in the receiving vessel. Thus a fluid correction must be made
on all sample data obtained with a retort. Before retorts can be used, calibration curves must be prepared on various gravity fluids to correct for
the losses from cracking and coking with the various applied temperatures.
Another correction curve can also be obtained which correlates recovered
The other method of determining fluid saturation is by extraction with

a solvent. Extraction can be accomplished by a modified ASTM method
or a centrifuge method. In the
standard distillation test the core is
placed so that a vapor of toluene,
gasoline, or naphtha rises through
Condenser
the core and is condensed to reflux
back over the core. This process
leaches out the oil and water in the
core. The water and extracting fluid
are condensed and are collected in a
graduated receiving tube. The \Vater
settles to the bottom of the receiving Graduated tube
tube because of its greater density,
and the extracting fluid refluxes back
into the main heating vessel. The
process is continued until no more
Electric heater
water is collected in the receiving
tube. The distillation apparatus is
shown in Fig. 2-50. The water satu- FIG. 2-50. Modified ASTM extraction apration can be determined directly; paratus.
i.e.,
S _
water, cc
pore volume, cc
2
1.2
_v
!/""
.I
~ 0.6
0.4
0.2
10
'
8 0.8
LO
20
[/
10
30
40
50
60
,.
I/
.
V"
I
0.2
Time, min
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
Oil recovery, cc
Fxa. 2-48. Typical retort calibration curve

for water from a Wilcox sand. Altair
Field core, depth 8,270 ft, 107 millidarcys,
22.0 per cent porosity. 6.2 cc plateau
reading. (From Emdahl.1"')
FIG. 2-49. Typical retort calibration curve

for oil from a Wilcox sand. Clay Creek
Field, 43 API oil, observed trace= 0.1
cc in retort. (From Emdahl.34')
API oil gravity with initial API oil gravity. It is normal for the oil gravity
of the recovered liquid to be less than the oil gravity of the liquid originally
in the rock sample. These curves can be obtained by running "blank"
runs (retorting known volumes of fluids of known properties). The retort
is a rapid method for the determination of fluid saturations, and utilizing
the corrections yields satisfactory results. It gives both the water and oil
volumes, so that the oil and water saturations can be calculated from the
following formulas:
Sw =
water, cc
(2-50)
pore volume, cc
80
s, =
oil, cc
pore volume, cc
1 -
s. - s.
(2-51)'
(2-52)
VJ
The oil saturation is an indirect determination. It is necessary to note

the weight of the core sample prior to extraction. Then, after the core has
been cleaned and dried, the sample is again weighed. The oil saturation
as a fraction of pore volume is given by
(wt of wet core, gm - wt of dry core, gm - wt of water, gm)
(pore volume, cc)(density of oil, gm/cc)
(2-53)
The core can be completely cleaned in the ASTM extraction apparatus,
or once all water is removed, the remainder of the cleaning can be done in
a soxhlet extractor (Fig. 2-51). The mechanics of the soxhlet extracto"
are essentially the same as the ASTM extraction apparatus except that no
receiving vessel is supplied for trapping water. The cleaning solution is
continually vaporized and condensed on the core. This action leaches out
the oil and water from the core. The ASTM extraction method does less
da:inage to a core sample and results in perhaps the cleanest core of any
of the saturation determinations. The core sample is ready for porosity
or permeability determinations after this extraction process.
Before permeability and porosity can be measured, it is necessary to
104
clean the core sample in a device sjmilar to the soxhlet extractor or one
which uses centrifugal force. Thus, using the ASTM distillation only one
additional step is required to obtain information from which to calculate
fluid saturations in the core.
Another method of determining
water saturation is to use a centrifuge (Fig. 2-52). A solvent is injected
into the centrifuge just off center.
Owing to centrifugal force it is
thro,vn to the outer radii, being
Condenser
forced to pass through the core
sample. The solvent removes the
water and oil from the core. The
outlet fluid is trapped, and the quantity of water in the core is measured.
The use of the centrifuge provides a
very rapid method because of the high
forces which can be applied. At the
Soxh/ef extractor
same time that the water content is
determined, the core is cleaned in
Thimble
preparation for the other measurements. The values of v..rater and oil
saturation are calculated by using
Eqs. (2-50) to (2-53) as for the ASTM
extraction method.
There is another procedure for
saturation determination which is
used with either of the extraction
methods. The core as received from
the well is placed in a modified mercury
porosimeter (Fig. 2-14) wherein
Electric heater
the bulk volume and gas volume are
measured. The volume of water is
determined by one of the extraction
methods. The fluid saturations can
Fra. 2-51. Soxhlet extractor.
be calculated from these data.
In connection with all procedures for determination of fluid content, a
value of pore volume must be established in order that fluid saturations
ca.n be expressed as percentage of pore volume. Any of the porosity procedures previously described can be used. Also the bulk volume and gas
volume determined from the mercury porosimeter can be combined with
the oil and water volumes obtained from the retort to calculate pore volume, porosity, and fluid saturations.
FUNDA:.VIENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PER~IEATED ROCKS
105
Fra. 2-52. Centrifugal core cleaning. (Courtesy of Core Laboratories, Inc.)
Factors Affecting Fluid Saturations of Cores

The core sample delivered to the laboratory for fluid-saturation determinations was obtained from the ground by rotary, side-wall, or cabletool coring. In all cases, the fluid content of these samples has ?"en altered
by two processes. First, especially in the case of rotary ~rilling, the formation is under a greater pressure from the mud column 1n the 'veil than
from the fluid in the formation. The differential pressure across the well
face causes mud and mud filtrate to invade the formation immediately ~d
jacent to the well surface, thus flushing the formation with mud and its
filtrate. As most drilling is done with water-base mud, water filtrate mvades the core and displaces some of the oil and perhaps some of _the
original interstitial water. This displacement process cha~ges the or1g1nal
fluid contents of the in-place rock. Second, as the sample is brought to the
106
surface, the confining pressure of the fluid column is constantly decreasing.

The reduction of pressure permits the expansion of the entrapped water,
oil, and gas. Gas, having the greater coefficient of expansion, expels oil
and water from the core. Thus, the contents of the core at the surface have
been changed from those which existed in the formation. The core has
been invaded with water, and the contents subsequently subjected to a
solution-gas-drive mechanism. As the invasion of the filtrate precedes the
core bit, it is not possible to use pressurized core barrels to obtain undisturbed samples.
In the case of drill cuttings, chips, or cores from cable-tool drilling, they
also have undergone definite physical changes. If little or no fluid is maintained in the well bore, the formation adjacent to the well surface is depleted owing to pressure reduction. As chips fall into the well, they may
or may not be invaded, depending on the fluids in the well bore and the
physical properties of the rock. In all probability, fluid will permeate this
depleted sample, resulting in flushing. Thus, even cable-tool cores have
undergone the same two processes as was noted in the case of rotary coring
but in reverse order.
107
cent, the water-saturation values obtained with oil-base muds may be considered to be representative of the initial water saturations in the reservoir.
Hence, it is possible to obtain fairly representative values of in-place water
saturations by selecting the fluids with which the core samples are obtained.
Kennedy et al. studied cores with permeabilities ranging from 2.3 to 3,040
Amico fitting top
Neoprene gosket
f-in. st~el tubing
~-in. steel tubing
In an attempt to understand better the over-all effect of the physical

changes which occur in the core because of flushing and fluid expansion,
Kennedy, Van Meter, and Jones" undertook a study to simulate rotary

coring techniques. In this study a cylindrical sample was used which had
a hole drilled in the middle to represent the well bore (Fig. 2-53). Mud
under pressure was supplied to the middle hole, allowing filtrate to enter
the core sample. The oil and water forced from the core were collected,
and the amount was measured at the outer boundary. The values gave
the change in saturation caused by the flushing action of the filtrate. The
pressure on the core was reduced to atmospheric pressure, and the amount
'Neoprene gasket
Brass end plate
Copper seal ring
of water and oil that remained in the core was determined. The total
effect of both flushing and expansion because of pressure reduction was
thus measured.
Schematic illustrations of the changes in saturation resulting from these
tto processes for oil-base and water-base muds are shown in Fig. 2-54. It
is noted that the original flushing action reduced the oil saturation by
approximately 14 per cent. The expansion to surface pressure displaced
water and additional oil. The final water saturation was greater than the
"o"ring seol
Steel ring
Compression screw
Amico fitting top
FIG. 2-53. Sectional view of test cell with core in place. (From Kennedy, Van Meter,
and Jones.~)
water saturation prior to coring. In coring with an oil-base mud, the
filtrate is oil, so that the flushing action did not alter the initial water
saturations but did result in replacement ot approximately 20 per cent of
millidarcys and porosities ranging from 5.2 to 21.7 per cent. The drilling
the initial oil. On pressure depletion a small fraction of the water was ex-
fluids used were clay bentonite, lime starch, and oil-base muds with viscosities from 65 to 133 centipoises and water losses from zero fof the oil-
pelled, reducing the water saturation from 49.1 to 47.7 per cent. The oil
aturation was reduced by both processes from 50.9 to 26. 7 per cent. Thus,
even when high water saturations are involved, up to approitlmately 50 per
base mud to 6.8 cc AP! for the clay bentonite mud.

Kennedy et al. correlated hydrocarbon saturations before and after coring. These correlations are shown in Fig. 2-55. It is. noted that for cores
108
of 5- and 10-millidarcy permeability, the initial and final hydrocarbon

saturation yields an approximate straight line for initial saturations greater
than 15 per cent. Data for cores of from 127- to 3,040-millidarcy permeability were correlated in the same manner as the data for the low-perme-
Gas
Oil
67.6
Oil
53.4
34.8
Oil
26.7
calculate the volume of filtrate and reservoir water in the core. A large
fraction of the initial reservoir water may have been displaced by the invading filtrate, so the tracer method would give low values of reservoir
water saituration.
c
Water
32.4
Original saturation
46.6
Saturation ofter
Weter
38.5
Residua I
100
e so
-"
~
:g
~
Water
109
60
40
15
c
;:;:
20
,--
Core
Permeability, md
o LimeskJne No.3
5.6
6.7
Limestone No.4
+Limestone No. 5
saturot1on
10
mud flushing, before
20
30
40
50
60
70
10.0
80
90
100
Initial oil sotur.otion
pressure reduction
(a)
Cal
100
Gas
Oil
32.9
25.6
filtrate
18.0
Oil
26.7
Water
Water
49.1
49.1
Water
Oil
50.9
47.7
!3
+:
e
-"g
60
- +. + ..
0
~
+
~
40
20
I>-~
Soturotion ofter
Residual saturation
mud flushing, before

pressure reduction
{bl
F10. 2-54. Typical changes in saturation of cores :flushed with water-base and oil-base
muds. (a) Water-base mud; (b) oil-base mud. (From Kennedy, Van Meter, and
Jones.m)
ability samples. These also resulted in a straight-line correlation for initial

hydrocarbon saturations greater than 15 per cent.
Correlations such as presented in Fig. 2-55 can be used to correct saturations me~sured from cores to original conditions. Additional data are
required before universal correlations can be established.
Attempts have been made to use tracers in the drilling fluid to determine
the amount of water in the core which is due to mud :filtrate invasion. The
theory was that mud filtrate displaced only oil. Thus, when the core is
recovered to the surface, the salt concentration of the core water can be
determined. Knowing the salt concentration in the reservoir water and
the tracer concentration in the drilling fluid, it was thought possible to
i--
i--
Core
Permeability, md
o Limestone No. I
127.?
Limestone No. 2
103.2
111.0
Woll Creek No. 2
+WOodblne
304.0
;:;:
Original saturation
--
80
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Initial oil saturation

(b)
FIG. 2-55. Laboratory determination of fluid saturation of oil-field cores subjected to

mud flushing and pressure depletion. (From Kennedy, Van Meter, and Jones.35 )
In order to obtain realistic values of fluid saturation it is necessary to

choose the proper drilling fluid or resort to correlations similar to that reported by Kennedy et al. or to use indirect methods of saturation determination.
The Use of Core-detemtined Fluid Saturations
The saturation values obtained directly from rock samples are usually
not reliable for determining the quantity of each fluid in the rock. Other
uses exist for fluid-saturation determinations from core samples. It has
already been shown that water saturations obtained from core samples cut
with oil-base mud are essentially reliable. The saturations of cores cut
with water-base mud are used to determine the original oil-gas contact,
original oil-water contact, and whether a sand is productive of oil or gas.
...
-----------------
111
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED BOCKS
The determination of contacts is made by carefully studying the residual oil saturations of the cores as a function of depth. In the oil-saturatr.<l
regions the samples will have essentially a constant value for residual oil
saturations, probably 15 per cent or greater. In the gas region the oil saturation is small or vanishes. Thus the depth of the gas-oil contact is defined
by a sharp increase in oil saturation. In the water zone, the oil saturation
gradually disappears with depth. By observing these changes in oil saturation, it is possible to choose the depth of the water-oil contact.
It is possible to establish a correlation of the water content of cores and
permeability from which it can be determined whether a formation wiJLDe
prpductive of hydrocarbons. Such
a
correlation is shown in Fig. 2-56,
1001~~~~r;--,-.,.-l~wherein it can be noted that low5011-+-+--++-H-~~~-~
permeability formations with core
Upi;er. limit of
"'
..;..
total water for
water
saturations as high as 55 per
E 2011-r.+--il-'-~.+:.H ail and gas ,___
cent may be considered productive.
,._~
~
sands
~ 1011-+-+--+_-:+~~f-f-+-+--+--1
For higher permeability formations
the upper limits of water satura~ sf-+-+-"i-.,.'.P";,_;~+-+-+-f---1
if
. :=:
tions may be slightly less than 50
2:1-+-+--l'-:~+"~:~l--t--+-+--+---1
per cent. Thus, from the investigation of saturation values of cores
1
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 so 90 100 one can gather that a formation
Total water content, lo pore space
would be productive if the water
FIG. 2-56. Limiting values of total core saturation in the surface samples
water for oil and gas production-water- were less than 50 per cent.
base muds. (From Emdahl.
Another reason for measuring fluid
saturations of surface samples is to
obtain other correlations such that direct or indirect measurements of other
physical properties may also give indications of initial fluid distributions.
The measurement of electrical resistivity of the core samples, prior to
cleaning, permits correlations of electrical resistivities with other physical
properties to aid in electrical log interpretation.
Thus, in summary, it is seen that although fluid-saturation determinations made on core samples at the surface may not give a direct indication
of the saturations within the reservoir, they are of value and do yield very
useful and necessary information.
of the voids and the fluids with which those voids are filled. The fluids of
interest in petroleum reservoirs are oil, gas, and water. Oil and gas are
nonconductors. Water is a conductor when it contains dissolved salts.
Current is conducted in water by movement of ions and can therefore be
termed electrolytic conduction. The resistivity of a. material is the reciprocal of conductivity and is commonly used to define the ability of a
material to conduct current. The resistivity of a material is defined by.the
following equation:
rA
p=(2-54)
L
where p = resistivity
r = resistance
A = cross-sectional area of the conductor
L = length of the conductor
llO
.. -
:-,_: \
81
For electrolytes, p is commonly reported in ohm-centimeters, r is expressed in ohms, A in square centimeters, and L in centimeters. In the
study of the resistivity of soils and rocks, it has been found that the resistivity can be expressed more conveniently in ohm-meters. To convert to
ohm-meters from ohm-centimeters, divide the resistivity in ohm-centimeters by 100. In oil-field practice, the resistivity in ohm-meters is commonly represented by the symbol R with an appropriate subscript to define
the conditions to which R applies.
Formation Factor. The most fundamental concept in considering electrical properties of rocks is that of formation factor.
As defined by Archie", the formation factor is
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY OF FLUID-SATURATED ROCKS
(2-55)
where R. is the resistivity of the rock when saturated with water having a
resistivity of Rw.
The relationships between the electrical properties and other physical
9roperties of the rock are complex but can be illustrated by the following
developments.
Consider a cube of salt water (cube 1, Fig. 2-57) having a cross-sectional
area A, a length L, and a resistivity Rw. If an electrical current is caused
to flow across the cube through an area A and a length L, the resistance of
the cube can be determined. Let this resistance be r,. Then
RwL
T1=A
Resistivity Relations
Porous rocks are comprised of an aggregate of minerals, rock fragments..
and void space. The solids, with the exception of certain clay minerals, ar~
nonconductors. The electrical properties of a rock depend on the geometry
In Fig. 2-57 cube 2 represents a cube of porous rock of the same dimension8 of cube 1 and 100 per cent saturated with water of resistivity Rw.
Considering the solids to be nonconducting, the electrical flow must then
112
MTNDAM"fflN'TAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PERMEATED ROCKS
be through the water-filled pores. The cross-sectional area available for

conduction is now Aa, actual or effective cross section of the water-filled
pores. The path length of current flow is increased to a value L., the average length that an ion must traverse in passing through the pore channels.
the path length changed to
L~.
113
In a similar manner to the foregoing ex-
amples, the resistance of the cube is given by

ra
RwL~
A~
The resistivity of a partially water-saturated rock is defined as
R , -- r,A
L
1 cubic meter
(2-57)
and
The second fundamental notion of electrical properties of porous rocks

is that of the resistivity index I:
(cl
(O)
(2-58)
I_ A.IA~
(2-59)
R,
Therefore
(b)
I= R,
- L./L:
Both the formation factor and the resistivity index are shown to be
functions of effective path length and effective cross-sectional area. It is
desirable to relate these quantities
with other physical parameters of
the rock. To do so requires the use
of idealized models of porous sys-
FIG. 2-57. Idealized saturation distributions for determination of electrical resistance.

(a) Cube l; resistivity of a cube ofNaCl solution. (b) Cube 2; F=R,,IR10 (basic
definition, resistivity of a cube of rock 100 per cent saturated with water). (c)
tems, as the internal geometry of

the pores is too complex to express
Cube 3; resistivity of a cube of rock-interntices filled with water and hydrocarbons.
analytically.
Three idealized representations
have been introduced in the litera-
(From Winn.31 )
The resistance r, of such a cube can be determined as for the cube of

water:
By definition,
Hence
Therefore
_ RwL.A
0
LAa
F = R, = L./L =
Rw
A./A
Yr
A./A
(2-56)
where r is the tortuosity.

Resistivity Index. If the cube of porous rock contains both water and
hydrocarbons (Fig. 2-57, cube 3), the water is still the only conductor. The
cross-sectional area available for conduction is reduced further to A~, and
ture from-which relations have been
1
1
developed relating F and I with

porosity q, and tortuosity r.
F1G. 2-58. Straight capillary-tube model
The first of these models was pre- of porous media. (After Wyllie and
sented by Wyllie" et al. and is as Spangler. 3.S)
shown in Fig. 2-58. In the model,
it is considered that the various pore openings are continuous. The crosssectional areas of the pore openings vary along their length but in such a
manner that the sum of the areas of the pores is constant. La in such a
model represents the average path length through the pores.
1n such a model,
A.
A1
+ A, =
q,A
Therefore, substituting q,A for A. in Eq. (2-56),

F = L./L = L._!
q,A/A
L q,
(2-60)
=========~---
11.j,
---------
If a hydrocarbon is introduced into the pores, the water saturation Sw

can be expressed as a fraction of the pore volume. Presence of the hydrocarbons further reduces the effective cross-sectional area available for flow
to A:, and the average path length is altered to L:. Again considering that
the cross-sectional area available for flow is the same at each plane in the
cube,
A:= q,SwA
then substituting q,SwA into Eq. (2-59),
(2-61)
L./L; - - L. S.
f<------L
FIG. 2-59. Inclined capillary-tube model

of porous media. (After Cornell and
Katz. 119 )
Cornell and Katz" have presented

a slightly different model as illustrated in Fig. 2-59. In the simplest
form of this model, the pores can be
considered uniform in cross sections
but oriented so that they have an
effective length L. which is greater
than L. The cross-sectional area
available for flow is once again considered constant at each plane in the
model.
The effective cross-sectional area
Aa is the area normal to the direction

of flow in the pore;
therefore
Aa = Af
but
Af =A'!:_
and
A 1 = q,A
Therefore
A.= q,A L.
(L)' ~1= ~
= q,A(L/L.)/A = L
(2-62)
Following the same reasoning as above and considering a hydrocarbon

saturation present,
L
A 1" = A 1 L~
I _ q,A(L/L.)'jq,S.A(L/L;)
L./L;
(L:)'
l_
La Sw
(2-63)
Wyllie and Gardner'' have recently introduced a third model which is

shown in Fig. 2-60. In this model, the cross-sectional area of the pores is
FIG- 2-60. Capillary tube model of porous media. (After Wyllie and Gardner.')
again considered constant. However, it is conceived that the effective flow

cross section is only the net exit area at each plane. Thus the probability
that a selected point will fall in a pore opening in one plane is </>, that it
will fall also in a pore opening in the contiguous plane is (</>)',
A. = () 2 A
F =
and substituting in Eq (2-56)
A~= A~'
then substituting into Eq. (2-59)
Substituting in Eq. (2-56),
L./L
therefore A: = q,SwA L;
therefore
L.
A 1 = q,SwA
I _ q,A/q,SwA _ L; l_
and
115
L./L
q,'A/ A
L.L
L <J}
In such a model flow is considered only in matching pore openings such

that L. = L.
1
(2-64)
F=Therefore
<P'
If a hydrocarbon saturation is admitted, on the basis of the previous
assumptions
A;
(q,S.)'A
L~=La=L
and
(<P)'A/q,'S.'A
L./L;
1
Sw'
(2-65)
11~,
From the analysis of the electrical properties of the foregoing models,

general relationships between electrical properties and other physical properties of the rock can be deduced. The formation fsctor has been shown
to be some function of the porosity and the internal geometry of the rock
system. In particular, it can be stated from examination of Eqs. (2-60),
(2-62), and (2-64) that the formation factor can be expressed in the following form:
(2-66)
that the correlation with porosity was the better correlation and that the
formation factor could be expressed
(2-68)
F=</>-
116
where C is some function of the tortuosity and m is a function of the number of reductions in pore opening sizes or closed-off channels. Since C is a
function of the ratio L./L, it is suggested that C should be 1 or greater.
The value of m has been shown from theory to range from 1 to 2.
Both the formation factor F and the resistivity index I depend on ratios
of path length or tortuosities. Therefore, to compute the formation factor
or resistivity index from the equations developed above, it is necessary to
determine the electrical tortuosity. Direct measurement of the path length
is impossible. Therefore, reliance has been placed primarily on e~pirical
correlations based on laboratory measurements. Winsauer41 et al. devised
a method of determining tortuosity by transit time of ions f!owiog through
the rock under a potential difference. The observed tortuosities were believed to be reliable. The data obtained were correlated with the product
F<t> as suggested by Eq. (2-62), rearranged as follows:
=F<t>
(-L)'"
L
TABLE 2-7. PHYSICAL AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SIMPLE

PACKINGS OF SPHERICAL GRAINS OF UNIFORM SrzE43
Cubic
Rhombic
Porosity,
%
47.6
39.5
Resistivity of packing fully saturated

with water of resistivity, p..,,
Perpendicular
Parallel
Hexagonal
25.9
}to ofplane
paper
Cementation rfo_c_to_r_:,m_...,.....,.., 200
Very slightly cemented {
~-~
unconsolidated-f.3
(2-67)
The deviation from the theory is believed to be an indication of the greater

complexity of the actual pore system than that of the model on which the
theory was based.
The dependence of the formation factor on porosity was suggested by
Sundberg" in 1932. Table 2-7 summarizes Sundberg's computations for
Packing
where</> is the fractional porosity and mis tbe cementation factor. Archie
further reported that the cementation factor probably ranged from 1.8 to
2.0 for consolidated sandstones and for clean unconsolidated sands was
about 1.3. Figure 2-61 presents the family of curves defined by Eq. (2-68)
2.64p..,
4.40p..,
3.38p..,
5.8lp..,
uniform spheres arranged systematically. Archie", in 1942, correlated observed formation factors with porosity and permeability. He suggested
Rhombic
pockinq~
I i
Hexagonal packi/Jg ~
:z
I
Cubic packing-'1+-+",
1
10
20 30 4050
Porosity if>, per cent
F1G. 2-61. Formation factor F versus per cent porosity for various reservoir characters or cementation classes. (From Pirson.i3)
and cementation factors ranging from 1.3 to 2.2. The dashed lines indicate
the values computed for systematic packing of uniform spheres.
Measurement of Electrical Resistivity of Rocks
Laboratory measurements of electrical properties of rocks have been
made with a variety of devices. The measurements require a knowledge
of the dimension of the rock, the fluid saturation of the rock, the resistivity
of the water contained in the rock, and a suitable resistivity cell in which
to test the sample.
118
119
FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF FLUID-PER::\1:EATED ROCKS
A simple cell is shown in Fig. 2--02. A sample cut to suitable size is placed
in the cell and clamped between electrodes. Current is then passed
A second type of cell is shown in Fig. 2--03 which is a combined capillarypressure and resistivity cell. This device has the advantage that two different tests can be performed simultaneously. The disadvantage is the
length of time required for a capillary-pressure test. Capillary-pressure
tests are discussed in Chap. 3 of this
volume.
Empirical Correlation of Electrical

Properties
Archie, as previously mentioned,
reported the results of correlating
laboratory measurements of formation factor with porosity. He expressed his results in the form
F = q,-
Archie derived from experimental

data that F = q,-i.. Slawinski and
Maxwell" derived theoretical expressions for the formation factor based
on models of unconsolidated spheres.
Slawinski stated that for spheres in
contact
F = (l.3219 - 0.32194>) 2
FIG. 2-63. Combined interstitial water

and resistivity cell (From Rust:")
4>
For dispersed spheres, not necessarily in contact, Maxwell states that
F1a. 2-62. Core sample resistivity cell. (From Rust.")
F=3-4>
2 - 4>
through the sample, and the potential drop observed. The resistance of
the sample is computed from Ohm's 13.w:
(2-69)
- L
(2-70)
where A is the cross-sectional area of the sample and L is the length of the
sample. The saturation conditions of the test can be established at known
values prior to measurement or determined by an extraction procedure
after measurement.
were packed in tubes, and some were artificially consolidated.
Wyllie's experimental data are compared with the results calculated

using Archie's and Slawinski1s and Maxwell's expressions in Fig. 2-64.
and R (the resistivity) is computed from

R _ rA
W yllie45 investigated the influence of particle size and cementation on

the formation factor of a variety of materials. Unconsolidated materials
Archie's and Slawinski's equations fit the data reasonably well except for
the aggregate of cubes. The data for the cubes fall above the other data
as well as above all three lines calculated from the equations. This could
possibly be indicative of a greater tortuous path length in such a system.
Observed formation factors for artificially cemented aggregates are shown
in Fig. 2--05. It may be noted that cementation results in increased values
of formation factor over that observed for uncemented aggregates. Fur-
--------------
120
- ----
----- -
--------
thermore, the cemented aggregates exhibit a greater change in formation

factor with a change in porosity than the unconsolidated aggregates. The
curves no longer pass through the point F = 1, q, = 100 per cent.
From these data Wyllie concluded
that the general form of the relation
o Spht!rtS
between formation factor and poa C11bl!s
rosity should be
G Cy/i~rs
tO
x Ottawa sand
---BMCh sand
E
&
3
unconsolidated matrix prior to cementation. This is identical with
ondcrel!k
sand
"'
~
0
water resistivity on the formation factor for sands containing clay minerals
a Gloss sphere
so
10=-~~-,~o~~,~o~~o_.,..so,.-,Jo-'-~soL..L>100
Porosity, 0/o
Fra. 2-64. Formation factor-porosity

data of unconsolidated porous aggregates. rp
12.4 - 56 per cent. (From
Wyllie:"
11
)
60
40
30
25
o
t::..
.2 20
,i::
mixture, grades
7ond3
Gloss sphere
mixture, grades
5ond9
Gloss sphere
mixture, grades
5ondf2
Gloss spheras
Gian spheflls
Beach sand
Archie_
.g 15
c
.2
e '
relationship based on correlations of

data from a large number of sandstone cores. This equation, com-
6
5
monly referred to as the Humble
relation, is
F = 0.62 q,-2 -15

(2-71)
In discussing the theory it was stated that C should be greater than 1
and that m should be 2 or less. The discrepancy between theory and experiment must at this time be attributed to limiting the values of C and
m to constants for a wide range of porosities.
Improved correlations should result from considering other parameters
such as permeability as variables in the relations.
A_ comparison of suggested relationships between porosity and the format10n factor is shown in Fig. 2-66.
Since the formation factor is a function of porosity and some unkno1-vn
effect of the complex internal geometry, it is suggested that the constani 1
m formulas similar to Eq. (2-71) are functions of the depositional environ.
ment and must be determined on each formation to yield the most reliable
results. Of the correlations presented in Fig. 2-66, the Humble relation
appears to be of the greatest general utility.
. Effect of Conductive Solids. It was pointed out in the opening discusSIOn that clay minerals might act as conductors and contribute to the con~uc~ivity of a water-saturated porous rock. Investigations by Wyllie"
mdicate that clays contribute substantially to the conductivity of a rock
when the rock is saturated with a low-conductivity water. The effect of
50
the general form [Eq. (2-66)] deduced theoretically using simple

models.
Winsauer4' et al. reported a similar
121
is shown in Fig. 2-67. The formation factor for a comparable clean (clayfree) sand is a constant. The formation factor for the clayey sand increases
F = Cq,-
(2-66)
where m is a constant depending
on cementation and C a constant
controlled by the porosity of the
.2u
-------------
,..,,,.,
UnconsoJidofed
1
10
20
30 40 50 60
Porosity, 0/o
80 100
Fta. 2-65. Effect of artificial cementation on the formation factor-porosity relationship of unconsolidated aggregates. (From W yllie.46 )
with decreasing water resistivity and approaches a constant value at a

water resistivity of about 0.1 ohm-m. The apparent formation factor F
was calculated from the definition of the formation factor and observed
values of R,. and R.. Wyllie proposed that the observed effect of clay
minerals was similar to having two electrical circuits in parallel: the con-
ducting clay minerals and the water-filled pores. Thus

F - R,.
a - RtD
where
R~
and
_!_
Roa
_!_
Re
1+ -FRw
(2-72)
is the resistivity of a shaly sand when 100 per cent saturated
with water of resistivity RtD, Re is the resistivity due to the clay minerals;
FR. is the resistivity due to the distributed water, and F is the true for-
--
--------------- ---------
122
-------
---
mation factor of the rock (i.e., the constant value of formation factor
approached when the rock contains low-resistivity water).
,,
60 0
400
I\ I\
~Tixier's
''
relation for
consolidated formation
100
80
"
'"
60
\\\
I\ \\\
,~
n~
f.- Tixier's relotion for
unconsolidated formation
\ I~
'
0
8
i--
06 '...-'.'.'.''
.
Humble relation F = 4'
2. f's ,
R,
R..--.0
,,..
345678910
20
_Porosity,
30 40 50 60
11
80 fOO
0
10
FrG. 2-66. Comparison of various formation factor correlations. (From Owen.'")
The data presented in Fig. 2-68 represent graphically the confirmation

of the relationship expressed in Eq. (2-72). The graphs were plotted by
de Witte" from data presented by Hill and Milburn.50 The plots are linear
and are of the general form
-
Roa
m-
Rw
+b
1
1
m- = - -
Rw
FRw
R, = FRw
or
+ (R,/F)
and
R,
'= Rw
+ (RJF)
(2-72)
Rw becomes small. This was observed in Fig. 2-67.

Hill and Milburnw presented a somewhat more complex correlation of
the formation factor of shaly sands. The correlation was based on measurements on a large number of samples. They state that the contribution of
clay minerals to the conductivity of a rock is not a constant as proposed
by Patnode" and deWitte.49 Their correlation is as follows:
Archie's relation for
cnTrokd foro'T'
Roa
As Rw --> 0, Jim F. = RR/,F = F. Therefore F. approaches F as a limit as
\
2
Then -
RoRw
'" = Rw
'
1
2
1
b = -= 0
The remaining samples are from

shaly sands which have a finite conductivity of the clay minerals as
indicated by the intercepts of the
lines. The linearity of the plots
indicate that l/R, is a constant
independent of Rw. This phenomenon can be explained in terms of
the ions adsorbed on the clay.
When the clay is hydrated, the
adsorbed ions form an ionic conduct01a".1;----,,.;.o;-----:',o\----.,.,100
ing path which is closely bound to
Woter resistivity Rw, ohm-meters
the clay. The number of adsorbed
FrG.
2-67.
Apparent formation factor
ions is apparently little changed by
the salt concentration of the inter- versus water resistiYity for Stevens sand
of Paloma Field, Calif. (From Winn.''r)
stitial water.
Equation (2-72) can be rearranged to express the apparent formation
factor in terms of R, and FRw.
I\
200
123
(2-73)
where m is the slope of the line and b is the intercept. Comparing Eq.
(2-72) with Eq. (2-73), it may be noted that m = 1/F and b = 1/R,. The
curve labeled suite 1, No. 40, indicates a clean sand, since the line passes
through the origin, therefore
(2,74)
where F 0 .01 is the formation factor of the rock when saturated with water
having a resistivity of 0.01 ohm-m. The quantity bin the exponent is defined as a shaliness factor and was correlated with the cation-exchange
capacity. The cation-<0xchange capacity is related to the clay content of
the rock and provides an independent determination of the amount of
shale in a rock.
Additional work is required to determine how the effect of clay in a rock
can best be evaluated.
The experimental data discussed are largely from measurements on sandstones or similar materials having intergranular porosity. Little data are
-------
124
available on the electrical properties of limestone. Tixier" states that a

cementation factor m of 2.0 in Archie's formula yields a satisfactory correlation.
I= C'S111-n
cnm~r_---~--~--~--~--..
1.7
1.6
~Suite
1.5
1.4
f No. 40
(2-76)
Suite f No. 4
o Suite 2 No. f3
a Suite 6 No. 2
Williams" studied consolidated

sands, the results for which are
shown in Fig. 2-69. The solid line
was fitted to the data points by the
method of least squares. The equation of the best fitting line is
I= s'ID-2.1
(2-77)
1.2
/"
1.0
09
-lo? 0.8
~:
0.4
0.3
0.2
kA/x
~x
~-
!/-:::.:.------
-------------
0.1~
0
Archie compiled and correlated experimental data from Wyckoff,"

Leverett,53 Jakosky, 54 and Martin55
from which he suggested that the

data could be represented by
1.3
o-
_o
10 12 14 16 18
_1_ _
(2-75)
where I = Rt/Ro, the resistivity index; C' is some function of tortuosity;

and n is the saturation exponent.
x Suite f No. 2f
1.1
125
20 22 (llm)-1
Rw
Fla. 2-68. Water-saturated rock conductivity as a function of water conductivity.
I.From de Witte.")
Resistivity of Partially Water-saturated Rocks. A rock containing both

water and hydrocarbon has a higher resistivity than the rock when fully
saturated with water. The resistivity of partially water-saturated rocks
has been shown to be a function of the water saturation s'ID.
The resistivity index introduced earlier is a convenient function for correlating experimental data on the resistivity of rocks with water satura-
tion. Equations (2-61), (2-63), and (2-65) indicate that the resistivity index is a function of the water saturation and the path length. From the
theoretical developments, the following generalization can be drawn:
f,000
The dashed line is a plot of

Archie's relation [Eq. (2-76)] for
comparison.
In Fig. 2-70 are presented results
obtained by Rust" on consolidated

1 1L_J~J_j_LJ10:--'----LJ...J..l100
samples from Woodbine sand outcrop. The saturation exponent n
Interstitial water saturation
ranges from 2.31 to 2.40.
F1a. 2-69. Resistivity index versus interAll the equations fitted to the stitial water saturation. (From Wilexperimental data have assumed liams.~)
that both C' and n of Eq. (2-75)
were constants and furthermore that C' ~ I. From the theory, it would
be expected that C' is a function of saturation and that n would range
between 1 and 2. Additional:study is required to ascertain the discrepancy
between theory and experiment.
Morse" et al. presented data showing the effect of fluid distribution on
the saturation-resistivity relationship. In Fig. 2-71 curves 2 and 3 are
from data by Morse while curve 1 is for Archie's relation. The data for
curve 2 are from artificially consolidated sands containing water and air
while those for curve 3 are from the same material containing water
and
oil. The difference in the results is attributed to the distribution of the

fluids within the rock. The material was believed to be water wet in the
water-air tests and oil wet in the water-oil tests. The difference in wettability would cause a different distribution of fluids to be established at
the same value of water saturation.
Whiting" et al. reported tests of the saturation relationship in limestones.
-------------
126
100
0
60
00~
r
r
*a
1--
127
101-r
r
-.....
20
'
' ,t'-.. ,....
' ' 1'
10
Resistivity index
I\
1-1-1--
"3
, 0
n2 = 2.34
\12.33
40
40
20
10
= Resistivity at partial
60 80KX>
saturation
Resistivity at 100/o !iO_turoti_gn
FrG. 2-71. Connate water saturation versus resistivity ratios. Curve 1 is composite of
data from Wycoff, Leverett, Jakosky, and Martin; curve 2 is for brine-air displacement results of Morse et al. on artificially consolidated sands; curve 3 is for brineoil displacement results. (From Pirson.' 8 )
100r
~
1-~
1-r
r
~, 0 2.40
o~
n4 =2.36
'\
'\
r
r
~
1--
I~
1--
'-~ o Nonequilibrium
100
Dynamic air-brine
o Dynamic air
+Static air
Core No 2
Core No 6
Core No 5
1.0
saturation values
~ EquilibriT Tluralian values
1--
The data are presented in Fig. 2-72. The resistivity ratio plotted is the
reciprocal of the resistivity index. The effect of the method of changing
the saturation was also investigated in these tests. The trends of the curves
are the same as for sandstones. The three methods of changing the saturation in the test specimens were:
1. Dynamic air brine in which the desired water saturation was obtained
by flowing air and water simultaneously through the sample
1~2.31
0.30
~ 0.20
0
\2.36
IJ
0
IO ~
r
r
r
I-
1--
'
0,-1
\
I'
1--
o.z
Pl
~~
. '"
0.4.0.60.81.0
'
Q.2
0.03
' "
0.4 Q.6QB1.0
Brine saturation, fraction of pore volume
F1a. 2-70. Resistivity index versus brine saturation. Four-electrode method. Woodbine outcrop. Gas permeability 1,130 millidarcys; effective porosity, 38.8 per cent(From Rust.")
'I
0.02
0.01
10
20 30
10
100
10
20 30
20 30
100
100
Brine saturation, 0/o
F1a. 2-72. Comparison of electrical resistivity-brine saturation relationships obtained in dynamic and static experiments. (From Whiting et al.a)
128
129
2. Dynamic air in which only air was introduced at the inlet, displacing
b<Jth air and water from the outlet
3. Static air in which air displaced water from the sample through a
capillary barrier which prevented the flow of air from the samP.le
where k is the permeability, <P is the porosity fraction, ko is a shape factor,

S, is the internal surface area per unit pore volume, and r is the Kozeny
tortuosity.
It may be noted that the dynamic air procedure consistently yielded

lower values of the resistivity ratio. This effect may be attributed to a
difference in water distribution.
Conductive clays affect the saturation-resistivity relationship as shown
in Fig. 2-73. The conducting path through the clays is little affected by
100
By definition,
r =
(i)'
r =
!!'</>'
and from Eq. (2-60)
(2-78)
which on substitution in Eq. (2-49) leads to

I
(2-79)
However, from Eq. (2-62)
80
60
40
30
(2-80)
which on substitution in Eq. (2-49) leads to
I
k = koFS,'
'
20
Without conductive
Fq,
r =
solids~
.(2-81)
The only experimental measurements of L./L yielded, as previously stated,
-\
\
'
or
r =
(L.)UT
(?)'
= F<P
(2-67)
(F<P)'''-''
(2-82)
With conductive solids
"
3
2
'
_;;p.,.,.
8 10
Water saturation
20
which leads on substitution to
"'
30 40
(2-83)
The quantity
'\
s. =
'
60 80 100
F1a. 2-73. Effect of conductive solids on the resistivity-index saturation relationship

in Stevens sandstone core. (From Patnode and Wyllie.~)
the presence of hydrocarbon. Thus as the water saturation is reduced to

zero, the resistivity approaches the resistivity of the clay path rather than
approaching infinity as in clean sands. The relationship of saturation and
resistivity in shaly sands is complex and will not be considered at greater
length.
Use of Electrical Parameters in Characterizing Porous Media. In the
section on permeability, the Kozeny equation was developed as follows:
k = k,::S;
(2-49)
(2-84)
Tm
where Tm is the mean hydraulic radius. Thus, the general form of the relationship can be stated
(2-85)
(2-86)
or
The above relations have been partially verified by experiment.
REFERENCES
1. Stichter, C. S.: Theoretical Investigation of the Motion of Ground Water, U.S.

Geol. Survey 19th. Annual Rep., 1899.
2. Fraser, H.J., and L. C. Graton: Systematic Packing of Spheres-With Particular
130
131
Relation to Porosity and Permeability, J. Geol., November-December, 1935, pp.

785-909.
3. Nanz, Robert H., Jr.: Genesis of Oligocene Sandstone Reservoir, Seeligson Field,
Jim Wells and Kleberg Counties, Texas, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, January,
1954, p. 96.
4. Tickell, F. G., 0. E. Mechen, and R. C. McCurdy: Some Studies on the Porosity
and Permeability of Rocks, Trans. AIME, 1933, pp. 250-260.
5. Nuss, W. F., and R. L. Whiting: Technique for Reproducing Rock Pore Space,
Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, November, 1947, p. 2044.
6. Core Laboratories, Inc., Trade Circ.
7. Kaye, Emil, and M. L. Freeman, Jr.: A New Type of Porosimeter, World Oil,
March, 1949, p. 94.
8. Nutting, P. G.: Physical Analysis of Oil Sazids, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists,
vol. 14, 1930.
9. Russell, W. L.: A Quick Method for Determining Porosity, Bull. Am.Assoc.Petrol.
Geologists, vol. 10, 1926.
10. Stevens, A. B.: New Device for Determining Porosity by the Gas Expansion
Method, Tech. Publ. 1061, Trans. AIME, May, 1939.
11. Rall, C. G., and D. B. Taliaferro: A Bureau of Mines Method for Determining
Porosity: A List of Porosity of Oil Sands, U.S. Bur. Mines, September, 1948.
12. Dotson, B. J., R. L. Slobod, P. N. Mccreery, and Jam.es W. Spurlock: PorosityMeasurement Comparisons by Five Laboratories, Trans. AIME, 1951, p. 341.
13. Kelton, Frank C.: Analysis of Fractured Limestone Cores, Trans. AIME, 1950,
p. 225.
14. Krumbein, W. C., and L. L. Sloss: "Stratigraphy and Sedimentation," p. 218,
1st ed., W. H. Freeman Publishing Company, 1951.
15. Geertsma, J.: The Effect of Fluid Pressure Decline Oil Volumetric Changes of
Porous Rocks, Trans. AIME, vol. 210, 1957.
16. Fatt, I.: Pore Volume Compressibilities of Sandstone Reservoir Rocks, J. Petrol.
Technol., March, 1958.
17. Carpenter, Charles B., and George B. Spencer: Measurements of Compressibility
of Consolidated Oil-bearing Sandstones, U.S. Bur. Mines Rept. Invest. 3540, October,
1940.
18. Hall, Howard N.: Compressibility of Reservoir Rocks, Trans. AIME, 1953, p. 309.
19. "Recommended Practice for Determining Permeability of Porous Media," American Petroleum Institute, Division of Production, September, 1952.
20. Fancher, G. H., J. A. Lewis, and K. B. Barnes: Some Physical Characteristics of
~oil Sands, Penn. State Coll. Bull. 12, 1933, pp. 65-171.
21. Darcy, H.: "Les fontaines publiques de la ville de Dyon," Victor Dalmont, 1856.
22. Hubbert, M. King: Entrapment of Petroleum under Hydrodynamic Conditions,
Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, August, 1953, p. 1954.
23. Muskat, Morris: "Flow of Homogeneous Fluids," p. 287, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, Inc., New York, 1937.
24. Croft, H. 0.: "Thermodynamics, Fluid Flow and Heat Transmission," p. 129,
25. Stevens, A. B.: "A Laboratory Manual for Petroleum Engineering," p. 308, Exchange Store, A. and M. College of Texas, 1954.
26. Beeson, C. M.: The Kobe Porosimeter and the Oilwell Research Porosimeter,
Trans. AIME, 1950.
27. Klinkenberg, L. J.: The Permeability of Porous Media to Liquids and Gases,
Drilling and Production Practices, p. 200, American Petroleum Institute, 1941.
28. Johnston, Norris, and Carrol M. Beeson: Water Permeability of Reservoir Sands,
Trans. AI1VIE, 1945, p. 292.
29. Muskat, Morris: "Physical Principles of Oil Production," p. 142, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1949.
30. Fatt, I., and D. H. Davis: Reduction in Permeability with Overburden Pl;'essure,
Trans. AI1l1E, 1952, p. 329.
31. Wyllie, M. R. J., and M. B. Spangler: Application of Electrical Resistivity
Measurements to Problems of Fluid Flow in Porous Media, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol.
Geo'logists, February, 1952.
32. Carman, P. C.: J. Soc. Chem. Ind., vols. 57 and 58, 1939.
33. Rapoport, L.A., and W. J. Leas: Relative Permeability to Liquid in Gas-Liquid
Systems, Trans. AIME, vol. 192, 1951.
34. Emdahl; Ben A.: Core Analysis of Wilcox Sands, World Oil, June, 1952.
35. Kennedy, H. T., 0. E. Van Meter, and R. G. Jones: Saturation Determination
of Rotary Cores, Petrol. Engr., January, 1954.
36. Archie, G. E.: The Electrical Resistivity Log as an Aid in Determining Some
Reservoir Characteristics, Trans. AIME, 1942.
37. Winn, R. H.: The Fundamentals of Quantitative Analysis of Electric Logs,
Symposium on Formation Evaluation, AIME, October, 1955.
38. Wyllie, M. R. J., and M. B. Spangler: Application of Electrical Resistivity Measurements to Problem of Fluid Flow in Porous Media, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geo'logist..'1,,
February, 1952, p. 359.
39. Cornell, D., and D. L. Katz: Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 45, 1953.
40. Wyllie, M. R. J., and G. H.F. Gardner: The Generalized Kozeny-Carman Equation, World Oil, March and April, 1958.
41. Winsauer, W. 0., H. M. Shearin, P.H. Masson, and M. Williams: Resistivity of
Brine-saturated Sands in Relation to Pore Geometry, Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists,
February, 1952.
42. Sundberg, Karl: Effect of Impregnating Waters on Electrical Conductivity of
Soils and Rocks, Geophysical Prospecting, AIME, 1932.
43. Pirson, S. J.: 'Oil Reservoir Engineering," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company,
44. Rust, C. F.: Electrical Resistivity Measurements on Reservoir Rock Samples by
the Two-electrode and Four-electrode Methods, Trans. AIME, 1952.
45. Wyllie, M. R. J.: Formation Factors of Unconsolidated Porous Media: Influence
of Particle Shape and Effect of Cementation, Trans. AIME, 1953.
46. Slawinski, A.: Conductivity of an Electrolyte Containing Dielectric Bodies,
J. chem. phys., 1926.
47. Owen, Joe D.: Well Logging Study: Quinduno Field, Roberts County, Texas,
Symposium on Formati<m Evaluation, AIME, October, 1955.
48. Patnode, H. W., and M. R. J. Wyllie: The Presence of Conductive Solids in
Reservoir Rocks as a Factor in Electric Log Interpretation, Trans. AIME, 1950.
49. deWitte, A. J.: Saturation and Porosity from Electric Logs in Shaly Sands, Oil
Gas J.~ Mar. 4, 1957.
50. Ifill, H. J., and J. D. Milburn: Effect of Clay and Water Salinity on Electrochemical Behavior of Reservoir Rocks, Trans. AIME, 1956.
51. Tixier,.M. P.: Porosity Index in Limestone frQm Electrical Logs, Oil Gas J., 1951.
52. Wyckoff, R. D., and H. G. Botset: Flow of Gas Liquid Mixtures through Sands,
l 1hysic8, 1936, p. 325.
53. Leverett, M. C.: Flow of Oil-Water Mixtures through Unconsolidated Sands,
Trans. AI..ZllE, 1939.
--~-----------------
132
54. Jak.osky, J. J., and R. H. Hopper: The Effect of Moisture on the Direct Current
Resistivities of Oil Sands and Rocks, Geophysics, vol. 2, 1937.
55. Martin, M., G. H. Murray, and W. J. Gillingham: Determination of the Potential
Productivity of Oil-bearing Formations by Resistivity Measurements Geophysics
~~~
.
'
'
56. Williams, Milton: Estimation of Interstitial Water from the Electrical Log
Trans. AIME, 1950.
'
57. Morse, R. A., et al.: Relative Permeability Measurements on Small Core Samples
Oil Gas J., Aug. 23, 1947.
'
58. Whiting, R. L., E. T. Guerrero. and R. M. Young: Electrical Properties of Limestone Cores, Oil Gas J., July 27, 1953.
CHAPTER
PROPERTIES OF POROUS MEDIA

CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID SATURATIONS
In preceding chapters the physical properties of reservoir rocks are defined in terms of single-fluid systems. Such a simplified case is seldom
found in actual petroleum reservoirs. In petroleum reservoirs two fluids
are present, and many times three fluid phases are involved. All the basic
definitions must be modified and other definitions added for a complete
classification of the properties of a petroleum reservoir.
The simultaneous existence of two or more fluids in a porous rock requires that terms such as ~:@1)~_ pressure, rg__~:ti:ve pepn~bility, and
wettability be defined. When only one fluid exists in the pore spaces,
tli.erefS. OiliY One set of forces to consider, the attraction between the rock
and the fluid. When more than one fluid phase is present, there are at
least three sets of active forces affecting capillary pressure and wettability.
In the preceding chapter, permeability was defined and discussed in terms
of a rock saturated with a single fluid. The material which follows amplifies
the previous definitions and introduces concepts which are required for
multifluid systems. The measurements and use of these various factors
also will be discussed.
SURFACE FORCES AND CAPILLARY PRESSURE
In dealing with multiphase systems, it is necessary to consider the effect

of the forces acting at the interface when two immisei_bl~Jluids are in contact. When these two fluids are liquid and ga8,th;; interface is normally
referred to as the liquid surface. All molecules are attracted one to the
other in proportion to the product of their masses and inversely as the
square of the distance between them. Considering water and oil, fluids
comm.only found in petroleum reservoirs, it is found that an interfacial
tension always exists between the fluids. A water molecule which is remote
from the interface is surrounded by other water molecules, thus having a
resulting net attractive force on the molecule of zero. However, a molecule at the interface has a force acting upon it from the oil lying immediately above the interface and water molecules lying below the interface.
133
134
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR EN(!INEERING
MEDIA CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID SATURATIONS
The resulting forces are unbalanced and give rise to interfacial tension.
The unbalanced attractive force between the molecules creates a membranelike surface. A certain amount of work is required to move a water
molecule from within the body of the liquid through the interface. This
work is freq~e_nt_ly_I"eferI"egJ;{)ll,S t_he free surface energyof_theJiqllid. ~rne
~:.:ice_ ~nergy, __ in -~rgs per square c-entfffie_ter, _may be defined as the work
necessary to create -a -ullit area of neW s~rface. The interfacial tension i~
the force per unit length required to create a new surface. Interfacial tension...and surface tension are commonly expressed in dynes per centimeter,
which is numerically equal to the surface energy in ergs per square centimeter. Surface tensi?n is measured in the laboratory by standard means
such as a tensiometer, the drop method, or other methods which can be
found described in physical chemistry texts.
135
contact angle is large, an outside source of energy will be required to cause

the denser phase to spread over the surface. The degree of spreading as
affected by the contact angle of the system is illustrated in Fig. 3-2,
wherein various multiliquid systems are in contact with silica and calcite
Organic
liquid
Jsooctone
lsooctane +5.7"/o
isoquinoline
!soquinoline
Nophthenic ocid
Fundamentals of Surface and Capillary Forces

In dealing with hydrocarbon systems, it is necessary to consider not
only the interface between a gas and a liquid but also the forces that are
active at the interface between two immiscible liquid phases and between
the liquids and solids. The combination of all the active surface forces
determines the wettability and capillary pressure of a porous rock.
Wetting. The adhesion tension, which is a function of the interfacial
tension, determines which fluid will preferentially wet the solid. A sketch
is shown in Fig. 3-1, wherein two
liquids, oil and water, are in contact
with a solid. By convention, the
contact angle theta (e) is measured
through the denser liquid phase and
ranges from 0 to 180. Based on
the above convention of expression
FIG. 3-1. Equilibrium of forces at a waterthe adhesion tension is defined in
oil-solid intei-face. (After Benner and Eq. (3-1).
Bartell.1 )
(3-1)
AT is the adhesion tension, u,.o is the interfacial tension between the solid
and lighter fluid phase, uaw is the interfacial tension between the solid and
denser phase, and u wo is the interfacial tension between the fluids.
A positive adhesion tension indicates that the denser phase preferentially wets the solid surface. An adhesion tension of zero indicates that
both phases have an equal affinity for the surface. The maguitude of the
adhesion tension, as defined by Eq. (3-1), determines the ability of the
wetting phase to adhere to the solid and to spread over the surface of the
.<olid. If the adhesion tension value is large or the contact angle e is small,
the denser phase will readily spread and tend to coat the surface. If the
AT
Uao -
Uaw
Uwo COS Owo
F1-0. 3-2. Interfacial contact angles. (a) Silica surface; (b) calcite surface. (From
Benner and Bartell.1 )
surfaces. It is noted that when water and isooctane are used, the water
preferentially wets both the calcite and silica surfaces. When naphthenic
acid is used, it is observed that water preferentially wets the silica surface
with a contact angle of 35 whereas naPhthenic acid preferentially wets
the calcite surface with a contact angle of 106. The other two systems,
water-isooctane-plus and water-isoquinoline, yield resnlts similar to the
two previously discussed systems. This illustrates the effects that might
be expected from varying the mineralogy of the rock and the composition
of the two liquid phases. It further illustrates that for an oil-water-solid
system, it is possible to have either a water-wet or oil-wet surface, depending on the chemical composition of the fluids and rock.
Rise of Fluids in Capillaries. Consider the case of capillary tubes
wherein the internal diameter of the tube is extremely small. If the tube
is placed in a large open vessel containing liquid, liquid will rise in the
capillary tube above the height of the liquid in the large vessel. This rise
in height is due to the attractive forces (adhesion tension) between the
tube and the liquid and the small weight represented by the column of
liquid in the tube. The adhesion tension is the force tending to pull the
liquid up the wall of the tube. The liquid will rise in the tube until the
total force acting to pull the liquid upward is balanced by the weight of
the column of liquid being supported in the tube .
The total upward force can be expressed as
Ar X 2.-r
force up
(3-2)
136
The weight of the column being supported is

7'1' 2hgp
force down
(3-Za)
where Ar = adhesion tension, dynes/cm

r = radius of tube, cm
h_ = height of liquid column, cm
p = density of liquid in tube, gm/cc
g = force of gravity, cm/sec'
the water at the top of the water column is equal to the pressure in the
water at the bottom minus the pressure due to a head of water h. By denoting the pressure in the water at the top by P w and P. as the pressure
in the gas at both the top and bottom and the pressure in the water at the
bottom, from hydrostatics
P. - P w = p,,gh = P,
Equating these two quantities would yield a force balance such that the
total adhesion tension force would be just balancing the gravitational pull
on the column of liquid. The pressure existing in the liquid phase beneath
the air-liquid interface is less than the pressure which exists in the gaseou8
phase above the interface. This difference in pressure existing across the
interface is referred to as the capillary pressure of the system. This pres:'.
sure can be calculated on the basis of a U tube, balancing the pressure
between the two points.
Figure 3-3 represents the conditions that exist when a capillltry tube is
immersed in a beaker of water. If the equilibrium height h of the interface
137
(3-3)
where Pw = density of water

g = acceleration due to gravity
h = height of the column of water in the tube above that in the
large vessel
Since the pressure in the air at the top is also P. and by definition the
capillary pressure is the pressure difference across an interface, an expression for the height of fluid rise in the tube is obtained by balancing the upward and downward forces.
2.-rAr = 7rr'hgpw
h = 2"1'Ar = 2Ar
Kr2gp.,,
rgp.,,
by substituting from Eq. (3-1)

Pq_
T
h
Pa
A'
Pw-
-B'
-B
Pqp -8
P;b -a
'afer
Oil
Air
Paa
Water
FIG. 3-3_ Pressure relations in
capillary tubes.
h = Zo-wo COS Bwo

rgpw
Substituting the above value for the height in Eq. (3-3), an expression for
capillary pressure in terms of the surface forces is obtained.
Pc= 2o-wq
A'
COS
P:a
8.,,f/
r
Wafer
Fra. 3-4. Pressure relations in

capillary tubes.
is small, the head of the air is negligible. Therefore, the pressure in the air
immediately above the interface is essentially equal to the pressure in the
air immediately above the free water level in the large vessel. However,
owing to the greater density of the water, the pressure in the water just
beneath the interface differs from that at the bottom of the column due to
the head of water h. Since the beaker is large compared with the capillary
tube, the gas-water interface in the beaker is essentially horizontal. The
capillary pressure is zero in a horizontal or plane interface. Therefore the
pressure in the water at the bottom of the column is equal to the pressure
i11 the gas at the surface of the >vater in the large vessel. The pressure in
(3-4)
(3-5)
Consider the capillary tube immersed in a beaker of water wherein oil

is the other fluid rather than air (Fig. 3-4),
Let P ~ = pressure in oil at A
P 00 = pressure in oil at point B
P wa = pressure in water at point A
P wo = pressure in water at point B
Once again, if the beaker is large, the interface at A is a plane interface
and the capillary pressure is zero. Therefore
Poa
Pwa
at the free water level in the beaker. The density of both the oil and the
water must be considered in deriving the pressure relationship at point B.
P,, =
P~
- p.gh
Pw, =
P~
- p,,gh
------.--
138
The pressure difference across the interface is therefore

P,, - Pwo = (Pw - p,)gh = P,
(3-6)
Therefore, the capillary pressure must be in equilibrium with gravitational

forces if the fluids are in equilibrium and not flowing. The expression of
capillary pressure in terms of the surface forces is obtained in the same
manner as that for air and water and results in the same expression.
Pc = 2<Two
COS
81110
(3-7)
It is noted in Eq. (3-7) that the capillary pressure is a function of the

adhesion tension (0'"1Do cos Bw 0 ) and inversely proportional to the radius of
the capillary tube. Figure 3-5 illustrates the effect of varying the wetting
139
When the radius of the tube or the adhesion tension is changed, the
capillary pressure is altered accordingly. From the variation indicated .by
Fig. 3-5, the following statements can be made: (1) The greater the affimty
of the denser phase for the solid, the greater will be the capillary pressure
across the interface for a given size tube; (2) the smaller the radius when
the wetting characteristics are the same, the greater will be the capillary
pressure.
Capillary Pressure in Packings of Uniform Spheres. A general expression for capillary pressure as a function of interfacial tension and curvature
of the interface is due to Plateau' and is given in Eq. (3-8).
P, = ,,
(1-R, + 1-)
R,
(3-8)
where R 1 and R 2 are the principal radii of curvature of the interface and u is
the interfacial tension between the two fluids. The distribution and measurement of these two radii in a porous system are sholN-n in Fig. 3-6. It is
noted that these two radii are measured in perpendicular planes. Comparing Eq. (3-8) with the equation for capillary pressure as determined by the
capillary tube method, it is found that the
mean radius Rm is defined by
(1- 1-)
(o)
(bl
FIG. 3-5. Dependence of interfacial curvature upon pore size and contact angle.
(a) Same contact angle, different pore size; (b) same pore size1 different contact
angle.
characteristics of the system and of varying the radius of the capillary

tube. If the wetting characteristics remain constant and the radius of the
tube is increased., the weight of the water column increases as the square
of the radius whereas the magnitude of the adhesion force increases iri
direct relation to the radius. Therefore, the height of the water column
will be decreased proportionally to the increase in the tube radius. This
fact is illustrated in Fig. 3-5 wherein it is noted that the smaller the radius
of the tube, the higher the water column will rise before an equilibrium
system is obtained.
The changes in wetting characteristics are such that the greater the adhesion tension, the greater the equilibrium height obtained. If the only
variable is the wetting characteristic of the solid, it is noted that the smaller
the contact angle 8, the stronger the adhesion tension and the greater the
height to which the liquid column will rise before equilibrium is obtained.
This fact is illustrated in Fig. 3-5b, wherein it is noted that for small values
of the contact angle, a large height is obtained.
_!__ =
+
= 2 cos 8 = D.pgh (3-9)
Rm
Ri
R2
Tt
u
It is practically impossible to measure the
values of R 1 and R 2, so they are generally referred to by the mean radius of curvature and
empirically determined from other measurements on a porous medium.
The distribution of the liquid in a porous
system is dependent upon the wetting characteristics. It is necessary to determine which is.
the wetting fluid so as to ascertain which fluid
occupies the small pore spaces (Fig. 3-6). From
packings of spheres, the wetting-phase distribution within a porous system has been described as either funicular or pendular in
nature. In funicular distribution, the wetting
FIG. 3-6. Idealized conphase is continuous, completely covering the
tact for wetting fluid and
surface of the solid. The pendular ring is a
spherical grains. (From
Leverett.3 )
state of saturation in which the wetting phase
is not continuous and the nonwetting phase is
in contact with some of the solid surface. The wetting phase occupies the
smaller interstices. These distributions are illustrated in Fig. 3-7a and b.
the pendular ring distribution in Fig. 3-7a, and the funicular saturation
---
--
---
---
-----
141
MEDIA CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID SATURATlttNS
distribution in Fig. 3-7b. It is noted in Figs. 3-6 and 3-7 that as the wettingphase saturation progresses from the funicular to the pendular ring distribution, the quantity of the wetting
phase decreases and the mean curvature or values of R 1 and R, both tend
to decrease in size. ReferringtoEq.
(3-8), it is seen that if R1 and R,
both decreased in size, the magnitude of the capillary pressure would
in turn have to increase in size. It
is therefore possible to express the
capillary pressure as a function of
(al
(b)
rock saturation when two immisciFrG. 3-7. Idealized representation of disble phases are used within the porous
tribution of wetting and nonwetting
matrix. As will be illustrated later,
fluid phase about intergrain contacts of
it is also po&.,.ible to approximate
spheres. (a) Pendular-ring distribution;
the pore ditribution of this parti(b) funicular distribution.
(From
Fancher et al!)
cular system because the capillary
pressure would be dependent upon
the radii of the various pores for any particular value of saturation.
For the capillary pressure to be zero in a porous system with two liquid
phases, it would be necessary that R, and R, be infinitely large or that the
interfacial tension u be zero.
It was previously shown in the case of the capillary tube that the greater
pressure is always on the concave side of the interface. It can be seen from
Figs. 3-6 and 3-7 that the curvature of the interface is such that the pressure in the nonwetting phase is greater than the pressure in the v1retting
phase. Therefore the wetting phase in a porous material is at a lower
pressure than the nonwetting phase.
Saturation History. To study the effect of saturation history, it is
necessary to consider various-size interconnected pores. In the case of a
capillary tube of varying diameter, the height to which the fluid will rise
in the tube depends on the adhesion tension, fluid density, and variation
of tube diameter with height. If pressure is applied to the interface, the
interface moves to a new equi]ibrium position, thus decreasing the volume
of water within the tube. This decrease in water volume means a reduction
in saturation and is accompanied by an increase in capillary pressure.
This fact is illustrated in Fig. 3-8 wherein the capillary pressure would be
greater for the small radius of curvature than for the large radius of curvature. This behavior indicates that there is an inverse functional relationship between capillary pressure and the wetting-phase saturation. Also, it
indicates that the lower the saturation, the smaller will be the radii of
curvature and the wetting-phase material will then exist in the smaller
crevices and openings of the system, leaving the large open channels to the
nonwetting phase.
Not only is saturation a function of capillary pressure, but it is also a
function of the saturation history of the particular pere matrix that is
140
FIG. 3-8. Dependence of interfacial curvature on fluid saturation in a nonuniform pore.

Same pore, same contact angle, different fluid saturation. (From McCardell.5 )
being considered. For example, in a continuous capillary tube which

changes in diameter from small to large to small, as illustrated in Fig. 3-9,
the saturation for capillary pressures of equal magnitude depends upon
whether the system is initially 100 per cent saturated with a wetting fluid
Low capillary pressure -
Higher capillary pressure
High copillory pressure -
Lower capi11ory pressurE
Saturation= f00%
Saturation = 800/o
Capillary. pressure= Pc
Copil!ory pre$Sure =!ow value
(a)
Safurotion
=0
Saturation = fQo/,.
Capillary pressure= Pc
Capillary pressure= high vofue
lb)
F1a. 3-9. Dependence of equilibrium fluid saturation upon the saturation history in a
nonuniform pore. (a) Fluid drains; (b) fluid imbibes. Same pore, same contact angle,
same capillary pressure, different saturation history. (From McCardell.5 )
or it is being saturated with the wetting fluid. Forcing the entry of a nonwetting fluid into a tube saturated with a wetting fluid causes the wetting
fluid to be displaced to a point such that the capillary pressure across the
interface is equal to the applied pressure plus the pressure due to the column
of suspended fluid. In the case of Fig. 3-9, the rock is 80 per cent saturated
142
143
with the wetting phase for the higher value of capillary pressure. Now
consider the case where the tube is initially saturated with a nonwetting
phase and is immersed in a container filled with a fluid which will preferent.ially wet the tube. The wetting fluid will be imbibed owing to the adhesion force between the wetting fluid and the surface of the tube until
the adhesion force is equal to the weight of the column of fluid. The saturation thus obtained as illustrated in Fig. 3-9 is only IO per cent. In this
example, saturations of 10 and 80 per cent are obtained for identical values
of capillary pressure. From this oversimplified example, it is seen that the
relationship between the wetting-phase saturation and capillary pressure is
dependent on the saturation process. A higher value of saturation for a
given capillary pressure would be obtained if the porous system were being
desaturated than if the porous system were being resaturated with the
wetting-phase fluid.
It is thus seen that the capillary-pressure saturation relationship is dependent upon (I) the size and distribution of the pores, (2) the fluids and
solids that are involved, and (3) the history of the saturation process.
mean radius of curvature, Eq. (3-9), and the square root of the permeability
divided by the porosity (l!.p gh/u)(k/</>) 112 The correlating function was
proposed so that capillary-pressure data from different sands could be expressed in generalized form. If the correlating function were universally
1
Laboratory Measurements of Capillary Pressure

The results of a capillary-pressure experiment on an unconsolidated sand
pack conducted by Leverett' are illustrated in Fig. 3-10. In conducting
the experimental work, long tubes filled with sand were saturated with a
liquid and suspended vertically. The experiments were performed in such
a manner that imbibition and drainage capillary-pressure curves were
defined. To obtain the drainage curve, the sand pack was saturated with
water and then one end was lowered into a container having a free water
level. The water saturation in the tube was then determined at various
positions above the free water level in the container. The data obtained
are shown in Fig. 3-10 as the drainage curve. The tube was also initially
packed dry and then lowered into the water container so that water was
imbibed by the sand pack owing to the capillary forces. Again the saturations were measured at various heights above the free water level in the
container, and the data are illustrated in Fig. 3-10 as the imbibition curve.
Note the difference between the drainage and the imbibition curves as determined by Leverett. The difference in the curves is due to a hysteresis
effect which is dependent on the saturation process. Similar data to those
reported by Leverett have been obtained by other investigators on different types of systems.
The capillary pressures of Fig. 3-10 are expressed in terms of a dimensionless correlating function. This futioncn is equal to the product of the
t4
"
"
I "
I
I
1.2
lmbibition
Sand U
c
Oroinoge
,.
""'
II ""
I
I
Sand
Sand I'll
Sand ::SZ:
QS
Thus, in order to use capillary-pressure data properly, these factors must
be taken into consideration before the data are actually applied to reservoir calculations.
II
l~
Q6
0.4
..
't
I
~~ .......
~
/Druinoqe
~~
/mbibifio;;/
Q2
-'f. 0
""
r-:-- r--t~
- --);{.
,. 11:
~
20
40
60
Water saturation,
80
0
100
1..
FrG. 3-10. Correlation of data from height-saturation experiments on clean uuconsolidated sands. (From Leverett.3 )
applicable, one curve would be obtained for all samples. This particular
correlating function will be considered in more detail later in the text.
It is not possible to determine the capillary properties of naturally
occurring rock materials by a method such as used by Leverett. Core
samples of natural materials are necessarily small and are not available
in continuous sections of sufficient length for study by the simple drainage
method. Therefore other means of measuring capillary pressure have been
devised. Essentially five methods of measuring capillary pressure on small
core samples are used. These five methods are (!) desaturation or displacement process through a porous diaphragm or membrane (restored
state method of W elge'), (2) the centrifuge or centrifugal method, (3) the
144
145
dynamic capillary-pressure method, (4) the mercury-injection method,

and (5) the evaporation method.
Porous Diaphragm. The first of these, illustrated in Fig. 3-11, is the
displacement cell or diaphragm method. The essential requirement of the
diaphragm method is a permeable membrane of uniform pore-size distribution containing pores of such size that the selected displacing fluid will
and the test sample is subjected to displacement in a stepwise fashion.

Pressure applied to the assembly is increased by small increments. The
core is allowed to approach a state of static equilibrium at each pressure
level. The saturation of the core is calculated at each point defining the
capillary-pressure clirve. Any combination of fluids can be used: gas, oil,
and/or water. Complete determinations of capillary-pressure curves by
the diaphragm method are time-consuming, varying from 10 to 40 days
for a single sample, owing to the vanishing pressure differentials causing
flow as the core approaches equilibrium at each imposed pressure. As low
saturations are approached, the reduction in effective permeability to the
displaced phase also contributes to the slow approach to equilibrium.
Although most determinations of capillary pressure by the diaphragm
method are drainage tests, by suitable modifications, imbibition curves
similar to Leverett's can be obtained.
Mercury Injection. The mercury capillary-pressure apparatus (Fig.
3-12) was developed to accelerate the determination of the capillarypressure--saturations relationship. Mercury is normally a nonwetting fluid
Nitrogen pressure
oil
Scafe of
squared
paper
Neoprene stopper
Nickelploted
spring
0-200 psi pressure gouge
Seal of
red oil
0-2,000 psi pressur-e

~--+--~..L--'--',gouge
Regulating valve
To
otmospheo
Cylinder
Core
Kleenex
paper
Ulfro-fi'ne
!rifted
gloss disk
U-tube manometer
Lucite window
oj-~--Brlne
------<'
--
FIG. 3-12. Capillary-pressure cell for mercury injection. (From Purcell.'')
FrG. 3-11. Porous diaphragm capillary-pressure device. (From Welge and Bruce.e)
not penetrate the diaphragm when the pressures applied to the displacing
phase are bel6\v some selected maximum pressure of investigation. Various
materials including fritted glass, porcelain, cellophane, and others have
been used successfully as diaphragms. The membrane is saturated with
the fluid to be displaced; the test sample is placed on the membrane with
some suitable material, such as Kleenex, to aid in establishing contact;
The core sample is inserted in the mercury chamber and evacuated. Mercury is forced in the core under pressure. The volume of mercury injected
at each pressure determines the nonwetting-phase saturation. This procedure is continued until the core sample is filled with mercury or the injection
pressure reaches some predetermined value. Two important advantages
are gained: The time for determination is reduced to a few minutes, and
the range of pressure investigation is increased as the limitation of the
properties of the diaphragm is removed. Disadvantages are the difference
in wetting properties and permanent loss of the core sample.
146
147

Centrifuge Method. A third method for determination of capillary

properties of reservoir rocks is the centrifuge method' illustrated in Fig.
3-13. The high accelerations in the centrifuge increase the field of force on
the fluids, subjecting the core, in effect, to an increased gravitational force.
Seat cap
Core holder body
Window
Tube body
FIG. 3-13. Centrifuge for determination of capillary properties of rocks.

Slobod et al.8 )
(From
When the sample is rotated at various constant speeds, a complete capillary-pressure curve can be obtained. The speed of rotation is converted
into force units in the center of the core sample, and the fluid removed is
read visually by the operator. The cited advantage of the method is the
increased speed of obtaining the data. A complete curve can be established
in a few hours, while the diaphragm method requires days. It is difficult
Comparisoii of Methods of Measuremeiit. Intuitively, it appears that

the diaphragm method (restored state) is superior in that oil and water
can be used, therefore more nearly
approaching actual wetting conditions. Hence, the diaphragm method

is used as the standard against
which all other methods are compared.
In Fig. 3-15 are presented data of
Purcell' on capillary properties determined by the diaphragm and
mercury-injection methods. Note
that the pressure scale for the
curves dete~ned by mercury injection is greater by a factor of 5 than
that for the curves determined by
drainage of water displaced by air
in a displacement cell. Purcell assumed that the contact angle for
mercury against the rock surfaces
was 140 and that of water was 0.
By analogy to capillary tubes, the
ratio of mercury capillary pressure
to water-air capillary pressure is
Pcm
Pew =
taking
O"m
u"' =
Gos
Gos
outlet
To atmosphere
Oil burette
inlet
plate-.
Poree loin
F1G. 3-14. Dynamic capillary-pre~re apparatus (Hassler's principle). (From

Brown.9 )
dmCOS
U'w
140
COS
(3-10)
surface tension of mercury = 480 dynes/cm

surface tension of water = 70 dynes/cm
The above ratio
-to account for the increase in speed of reaching equilibrium as compared
with the diaphragm method, since the same resisting forces appear to be
involved in the core.
Dynamic Method. Brown' reported the results of determination of

capillary-pressure-saturation curves by a dynamic method. Figure 3-14
shows, schematically, the test apparatus. Simultaneous steady-state flow
of two fluids is established in the core. By the use of special wetted disks,
the pressure of the two fluids in the core is measured and the difference
is the capillary pressure. The saturation is varied by regulating the quantity of each fluid entering the core. It is thus possible to obtain a complete
capillary-pressure curve.
The agreement of the data when corrected by this ratio is good, as shown
in Fig. 3-15.
There is some doubt as to the validity of incorporating the contact angle
into the ratio of pressures. The geometry of the pores of a rock is complex,
and the relationship between the curvature of the interface and the radius
of the pore is not necessarily a function of the cosine of the contact angle.
It appears that an equally valid assumption is that the mean curvature
of an interface in rock is a unique function of fluid saturation. This assump--
tion permits the ratio of pressure to be defined as follows:
- - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - ----------- - - - -
148
20
10
I I
f0
1.2
-~ 0.8
4 -~
~g
;:;;
~ 0.4
>-
H20~
0
Hg fOO
20
80
40
60
60
40
~ -~
80
1o8 HzO
..
0.8
"
6
2
Hg
"
OO
Hg 100
20
40
60
80
80
60
40
20
f08 H20
0
(c)
o.
::: a.a
Perm. 35 md
Par. 19/o
'
ri 1.6
6 ~
20
- "
:a.8 0.8
Por. 16%
so
100
HzO
10
6
4
~ ..__Hg
20
i
0
40
60
~
~
2 ~
HzO
00
.E
2 "
Hg 100
80
60
40
20
O
Total pore space occupied by liquid,",{,
Ce)
1.2
so
40
"i .""'
Son Andres
limestone
Perm. 43 md
HzO
a e
~~
.E0
limestone
"
20
OO
20
40
60
BO
iOOOHzO
Hg 100
80
60
40
20
O
Total pore spoce occupied by liquid, 0/ 0
(d)
10
San Andres
~ f. 2
Total- pore space occupied by liquid, o/o
if.
HzO
4 '5.
20
HzO
0.4
60
40
P= =am= 480 = 6 57
(3-11)
Pew
Uw
70
.
With the exception of curves C and D in Fig. 3-15, a superior correlation
is established using a conversion
factor of 6.57 rather than 5. Brown' ij_ 30,.,--,--.,.--,---.--.,225.0
found that the correlating factor ~
o Restored state
187.5 ~
25
Mercury injection
~
between the diaphragm and mer- u;
,
cury-injection methods was not ~ 20H-.L...-..L.-...L-~--tf50.0 m
Sandstone core
C.
solely a function of interfacial ten- ;;>Porosity
28.1/o
5
~
112
sions and contact angles. It is noted '5. 15
Permeobility-f.43 dorcys
..2
in Fig. 3-16 that for a sandstone
Factor - 7.5
g.
75.0
~ fO
core, the correlating factor is 7.5.
~
~
For the same fluids it is shown that -~ sl-~+--...J..--+--!--!37.5 ,~
the correlating factor for a lime~
~
~
stone core is 5.8. It appears that a ~ 0.L~~~:=~3lo
o 20 40 60 80 100
universal conversion factor cannot
be defined, as it is different for each
0
20
100 80
type of porous rock.
-Hg
Good agreement of centrifuge
Liquid saturation,%
(a)
data with those from the diaphragm method was reported by
- 60~------~~348
Slobod.8 A typical curve showing :!:.
reproducibility bet\veen successive
290
determinations with the centrifuge
as well as the correlation with data
obtained by the diaphragm method 0
is shown in Fig. 3-17. Unlike the ,._ 3;of--+-+""'d--\----1174
;;.
mercury-injection method, there is
no need of conversion factors to correct for wetting properties. The
58
same fluids are used in the centrifugal and diaphragm methods.
The excellent correlation obtained by Brown' between the
20
0
100 80
diaphragm and dynamic methods is
illustrated in Fig. 3-18. The dynaLiquid saturation, "lo
(bl
mic data were obtained by simultaneous steady flow of oil and gas Fra. 3-16. Capillary pressures by restoredthrough the porous sample at a state and mercury-injection methods
predetermined level of pressure dif- (From Brown.
ference between the fluids. Care was
taken to maintain uniform saturations throughout the core as well as to conduct the test so that a close correspondence to drainage conditions existed.
SO
0
0
"
10
Uppl!f"
Wilcox sandstone
Perm. 430 md
Por. 22'Yo
-
~ 0.8
149
00
Hg
20
40
60
80
iOO HzO
Hg fOO
SO
60
40
20
0
Total pore space occupied by liquid, 0fo
(b)
PaJuxy sandstone _
Perm, f,150md
Par. 20/o
~ .__,._
Hz~
l 0.4
10
'!;
,g
(a)
i.2
20
0
Total pore space occupied by liquid, o/o
Perm. 170 md
Por. 26/o
Frio sandstone _
~ 1.6
10
Perm. 23 md
Por. 23%
"'
20
~ 1.6 ~ Frio sandstone
MEDIA CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID "SATURATIONS
"
iOO H.zll
Hg !00
SO
20
0
Toto! pore space occupied by liquid,%
(f)
FIGd. 3-15. Typical capillary-pressure curves obtained from displacement cell (HJ))
an from mercury apparatus (Hg). (From Purcell.~)
0
0
0
0
150
32
A correlation between water saturation and air permeability for cores

obtained with oil-base muds is shown in Fig. 3-19. A general trend of increasing water saturation with decreasing permeability is indicated. It is
accepted from field and experimental evidenqe that the water content de-
Core No. AVZ
2 a-~
24
._., _
K0 =i,030md
+24.9%
.6. Centrifuge dota 1 st run
Centrifuge data 2d run
Disk method
151
10,000.--,---~-~--r--,---~---,.--,---.,.---.
100
,
,
-~
ie
Sandstone core
~
0.2
'-'
0.6
0.4
0.8
0
0
" 1""'9--
Brine saturation
Brown.Q)
40
60
80
Liquid saturation,%
20
=W(IShington
:E/k Basin
=Rangely
=Creole
=Syntfletic alundum
=Loire St. John
9 =Louisiana Gulf Coast

MioC811e Age-We/lo
500~--l~-'H-+--rt-'I- ->,---l'----+- 10 =Ditto-Wells Bond C
I
20
1.0
FIG. 3-17. Comparison of centrifuge and

disk capillary-pressure data. (From
1,0001---+-+-J+-\-"IP"<--+--+--{
s.
c
3
4
5
6
7
8
Porosity: 23.8%
Permeability: l!00111d
:: 4 0
8
4
t =Howkins
5,0001----t--+--+---1----l--t 2 =Magnolia
I I
I :ft:~;ic
_
100
ff =North Belrklge-Co!ifornio
ffA :Nortfl Be!tidge-CO!fforniu
core analysis dotu
=Dominguez second zone
'3 -=Ohio sandstone
Fla. 3-18. Capillary pressure by static

and dynamic methods. (From Brown.')
Interstitial-water Saturations
Essentia~y t'.""ee methods are available to the reservoir engineer for
the deterininat1on of connate- or interstitial-water saturations Th
methods are (1) coring formations with oil-base or tracer-bearfug flu:':
(2) calculated from electric log analysis and (3) determined from capilla
ry
pressure data.
100
~
80
..
:;:.
~
'
60
"'
..:
40
.. .,.. '"
101-----l---+---+--l--'lc---\c+---l--+-~-'l<---1
..
...-
,,...
OOL--~10,---2~0,--~3L0--4L0-~5LO-...i60L..-~7L0--8~0,---90-l-_....J100
Connote water, 0/o
FrG. 3-20. Comparison of the connate-water-permeability relationships for various
formations. (From Welge and Bruce.15 )
~ 20
00
6 810
20
40 60 100
Air permeability, millidorcys
200
400
FIG. 3-19. Rela(Ftion of the air permeability to the water content of the South Coles
L evee cores.
rom Gates et al.10)
termined from cores cut with oil-base mud reflects closely the water saturation as it exists in a reservoir except in transition zones, where some of
the interstitial water is replaced by filtrate or displaced by gas expansion.
In Fig. 3-20 are shown permeability-connate-water relationships reported in the literature for a number of fields and areas. There is no gen-
..
152
era! co"."elation applicable to all fields. However, an approximately linear

correlat10n between connate water and the logarithm of permeability f
h . d. .dual
e>.'lS""
or eac m IVI ~eld. The general trend of the correlation is decreasing
co~ate water with mcreasing permeability.
8 30
8 40
'
'
1-+-Minimum of 22% connote water
8 50
86 0
870
P,
A Doto dedved from

capillary pressure
.
'
90 0
o Do.ta obtained from
electric toqs
91 0
92 0
.2
93 0
'ff.
940
C>
95 0
g.
'
"'
970
\
990
1,000
'
"
,0
Approximate qos-oi/ contact.:..._ ~
'
1,010
........ ,..._
~~
1 020
10 20
gh(p, - p,)
(3-6)
P, = u
(.!.R, + R,.!.)
(3-8)
When these equations are put in oil-field tenns, the capillary pressure
in pounds per square inch can be stated as
h
P, =
(p1 - p2)
(3-12)
144
960
980
where Pc = capillary pressure

g = gravitational constant
h = height above plane of zero capillary pressure between fluids
1and2
p, = density of heavier fluid
p, = density of lighter fluid
It was also shown that
153
the formation there is no significant variation in water saturation with

depth or method of determination. However, in the oil-bearing portion of
the rock there is a significant variation in the water saturation with depth.
The oil segment is almost wholly in the oil-water transition zone. Variations in water saturations with depth within that zone must be taken into
account in order to determine accurately average reservoir connate- or
interstitial-water saturations.
Water Saturation from Capillary-pressure Data. Before going into the
actual determinations of water distributions from capillary-pressure data,
it is best to discuss the basis upon which these determinations are made.
In the prior sectio~, using the classic capillary .tube, it was shown that
88 0
89 0
---------- - - - - - - - - - -
30
40
so
60
70
80
90 100
Water saturation {co!c), 0/ 0
Frc. ~-21. Comparison of water distribution as determined by capillary-pressu

d
electric-log data. (From Owen.n)
re an
If capillary-pressure data are to be used for determining fluid saturations.

the values .obtarned should be comparable to those of other methods:
Water distnbut10ns as determined from electric Jogs and capillary-pressure
?ata are ~or~ally m good agreement. A comparison of these two methods
rs shown m Frg. 3-21. Shown also is the approximate position of the gas-oil
contact as determined from other test data. In the gas-bearing portion of
where h is in feet, p1 and P2 are the densities of fluids 1 and 2, respectively,

in pounds per cubic feet at the conditions of the capillary pressure.
Converting Laboratory Data. To use laboratory capillary-pressure data
it is necessary to convert to reservoir conditions. Laboratory data are
obtained with a gas-water or an oil-water system, which does not norm.ally have the same physical properties as the reservoir water, oil, and gas.
There are essentially two techniques, differing only in the initial assumptions, available for correcting laboratory capillary-pressure data to reservoir conditions. As shown previously, by means of the capillary tube, the
capillary pressure is expressed as
P, = 2u cos 9
r
Considering a specific case wherein the laboratory values are determined
with gas and water, the capillary pressure becomes
(Pc)L = 2<1'1011
COS
610 11
(3-5)
---------------- - -------------
154
where er wa is the interfacial tension bet\veen gas and water used in laboratory tests, and r is the radius of the capillary. The capillary pressure which
would exist if reservoir fluids, oil and water, were used in the same capillary
would be
155
For reservoir conditions

P,R = <TR[f(S.)]
therefore
j(Sw) = P,L = P,R
O"L
qR
so that
where
interfacial tension between reservoir i.vater and oil at reservoir

temperature and pressure
8w 0 = contact angle for reservoir water and oil
r = radius of capillary
u wo
Comparing the equations for laboratory and reservoir capillary preBf:ure,

it is found that the reservoir capillary pressure is
(P,)R = ""'cos 8., (P,)L
(3-13)
Uwq COS 8wg
Thus reservoir capillary pressure can be calculated from laboratory capillary pressure when the interfacial tensions and contact angle bet\veen oil
and water in the reservoir and gas and water in the laboratory are knovvll.
This relationship assumes that the saturations as measured in the laboratory remain equal to the saturations in the reservoir so that the height of
rise in capillary tubes of equal radii are the same. It is difficult, if not
impossible, to determine the exact value of the contact angle for fluids in
a porous matrix. The cosine of the contact angle can vary bet\veen -1
and I, which can cause considerable variation in the resulting conversion
of laboratory data, and therefore it 'is often desirable to neglect the contact
angle in Eq. (3-13).
A second technique, a relationship neglecting the contact angle, for converting laboratory data to reservoir conditions can be obtained by stating
the capillary pressure as
P, =
where
"(1-+
1-)
R1
R2
(3-8)
Pc = capillary pressure, dynes/sq cm

q = interfacial tension, dynes/cm
R 1 and R 2 = principal radii of curvature: cm
If it is assumed that the radii of curvature are uniquely defined by the

saturation in the wetting phase for a given displacement process (imbibition or drainage), an equation expressing the capillary pressure as a function of saturation can be written as
P, = o-[f(S.)]
where f(S.) is a function of saturation which can be determined by a laboratory test for laboratory conditions, so that
Pea=
<J'R
<TL
PcL
(3-14)
Since the interfacial tensions enter as a ratio, pressure in any consistent

units can be used together with the interfacial tension in dynes per centimeter.
.
As was noted in the discussion on mercury-injection tests, the caplllarypressure data obtained with one set of :fluids cannot be exactly converted
to the basis of another set of fluids by either Eq. (3-13) or (3-14). In the
case of mercury-injection tests, Eq. (3-14) yielded the better results. As
this relationship is simpler and does not require knowledge of the con~ct
angles under reservoir conditions, it will be used in all future conversion
calculations in this text.
Averaging Capillary-pressure Data. As capillary-pressure data are obtained on small core samples which represent an extremely small part of
the reservoir it is necessary to combine all the capillary data to classify
a particular ;eservoir. As would be expected from Fig. 3-20, fiuid-~tura
tion-capillary-pressure relationships are affected by the permeability of
the sample. It therefore becomes necessary to evaluate the various sets of
capillary-pressure data with respect to the permeability of the core sample
from which they were obtained.
There are two proposed methods of correlating capillary-pr~ssure ~ata
for a reservoir. The first method is that proposed by Leverett wherein a
correlating function, commonly called the J function, is used. The second
method, which was best illustrated by Guthrie," is a statistical approach
to the problem.
.
.
The J -function correlating term uses the physical properties of the rock
and :fluid and is expressed as
J(S.) =
~' G)~
(3-15)
where P, = capillary pressure, dynes/sq cm

q = interfacial tension, dynes/ cm
k = permeability, sq cm
<f> = fractional porosity
Some authors alter the above expression by including the cos
is the contact angle) as follows:
e (where e
------- ---------------
-------------~-----
156
J(S.) = _!!_,___ (~)Jll

q
cos(}
(3-16)
</>
The inclusion of the cos e term will not be used herein by the authors, and
the J function will be as defined by Eq. (3-15).
The J function was originally proposed as a means of converting all
capillary-pressure data to a universal curve. There are significant differences in correlation of the J function with water saturation from formation
to formation, so that no universal curve can be obtained.
Correlation of the J function with water saturation for a number of
materials is illustrated in Fig. 3-22. Note that there is an independent
!. 5
1. 4
'
form<Jtion
"I\
Ha.tins
RonQ.iy
Er Roble
Woodbirie
Weber
.
I
Hawkins,
o.a
0.7
a.
0.5
""
0.4
0.3
'
~3
~11
Deese
Devon ion
0.4f9
., ~\
--
,\
<\.
-:i:
~
Morena
~-
....._
"""-..I
.. 1~~
_.-Rangely
'"'
' oo oo
correlation for each material considered. Brown9 considered the J function

as a correlating device for capillary-pressure data. In an eva1uation of
samples from the Edwards formation in the Jourdanton Field he used the
expression
_!!_,___ (~))ll
ucosO q,
80
40
60
Liquid saturation, lo
ll
100
le)
..
..
'
.
..":\ ... .
'
I~
. . ....
~..:.:o0o o
.., . .
40
60
80
Liquid saturation, %
Id)
20
100
FIG. 3-22. Capillary retention curves. (From Rose and Bruce.u)
100
Liquid saturation, 0/o
-o::::
:;.-:;:
....
-n.
~~.
80
.....
~ '.,&,, . .
40 ~ oo ro
Water saturation, Sw
J(Sw)
100
Liquid saturation, %
lb)
..
o.447-
Kinsella shale/
m m
100
3;F1---+--+---+---l----.J
Theoatical limiting
vakll for ~ular
pacted spheres/-
"\_
.
Ka:ie./
O.l
oo
-....1.j.
0.2
-IN
\A!u!'dum
~'
\~ -
.,
g 1.
60
80
Liquid soturation, %.
lo)
0.37~
'\!"
'\
Q.3!5
o.H6.:.,.._
0.114
Viking
Ltduc-
10
""""~1 ...
0:1a
""~~
I
-Kinsella
! \
,i
0
O.l5f
I~
\\
}!,:~->
Alundum {a>nsalidatt'd l
Leverett ( unconsolidated J
I"
11:
I '
Leverttt_,,>:
Katie
Leduc
Figure 3-23a shows the correlation obtained for all samples available from
the field. There is considerable dispersion of data points, although the
trend of the correlation is good. Brown found that the correlations could
be improved by dividing materials on a textural basis. The core materials
were subdivided into limestone and dolomites, both materials occurring
within the productive section of the Edwards formation. The correlation
___________
Kinsella
I' I
0.9
"'"
i'
v,
3
2
157
""..g" "
~.
20
FIG. 3-23. J-function correlation of capillary-pressure data in the Edwards formation,

Jourdanton Field. J curve for (a) all cores; (b) limestone cores; (c) dolomite cores;
9
(d) microgranular limestone cores; (e) coarse-grained limestone cores. (FromBrou,-n. )
----- ------
158
--------
---
159
for the limestone samples is shown in Fig. 3-23b and for the dolomite samples in Fig. 3-23c. The dolomite samples indicate a good correlation, while
the limestone samples exhibit a scattering of data in the range of low water
saturations. In an attempt to obtain a better correlation, the limestone
of the correlation is used (Fig. 3-25). In the lower portion of the figure are
shown curves of constant porosity resulting from correlations using Eq.
(3-19). A better correlation is obtained using Eq. (3-19) rather than Eb.
S
cores were further subdivided into microgranular and coarse-grain samples.

The J curves for microgranular and coarse-grained limestone samples are
shown in Fig. 3-23d and e, respectively. The dispersion of data points,is
greater for the coarse-grained limestone samples than any other group.
This is to be expected, as the coarse-grained limestone contains solution
cavities, vugs, and channels which are not capillary in size, hence the de-
='14' + o2 log
k +C
log k
lag k
viations from trends established in capillary-pressure data.
The second method of evaluating capillary-pressure data is to analyze

a number of representative samples and treat the data statistically to
derive correlations which, together with the porosity and permeability
distribution data, can be used to compute the connate-water saturations
for a field. A first approximation for the correlation of capillary-pressure
data is to plot water saturation against the logarithm of permeability for
constant values of capillary pressure. An approximately linear relationship usually results such as those shown in Fig. 3-20. A straight line can
be fitted to the data for each value of capillary pressure, and average
capillary-pressure curves computed from permeability distribution data
for the field. The resulting straight-line equation takes the general form of
Capillary pressure
= 5 psi
'
~
Sw=alogk+C
(3-17)
There are indications, however, that water saturation at constant capillary pressure is not only a function of permeability but also some function
of porosity. In Fig. 3-24, the results of fitting an equation
Sw = a,q,
+ a,. log k + C
(3-18)
to the field data for 5-psi capillary pressure is shown. The upper portion
of Fig. 3-24 shows the three-dimensional aspect of such a correlation. The
lower part shows lines of constant porosity (light dashed lines) fitted to
the data. The heayy black dashed line is the straight line [Eq. (3-17)]
fitted to the data wherein the effect of porosity is omitted.
In Eq. (3-17) and (3-18), Sw is the water saturation, q, the porosity,
k the permeability, and a 1 , a 2, and C are constants which must be determined from the sample data. The method of least squares can be used to
determine the constants of the best fitting lines as described by (3-17) and
(3-18). The effect of ignoring the porosity is to predict lower water saturations for low-permeability materials. Equation (3-18) can be modified
to a polynomial form so that
Sw = a1q,
+ a,q, + a, log k + a,,(log k)' + C

2
(3-19)
Note the change in three-dimensional aspects when the polynomial form
~f----+'H-"1-~:.---+---+----l
:;;
0
f----l--'ff~
~'h+--f---J
:0
0
2>---+--
..."
...
2J----t---O---'-,.--t~="<-t-'c---J
..i :-
L___
_J__
"
.:rg
_ t_ _ _j__2-{-'2,-/5:
30
Porosity
Brine soturotion S
Brine
F1a. 3-24. Correlation of capillary-pressure data. (From Guthrie and Green-
Fla. 3-25. Correlation of capillary-pressure data. (From Guthrie and Green-
burger.12)
burger.12)
(3-17), but for most engineering purposes, with limited data, correlations
as implied by the latter equation are satisfactory.
Fluid-distribution curves are reported for several values of permeability,
160
Pll:TROLEUM RESERVOffi ENGINEERING
ranging from IO to 900 millidarcys in Fig. 3-26. These data may be considered also to be capillary-pressure curves. The ordinate on the right
reflects values of capillary pressure determined by displacing water with
air in the laboratory. The ordinates on the left include the corresponding
30
200
27 .:::: 180
24
~ 160
~ ~ 21
~ 140
~w
.-
90
,,\
~ ~ ~ ~~
18
~ 120
15
g. 100
63 ~w o
w54 ii..g
~>
45 E 0
~~
12
ao
.... ~
~
-E~9~60
f-
81
"'
~~
8 ~
"~
28
~-6
~ ~ ~
..c
6 ~
..c:
40
3 -~ 20
J:
'
10
20
'
.'-.
8 .&
wo-
water saturation in the gas zone varies from 24 to 20 per cent. Such a
large variation of water saturation in the oil zone could cause a large error
in the estimated oil reserve if not properly accounted for. It therefore becomes imperative that the water distribution with height within the oil
zone be determined so that a inean
water saturation for the oil zone is
obtained for use in determining oil
reserves.
To convert capillary-pressure-saturation data to height saturation, it
is only necessary to rearrange the
terms in Eq. (3-12) so as to solve
for the height instead of the capillary pressure so that
~
"o
\ \
36
27
I8
"
30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Water saturation, o/o
.!.
<(
10g
FIG. 3-26. Reservoir fluid-distribution curves. (From Wright and Wooddy.u)
oil-water capillary pressure that would exist at reservoir conditions and

the fluid distribution with height above the free water surface. The capillary-pressure ordinates presented in Fig. 3-26 were back-calculated from
data presented by Wright."
Figure 3-27 represents the application of Eq. (3-17) to the data of
Fig. 3-26. The results of a correlation previously discussed, of the capillarypressure data presented in Fig. 3-26, by means of the second technique are
shown in Fig. 3-27.
The reader should note the linearity of the curves for each value of
capillary] pressure and the tendency of all capillary-pressure curves to
converge at high-permeability values. This behavior is what would
normally be expected because of the larger capillaries associated with high
permeabilities.
It is now possible to convert all laboratory data to values which are
suitable for application to a particular reservoir system and average these
values to obtain a reservoir fluid distribution. The capillary-pressuresaturation data have to be converted into height-saturation data to be
applicable to the reservoir. Such data are illustrated in Fig. 3-21 wherein
capillary-pressure-saturation data are compared with saturation data calculated from electric logs. In Fig. 3-21 it is noted that the water saturation
within the oil zone varies from 100 to approximately 24 per cent and the
161
h = P, X 144
Pw -
Po
where h = height above free water

surface, ft
Pm = density of water at reservoir
conditions,
lb/cu ft
Po = density of oil at reservoir
conditions,
lb/cu ft
Pc = capillary pressure at
some particular saturation for reservoir
conditions,
which
means it must first
be converted from
laboratory data
Water saturation, "lo
FIG. 3-27. Correlation of water saturation with permeability for various

capillary- pressures. (From Wright and
Wooddy.1~)
By use of this equation, it is possible to convert laboratory capillarypressure data into a water-saturation curve as a function of height as was
shown in Fig. 3-21. This type of system, then, would be represented by
an idealized fluid distribution as shown in Fig. 3-28. Here, two cores are
used for illustrative purposes where core A represents a core sample within
the_ oil zone and core B represents a core sample within the oil-gas zone.
By use of capillary-pressure data, it is possible to calculate the water saturations that exist in cores A and B.
It is emphasized here that all height measurements are from the free
water surface. This surface is not necessarily defined by the level at which
only water is produced but is that surface defined by zero capillary pres-
-------------------------------------
102
~UTe. r!'~e free Water surface is dependent Upon the capillary pressure and
the relative permeability of the porous system. For this reason, the means
of ~lect1ng or calculating the proper free water surface will be delayed
until after the discussion of relative and effective permeabilities for multi-
163
calculating the height of a saturation plane above the free water surface is
not valid.
It is possible to determine the range over which the conversion equation
is valid from the laboratory data. The wetting phase is said to be discontinuous when the capillary pressure increases without changing its saturation. Referring to Fig. 3-26, it is seen that the wetting phase, water,
becomes discontinuous at a height of approximately 130 ft above the free
water surface.
By determining the free water surface from coring, electric logs, or drillstem tests, it is possible to calculate the water saturations as a function of
height above the free water surface by using Eq. (3-14).
Example 3-1. Calculation of Height of Saturation Plane from Laboratory Capillary-pressure Data.
If P,L
er wo
= 18 psi for Sw = 0.35,

= 24 dynes
68 lb/cu ft
72 dynes
= 53 lb/cu ft
Pw =
----------
u wo =
p,
then, from Eq. (3-14),

Free water
P,R
level
P,R(l44)
Pw -
Pu
18(;;) = ~ = 6psi
8
6(144)
68 - 53
6(144) ""'58 ft
15
Thus, a water saturation of 35 per cent exists at a height of 58 ft above

the free water surface.
Fro. 3-28. Fluid distribution in a petroleum reservoir. (From Welge and Bruce.8 )
phase systems. For the time being, it will be considered that the free water
surface can be defined and that all measurements can be made from that
surface. Ii;i order that the relationship used to convert capillary-pressure
data to h".1ght ab~v.e the free water surface be valid, it is necessary that
the followmg cond1t10ns be satisfied:
1. The pressure in the oil and water are equal at the free surface.
2. The water and oil columns are continuous and connected throughout
the range of the calculations.
3. The system is in static equilibrium.
If any of these three conditions are not satisfied, then the equation for
To calculate the fluid saturation in the gas zone, it is necessary to consider all three phases: oil, water, and gas. If all three phases are continuous, it can be shown that
\>here (P,)w, = capillary pressure at given height above free water surface
determined by using water and gas
(Pc)wo = capillary pressure at given height above free water surface
using oil and water
(P,),, = capillary pressure at height above free oil surface using oil
and gas
If the wetting phase becomes discontinuous, then the wetting-phase
saturation takes on a minimum value, and at all heights above the point
of discontinuity the wetting-phase saturation cannot be less than this mini-
164
mum value. It is then possible to calculate the fluid saturations above the
free oil surface by the following relations:
1. S. at h, calculated using oil and water as the continuous phases
2. S, at h, calculated using oil and gas as the continuous phases and
height denoted by the free oil surface
3. S, = 1 - S,
s. = S, - s.
4.
Example 3-2. Calculation of Water and Oil Saturation in Gas Zone

from Capillary-pressure Data. Let oil zone thickness h. = 70 ft
" = 72 dynes
Po
""' = 50 dynes
" = 25 dynes
= 53 lb/cu ft
p. =
p, =
68 lb/cu ft
7 lb/cu ft
From Fig. 3-26 for a 900-millidarcy sample

let P,, = 54 psi by the method illustrated in Example 3-1
P,a = 18 psi
h1. = height above free water level = 120 ft
S. = 16 per cent at a height of 70 ft or greater (read from curve)
As the oil zone is only 70 ft thick, then the height of 120 ft above the free
water surface must be at least 50 ft into the gas-saturated zone. The first
step is to calculate the total fluid saturation S, using gas and oil as the continuous phases.
h1.
= h1. - h, = 120 - 70 = 50 ft
(P,a)., = lh:i (p, - p,)

50
= 144
50
(53 - 7) = 144
46
= 15.96 psi
P oL = P oR -" = 15.96 X 72 = 23 pSI.

u,,
50
From Fig. 3-26 for a laboratory capillary pressure of 23 psi, permeability

of 900 millidarcys, the total wetting saturation is
therefore
S, = 18 per cent
S, - S. = 18 - 16 = 2 per cent
S, = 100 - S, = 100 - 18 = 82 per cent
s. =
It must be understood that the relationships used in calculating the fluid

satur~ti~ns in the gas zone were based upon continuity of all three phases.
As this lS not normally the case, it might be expected that saturations
MJIDIA CONTAINING MULTlPLJ!l: RUID SATURATIONS
165
somewhat different from the calculated values might exist. As the capillary pressure for a discontinuous phase could vary from pore to pore, it is
impossible to ascertain the exact relationships that should exist. Rene~,
the preceding method of calculating fluid distributions is not exact bu_t lS
usually as accurate as the data available for making the computat10n.
Calculation of W ettability
Wettability of Reservoir Rocks. As mentioned earlier in th_e discussio_n
of capillary pressure, the curvature of an interface confined m a pore IS
some function of the contact angle,
which, in turn, is a functiori of the
wetting properties of the fluids and
the rock surfaces. The degree to
which fluids wet a solid surface was
shown to depend on the interfacial
tensions between the various contacts, fluid-solid and fluid-fluid.
occupied D Pore space occupied
There are t\VO means of expressing 0Pore space
by HzO
by HzO
the degree of wettability. The first BaRock matrix
m Rock matrix
is expressed in terms of the contact
occupied Pore space occupied
angle. A contact angle of zero would .Pore space
by oil
by oil
indicate complete wetting by the
(b)
(a)
more dense phase, an angle of 90
FrG. 3-29. Wetting in idealized pores of
indicates that neither phase prefer- reservoir rocks. (a) Oil wet; (b) water
entially wets the solid, and an angle wet. (From Calhoun.ll;)
of 180 indicates complete wetting by
the less dense phase. The contact angle is, therefore, a measure of the
relative wetting of a solid by a fluid.
Another convenient index of wettability is the sessile drop ratio, defined as the ratio of the height of
a droplet on a surface to the
breadth of the droplet. A sessile
drop ratio of 1 indicates complete
nonwetting, whereas a ratio of zero
indicates complete wetting.
The wettability of reservoir rocks
R _ 217 cos 8
to the fluids present in these rocks
cr
Fra. 3-30. Illustration of relation between is of great importance in that the.
distribution of the fluids within the
wettability and capillary pressure.
interstices is a function of the wettability. Figure 3-29 is an idealized representation of.the change in fluid
distribution in a given pore due to a change from oil wettmg to water
166
MEDIA CONTAINING M'CLTIPLE FLUID SATURATIONS
wetting. Because of the attractive forces, the wetting fluid tends to

occupy the smaller interstices of the rock and the nonwetting fluid
occupies the more open channels.
Since reservoir roc~s are, for the most part, aggregates of small mineral
and :ock fragments, 1t is not possible to determine the wetting properties
by direct mea:'urement of contact angles or sessile drop ratios. However,
by ~nalogy with th~ e~ect of wetting properties on capillary pressure in
capillary tube~, an 1~direct measureme:nt is indicated. In Fig. 3-30 are
shown the capillary nse of water in a tube and the capillary depression of
me:cury. A we~ting fl~d tends to enter a pore or tube spontaneously,
while a nonwettmg flmd resists entry. It is suggested that the conta t
angle and some degree of wettability can be calculated from the
pressure (pr~s.sure just causing nonwetting fluid entry) of a porous system.
Data obtamed by C~lhoun and Yuster" on core samples for the threshold pressure as a funct10n of permeability are reported in Fig. 3-31. The
thresho~d
1,00 0
700
500
300
,.._.
0
'~
....
--
10 0
70
50
~
30
,_
'
C ontact ang1e
PTwo Uoa
= cos e = p Toa fiwo
167
(3-21)
100
where
cos (j oa = 1
cos Bwo = contact angle between water and oil in core
cos Ooa = contact angle between air and oil in core
PT10o = threshold pressure of core for oil to enter when core
initially saturated with water
PToa = threshold pressure of core for air to enter when core
initially saturated with oil
aoa and <Iwo = interfacial tensions between air and oil and oil and
water, respectively
Table 3-1 summarizes the data presented by Slobod. 17 A wettability
number of 1.0 would indicate complete wetting by water; of zero, complete
wetting by oil. In general, intermediate wetting is exhibited for the core
samples reported on in Table 3-1.
The effects of wettability must be considered in all laboratory determinations of residual oil saturations, capillary pressure, and other similar
tests. Important changes in the physical properties of core samples have
been noted which are apparently due to changes which occurred in the
rock-wetting characteristics during laboratory extraction with solvents .
Some of the unexplained irregularities in capillary pressure and other
laboratory core data could possibly be attributed to the uncertainties in
the wetting properties of the rock samples and possible changes in these
wetting properties due to aging and laboratory procedures.
Pore-size Distribution and Calculation

of Permeability from Capillary-pressure Data
10
.
Q3
o.s
0.1
to
'.
3
5 7 10
30
50 70 100
Permeability, md at atmospheric pressure

~~-_3-31.
1
Threshold pres.sure as a function of permeability and wettability (---)

into water; (-) water into oil. (From Calhoun and Yuster.10)
dashe~ curv~
is for. water entering a rock containing oil, while the solid

curve is for 01! entenng a water-bearing rock. The lower pressures required
for water entry are concluded to be indicative of preferential wetting of
the core samples by water.
Slobod" ~xtended the concept of using threshold pressures as a means
of determmmg the wetting characteristics to compute a wettability number and an apparent contact angle. The wettability number and apparent
contact angle are both defined by Eqs. (3-20) and (3-21).
Wettability number = cos 8100 PT100 a oa
COS Ooa PToa U 100
(3-20)
In the discussion of permeability in Chap. 2, the analogy between fluid

flow in tubes and the permeability of porous media was noted. Furthermore, it was stated that if a porous medium was conceived to be a bundle
of capillary tubes, the permeability could be shown to be some function of the porosity or, more rigorously, the arrangement of the tubes. In
one form or another all the above relationships connect the fluid-conducting capacity with the volume storage capacity of a flow system.
As the pores of a rock vary in size, the concept of pore-size distribution
must be introduced before relationships connecting the permeability and
porosity of a porous matrix can be derived.
As noted in the capillary-pressure curves previously presented, the capillary pressure is a function of the fluid properties and of the saturation.
For a given rock-fluid system and saturation history, the saturation at a
given capillary pressure is some function of the pore geometry. If the
porous medium is conceived to be a bundle of capillary tubes of various
radii, then the capillary-pressure-saturation curve relates the number and
168

TABLE
3-1.
MEDIA CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID SATURAr10Ns
COMPARISON OF WETTABILITY .AMONG CORE SAMPLES OF

DIFFERENT ORIGIN".17
Core
No.
Description
Initial desaturation
pressure' (threshold.
pressure, psi)
Air-oil
Apparent
contact
angle, deg
Devonian
limestone
6.5
6.8
6.25
6.4
6.1
6.2
6.0
3.9
0.835
0.811
0.854
0.541
33.4
35.8
31.3
57.2
1588
1589
1590
1591
Yates
sandstone
0.86
0.85
0.85
1.00
0.32
0.3
0.31
0.4
0.331
0.314
0.324
0.356
70.7
71.4
71.1
69.l
1542
1543
1544
1545
Alundum
(RA 1139)
0.70
0.70
0.68
0.67
0.25
0.28
0.4
0.28
0.318
0.356
0.522
0.372
71.5
69.1
58.5
68.2
0.72
0.54
1.58
2.90
0.24
0.32
0.32
0.45
0.297
0.528
0.180
0.138
72.7
58.l
79.6
82.l
0.86
0.86
0.68
0.86
0.21
0.21
0.12
0.27
0.217
0.217
0.157
0.280
77.5
77.5
81.0
73.8
1592
1593
1594
1595
!620
1621
1622
1623
Clearfork
Limestone
Tensleep
sand
" Routine extraction with chloroform preceded wettability tests except alundum,
which has been regenerated at 1400 F for 3 hr.
h Air-oil surface tension = 24.9 dynes/cm.
Oil-water interfacial tension = '..'-8.U
dynes/cm.
The flow rate from a single tube of radius r is given by Poiseuille's law
!!.P
Q = ""'
8L
(3-22)
Since the volume of the capillary is V = 7r1'L, substituting the volume in

Eq. (3-22) above gives
Q=
v;L:i;
Solving Eq. (3-5) for rand substituting yield

Q
(,,-cos 8) 2 V !!.P
2L'(P,) 2
If the porous medium is conceived to be comprised of n capillary tubes of

equal length but random radii, the total rate of flow is given by
i=n
_ (u cos 8) 2 !!.P \' ____"G_

2.L2
i~'1 (Pc)l
Qt
(3-23)
From Darcy's law of fluid flow in porous media
' -_ kAL!!.P
(3-24)
Combining Eqs. (3-23) and (3-24) a relation for permeability as a function

of pore volume and capillary pressure is obtained, Eq. (3-25):
k _(,,-cos 8) 2 ' \ " __!'.;__
_L.,
,_,
2AL
(P,)l
(3-25)
The volume V, of each capillary can be expressed as a fraction S, of the

total void volume V r of the system, so that
size of pores penetrated by the nonwetting fluid at a given capillury
V~ =Si
pressure.
PurcelF and Burdine 18 both have reported on computation of peru1eability from capillary-pressure data obtained by the mercury-penetration
method. Purcell utilized the concept of pore-size distribution without
evaluating the distributions. He applied the data directly to the computation of permeability. Burdine reported pore-size distributions as well a.s
the results of computation of permeability.
The equation presented by Purcell for the calculation of permeability
from the pore properties of a rock is developed as follows:
(3-5)
Oil-water
BTL
BTN
BTO
BTP
Synthetic
The minimum capillary pressure required to displace a wetting fluid

from or inject a nonwetting fluid into a capillary tube of radius r is given by
Pc= 2ucos8
Wettability
numberh
169
Since AL is the bulk volume of the system and <P is the fractional porosity,
Vr
AL
<P = -

i=n
k _ (u cos 8) 2 <P \'
___;__
L.,
,_,
(P,)l
(3-26)
To account for the deviation of the actual pore space from the simple
geometry used in the derivation, Purcell introduced a lithology factor X
into the final equation. Introducing conversion factors and generalizing,
Eq. (3-26) reduces to
TABLE 3-2. OBSERVED VALUES OF LITHOLOGY FAC"rOR7
I70
k = 10.24(u cos 8) 21' X
ls
dS
(P )'
s~1
8=0
Sample no.
(3-27)
where k = permeability, millidarcys

q, = fractional porosity
S = fraction of total pore space occupied by liquid injected or
forced out of sample
Pc = capillary pressure, psi
u = interfacial tension, dynes/cm
8 = contact angle
dS
(s~i
14,260,P A } s~o (P.)'
1
2"
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(3-28)
To evaluate Eq. (3-28) the integral is found by reading values of P.

from the capillary-pressure curve at various saturations,- calculating values
of 1/(P.) 2, and plotting these values as a function of the corresponding
values of saturation which existed on the original capillary-pressure curves.
The value of the integral is the area under the curve 1/(P.) 2 (see Fig. 3-32).
14
0.56
12
048
Pc
l(
\
"
g
a. 4
-~
100
80
e"
~
0.16
v
~.
60
<;:!..:
1'
0.24
~v
'~
'E
./
(f'c)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
0.40"' ~
9-"
0.32
"
g
a.
0
40
20
Per cent of total pore space occupied by mercury
F10. 3-32. Graphical presentation of capillary-pressure data for calculating permeability. (After Purcell.1 )
0.085
0.122
0.168
0.149
0.200
0.165
0.257
0.256
0.191
0.107
0.216
0.273
0.276
0.185
0.282
0.363
3.04
21.2
17.3
53.5
61.9
91.6
92.3
97.5
163
680
430
348
388
902
816
865
1.2
12.0
13.4
36.9
57.4
70.3
110
116
144
336
430
439
496
772
1,070
1,459
0.182
0.158
0.231
0.276
0.215
0.163
0.284
0.272
0.338
0.003
0.10
42.2
54.9
172
183
308
422
383
502
734
<0.1
<0.1
35.7
40.2
184
235
307
320
506
634
1,150
Av 0.216
0.08 '$.
Observed air
permeability,
millidarcys
Paluxy Formation
-;>.
Permeability calculated from Eq. (3-28)

usini an average A
of 0.216
Upper Wilcox Formation
Purcell assumed that the contact angle for mercury was 140 and that
the interfacial tension of mercury was 480 dynes/cm. Therefore, using
mercury capillary-pressure data, Eq. (3-27) further reduces to
k
Factor 1 [Eq. (3-28)]

required to make calculated and observea.
permeabilities
identical
171
"Cuttings."
Table 3-2 presents Purcell's summary of observed and computed permeabilities as well as computed values for the lithology factor, X. Figure 3-33
shows the correlation obtained between observed and computed data using
an average lithology factor of 0.216. Good agreement is indicated between
------ -------- ---
172
---
calculated and measured values of permeability. The calculated values

are higher than observed at low permeabilities and lower than observed
at high values of permeability.
Burdine18 adapted the method of Ritter and Drake" to the detennination
of pore-size distribution of reservoir rocks and also presented a method of
10,000
5,00 0
o Upper Wilcox plugs
* Upper Wilcox cuttings
L:::,,.
E 1,000
!ff 500
Po/uxy plugs
I/ '
/~
:E
g
a.
173
where Po,
ri
capillary pressure
= pore entry radius
u = interfacial tension
e = contact angle
Sm = mercury saturation, per cent of pore volume
The distribution function can be evaluated by graphically taking slopes
of the mercury capillary-pressure curve at different values of mercury saturation, computing the pore radius from the capillary pressure corresponding to the point at which the slope was taken by means of Eq. (3-5), and
evaluating Eq. (3-29) for the distribution function D(r;).
A typical mercury capillary-pressure curve and the corresponding distribution curve are presented in Fig. 3-34a and b. The area under the
distribution curve to a given radius is the fraction of the volume having
pores larger than the given radius.
100
n/
50
,/
fO
I/
(a)
/
0
0
0
0
0
"' 3
Permeability ca!curated from Eq. (3-28)
FIG. 3-33. Comparison of permeability calculated from mercury capillary-pressure

data to the observed permeability; (O) upper Wilcox-plugs; (*) upper Wilcoxcuttings; (.6.) Paluxy-plugs. (From Purcell.7 )
!O
0 oL=~,~00~7
ZO~o~,+oo~~o~o~,+oo~s~o~o---ooro~o'"""'ado~o-;;:900!:;;-~,p~o~o~~Joo''
Pressure, cm Hg
calculating permeability from this distribution. The method involves injection of mercury into an evacuated core sample, thus obtaining a mercury
capillary-pressure curve. The equations presented by Burdine for calculating the pore size and rock permeability are derived as follows:
A distribution function is defined as D(r,), so that
where dV is the total volume of all pores having a radius between r; and
r, - dr. The quantity D(r;) can be computed from the mercury capillarypressure data by using the following two equations:
and
D(r;) = P.; dSm

Ti dPc
c
0
(b)
1,000
.,
.~
dV = D(r;) dr
Petri= 2<T cos fJ
2,000
c
.2
(3-5)
(3-29)
~
0
14
12
10
Equivalent pore entry radius, microns
ErG. 3-34. (a) Mercury capillary-pressure curve. Sample No. 173 C, permeability
20.l millidarcys, porosity 14.3 per cent. (From Burdine et al.u) (b) Equival~~t pore
entry radius relation with distribution function. Sample No. 173 C, permeability 20.l
millidarcys, porosity 14.3 per cent. (From Burdine et al.l8)
---------------------
174
The permeability equation developed by Burdine is based on an analogy

to a bundle of capillary tubes.
or more fluids, such as interstitial water, oil, and gas. It is necessary to

generalize Darcy's law by introducing the concept of effective permeability
to describe the simultaneous flow of more than one fluid. In the definition
of effective permeability each fluid phase is considered to be completely
independent of the other fluids in the flow network. The fluids are considered immiscible, so that Darcy's law can be applied to each individually.
Thus, Darcy's law can be restated as follows:
18
k _
100q)
;~n t!.Sm f;'
- 8(9.87 X 10-1 ) _L, x.'fi'
. (3-30)
t=l
where
r i = pore entry radius, cm

~m = incremental change in mercury saturation
q) = fractional porosity
xl = factor to account for more complex geometry of system and
v~
Voa
Vwa
termed dividing factor

Empirically determined values of the dividing factor as a function of
permeability are presented in Fig. 3-35.
175
_,k, (dP,
_ NI dsdz)
ds
_ k, (dP, _ Ml dz)
,
ds
ds
_ k. (dP _
dz)
.
ds
ds
Pwf/
l4
_g
"
iO
u
0
'Q
g' 8
'5
0%
' '
8
Q
Q
'
o'~-4~0,-~BL0---,2~0,.....1~6L0-2L00-2~4-0-28L0_32~0~3L6L0-40L0-4-"-'40
Measured (gas) permeabir1ty, md
F1G. 3-35. Dividing factor correlation with measured (gas) permeability.

Burdine et al.18 )
(From
The various equations presented here are better known examples and
can be used to yield reasonable estimates of permeability. The chief value
of these relationships, however, is in computing relative permeabilities.
The procedure of calculating relative-permeability relations will be presented in the next section of this work.
EFFECTIVE AND RELATIVE PERMEABILITY
In Chap. 2, permeabilities were referred to rock conditions where a

single-phase fluid saturation was considered. Darcy's law, as originally
formulated and developed in Chap. 2, was considered to apply when the
porous medium was fully saturated with a homogeneous, single-phase fluid.
In petroleum reservoirs, however, the rocks are usually saturated with two
In the above equations, the subscripts o, g, and w refer to oil, gas, and
water, respectively.
The effective permeability is a relative measure of the conductance of
the porous medium for one fluid phase when the medium is saturated with
more than one fluid. This definition of effective permeability implies that
the medium can have a distinct and measurable conductance to each phase
present in the medium.
Experimentation has established that effective permeability is a function
of the prevailing fluid saturation, the rock-wetting characteristics, and the
geometry of the pores of the rock. It becomes necessary, therefore, to specify the fluid saturation when stating the effective permeability of any
particular fluid in a given medium. The effective permeability is stated as
some numerical value at some given saturation conditions. Just ask is the
accepted symbol for permeability, ko, kw, and ku are the accepted symbols
for the effective permeability to oil, water, and gas, respectively. The
saturations, if known, should be specified to define completely the conditions at which a given effective permeability exists. Unlike the previously
defined permeability, many values of effectiYe permeability now exist, one
for each particular condition of fluid saturation. Symbolically, ko(so.1a) is
the effective permeability of the medium to oil when the fluid saturations
are 60 per cent oil, 13 per cent water, and 27 per cent gas. The saturation
succession given above, that is, oil and water, is always followed. The gas
saturation is understood to be the difference of the sum of oil and water
saturations from 100 per cent.
Effective permeabilities are normally measured directly in the laboratory
on small core samples. However, owing to the many possible combinations
of saturation for a single medium, laboratory data are usually summarized
and reported as relative permeability. Relative permeability is defined as
------
176
the ratio of the effective permeability of a fluid at a given value of saturation to the effective permeability of that fluid at 100 per cent saturation.
It is normally assumed that the effective permeability is the same for all
fluids at 100 per cent saturation, this permeability being denoted as the
permeability of the porons medium. Thus, relative permeability can be
expressed symbolically as
k ro(S0,30) =
ko(50,30)
1.
_
l\.>rw(S0,30) -
k,,,,so .zo1
k rq(50,30) =
177
The second feature is the rapid rise in the relative permeability of the
nonwetting phase for very small increases in nonwetting-phase saturations
above the equilibrium saturation. The third general characteristic is the
attainment of a nonwetting-phase relative permeability of nearly 100 per
cent at nonwetting-phase saturations much less than 100 per cent.
ku<50.30>
which are the relative permeabilities to oil, water, and gas, respectively,
when the medium is saturated with 50 per cent oil, 30 per cent water, and
20 per cent gas, and k is the permeability at 100 per cent saturation of one
of the fluid phases.
Laboratory Investigations of Relative Permeability

The first experimental data based on the concept of a generalized set of
equations for Darcy's law were recorded by Wyckoff and Botset." The
results of their work are shown by curves 1 in Fig. 3-36, which represent
the relative permeabilities for water and gas in an unconsolidated sand
pack. The fluids used in obtaining these data were water and carbon dioxide, where water was the wetting fluid. The curve labeled k,w denotes
the relative permeabilities to water, while that labeled k,, denotes the relative permeabilities to gas. The trends which are presented in this figure
have been substantiated by many investigations since the original work by
Wyckoff and Botset. The k,w curve is typical of the trend of relativepermeability curves for the wetting phase in a porous system regardless
of whether that phase is oil or water. The relative permeability to the
wetting phase is characterized by a rapid decline in value for small decreases in an original high saturation of that particular phase. The relative
permeability for the wetting phase normally approaches zero or vanishes
at saturations of the wetting phase greater than zero. Likewise, the kr(I
curve is typical of the relative permeability to a nonwetting phase, whether
that phase is gas, oil, or water.
The principal characterizing features which can be gained by the study
of relative-permeability curves are indicated in Fig. 3-36. The first of
these characteristics is commonly called the point of equilibrium saturation and is denoted by point A. Equilibrium saturation is that value at
which the nonwetting phase becomes mobile. This saturation may vary
between zero and 15 per cent nonwetting-phase saturation.
SW, Ofo
Fra. 3-36. Relative permeability to gas and water. (a) Unconsolidated sand;
(b) consolidated sand. (After Botset.tt)
Some indication of the distribution of the fluid within the porous medium
can be deduced from a study of relative-permeability data. The rapid
decline in relative permeability to the wetting phase indicates that the
larger pores or larger flow paths are occupied first by the nonwetting fluid.
As the saturation of the nonwetting phase increases, the average pore size
saturated with wetting fluid becomes successively smaller. This is confirmed by the rapid rise in the relative permeability to the nonwetting
phase. In other words, at a saturation above the so-called equilibrium
saturation, the nonwetting fluid occupies larger pores than does the wetting
fluid. The attainment of 100 per cent relative permeability to the nonwetting phase at saturations of less than 100 per cent indicates that a
portion of the available pore space, even though interconnected, contributes little to the fluid-conductive capacity of the porous medium.
In Chap. 2, it was shown that the pore space is proportional to the square
of the diameter of the pore openings and the fluid-conductive capacity is
proportional to the diameter of the pore openings to the fourth power.
---
178
---
--
- -
Using the relations of Chap. 2 it is possible to use capillary tubes to illustrate the effective reduction in permeability caused by the introduction of
a second fluid.
Example 3-3. Effect of Saturation on Fluid Conductance. Consider
four capillary tubes of length L and diameters of 0.001, 0.005, 0.01, and
0;05 cm. The total pore volume of the four capillary tubes would be
given by
,,.L
,,.
(0.001'
+ 0.005 + 0.01 + 0.05')

2
(0.002626) cc
The total conductive capacity for the four tubes under the same imposed
pressure drop can be expressed by Poiseuille's law as
t;p 7r d'
Q, = ;128
Q, =
1:,," (1; 8 ) [(0.001) + co.oo5)' + co.01) + co.o5)'J
Q = t;p,,. (0.000006260626)
'
L.
128
1:'"ow if the larger tube is saturated with a second fluid of the same viscosity as the first fluid, then it is possible to express the conductive capacity
when two fi~ds are saturating the system to the conductive capacity when
only one flmd saturates the system. Thus, it is seen that the ratios of the
conductive capacities are
Q, 0.000,006,25
Q, - 0.000,006,260,626 = 0 9983
and from Darcy's law
Q,
Qt
k,cs ..s.i = 0.9983

kt(O,Si)
Q, = kics..s,, = 0.0017
Q,
kt(0,81)
0.0025 0.002626 - 0 952
S2 = saturation of second fluid phase
S, = saturation of first fluid phase

The results of Example 3-3 are extreme, in that the sizes chosen for the
capillary tubes vary over an extreme range. The wetting-phase satura-
179
tion Si, was changed by 95 per cent, and the effective permeability to this
phase was decreased by 99.8 per cent. The relative-permeability values for
the two fluids in Example 3-3 sum up to 1; that is, (QifQ,) + (Q,/Q,) = 1.
This behavior is not true in .actual porous systems. It would not be the
case in this example if the minute film which would wet the surface were
considered. This film would decrease the diameter of the larger tube, thus
reducing the flow capacity for the second fluid, and yet the film itself would
contribute no flow capacity to the wetting fluid. Thus, the total fluid
capacity of the tubes would be decreased. This is a rather normal feature
of most relative-permeability curves, where it is found that the total of all
values of relative permeability seldom add up to 1.
As most reservoirs are comprised of consolidated porous media, Botset22
subsequently reported results of similar relative-permeability tests conducted on consolidated sandstone. These tests were performed with water
and carbon dioxide, and the results are indicated in Fig. 3-36 as curves 2.
Again, water was the wetting fluid and carbon dioxide the nonwetting
phase. Note the similarity of the curves for the consolidated and unconsolidated cores. Both cores give the same general results, the differences
being in the slopes of the curves and water-saturation value at which the
relative permeability to water vanishes. It is noted that the relative permeability to water vanishes at a much greater wetting-phase saturation
for the consolidated core. This difference in flow behavior indicates that
the relative permeability of a pore system is dependent in some fashion
upon the pore geometry of that system.
The average results of 26 tests on relative-permeability for Permian dolomites by Bulnes and Fitting" are shown in Fig. 3-37. The reader will
note that the general trend and shape of these curves on a Permian dolomite are essentially the same as those found for consolidated and unconsolidated sandstones. The same three characteristic points are noted: (1)
The wetting-phase saturation declines very rapidly for small increases in
noni.vetting-phase saturations; (2) all the cores indicate an eqllil!.brium gas,
nonwetting-phase saturation somewhere between 10 and 30 per cent;
(3) the relative permeability to the wetting phase, which in this case is
oil, tends to vanish at saturations between 20 and 40 per cent. Thus, it
seems that the trends are very similar to those obtained for sandstones,
indicating that materials with intergranular porosity possess similar relative-permeability saturation characteristics.
It would be expected that data obtained on small core samples of fractured or vugular material would give very erratic reJative-permeability
results, i.vhich would differ from those obtained for rocks with intergranular porosity. The behavior of fractured or vugu1ar material should more
closely approximate that of Example 3-3, where the conductive capacity
is in the fractures and the pore volume is largely in the matrix of the sys-
180
PETROLEUM RESERVOffi ENGINEERUW
tem. Such a conductance-volume relationship should give a very different

relative-permeability :curve from those indicated by Fig. 3-37 for three
types of rocks.
All the tests previously discussed were conducted with two-fluid systems,
one of which was always gas. Leverett" investigated a two-fluid system in
which the fluids used were water and oil. He systematically investigated
the effect of fluid viscosity, pressure gradients, and interfacial tension on
the relative-permeability behavior of porous systems. He concluded from
.0
Q9
0 .8
:t' o.7
:g
0.6
0.5
'
',
\ \\
,fi
vj
\ \\
I! i
1
I/
Oil I.,
\~\ Gas
'
\\
..
"'Q 3
,
.
J
'\
0. 1
0. 8
~
~-
'
, I/
K.
~ 0. 6
1/'
/
cj
..~ 0
0.5
~ 0. 4
~\
\.0
-"
Jv
,,,
<>
ic
>: z.
"' 0. 3
0. 2
'~
0. 1
...
0.f
0.2
0.3
~.I'
0.4
0.5
0.6
.
'i..::
"
0.7
0.8
0.9
f.0
FrG. 3-38. The effect of the viscosity ratio (oil to water) on the relative permeabilities in a IOO- to 200-mesh sand. (After Leverett.s)
/L'
/,
Liquid saturation,
Water soturdtion
,''
,;;- "~-. ..... __

"""'
~ ~ oo ro m w
"'.
;~=90.0
'
0, 7
v JLw-0.057 a P.w =0.35
0.
/, I
''
!'\\.\
02
o w w
!Lo =180
0. 9
0.4
1.0
'~
181
100
/0
Fra. 3-37. :"Relative permeability to gas and oil for West Texas dolomites. ( - - )
Wasson Field data; ( - - - - - - ) Slaughter Field data; (- - -) average
r~u~ts of 26 cores from three West Texas Permian dolomites. (From Bulnes and
Fitting .zi)
the data, "'.hich are shown in Fig. 3-38, that relative permeability was SU.bstantially mdependent of the fluid viscosity but was some function of
pore-si~e distribution, displacement pressure, pressure gradient, and fluid
saturat10ns. Subsequent work to that of Leverett has indicated that the
displacement pressure and pressure gradient are parameters which are
peculiar to laboratory measurements. These parameters have been given
the notation "end effects." As these parameters are essentially properties
?f laboratory measurements, the means of measuring relative permeability
m the laboratory must take them into consideration. End effects will be
discussed in more detail in the section covering the laboratory measurement of relative permeability.
Three-phase Relative Permeability

As was mentioned previously, there are many instances when, not two
fluids, but three fluids exist in the rock simultaneously. Thus two-phase
relative-permeability data had to be amplified and extended for three-phase
systems. Leverett" in 1941 reported results of steady-state flow tests on
unconsolidated sand where three phases, oil, water, and gas, were used.
From these data, one of the comprehensive studies recorded on three-phase
relative permeability, the basic concepts for three-phase fluid flow were
established.
The principal results of the work of Leverett are illustrated in Figs. 3-39
through 3-42. The fluids used by Leverett were nitrogen, kerosene, and
brine. The relative permeability to the wetting phase, water, was found
to correlate closely with the data of Wyckoff and Botset21 (Fig. 3-39) and
to be a unique function of the wetting-phase saturation. The fact that the
relative permeability to the wetting phase depends on the saturation of
the wetting phase alone can be rationalized from the data. The wetting
phase occupies the portions of the pore space adjacent to the sand grains,
thus occupying the smaller pore openings. Therefore, at a given level of
wetting-phase saturation, the same portion of the pores are occupied by
the wetting phase irrespective of the saturation of the other two phases.
182
This behavior is dependent upon the saturation history of the porous medium and is true if a desaturation process were followed at all times. ~
The relative permeability to gas and oil was found to depend on the
saturation values existing for all three phases in the rock. Fignres 3-40
100'Yo qas
100
"'i
,,
.I
80
~60
"~ 40
Q
Wyckoff and Botset ~
~
~
~ 20
Q
&!
.
20
..,/
60
80
40
Water saturation, %
109
Fra. 3-39. Relative permeability to water

as a function of water saturation. (From
Leverett and Lewis .25 )
100/o wofer
F1a. 3-40. k.-o, relative permeability to oil

as a function of saturation. Curves are
lines of constant permeability as per cent
of relative permeability. (From Leverett
and Lewis.25 )
and 3-41 show the relative-permeability data for gas and oil in a threephase system. The data are plotted on triangnlar diagrams to define the
saturation condition of the rock. The relative-permeability data are plotted
as lines of constant-percentage relative permeability.
The dependency of the oil relative permeability on the saturations of
the other phases can be established by the following reasoning: The oil
phase has a greater tendency than the gas to wet the solid. In addition,
the interfacial tension between water and oil is less than that bet,veen
water and gas. The oil occupies portions of the rock adjacent to the water
or pores that are dimensionally between those occupied by the water and
the gas. At lower water saturations the oil occupies more of the smaller
pores. The extended flow path length caused by this phenomenon accounts
for the change in relative permeability to oil at constant oil saturations and
varying water saturations.
For an oil saturation of 60 per cent and a water saturation of 40 per cent,
the relative permeability to oil as read from Fig. 3-40 is approximately 34
per cent. For the same oil saturation and a water saturation of 20 per cent,
it is noted that the relative permeability to oil increases to approximately
38 per cent. For a water saturation of zero, the relative permeability to
oil is approximately 18 per cent. Thus, it is seen that by changing the
183
water and gas saturation the flow characteristics of the oil are changed so
that the oil assumes more tortuous paths.
.
The variation of the gas relative permeability at constant gas saturat10ns
to the saturations of the other phases is indicated in Fig. 3-41. The reason
for the particular behavior indicated
f00% gos
is not definite, as other investigators
indicate that the relative permeability to gas should be a unique
function of gas saturation. Other
studies of three-phase flow systems
will be necessary to establish definitely the relative permeability for
gas in three-phase systems. It would
be expected that when gas is in a
system, it is the fluid least likely to
wet the surface of the rock and,
therefore, should take on a property ;?O"J., water
which is dependent only upon the FIG. 3-41. kru, relative permeability to gas
total fluid saturations of the other as a function of saturation. Curves are
lines of constant permeability as per
two phases. The other phases, oil cent of relative permeability. (From
and water, should occupy the Leverett and Lewis.'i!S)
smaller pore openings and wet the
surface of the rock. Therefore, the gas phase should be dependent only
upon the total liquid saturations and independent of how much of that
total is composed of either phase.
.
. .
It is noted from a study of Leverett's data that the saturation reglOn m
which simultaneous flow of all three phases occurs is quite ~all. The regions in which single-phase, two-phase, and three-phase. flmds flow will
normally occur are indicated in Fig. 3-42. For gas saturations 1n excess of
35 per cent essentially only gas is flowing in the system. For gas saturations betw:en 18 and 35 per cent and for water saturations less than. approximately 40 per cent, oil and gas are both.flowing. For water saturatlOns
between 18 and 85 per cent and oil saturat10ns rangmg from 15 to 82 per
cent, where the gas saturation does not exceed approxrmately _15 per cent,
only oil and water are flowing. The region of. three-phase flow rs extremely
small and essentially centers around the reg10n of 20 per cent gas, 30 per
cent oil, and 50 per cent water saturation. This region is _illustrat:d in
Fig. 3-42 by the "hatched" area. The single-phase flow regions are illustrated by the shaded area, and the two-phase flow regions are illustrated
by the white area. From these data it is evident. that in most c~ses tw:ophase relative-permeability curves are qmte satisfactory: For rmmo~ile
water saturations it is possible to define gas and 01! relative-permeability
184
185
curves using two-phase techniques. Also in this two-phase flow region, the
used in the test are introduced simultaneously at the inlet end through
different piping systems. Most tests are started with the core sample at
100 per cent saturation in the wetting phase, and the tests are ~own ~s
desaturation tests. The two fluids are introduced at a predeternuned flmd
ratio and are flowed through the core until the produced ratio is equal to
the injected ratio. At this time, the core system is considered to be in a
steady-state flow condition and the existing saturations are considered to
be stable.
The saturation of the various fluids are determined in one of three fashions: (1) Electrodes have been inserted in the test section, and the saturations are determined by measurement of the core resistivity; (2) the core
section is removed and weighed to determine the saturation conditions; or
(3) a volumetric balance is maintained of all fluids injected and produced
from the sample. Once the saturation has been measured by one of the
above methods, the relative permeability of the two phases at these satu.ration conditions can be calculated. The injected ratio is increased, removmg
more of the wetting phase, unti1 once
Gos
Gos
again the system is flowing in steadyinlet
outlet
state condition. The process is continually repeated until a complete
relative-permeability curve is obtained.
An alternate method is to use the
resaturation process where the test
section is originally 100 per cent saturated by the nonwetting phase. In
this method the injection ratios start
out at high nonwetting-phase values
and decline to 100 per cent wetting
To
phase. The results obtained using the
atmosphere
Porcelain
desaturation and resaturation proplate~
cesses illustrate a hysteresis effect of
Oil burette
the same type discussed earlier in
connection with capillary-pressure
Fro. 3-43. Relative-permeability apcurves.
paratus (Hassler's principle). From
Some of the equipment and results Osoba et al.m)
obtained using the steady-state process
are illustrated in Figs. 3-43 to 3-49. Four of the apparatus which
have been developed for testing small core samples are shown in Figs. 3-43
to 3-46. The four apparatus illustrated represent the Hassler method,
Penn State method, Hafford method, and dispersed-feed method. In order
to eliminate end effects, porous material has been placed in cont~wt with
the outflow face of the test section. In the Hafford apparatus (Fig. 3-45)
curves obtained for two-phase systems, gas and liquid, are essentially the
same as would be obtained if a third immobile phase is present. The relative permeability to the mobile liquid phase is essential~y dependent on
t00% gas
~
Esserrfull!y one phase flowing
c::::::J Essentially two phases flowing

IZ?Z3 Appreciable flow of all three phases
100% oil
FIG. 3-42. Approximate limits of saturations giving 5 per cent or more of all components
flow strean;i. Fluids: nitrogen, kerosene, brine. Arrows point to increasmg fraction of respective components in stream. (From Leverett and Lewis.:is)
!n
the total liquid saturation. Thus the relative permeability to oil at 60 per
cent oil and 20 per cent water and that at 80 per cent oil and zero per cent
water are not greatly different, as illustrated by Fig. 3-40. This behavior
is attributed to the fact that the smaller saturation values of the wetting
phase contribute little to the fluid conductance of the porous matrix.
Measurement of Relative-permeability Data
There are essentially four means by which relative-permeability data
can be obtained. They are (I) direct measurement in the laboratory by a
steady-statefiuid flow process, (2) measurement in the laboratory by a displacement or a pseudo-unsteady-state process, (3) calculations of relativepermeability data from capillary-pressure data, and (4) calculations from
field-performance data. The methods most used are the laboratory stead;state flow and displacement processes.
There are numerous steady-state methods which can be used in the
laboratory to measure relative permeability, but essentially, all of tbem
depend upon tbe following technique. A small core sample is chosen and
prepared for tbe test. It is mounted either in lucite or in a pressurized
rubber sleeve. Either the flow system is designed for a high rate of flow
and large pressure differential, or each end of the sample is suitably prepared with porous disks and test sections to minimize end effects.
The phases oil and gas, oil and water, or gas and water which are to be
--------------------------------------------
186
Thermometer
Pocking
//
nut
Copper
Electrodes
/"..
Inlet
orifice
plate
:.:&,(!:.. =. >7-e~t::
:: Sectio; : :Section.:
----
187
and in the dispersed-feed apparatus (Fig. 3-46), end effects are materially
reduced by maintaining a high rate of flow through the test section. All
the apparatus depend on the same flo'v mechanism and are different only
in the manner in which they introduce the two fluids and in the manner
in which they adjust for end effects. As some of the steady-state relativepermeability measuring devices depend on the rate of flow or pressure drop
Gas meter
. ......
. -- ..
:: ..:: :-.
Lucffe
Differential _
press1.1re tops
Outlet
Bronze
screen
Highly per171.eoble disk
Inlet
Fra. 3-44. Penn State relative-permeability apparatus. (From Gefjen et al.!l!f)
Gos
?uclfe-mounted
core
Gos
-pressure
gauge
Oil burette
Oil
Dispersing
section face
Oil
-pressure
Fro. 3-46. Dispersed-feed relative-permeability apparatus. (From Richardson et al.28 )
Oil burette
Fra. 3-45. Hafford relative-permeability apparatus. (From Richardson et al.m)
to eliminate end effects, it is necessary to determine the effect of rate on

the accuracy of the measurements.
Table 3-3 presents data on the effect of pressure gradient on relativepermeability measurements. It is evident that the relative permeability
is essentially independent of the pressure gradient providing the gradient
is maintained sufficiently high in the laboratory to eliminate end effects.
For example, the water-oil relative-permeability ratio when the oil-water
injection ratio is Xo is essentially constant for pressure gradients ranging
188
from 2 to 16 psi per in. The same is true for other ratios. In the case of
the 100:1 oil-water ratio, when the pressure gradient gets below 0.678 psi
per in., the permeability ratio of oil to water increases, so that at Iowpressure .differttntials it is apparent that end effects are becoming a dominate factor in the control of the flow mechanism.
189
100,-~~-,-~..,,.~c;c-.,..-~~~~~~~~
6. kg, ko Penn State

-Okq. + ko single-core dynamic
80
,,::
* kq. * k0 dispersed feed
o kq. ko Hofford technique

.A.kg, .Ako gos.-drive technique
Dk9 , k 0 Hassler method
~ 60t-~~-t~~~-j\-~~-t~~~+-~-+-i
TABLE 3-3. EFFECTS OF PRESSURE GRADIENT ON
RELATIVE PERMEABILITY MEASUREMENTS 27
Oil-water
flow ratio
k 0 /k,,,
Average
brine
saturation,
Pressure
gradient,
psi/in.
Infinite
Infinite
14.2
2.04
100:1
100:1
100:1
100:1
150.6
149.4
149.4
152.3
36.9
37.2
37.3
37.7
4.71
9.16
1.27
0.678
47.3
45.9
46.3
14.34
4.93
0.994
10:1
IO:!
10:1
15.76
15.36
15.04
I :I
1:1
I.488
1.510
53.5
52.9
1.24
3.05
1:10
1:10
1:10
0.1507
0.1507
0.1537
56.0
55.6
55.I
16.47
8.14
2.43
57.7
20
Core No. 0-2-A

Berea outcrop
K= 120md
L ::2.30cm
00!;-~......,2~0,...-~-4~0'.,..,....~;:..._~~,,,..:.'.'.:::'l;..,,,olo
Oil saturation, 0 /o
FIG. 3-47. Relative permeability-six methods, short section.

et aZ.)
100
A
kq
o. kg
15.91
Results of the various methods of measuring relative permeability are

compared in Figs. 3-47 and 3-48. Two methods and six different techniques are compared. Five of the techniques are for the steady-state
processes already discussed; the sixth is for the unsteady-state process,
which is discussed briefly in the text that follows. All the methods tend
to check closely and indicate that as long as proper precautions are taken
to remove errors inherent in each laboratory measuring device, the curves
obtained should closely represent values which would exist in the reservoir
for a duplicate saturation distribution.
Displacement Process of Measuring Relative Permeability. The gasdrive displacement technique of testing is essentially a nonsteady-state
flow process. The sample is originally 100 per cent saturated with the
wetting phase, and instead of both gas and liquid being injected, only gas
40r-~~-r~~~t-~TI;--r~~~t--~-~-1
.,,a:~
fi
""
80
*kg
0
kg
c kg
.. kg
ko
+ ko
* k,ko
ko
< ko
(From Richardson
I
Penn State
Single-core dynamic
Dispersed feed
Hofford. technique
Hassler technique
Gas-drive technique
60
.>
40
.,,"'a:
0
20
00
Core No. 0-2

Berea outcrop
k:: ffBmd
L = 7..23 cm
20
40
100
Oil saturation, %
'
FIG. 3-48. Relative permeability-six methods, long section. (From Richardson et

al.ZS)
190
is injected into the core. The gas-drive technique then is a nonsteadystate process in that only one fluid is entering the core and two fluids are
leaving. If the core and both fluids are taken as a whole, the process can
be treated as a steady-state volume process but not a steady-tate mass
flow system.
The gas-displacement process for determining relative permeabilities as
proposed by Welge" is dependent upon the frontal advance fluid-flow concept. This procedure actually determines relative-permeability ratios and
is dependent upon the actual relative-permeability values being determined
by some independent means, such as calculating the relative permeability
to oil from capillary-pressure data or measuring in the laboratory. The
procedure for performing a gas-displacement test is relatively simple and
fast. The procedure is essentially as follows: An approximately homogeneous sample is selected, and its physical properties of permeability,
bulk volume, and porosity are determined. The sample is properly mounted
in a holder, similar to those used in the steady-state tests (Figs. 3-43 to
3-46), and 100 per cent saturated with the wetting phaRe, which is normally
oil and will be considered as oil in the discussion which follows. The sample is desaturated by injecting gas at one end and producing both oil and
gas at the other end of the small sample. In the calculations of the data
obtained from such a test, there are essentially three necessary conditions
or asswnptions which must be satisfied. First, the pressure drop across
the core sample must be large enough to make any capillary end effects
negligible. Second, the gas saturation can be described at a mean value
of pressure defined as
(3-31)
where Pi represents the pressure at the injection end of the core and P 0
represents the pressure at the production end of the core. Third, flow is
horizontal, and the core sample is small enough and the test time is short,
s,o that all effects of gravitational forces can be neglected.
If these three conditions are satisfied, then it is necessary to measure
only the following quantities during the test: (!) the cumulative gas injected as a function of time and (2) the cumulative oil produced as a function of time. With these two measured quantities and with the pressures
at the injection and production ends remaining constant, the relativepermeability ratio of gas with respect to oil can be calculated.
From the measured data, the cumulative volume of gas injected in terms
of mean pressure is expressed as a multiple of the total pore volume of the
sample and can be calculated by the following equation:
(3-32)
where (G;),,.
191
cumulative injected gas expressed as pore volumes
LA<p = total pore volume of sample

Gic = cumulative gas injected expressed at pressure Pi
. P; and P. are as previously defined
S,,..,
A quantity known as
may be calculated simply by dividing the
cumulative oil produced by the pore volume of the sample. Both the gas
injected and oil produced have been measured with respect to time and
therefore can be cross plotted so that a plot of S""'' as a function of the
cumulative pore volumes of gas injected can be obtained. The slope of
the sg{av)-injected gas curve represents the fraction of the total outflow
volume from the sample that is oil at any given time, which defines the
following equation:
(3-33)
where f. represents the fraction of the total outflow that is oil. The relative-permeability ratio of gas to oil can be calculated from the following
equation:
k,
1 - f.
(3-34)
k; = f.(,/ .)
where k,/k. = relative permeability ratio of gas to oil
JLo = viscosity of gas
" = viscosity of oil
f. = fractional flow of the oil as previously defined
This particular value of the relative-permeability ratio applies at the gas
saturation at the outflow face. The gas saturation at the outflow face is
expressed by the following equation:
(3-35)
(S,). = (S,).v - (G,),,..f.
Hence the relative-permeability ratios are obtained as a function of saturation by solving the above series of equations.
In order to determine the actual value of the relative permeability to
either gas or oil, it is necessary that one or the other be independently determined. It would be possible to measure or else to calculate the other
functions by one of the means previously discussed in this chapter.
The gas-displacement method has several advantages in that it can be
performed with a small amount of equipment and can be performed rapidly
and on relatively small core samples. It has the disadvantage in that it
cannot determine relative-permeability ratios at low values of gas saturation except by the use of high-viscosity oils. The equations do not apply
until such time as gas is being produced at the outflow end of the core.
Depending upon the permeability of the core and the pore geometry, the
gas saturation at the outflow face at the time gas is initially produced
192
193
ME!>IA CONTAINING MU"LTIPLE FLUID SATURATIONS
may vary between 2 and 15 per cent, depending upon the viscosities of the
gas and oil in the syst,,m. The lower the viscosity of the oil, the greater
will be the gas saturation at the outflow face at the time that gas production begins. Thus, by using oil samples of various viscosities, it would be
pressure as well as , and ,. The saturation at which this particular value

of relative-permeability ratio applies must be calculated from field production data.
As oil saturation is dependent upon the type of res..rvoir performance
and reservoir performance has not been previously discussed in the text,
further discussion of this particular means of determining relative-permeability ratios will be delayed.
End Effects. During the discussion of the three means of measuring
possible to define the relative-permeability ratio over the entire saturation
range in which two-phase flow might occur.

End effects are not important in the gas-displacement method of measuring relative-permeability ratios because of the high-pressure drops involved. The magnitude of capillary-pressure end effects are extremely
small compared with the imposed flow gradient and are neglected. Hence,
the equipment necessary for counteracting this phenomenon in the labora-
tory is eliminated.
Field Determination of Relative-permeability Ratios. The third means
of determining relative permeability has the same drawback as the displacement process in that the data obtained are actually determined as
relative-permeability ratios. Thi.<:! process is a calculating procedure utiliz-
effective and relative permeability, there was a continued mention of end
effects and of the fact that in many of the techniques developed special
precautions had been taken to eliminate these effects from the laboratory
measurement. End effects arise from the saturation discontinuity existing at the outflow face of a porous medium when mounted for a flow
test. The fluids flowing through the core are discharged into a region void
of the porous medium. Therefore, at the outflow face, all the fluids exist
at the same pressure, whereas iinmediately within the pores of the rock at
ing field data to calculate the relative-permeability ratio of gas to oil. If
the outflow face, capillary-pressure conditions require that the saturation
Darcy's equation were written for gas and oil flow, both phases being con-
sidered to be independent of each other in the flow system, the relative

permeability ratio could be defined by the following equation:
of the wetting phas.. approach 100 per cent. There is, then, a saturation
gradient established in the wetting phase of the flow system.
The theory of "end effect" can be developed as follows:
Q, _ A(k,/,)(M',/M,)
Q, - A(k,/,)(M',/t:.L)
From Darcy's law for a linear system and the concept of effective permeability, when more than one phase is present in a rock,
(3-36)
If the volumes of flow are expressed in the above equation as Qu and Q0 at

reservoir conditions, and if it is assumed that the pressure drop in the gas
system is the same as the pressure drop in the oil system, then the relativepermeability ratio can be expressed in terms of surface volumes by Eq.
(3-37).
(3-37)
_where BfJ represents the formation volume factor of the gas expressed as
reservoir cubic feet of gas per standard cubic foot of gas and B represents
the oil-formation volume factor expressed as reservoir barrels of oil per
stock-tank barrel of oil. RP represents the producing gas-oil ratio, and
R" represents the solution-gas-oil ratio, both expressed a.";! standard cubic
foot per stock-tank barrel. /-Lg is the gas viscosity and 0 is the oil viscosity
at reservoir conditions of pressure and temperature.
The normal procedure is to use field average gas-oil ratios, which are
(3-38)
-dP
,,..,
- Q
dL
knweA
,.wt -
dP, ~ dP , - dP.,
(3-40)
where the subscripts nwt and wt refer to the nonwetting and wetting fluids,
respectively, other symbols as previously defined.
Combining Eqs. (3-38), (3-39) and (3-40) it is found that
normally the most accurate values obtainable. The field average gas-oil
ratios are preferably obtained from gas-plant production figures. The solution ratio Rs is dependent upon the reservoir pressure and is taken at the
average reservoir pressure which is in existence at the time the produced
gas-oil ratio is determined. B, and B, are also taken at this particular
(3-39)
(3-41)
where dPJdL is the capillary-pressure gradient within the core. Since
capillary pressure has been shown to be a function of saturation and in
any displacement system the saturation can be expressed as a function of
length, it is possible to write

dP.,
dP., dSIDt
dL = dS., dL
where S., is the wetting-phase saturation. Eq. (3-41) then becomes
as., ~ l. (Q.,.,
dL
k.,
_Qk,""')
1
,
dP,/dS.,
(3-42)
194
Gos-pressure tops
Neoprene~
sleeve
Sealing-pressure fop
within a flow system can be determined by graphical integration of Eq.

(3-42) using capillary-pressure and relative-permeability data.
The desire to eliminate end effects has influenced the design of most
apparatus developed for the determination of the relative permeability of
small core samples. Devices to mix the flowing fluids adequately prior to
entry into the core have also received considerable attention.
/o;/-pressure po~s
_"'
100
V Theoretical
,. 80
~
Oil i/1
To gos flowmeter
.~
-e
Inlet gos pressure l
FrG. 3-49. Long-core relative-permeability apparatus. (From Richardson et al.-za)
where dSw,/ dL is the change in wetting-phase saturation with length. The

saturation in the wetting phase at the outflow face is that corresponding
to the equilibrium saturation in the nonwetting phase (essentially 100 per
cent saturation of the wetting phase). The saturation gradient dSw 1/dL
60
~
~
t To oil bureffe
195
40
gradient
-<...::
-.
saturation
-<!
-~
80
'~-
Theoreficq/ soturolion
grqdienl
~--'
--
-- ..
I
!
-~
I
Inflow face....,.!
I'
10
5
15
20
25
Distance from outflow face, cm
Fro. 3-51. Comparison of experimental

and theoretical saturation gradients due
to boundary effects. (q9
0.15 cc/sec,
Qo
0.000336 cc/sec). (From Richardson
28
et al. )
!
iI
20
fOO
-1
Inflow face,
i5
1 0 0 1 , - - , - - - . - - - , - - - , - - - - , 100
\o
20
25
15
20
5
Distance from outflow face, cm
Fta. 3-52. Comparison of experimental

and theoretical saturation gradients due
to boundary effect.s. (q9
0.80 cc/sec,
Qo
0.00288 cc/sec). (From Richardson
28
et al. )
kr0 =f0? md
,.
;;
~
80
:/?.?%
L =30.?cm -t---+--~f---1-180
0 =6.85cm
."'
0
3
60t---+---+----+----+---.l---l
"E
.5
~
~
40t----+----t---.-"<l---+l'---l
0o~--;;2~0-~~40;:-_..::;_-::':::-----::':--"'..J
Oil saturation,
/0
Fra. 3-50. Relative-permeability and capillary-pressure saturation relations for Berea

outcrop sand. (From Richardson et al.'8)
To determine the magnitude of end effects, Richardson" studied saturation gradients in a long core apparatus (Fig. 3-49). The test apparatus
was designed to determine the pressure in each of the flowing phases at
different positions along the core. The relative-permeability relationships
were determined for different rates of flow and pressure gradients across
the core. In addition, capillary-pressure characteristics were measured.
Figure 3-50 presents the results of these tests as well as the physical properties of the core. The relative-permeability data shown are for conditions
eliminating end effects and therefore are correct.
Figures 3-51 and 3-52 illustrate both the computed and measured saturation gradients measured by Richardson on the long core shown in Fig.
3-49. Note the good correspondence of theory and experimental results
and the reduction of end effect resulting from using higher rates of flow
(Fig. 3-52).
Calculation of Relative Permeability from Capillary-pressure Data. In
the discussion of capillary pressure, several equations were presented for
the calculation of permeability from capillary-pressure data.
196
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERl~.J
The relation developed by Purcell' [Eq. (3c27)] can be readily adapted

to the computation of wetting-phase relative permeability. The relative
permeability is, by definition, the ratio of the effective permeability at a
given saturation to the permeability of the medium.
From Eq. (3C27)
k = 10.24(.- cos 8)
[8
dS
}s=o (P,)'
)>.<p
197
where Sm is the minimum irreducible saturation of the wetting phase from

a drainage capillary-pressure curve and S.,,t is the saturation in the wetting
phase for which krw1. (min) is evaluated.
For k.,,,,, Cm=l
(3-27)
(3-48)
generalizing and considering capillary-pressure data for displacement of

the wetting phase,
k., = 10.24(.- cos 8)'A</>
rs-s., (P,)'
dS
Js=o
(3-43)
where k., is the effective permeability to the wetting phase. The relative
permeability to the wetting phase is given then by
k.,
1s::s.
=
1s::
permeability, developed an expression for relative permeability considering
dS/(P,J'
(3-44)
dS/(P,) 2
where the lithology factor >. is assumed to be a constant for the porous
medium.
The effective permeability to the nonwetting phase (k,.,) can be calculated in a similar fashion as in Eq. (3-43) by assuming that the nonwetting
phase is contained in tubes or pores, free of the wetting phase of radius as
defined by the capillary-pressure relation in the wetting-phase saturation
interval Swt = Swt to Swt = 1.
k,,., = 10.24(.- cos 8)'>.<t>
f.
S=l
dS
(P )'
S=8.r1
Is::'..
that the lithology factor >. was a function of saturation. The lithology
factor is essentially a correction for deviation of the path length from the
length of the porous medium. Fatt and Dykstra assumed that the deviation of the path length was a function of the radius of the conducting pores,
so that
(3-49)
where r is the radius of a pore and a and b are constants for the material.
The equation for relative permeability for the wetting phase (k,.,) then
becomes
(3-45)
(3-50)
The relative permeability to the nonwetting phase (k...,). is given by

k , _ k
Symbols are as previously defined.

Fatt and Dykstra, 30 following the basic method of Purcell for calculating
dS/(P,)'
... , - 1s:~ dS/(P,)'
(3-46)
Rapoport and Leas20 presented two equations for relative permeability

to the wetting phase. These are based on surface energy relationships and
the Kozeny equation. The equations are presented as defining limiting
which is of the same form as Eq. (3-44), where b is a correction for deviation of the flow paths from straight tubes.
Fatt and Dykstra further assumed that b = ~, thus reducing (3-50) to
k,., =
Jos.. dS/(P,)'
lo' dS/(P,)'
(3-51)
Figure 3-53 presents experimental data and computed curves based on
Eqs. (3-44) and (3-51). There are significant differences in the computed
and observed data.
values, minimum and maximum, for relative permeability.

For ~t(min)
Burdine 18 reported equations for computing relative-permeability curves
(3-47)
for both the wetting and nonwetting phases. His equations can be shown
to reduce to a form similar to that of Purcell for permeability. Burdine's
contribution is principally in handling tortuosity.
198
20
80
\
P,I
---\
'J
"' 8
~
"
r- - - Co/cu/afed from
Eq. 13-52)
'-'
4 - - - Calcufoted from
Eq. 13-45)
'
I I,
'1
//
-~60
Observed
'
'
20
40
60
Io
k,.,
40
)s~~ dS/(X,)'(P,)l
20
0
100
/o
FIG. 3-53. Comparison of observed and calculated relative permeabilities. (From
k,.,
= (!.,.wt)
J:~:s., dS/(P,)l
1is~1
S=O
.2
(p)
c ~
(3-53)
In similar fashion, the relative permeability to the nonwetting phase can

be expressed utilizing a nonwetting-phase tortuosity ratio Ar.i.toti
Fatt and Dykstra.'J(J)
Example 3-4. Example Calculation of Wetting-phase Relative Permeability."
(3-52)
If x, is a constant for the porous medium and X, ., depends only on the

final saturation, then
80
hs.,rs
(!.,. .,)' dS/(X,)'(P,)l
Then
Weter saturation,
f\wti
:g
1';;
--..g
0
A;
= ~
Arwti
ff
o.
0
Defining the tortuosity factor for a pore as A; when the porous medium
is saturated with only one fluid and x ., for the wetting-phase tortuosity
factor when two phases are present, a tortuosity ratio can be defined as
100
199
k~
f,s~i dS/(P,)l
= (!.,. ,)' _~s..
fs:~' dS/(P,)'
(3-54)
Burdine has shown that

,
_ S., - Sm
l _ S.,.
flrwt -
s, %
100
95
p"
1/Pc3,
cm Hg
(cmHg)-
85
3.8
4.1
4.4
4.8
18.2
14.5
11.7
9.0
80
75
70
65
5.3
5.8
6.4
7.1
9Q
60
55
50
45
8.0
9.4
11.6
15.0
10-3
Area from
0 toS,
sq in.
krwt,
100
75
56
40
6.7
5.1
3.8
2.8
1.19
0.82
0.54
0.34
29
20
13
8.2
2.0
1.2
0.6
0.3
0.20
0.10
0.04
0.01
4.8
2.4
1.0
0.2
10-3
where S.,. is the minimum wetting-phase saturation from a capillary-pressure curve. The nonwetting-phase tortuosity can be approximated by a
straight-line function also and is given by
~.,
4.15
3.13
2.31
1.68
(3-55)
Snwt - Se
(1 - Sm) - S,
(3 56)
-
where S, is the equilibrium saturation to the nonwetting phase. Figure

3-54 illustrates the agreement attained between experiment and theory.
The calculated curve in Fig. 3-54 was based on equations essentially as
given above, although Burdine expressed them in quite different form.
Factors Affecting Relative Permeability. In discussing relative-permeability roeasW"ement, reference was made to wetting-phase and nonwettingphase relative permeabilities. If all materials wet the porous medium to
the same degree, then the data taken with an oil-gas system would be the
same as the data taken with a "'~ater-gas system or a water-oil system.
AB all fluids do not wet a solid to the same degree and as water may not
be the fluid which preferentially wets the rock, investigations have been
made of the effect rock wettability has on relative-permeability data for
oil-brine systems. The relative-permeability values are affected by the
--
-----------
------
201
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGI:N'EERING
MEDIA CONTAINING MU"LTIPLE FLUID SATURATIONS
change in the fluid distribution brought about by different wetting characteristics. Figure 3-55 illustrates changes in relative permeability caused
by different wetting characteristics. Curves 1 and Z are indicative of a
water-wet system, while curve 3 indicates that the system is preferentially
oil-wet. It is noted that when the rock is preferentially water-wet, the
water loses its mobility at a higher value of water saturation than when
the rock is preferentially oil-wet. This fact would indicate that the oil is
nonwetting and wetting :fluids simultaneously in the core, the process is

classified as drainage or desaturation. If the data are obtained by increasing the saturation of the wetting phase, the process is termed imbibition
. or resaturation. This nomenclature is consistent with that used in connection with capillary pressure. The process used in obtaining relativepermeability data in the laboratory must correspond to the reservoir process to which these data shall be applied.
The difference in the two processes of measuring relative permeability
can be seen by observing Figs. 3-56 and 3-57. It is noted that the imbibition technique causes the nonwetting phase (oil) to lose its mobility at
200
1.0~--~------------- 1.0
Tortuosity ratio
o Fractional permeability
o.a: 1--.J--'I\--'.
0.9
Relative permeability
(calc-psd l
Relative permeability
(meas)
100...-----,.---.----;-----,
_,__,___,,_, 0.8
0.7 ~e.
..
;;
"'
0.6 '.3
0
~
:;;
0.5
0.4 ~
0
0.3 6
0.2
"'
0.2
-~
"&1 25
'
50
:"t
~
~
~ 0.3
75
2/l.
0.1
100
00
Brine saturation, '"lo pore space
Liquid saturation, 0/o pore volume
FIG. 3-55. Effect of wettability on flow behavior. Nellie Bly sandstone. (From
Geffen et al.'Z1)
3-54. Relative-permeability curves. Sample No. 1374 Atlantic Refining Co.

Gas permeability, 72 millidarcys. Effective porosity, 21.9 per cent. Fluids: gas, oil,
and connate water. Data: measurements by Atlantic Refining Co. Calculation from
mercury-injection data. (From Burdine et al.Vl)
FlG.
higher values of saturation than does the drainage technique. The two
methods have similar effects on the wetting-phase (water) curve. The
drainage method causes the wetting phase to lose its mobility at higher
values of wetting-phase saturation than does the imbibition method.
In the discussion of both porosity and permeability, it was noted that
overburden pressure affected the values obtained. Fatt31 reported, as
shown in Fig. 3-58, that overburden pressure did not affect the relativepermeability data although the effective permeabilities are altered.
In Figs. 3-59 and 3--00 are presented relative-permeability and permeability ratio data for typical tests of various media. These data indicate
retained in some of the smaller, more tortuous paths within the medium.
It thus becomes necessary to classify reservoir rocks as being oil-wet,
\vnter-~et, or intermediate so as to define relative permeability properly.
As was discussed for capillary-pressure data, there is also a saturationhistory effect for relative permeability. The effect of saturation history on
relative permeability is illustrated in Figs. 3-56 and 3-57. If the rock sample is initially saturated with the wetting phase and relative-permeability
data are obtained by decreasing the wetting-phase saturation while flowing
202
the effect of pore configuration and pore-size distribution on relative permeability. The curves should not be interpreted as representative of the
types of media but should be viewed as illustrations of the effects of pore
geometry on relative permeability. It is apparent then that universal permeability curves cannot be established. Rather, each reservoir rock (each
-~
:E
203
Use of Effective- and Relative-permeability Data

Relative-permeability data are essential to all flow work in the field of
reservoir engineering. Just a few of its uses will be mentioned here. Other
applications of relative-permeability data will be illustrated in the remainder of the text.
120>-~~-+~.....~+-~~-+~~~+-~~-1
.~ 1oof-~~-+~~-\\+-~~-+~~~+-~~-.!
.0
.g
Drainage
1 so1--~~-+~~~;r..,_~--+~~~+-~~_,.;/
"'t
:0
1
60'1-~~--t~~~+-~--T---t~~~-t-~---1-1
&!
40>-~~~~~~~~1----11-~~~+-~0'---I
AD1rection of
0.011----~--~--~--t-r--1
o Increasing gas
Decreasing gas, oi'r-brine system
t::.. Increasing oil
.&. Oecreoslng oil, oil-brine system
A Direction of soturation change
satvration change
201----
20
80
Brine soturotion, 0/o pore space
100
FIG. 3-56. Oil-water flow characteristics. Nellie Bly sandstone, permeability 143
millidarcys, porosity 26.1 per cent. (From Geffen.27 )
o.000 1 0
~--""""'20;;------;4;;,o,---6C:o;;---,a~o:---.F100
Brine saturation, 0/o pore space
sample, for that matter) has a characteristic pore geometry which affects
relative permeability.
In Fig. 3-61 is shown the effect of connate-water saturation on the gasoil permeability ratio. In general, low water saturations do not appreciably affect the permeability ratio, simply because the water occupies
space which does not contribute substantially to the flow capacity of the
rock.
FIG. 3-57. Effect of saturation history on permeability ratios. (From Gejfen.zr)
Determination of Free Water Surface. As was mentioned in the discussion

on capillary pressure, it is necessary to determine the free water surface
(level) in order to calculate fluid distribution properly. From the relativepermeability curves which have been presented, it should have become
apparent that the point of 100 per cent water flow is not necessarily the
204
205
MEDIA CONTAINING MULTIPLE FLUID SATVRATlOl'Q"S
point of 100 per cent water saturation. Knutsen" recognized the fact that
two water tables e.'<ist. These two water tables can be defined as:
1. The free water or zero-capillary-pressure level
2. The level below which fluid production is 100 per cent water
These two definitions for the water table in an oil reservoir are illustrated
in Fig. 3-62.
200
oo
60
40
20
.,.~
'
~ ~
~ ~
...._~\ ~~- ~.
% % 0. ~
~='=.. - ,_~
.... ~
~
\
\
'
0.02
0.
\"
9 \
~Q 8
.,....
.......
'\ \
~ 0.3
..\1
, / \. '
10
I
I
\,,,\ lX' I,
\ '><' \ ?I if 4j.-
// I
..\4
~3
g 0.2
0.1
~ 0.5
_; 0.4
""
0.6
/,
\\
0.7
I.0
><
20
'
>-;: :;...-
30
40
,V
(;)' r-....'
50
-I
-....:: ......
><
60 70 80 90
0.01
0.9
--
,~
,~
'%-
I=
~
~- ~
20
40
_,.o
0.7 ~
0.6 :0
0
- connote
/lfater-
80
2 f.-40%
connote
1 '-water
':l.c""' 0.6
0.4
o.
\
60
>2
...__
i-/-
/lfOfer
0.02
mo
FIG. 3-60. Relative permeability ratios

for various types of media. Capillary
tube (Martinelli, Putnam, and Lockart, Trans. Am. Inst. Chem. Engrs.,
Aug. 25, 1946); dolomite (Bulnes and
Fittingi3); unconsolidated sand (Botsetz:); consolidated sand (Botsetz:).
o.o
'0
'- .J
'
'
!tt
'
0.06
0.04
\
0
0.2
Liquid saturation, 0; 0
0.8~
0.5
0-.
'
0.04
1.0
%-;\
0.
0.06
C~o
connote -
0.2
T T
20%
'6
c.-~C">
\?
0
'2,~
0.4
FIG. 3-58. Relative gas permeability in the gas-oil system with and without overburden pressure. (From Fatt.tsJ.)
20
(">
0.6
Oil soturotion, 0/ 0
~\
'6
.,::
...__
'40600
'
I
20
40
60
80
iOO
Gos saturation, 0/o pore VQlume
FIG. 3-61. Effect of connate water upon

the kvlko value. (From Calhoun.15 )
~
~
0.4 -~
03
.
0.2
0.1
100
Liquid saturation, "lo
Fro. 3:59. _Relative permeability for various types of media. (1) Capillary tube
(Martinell~, Putnam, and Lo.chart, Trans. Am. Inst. Chem. Engrs., Aug. 25, 1946);
(2)_ dolonnte (Bulnes and F1tting23); (3) unconsolidated sand (Botset=); (4) consolidated sand Botset22 ) .
Note that the water table by definition 2 rises as the permeability in the
formation decreases while the water table by definition 1 is a horizontal
surface, providing static conditions prevail in the reservoir. From a production engineering standpoint, a contact defined as the highest point of
water production is useful.. From a reservoir engineering standpoint, a
contact defined by zero capillary pressure is a more appropriate definition.
The actual location of water tables 1 and 2 can be determined by the
use of electric logs, drill-stem tests, and relative-permeability and capillarypressure data. From electric logs and drill-stem test data, it is possible to
determine the depth at which 100 per cent water flow occurs or the point
of zero oil permeability. From relative-permeability data the engineer can
0
0
"'~
:c0
0
0
;.
:;}
'
"
:;;
~J
I'
..c:~
12
...
.~3"'
t%~
<:) I
~~"'
O\.._
1;;
~aO\
~~"'"
~~
<t
"'
"
(O/o}
00
Jlf
"
:t:
~"'
"''
:g
.s
""Q.
:S
\t%>t::
,
0'
"'~<:)
~"""~
"
'
"
00
-!i~,;
~ :5
ti"%
,~
~1-
'
"
~ 'i\
3:
..,,
"'g
00
-"
;i~
'- 'i
-"
Ci
0
0
=
t
.w =1
l'-o
0.4
-"
!l
"
!l
0.2
.,,a
=
=
)3
0.6
t>
0
tl:
<->:!:::
<::>
"''
~~'3--
<t
.,,"'
0
~
""
=
:a
.,,"'=
~%
.I!?
0
~~
~-
"
.s
\\
tl
I
I
0.8
0.
~~
1.0
c::i .'.. "'"-
40
60
Water saturation, 0/o
20
80
that a formation be 100 per cent water-saturated in order for that formation
to produce 100 per cent water. By use of the fractional flow equation*
0
0
0
0
:;}
.,;
"';);
~
J..
where
(k./ k.) (p..I .)
. 0 = water-to-oil viscosity ratio

k 0 /k. = oil-to-water relative-permeability ratio
f,,, = fraction of total production which is water
. 111 /
* This equation is developed

206
100
F1a. 3-63. Effect of water saturation on fractional flow of water through a homogeneous medium.
0
0
0
207
determine what the fluid saturations must be at the point of zero oil permeability. When the fluid saturations determined from well test data and
relative-permeability curves are used, the capillary pressure can be determined and the height above the free water surface or zone of 100 per cent
water saturation can be calculated. The above procedure is illustrated in
Fig. 3-62. The existence of two distinct water tables materially aids in explaining the occurrence of some "tilted 'Yater tables." It is noted that the
more permeable the formation, the more closely the pore structure approaches a supercapillary system and the smaller the divergence between
the two water tables.
Aid in Evaluating Drill-stem and Production Tests. As indicated in the
preceding discussion on the location of the water table, it is not necessary
.~%~
6>
a
o~
=o0 3"'
~12
' "'
<t
'?
0
-"
~"' :~1
~I
(l
2?i
c:::.J
E=
,
0.
-~
II
."'-.~!
:~J
0
0
::,
I
0
;;
'<=
o~
"
0
0
in a companion volwne.
208
PETROLEUM BESERVOffi ENGINEERING
MEDIA
and relative-permeability data, the engineer can calculate the height above
the free water surface at which both water and oil can be produced. Using
the resultant solution of the fractional flow equation shown in Fig. 3-63
and the capillary-pressure data shown in Figs. 3-26 and 3-27, the height
of the two-phase producing interval was determined for permeabilities
from 10 to 900 millidarcys. The results of these calculations are shown
in Fig. 3-64.
16 0
140
12 0
~ 10 0
\omd
~
60
-~
40
\
~md
20
\
~ ,...___
~-....._
r---._
0d
9'oOmd-......5,00md
40
60
209
meability of 900 millidarcys. Water would be produced 200 ft above the

free water surface for a reservoir with a permeability of 100 millidarcys.
From the results of these calculations, it is noted that the lower the reservoir permeability, the longer the region of two-phase production or transition zone. It should be pointed out that the same relative-permeability
curve was used in determining the fractional flow for all the different permeability samples. The use of one set of relative-permeability data exaggerates the effect of the low-permeability samples but does not change the
general trend of the data. The capillary-pressure data used in the calculations for Fig. 3-64 are for a particular set of core samples. Another set of
core samples would change the relative magnitude of the curves but would
not change the indicated trend.
Other Uses of Re/,ative-permeability Data. There are numerous other uses
of relative-permeability data most of which will be discussed in detail later
in conjunction with applications to particular problems. A few of these
applications are
REFERENCES
\
20
MULTIPLE FLUID SATURATION
1. Determination of residual fluid saturations

2. Fractional flow and frontal advance calculations to determine the fluid
distributions
3. Making future predictions for all types of oil reservoirs where twophase flow is involved
\md
-"
CONTAI;t~ING
80
100
Fraction of water in produced fluid, 0/o
Fro. 3-64. Fraction of water in produced fluid as a function of height above the
free water level (using capillary-pressure data shown in Fig. 3-27).
It is noted from the fractional flow curve (Fig. 3-63) that water flows at
oil saturation as high as 65 per cent. Thus, from the capillary-pressure
curve (Fig. 3-26), it is determined that water would be produced on a drillstem test 10 ft above the free water surface for a formation with a per-
1. Benner, F. C., and F. E. Bartell: The Effect of Polar Impurities upon Capillary
and Surface Phenomena in Petroleum Production, Drilling and Production Practices,
American Petroleum Institute, 1941.
2. Plateau, J. A. F.: Experimental and Theoretical Research on the Figures of Equilibrium of a Liquid Mass Withdrawn from the Action of Gravity, Smith Inst. Ann.
Repts., 1863-1866.
3. Leverett, M. C.: Capillary Behavior in Porous Solids, Tram. AIME, 1941.
4. Fancher, G. H., J. A. Lewis, and K. B. Barnes: Penn. State Coll Mineral Ind.
Expt. Sta. Bull. 12, 1933.
5. McCardell, W. M.: A Review of the Physical Basis for the Use of the J-function,
Eighth Oil Recovery Conference, Texas Petroleum Research Committee, 1955.
6. Welge, H.J., and W. A. Bruce: The Restored State Method for Determination of
Oil in Place and Conn.ate Water, Drilling and Producti<m Practices, American Petroleum Institute, 1947.
7. Purcell, W.R.: Capillary Pressures-Their Measurement Using Mercury and the
Calculation of Permeability Therefrom, Trans. AIME, 1949.
8. Slobod, R L., Adele Chambers, and W. L. Prehn, Jr.: Use of Centrifuge for Determining Connate Water, Residual Oil and Capillary Pressure Curves of Small Core
Samples, Tram. AIME, 1951.
9. Brown, Harry W.: Capillary Pressure Investigations, Trans. AIME, 1951.
10. Gates, George L., Frank C. Morris, and W. Hodge Caraway: Effect of Oil-base
Drilling Fluid Filtrate on Analysis of Core from South Coles Levee, California and
Rangely, Colorado Field, U.S. Bur. Mines Rept. Irwest. 4716, August, 1950.
210
11. Owen, J. F.: Electric Logging in the Quinduno Field Roberts County T
Symposium on Formation Evaluation, AIME, October, 1955~
' exa.,
12. Guthrie, R. K.,_ and Martin H. Greenburger: "The Use of Multiple Correlation
~nalyses for Interp~eti~g P~tr_o~eum Engineering Data.," presented at the Spring Meetmg of the S. W. DlStnct D1vis1on of Production, New Orleans, La., Mar. 9-11, 1955:
13. R~se, Walter, and W. A. Bruce: Evaluation of Capillary Characters in Petroleum
Reservoir Rock, Trans. AIME, 1949.
14. W~gh:t, :S: T., Jr., and L. D. Wooddy, Jr.: Formation Evaluation of the Borregas
and See~on Field, Brooks and Jim Wells County, Texas, Symposium on Formation
Evaluation, AIME, October, 1955.
15. Calhoun, John C., Jr.: "Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering,'' University of
Oklahoma Press, Norman, Okla., 1953.
16. Calhoun, J. C., and S. T. Yust.er: Effect of Pressure Gradients and Saturations
on Recovery in Water Flooding, Proc. 8th Tech. Canf. an Petrol. Production, Pennsylvania
State College, 1944.
17. Slobod, R. L., and H. A. Blum: Method for Determining Wettability of Reservoir
Rocks, Trans. AIME, 1952.
18. B?1'dine, N. T., L. S. Gournay, and P. 0. Reicherty: Pore Size Distribution of
Reservou Rocks, Trans. AIME, 1950.
19. Ritter, H. L., and L. C. Drake: Pore Size Distribution in Porous Materials Ind
Eng. Chem., December, 1945.
'
20. Rapoport, L.A., and W. J. Leas: Relative Permeability to Liquid in Liquid-G~

Systems, Trans. AIME, 1951.
21._ Wyckoff, R. D., and H. G. Botset: Flow of Gas Liquid Mixtures through Sands
PkyS1.C8, 1936.
'
22. Botset, H. G.: Flow of Gas Liquid Mixtures through Consolidated Sand Trans
AIME, vol. 136, 1940.
'
.
23. Bulnes, A. C., and R. U. Fitting, Jr.: An Introductory Discussion of the Reservoir
Performance of Limestone Formations Trans. AIME vol 160 1945
24 Le
'
,
.
verett, M. C.: Flow of Oil-Water Mixtures through Unconsolidated Sand

Trans, AIME, 1939.
s,
25. Leverett, M. C., and W. B. Lewis: Steady Flow of Gas-Oil-Water 1'1ixtures
through Unconsolidated Sands, Trans. AIME, 1941.
26. Osoba, J. S., J. G. Richardson, J. K. Kerver, J. A. Hafford, and P. M. Blair:
La:;ratory Measurements of Relative Permeabili:y, Trans. AIME, 1951.
?e~en, T. M., W. W. O~ens, D. R. Farrish, and R. A. Morse: Experimental
Investigation of Factors Affecting Laboratory Relative Permeability Measurements
Trans. AIME, 1951.
'
28. H!ch~dson, J. G.? J. K. Kerver, J. A. Hafford, and J. S. Osoba: Laboratory
Determinations of Relative Permeability, Trans. AIME, 1952.
~- Welge, H.J.: Simplified Method for Computing Oil Recoveries by Gas or Water
Drive, Trans. AIME, vol. 195, 1952.
30. Fatt, I., and H. Dykstra: Relative Permeability Studies, Trans. AIME, 1951.
31. Fatt, I.: Effect of Overburden Pressure on Relative Permeabilitv Trans AIME
1953.
~.
.
J
32. Knutsen, Carroll F.: Definition of Water Table, Am. Assoc. Petrol Geologists
vol. 38, pt. 2, 1954.
.
'
CHAPTER
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR

OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
INTRODUCTION
In Chap. 1 of this work, a definition of an oil and gM reservoir by Uren'

was presented. It can be noted from the definition that an oil-gas reservoir
is defined not only by the rocks in which the fluids are contained but by
the fluids themselves. Oil and gas are naturally existing hydrocarbon mixtures quite complex in chemical composition which exist at elevated temperatures and pressures in the reservoir. On production and capture of
hydrocarbons at the surface, the temperature and pressure of the mixture
are reduced. The state of the hydrocarbon mixture at the surface conditions depends upon the composition of the hydrocarbon fluid as produced
from the well and upon the pressure and temperature at which it is captured. Furthermore, the fluid remaining in the reservoir at any stage of
depletion undergoes physical changes as the pressure is reduced by producing quantities of oil or!:"" from that reservoir. It is necessary to study
the physical properties of these naturally existing hydrocarbons and in
particular, their variation with pressure and temperature. Knowledge of
the physical properties enables the engineer to evaluate the yield in terms
of standard volumes of gas and stock-tank barrels of liquid that may be
obtained upon production to the surface of a unit volume of reservoir fluid.
These data are necessary in estimating the performance of the reservoir.
The complexity of the naturally occurring hydrocarbon mixtures makes it
necessary, in general, to rely upon empirical data obtained from lab.oratory tests.
The chemical composition of hydrocarbon gases can be specified through
heptanes readily. The chemical composition of a crude oil, however, is
much more difficult to evaluate because a large proportion of the oil is
comprised of hydrocarbons heavier than heptanes. In this chapter the
fundamental physical behavior of hydrocarbons will be discussed together
with the laboratory tests and calculation procedures that are available in
evaluating physical properties of hydrocarbon mixtures.
In addition to the hydrocarbons that occur in the reservoir, the prop211
212
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
erties of the associated waters are of interest to the engineer, as this water
occupies space in the reservoir, contributes energy to the production of oil,
and may be produced with oil and gas. Succeeding chapters will deal with
the applications of these physical properties of hydrocarbon fluids and with
the properties of formation waters.
In order to study properly the physical properties of fluids, it is first
necessary to gain some understanding of simple systems. A single-component hydrocarbon can be obtained only after extensive processing and
does not exist in natural occurrences. However, the physical properties
of a single-component hydrocarbon and its behavior when subjected to
changes in pressure and temperature are qualitatively similar to those of
more complex systems. It is convenient, therefore, to introduce the basic
definitions and to review the concepts of thermodynamics and physical
chemistry in terms of a single hydrocarbon.
Physical properties of interest to an engineer ordinarily are defined in
terms of the pressure and temperature at which a hydrocarbon exists.
Fluids in general are classified as gases, vapors, or liquids. It should be
pointed out that these particular words convey ideas only when conditions
of pressure and temperature are specified. A material may exist as a gas
or as a liquid, depending upon the pressure and temperature to which that
material is su\Jjected. Vapor is defined in the dictionary as any substance
in the gaseous state which, under ordinary conditions:,. is usually a liquid
or solid. By ordinary conditions are meant atmospheric conditions of pressure and temperature. In dealing with hydrocarbons it is convenient to
think of the words gas and vapor as being synonymous.
As in other fluid systems, a hydrocarbon system may be homogeneous
or heterogeneous. In a homogeneous system, all parts of the system have
the same physical and chemical properties. A heterogeneous system is one
in which the physical and chemical properties are not the same throughout.
A heterogeneous system is comprised of phases. A phase is defined by
Daniels2 as "a definite part of a system which is homogeneous throughout
and physically separated from other phases by distinct boundaries." An
example of a heterogeneous system is that of water, ice, and water vapor
in which three phases are present. The degree of dispersion does not enter
in consideration of the number of phases. In the example cited the ice is
a single pha.".!e whether it exists in one piece or several.
BASIC CONCEPTS OF PHASE BEHAVIOR
Single-component Systems
Ethane is the hydrocarbon chosen for an example of a single-component
system. Ethane is ordinarily thought of as being a gas and quite properly
(from the dictionary definition), as at ordinary conditions ethane exists as
213
a gas. At other than ordinary conditions, ethane may exist as a liquid

as is shown in Fig. 4-1. The curve plotted is a vapor-pressure curve. At
the conditions of pressure and
temperature specified by the curve
800
'.....-- - ]_ - -- 0
two phases, liquid and vapor, co_c
exist in equilibrium. At any condi700
tion of pressure and temperature
Li'quid
which does not fall on the line, only ~
'
one phase exists, i.e., either liquid or '!!.- 600
,
Vapor
gas. As labeled on the figure, it can ~
be seen that ethane exists in the liq- if_
500
uid state at those pressures lying
above the vapor-pressure curve for
--- '- - - B
the appropriate temperatures. It
400
120
100
80
60
40
can be noted further that ethane is
Temperature, F
a vapor or gas at those pressures
diagram
lying below the vapor-pressure Fro. 4-1. Pressure-temperature
of ethane. (From Standing. 3 )
curve for the same values of ternperature.
The boiling characteristics of water are well known. At ordinary conditions of pressure and temperature water boils at 212F; that is, the material can be transformed from the liquid phase to the vapor phase at a
constant temperature and p :essure. Although the properties of the liquid
and vapor are not changing, the energy for the total system is being increased as more of the material is converted from the low-energy liquid
state to the high-energy gaseous state. By analogy, at 636 psia, ethane
may be considered to have a boiling temperature of 80F. Thus, the vaporpressure curve may also be considered to be the locus of the boiling temperatures of the substance. The boiling temperature of a material is a
function of pressure.
In Fig. 4-1 the point C, where the curve terminates, is known as the
critical point of the system. For a single-component. system, the cntical
point may be defined as the highest value of pressure and temperature at
which two phases can coexist. This definition will not hold for multicomponent systems, and for that reason a different definition will be given here
which is applicable for the most complex systems. The classical definition
of the critical point is that state of pressure and temperature at which the intensive properties of the gas and liquid phases are continuously identical.
The state of a substance is therefore determined by the pressure and
temperature at which that substance exists. Consider point A of Fig. 4-1.
At temperature of 60F and a pressure of approximately 430 psia, ethane
exists in the gaseous state. The material has all the properties ordinarily
associated with a gas. If the pressure is increased at a constant tempera-
,/
/A
214
215
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF -HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
ture to a pressure of about 495 psia, a point on the vapor-pressure curve,

both t)ie vapor and liquid states may coexist. If the pressure is increased
. further to point F, ethane is in the liquid state and all the physical properties ordinarily associated with a liquid are exhlbited by ethane at that
condition. In proceedirig from poir'it A to point F, the condensation of a
liquid from the ethane vapor can be observed if the compression is conducted in a visual cell. Therefore, the formation of a liquid phase can be
readily identified. If, however, a different path from point A to point F is
followed by appropriate changes of pressure and temperature, the transition from gas to liquid is not perceptible. For example, proceed at a constant pressure from point A to point B at a temperature of 100F. At
point B ethane still exists in the vapor phase and has properties associated
with the vapor phase. If, then, the material is compressed to about 770
psia, point D, there is a continuous change in the material. The material
at point D should be referred to as a fluid rather than as a vapor or a liquid.
If the material _is cooled from point D at !00F to point E at 60F while
holding the pressure constant, the change in physical properties is continuous and no phase discontinuities can be observed. When the pressure at a
constant temperature is dropped to point F, a substance is obtained which
is readily identified as having the physical properties ordinarily associated
with liquids. Yet in tracing out the complete path it was noted that no
discontinuities were observed along that path. In other words, by selecting a particular path of temperature and pressure change it is possible to
pass from the vapor state to the liquid state without observing a discontinuity or the formation of a second phase.
Another means of illustrating the behavior of a single-component system
is shown in Fig. 4-2 in which pressure and specific volume are the indepPndent parameters. Here the two....,phase region is more readily illustrated.
Point C is the critical point. It may be noted that the critical temperature
for ethane is slightly above 90F and the critical pressure about 710 psia.
The dashed curve defines the two-phase region. The solid curves are lines
of equal temperature (isotherms). That portion of the dashed curve to the
left of the critical point, the dashed line going through point A and then
continuing to the pressure of about 400 psia at a specific volume of about
0.095 cu ft per lb, is the bubble-point curve. That portion of the dashed
line to the right of the critical point C and extending through points A'
and H is the dew-point curve. Within the region enclosed by the bubblepoint and dew-point curves is the two-phase region within which vapor and
liquid coexist in equilibrium. At point A on the bubble-point curve ethane
has the properties of a liquid, having a specific volume of 0.0516 cu ft per
lb. Point A' on the dew-point curve is at the same pressure and temperature as point A, but the specific volume is 0.138 cu ft per lb, which is of the
order of magnitude commonly associated with a vapor. Within the two-
phase region at point A 2 exists a material having _a specific volume" of 0.08

cu ft per lb. The material existing at the conditions specified by A, eon.sists of two distinct homogeneous phases. One phase has the density specified by A', and the other that specified by A. The specific volume at A,
0.05
0.10
0.15
Q20
0.25
3
Specific volume, ft /lb
FIG. 4-2. Phase behavior of pure ethane. (From Brown et al.')
is determined by the relative quantity of liquid A and va~or A' present.

At any condition within the two-phase region, the re.lat1ve amounts of
vapor and liquid coexisting in equilibrium can be ~et~nruned from the specific volume of the composite of the gas and the hqmd. A volume balance
can be written as
Voom(Woom) = VL(W L)
and a weight balance as
+ v,(W,)
216
Combining the balances,

v,=(WL
+ W,)
= VL(W L)
+ v,(W,)
which can be reduced to an expression for the weight ratio of liquid to gas.
Vg Vcom -
Vcom.
VL
A graphical expression of the above can be obtained from Fig. 4-2 as

WL)
( Wq A:
length from A, to A'

length from A to A,
In the above expressions,

Veom
Wcom 1 WL,
= specific volume of composite
tion of the principle of average composite densities. A straight line is obtained by plotting the arithmetic average of the densities of the vapor and
liquid defined at the pressures and temperatures of the vapor-pressure
curve. This line paSSe,5 through the critical point as illustrated by the
dashed line of Fig. 4-3. The critical point is defined by the convergence
of the vapor, liquid, and average com~osite density curves.
Binary Systems
When a second component is added to a hydrocarbon system, the phase
behavior becomes more complex. This increase in complexity is caused by
the introduction of another variable, composition, to the system.
The effect of this variable can be noted by contrasting the pressuretemperature curve plotted in Fig. 4-1 with that of Fig. 4-4. For a single-
VL = specific volume of equilibrium liquid

Va = specific volume of equilibrium vapor
and Wa = weights of composite, liquid, and gas,
respectively
1,400~--~--,~--,---;l--C,-om_p_o_,,"t;c-on---i
C
2
No. Wt % ethane
'---f---~'1-'-+'<"c--1g1
/
'
,C
1,2QQi-
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the liquid and vapor densities of
ethane. Considering the material at point A,, in the two-phase region, the
density of the liquid in equilibrium
with its coexisting vapor is specified
by point A. The density of the
coexisting vapor is specified by
point A'. Note that at the critical
point the density, one of the intensive properties of ethane, becomes
single-valued. This is to be ex0.1
pected, as by definition, the critical
point is that point at which the
vapor and liquid phases become
90
Temperature F
continuously identical. In other
Fra. 4-3. Saturated liquid and vapor den- words, as the critical point is apsities of ethane. (From Brown et al.')
proached along the dew-point curve,
the density of the vapor progressively increases. As the critical point is approached along the bubble-
1~g~g
50. 25
Further inspection of Fig. 4-2 indicates that the state of the ethane can
be specified completely by the pressure and specific volume. However,
only outside the two-phase region can the physical state be completely
specified by the pressure and temperature. This, of course, corresponds
to the observation that can be made from the vapor-pressure curve.
217
!C3
\ C7
9.78
N-heptane
\
\
c
~aool~---l-1--1--1--1---+--l--+-T--l----1
Ao
400
500
Temperature, F
Fra. 4-4. Pre~e-temperature diagram for the ethane-n-heptane system. (From

Brown et al.')
component system the vapor-pressure curve represents the trace of both the
bubble-point and dew-point curves on the pressure-temperature plane. For
point curve, the density of the liquid continually decreases, approaching
a binary or other multicomponent system, the bubble-point and dew-point

lines no longer coincide. The traces of the bubble-point and dew-point
the same value as the vapor at the critical point.

For pure components, the critical point can he determined by applica-
for each possible composition a distinct phase diagram exists.
curves for the multicomponent system form a phase diagram. Furthermore,
218
The behavior of ethane-n-heptane mixtures is illustrated in Fig. 4-4. On

the left of the figure, terminating at the point C, is the vapor-pressure curve
of pure ethane, and on the extreme right of the figure, terminating in point
C1, is the vapor-pressure curve for pure n-heptane. Between the vaporpressure curves of the pure constituents lie the phase diagrams of the various binary mixtures of the ethane-n-heptane system. The points labeled
C are the critical points of the mixtures as defined by the respective subscripts in the legend of the figure. The dashed curve is the locus of critical
points for the ethane-n-heptane system. Points C1, C,, and C, are the
critical points of mixtures containing 90.22, 50.25, and 9.8 wt % ethane
respectively.
The phase disgram for the mixture containing 90 wt % heptane consists
of the bubble-point curve A,-C, and the dew-point curve C, - B,.
Within the region enclosed by these curves exists the two-phase region.
Above and to the left of the bubble-point curve A, - c,, the mixture exists
as a liquid. Below and to the right of the dew-point curve, the mixture
exists as a gas.
If the composition of the mixture is changed, the phase diagram and the
two-phase region are shifted on the pressure-temperature plane. This is
illustrated by the phase diagrams terminating at C1 and C,, respectively.
Comparing the phase disgrams, it is noted that with large weight percentages of ethane, the critical point of the mixture lies to the left of the maximum pressure and maximum temperature at which two phases can coexist
in equilibrium. When the composition of the mixture is evenly distributed
by weight, it is noted that the critical point, point C2 , is located approximately at the highest value of pressure. In the case where heptane comprises nearly 90 per cent by weight of the mixture, the critical pressure
point C, is now shifted to the right of the highest pressure at which two
phases can coexist in equilibrium. From Fig. 4-4 also can be noted that
the dew-point or bubble-point line, depending on whether the heaviest or
lightest constituent is predominant in the mixture, will approach the vaporpressure line of the major constituent. Also, as one constituent becomes
more predominant, the critical temperature and pressure of the mixture
tend to approach those values which define the critical point of the major
pure constituent. The critical temperature lies between the critical temperatures of the lightest and heaviest constituents present in the mixture.
The critical pressure of the system will always be greater than the critical
pressure of any constituent in the system except when one constituent is
so predominant that the critical properties of the mixture approach the
critical properties of that one component. As the composition of the mixture becomes more evenly distributed between the constituents, the twophase region increases in size, whereas when one constituent becomes predominant, the two-phase region tends to shrink in size,
219
The study of other binary mixtures of hydrocarbons provides a valuable

insight into the effect of the diversity of volatility and molecular weight
on the behavior of hydrocarbon mixtures. In Fig. 4-5 are presented the
vapor-pressure curves of several paraffin hydrocarbons together with the
critical loci of various binary mixtures of these hydrocarbons.
6,000'----~--~-~---,..---,--,----..,----,
600
700
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-5. Illustrating effect of divergence in composition on critical point loci. (From
Brown et al.')
If the mixture is composed of two constituents which are quite different

in volatility and molecular weight, the critical locus encompasses a wide
range of temperature and pressure. For example, the critical locus (Fig.
4-5) of the methane-n-decane system exhibits a maximum critical pressure
of approximately 5,250 psia. The critical temperatures of the system lie
between the critical temperature of methane and of n-decane.
-------
220
- - - - -------
----------------
221
FUNDAMENTALS. OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
The systematic change in the critical loci with increasing diversity of

the properties of the constituents is illustrated in Fig. 4-5 by the critical
loci of the various methane mixtures. The maximum critical pressures for
the various mixtures are as follows:
Cricondenbar (T). The highest pressure at which the liquid and vapor
can coexist in equilibrium. (Some authorities name this point the Crivaporbar.)
Retrograde region (shaded area). Any region where condensation or
vaporization occurs in reverse to conventional behavior, i.e., retrograde
condensation in which liquid is condensed upon either lowering the pres-
Methane-ethane system, 1,250 psia

Methane-propane system, 1,450 psia
Methane-n-butane system, 1,950 psia
Methane-n-pentane system, 2,450 psia
Methane-n-hexane system, 2,900 psia
Methane-n-decane system, 5,250 psia
Liquid
,.
Vol %
~
liquid ~~0\r.
"f:>\e
.,,.. ...
~~'O 010
... ! ...
,oo ......... I L
For constituents very similar in molecular structure, such as propane

and n-pentane or n-butane and n-heptane, the loci of the critical points
form nearly fiat curves connecting the critical points of the constituents.
Multicomponent Systems
Naturally occurring hydrocarbon systems are composed of a wide range
of constituents. These constituents include not only the paraffin series of
hydrocarbons but components from various other series. The phase behavior of a hydrocarbon mixture is dependent on the composition of tli6
mixture as well as the properties of the individual constituents.
A phase diagram for a multicomponent system is shown in Fig. 4-6.
Before discussing the significance of the diagram, a number of important
physical concepts associated with phase diagrams must be defined.
Critical point (C of Fig. 4-6). That state of pressure and temperature
at which the intensive properties of each phase are identical.
Critical temperature (C). The temperature at the critical point.
Critical pressure (C). The pressure at the critical point.
lntewfive properties. Those properties that are independent of the
amount of material under consideration.
Extensive properties. Those properties that are directly proportional to
the amount of material under consideration.
Bubble-point curve. The locus of the points of pressure and temperature
at which the first bubble of gas is formed in passing from the liquid to the
two-phase region.
Dew-point curve. The locus of the points of pressure and temperature at
which the first droplet of liquid is formed in passing from the vapor to the
two-phase region.
Two-phase region. That region enclosed by the bubble-point line and
dew-point line wherein gas and liquid coexist in equilibrium.
Criconde:ntherm (M). The highest temperature at which a liquid and
vapor can coexist in equilibrium.
,-;~""
,,~'J
I
,,. ,
I ,,. ... '
...
,' '
,,
=_,, ... 5Q~o
I
I
d:
!-
,,
Separator
I
I
7i
I
I
I
10
I
J
,/
,J
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
... ......... "'1

,.1, o/o
I
......... z
,, '
,,
,.,r. .
,'
, ,'
IE
(,,1:/~e
."I
o'
oe"'
Gas
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1r,
I
I
I
I
I
7i1
Temperature
FIG. 4-6. Phase diagram to illustrate nomenclature of retrograde condensation.
sure at constant temperature (lines A, B, D) or increasing the temperature

at constant pressure (lines H, G, A) and retrograde vaporization in which
vapor is formed upon decreasing the temperature at constant pressure
(Jines A, G, H) or increasing the pressure at constant temperature (Jines
D,B,A).
Iso vol lines (quality lines). The loci of points of equal liquid volume
per cent within the two-phase region.
Several important observations can be made from a study of Fig. 4-6.
The bubble-point curve coincides with the dew-point curve at the critical
point. The bubble-point curve represents 100 per cent liquid by volume,
I
!
222
and the dew-point curve represents zero per cent liquid by volume. The
shaded areas represent regions of retrograde phenomena. The region defined by points C, B, M, D is the region of isothermal retrograde condensation.
In oil-field nomenclature multicomponent systems are broadly classified
as oils or gases. These broad classifications are further subdivided depending on the changes in state of the hydrocarbon mixture in the reservoir and
the surface yield of hydrocarbon fluids.
Gases. Systems which exist in the gaseous state in the reservoir are
classified as gases and subdivided into
1. Condensate or retrograde gases
2. Wet gases
3. Dry gases
The phase diagram and prevailing reservoir conditions determine the
classification of the system. If a reservoir contains a mixture having a
phase diagram such as that of Fig. 4-6, the reservoir temperature is between the critical temperature and the cricondentherm and the initial
reservoir pressure is equal to or greater than the dew-point pressure. Then
the reservoir contains a condensate gas.
A reservoir temperature and an initial reservoir pressure corresponding
to point B of Fig. 4-6 are typical of reservoir conditions associated with
condensate gases. The hydrocarbon mixture originally exists as a singlephase dew-point gas. Fluids produced from the reservoir are brought to
the surface and are separated at separator conditions such as shown on
the diagram.
Two phenomena associated with the production are of interest. As
fluids are produced, the reservoir pressure declines and isothermal retrograde condensation occurs in the reservoir, since the pressure decline occurs
along the path B-D. The produced fluid is subjected to both pressure decline and temperature decline. Liquid is accumulated in the separator as a
result of normal condensation associated with a decline in temperature.
A portion of the phase diagram of a natural-gas-natural-gasoline mixture
is presented in Fig. 4-7. The diagram is more typical of a condensate gas
than that of Fig. 4-6. Although the range of investigation did not define
the cricondentherm, it is obvious that both the cricondenbar and cricondentherm exist at higher temperatures than the critical temperature. This
is commonly true of condensate gases. The region of isothermal retrograde
condensation is larger for such a material than for that shown in Fig. 4-6.
Another important observation which can be made from both phase diagrams discussed is that the reservoir temperature must be between the
critical temperature and the cricondentherm for the fluid to be a condensate
gas. The relative position of the critical point is determined by the amount
223
of light hydrocarbons in the mixture. As was mentioned previously, when

the light hydrocarbons comprise a large weight percentage of the total mixture, the critical temperature of the mixture will approach the critical temperature of the lightest constituent. Comparing the phase diagrams of
Figs. 4-6 and 4-7, it can be observed that the natural-gas-natural-gasoline
mixture contains larger amounts of light constituents.
2,80 0
2,60
I ,,,
- f::;7
''" ~ /"I/
o;t~/ /
/
~~/ /
0
o~""
'0
' \' ~
, s~
'
'
2,40
-~ 1,800
~
::::J
l"
ii.
1,60
oW
1,400
i,200
1,000
800
600
L<
./
Vi6
....-(5
v
./
.,..
-/
I
I
,,,
I/
/
~o
""'
40~0
/"'
__.,,...
~-
_I
'
2,200
2,00
'
::::~
'
......- i.--
----
-\ /
oRun A
.&Run 8
5
30
HO
oo
ITT
m m
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-7. Phase diagram for natural-gas-natural-gasoline mixture. (From Katz and
Kurata.s)
The critical temperature of the natural-gas-natural-gasoline mixture is

such that if the mixture were to be accumulated in a reservoir at moderate
depth (reservoir temperature 100 to 200F), the fluid would behave as a
condensate gas.
A wet gas normally is comprised of a lesser percentage of heavy components than is a condensate gas. As a result, the phase diagram is somewhat less broad and the critical point is shifted to lower temperatures.
Furthermore, the reservoir temperature exceeds the cricondentherm as is
shown on the phase diagram of Fig. 4-8. Thus, in the reservoir the fluid
is at all times in a single phase. The term "wet" is derived from the fact
---
224
Temperature
-----
F:rG. 4-8. Phase diagram for a wet gas. (After Clark.G)
225
that the separator conditions lie in the two-phase region and a liquid phase
is condensed in the separator. Wet gases ordinarily differ from condensate
gases in the following respects:
I. Isothermal retrograde condensation does not occur in the reservoir
during pressure depletion.
2. Separator liquid yields are lower than for a condensate.
3. Less heavy components are present in the mixture.
A dry gas is comprised largely of methane and ethane with small percentages of heavier components. A phase diagram of a dry gas, together
with typical reservoir and operating conditions, is shown in Fig. 4-9. The
separator conditions as well as the reservoir conditions lie in the singlephase region. Hydrocarbon liquid is not condensed from the mixture
either in the reservoir or at the surface. Dry gases may contain water
vapor, which will condense. "Dry" in this instance means free of hydrocarbon liquids, not necessarily free of water.
Oils. Hydrocarbon mixtures which exist in the liquid state at reservoir
conditions are commonly classified as crude oils and subdivided on the basis
of liquid yield at the surface into low- and high-shrinkage oils.
A phase diagram for a low-shrinkage oil is shown in Fig. 4-10. Two
characteristics are apparent. The critical point lies to the right of the
Pressure depletion at
reservoir temperature
Pressure depletion
_ - - ......,
/
at reservoir t7eperature
'
'\
I/
I
I
I
f
I
Liquid
75
/ /
TA
I
I
I
I
I
---
_--::::;. - -
Gas
of
1
I
I
J
I
Gos
/
&Separator
Temperature - - - -
Fxa. 4-10. Phase diagram for a low-shrinkage oil. (After Ckzrk.6 )
1
I
?-'/50
,,.
_,..-/250,,.
feparotor
"I
J
J
liquid
J
I
Temperature -
FIG. 4-9. Phase diagram for a dry gas. (After Cln.rk.6 )
cricondenbar, and the quality lines (volume per cent liquid) are closely
spaced near the- dew-point curve. Furthermore, at atmospheric pressure
and reservoir temperature, the mixture is in the two-phase region. At separator conditions, substantial liquid recoveries are obtained even though
the liquid volume per cent is quite low. This phenomenon is caused by the
226
great expansion of the gas phase at low pressures. The characteristics of

tbe phase diagram indicate relatively large amounts of heavy constituents
in the mixture.
Oil is frequently further classified, depending upon initial reservoir conditions, as either a saturated or undersaturated oil. If the initial reservoir
conditions correspond to A in Fig. 4-10, on the bubble-point curve, the oil
is said to be saturated.
As can be observed from the diagram, on an infinitesimal pressure decline, gas is evolved from a saturated oil. If, however, the initial conditions
correspond to A', above the bubble-point curve, the oil is said to be undersaturated. An undersaturated oil must be subjected to a substantial pressure decline before gas is evolved; in fact, the pressure must decline from
A' to A in the present example before a free gas phase is formed.
A high-shrinkage oil contains more of the lighter hydrocarbons than does
a low-shrinkage oil. The reservoir temperature is ordinarily closer to the
critical temperature, and the quality lines are less closely grouped near the
dew-point curve.
A typical phase diagram for a high-shrinkage oil is presented in Fig. 4-11.
Substantially lower amounts of liquid are obtained on pressure decline
mining the behavior along the isotherm corresponding to reservoir temperature and a group of tests at various separator conditions.
Characteristic analyses of typical reservoir fluids are presented in Table
4-1. These data are to be considered typical but not necessarily characteristic of the classes. A wide range of possible compositions and reservoir
conditions exist for naturally occurring hydrocarbon accumulations. Therefore, each reservoir fluid presents a different problem in analysis and classification.
The gas-liquid ratio that is initially produced and the API gravity of
the produced liquid are indicative in general of the classification of the
reservoir fluid.
Dry gas is indicated by lack of condensed fluids at separator conditions.
Wet gases are usually indicated by gas-liquid ratios of 60,000 to 100,000
cu ft per bbl with liquid gravities higher than 60APL Condensate gases
yield gas-liquid ratios of 8,000 to 70,000 cu ft per bbl with liquid gravities
between 50 and 60APL
TABLE 4-1. COMPARISON OF COMPOSITION AND LIQUID YIELDS OF
HYDROCARBON RESERVOIR FLUIDS7
Fluid
Pressure depletion at
reservoir temperoture----_:f:'
' ....
'\
Liquid
\
I
I
227
Dry gas, mole %
Condensate gas,
mole 3
Low-shrinkage oil,
91.32
4.43
2.12
1.36
0.42
0.15
87.07
4.39
2.29
1.74
0.83
0.60
57.83
2.75
1.93
1.60
0.20
3.08
33.15
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Putan es
Pentanes
Hexanes
mole%
1.15
1.59
Hep tan es
and heavier
I
I
Gravity
of
0 /
liquid,
OAP!
Gas
Reservoir conditions
Gas-liquid
ratio, cu ft
Temperature,
Pressure,
per bbl
F
psi
Dew Bubble
point, point,
psi
psi
Temperature - - - -
FIG. 4-11. Phase diagram for a high-shrinkage oil. (After Cl,ark.s)
both in the reservoir and at the surface. A high-shrinkage oil may be either
saturated (point A) or undersaturated (point A').
The various classifications of hydrocarbon fluids may be characterized
by composition, API gravity of liquid yields, and gas-liquid ratios as well
as by phase diagrams. In fact, usually only a partial phase diagram is obtained on laboratory analysis of reservoir fluids. This consists of deter-
Gas:
Wet gas
Condensate gas
Oil:
Low shrinkage
High shrinkage
65
55
67,000
18,500
160
203
1,700
4,810
38
58
900
2,700
211
203
4,750
4,700
4,470
4,600
3,855
Low-shrinkage oils usually yield gas-liquid ratios of 1,000 cu ft per bbl

or less with API gravities of the produced liquid 45 or less. High-shrinkage
oils yield gas-liquid ratios from 1,000 to 8,000 cu ft per bbl with liquid grav-
- - - - -------
228
---------
ities of 45 to 60APL Many fluids can be classified only after a detailed

study of reservoir-fluid samples.
In Chap. 1 it was stated that gas occurred at reservoir conditions as
dissolved gas, associated free gas, or nonassociated free gas. Referring to
Fig. 4-6 and considering that the phase diagram shown represents the
phase diagram of the total mass of hydrocarbon accumulated in a given
reservoir, the dependence of the state of the hydrocarbon system on reservoir conditions can be shown.
If- the reservoir temperature is T and the initial reservoir pressure corr_esp.onds '.o 1'.oint I, the reservoir contains a single-phase bubble-point
liqwd or, m 01!-field terminology, a saturated oil. At a reservoir pressure
~oITesponding to point J, the reservoir contains a single-phase liquid which
LS several hundred pounds per square inch above the bubble-point pressure-an undersaturated oil. On production of the fluid to the separator,
the two-phase region is entered and both vapor and liquid are obtained.
Thus, the fluid at both conditions can be considered to contain dissolved
gas.
At initial reservoir conditions, corresponding to point L the reservoir
.
'
contams two phases, gas and liquid. Thus, in oil-field terminology the
./Reservoir temperatvre
Reservoir gos
~
I
, Total reservoir fluid
-------
229
reservoir consists of an oil accumulation with a gas cap. The gas-cap gas
is classified as associated free gas and is usually in equilibrium with the
contiguous oil accumulation. Thus, the gas is at its dew point and the
liquid at its bubble point. This is shown schematically in Fig. 4-12, in
which the phase diagrams for the equilibrium phases are superimposed
on the original phase diagram for the total mass of hydrocarbon in the
reservoir. The equilibrium gas contains larger percentages of light hydrocarbons and lesser percentages of heavy hydrocarbons than does the eqUIlibrium liquid. The gas-cap gas may be dry, wet, or condensate, depending
on the composition and phase diagram of the gas. That shown in Fig. 4-12
is a wet gas.
If the reservoir temperature corresponds to T, (Fig. 4-6) and the reservoir pressure to that for point B, then as previously mentioned the
reservoir fluid is a condensate gas. The gas is saturated, or at the dew
point. However, if initial reservoir conditions correspond to point A, the
reservoir contains a single-phase gas which is. several hundred pounds per
square inch above the dew-point pressure and is undersaturated.
For a reservoir temperature of T 3, such as at point F, the reservoir contains a wet gas.
From the foregoing discussion it can be observed that hydrocarbon mixtures may exist in either the gaseous or liquid state, depending on the
reservoir and operating conditions to which they are subjected. The
qualitative concepts presented may be of aid in developing quantitative
analyses.
I
PROPERTIES OF THE GASEOUS STATE
I
I
Reservoir
liquid
l,'--------- ,/
\Ct
//F reservoir
lnifio/ .
/"' / I
I
,,
,,,,.,,,,.
,,,,
,,,,,.,,,
,,..-'""SepOrator 1 1
"/
,,
,,
1 I
/1 I
pressure
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
Temperature - - -
FIG. 4-12. Equilibrium relationship of reservoir containing an oil accumulation with

a gas cap. (CG, critical point for gl'l;l; CL, critical point for liquid; C, critical point
for system.)
Ideal Gas Laws

Gas is defined as a fluid which has neither independent shape or volume
but expands to fill completely the vessel in which it is contained. In or~er
to define the thermodynamic properties of gas it is necessary to review
some of the basic laws. One of the first laws, perhaps the best known, is
Boyle's law.
Boyle's law states that at a constant temperature, the pressure of a gas
is inversely proportional to the volume of the gas. Stated in equation form
v o:-p1
or
PV= C'
for T = constant
where P is pressure, V is volume, T is temperature.

A second law of equal importance, credited to Charles and Gay-Lussac,
is that at a constant pressure, the volume of a perfect gas varies directly
with the temperature; also at a constant volume, the pressure varies directly with the temperature. Expressing the laws in equation form,
1
230
P=KT
V=K'T
for V = constant
for P = constant
unit system selected, is numerically equal to the molecular weight. Fur-
C', K, and K' are constants of proportionality dependent upon the units
used for volume, pressure, and temperature and the natur'e and weight of
gas present. The pressure and temperature in Boyle's and Charles's laws
are in absolute units.
From the above laws it is possible to derive the general or perfect gas
thermore, 1 mole of any substance contains the same number of molecules

as 1 mole of any other substance. Thus, 1 mole of any gas will occupy the
same volume at a given pressure and temperature.
For 1 mole of gas,
w=M
where M is the molecular weight. Substituting for win Eq. (4-3),
law. In brief it can be shown that by using only one part of Charles's law
and Boyle's law, it is possible to write for a unit weight of gas
at T1 from Boyle's law
v2T1
Vn=-=--
T,
From which
= P2v2
T1
R'
T,
(4-1)
Since the conditions were chosen at random, it can also be shown that
P1v1
T1
PaV3
= R'
T,
where conditions P.,, 1 va, and Ta represent any other state of pressure, volume, and temperature. Therefore, the above can be generalized as
Pv = R'T
MR'T
v = ----p-
From Avogadro's law, for a given pressure and temperature, V must have
the same value for all ideal gases. Thus, MR' must be a constant. This
where v.,.. is the specific volume at P2 and T1, v2 is the specific volume at
P2 and T2. Then v1 is the specific volume at P1 and Ti.
P1v1
p,
PV = MR'T
or
at P 2 from Charles's law
P1v1
(4-2)
where R' is the gas constant, a constant of proportionality dependent upon
the type of gas and the units used. The gas constant for a number of gases
fact has been verified by experiment on gases such as oxygen, helium, and
nitrogen. The product MR' is called the universal gas constant and desig-
nated by the symbol R.

In the general case nM = w and the ideal gas equation of state can be
stated as
(4-4)
PV = nRT
where n is the number of moles of gas present.
The universal gas constant is considered to be independent of the type

gas, but as it has dimensions, the numerical value depends on t~e. system
of units used. The dimensions of R are energy units per mole divided by
absolute temperature. The numerical value of R was obtained from measurement of the specific volume, at 14.7 psia and 32F, of air, oxygen, nitro1
gen, helium, and hydrogen.
_
In the English system of units, with pressure in pounds per square
foot, volume in cubic feet, n in number of pound moles, and T in degrees
Rankine,
R = 1,544 ft-lb/(mole)(F)
has been detennined from experimental data. For methane at atmospheric
pressure and 32F, R' = 96.2 ft lb per (lb)( 0 R), with P in pounds per
and if the pressure is in pounds per square inch, other units as above,
square foot absolute, v in cubic feet per pound, and T in degrees Rankine.
If both sides of Eq. (4-2) are multiplied by w, the weight of gas, then
or
231
Pwv = wR'T
PV = wR'T
(4-3)
where Vis the volume of gas having a weight w.

Equations (4-1) and (4-2) are equations of state for perfect or ideal gases.
A more useful form of these equations can be obtained by introducing
Avogadro's law: All ideal gases at a given pressure and t.emperature hwe the
same numher of molecuJ.es for a given volume.
One mole of a material is a quantity of that material whose mass, in the
i~!4
10.72 cu ft-lb/(mole)(sq in.)(R)
In Table 4-2 are listed values of R for various unit systems.

The physical properties density and specific volume can be defined from
the equation of state as follows:
.
w
PM
(4-5)
D ens1ty p = V = RT
and
V
RT
Specific volume v = -w = p M
(4-6)
--------- --- .
232
----
--------
v.ARIOUS
Pressure
Volume
Atm
Atm
Atm
Liters
Cu ft
Psi
Psi
Cu ft
Cult
Cc
FOR
UNITS
Temperature,
Kelvin
Kelvin
Rankine
Gm-moles
Gm-moles
Lb-moles
Rankine
Lb-moles
Lb-moles
82.057
0.082054
0.7302
10.72
1,544
deg
Rankine
..--------
-----------------

TABLE 4-2. VALlJE OF THE UNIVERSAL GAS CONSTANT
thus the density and specific volume of gases are functions of pressure,
temperature, and molecular weight. For a particular gas the conditions of
pressure and temperature must be specified to define the density or specific volume.
derived. Consider a cube of dimension L. If it is assumed that one-third

of the molecules in the container are traveling normal to each pair of parallel sides, the impact pressure on the walls of the vessel can be determined.
The time required for one molecule to travel from one side.of the vessel to
the other is
Distance = !: = t
Velocity
ii
The time required to make a round trip, which is the time between impacts on each wall, is
2L=2t=l
ii
The number of impacts per unit time is the reciprocal of the time per
impact, so that the impacts per unit time can be expressed as
1
ii
I= 2L =
Example 4-1. Calculation of Density from Ideal Gas Equation of State.
Find the density of methane at 0 psig and 60F when atmospheric pressure is 14.7 psia.
M ethane d ens1ty --
l 4_. 7 (l6)
(
) -- O.04 122
10 72 520
Density of methane at 60F and 14.7 psia = 0.04122 lb/cu ft

Now find the density of methane at 50 psig and 32F when atmospheric
pressure is 14. 7 psia.
M ethane dens1ty
. =
647 (l 6)
_ (
) = O. 1962
10 72 492
Density of methane at 60F and 64.7 psia = 0.1962 lb/cu ft

Kinetic Theory. Another method by which the equation of state for
. ideal gases can be derived is by use of the kinetic theory of gases. There
a.re two essential features in the theory: one is that matter is made up of
small particles called molecules; second, heat energy in matter is a manifestation of molecular motion. The first is easily understood; the second
just states that when heat is added to a gas, it is transferred into energy
of motion by increasing the velocity of the gas molecules.
In the derivation it is necessary to make three limiting assumptions:
1. The volume occupied by the molecules is insignificant with respect
to the volume occupied by the total mass.
2. All collisions of molecules are perfectly elastic.
3. There are no attractive or repulsive forces between the molecules or
the containing wall.
Using the afore-mentioned assumptions, the equation of state can be
233
Since force is defined as the time rate of change of momentum and

momentum is defined as mass times velocity, the total change in momentum per molecule per impact is
mii -
(-rnIJ)
2rnIJ
Therefore, the change in momentum per second per molecule is the product
of the number of impacts per unit time and the change in momentum per
impact:
mV 2
<27rWl 2L
To obtain the total rate of change in momentum at one wall it is necessary to consider all the molecules which are hitting the wall. The total
change in momentum. per second is force.
Force=
n1 mV2
where n' is the number of molecules. Since force equals the product of
pressure and area, the pressure on the wall is
n' mi!'
2n'
P=3y+V=av
as
(12mif')
L3 =volume
PV
2
;'
(~mv)
It has already been said that heat energy is manifested in molecular

motion; hence it can be written that
234
&mlJ
J'UNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
n'
P' =-a
kinetic energy o:: T
V'
or
where K is a constant of proportionality; that is, as the temperature is increased, so is the kinetic energy of the molecules. Then
2
PV = -Kn'T
3
It can be shown that K is a constant independent of the gas. If T remains
constant and the number of molecules n' remains constant, then
PV = constant
which is Boyle's law.
Charles's law can also be obtained from the equation of state by arbitrarily letting the pressure or volume be constant.
Let PV
1(~KA )r
PV = nRT
235
.
n'
Slllce A= n
where a is a constant dependent on the type of gas in the system.

The volume occupied by the molecules also was neglected in the kinetic
theory. The actual "free space" available for compression is less than the
total volume by the amount of space occupied by the molecules. If I mole
of molecules of a pure gas occupies a volume of b, then the free space available to change would be
V' = V - nb
where b is a constant for the particular gas. The equation of state can be
written in the form developed by van der Waals as
or for 1 mole of gas
V2 (V - nb) = nRT
(P + n'a)
(p + ;,) (V - b) =RT
TABLE 4-3. VA."f
(4-4)
where A is Avogadro's number of molecules per mole, n is the:number of

moles of gas in the vessel, and jKA = R. As K and A are both constants
which are independent of the gas, then R is a constant independent of the
gas.
Behavior of Natural Gases. So far, in the cases of both Boyle's and
Charles's laws and the kinetic theory, the assumption has been made that
the gas involved is perfect. Realizing that no gas obeys the perfect gas
laws, many attempts have been made to correct the perfect gas law and
make its application more general. One of the better known equations is
van der Waals's equation of state for a pure substance. It should be remembered that the kinetic theory assumed that there were no attractive
forces existing between molecules, which is known to be incorrect. At low
pressure the molecules are so far apart that the attractive force is nearly
zero, but at high pressure the molecules are close together and the attractive force becomes an important factor. The pressure that is measured by
gauges is the impact pressure, but the internal pressure Pi is greater than
the impact pressure by the amount of energy that is expended in overcoming the intermolecular force. In order to express the true internal
pressure, it is necessary to add a factor P' to the measured pressure to
correct for the attractive force. Therefore, P, = (P + P') should be used
in the equation of state. P' can be shown to be proportional to n2 /v 2,
where n is the number of moles in the volume, V. Thus
(4-7)
(4-8)
DER WAALS CONSTANTS FOR SELECTED
a,,
Carbon dioxide
Ethane
Hydrogen
Methane
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Formula
bt
co,
3.59
5.49
0.244
2.25
1.39
1.36
0.0427
0.0638
0.0266
0.0428
0.0391
0.0318
C2HG
H,
CH,
N,
o,
GASE-'%
*a in atm-liter2 mole-2.
t b in liter mole-I.
The. perfect gas law holds rather well for the so-called "permanent"
gases m the low-pressure ranges. Van der Waals's equation applies over
a greater pres~ure range for the same gases. The increased range of pressure does not include pressures of the order of the reservoir pressures encountered in many oil and gas fields.
Furthermore, the equation contains two arbitrary constants which depend on the properties of the gas and limit the usefulness of van der Waals' s
equation in describing the behavior of mixtures of gases. To a large extent
the constants a and b depend on the size of the molecules. Therefore in
a mixt~re of gases it is evident that the attractive forces depend on ~he
proportion of the various-size molecules present. No adequate method has
been devised for evaluating the effect on a and b of the molecular interaction in mixtures.
------
--------------
236

8
The Beattie-Bridgeman equation of state, involving five arbitrary constants, describes the behavior of pure substances with considerable precision. It, too, is limited in application for mixtures of gases. To apply
this equation to mixtures requires the simultaneous solutions of equations
comparable to the number of constituents in the mixture.
The Beattie-Bridgeman equation of state for a pure substance is as
follows:
237
Compressibility factors, determined experimentally and correlated with

pressure and temperature, are presented in Figs. 4-13 to 4-16 for methane,
ethane, propane, and n-butane, respectively. The dashed curve on each
of the illustrations represents the boundary of the two-phase region. Com-
(4-9)
where P
T
V
=
=
=
pressure,
temperature, K
volume, liters per mole
and Ao, Bo, a, b, care constants empirically defined for each pure gas.
The Benedict, Webb, Rubin9 equation of state for a mixture of hydrocarbons
P = RTPm
+ ( BRT -
A -
j;,) Pm'+ (bRT aapm6
where B
A
C
b
a
c
= (Zy,b,*)'
= (Zy,a,")'
= [Zy,c,"]'
= [Zy;a<;"]'
a)pm3
+ c~~' [(1 + 'YPm')e->'"'']
(4-10)
= Zy;IJ,
= (Zy;A,")'
=
'Y=
(Zy ,C /')'
[Zy,-y,>']'
and Bi, Ai, Ci, bi, ai, Ci, ai, and 'Yi are constants defined empirically for the
ith component; Pm is the molal density; P is the absolute pressure; R is
the universal gas constant; e is the base of the natural logarithm; and Tis
the absolute temperature.
The petroleum industry has adopted the concept of a compressibility
factor Z for describing the behavior of mixtures of gases at moderate to
high pressure. The compressibility factor Z is simply a correction factor
to the perfect gas law; that is,
(4-11)
PV = ZnRT
and, by definition,
= PV = PV
(4-12)
P 0 V 0 nRT
Po and Vo are the pressure and volume, respectively, which would be calculated from the perfect gas Jaw.
Pressure, psio
F1a. 4-13. Compressibility factors for methane. (From Brown et al:')
pressibility factors are defined only in the single-phase region. Several

general characteristics of compressibility curves are apparent from a study
of the figures. The temperature isotherms have distinct minimums which
vanish as the temperature is increased. The compressibility factor decreases \~:ith decreasing temperature except in the high-pressure rangei
where a reversal of trend occurs (see inset in each figure). The minimums
in the isotherms become more pronounced as the molecular weight of the
gas increases.
238
Fl!NDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
Charts such as Figs. 4-13 through 4-16 can be prepared from experimental data for a particular gas. Compressibility factors determined from
such charts can be used together with Eq. (4-11) to calculate the volume
of the gas.
t.1
239
Propane
"C
"f
560 1,040
480 596
440 2 4
52
J60 680
320 508.
JOO "72
968F
75 __ !,..__
6
680
zsO
36
z60 500
-.,-
,,
""
~J~ 0.6 ~--l-!-'.11-\.1--U---l-'>--l-.ol.-_j_ _j___--l-~,,:C-l
...
0.5
.::.
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
7,000
8,000
t~
9,000
10,000
Pressure, psia
FIG. 4-14. Compressibility factors for ethane. (From Brown el al.~)
Densitles of the gas can be deterrnined from the same experimental data
from \Vhich the compressibility factors were calculated. For pure gases,
charts correlating the density \Vith pressure and temperature are perhaps
as useful as correlations of compressibility factors. In Figs. 4-17 through
4-20 are presented density correlations of methane, ethane, propane, and
normal butane. The two-phase regions are outlined by dashed curves on
500
1,000
1,500
Pressure, psia
FrG. 4-15. Compressibility factors for propane. (From Brown et al.')
the charts for ethane, propane, and normal butane. It may be noted that
the density of the gas approaches that of a liquid at elevated pressure.
Mixtures of Gases. Natural gases are mixtures of hydrocarbons which,
as stated earlier, may be characterized by composition. The composition
of any mixture may be reported in terms of per cent by weight, per cent
by volume, or mole per cent. For gases, according to Avogadro's law, mole
and volume per cent are identical, since 1 mole of any gas occupies the
--------------
240
---------
-----------
-------
0.6
oc
520 968
480 896
440 824
o.1
400 752
0.08
0.06
J80 716
J60 580
-- ---- --------- ----r--- ------- ----
'o.o ...._
;zo
f:
50B
-~ 0.02
512
C>
(}.0 1
,,o
0.008
0.006
0.6
--
0.004
s.ooo
.J.Ooo
.?.ooo
'SOO
'OOO
I---
800
500
500
<oo
Joo
0
''o
-r----._
"'/'--
0.. <>:
"
raooo
~ ~ -~ :::::::-
;40 544
,,, ,,o"'
"'
50,000ps;a
.J0.000
0. 2~
"F
300
'
o.4
n-butane
'00
eo
- r-- r--.
0.002
0.5
0.00 I 0
100
200
60
300
400
"'
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,100
1,200
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-17. Density of methane. (From Brown et al!)
0.4
1.00
oc
0.3
,.,,'
0.2
Cl
' 0
400
390
360
340
0.1
80 100
Pressure
500
1,000
f,500
Pressure, psia
FJG.
:t
~
f-:
320
300
00
sooo
0.96
-....
'
.....
'
...__
.......
."'--.
----- ---
----
----r--
100
200
0.2
.?.ooo
0.1
0.08
0.06
.~oo
t.ooo
0.04 .............
Q
oo
oo
f:
0.02 -~
400
Joo
C>
Jo
0.01
0.008
0.006
'50
'O"
80
0.004
5n
so
40
0.002
30
<o
300
400
500
u
0
1 6'00
--------
--- ------ -- --- -- --- ---
r--- :----... r--
4-16. Compressibility factors for n-butane. (From Brown et al.')
same volume at the same conditions of pressure and temperature (provided

that the conditions of pressure and temperature are sufficiently close to
atmospheric conditions). It will be recalled that a pound-mole of a substance is a quantity of material having a mass in pounds numerically equal
to the molecular weight of the substance.
On occasion, analyses are reported on a ,~reight basis, and for computational purposes, it is desirable to convert the analysis to a mole basis. An
0.4
-"' l\\ ~ t--- ----- r--::::::
440
0.6
~
~
520
480
0.98
~
,1:ii
"' " ,-....----=:

\ '\.,_' '-.. ....... "~
50,000 DsiO
30,000
'0.0oo
600
700
800
900
1,000
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-18. Density of ethane. (From Brown et aZ.-'')

241
l,100
o.oot
1,200
-----------
50,000
~I\\
,\'""'
-~
0
@-
"'"
="
-~
-~
.' '
-~
--
-%
'
' .......
-"'
""'
--
--
100
--- -
O.t
0.08
0.06
300
400
--;
~
~
-~
0.02
<oJ
0 .002
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,100
0 .OOf
f,200
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-19. Density of propane. (From Brown el al.')
<
"",
<--:'.".
'
_o
_,,,"""%
r---....
-/!:::_
---,t
'
'
I -.....
'
....
~~
-;;:;
10.000
-.....
=I
o.s
50,000 psiQ
\'
----
30,00_0
sooo
i!oo0 -
-~
!'-..._
'OOo
oo
~
60o
--
30
40
30
16.04
30.07
44.09
I.87
J.33
0-68
3.88
48.2
34.3
17.5
100.0
c,
c,
c,
-----
v = v, + v, + v, + ... + v. = .l v,
0.6
1-1
0.4
'
oo
""'
---~
Mole%
Component
For many purposes the physical constants of pure_ hydrocarbons are required. These constants are tabulated in Table 4-4 for the paraffin hydrocarbons through normal heptane.
The equation of state (4-11) can be applied to a mixture of gases by
means of Amagat's law of partial volume. Amagat's law states that the
total volume of a gaseous mixture is equal to the sum of the volumes of
the individual components of the mixture, all at the same temperature and
pressure; i.e.,
0 .004
'
.....,__ ..........._
(4)
(2) + (3)
Moles/100 lb
(2)
0 .Of
0.008
0 .006
20
500
Weight%
(3)
Molecular
weight
(1)
u
0.04
'OO
o
60
so
40
_,
Example 4-2. Converting from a Weight per Cent Analysis to Mole

per Cent for a Hydrocarbon Gas.
0.2
'5
200
ooo
oo
oo
soo
oo
'Oo
---
243
example calculation of the mole analysis of a gas when given the weight
analysis is given in Example 4-2.
0.4
'.ooo
I--.
....._ ,___
.ooo 3 0.ooo
.
'---. ~
~oo
--- t-- r--.. t--/::_ ,..___
11
0.8
0.6
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0 .04
0.02
'50
I
'OO
o
60
so
<o
20
= - - - - - - - - - Temperature, F
Fro. 4-20. Density of n-butane. (From Brown et al.')

242
0 .Of
0 .008
0 .006
.z
QI
~
~
y,V = V;;
where
Yi is the mole fraction of the ith component in the gaseous phase, V is the
volume of the system, and Vi is the partial volume of the ith component.
The application of this principle to calculation of the volume of a gaseous
mixture is given in Example 4-3.
Example 4-3. Gas Volume Calculated Using Partial Volumes. Determination of the volume at 1,000 psia and !04F occupied by 1,000 scf of
gas whose composition is given below:
Gas analysis
Mole fraction
v.,
y;
sci
0.70
0.20
0.10
1.000
700
200
100
0. 004
0. 002
~00
Methane
Etp.ane
Propane
Z at
1,000 psia
and 104F
0.918a
0.274b
0.236'
Pa Tr
--v.
Pr Ta
Vi at
1,000 psia
and 104F
11.13
3.18
1.59
15.90
10.217
0.871
0.375
11.463
0.
"From Fig. 4-13.
From Fig. 4-14.
"From Fig. 4-15.
245
Volume at 1,000 psia and 104F calculated as if the mixture were a perfect
gas is 15.90 cu ft. Actual volume occupied by gas at 1,000 psia and 104F
is 11. 463 cu ft .
11.463
Zmix =
_ = 0.721
15 90
The partial volume method of determining the volumes of a gaseous

mixture is tedious when the analysis is known and cannot be used when
the analysis is unknown. For these reasons generalized compressibility
factors have been determined for methane-rich natural gases and, through
the work of Kay 10 and others, correlated with reduced pressure and
temperature.
The law of corresponding states provides the theoretical basis for cor11
relations utilizing reduced pressures and temperatures. Sage and Lacey
state this law as follows: "The ratio of the value of any intensive property
to the value of that property at the critical state is related to the ratios of
the prevailing absolute temperature and pressure to the critical temperature and pressure by the same function for all similar substances." Thus,
the reduced temperature is the ratio of the prevailing absolute temperature
to the critical temperature and the reduced pressure is the ratio of the prevailing absolute pressure to the critical pressure. Other reduced properties
can be defined in a like manner.
The law of corresponding states can be derived from van der W aals's
equation of state. In expanded form, Eq. (4-9) is
PV' - V'(bP +RT)
,._
b)
(4-9)
which is a cubic equation. A typical

solution of Eq. (4-9) at constant
CritiCol poi'nt
temperature is shown by the dashed
70F isotherm on Fig. 4-21. Within
the two-phase region the equation
indicates a continuous transition of
physical properties from gas to
liquid. This is untrue as shown by
experimental data (solid line on Fig.
4-21). The 90F (critical temperature) isotherm is tangent to the
Specific volume
phase envelope at the critical point. Fla. 4-21. Characteristic isotherms calcuFurthermore, the slope of the curve lated from van der Waal.s's equation of
at that point is zero. The isotherm state for a pure substance.
has an inflection point at the critical point. Mathematically these two situations correspond to zero values
of the first and second derivatives of pressure with respect to volume.
0"" ~
~ 0
a;
~
+ a(V -
,..;
244
246
That is, the change i:Q. pressure with a small change in volume is zero
(aPj-OV),, = 0, and the change in slope with the change in volume i~
zero, (a'P/aV'),, = O.
Solving van der Waals's equation for pressure yields for 1 mole
p =
-v,a + vRT
-b
(4-13)
Then to evaluate a, b, and R at the critical point of the material it be.

'
comes necessary only to obtain the first and second derivatives with respect
to volnme of Eq. (4-13) and set them equal to zero. Therefore,
aP)
(+2a
( av c11 = Vc3
RT,
(Ve - b) 2 cp
By using the values of a, b, and R stated in terms of the critical properties of pressure, volume, and temperature of the gas involved, it is possible
to rewrite van der Waals's equation in the following form:
Reduced volnme
2RT
= -V.' + (V, - b)' "=
RT
Vr=V,
(4-16)
which reduces to
(P, + ;;) (3V, -
Equating the two equations for a and solving for b in terms of Tc, Pc,
Ve, and R,
2 (V, - b)' =
(4-15)
a= V,;' RTc
3 (V, - b)'
V.'
~P.V, T
3 T,
and substituting in Eq. (4-15) for the pressure temperature and volnme,
obtain
also
6a
T
Reduced temperature = T, = T,
RTcVc
a= 2(V, - b)'
(
+ 3P.V.')
(v - 3! V)'
V'
Defining the reduced properties of a material as follows:

p
-P
- Pc
Reduced pressure
T -
a'P)
( aV' ,,
247
Vc4 RT,,.
3 (V, - b)'
V, - b = %V,
b = }iV,
Inserting the value of b obtained in the first equation for a it is found

that a = %RT.V..
No;v, by inserti~g. the values of a and b into van der Waals's original
equa_t1on, at the cr1t1cal point, a value for R in terms of Pc, V c, and Tc is
obtained
= ~P,V,
3 T,
(4-14)
2 v.
(4-17)
=ST,
The above equation contains only reduced values of pressure, volume,

and temperature. Equation (4-17) is commonly referred to as van der
Waals's reduced equation of state. From the above, it is possible to state
that regardless of the gas, as long as it is pure, if the reduced pressures and
ten1peratures are equal, then the reduced volumes must be equal. This
confirms the law of corresponding states as previously stated.
For real gases, the law of corresponding states does not hold over wide
ranges of pressure, but the agreement is close enough to permit the use-_ of
reduced properties as the basis for correlating experimentaJly determined
compressibility factors. The correlation of compressibility factors with
reduced pressure and temperature of selected pure hydrocarbons is shown
in Fig. 4-22.
Kay10 introduced the concept of pseudo-critical and pseudo-reduced
properties for treating mixtures of natural gas. The pseudo-critical properties are obtained by applying Amagat's law of partial volumes for mixtures to the critical properties of the individual constituents of the mixture.
The pseudo-critical pressure and pseudo-critical temperature are defined
mathematically:
from which
a= 3PcVc2
1)
,P.
1-1
yJ'..
and
pTc =
i-1
YiTci
---
248
0.
0.
9~~::: ~)'10_ ~ I'
S CH4_/
C3 Ha
~~0.7
~
tl
0.6
C5 H;{
Tr,
:0
0.4
Q3
0.2
-~
'
properties can be calculated and compressibility factors determined for use

in the generalized equation of state.
Co; H12
C,. Ha;
Tr=1.3 ' - CH41

J
C., H12
Tr,12><
0.91\'Tr1.0 '\
-~
~~
I
'
Tr=1.1
""
r---L
C., H12
C3 Ha
C~4
C5 H12
C3 Ha
Tr - z.o
'8
'-'
,6
1.5.
- '-
1 CH4 C3 Ha
0.8
CH4
C5 Hi
-~
0.7
0.2 0.4 0.6
0.8 1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Reduced pressure,
2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6
2.8 3.0
fJ.
FtG. 4-22. Compressibility factor as a function of reduced pressure for a series of

reduced temperatures. (From Sage and Lacey.11 )
;pc
where
pTc =
Pei
C3 H8
01
0
0
249
Tr=1.5
~~
\Jj \ .\ '
~ 0.5
---------
...
and
Tei
Yi =
n =
pseudo-critical pressure
pseudo-critical temperature
critical pressure and temperature respectively of ith
component
mole fraction of ith component in mixture
number of components
0.6
"""
"l'0.5
Q..
Cl:::
0.4
0.3
The pseudo-reduced properties are defined as the ratio of the property of

the mixture to the pseudo"critical property of the mixture. Thus, the
pseudo-reduced pressure and pseudo-reduced temperature are defined as
0.2
T
,,P, = and
,,P, = ,,P,
,T,
Compressibility factors, experimentally determined, for a large number
of natural gases were correlated with pseudo-reduced pressure and tern
perature. The results of these correlations are presented in Figs. 4-23 tc
4-U. Since most natural gases contain large amounts of methane, the
correlations for natural gases are superior to the correlations het,veen individual hydrocarbons such as previously shown in Fig. +22. The petroleum industry has universally adopted the charts of Figs. +23 to 4-25 to
determine the compressibility factor for use in the equation
PV
ZnRT
(4.-11)
Thus, if any analysis of the gaseous mixture is available, the pseudo-critical
=
0.1
0.5
1.0
Reduced pressure
Pr
1.5
FIG. 4-23. Generalized plot of compressibility factors at low reduced pressures. (From
Brown et al.4 )
The conversion of an analysis on a weight basis to that on a mole b~sis

hown in Example +2. The mole method of calculation can be applied
determination of other proerties of gaseous mixtures. One of the
:a~:e
251
250
Pseudo reduced pressure
r,.-2.0
1.10
f.6
.1
~.?.
'
.6
Z.4
It
2.2
~-P
lo
0.98
'
1.4
0.99
J-.1- .
.L~
r
,:
f.9
f.
1:
.90
0.8
0.97
.f
"'I'-
""'
"-...,
2
~ 0.6
<?~
0.95
-~ 0.5
a.E.
0.94
'',;
'
:c
"'
"
"
;g
<S"
1.6
f.35
...,
'?<90
,J
<4
0.7
0.96
f.45
qo>s
1.5
1!
1.4 ~
E
~~'J
<J'
,g
:c
;;
<..>
cr-
...,
,,
0.4
0.93
1.2
0.3
0.25
0.92
1.f
0.91
0.90
0
1.0
0.01
0.02
0.04
Reduced pressure, P,
0.03
0.05
0.06
0.07
Fra. 4-24. Compressibility factors for gases near atmospheric pressure. (From Brown
et al.')
properties frequently of interest is the average molecular weight. The

average molecular weight Mis defined mathematically as
M ~
j=l
y;M;
(4-18)
12
11
iO
Pseudo reduced pressure
13
14
150.9
FrG. 4-25. Compressibility factors for natural gases. (From Brown et al.')
where Mi is the molecular weight of the ith component and Yi is the mole
fraction of the ith component in the mixture.
The gas gravity can be calculated from the average molecular weight.
By definition, the gas gravity is the ratio of the density of the gas to the
density of air, both densities defined at atmospheric conditions. Since the
252
ideal gas laws hold at atmospheric conditions, the density of a gas is directly
proportional to its molecular weight. Thus
TABLE 4-5. VOLUME OF 1 MOLE OF GAS AT VARIOUS STANDARD CONDITIONS
G=M
M.
M
28.06
(4~
where G is the gas gravity, Ai is the average molecular weight, and 1lla is
the molecular "\veight of air.
Calculations of the average molecular \veight, gas gravity, pseudo-critical
pressure, and pseudo-critical temperature are illustrated in Example 4-4.
Example 4-4. Calculation of Molecular Weight, Gas Gravity, and
Pseudo-critical Properties for Hydrocarbon Gas.
(I)
Component
c,
c,
c,
(2)
Molecular
weight
(3)
Mole
fraction
(4)
(5)
/',
T.
16.04
30.07
44.09
0.70
0.20
0.10
673
343
550
666
708
617
(2) x (3)
(3) x (4) (3) x (5)
11.23
6.01
471.1
4.41
61.7
674.4
21.65
141.6
240.1
110.0
66.6
416.7
Molecular weight of mixture = 21.65

Pseudo-critical pressure = 674.4 psia
Pseudo-critical temperature = 416.7F
Gas gravity = 21.65/28.96, or 0.749
A useful constant in gas calculations is the volume occupied by 1 mole
of gas at standard conditions. Standard conditions are specified conditions
of pressure and temperature at which gas volumes are reported. Standard
conditions are defined, in part, by usage and, in some oil-producing states,
by statute. The values of pressure and temperature chosen are approxi, mately average atmospheric conditions. In scientific work, the standard
temperature is frequently taken as 20F (68F) and the standard pressure
as 14.696 psia. In the petroleum industry 60F is the standard temperature. The standard pressure varies from state to state. For example, it is
14.65 psia in Texas and 15.025 psia in Louisiana. The volume of 1 mole of
gas for various standard conditions can be calculated from V = RT/P,
assuming a perfect gas. Volumes for 1 mole of gas for several commonly
used standard conditions are given in Table 4-5.
It is frequently necessary in engineering calculations to compute the
density or volume of a gas at elevated pressures and temperatures. Various
methods for calculating these and other parameters are illustrated in Example 4-5. The treatment of the material as a perfect gas (method 1) is
Temp, F
Pressure,
68 c2ocJ
60
60
60
60
14.696
14.65
psi a
15.025
14.4
14.7
253
Volume of
1 mole, cu ft
385.51.
380.69
371.35
387.47
379.56
included to emphasjze the deviation of real gases from the perfect gas law.
The volume of gas at 1,000 psia and 104F as calculated from the perfect
gas law is in error by more than 20 per cent.
Method 2, treatment of the gas using additive volumes and compressibility factors of individual components, v.ras illustrated in a slightly different form in Example 4-1.
Method 3, treatment of the gas using additive volu1ne~ and densities of
the individual components, is simply a variation of method 2, as the density
curves were plotted from the same data from \vhich the compressibility
curves were plotted. The values obtained in Example 4-5 from these two
methods are in very close agreement, certainly \Vithin the accuracJ of reading the charts.
Both methods 2 and 3 are limited in applicability by the lack of data on
heavier hydrocarbons which have t'INo-phase regions extending across temperatures of interest in oil-field applications.
The use of the pseudo-reduced concepts and the compressibility-factor
chart for natural gases is illustrated in method 4 of Example 4-5. The
values obtained differ about 10 per cent from the values from methods
2 and 3. The difference can be attributed largely to the composition of
the gas selected. The generalized charts include data from gases having
heavier components and higher concentration of methane present. Therefore, method 4 is more applicable to gases having more methane and a
greater variation in other hydrocarbons than the gas in the example.
Example 4-5. Methods of Calculating Volume Relations for Mixtures
of Real Hydrocarbon Gases. Calculation of specific volume, density, compressibility factor, and the volume occupied at 1,000 psia and I04F for
1,000 cu ft at 14.65 psia and 60F of a gas having the composition given
in Example 4-3:
l. Treated as a perfect gas having an av mo! wt M = 21.65 (from Example 4-4).
a. Compressibility factor of the mixture Z = 1.000 (definition of perfect gas)
---
--------
254
.
RT
10.72(564)
b. Specific volume v = MP = 2 1.65 (!,000) = 0.2795 cu ft/lb
.
c. Density P
MP
21.65(1,000) _ _
I__
lb/ f
= RT = 10.72(564) - 0.2795 - 3 578 cu t
d. Volume of 1,000 scf at 1,000 psia and 104F (V)
V - P,T V = 14.65(564) (1 000) = 1 89

ft
- PT, '
1,000(520) '
" cu
2. Treated as a real gas using additive volumes and compressibility factors
of individual components from Figs. 4-13 to 4-15.
a. Compressibility factor of the mixture (Z),
Z = Z1(Y1) + Z,(y2) + Z,y,

= 0.918(0.7) + 0.274(0.2) + 0.236(0.1)
= 0.721
ZRT 0.721(10.72)(564)
b. Specific volume v = MP
= 0.2015 cu ft/lb
2 1.65 (!,000)
.
c. Density
21.65(1,000)
I
4 963 lb/ ft
vI MP
ZRT = 0.721(10.72)(564) = 0.2015 = .
cu
=WU
where w is the weight of the gas.
w =M
~: =
21.65
1g:
3. Treated as a real gas using additive volumes and densities determined

from Figs. 4-17 to 4-19.
a. Compressibility factor (not directly determined)
b. Specific volume v
p1
= <~i
.f',
= 674.4
Therefore
0.046 gm/cc = 2.916 lb/cu ft

Pol= 0.300 gm/cc = 19.020 lb/cu ft
pa = 0.490 gm/cc = 31.066 lb/cu ft
c. Density
16.04(0.7)
2.916
V=
;i3 ~;
i-1
+ 30.07(0.2) + 44.09(0.1)
19.020
21.65
31.066
= 0.1990 cu ft/lb
M
M,y,/p;
,T,
and
= 416.7 (from Example 4-4)
I,000
674.4
564
.f', = .f', =
= L 4S3
,T, = ,T, = 416.7 = 1.353

Therefore from Fig. 4-25
= 0.798
= ZRT 0.798(10.72)(564) = O 2231

ft/lb
b. Speeificvoumev
I
"P
(
)
.
cu
""'
21.65 1,000
.
c. Density
MP
= ZRT =
1
v1 = 0.2231
= 4.48 lb/cu ft

P,TZ
14.65(564)(0.798)
= PT,Z, V, = 1,000(520) (1.000) (1,000) = 12.68 cu ft
Therefore
= 11.30 cu ft
!. Treated as a real gas using pseudo-reduced properties and Fig. 4-25.

a. Compressibility factor (Z)
M,y,/p,
= 56.9 lb
v = 56.9(0.1990)
Therefore
where V m is the molal volume.
P,TZ V _ 14.65(564)(0.721) I OOO = 11 46 cu ft

PT,Z, ' - 1,000(520) (1.000) '
.
255
~ = O.l~90 =
5.03 lb/cu ft
The composition of natural gases is usually reported through the heptanes-plus fraction. The heptanes-plus fraction as obtained from a fractional distillation is a liquid residue which contains heptanes and heavier
hydrocarbons. In the laboratory analysis 1 two properties, molecular weight
and specific gravity, of the heptanes plus are determined. These properties
have been correlated with pseudo-critical pressure and temperature of the
heptanes-plus fraction. The results of these correlations are presented in
Figs. 4-26 and 4-27, which differ only in that the specific gravity is used in
in Fig. 4-26 and API gravity is used in Fig. 4-27. These correlations, together with the physical constants from Table 4-4, enable the engineer to
calculate pseudo-reduced properties of natural gases for which conventional analyses are available.
In many instances analyses are not-available. Therefore, correlations
with gas gravity of pseudo-critical properties of natural gases have been
2~6
developed. These correlations are presented in Figs. 4-28 to 4-30. The

data in Figs. 4-28 and 4-29 are for gases from particular fields. These
figures are included to illustrate the fit of the data points to the correlations.
Figure 4-30 presents generalized correlations which include data from both
of the previously mentioned figures as well as additional data. The miscellaneous gas curvea cover all natural gases other than those having large
concentrations of intermediates (propane, butane, and pentane). The con-
,,P, (from miscellaneous gases, Fig. 4-30)

,,P, (from Example 4-4) = 674.4
(from miscellaneous gases, Fig. 4-30) = 405F

,T, (from Example 4-4) = 416.7R
The difference is about 1.5 per cent. A gas having a wider range of composition would yield a closer check if the appropriate curves are selected.
1,400
Sp.qr.
1,300
a.95
o.9o
o.B5
-1"
8 1,200
:c
u
!
-1"
'g f,fOO
-1,100
o.70
0..
if
i,000
1,000
0..
~ 400
8
0
0..
,;
"'s
Q&o
Q>o
600
Q.9s
Q..90
500
,...
1,200
o.75
1,300
c:
a.BO
= 665 psia
,T,
1,400
g::
c:
257
500
0..
Qrs
300
;=
400
0..
200
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
300
if
Molecular weight
F10. 4-26. Pseudo-critical properties of hydrocarbon liquids. (From Matthews et al.12 )
densate well fluid curves should be used for gases having large fractions of
intermediates.
The gas gravity can be readily determined in the field by the Ac-Me
balance method or similar techniques. Thus compressibility data can be
obtained even though a gas analysis is not available. The accuracy of the
correlations of reduced properties v.ith gas gravity can be ascertained by
comparing the pseudo-critical pressure and temperature calculated in
Example 4-4 with those determined from Fig. 4-30. The gas gravity (from
Example 4-4) is 0.75. The pseudo-critical pressure and pseudo-critical
temperature are
200
100
160
Molecular weight
Fra. 4-27. Pseudo-critical properties of hydrocarbon liquids. (From Matthews et al.12 )
The petroleum engineer is primarily interested in volume calculations

for gaseous mixtures. The volume of reservoir space occupied by n unit
volume of gas at standard conditions is defined as the gas-formation volume factor B 0 The gas-formation volume factor has the units of volume
per volume and, therefore, is dimensionless. In equation form,
B _ZRT
o- V,..P
(4-20)
-------------------258
----------
PETROLE'C'M RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
FUNDAME..~TALS
700
675
:e
-" 650
11"
,e
Q_
g
:
0
,'
o
~
Q_
-~ 625
-"'
~
o'b"
,;
00 5 .00~
450
?-e es'
Q_
425
;;;
../
"'
700
.''.?
e
5
0'
If a reservoir contains a dry or '\vet gas, the composition of the gas in

the reservoir will remain constant over the producing life of the reservoir.
600
Q_
sorb''
v;;\ob~e
i(\~
i.\v{ob"'/
sid
400
,; 375
Q_
350
0 0
Q_
=~
0
.g.
, 550
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.8
if
Gos gravity
500
Fra. 4-28. Pseudo-critical properties of Grapeland gases. (From Brown et al.4 )
11"
~
675
"'
. .
-
650
625
Q_
575
Q_
550
.
~
475
' g 450
+:
.g
~ ~ 425
Q_
.,
0
350
325
0.5
~.
4-30. Pseudo-critical properties of natural gases. (From Brown et
""'
B, = C
0.7
0.8
al.~)
During the depletion history the reservoir pressure ordinarily will decline.
As the reservoir temperature is constant, Bg can be defined as a function
of pressure. 1~hus, for a particular gas reservoir and a particular set of
standard conditions,
>
0.6
0.7
Gos gravity (air=1)
FIG.
400
" 375
Q_
0.6
I/
~ 500
~ ~
350
~ 525
400
450
:2
600
700
650
:l
e
""
325
0.5
C"
2.'\9
where Z = compressibility factor

R = universal gas constant
T = reservoir temperature, F
P = reservoir pressure, psia
V m = molal volume as defined for the particular set of standard
conditions desired
OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
0.9
1.0
1.f
1.2
Gos gravity
Fro. 4-29. Pseudo-critical properties of Oklahoma City gases. (From Brown et al,')
(~)
where C
RT
=--
The calculation of Ba for a particular gas reservoir is illustrated in Example 4-6.
---
-------~---------------
260
261
Example 4-6. Calculation of Gas-formation Volume Factor from Gas

Analysis. A reservoir having an initial pressure of 3,500 psia and a temperature of 140F contains a dry gas having the composition listed below.
The gas-formation volume factor Bg iS' desired as a function of pressure.
as nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide. Hydrocarbon gase:i are

classified as "sweet 11 or "sour" depending on the hydrogen sulfide content.
Both S\Veet and sour gases may contain nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or both.
In local areas, natural gases contain small percentages of rnre gases such
as helium .
The common occurrence of small percentages of nitrogen and carbon
dioxide is in part considered in the correlations previously cited, as many
of the natural-gas mixtures used in developing the data contained small
percentages of these materials. To facilitate the handling of these impurities, their critical constants a.re presented in Table 4-6.
...
(1)
Component
Mole
fraction
Methane
0.8686
0.0609
0_0261
0.0048
0.0077
0.0031
0.0022
0.0038
0_0228
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes
Heptanes plus
(2)
Critical
temp,
OR
(3)
Critical
pressure,
psi a
343
550
666
733
765
830
847
914
11I8a
673
708
617
530
551
482
485
434
415
(1) X (2)
pTc
297_93
33.50
17_38
3.52
5-89
2.57
1.86
3.47
25.49
391.61
(1)
(3)
584.57
43.12
16.10
2.54
4.24
1.49
1.07
1.65
9.46
,P, = 664.24
'"' From Fig. 4-26 and properties of heptanes-plus fraction.
Mc,.= 128
SGc.,.
0.8195
T = 600R
B, = C !!_
p
Pressure,
psi a
100
400
700
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
3,500
60U
,T, = 39 1.ul = 1.5321

C = RT = 10.72(600)
16.895
Vm
380.69
pl'r
0.151
0.602
L054
L505
2.258
3_011
3.7G4
4.516
0.985
0.950
0_918
0-885
0.823
0.795
0.790
0.805
0-8!15
5.25B
z
p
0.009850
0.002375
0-001314
0-000885
0.000549
0.000:~98
0.000316
0_000268
0.000239
B,
0.166415
0-040125
0.022200
0-014952
0.009275
0.006724
0-005339
0.004528
0.004038
Impurities in Natural Gas

Mixtures of hydrocarbons were considered in the preceding discussions.
Natural gases frequently contain materials other than hydrocarbons such
TABLE 4-6. CRITICAL CONSTANTS FOR COMMON NoNHYDROCARBON

CONSTITUENTS OF NATURAL GASES
Compound
Carbon dioxide
Helium
Hydrogen sulfide
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Water
Formula
co,
He
H,S
0,
N,
H,O
1vlolecular
weight
Critical
temp, H.
Critical
pressure,
psi a
44.01
4_00
34.08
32.00
28-02
18.016
548
9.4
673
278
227
1165
1,073
33
1,306
731
492
3,206
Nitrogen. Eilerts and coworkers 13 investigated the effect of nitrogen

content on the volumetric behavior of natural gases. They state that the
compressibility factor of nitrogen-natural-hydrocarbon mixtures determined by assuming the validity of the la1v of corresponding states has an
error of less than I per cent if the nitrogen concentration is 10 mole 3 or
less. If the gas contains 20 mole 3 or more, the error in compressibility
factor (assuming corresponding states) may be greater than 3 per cent.
Standing3 states that for carbon dioxide concentrations of 2 mole 3 or
less, the law of corresponding states yields satisfactory results. Olds,
Sage, and Lacey14 indicated that errors in compressibility factors as great
as 5 per cent can be obtained from application of the theorem of corresponding states at carbon dioxide concentrations of 4 mole o/0
Eilerts and coworkersu proposed a procedure for calculating the effect
of nitrogen on the compressibility factor. They defined an additive compressibility factor
as follows:
Z. = Z.y. + (1 - y.)Z,
(4-21)
where
is the compressibility factor of the nitrogen (Fig. 4-31),
is the
mole fraction of nitrogen in the mixture, and Z 9 is the compressibility factor of the hydrocarbon fraction of the mixture (Fig. 4-25). The true compressibility factor Z of the mixture is then defined by
z.
z.
y.
------.
----- ----------- - - - - - - - -
FU:N"DA:\!ENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
TABl.E 4-7. ADDlTlVE \TOJ.UME CORRECTION F.'1..CTORS FOR GA.SES
0
0
0
'
CoNTAI:\'IN"G
'"'
f----l----t--t--
"'
Pressure,
psi a
0
0
0
,,,
,,,-
I
--1--
"
0
0
<
"'
0
0
"'-
"
i
i
0
~
,,,
"'
0
.;;;
.;
'{:
;}
0
0
,,,
;;}
0
0
Q
0
0
0
0
8
$
~=.---s~----!---'~c
d
262
a
,,,
ri ~ .
a: "
0
0
0
i-1-"'
"
""'
~
0
0
N ITIWGEN
Properties of mixture ~ontaining 7.907 mole % (11.350 mass %)

added nitrogen
Additive volume correction fac'tors C at indicated temperature, F
,,,0
263
5,00Q
4,750
4,500
4,250
4,00U
3,750
100
130
160
190
1.0010
1.0011
1.0046
1.0047
1.0049
1.0010
1.0055
1.00:18
I.0048
I.0050
1.0014
1.0016
1.0053
1.0063
I.0054
1.0059
1.0061
I.0068
1.0034
1.0048
1.0053
1.0059
1.0062
70
1.0056
1.0032
1.007:~
1.0076
1.0060
1.0066
;~,500
1.0056
1.008-1
l.OOS:l
1.0078
3,250
3,000
2,800
2,600
2,400
2,200
2,000
1,800
1,600
1,400
14.4
1.0073
1.0101
1.0094
1.0083
l.OOD:J
l.0115
l.0101)
1.0101
1.0085
l.0118
I.OJ 22
1.0124
1.0l31
1.0128
1.0110
l.0108
l.0103
1.0087
1.0101
J.009:l
l.0079
l.0064
I.0000
l.0086
l.0086
l.0086
l.0086
J.0085
1.0079
1.0069
1.0056
1.0000
1.0124
1.014:)
1.0165
1.0162
LO 168
1.0150
l.0116
l.0000
l.01;~5
1.0108
1.0096
1.0000
1.0065
1.0070
1.0070
1.0074
1.0073
1.0076
1.0080
1.0081
1.0081
1.0073
1.0062
1.0047
l.0000
220
250
280
1.0037
I.0044
I.0044
I.0049
1.0034
1.0035
1.0038
1.0040
1.0043
1.0047
1.0049
1.0048
1.0050
l.0050
1.0054
l.0056
l.0055
1.0055
1.0050
1.0038
1.0019
1.0000
1.0046
1.005:3
1.0053
1.0053
1.0057
l.0059
1.0054
I.0058
l.0055
1.0057
1.0054
1.0061
1.0064
1.0065
1.0066
1.0066
1.0068
1.0064
1.0053
1.0038
l.0000
1.0051
1.0054
1.0055
1.0055
1.0055
1.0052
1.0049
J.0040
1.0027
1.0000
1.0052
~
-"
"iip
% (25.013 mass %)
added nitrogen
Additive volume c-orrect.ion factors C at indicated temperature, F
Properties of mixture containing 18.280 mole
0.
"I
'2
"'
5,000
4,750
4,500
4,250
4,000
3,750
3,500
3,250
3,000
2,800
2,600
2,400
2,200
2,000
1,800
1,600
1,400
14.4
1.0035
1.0048
1.0055
1.0065
1.0076
1.0103
l.0136
1.0173
1.0201
1.0236
1.0264
1.0288
I.0314
1.0319
1.0322
l.0284
1.0235
1.0000
1.0079
1.0079
1.0090
l.0106
1.0120
1.0137
l.0158
l.0182
l.0204
1.0222
1.0233
1.0240
1.0248
1.0250
1.0239
1.0199
1.0172
1.0000
!.0088
!.0101
1.0107
L0ll6
l.Ol:l4
1.0149
I.0161
1.0176
J.0190
J.0201
1.0199
1.0199
1.0202
1.0195
1.0177
1.0157
1.0134
1.0000
1.0086
1.0095
1.0104
1.0115
1.01:27
1.0135
1.0146
1.0159
l.0163
1.0166
1.0173
1.0175
1.0170
1.0160
1.0147
1.0134
1.0109
LOOOO
l.0089
1.0096
1.0104
1.0111
1.0122
1.0132
l.0139
1.0142
1.0146
1.0147
1.0152
1.0153
1.0147
l.0140
1.0132
1.0117
1.0094
1.0000
1.0093
1.0098
1.0106
l.0111
1.0116
1.0121
1.0123
1.0125
1.0129
1.0134
l.0131
1.0125
1.0117
1.0115
1.0108
1.0092
1.0092
1.0095
J.0103
1.0107
1.0112
J.0115
1.0113
J.0113
1.0113
J.0114
J.0111
I.0107
1.0102
1.0098
J.0091
1.0076
1.0071
1.0071
1.0075
1.0079
1.0088
1.0092
1.0096
J.0094
1.0096
1.0092
1.0092
1.0093
1.0090
1.0087
l.0079
1.0000
I.0000
1.0000
-~------~--
264
----
z = cz.
FUNDA~!ENTALS
___/
(4-22)
where C is a correction factor depending on the concentration of nitrogen

the temperature, and the pressure.
'
The additive volume correction factor C ranges from I.00 to 1.04 for
te'."peratures and pressures ranging from 70 to 280F and 14.4 to 5,000
ps1a, resp~ct1vely. Values of C as a function of pressure and temperature
for t'vo different concentrations of nitrogen are tabulated in Table 4-7
Inspection of the data indicates that a maximum value of C occurs over~
small pressure range for each of the temperatures tabulated. These maxiTABLE
4-8.
MAXIMUM ADDITIVE VOLUME CORRECTION FACTORS13
18,280 mole
nitrogen
Temp, F
70
100
130
160
190
220
250
280
Occurs at
pressure,
psia
Value of
1,800
2,000
2,200
2,400
2,400
2,800
3,750
3,500
7,907 mole%
nitrogen
Occurs at
pressure, psia
Value of
1.0322
1.0250
1.0202
1.0175
1.0153
1.0134
1.0115
1.0096
2,200
1,800
2,800
2,200-2,800
2,000-2,200
2,000
2,200-2,600
2,400
1.0165
1.0135
1.0110
1.0086
1.0081
1.0068
1.0055
1.0056
mums ar~ i~~icative of the error associated with using the additive volume
compress1b1hty factor Za \vithout correction. The maximum value of C
and the pressure at \vhich that
3
maximum occurs are tabulated in
Table 4-8 as a function of tempera1.02
ture. In general, less than 2 per
"-,
c
cent error in the additive compressI'1.0
ibility factor is possible at temper\
atures in excess of 130F.
\
too
The effect of composition on the
0
100
N i~~ogen ~~ mixt~~. mol~o %
additive volume correction factor
is illustrated in Fig. 4-32. Using
F1G. 4-32. Variation of additive volumeEilerts's data and procedure, four
correction factor at a constant pressure
and temperature due to nitrogen concen- points are known for the value of
tration. (Aftrr Eilerts et al.13 )
C, at a constant temperature and
pressure, as a function of the nitrogen concentration. By definition of the correction factor, C must be
1.0000 at 0 and 100 mole 3 nitrogen in the mixture. Values of C are
,/
-~
OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
265
available from Table ~-7 for 7.907 and 18.280 mole 3 nitrogen. The
curve of li'ig. +32 \Yil.8 constructed from this type of information. 1~he
dashed portion represents the extrapolation necessary. The maximum
was estimated from a similar curve presented by Eilerts 1s \Vhich included
data up to 56 mole 3 nitrogen. The maximum of that curve occurred
at about 46 mole 3 nitrogen.
The computation of the compressibility factor by Eilert8' method and
by the la\Y of corresponding states is presented in Example 4-7 for a natural
gas containing 10 mole 3 nitrogen. The Z factors compare as follo\vs:
Z (Eilerts's method) = 0.892
Z (corresponding states) = 0.885
Difference = 0. 77 per cent
Example 4-7. Calculation of the Compressibility Factor for a Natural

Gas Containing Nitrogen.
1. Eilerts' method
T
(,T,),
620
3,000
= (,T,), = 367.2.5 = I.59 ; (,,!',), = (,Po). = 670.61 = 4 .47
Z, = 0.86 (from Fig. 4-25)

= 1.0855 (from Fig. 4-31)
z. = y.Z. + (1 - y.)Z, = 0.10000(1.0855)
= 0.10855 + 0. 77400 = 0.88255
z.
+ 0.90000(0.86)
Additive volume-correction factor (from Fig. 4-32)
c = 1.0104
z = cz. =
1.0104(0.88255) = 0.89173
2. Treating by corresponding states

T
620
(,T,)mix = (,T,)m;, = 353.22
(,J',)mfa
= ( Pp) _ = 6 : 20074 = (Z)mix = 0.885 (from Fig. 4-25)

ptmIX
<).
Eilerts calculated a compressibility factor of 0.885 for the same gas composition reported in Example 4-7. The difference in the Z factor ca.1culated
by Eilerts and that obtained in Example 4-7 resulted from slightly different critical properties and reading of the gas-compressibility-factor curve.
It then becomes apparent that if the engineer exercises due care, he can
have about a I per cent error regardless of the calculation method used.
Carbon Dioxide, The effect of carbon dioxide on compressibility factors
of hydrocarbon mixtures has not been so extensively investigated as has
that of nitrogen. Sage and Lacey15 " have presented data on the binary
-~~~~--------
------------
--
---
267
systems methane-carbon dioxide and ethane-carbon dioxide. They suggested that a computation procedure based on partial residual volumes
utilizing their basic data be used to correct volume calculations for impurities. The partial residual volume method is not presented in this text1
but a carbon dioxide compressibility-factor chart developed from the data
of Sage and Lacey is presented in Fig. 4-33. This chart can be used to cal1.2
I I
I
I
1.0
....
l*i
-
...
~"i'.'=!~':'1.0.00.~~
"<t'~c-:i~_C'-:JC\10
C'l
- '="' ro
~-
280-F
226F
0.6
"~
~
I I
'40F
0 0.8
t;
~1...,,--oou:i'c<:i
~r::
F
F
I l
160"F .......
too
0;4
"
0.2
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000 5,000 6,000

Pressure, psia
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
F1a. 4-33. Compressibility factor for carbon dioxide. (From Olr.k et al.u)
oc:.~~1C'1000C'10
O'TO-Oc::Nu:iooo...,..
Otr.OOQ"'1<"'f<IN-.-c-:i
o-v-000000
oc.:00000000
0000000000
culate, by the method of additive volumes, the compressibility factor for

gases containing carbon dioxide. The additive volume compressibility
factor is defined as follows:
z. =
Yco,(Zco..)
+ (1
- Yeo,) (Z,)
(4-21)
where Yeo,. = mole fraction of C02 in mixture

Zco, = compressibility factor of pure C02 (from Fig. 4-33)
Zg = compressibility factor of hydrocarbon fraction
This definition is analogous to that used when nitrogen was the impurity.
The compressibility factors for a gas containing 2.36 mole % carbon
dioxide and having a hydrocarbon distribution equivalent to the gas of
Zxample 4-6 are calculated by two methods in Example 4-8.
Example 4-8. Calculation of the Compressibility Factor for a Natural
f}as Containing Carbon Dioxide.
266
----
268
----- - - -
----
Component
(I)
Mole
fraction
Yi
0.0236
0.8481
0.0595
0.0255
0.0047
0.0075
0.0030
0.0021
0.0037
0.0223
Carbon dioxide
Methane
Ethane
Propane
!sobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes
Heptanes plus
(2)
(3)
T,,, 0 R
Pc, psia
548
343
550
666
733
765
830
847
914
1073
673
708
617
530
551
482
485
434
415"
1118
(4)-/
y,Tc
(I) X (2)
TABLE 4-9. COMPARISON OF OBSERVED AND CALCULATED COMPRESSIBILITY
(5)
FACTORS FOR GAS CONTAINING CARBON DIOXIDE
Yipe
(I) X (3)
12.93
290.90
32.73
16.98
3.45
5.74
2.49
1.78
3.38
24.93
pTc = 395.31
25.32
,P,
570.77
42.13
15.73
2.49
4.13
1.45
1.02
1.61
9.25
673.90
Calculated compressibility factors

Temp,
OF
Method 1. Corresponding states

M C7+ = 128
T = 600R
SGC7+ = .8195
P = 3,000 psia
= ,T, =
600
395.31
1.52
Z = 0.795 (from Fig. 4-25)

Method 2. Additive volumes (The gas of Example 4-6 is the hydrocarbon
fraction of the gas used in this example.)
Therefore
Z,
Z
0.805
+ (1 - Yeo.) (Z,) =
+ 0.786 = 0.797
Yco.(Zco,)
0.011
0.0236(0.453*)
(0.9764) (0.805)
The validity of the two methods presented in Example 4-8 are compared
in Table 4-9 with observed data and with results from the residual volume
method of ca!culation. All three methods of computation yield values
which are about 2 per cent below observed data. As the accuracy of the
three methods is comparable, the method of corresponding states is preferred because of its simplicity of application. If this method is applied
with care, the ratios of observed Z to calculated Z reported in Table 4-9
can be used to adjust calculated values of Z for greater accuracy. For
gases containing more than 4 mole % carbon dioxide, the deviations computed from observed values may be greater than indicated in this comparison. Laboratory tests should be made on such materials if accuracy greater
than about 4 per cent is required.
From Fig. 4-33.
Zco2
Observed,a
Method of
residual vol"
'
Method of
corresponding
states
Additive
vol method
z;z,
z,
Z/Z,
z,
Z/Z,
100
500
1,000
2,000
3,000
0.841
0.580
0.299
0.411
0.928
0.860
0.775
0.787
0.916
0.844
0.753
0.758
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
0.915
0.847
0.750
0.760
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
0.919
Q.842
0.747
Q.763
1.01
1.02
1.04
1.03
160
500
1,000
2,000
3,000
0.889
0.759
0.479
0.479
0.951
0.908
0.856
0.860
0.941
0.893
0.836
0.836
1.01
1.02
1.02
1.03
0.945
0.895
0.830
0.830
1.01
I.QI
103
l.04
0.944
0.894
0.830
0.830
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
500
1,000
2,000
3,000
0.921
0.838
0.684
0.607
0.967
0.940
0.910
0.916
0.957
0.926
0.889
0.882
LOI
1.02
1.02
1.04
0.962
0.928
0.888
0.885
LOI
LOI
1.02
1.04
0.962
0.929
0.886
0.886
1.01
LOI
1.03
1.03
220
p
- .._ - 3,000 - 4 4"
,,,_ - ,P. - 673.90 - . "
Pressure,
psia
z,
" From Fig. 4-26.
,T.
269
FUNDAME...""{TALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
Gas analysis from which the above data were obtained

Component
Mole fraction"
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes plusr.
Carbon dioxide
0.83845
0.06366
0.03744
0.00390
0.00951
0.00160
0.00110
0.00230
0.04204
"Reported by Sage .and Lacey.1"

b Estimated mole wt, 95, and estimated SG, 0.68.
If both carbon dioxide and nitrogen are present in small concentration,

the method of corresponding states applied to the whole mixture of gases
will yield satisfactory results. For low concentrations of carbon dioxide and
moderate concentrations of nitrogen, Eilerts's 13 method is recommended.
The carbon dioxide can be treated in the method of corresponding states
along with nitrogen and the hydrocarbon gas. The final correction of the
----------
1
270
Z. = Zco,(Yco,)
z = c.z.
+ Z.(y,) + (1
- Yeo. - y,)Z,
(4-23)
Hydrogen Sulfide. Hydrogen sulfide is another impurity frequently

present in natural gas. A hydrocarbon gas is termed a sour gas if it contains
1 grain of H2S per 100 cu ft. Sour gases are corrosive and, if H~ is in sufficient concentration, toxic. The hydrogen sulfide concentration must be
reduced to specified limits prior to sales to transmission lines. The removal
of H,S can yield valuable by-products in the form of sulfur and sulfuric
acid.
Few data are available on the effect of hydrogen sulfide on the compressibility factor of natural-gas mixtures. For small concentrations the critical
constants for hydrogen sulfide can be used in the calculation of the pseudocritical properties of the mixture. Figure 4-25 can then be used in the normal manner. Insufficient data are available to determine a method for
calculating compressibility factors for mixtures containing substantial
amounts of hydrogen sulfide. In such instances Z factors should be determined by laboratory tests. For low concentrations, the additive volume
method can be used in the same manner as when nitrogen and carbon dioxide were present. Compressibility factors for H2S are presented in
Fig. 4-34.
1 1 1
1,2 ,....,-.-.~
,~,-r~-.-~~~~~~-r~-.-~~~~~T,~rr~
,T~
,~I
271
additive of compressibility factor can be made as if c~n dioxide were a

part of the hydrocarbon system; thus C corrects for nitrogen only.
Water Vapor. Water vapor, not ordinarily reported in a routine gas

analysis, is a common impurity in natural gas. Gas samples are ordinarily
dried before analysis; therefore, the water content of the gas is not determined.
Water has the highest critical temperature and pressure of any of the
constituents commonly found in natural gases. The critical temperature
of water is 1165R or 705F, which is much higher than the temperatures
reported from wells drilled to 20,000 ft or more. Reservoir pressures are
well in excess of the saturation pressure of water at prevailing reservoir
temperatures.
The water content of natural gases can be estimated from the vapor
pressure of water (see Table 4-10) at the prevailing temperature.
Dalton's law of partial pressures states that the total pressure of a confined mixture of gas is equal to the sum of the partial pressures of the individual constituents each taken alone in the same volume. Expressed
mathematically,
m
p =
(4-24)
where P is the pressure of the mixture and Pi is the partial pressure of the
ith constituent.
It follows from this statement that the volume fraction of a constituent
in the vapor phase is given by
P,
y, = p
P,
i=l
(4-25)
~~40i-1-1'-+-+-i-l-+-l-+-+--l-l-+--l-l-l-+-l-l-+-l-l--+--l-+-+--l-L40F-
1.0
~.[~
""
-:;
71- 1..too~;
t00k
~
{-t-'H;-++-f-++-e++-1-++-+-1-++-1--Jf60F
,. 3,/0!
,,,,280~F :
f-
Q8
,g
~
"
'"
'
,2~/JF
?20L 1.-34d f-
16 F
'
220F
Cl6
!;,
E
0
<.>
where Yi is the volume (or mole) fraction of the constituent in the vapor
phase.
The partial pressure of water in the vapor phase is its vapor pressure at
the prevailing temperature. Thus
(4-26)
The laboratory analysis can be corrected for water content as follows:
0.4
(4-27)
Cl2
0~~'-L..C..LL-ULL-L-LLL-'_l_.Ll..J_l...J._J_LL_LJ_l__LJ_LLJ_L.LL_Ll...J._j_J
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000 5,000 6.000

Pressure, psia
7,000
8,000
9POO 10,000
F1a. 4-34. Compressibility factor for hydrogen sulfide. (From H. H. Reamer, B. H.

Sage, and W. N. Lacey, "Volumetric Behavior of Hydrogen Sulfide," Ind. Eng. Chem.,
vol. 42, no. 1, p. 140, January, 1950.)
'vhere (yi)c is the corrected mole fraction of any constituent other than
water and (y,)L is the mole fraction of that constituent from the laboratory analysis.
The water content of a gas is usually expressed. in pounds of water per
million standard cubic feet of hydrocarbon gas. This can be calculated
from the mole fraction of water in the corrected analysis.
The weight of water per mole of the mixture is given by
Yw(Mw)
----~-------
272
-~-------
------
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGI:N"EERING
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROc.ABBON FLUIDS
TABLE 4-10. VAPOR PREssURE FOR WA~
Temperature,
which on reducing constant terms yields
w.. =
Pressure,
OF
p8ia
60
70
80
90
100
0.2561
0.3628
0.5067
0.6980
0.9487
110
120
130
140
150
1.274
1.692
2.221
2.887
3.716
160
170
180
190
200
4.739
5.990
7.510
9.336
11.525
210
220
230
240
250
14.123
17.188
20.78
24.97
29.82
260
270
280
290
300
35.43
41.85
49.20
57.55
67.01
Example 4-9. Correction of Gas Analysis for Water Vapor and Calculation of Water Content of Gas.
Components
c,
c,
c,
c.
c,
y~,
W ho
PvwM wl06
=
(P - P )380.69
Gas analysis
from laboratory,
mole fraction
Analysis corrected
for water vapor,
mole fraction
0.85
0.o7
0.04
0.03
0.01
0.8488
0.0699
0.0399
0.0300
0.0100
0.0014
1.0000
H,O
1.000
Determination of mole fraction of water in vapor phase when gas is watersaturated at a reservoir temperature of 140F and a reservoir pressure of
2,000 psia:
2 887
Yw = ~
p = 2 000* = 0 .0014435
'
Water content at 140F and 2,000 psia, in pounds per MMcf.
The number of pound moles of gas per million standard cubic feet (MMscf)
at 14.65 psia and 60F is
106 scf
380.69
or substituting for
(4-29)
A sample calculation of a corrected analysis and the water content of a

gas is presented in Example 4-9.
1 - Yw
.)IO'
W ho -- (1 y.(M
- Yw)380.69
P,.(4.73 X IO')
P - Pvw
where M w is the molecular weight of water. The weight of water per mole
of hydrocarbon gas is, then,
Yw(Mw)
Therefore the pounds of water per MMscf of hydrocarbon gas
273
Who
is
( 28)
4-
= P,.(4.73 X IO') = 2.89(4.73 X IO') = 13,6697 =

ho
P - P,w
2,000 - 2.89
1997.11
68 45 lb/MMSCf
A number of investigators found that at higher pressures and temperatures, the simple relations presented above yielded low water contents.
This m~,y be expected, as in the theory presented no provision was made
for the attraction of the hydrocarbon molecules for the water molecules.
McCarthy, Boyd, and Reid" summarized the available data in charts
which are presented in Figs. 4-35 and 4-36.
The water content in pounds per MMscf can be estimated from the chart
if the pressure and temperature are known. The results obtained from the
chart and by calculations as illustrated in Example 4-9 are compared in
Table 4-11. The charts are based on experimental data and have been
verified by use in field applications. The engineer should choose to use the
*From Table 4-10.
---
274
charts when they are available. Not only are the data;;;ore accurate but
the charts are easier to use.
Hydrates. Water vapor is usually not considered in volume calculations
as the concentrations are quite low. Ho,vever, transmission lines require
~i
40,00 0
4,000
2,oooH+ti-t+-t-t+H+-H-++H++-1-++1-+++-J., 1<,,q_J-j--l-..J. . I
-G
-
,,
g:~~
11-i.ooolllll/vlll/
,.,
:;!:
-:;
400
20 6
H--t--t-t-H-t-t-+-H-+++-H-+fr.t-H--i-~V
;:::
.,,_
-0
~
.E
_,,.
"'
8,000
B0
60
40
=rn
,oo
,,.
3Q,D
"
10
.:'.!
100
I"
v I/
//
:1111~
fOO
BO
60
40
mm
.,,..
r:-
~1500'"'
;
20 0
YL...8Q~ou ! .,,.. ....... -"
,_
- _..-. ...r_:2o ::.

--'zpO
~----;-~~
,,.
40 0
400
20
""
""-
-o
2,00 0
80
60
.....
6,00 0
1,00
4,00 0
, ,.
.!!'
0
10,000
100
..:
.!!'
20,00 0
;-
100,00
80,00
60,00 0
~:~~~1111~111111
-~
275
Since all reservoirs are believed to contain connate water, it is generally

assumed that all mixtnres which exist as a gas phase in the reservoir are
saturated with water vapor. The amount of water contained in such a gas
is determined by the prevailing reservoir temperature and pressure (see
6,000
----------
----
-- ,_
1/- k>-'.
'--
L"' .ooo
~-
::;::
4
20
2
f--lL+-V'1--J,4/~/G~:'.4-/,,;;f71'+-l/-f-H-+++++-!l-l-++-l-l....J..:.l-l--i-J.~
,
I
1
-60 -50 -40
30 -20 -10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110
Temperature, F
FIG. 4-35. "\Yater-vapor content of natural gas at saturation. Temperature range:

-60 to lI0F. Pressure range: 50 to 2,000 psia. (From McCarthy et al.18 )
gas to be dehydrated to avoid problems associated with hydrate formation.

A natural-gas hydrate is a solid solution of water and natural gas with a
"freezing" point which depends on the gas composition, the available '\Vater,
the pressure, and the temperature. It is believed that the presence of free
water is required for hydrate formation.
fO
no1w~~1m1w1ro1w1m-~o==-~===
Temperature,F
Fra. 4-36. Water-vapor content of natural gas at saturation. Temperature range:

110 to 280F. Pressure range: 50 to 6,000 psia. (From McCarthy et al.18 )
Figs. 4-35 and 4-36). When the gas is produced to the surface, the temperature and pressure are reduced. The decrease in temperature tends to
decrease the weight of water which can be maintained in the vapor state
while the decrease in pressure tends to increase the weight of water in ~
saturated gas. For example, consider a gas existing at 2,000 psia and l 40F
at reservoir conditions. The water content (from Fig. 4-36) is 108 lb per
276

TABLE 4-11. WATER-VAPOR
CoNTE~TS-~AS
277
(Comparison of calculated and chart values, temperature 140"'F)

Pressure,
psi
Water content,
lb/MMscf
Calculated
(from Fig. 4-36)
2,000
108
1,000
200
174.0
830.0
68.15
137.09
693.51
MMscf. If the pressure and temperature of the surface choke were 1,000
psia and 100F, the saturated gas would contain only 61 lb per MMscf.
Thus, 47 lb of free water would be present for each million standard cubic
feet of gas, and one condition for hydrate formation would be satisfied. If
the pressure were 500 psia, the water content would be 108 lb per MMscf
and no free water would be condensed from the gas.
The composition of the gas determines the equilibrium conditions
of pressure and temperature at
which a hydrate can form even if
free water is present. Carson and
-~- 1,500
Katz" developed experimental data
on hydrate equilibrium, and Katz"
presented correlations of conditions
~';o,---:;4':::0--5::'0:--:6:'::0--:"70:--:'80
Temperature, F
Frc. 4-37. Pressure-temperature curves

for predicting hydrate formation. (From
for hydrate formation based on

these data. The equilibrium conditiOns are dependent on pressure,
temperature, and composition (gas
gravity) as shown in Fig. 4-37.
Conditions to the left (lower temperatures) and above (higher pressures) of the lines of constant gas
gravity represent conditions under
which hydrates can form provided
sufficient free water is present. A
0.6-gravity gas at 1,000 psia and

Katz.
60F would be in the region of hydrate formation. If the pressure
were reduced to 800 psia while the temperature were maintained at
60F, the 0.6-gravity gas would be free of hydrate formation.
Another aspect of the problem of hydrates is the cooling associated with
20
expanding a gas. The Joule-Thompson effect results from expansion across
Fra. 4-38. Temperature change due to pressure drop. (From Vondy et al.=.)
a choke. The temperature drop associated with given pressure drops can
be estimated from the chart (Fig. 4-38) presented by Vondy."
A number of possible situations can be analyzed readily by using data
from Figs. 4-35 through 4-38. Solutions for some of the more co=on
problems are illustrated in Example 4-10.
Example 4-10. Determination of Hydrate-formation Conditions. .A
0.7-gravity natural gas exists in the reservoir at 180"F and 3,000 ps1a.
278
1. How much water does the gas contain at
reservo~nditions?
190 lb/MMscf (from Fig. 4-36)

2. What is the surface temperature of the gas if the well head pressure and
temperature are 2,000 psia and 120F for a pressure drop across the
choke of
a. 600 psi?
1!.t = 24F (from Fig. 4-38)
Therefore, surface temperature = 96F
b. 1,500 psi?
1!.t = 69F (from Fig. 4-38)
Therefore, surface temperature = 51F
3. How much free water is present under conditions expressed in 2
a. at the well head?

Gas contains 66 lb/MMscf (Fig. 4-36)
Therefore, free water = 190 - 66 = 124 lb/MMscf
b. at the outlet of the choke if the pressure drop across choke is 600
psia?
Gas contains 45 lb/MMscf (Fig. 4-'l5)
Therefore, free water= 190 - 45 = 145 lb/MMscf
c. at the outlet of the choke if the pressure drop across choke is 1 500
psia?
'
Gas contains 22 lb/MMscf (Fig. 4-35)
A more rigorous definition can be developed mathematically. In Fig. 4-39

two layers of area A within a fluid separated by distance dy are shown to
be in motion. The upper layer has
a velocity v + dv, and the lower layer
a velocity v. Because of the friction
between the molecules of the fluid, a
force F is required in the upper layer
to maintain the difference in velocity
dv between the layers.
It has been found experimentally
that
Fra. 4-39. Two layers of fluid in relaF dv
-a: tive motion.
A dy
Therefore (from Fig. 4-'l7), no hydrate will form even though free
water is available
b. for a 1,500-psi pressure drop across choke?
Pressure= 500 psia-;-temperature
51F
Therefore (from Fig. 4-37), hydrate will form, since conditions fall
in hydrate region for a 0.7-gravity gas
Viscosity of Gases
_The petroleum engineer deals continuously with problems of fluid flow.
Ori-field fluids flow through the reservoir rock to the well bore, through
the well bore to the surface, and thence to the separator and stock tank.
The_ visc_osi~y of a fluid is required to solve these many flow problems.
Vrscosrty rs defined loosely as the internal resistance of the fluid to flow.
F
dv
= .A
dy
(4-30)
or
where is a constant of proportionality, by definition the viscosity.

The units of viscosity can be readily determined from rearrangement of
Eq. (4-30).
FIA
. =
(4-'ll)
dv/dy
In the mass units of the cgs system,
let
Therefore, free water= 190 - 22 = 168 lb/MMscf

4. Will hydrates be formed under conditions expressed in 2
a. for a 600-psi pressure drop across choke?
Pressure = 1,400 psia, temperature = 96F
279
Thus
but
Therefore
F = 1 dyne
A=lsqcm
dv = 1 cm/sec
dy = 1 cm
. =
1 dyne/sq cm
1 cm/(sec)/(cm)
1 dyne/sec
sq cm
1 dyne = gm/(cm)/(sec')
. = 1 gm/(cm)(sec) = 1 poise
The poise is a large unit for hydrocarbon fluids under normal operating
conditions. Therefore, viscosities are usually reported in centipoises. One
poise equals 100 centipoises.
The viscosity of gases are difficult to measure accurately, particularly at
elevated temperature and pressure. The engineer ordinarily must rely on
correlations developed by careful experimentation rather than on limited
laboratory measurements on the fluids at hand.
Eicher and Katz 22 presented the first correlations for hydrocarbon gases
at elevated temperature and pressure. They found the viscosity to be a
function of the temperature, pressure, and molecular weight (gas gravity)
280
r:
,...
>----
ooops}2..
~(120L-40Q2....
_I
__
3000
L--'
'-'
---
tOOO
J,.-~
r__.
--/
v--
i./
v .
I / r/
I / v'
.
I/
v \/
v,
_v
~
-v
f/
\/
2000
1500
-v
60"'
.......
-- --v. v.
v_,,
~ /
siJfe .......p~~j..../ 1.,./ I /
!.- ,
- - -Extropo!Oted
1.--,
,_-
0.0 6
,-wo-P
.!!>
6oqg,P!.f.-- ..........
~o
400l1J..--
I
2000
!500
1.000
--
-v---
0.6
0.7
0.8
Q9
L---::, v_
/
-,_,.
I/
V,
1.0
2
0
0.03 .::
0
-;:
0.02 ~
1000
1000
100
400
0.01
~ 0.06
~
~ 0.05
.;r
31?~.
0,04
.
-I
on
L--
,_-
--- -pre: ,~re
,_
_,__
o'!J~iO
1--~
5002.i.,OQ! L--
'----
3 oQ
,ooo
--
L--~
i--
t.500
hose regt
f,00
700
;.0'19
O.JO
0.09
lll 0.08
~ 0.07
..:0.04
f~?
rwo-P
[....--
L-1-- ~
oO
I/
,__
~~
1~
L--
/ v,,
14.7
0.01
0.5
L---
--- ,_
-~
",
/00
0
..
-=
0.01
""
sst.1re-
, . -c - 1~
L--
---- v --- --~

v
3000
.; 0.02
v
~- v
__
pre
;;
,_,...___
0.06 ~
OPsiO:::
0
00: ,- 1-0.05 ~
-.
,_,, cE
~
0.02;
region
~ 0 se
- - -- --
!00F
-wo1
- - ExfrtJpoltJfed
.___ - ..__
~
0
pr~s_....._.. . . . . . ~-
0.03
"'
w
,,,
~ 0.05
,_
g 0.0
0.04
0.03
0.08
0
t"/#
f
I
14.7
0.05
0.10
0.09
0.08
0.07 ::
0.06 ~
"'
0.1 0
0.0 9
0.07
0.10
0.09
0.08
0.07
281
/4,7
~-
1.1
1.2
Gos gravity {Air=tOJ
0.0 1
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0_9
1.0
1.1
1.2
Gos gravity (Air=l.01
F1a. 4-40. Viscosity of natural gases. Data from methane-propane mixtures. Use
only for samples containing less than 5 per cent nitrogen. Deviation, 5.8 per cent.
(From Bicker and Katz.112)
FrG. 4-41. VIBcosity of natural gases. Data from methane-propane mixtures. Use
only for samples containing le..c::s than 5 per cent nitrogen. Deviation, 5.8 per cent.
(From Eicher and Katz.22 )
of the gas. Correlation charts for four temperatures (60, 100, 200, and
300F) are presented in Figs. 4-40 and 4-41. The charts are based on data
from methane-propane mixtures. Katz stated that the correlations should
be used for gases containing less than 5 per cent nitrogen. The average
deviation of the data and the correlations is 5.8 per cent.
Several trends typical of gas viscosity can be noted from examination of

Figs. 4-4.0 and 4-41. As the temperature is increased, the kinetic energy
of the molecules increase. More collisions occur between the molecules;
thus the vi~cosity is increased by an increase in temperature. At a constant tE:rrpcrature, an increase in pressure causes an increase in viscosity.
282
PETROLEU~f
RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
The distance bet\veen the molecules is decreased; thus more collisions occur
at the same level of kinetic energy.
Another trend is that of generally increasing 'S~cosity at higher gas
gravities for pressures greater than about 1,000 pSia. At lower pressures
the trend is reversed, higher gas gravity materials have lower viscosities.
These trends are temperature-sensitive in that the inversion pressure is a
function of temperature. This phenomenon can also be explained in terms
of kinetic energy. At a given temperature (same level of kinetic energy)
the heavier molecules have a lesser velocity; therefore, fewer molecular
collisions occur. As the pressure is increased, however, the distance between molecules is reduced sufficiently that the attractive forces between
the molecules become significant. The heavier molecules have greater forces
of attraction than the lighter molecules.
Carr and coworkers~ 3 have presented more complete correlations than
those of Katz. It is also believed that their correlations yield better data
for the viscoi!ity of natural-gas mixtures. The correlation of Carr is based
un the correlation of the viscosity ratio/ 1 with pseudo-reduced pressure
~.
o~ li.O
ID
"~
,.;
:ill)ii:
~
0
0
0
0
0
,.;
0
0
0
"
~~
~.:,-0.;.
"'
N
"
0
!ti
g
-z
_,..
0
0
~"
" "
0
0
<IS]Od!~U<l:l .(,!SO:lS]A.
'
"'
"'
diO~e
'~
Q016
~
-fid8
~,.drO ~
"
~<::.
"
Q014
'
,,"""
0.012
3
j~B
pr-oPori8
0.010
0.008
100
150
ti
,- Marie
'
~ -uica"'
':
~
N
~
"
1r~
""'''
' ''
n:...Octo11'
0.006
0.004
50
m
u
if.
!S
"ii;}
"Ii.
O.Qf8
"l
S>
oi pappo UO!P3IIOJ
t1e\ill!1\
:g
''1fltrs
&
~
0.022
II
ON
o~
"
~.$16
'
'
'
"'
OJ pap po UO!P<IHO:J
0.020
<IS!Od!~Ua:> ',(HSO:>S]A
0.024
Oo
-u
O'
u
0
ID
n~NOnatl
0
0
0
0
"
0
0
0
Q
"'
3S\Od!JU3:> '.(HSO:IS!A
o, pappo UO!P3JJO:J
q
200
250
300
Temperature, F
350
400
Fra. 4-42. Viscosity of natural gases at atmospheric pressure. (From Carr et al.zi)
0
-
-------
,o---
------- --------------------- -----
-----
285
and temperature, where is the viscosity of the mixture at the prevailing

conditions and J.Li is the viscosity of the mixture at atmospheric pressure
and the prevailing temperature of the mixture.
The viscosity-temperature relation for several gases a,}atmospheric pressure is presented in Fig. 4-42. It can be noted that ~1 increase in temperature results in increased viscosity and that hydrocarbon gases have
generally lower viscosities than the nonhydrocarbon gases. Also, the trend
of viscosity with molecular weight which is exhibited by the hydrocarbons
is not reflected in the nonhydrocarbons. For example, air and nitrogen
both are greater in molecular weight than methane yet have greater viscosities.
The viscosity relations of paraffin hydrocarbons at atmospheric pressure,
correlated with temperature, molecular weight, and gas gravity, are pre...
sented in Fig. 4-43. The insert charts in the figure provide means of correcting the viscosity for the presence of nonhydrocarbon components.
. Data for mixtures of gases read from Fig. 4-43 were compared by Carr
Wo1th those calculated from a mixture rule proposed by Heming and
Z1pperer. 24 The viscosity JLm of a mixture of gases is given by
284
6. 0
'-..,'/
*'
5. 5
,,
i'::
SD
ff/
'ti
i:
,.
2.0
/J /,
1.5
_Q-~:..
0.2
0.3 0.4
~~
//
/
0.6 0.8 1
3.5
~
E 2.5
~
-~7
0
/ I /
I/
4.0
~
0
I/ I
5.0
'7/, 'i ' /i::::i:: I/
The values obtained compared closely for all mixtures studied.

The correlations of viscosity ratio with pseudo-reduced properties are
presented in Figs. 4-44 and 4-45. The pseudo-critical properties of mixti:res can be _calculated from gas analyses or read from Fig. 4-30 as prev10usly explamed. A sample calculation of gas viscosity by two methods
f
{'
I ,
I
I
/~
~ 2.0
>
1.5
..?
f I
1D
2
y;M,
where ..,, = viscosity of mixture

i = viscosity of ith component
M, = molecular weight of ith component
Yi = mole fraction of ith component in mixture
I,,
I 9r:il_
I I I
I
'
7 I I/ t
(4-32)
i=I
I I
ij>/
,. ~
I/
,y;M,
i=I
m
,.:;;r,
2.5
Q1
~.o
tO
J
I
::; ...,ii;!
I'
3.5
'
"/
~ 1<-)J
Q?/
~ 4.0
"'
.'2
'
~,_
...,
4.5
I/
!!~~
...,
.l
.l
8 10
20
Pseudo reduced pressure, f}
FIG. 4-44. Viscosity ratio versus pseudo-reduced pressure. (From Carr et al.#)
0.8
11
1D
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
Pseudo reduced temperature,
r;
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
FIG. 4-45. Viscosity ratio versus pseudo-reduced temperature. (From Carr et al.m)
- - - - --------- - - -
286
- ------
----

FUNDAM&VTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
is presented in Example 4-11. The deviation of the values determined

was 3 per cent.
Example 4-11. Calculation of Gas Viscosity. A natural gas having a
gas gravity of 0.9080 exists at a pressure of 3,010 psia and a temperature
of 224F. What is the viscosity of the gas?
.
Method 1. (from Figs. 4-40 and 4-41). The reservoir teinperature lies b"'
tween the 200 and the 300F chart of Fig. 4-41. Interpofation is required.
At 200F, . = 0.024 cp
At 300F, . = 0.022 cp
Therefore,
. at 224F
= 0.024 -
7:i (0.002) = 0.0235 cp
Method 2. (from Figs. 4-43 to 4-45).

Mo! wt = 28.96G = 26.33
Therefore,
., = 0.0119 (from Fig. 4-43)
,T,
= 454 and ,,P, = 657 (from Fig. 4-30)
Therefore,
,T, -- 684 -- 1.507 and ,,P, -- 3,010 -- 4.581
454
657
287
PROPERTms OF THE LIQUID STATE
A liquid is a fluid without independent shape but having a definite volume for a fixed mass under given conditions. Thus, a liquid will assume
the shape of but not necessarily fill a vessel within which it is confined.
A liquid seeks its own level and is incapable of supporting shearing stresses.
In the discussion of the properties of gases, the kinetic theory was introduced to describe theoretically the behavior of molecules in the gaseous
state. Inherent in the treatment of gases was the assumption that the
distance between molecules was great enough so that the attractive forces
between molecules were negligible. In the case of liquids, the distance between molecules is much less and the force of attraction between molecules
is substantial. The proximity of the molecules and the force of attraction
between molecules in the liquid state result in substantial differences in the
physical properties of liquids as compared with gases. Liquids have less
fluidity (greater viscosity) and less volumetric changes with changes in
temperature and pressure than do gases.
In general terms, liquids are frequently conceived to be either condensed
vapors or melted solids. These concepts are useful in visualizing many
processes to which substances are subjected. The continuity of the various
concepts can be illustrated by the generalized phase diagram for a onecomponent system presented in Fig. 4-46. The curves represent conditions
E. = 1.92 (from Fig. 4-44)

P.1
C Critical
. = E. ., = 1.92(0.0119) = 0.0228 cp
.,
point
Summary of Properties of Gases
The quantitative analysis of the volumetric behavior of hydrocarbon

_gases has been developed in some detail. Methods of estimating the water
content and the viscosity of gases have been presented. These properties
are of paramount importance to the petroleum-reservoir engineer and provide him the basic data with which to describe the behavior of gases in
reservoir production processes.
Problems of gas compression and gas flow in pipes, which are frequently
of concern to the petro1eum production engineer, often require thermodynamic properties such as specific heats, enthalpy, and entropy. These
properties and their applications alone constitute a comprehensive field of
study which will not be considered in this text. The reader is referred ta
texts on thermodynamics and to the literature for information in this area
of study.
Temperature
----
F:rs. 4-46. Generalized phase diagram for a pure substance. (Adapted from Daniels. 2 )
of pressure and temperature at whlch two phases can exist in equilibrium.

At one point, the triple point, three phases can exist in equilibrium. Along
the sublimation cur.ve, solid and vapor coexist. The melting-point and
vapor-pressure curves indicate coexistence of solid-liquid and liquid-vapor
phases, respectively. Insets I, II, and III represent containers of equal size
288
FUNDAM&'iTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
containing a fixed mass of the material in the state prescribed by the region within which the inset is located. Characteristic of the solid phase is
the definite shape of the mass of substance, independent of the shape of
the confining vessel. The liquid assumes the shape of the vessel but fills
only a portion equal to the definite volume of liquid corresponding to the
mass of material and the given conditions of pressure and temperature.
The molecules are relatively close together in both the solid and liquid
states. The vapor, inset III, occupies the entire vessel and aS&lllles the
shape of the vessel. The distance between molecules is substantially
greater than for either solid or liquid.
)
Volumetric Behavior of Liquids
The volumetric behavior of liquids as a function of pressure and temperature has been studied intensively in many fields of science. Nevertheless, Dauiels2 states "the theory of liquids is in a much less satisfactory
state than the theories of gases and crystals, but important progress is
being made in our understanding of the structure of liquids." The state
of progress is such that a simple generalized equation of state has not been
developed for liquids.
As in the case of gases, the petroleum engineer is primarily concerned
with the change in volume of liquids with a change in pressure and temperature. The state changes discussed in this section will be confined to
those in which the material remains wholly within the liquid phase.
An ideal liquid is defined mathematically by the following partial derivatives:
( av)
aT P
and
( av)
aP T
(4-33)
where (av /aT)P is the isobaric thermal expansion and (aV /aP)T is the
isothermal compressibility. The relations expressed in Eq. (4-33) state
that changes in volume with pressure and temperature are zero for an ideal
liquid. Furthermore, an ideal liquid is conceived to have no internal fric. tion between molecules; consequent1y, the viscosity of an ideal liquid is
zero. Thus, the concept of an ideal liquid is of little quantitative value in
predicting the volumetric behavior of liquids but does provide an insight
into the behavior of liquids. The volume of real liquids does change with
variations in pressure and temperature, but these changes are so small
compared with gas that they are represented as a fractional change of some
standard or reference volume.
A comparison of the relative changes in volume of liquid and gases can
be obtained from inspection of Fig. 4-2. For the conditions specified by
the segment of the 80F isotherm between points A and B, ethane is in the
gaseous state. For the conditions specified by the segment between points
A and F, ethane is in the liquid state. The isothermal compressibility
289
(av /aP)T can be represented in finite form as (a V/ M')T. In the liquid

state,
d
v=
0.005 cu ft/lb
and
M' ::::::'. 135 psi
or
(~;)T
0.0000371
CU
ft/(Jb)(psi)
In the gaseous state,

d
v : : : '. 0.067 cu ft/lb
and
M' ::::::'. 75 psi
or
(~)T
0.000894
CU
ft/(Jb)(psi)
The gas is 24.1 times as compressible as the liquid in the ranges considered.
r.rhe isobaric thermal expansion can also be expressed in finite form as
(d VI dT)p. At a pressure of 700 psia and temperatures between 60 and
85F, ethane is in the liquid state .. The average isobaric thermal expansion
is approximately
0 3
= 0.00052 CU ft/(Jb)(F)
g;
Also at 700 psia and for temperatures between 100 and 160F, ethane is a
gas. The average isobaric thermal expansion is about
Oi~g
0.00131
CU
ft/(lb)(F)
The thermal expansion of the gas is about 2.5 times that of the liquid.
The effect of pressure on the specific volume of propane is shown in
Fig. 4-47a. The curves are for constant temperatures and are called isotherms. The slope of an isotherm is the isothermal compressibility. The
compressibility is always negative, indicating that increasing pressures result in smaller volumes. The magnitude of the isothermal compressibility
decreases with increasing pressure, 'vhereas it increases 'vith increasing
temperature. Thus, the effect of pressure variations are greater at low
pressure and high temperature. The change in slope with pressure can
be stated mathematically as the second partial derivative.
a(aV/aP)T
aP
(a'V)
api
..
= pos1t1ve number
(4-34)
Plots of the compressibility and change in compressibility are shown in

Fig. 4-47b and c. It is noted from these curves that the greater the pressure, the smaller- the effect of changes in pressure on the compressibility
of the fluid.
At ]ow temperatures, the isothermal compressibility is very nearly constant. For example, the 70F isotherm in Fig. 4-47a is essentially a straight
29]
line. Hence, the variation in the specific volume of the fluids at 70F can
be represented (in the range 100 to 2,500 psi) by
v=vo+bP
"'
::: 0.040 ~-++--"*---1"'~

~
.;
0.035t~~E~~~~~~~~~i~~
0.030
(
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
where Vo is the intercept with the y axis at zero pressure and bis the average
slope or isothermal compressibility. The volume rather than the specific
volume is usually the desired quantity, so that
V = wv
Vo
WVo
where w is the weight of liquid. Thus
bP
V=wvo+wvoVo
2,500
v=
or
Pressure, psi
(a)
vo(1 + ~P)
(4-35)
The familiar coefficient of compressibility c is then stated as

b
c = -
Vo
Equation (4-35) can also be expressed in the form

V = Vo[l - CT(P - Po)]
,..... ....-----
500
1,000
where
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
CT =
isothermal coefficient of compressibility at temperature T
Vo
V
reference volume at temperature T and pressure Po

volume at temperature T and pressure P
A definition of c which is satisfied whether or not the isotherms are

straight lines is
Pressure
(4-37)
(b)
.........__
0.5f---+--+----+---t---1
.
o~_j__:::::t:::::\==J=------1
-0.51---+--+---t---+---1
-1.0'---'-~-.....,-~,..,.--c,-.,'=-,,--o--!
500
1,000
1,500 2,000
(4-36)
2,500
Pressure
The coefficient of compressibility as defined by Eq. (4-37) is a point function and can be computed from the slope of isothermal specific volume
curve for each value of pressure. The minus sign_ arises from the mathematical convention with respect to slope. As the slope of the curves are
always negative, v is always a positive number and it is desired that c be
a positive number; then c must be defined as the negative of the slope
divided by the specific volume.
The coefficient of compressibility of a fluid is the reciprocal of the bulk
modulus. The bulk modulus is analogous to the modulus of elasticity of a
solid. That is,
1
(stress)
~ = strain T
(c)
The stress in a fluid is the change in pressure from some reference pressure
Fia. 4-47. (a) Effect of pressure upon the volume of liquid propane. (From Sage
and Lacey.D) (b) Isothermal compressibility of liquid propane at 160F. (c) The
change in the isothermal compressibility of liquid propane at 160F.
290
Po, and the strain is the change in volume per unit volume at the reference
conditions. Therefore
292
1 P -P0
c - Ll V /Vo
(4-38)
The bulk_ n;>?dulus has the dimensions of pressure, while the coefficient of
compresSibility has the dimensions of reciprocal pressure.
8
6
~1
. The isobaric variation in specific volume of liquid propane is shown in
!fig. 4-48~. The isobaric thermal expansion (aV /oT)p is the slope of the
isobars (lines of constant pressure). The slope of the isobars (Fig. 4-48b)
2
~
roo
0.045
200
300
(c)
:t:
0.040
~000
150
Temperature
Fra. 4-48. (a) Volume of liquid propane. (From Sage and Lacey.") (b) Isobaric
expansion of liquid propane. (c) Variation of isobaric expansion of liquid propane.
'
293
.;
Bubble point
500 lb/sq in
t,000
>
increases with increasing temperature and decreases with increasing pressure. The slope is at all times positive, indicating that an increase in tem-
perature increases the volume of the fluid. Stated analytically, the change
of slope with temperature is the second partial derivative.
1,500
.,,
;g 0.035 2,000
3,000
~
~
a(aVaT
/oT)p
"'
(a'V)
aT' P
..
pos1t1ve number
(4-39)
Results of Eq. (4-39) (Fig. 4-48c) confirm the observation that the isobaric
expansion increases with increasing temperature.
The coefficient of isobaric thermal expansion f3 is defined as
0,030
100
150
(av)
(4-40)
13 = lV aT P
The isobars of Fig. 4-48a are sensibly straight over a part of the range of
200
Temperature,
(a)
pressure and temperature. Therefore, a relation between the volume at a

reference temperature and that at another temperature can be written as
V = V0 [l
6
<:i
2
__,... v
terms of specific volumes or densities.

For thermal expansion
3,000 psi
Temperature, 0 f
(b)
(4-41)
V = volume at pressure P and temperature T

It is frequently convenient to define the volume relations of liquids in
150
To)]
where {1p = isobaric coefficient of expansion at pres.sure P

Vo = reference volume at pressure P and temperature To
100
+ /3,(T -
200
30()
and
For compressibility,
v = Vo[l + {3,(T - T0 )]
= Po[l - /3,(T - To)]
(4-42)
(4-43)
Vo[l - c,.(P - Po)]
(4-44)
V =
--------
and
-------
et:i>.ci~tci-i-00
"1""""
p,[l
+ cr(P
MC'l C'l
or
0
COCON60
C'l -
C\I
00000
C:.O'lc<:l<:OO"'OO
--ININMMCQ
0000000
o:>O>r.i>.0--:tt":t'
NO'le<::OOOO:.t-cicci....jc;i~..,,.iici
MM ":t' "'1' "":f'-.:!< "'1'<
c:.ou:ii:oC\I
.0 ci -qi N .0 M lO
"'::!' C':l t- C\I t-- oooooic:.oo-
---
'
Poec<P-Po>
(4-46)
Density of Hydrocarbon Mixtures in the Liquid State

The stock-tank liquids obtained from production of petroleum are complex mixtures of hydrocarbons. The density (or API gravity) of such a
mixture is readily measured by means of hydrometers or other devices.
Frequently the engineer must estimate the density of a mixture from an
analysis which has been computed from other properties of the system.
Typical analyses of both a stock-tank liquid and a reservoir liquid are
presented in Table 4-13. The stock-tank liquid is comprised largely of
propanes and heavier components, while reservoir liquid contains appreciable quantities of methane and ethane.
TABLE 4-13. TYPICAL
Component
>.OOt-o:>-
The coefficients c and f3 are functions of temperature, pressure, and

liquid composition. Although sensibly constant over certain ranges of
pressure or temperature, these coefficients must be determined experimentally or from correlations based on experiment.
The more important physical constants of common hydrocarbons which
exist as liquids at atmospheric conditions are presented in Table. 4-12.
"1" N tC":l ""' >.O co t-
-.!"
(4-45)
- Po)]
The isotherms of Fig. 4-47a can be fitted by an exponential relation over

a greater range of pressure than that for which Eq. (4-45) is valid .. Therefore, a relation for density can be expressed as
000:.INNO'lO'lC"l
>r.l
295
o:i et:i ci
ci >.O 0
OOOOMO'lCO"';!<N
LIQUID
ANALYSES
Stock-tank liquid,
mole fraction"
Reservoir liquid,
mole fractionl>
0.0019
0.0098
0.0531
0.0544
0.0555
0.0570
0.7681c
1.0000
0.3396
0.0646
0.0987
0.0434
0.0320
0.0300
0.3917'
1.0000
"<:l''<t'"'::i"MMe<:lM
t-":t'<:OC'l":t'OOt-
~~0:~'-q~'=!
- "'
>t:10'1<-ooo
0:.,..... J:'.. C'l N ":t' N

~iN.CcicOC":i>.ci
0:.00>r.l0>.00..,..
,.....C'l C\I M C<:I
CO<:OCNOO":t!OCO
"<l'"<l<t-0:.C>llQt----NC<IN
-- -
ciC'i'ccici~ocic-i
t-t-000,.....IN"':i"
,....,
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Butanes
Pentanes
Hexanes
Heptanes plus
"Exists at 14.7 psia and 60F.

1> Exists at 3,614 psia and 220F.
c Properties of heptanes-plus fraction: Mol wt
= 55.28 lb/cu ft at 14.7 psia and 60F.
263; density
Methane and ethane are gases at ordinary pressures and temperatures.

Because of the volatility of these materials, the densities of methane and
ethane depend on the composition of the heavier fractions of the liquid.
294
----------
296
297
F'C"NDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
Heavier molecules have a greater force of attraction, so that methane or

ethane molecules are, in effect, compacted to a greater extent in the presence of heavy molecules than in the presence of light molecules.
Standing and Katz" presented correlations of the apparent density of
methane and ethane with the density of the system (see Fig. 4-49). Based
on these data and assuming that propanes and heavier components followed the rule of additive volumes, they developed a method for com-
puting the density of mixtures of hydrocarbons. The density of a system

containing methane and ethane is correlated (Fig. 4-50) with the density
of the propanes-plus fraction, the weight per cent ethane in the ethanes
plus, and the weight per cent methane in the system.
50.
40
:J;
10
0 .6
0
~
0
,;
c
""'
0 .5
j;v
0 .4
i-
_,r
j,-
-"'
70
g 50
~
c.
-~
"
60~
_.10
50 -g
30
20
..... 0.3
,;
c
Q
~
~ 0.2
L/
.._.A
A
lY
--
A--
'
";..Y
C.-0'
u'
Ef/J(Jne-N-Bvfone
/hone-Heptane
+
;:f /hone-Crystal oil
" Methone-Cyclo Hexoni
Methane-Benzene
-o- Melho11e-Pentane
o Methane-Hexane
Methane-Heptane
t::,,. Methane-Propane
0.4
g'
g"
"
30.
30 E
.;;
"
10
F1a. 4-50. Pseudo-liquid density of systems containing methane and ethane. (From
Standing.3 )
-?-
0.. Methane -Crystal oil
f--
9 Meth'1ne-Crvde oil
'
' 0.7' ' 0.8'
0.6
0.5
Density of system, 60F aotm.pressure
"E
~
0.
'91
0.3
40
'
o.4
0.9
FIG. 4-49. Variation of apparent density of methane and ethane with density of the
system. (Standing and Katz.w)
For stock-tank liquids which have low concentrations of methane and

ethane the additive volume method of calculating density is satisfactory.
'
The method
can be developed as follows:
The weight in pounds of a component in 1 lb-mole of a mixture is equal
to the product of the molecular weight and the mole fraction of that component in the mixture. Therefore,
----------
298
where W; =
Wi = xMi
weight of ith component in 1 lb-mole of mixture
(4-47)
to use the corrective charts for methane and ethane. The weight per cent
ethane in the ethanes plus is
xi = mole fraction of ith component in mixture
M;
299
FUNDA.'1ENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
wt of C,
(wt % C2)e2+ = wt of c,+ =
= molecular weight of ith component
x,M,
(4-53)
The weight in pounds of 1 lb-mole of mixture is simply the sum of the

weights of the components. Thus
and the weight per cent methane in the system is
m
2: x;M;
Wm=
wt of C1
(wt% C1)ei+ = wt of C1+ =
(4-48)
i=l
where Wm is the weight in pounds of 1 lb-mole of\the mixture.

The volume of a component in a mixture is tqe product of the weight
of that component in the mixture and the specific volume of that component at the prevailing condition of pressure and temperature. Thus
where V, is the volume of the ith component in 1 lb-mole of mixture and

vi is the specific volume of the ith component.
Applying the concept of additive volumes,
Vm
l:V;
Example 4-12.
Anay
I sis
Vm
The method of Standing and Katz assumes that the propanes-plus fractions can be treated by additive volumes. The above-cited equations must
be modified as follows:
We'+=~
Calculation of Liquid Density from Stock-tank Liquid
(1)
(2)
Component
Mole
fraction
in liquid
phase X;:
Mole wt
M;
0.0019
0.0098
0.0531
0.0544
0.0555
0.0570
0.7681
16.04
30.07
44.09
58.12
72.15
86.17
263
Methane, C1
Ethane, C2
Propane, C3
Butanes, C,
Pentanes, c~
Hexanes, CG
Heptanes plus, C;+
Total
(3)
(4)
Relative
weight,
lb/mole,
z.;l11i
(2)
(3)
.0305
.2947
2.3412
3.1617
4.0043
4.9203
202.0366
216.7893
x;M;
i=3
From Table 4-13.

Average of iso and normal.
Column 5 from Table 4-4.
i=3
Method 1. Additive volumes
and
Ve'+=
2: V;
where the summations are taken over the C3 (propane) and heavier components. Two additional definitions must be stated in mathematical form
x;M,
The calculation of the density, at atmospheric pressure and 60F, of the

stock-tank liquid from Table 4-13 is given in Example 4-12. The densit~
is calculated both by additive volumes and by the method of Standing an
Katz. It can be noted from Example 4-12 that th_e results from the two
methods differ only by 0.02 per cent. This result is because of the small
percentage of methane and ethane in the mixture.
Wm
The molecular weight and specific volume at 14.65 psia and 60F can be
obtained from Table 4-4 for the lighter hydrocarbons, methane through
heptane. The molecular weight and specific gravity of the heptanes-plus
fraction are normally determined in the laboratory and reported as a part
of the fractional fluid analysis.
(4-54)
i=l
and the density of the mixture is given by

Pm=
x11l11
m
11
_
Density of C1+ = 216.7893
= 53 49 lb/cu ft
4 0531
(5)
Liquid
density,
lb/cu ft at
60"F and
14.65 psia
(18.70)
(23.26)
31.64
35.71b
39.08'
41.36
55.28a
(6)
Liquid
volume,
cu ft/mole
(4) - (5)
(0.0016)
(0.0127)
0.0740
0.0885
0.1025
0.1190
3.6548
4.0388
(4.0531)
300
301
Method 2. Standing and Katz apparent density correlation

m
x.M;
Density of C'+ = '-''-'''-. ~ x,M,
i-3
(216.7893 - 0.3252) lb/mole

4.0388 cu ft/mole
Pi
= 53.59 lb/cu ft
Wt
30 c, in c
'+
x,M,
100 =
{'
(0.2947) lb/mole (100)

(216.7893) - (0.0305) lb/mole
L, xMi
i=2
= 0.136
Wt
O"f
/O
C 1 in C
= x,M,
'+
100
{'
1-
(0.0305) lb/mole (100)

(216.7893) lb/mole
0 014
x~i
i=l
Density of C 1+ = 53.5 lb/cu ft (from Fig. 4-50)

Compressibility of Liquids:
Data on the isothermal compressibility of pure hydrocarbons have not
been compiled. However, extensive data are available in the literature on
the effect of pressure on the specific volume at 60F of pure hydrocarbons
and hydrocarbon mixtures. Standing and Katz correlated the available
data in the form of density-correction curves. The curves (Fig. 4-51) enable
the engineer to correct a known density at 14.7 psia and 60F to a density at
a desired pressure and also at 60F. The density corrections from Fig. 4-51
are adequate for most engineering calculations.
As has been discussed previously in this chapter, many reservoirs contain undersaturated oils. An undersaturated oil is a compressed liquid in
the pressure range above the bubble-point pressure. The coefficient of isothermal compressibility can be used to describe the volume change of such
materials above the bubble-point pressure.
Trube" has reported a method of calculating the compressibility of undersaturated liquids based on pseudo-reduced properties. The pseudoreduced compressibility c, is defined:
c,. = c(,,P,)
Since
or
Pr=,,P,
= cP =
are known, the compressibility can be determined from Eq. (4-56) and the
correlation of Cr with pseudo-reduced temperature and pres.sure presented
in Fig. 4-52.
At the higher reduced pressures an appreciable segment of the constant
reduced-temperature lines have a constant slope. An equation for the
straight-line segment has the form
(4-55)
c,.P,
Density at 60 F and 14.7 psio, lb/cu ft
FIG. 4-51. Density correction for compressibility of liquids. (From Standing.3 )
c11P1
= c,,P, = c,,P,
(4-56)
log c, = n log P, + log a

er= aPr""
(4-57)
where n is the slope of the line and a is the intercept of the straight-line
segment at P, = 1. Substituting from Eq. (4-57) for c,. in Eq. (4-56)
(aP,~)P, =
Therefore if the pressure temperature and critical propertie of a liquid

or
aPr""+1
cP
cP
302
from which can be obtained

(4-58)
For a particular liquid,
p~+1 =
constant = A = cP-
The slope n is negative. The compressibility c is thus shoi.vn to decrease

with increasing pressure. Furthermore, the slopes of the straight-line seg-
0.1~~~~
1---+-'<+*Ar!--+-J..+l.L-----+-+-+-r++++I
/---_i_-"-<f.-'>.--+"~ t-t+----=J-
303
in the manner described previously for gases. These values can be used
together with Fig. 4-52 to calculate the compressibility of the fluid. F01
many liquids adequate estimates of critical properties are not available.
Trube also developed procedures for estimating the critical properties of
reservoir liquids.
Thermal Expansion of Liquids. The most frequent application of the
thermal expansion of liquids is in correcting the volume and density of
stock-tank liquids to 60F, the standard temperature. The Bureau of
Standards published in Circular C-410" extensive tables for this purpose.
Abridged volume-correction tables are presented in the ASTM" and Tag''
manuals. Coefficients of thermal expansion at atmospheric pressure are
listed in Table 4-12 for the paraffin hydrocarbons pentane through decane.
For the more complex stock-tank oils, the coefficients of thermal expansion
I I i
:::
~ 8
'
c,
"'
~
""
~
!! 6
~
.e-
-
,
w
.=
~ 3
"'
~
..0
~
~
Fra. 4-52. PsPu<lo-reduced t:ompr0s.o;ibility of undersaturat.ed hydrofarLon liquids.

(From Trnbe.'.!fl)
men ts of Fig. 4-52 are very clo;.;e to minu8 one ( - I). If it is assumed that
n = -1, then
A = cP = c,P, = c,P,
(4-59)
The pseudo-reduced propertie::;; ca.n be calculated from the liquid analysis
Density at 60F and pressure P, !b/cu ft
F1a. 4-53. Density correction for thermal expansion of liquids. (From Standing.s)
-----
----
304
are correlated with the API gravity of the oil. In Table 4-14 are listed the
average coefficients of thermal expansion used in prepariug abridged volume-correction tables for oils.
TABLE 4-14. AVERAGE COEFFICIENTS OF
TliEmuL
Density of C,.._ =
EJa>ANSION FOR CRUDE OILS AT
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE3 11
Group
No.
Coefficient of
thermal expansion
at 60F
0.00035
0.00040
0.00050
0.00060
0.00070
0.00080
0.00085
0.00090
2
3
4
5
6
7
Wt
Up to 14.9
15-34.9
35-50.9
51-63.9
64--78.9
79-1l8.9
6
22
44
58
72
86
Reservoir
Component
fiuid
analysis Zi
Mol wt
0.3396
0.0646
0.0987
0.0434
0.032
0.03
0.3917
16.04
30.07
44.09
58.12
72.15
86.17
263
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,.
Total
From Table H.
Average iso anQ. normal.
(4)
Relative
weights,
lb/mole
(2) x (3)
C,
lil
(5)
Density at
60F and
Wt% C1
X;M;
Pi
C... =
x,M 2
i-n
Table 4-13.
(6)
cu ft/mole
(4) + (5)
lb/cu ft4
31.64
35.71b
39.08'
41.36
55.28'
'
(1.9425) lb/mole (100)
= (122.1748 - 5.4472) lb/mole
xJv[;
.
ill
X1M1
total =
(5.4472) lb/mole (100) = 4.46 percent

122.1748 lb/mole
xJv[;
i=l
Liquid
volume,
14.7 psia,
(122.1748 - 7.3897) lb/mole

2.193 cu ft/mole
--
= 1.66 per cent
9.9
5.4472
I.9425
4.3517
2.5224
2.3088
2.5851
103.0171
122.1748
~From.
~:3.9
91
97
(3)
xJvf;
i=2
Example 4-13. Calculation of Density of Reservoir Liquid. Reservoir

conditions = 3,614 psia, 220F.
(2)
= 52.34 lb/cu ft
Gravity range
of group, 0 API
For correction of liquid densities for thermal expansion, Fig. 4-53 can
be used. The chart yields satisfactory results except in the low-density
and high-temperature regions. This chart, like Fig. 4-51, is based on a
large number of observations of specific volumes of hydrocarbons. The
density at 60F is the only composition parameter.
The calculation of the density of a liquid at reservoir conditions from a
fractional analysis requires data on both compressibility and thermal expansion. The procedure for such a calculation is shown in Example 4-13,
using the reservoir liquid of Table 4-13.
(I)
l
''"-~"l
i=3
Corresponding
gravity, 0 API
305
0.1375
0.0706
0.0591
0.0625
1.8636
2.1933
Density of liquid including C, and C, at 60F and 14. 7 psia = 49.4

lb/cu ft (from Fig. 4-50)
Pressure correction from 14.7 to 3614 psia
Therefore,
pc,.= !9.4
+ 1.0 =
1.0 (from Fig. 4-51)
50.4 lb/cu ft at 60F and 3,614 psia
Temperature correction from 60 to 220F at 3,614 psia = 3.78 (from

Fig. 4-53)
Therefore,
pc,.= 50.4 - 3.78 = 46.62 lb/cu ft at 220F and 3,614 psia
Surface Tension
The surface tension at the interface between a liquid phase and an equilibrium vapor phase is a function of pressure, temperature, and the compositions of the phases.
For pure substances only the temperature or pressure must be specified
to define the surface tension. As a tension exists only if two phases are
present, then either temperature or pressure can be specified a~d the oth~r
will be defined by the vapor-pressure curve. The surface tenSions ot vanous pure paraffin hydrocarbons are shown as a function of temperature in
Fig. !-54. The value of zero surface tension occurs at the critical point of
the hydrocarbon.
The surface tensions of mixtures of hydrocarbons have been investigated
experimentally by Katz, 33 who, from the experimental data, developed a
----
---------
306
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FL"UIDS
procedure for calculating surface tension. The method is based on the

parachor and the equation proposed by Sugden34 relating the surface tension to the properties of the liquid and vapor phases.
q~ = ~
25
c
~20
..
P chi = parachor of ith component

. . .
and Yi = mole fractions of ith component in liqllld and
phases, respectively
.
PL and 1fh = density and molecular weight, respectively, of
phase
P and M. = density and molecular weight, respectively, of
phase
vapor
. ..
liqwa
vapor
900
c
15
~
,
V>
10
(4-61)
-~
c
2
~
h._.)
Yi M11
;>;
Xi
30
PL
x, J.lfL
i=l
where
35
(
pchi
307
Afol. Wt
800
240
220
200
180
150
700
140
600
I
I
1
0 500
;,
"
400
I
-200
-100
100
300
200
Temperature, F
400
500
300
600
FIG. 4-54. Surface tension of paraffin hydrocarbons. (From Katz and Saltman.3'))
200
For a pure material,
100
uM = pckPL -
p,,
'
(4-60)
0
where p ch = parachor
PL = density of the liquid phase, gm/cc
p, = density of the vapor phase, gm/cc
u = surface tension, dynes/cm
M = molecular weight
Parachors for pure hydrocarbons, nitrogen, and carbon dioxide are given
in Table 4-15. A correlation of the parachor with molecular weight is presented in Fig. 4-55. For a mixture the surface tension is defined by the
following relation:
100
200
300
400
Molecular weight
FIG. 4-55. Parachors for hydrocarbons e, n~paraffins; O, heptanes plus of Ref. 7;

gasolines; b., crude oil. (From Katz et al. )
.&,
The densities PL and p,, must be in grams per cubic centimeter to use in
Eq. (4-61) with the parachors of Table 4-15 or F~g. 4-55.
The calculation of surface tension is presented m Example 4-14. In Fig.
4-56 are presented comparisons of experimental and calculated surface ten~
sions of mixtures of hydrocarbons.
309
308
Density of liquid = 44.429 lb/cu ft*

Density of vapor = 5.803 lb/cu ft*
PL = 44.429 lb/cu ft = 729 gm/cc
p, = 5.803 lb/cu ft = 0.093 gm/cc
30
'
25
,\
_,
ul< =
\'l
-':'. 2on
~
<
"
-~ 15
<
.:e
"
~10
"
~
"'
i P,,,,,(x,; -
i=l
y,
J,;)
11
0 729
.EL =
= 0.005938
ML
119.9
+'\
\
'.
'
{\
(3)
Mole
Com- fraction fraction
ponent liquid
vapor
(I)
).. \~
(2)
0 093
h- = 20.48
= 0 .004541
M.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(7)
Mole
i~
I/
'\!\ \'
''
1,000
'
2,000
~..,,.,,
..._
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
Saturation pressure, lb/sq in. absolute
F1a. 4_-56. Experimental and calculated surface tension of crude oils. () (+) ()
expenmental data at 88F; (A), experimental data at 95F (o) (..6.) calculated
data at 120F. (After Katz et al.33 )
'
'
'
TABLE 4-15. PARACHORS FOR PURE SUBSTANCES
Component
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
n-Hexane
n-Heptane
n-Octane
Nitrogen (in n-heptane)

Carbon dioxide
Parachor
77.o
108.0
150.3
181.5
190.0
225
232
271
311
352
41.0
78.0
_Example 4-14. Calculation of Surface Tension of Crude Oil Containing

Dissolved Gares. Eqmhbrmm phases at 1,744 psia and 200F:
Mol wt of liquid = 119.9*
Mo! wt of vapor = 20.48*
c,
c,
c,
c.
c,
c,
c,.
" C1+
"'
0.2752
0.0657
0.0665
0.0584
0.0454
0.0432
0.4456
1.0000
0.8424
0.0752
0.0405
0.0217
0.0095
0.0052
0.0055
1.0000
mol wt
PL
Zi ML
Y M.
0.001634
0.000390
0.000395
0.000347
0.000270
0.000257
0.002645
0.003825
0.000341
0.000184
0.000099
0.000043
0.000024
0.000025"
(4) - (5)
P""
parachor
-0.002191
+0.000054
+0.000211
+0.000248
+0.000227
+0.000233
+0.002620
77.0
108.0
150.3
190.0
229.0
271.0
575.00
(6)
(7)
-0.169
+0.006
+0.032
+0.047
+0.052
+0.063
+l.511
1.542
225.
* Calculated from fluid analyses by methods previously discussed.
.. ~ = 1.542. u = 5.650 dynes/cm surface tension at 1, 744 psia and 200F.

Viscosity of Liquids
The definitions of viscosity presented in the discussion of gores hold for
liquids_ In contrast to gases, liquids decrease in viscosity with increasing
temperature. This is generally attributed to tbe increared distance between molecules due to thermal expansion of the liquid. The viscosity relations of paraffin hydrocarbons at atmospheric pressure are presented in
Fig. 4-57. Liquid viscosity increases with molecular weight and decreases
with temperature.
The viscosity in centipoises divided by the density pin grams per cubic
centimeter is defined as the kinematic viscosity in centistokes. In mathematical notation
v = !!
p
where v is the kinematic viscosity.
(4-62)
310
The kinematic viscosity exhibits a linear trend when plotted as a function o~ ~empern.tu:e on a special chart available from the American Society
of Testmg Mate'."'als (ASTM). Thus, observations at only two temperatures enable.the investigator to determine the viscosity at other tempera..
of additive fluidity. Fluidity is the reciprocal of viscosity. Therefore, the

role of additive fluidity can be written mathematically as
l.
...,.
tures.
where
10
8
I
I
~ :l: (vol%); + 100
311
(4-63)
.,. = viscosity of mixture

(vol%); ~ vol 3 of ith component in mixture
i = viscosity of ith component
Vapor space
Tube
1. 0
"'
o. 8
:C
0. 6
0.4
;;;
>
Q2
(b)
(a)
FIG. 4-58. (a) Ostwald viscosimeter. (From ASTM .) (b) Rolling-ball Yiscosimeter.
oo4 ;--'---;!;;---'---::f:::---'-..,c:1:,~L-_L~1-.....l.~..L_j~_L_J
40
80
120
160
200
240
280
Molecular weight
~~~u!,1s; Viscosity of paraffin rydrocarbon liquids at atmospheric pressure.
(From
The .kinematic viscosity of liquids at atmospheric pressure is usually

determmed _by means of a ~odified Ostwald (Fig. 4-58a) or other capillarytuIJ: viscos1m~ter. The viscosity of a liquid at elevated pressure is ordin~nly detenruned with a rolling-ball viscosimeter such as illustrated in
Fig. 4-58b.
Hydrocarbon liquids are nonpolar and, therefore, obey closely the rule
The effect of pressure on the viscosity of a liquid is sho,vn in Fig. 4-59.

It will be noted that \Vith an increase in pressure the viscosity is increased.
This effect 'vill occur in all hydrocarbon systems if the system is compressed
above the bubble-point pressure. If tv\ro phases are present during the compression, lighter constituents will enter the liquid phase, thus causing the
Yiscosity to decrease. This effect will be discussed in connection with laboratory measurements in Chap. 5.
Viscosity correlates closely with the density or API gravity of the liquid.
However, discussion of the means of estimating the viscosity of liquids 'vill
be deferred to Chap. 5, as the existing correlations require concepts yet to
be presented.
TABLE 4-16
312
VAPOR PRESSURE OF THE LIGHTER HYDROCARBONS,
Hydrocarbon
Temp,
Temp.,
1.6 1 - , - - - , - - - , , - - . - - - . - - . . , ,
500
f,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
PSP'
3,000
Pressure, psi
Fla. 4-59. The viscosity of a crystal oil under pressure as compared with its
viscosity at atmospheric pressure .,,. (After Sage, Sherbome, and Lacey.f/JIJ)
Vapor Pressure
Vapor pressure is a characteristic of a pure substance which is generally
associated with properties of liquids. Actually, for a substance to exhibit
a vapor pressure, the conditio_ns of pressure and temperature must be such
that the substance exists in the two-phase region.
The vapor pressures of light hydrocarbons are tabulated in Table 4-16
as a function of pressure. Methane is not listed as its critical temperature
is -117F, well below ordinary temperatures. A substance which exists at
a pressure and temperature corresponding to a point on the vapor-pressure
l?urve may exist as a liquid, a gas, or a mixture of the two phases depending
on the total energy of the system. The change of energy levels is the subject of thermodynamics and will not be considered here. From energy concepts, however, it can be shown that the logarithm of the vapor pressure of
a substance is linear with the reciprocal of the temperature.
A more co=on method for graphically presenting vapor-pressure data
of hydrocarbons is the Cox chart (Fig. 4-60). The pressure scale is logarithmic, and the temperature scale is determined by drawing an arbitrary
line on the chart for the vapor pressure of water. At each pressure point
on the line, a temperature corresponding to the vapor pressure of water
is defined. The vapor pressures for hydrocarbons plotted on such a chart
are linear and tend to converge to a common point. This property is
useful in extrapolating vapor pressures of pure substances to temperatures
'F
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
Butane
32
34
36
38
40
348
358
367
377
387
69.6
71.4
73.4
75.3
77.4
25.9
27.1
28.3
29.6
30.9
14.9
15.5
16.1
16.7
17.4
5.0
5.3
5.6
5.9
6.2
3.5
3.7
3.9
4.1
4.3
.87
.92
.98
1.04
1.10
0.0
1.1
2.2
3.3
4.4
42
44
46
48
50
79.6
82.0
84.5
87.1
89.8
32.2
33.5
34.8
36.1
37.4
18.1
18.9
19.7
20.5
21.4
6.5
6.8
7.1
7.4
7.7
4.5
4.7
4.9
5.1
5.4
1.16
1.22
1.29
1.36
1.43
5.6
6.7
7.8
8.9
10.0
52
54
56
58
60
92.7
95.8
99.0
102.2
105.5
38.9
40.0
41.3
42.6
43.9
22.3
23.2
24.1
25.1
26.1
8.0
8.3
8.6
8.9
9.2
5.7
6.0
6.3
6.6
6.9
1.50
1.58
1.66
1.74
1.83
11.1
12.2
13.3
14.4
15.6
62
66
68
70
108.9
112.4
115.9
119.4
122.9
45.2
46.5
47.8
49.2
50.7
27.1
28.1
29.1
30.1
31.1
9.6
10.0
10.4
10.8
11.2
7.2
7.5
7.8
8.1
8.4
1.93
2.03
2.14
2.25
2.37
16.7
17.8
18.9
20.0
21.1
72
74
76
78
80
126.4
130.0
133.6
137.3
141.1
52.2
53.7
55.3
56.9
58.6
32.l
33.1
34.2
35.3
36.4
11.6
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.7
8.7
9.0
9.4
9.8
10.2
2.49
2.62
2.76
2.90
3.05
22.2
23.3
24.4
25.6
26.7
145.0
149.0
153.1
157.3
161.5
60.3
62.1
63.9
67.7
37.5
38.7
39.9
41.2
42.5
14.3
14.8
15.5
16.2
16.9
10.6
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
3.21
3.37
3.53
3.70
3.87
27.8
28.9
30.0
31.1
32.2
165.8
170.2
174.7
179.2
183.7
69.7
71.7
73.7
75.8
77.9
43.8
45.2
46.7
48.3
49.9
17.6
l.3
19.0
19.7
20.4
13.0
13.5
14.1
14.7
15.3
4.05
4.23
4.42
4.62
4.83
33.3
34.4
35.6
36.7
37.8
102
104
106
108
110
188.3
193.0
197.8
202.7
207.7
80.1
82.3
84.6
86.9
89.3
51.5
53.2
55.0
56.9
58.9
21.1
21.8
22.6
23.4
24.3
15.9
16.5
17.2
17.9
18.6
5.05
5.28
5.52
5.77
6.03
38.9
40.0
41.1
42.2
43.3
112
114
116
118
120
212.7
217.8
223.0
228.3
233.7
91.7
94.2
96.7
99.3
101.9
61.0
63.2
65.5
67.8
70.1
25.2
26.1
27.1
28.1
29.2
19.3
20.0
20.8
21.6
22.4
6.29
6.56
6.84
7.13
7.43
44.4
45.6
46.7
47.8
48.9
64
82
84
86
88
Critical
temp
90
92
94
96
98
100
65.8
313
IsoPentane Hexane
pentane
'C

0
='c
"
'
:Q:i~ .,
~,}X
~'IT
,".
' "
' ''
\
'"
1.' '
"\ \
The qualitative phase behavior of hydrocarbon systems and the quantitative behavior of the vapor and liquid states have been discussed. 1~he
quantitative analysis of two-phase systems will be discussed in the remainder of this chapter. Two-phase, gas and liquid, systems exist at conditions of pressure and temperature within the region enclosed by the
bubble-point and dev.r-point curves.
The quantitative analysis of two-phase systems involves the determination of the mole fractions of gas and liquid present at a given condition
and the computation of the composition of the coexisting phases. The
physical properties of the gas and liquid phases within this two-phase region can then be computed by the procedures previously described.
As was shown in Fig. 4-6, if a fluid existing at its bubble point is subjected to a pressure decline at constant temperature, two phases are formed.
The proportion of the gas phase increases, \Vith decreasing pressure, because of two phenomena. The more volatile constituents escape from the
liquid phase and enter the gas phase. Also, the gas formed at higher pressures expands and occupies a larger volume.
The idealized volume relations during such a process are shown in Fig.
4-61. A portion of the gas volume Vu is shown to be gas released between
'
'
~,.
'%..,~
0
~
..
'
..
I\
'
,\
j\
'
ca
'
OL
'.
09
'
r.
OS
'', 0
\
O'
'
'' '
01
0
01
00
I'
,\
0
001
" "
'. ~
'
i\ '
''
'
\
\i\
.
"-
'
06
r:
"'-
09
,.
I'
'
/'
.
'
,j
'
''
..,,\ I
.
"
''
~\~
o o=.\
'
. ~~~ ~
"-
"-
1.
.,.
'
~\~
"-
I\
. "'' .
~
' '-
~ \.'l
'
~\I'
;..\
.\
I\ \
\I
oa
'
PROPERTIES OF TWO-PHASE SYSTEMS
'
'\
\\
00
00
It.
I' '
O'
1.-~o=.
'"--~
'
'
-.._-.,.I
'
-.-:
II
. .
'
above their critical temperature. This extrapolation is required in certain

calculations of properties of mixtures.
Mixtures of hydrocarbons do not exhibit a true vapor pressure, as the
bubble-point and dew-point curves do not coincide. But in evaluating
tank storage problems, the concept of vapor pressure is useful. It can be
used as a measure of the losses of liquid petroleum by evaporation and to
estimate the internal pressures \.vhich the tanks must \.vithstand.
Vapor pressure may be considered as a measure of the volatility of a
pure substance in a mixture and as such will be discussed in the next section of this chapter.
oa
.~~'
' '..
\
"c
,_ o~
'p
?~
0
,. .
'
,\
\\
' ,~
'
0'0-
T= Constant
f?Z:l
~
Expanded volume of gos

previously released
~
~
Space occupied by gos on

pressure reduction
O>
cs-
Pressure~
314
315
FrG. 4-61. Idealized volume relation in the two-phase region.
316
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEEillNG
pressure increments, and a portion is shown to be the expanded volume of

,o;as previously released. The volume of liquid phase present decreases, or
shrinks. The total volume of the system increases, as a mass of gas represents a larger volume than an equal mass of liquid. Fluid samples are frequently subjected to laboratory tests, conducted at reservoir temperature,
which duplicate the process illustrated in Fig. 4-61. The results of the
laboratory test are referred to as the pressure-volume relation for the fluia.
If a sample of a bubble-point fluid is brought to separator conditions,
the fluid enters the two-phase region but at a temperature much lower
than reservoir temperature (see Fig. 4-61). The idealized volume relations
for expansion of a fluid from bubble point to separator conditions are
shown in Fig. 4-62. Large volumes of gas are formed at the separator con-
in the stock tank depending on the relation of separator conditions to
stock-tank conditions.
If a given mass of fluid is subjected to the processes described above,
then the following definitions can be made:
1. The volume of liquid v. at reservoir temperature and the prevailing
pressure divided by the volume of oil collected in the stock tank V,, is
defined as the oil formation volume factor B .
2. The total volume of the system v, divided by the volume of stocktank oil is defined as the total formation volume factor B,.
In equation form,
B 0 - V.
V.,
B - V,
t -V.rt
I
I
Removed from
system at
I
I
separator
I
I
Removed
- _,... ---~}
Vg
system at from
d
Lj_____ _
--
Vsep
P=
fb,
T= Tres
Stock tonk.
v,1
-----
P= ~ep T= ~ep
1-9 ~ 100
Vo
Fza. 4-62. Idealized volume relations of hydrocarbon fluid at reservoir conditions

and separator conditions.
ditions, as the density of the gas is usually quite low. The liquid volume
shrinks substantially because of decreased temperature and the escape of
a portion of the fluid into the gas phase. In most instances the greater
part of the mass of the system remains in the liquid phase. Because of the
greater density of the liquid, this liquid mass occupies much less volume
than the gas. The liquid and gas phases formed in the separator are withdrawn separately (hence the name of the device, separator). The separator
liquid is collected in the stock tank, at which point additional temperature
and pressure drop may occur. Gas may or may not be released in quantity
317
(4-64)
and v, = V. + V, (see Fig. 4-61).

The two volume factors defined above, together with the gas volume
factor Bu, enable the petroleum-reservoir engineer to describe the volume
changes in fluid systems. The volume factors B. and B, can be computed
from equilibrium calculations or measured in the laboratory. The theory
of equilibrium calculations will be developed in this chapter, while the
laboratory processes will be discussed in Chap. 5.
Equihl>rium Relations
If a fluid is subjected to a process such that in the two-phase region the
gas and liquid phases remain in contact, equilibrium will be maintained
between the phases. One of the first means of evaluating the equilibrium
behavior of multicomponent two-phase systems was devised by combining
Dalton's and Raoult 1s laws.
Dalton's law is defined by Eqs. (4-24) and (4-25):
p =
p,
(4-24)
i=l
and
p,
y, = p
(4-25)
The statement of Ra.cult's law is "the partial pressure exerted by a constituent of the liquid phase is equal to the vapor pressure of that constituent times the mole fraction of that constituent in the liquid phase."
That is,
(4-65)
Pi= x,.P,,i
319
318
11..i = fLi = Ki
Xi
fgi
where Pi = partial pressure of ith component

x, = mole fraction of ith component in liquid phase
P .,,i = vapor pressure of ith component
"When a gas and a liquid phase are in equilibrium, the partial pressure
exerted by a constituent in the gaseous phase must be equal to the partial
pressure exerted by that same constituent in the liquid phase. Therefore,
it is possible to equate the partial pressure calculated by Dalton's and
Raoult's laws.
Yip
or
XiPvi
?/i=p"i=K
Xi
'
and
(fLi)m<x = Xi(fLi)pure
or, dropping the subscripts pure,
10
'
'
"'-.
0""'
'
'\,,
'
""-. "'
o~
'
''
"'\.~o
'('o"'@
'!'-.,
~
~
'
t'..
'<o~
@
'\,,
'1'
' I'--
r---,,_
o~
@~
'
"''-
'-...._
=~
@~
""
'
"'-..
' -... ...._

;.,.
'~
' ....._
'<>"'@
c:i.,., 'I
0. I
<',.
"'
'
""' '-,%,
""
'
~'
K I
"'
'
...... ....
/'
"'.;,
""
$<;::>..,__
'@-
(4-68)
where the subscript "mix" refers to the mixture and "pure" to the component in the pure state, fui is the fugacity of a component in the gas phase,
and fL, is the fugacity of that component in the liquid phase. The fugacity
of a component in the gas phase is equal to the fugacity of that component
in the liquid phase if the phases are in equilibrium. Thus
Yi(fai)pure = Xi(fL.;)pure
The fugacity as defined above is also limited by the critical temperatures

of many hydrocarbons. However, the fugacities can be extrapolated to
cover a wider range of conditions than the vapor-pressure relations. Even
this is not sufficient accurately to define equilibrium ratios in hydrocarbon
systems over a wide range of pressure and temperature. The attractive
(4-66)
where Ki is defined as the equilibrium ratio of the ith component at pressure P and some temperature T.
Certain limitations are placed on the above defi11ition by Raoult's la\v
and Dalton's law. It is evident that any pure con:-;tituent has a vapor
pressure only up to its critical tempen1ture. Beyon<l this temperature there
is no true vapor-pressure curve for a pure constituent. The vapor-pressure
curves of such constituents can be extrapolated to higher temperatures.
However, this practice does not yield satisfactory results in most cases.
Since the critical temperature of methane is -1l7F, it becomes evident then that some other means must be obtained for the determination
of equilibrium ratios if they are to be used for hydrocarbon mixtures.
Lewis39 introduced the concept of fugacity for the extrapolation or correction of vapor pressures to use in equilibrium calculations. The fugacity
of a component is a thermodynamic quantity defined in terms of the change
in free energy in passing from one state to another state. Dodge and
Newton 40 have shown that the fugacity of a component in a phase of a
mixture is equal to the fugaclty of that component in the same phase in
the pure state and at the same conditions of pressure and temperature as
the mixture times the mole fraction that component represents of the mixture. Thus
(4-67)
(fai)mix = Yi(fui)pure
(4-69)
"\..
0.01
IO
100
'"
./.
"~
1,000
10,000
Pressure, psio
F10. 4-63. Equilibrium ratios at 200F for a low-shrinkage oil. (From Katz anci
Hachmuth.0 )
---------
320
force between the molecules affect the vapor-liquid equilibria. Therefore,

at higher pressure and temperatures the composition of the mixture affects
the equilibrium ratio. As both Raoult's and Dalton's laws and the fugacitv
321
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCA!IBON FLUIDS
4-63), and Roland, Smith, and Kaveler" presented data for condensate
fluids (Fig. 4-64).
Development of Equations for Calculating Equilibrium Relations
40
From equilibrium concepts and appropriate equilibrium ratios, the com-
1"-
"" ""
20
'
lO
8
6
'
E
E
o.s
'-<%o.,.~
1'
<<t>"I
~"';:_
~-0
'"
' I'-
'
~0.4
'
't-..
'~"'"~
'
01
.,
I
"'~s
!'-..
(4-70)
n=L+ V
That is, the total number of moles of composite is equal to the moles in the
liquid phase plus the moles in the vapor phase.
From which, by definition of the mole fraction,
z,(n) = x,(L) + y;(V)
(4-71)
"'-~
This states simply that the moles of the ith constituent in the total must
be equal to the sum of the moles of the ith constituent in the vapor and
liquid phases.
A third equation by definition of the equilibrium ratio is
ODS
006
I
004
001
100
'
K '. -- Ii!
~s
002
moles in vapor phase at same conditions as L

fraction of ith constituent in mixture
fraction of ith constituent in liquid phase
fraction of ith constituent in vapor phase
By definition,
-~
total
mole
x, = mole
Yi = mole
=
Zi =
"'~s
~
; 0.6
0.2
'
r-...~
"i ~
sure and temperature

L = total .moles of material within liquid phase at conditions of n
o_,.~
"-..
n = total moles of both gas and liquid present at any state of pres-
%~
'
'-
position of the equilibrium gas and liquid phases and the fraction of the
mixture existing in each phase can be calculated.
In deriving the various equations describing phase equilibrium, it is
convenient to define a group of terms and symbols as follows:
1,000
(4-72)
X;
As Xi, Yi, and Zi represent mole fractions, three more relations can be
stated from the definitions.
10,000
Pressure, psio
.X;
FI-0. 4-64. Equilibrium ratios at 200<>F for a condensate fluid. (From Roln.nd et al.~ )
relation calculate equilibrium ratios independently of composition, it is

necessary to find another means for their determination.
The petroleum industry relies on experimentally determined equilibrium
ratios (sometimes called equilibrium constants or K values). Katz and
Hachmuth" presented equilibrium-ratio data for low-shrinkage oils (Fig.
y;
i=l
i=1
Z;
(4-73)
i=l
For 1 mole of mixture, n = 1,
V+L=l
therefore
z, = x;L
+ y,V
(4-74)
(4-75)
If y, is replaced by its equivalent K,x,,

Z; = X;(L
If both sides are divided by (L
+ K,V)
+ K;V), the following equation is obtained:
------------------ ---- - - - - - - - - - - -
322
Z;
x; = L
+ K;V
If on the right side of the above equation both the numerator and denominator are divided by V, the results are as follows:
v1 (L/V) + K,
Zi
X;
(4-76)
As Xi represents the mole fraction of the ith constituent in the liquid phase,
the sum of the mole fractions of all the constituents is 1. Therefore,
{'
i., x, =
i:-1
1 {'
Z;
V i=l
i., (L/V) + K;
{'
Z;
= i., L
i=l
+ VK,
= l
(4-74) to solve for Land V, the mole fractions of liquid and vapor, respectively. The two equations thus available for the solution for two unknowns
must be solved by a trial-and-error procedure. Several alternative forms of
Eqs: (4-77) through (4-80) can be derived. The form selected depends on
the estimated magnitude of L and the computing method to be used.
At the bubble-point pressure, L = 1 and V:::: 0, since all the mixture
can be considered as a single-phase liquid. Equations (4-76) through (4-78)
become meaningless at the bubble point. Likewise at the dew point, L '.:::::" 0
and V = I and Eqs. (4-79) and (4-80) are meaningless. However, at the
bubble point
(4-77)
or
or
(L/V~'+ K, =
i=l
(4-78)
and
A similar equation can be obtained by replacing x; in Eq. (4-75) by its

equivalent Yi/Ki, which, on solving for Yi, yields
Z;
y, = (L/K;)
+V
{'
{'
_L., Y<
i.=
Z;
_L., (L/K;)
i=
y,
(4-81)
z,K, = 1
i=l
which is a reduced form of Eq. (4-79).

Thus at the bubble point, the mixture is in equilibrium with an infinitesimal amount of gas having a composition defined by
At the dew point,
+V
= l
(4-79)
or
i=l
i=l
Yi= zJ(i
The summation of Yi is equal to 1; thus
and
323
(L/K,~) + 1 =
(4-80)
These equations apply within the two-phase region. In equilibrium calculations, the con1position of the composite fluid or feed must be ~own
together with the pressure and temperature at which the equilibrium exists.
Suitable equilibrium ratios for each component must be available as defined by the conditions of pressure and temperature and the composition
of the composite. In general if the system is comprised of m components,
the number of unkno"\V"IlS in the calculations are equal to 2m + 2, m values
of xi, m values of Yi, and the values of L and V. There are available m
equations Yi = Ktxi and m equations Zi = xiL + YiV. In addition for 1
mole of feed V + L = 1 and l:z, = l:x; = l:y, = I. Thus there are available 2m + 2 equations to solve for 2m + 2 unknowns. As can be noted
from Eqs. (4-74) through (4-77), it is not possible to solve analytically for
explicit values of the unknowns. However, in Eqs. (4-74) through (4-77)
the number of unknowns have been reduced by substitution to two, Land
V. Thus any of Eqs. (4-77) through (4-80) can be used together with Eq.
and
"'
i=l
i=l
Z;
x,. =Ki
.z:x,=.Z:;;=l
(4-82)
which is a reduced form of the last segment of Eq. (4-77).

The mixture at the de'v point is in equilibrium with an infinitesimal
quantity of liquid having a composition defined by
z,
Ki
x-=i
Experimentally Determined Equilibrium Ratios.

is defined as
K ; -- '!Ji
The equilibrium ratio
X;
The value of Ki is dependent upon the pressure, temperature, and composition of the hydrocarbon system. Equilibrium ratios for a low-shrinkage
oil and a condensate at temperatures of 200F are shown in Figs. 4-63 and
4-64 as functions of pressure. The equilibrium ratios for all constituents
324
(K values) for both types of fluids are shown to converge to a value of 1 at

about 5,000 psia. This point is termed the convergence pressure. If the
temperature at which the equilibrium ratios were presented was the critical
temperature of the mixture, then the convergence pressure would be the
critical pressure. For all temperatures other than the critical temperature,
the convergence of K values is only an "apparent" convergence. The system will have either a dew point or a bubble point at some pressure less
than the convergence pressure and exist as a single-phase fluid at the conditions expressed by the point of apparent convergence. As equilibrium
ratios are undefined in the single-phase region, it is the extrapolation of the
actual values which apparently converges to 1.
The apparent convergence pressure is a function of the composition of
the mixture. The effect of composition is correlated by means of convergence pressures in the most extensive set of published equilibrium ratios
for hydrocarbons, the NGAA "Equilibrium Ratio Data Book." 43 Equilibrium ratios for hydrocarbons, methane through decane, and nitrogen
for a 5,000-psia convergence pressure are reproduced in Figs. 4-65 through
4-77 by permission of the NGAA. Data for carbon dioxide and hydrogen
sulfide from the same source are presented in Figs. 4-78 and 4-79, respectively, for a 4,000-psia-convergence pressure. The values for 5,000-psia convergence pressures can be used for a large number of hydrocarbon systems.
The effect of composition on K values is shown in Fig. 4-80, where
values for 1,000- and 5,000-psia convergence pressures are compared at a
t.emperature of 100F. The differences in K values for the two convergence
pressures at pressures below 100 psia are not significant for the lighter hydrocarbons ethane through pentane. For fluids with convergence pressures
of 4,000 psia or greater, the values of the equilibrium ratios are essentially
the same to pressures of 1,000 psia. It then becomes apparent that at low
pressures and temperatures equilibrium ratios are nearly independent of
composition. To define the K values for a mixture at higher pressures it is
necessary to define the convergence pressure of the mixture. A discussion
. of the selection of the proper convergence pressure is presented in Chap. 5.
In conventional analyses of hydrocarbon fluids everything heavier than
hexane is grouped together and reported as heptanes plus. This fraction is
a mixture of materials of varying volatility. Because the vapor-pressure
curves and critical properties of the hydrocarbons heavier than hexane are
fairly close together, it is possible to characterize the mixture by an average
set of K values. The properties of heptanes plus can be estimated from the
properties of heavier hydrocarbons such as nonane or decane. Normally a
more satisfactory procedure for characterizing the heptanes plus is to use
correlated experimental data for heptanes-plus fractions of fluids with
similar properties to those under consideration. For this purpose equilibrium ratios for the heptanes-plus fractions reported by Katz and
325
FIG. 4-65. Equilibrium ratios for methane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.")
l
326
F1a. 4-66. Equilibrium ratios for ethane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.~)
327
Fra. 4-67. Equilibrium ratios for propane, 5,~psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.~)
... - - -
--------------
l
328
F:rc. 4-68. Equilibrium ratios for isobutane1 5 000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.43 )
'
329
FIG. 4-69. Equilibrium ratios for normal butane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure.
(From NGAA.~}
330
FliNDA1'1ENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS

3.000
331
I tl~~
Booed on !9"'7 t<>bulat;on> of G. G.

B......,, U~ty of M.:hgao. E<
ncpoloted cnd d''"" by The fl""'
Q.-p. Ltd. for lhe NG1u..,1 Gaool<>e
~iotiotl of
1957.
-i<o '"
F1a. 4-70. Equilibrium ratios for isopentane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.~)
FIG. 4-71. Equilibrium ratios for normal pentane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure.
(From NGAA.'3)
332
PETROLEUM R:ESERVOIR ENGINEERING
333
PRESSURE, PSIA
'"'
F1G. 4-72. Equilibrium ratios for hexane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.~)
FIG. 4-73. Equilibrium ratios for heptane, 5,000-psia con,ergenee pressure. (From
1VGAA.43 )
334
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR E~GINEERING
~l~A!-.!~ Equilibrium ratios for oc-tanf', 5,000-psia convergence pre~mre.
(From
FIG. 4-75. Equilibrium ratios for nonane, 5,000-psia COil\"ergence pressure.

NGAA.n)
335
(From
336
FUNDA:MENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
Fra. 4-76. Equilibrium ratios for decane, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.g)
337
Fro. 4-77. Equilibrium ratios for nitrogen, 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From
NGAA.~)
338
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR E:-rGINEERING
1. ?or...i_
r._
339
PRESSURE, PSIA
I 7 '110.000
'-""'
AIM 19a 226 0953i
2_ Pet,.,I. T""""- AIME 195 99 (1952}
'
100
1. Petrol.T....... AIMEl98226!195JJ
2. Petrol. T.-. AIM!i 195 99 (\9")
""""
J_
~!P.is~l?'l~bi''fr~'""
3. C.E.P.
Equ;l;t,,;,, s.,.mpa.iurn
Vol. 48 No. 2 P. 121 0952)
'
l. & E.C 30 53'1 0946!
.t,
FIG. 4-78. Equilibrium ratios for carbon dioxide, 4,000-psia convergence pressure.
(From NGAA.~)
I. & E.C. JO 53' (!'MM
F1a. 4-79. Equilibrium ratios for hydrogen sulfide, 4,000-psia convergence pressure.
(From A'GAA.'43)
340
FUNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR 01" HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
10 0
""
r-...
~ T"-..
~
,... ,..
r.....
........... f'=:: ,.,
~
J".. ,... ....""
i--....._
0J
~
0.0
,...... r--. ,..
'
f~
~ t--
~~~
,..~
:::-. ,.._
K
c, -
!..- [,
t--
~ ,._
c.
!-- 1--
...
....... .;-- ""';..
r---. ~ "'~"'"~ ~ ~ r--. !--. ....
~
c;,
r--.::: ~ ,_ ~ '~
)'.
t-.:L
...
-,._
sired accuracy.
)'-,
""'
~
~ ~ ""~~ ~ ~
1 "'-
K values so determined used in Eq. (-1-81) or (+.82) depending on whether

a bubble point or dew point is sought. If the sum of the calculated values
does not equal 1, another pressure is ::.elected and the calculations repeated. Trials are continued until the sum is determined within the de-
'""' ,.... ,.. ~~
r..... ~ ,..
r--_
I/II
I ,f J
/)
/
t-~
0.00 f
0..000 f
341
O
N
0
0
...,
0
0
..,.
00
00
In <D
" L-- !?
./
o.t~~~~
'
"'
,
..
From Kotz (crude oil l

!
I I I I!!
1--"'~t--+-++Nft\<- /From Roland, Smith --1-..of.1

'-lll-l+H--H
""~ and Kave/er
_ _J;,''i!--ill/-l---'H-++tl
l---+"i,.,l-._-++++-Ni~""1' (condensate fl~~d~?
.1 / /
~ ~",h ~
'
~
~
'i
gg
=s
Q.
N
Pressure, psia
F1G. 4-80. Comparison of equilibrium ratios at l00F for 1,000- and 5,000-psia convergence pressure. (From NGAA. 43 )
Hachmuth" and Roland, Smith, and Kaveler4' are plotted in Fig. 4-81. The
data of Katz are preferred for crude-oil systems, and the data of Roland
et al. are preferred for condensate fluids.
Calculating Procedures for Solution of Equilibrium Problems. The
basic relations developed in Eqs. (4-74) through (4-77) apply to hydroca.rbon systems which exist at pressures and temperatures within the twophase region. Equations (4-78) and (4-79) apply to the special conditions
existing at the bubble-point and dew-point pressures.
The solution of the equations to determine the dew-point and bubble-point pressures requires the selection of appropriate equilibrium ratios at
the temperature of interest. An estimate of the pressure is made, and the
O.OOOttLO--L-...L...Ll..l..U.LtOOL-...L-L-l-l...l-W<L!,0:-!0:::0:--'--'-'-'--'-"10!;-;oPOO
Pressure, psio
FIG. 4-81. Equilibrium ratios of heptanes-plus fraction. (Adapted from Katz and
Hachmuth'1 and Roland et al.'':l)
The primary use of dew-point or bubble-point pressure calculations in

petroleum-production engineering 'vork is in connection with adjusting
equilibrium ratios to observed bubble-point o~ dew-point pressure~.
.
The calculation of phase equilibrium ,yj_thin the t\YO-phase region mvolves the selection of equilibrium constants for the conditions of pressure
and temperature under consideration and the solution of the reln.tions expressed in Eqs. (4-77) through (4-80). Essentially two types of_ problems
:ue oi interest: the equilibrium between phases at reservoir conditions and
at separator conditions. The calculative methods for these cases are identical except in the final volume calculation of the liquid. However, the
------------
342
FTJNDAMENTALS OF THE BEHAVIOR OF HYDROCARBON FLUIDS
,:;:election of appropriate equilibrium ratios for reservoir conditions is more

difficult. The calculation of such equilibriums based on adjusted equilibrium ratios will be discussed in Chap. 5.
For separator calculations at pressures of 500 psi or less, the 5,000-psi
convergence pressure charts of the NGAA can be used for most naturally
occurring hydrocarbon mixtures. The equilibrium ratio of the heptanesplus fraction can be obtained from Fig. 4-81 or estimated as being equivalent to octane or nonane from the NGAA charts.
The procedure of solution is as follows:
1. Select a set of published equilibrium-ratio data which applies to the
system of interest.
2. From the selected equilibrium-ratio data determine the value of K,

for each component at the desired pressure and temperature.
3. Assume a value of V, thus fixing the other value by the equation
L +V = 1
4. Solve the following equations:
(4-74)
Z;
VK,
(4-77)
5. If
X; =
1, the problem is solved and the value assumeclfc;r V or
i=l
L is the correct value. The values calculated for x/s represent the analysis
m
of the liquid. If
X;
r' 1, then the assumed value of
V or Lis not correct
and that of the vapor from

or
6a. If the calculated value (V)=" is not equal to the assumed value
a new assumption for V must be made and the calculation repeated.
7a. By several successive trials V can be calculated to an accuracy of
about 0.0001.
The procedure outlined is in most convenient form for solution with a
desk calculator which has a cumulative multiplication feature. Successive
trials can be made with a minimum transcription of numbers from the
calculator to a table. A plot of the calculated V as a function of the assumed V is of aid in making estimates for later trials. The number of
trials required depends on the experience of the engineer in estimating
values of V.
The above relations apply when liquid is expected to be the major mole
fraction. Although they are valid even though the vapor is the major fraction, it is desirable to use in that case either Eq. (4-79) or (4-80). This
results in determining the composition of the major phase with greater
accuracy.
The solution of equilibrium problems on high-speed computers has stimulated greater interest in flash calculations, particularly in solving reservoir equilibrium problems and multistage separator problems.
.
Rachford 44 has reported on a procedure 'vhich utilizes a form of the equilibrium relation developed as follows:
01
(4-83)
i=l
and it is necessary to assume another value of V or L and repeat step 4.

This particular procedure is \vell suited to slide-rule calculations. It is
perhaps a little slower than other procedures, but the point of convergence
can be defined with fewer significant figures.
A variation of the calculating procedure which is particularly advantageous when using a desk calculator is as follows:
4a. Solve the equation
o,nd
Since
L=l-V
X;=
(L/V
K, = (V)Q,.
(4-78)
5a. If the calculated value (V),.1o is equal to the assumed value V., the
problem is solved and the composition of the liquid can be determined from.
1
X; =
=~-'z"-'=~-.,
(K,-l)V+l
y, = (K, - 1) V
J, J' +
and
Therefore,
2';xi = 2';yi =
{' (y, - x,) = {'
L,
i=l
Zi
v (L/V) + K;
(4-76)
343
(K; - l)z;
L, (K, - 1) V
i-1
+1
Kz)
+ 1 -J(V
' " '
- 0
-
(4-84)
must be assumed, and trial calculations performed. The correct value

of V makes the function f(V,K;,z;) = 0. For other than the correct value
344
the graph of the function has the form shown in Fig. 4-82. The function
has the unique property of yielding negative values if V (assumed) is too
great and positive values if V (assumed) is too small. Trials can be made
by a_lways assuming V = 0.5 for the initial trial, then successively moving
to higher ~r lower values in a systematic fashion by successive halving of
the steps In the assumed values. This procedure yields rapid convergence
on the correct value.
Another procedure proposed by Holland and Davison" uses the following
form of the equilibrium rel a tion:
evaluated. If the function is not equal to zero within the desired accuracy,
a new L is assumed as follo\'\ts:
J,
m
g(L,K,,z,) =
1 - L(i"'_ l/K,) - 1 = O
(4-85)
In this relation Lis assumed and the function is calculated. If the function is not equal to zero 'vith the desired degree of accuracy, a new value
0
Vassumed
0
L assumed
1.0
FIG. 4-82. Graph of Rachford's equilib- FIG. 4-83. Graph of Holland's equilibrium
rium function. (From Rachford and function. (From Holland and Davison.e)
Rice.'-1)
of L is assumed and the calculatign repeated. A graph of the function is

sho"""Il in Fig. 4-83. If, at the pressure selected, the selected temperature
is _greater than the de\v-point temperature of the mixture, no solution
exlSts except the trivial solution L = 0. Also if the selected temperature
is less than the bubble-point temperature, the trivial solution L = O is the
only solution obtained. The dashed curves represent solutions of such
situations. The solid curve represents the function if the pressure and
temperature conditions are truly in the two-phase region. In applying the
method, a value of L very close to I is first assumed. The function is
L1 - L
-
i-i
- g(L,K,,Z;);-1
g'(L,K.,zi)i-1
345
(4-86)
where g'(L,K;,Z;);_1 is the first derivative of g(L,K,,z,);-1 and is equal to

,
~
(1 - I/K,)z,
g (L,K,,z,) = / .., [l - L(l - I/K,)']
(4-87)
i=l
L; is the new assumed value of L, and

of L.
Li-1
is the previous assumed value
Separator Problems
The application of equilibrium calculations to separator problems requires a brief discussion of the separation process. In a separator, a stream
of fluid, referred to as the feed, is brought to equilibrium at the separator
temperature and pressure. The pressure of the separator i8 subject to
direct control by means of pressure-regu1ating devices. The temperature
is usually determined by the temperature of the fluid entering the separator
and the prevailing atmospheric temperature. Thus, the temperature of an
oil-field separator may vary from a low at night to a high during the day.
SP. asonal variations also occur. In some instances separator temperatures
arP. controlled by heating or by refrigeration.
The vapor and liquid are removed from contact on leaving the separator.
Several separators may be operated in series, each receiving the liquid
phase from the separator operating at the next higher pressure. Each condition of pressure and temperature at "\vhich vapor and liquid are separated
is called a stage of separation. Examples of two- and three-stage separation
processes are sho"\vn in Fig. 4-84. It can be noted that a process using one
separator and a stock tank is a t\vo-stage process unless the conditions of
oressure and temperature of the t\vo are identical.
Separator calculations are performed to determine the composition of
the products, the oil volume factor 1 and the volume of gas relea."3ed per
barrel of oil and to determine optimun1 separator conditions for the particular conditions existing in a field.
Example 4-15 presents a sample calculation of t'vo-stage separation
applied to the reservoir fluid of Table 4-13. The equilibrium ratios were
taken from Figs. 4-65 through 4-72 and 4-81. Two calculating procedures
are presented in detail in the example. The calculations are illustrated in
suitable form for the application of desk calculators. Graphs for estimating
the value of V to be used in additional trials after the first two trials are
illustrated in Figs. 4-85 and 4-86 for methods A and B, respectively. In
method A, V (assumed) is plotted for each calculated :Zx,. The correct
----------c==:::;
---~--
347
value of V corresponds to ~xi = 1. Therefore, the extrapolation of a curve

through the calculated points to the line l:x; ~ 1 yields a corrected estimate of V. For method B, V (assumed) is plotted for each V (calculated).
The correct solution should. lie on a. 45 line (slope of 1) which passes
obtained from which the calculated values of y, do not sum to 1. This i

because of minor discrepancies in the K values, and the error can be distributed uniformly over the composition of the vapor to yield corrected
346
1.0
Vo or
~
0.9
I~
Vent
Feed
,,
0.8
,_-~To
pipeline
Liquid
pt
Separator
Psep and Tsep
0.7
Stocktank
at Pst and Tst
Two-stage separation
0.6
,,,, First _
~ assumption
0.5
,,.
E
~
5
1st stage vapor
Vent
Li uid
0.4
0.90
0.4
Feed
To pipeline
Second
assumption
2d sto e vapor
Third
assumption
~
~
1.0
Lxi
0.3
Li uid
15t stage
separator
ot {Psep\ and (T5 epl1
zd
stage
separator
at (Pseplz
Stocktonk
at P5 + and Tst
02
First- stage, method A
and { Tseplz
Three- stage sepor::ition
0. 1
FIG. 4-84. Schematic drawing of separation processes.
through the origin. The intersection of the 45 and a curve through the
calculated points yields the new estimate for V.
The calculation procedure by method A yields directly the values of x;,
the mole fraction of a component in the liquid. The mole fractions of the
components in the vapor are calculated from the definition of the equilibrium ratio.
2.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
Fra. 4-85. Solution of equilibrium ratio equation.-:, Eq. (4--77), for various assumed
gas fractions.
Y values, or they can be calculated by y, = (z, - x;L)/V. For this reason,

if it is expected that the vapor phase composition is critical, the alternative
Yi= KiXi
Frequently, a satisfactozy solution for the values of L, V, and x; will be
3.0
Lx,
relation i: (L/K:J
= 1, based on l:y;, should be used.
'ti 0
0
~
g-.t-30
l:t
..,
tll ('[) O"'

O"('tl.o('[)
"
s:: 8 s:: s::

.,.
" " fl:
i:;; i:i.. S a..
'8"' .,......
g f .!'.'
11 J II
g~
e-t-
?'
"C l::I
"
00
EN~
"'
...
~'.jl.t>
::i. ~ 'I
&:' ~ ~
2,
s-~.l::I
"' g
g'
~ ~ s::
O"'
e. ~
"" ""' "e.
" ~ s::
~ .:i !r
"'
:<" . &
::=i-' bi
0
p..
.g
,.
S- '!'
~.
'ii~
"
~.
:!!
;a
(")
!!.
0
m
:t
II
Q N
o.
-~
?,1
"'
i~~
"l
0
;;
!!.
-g.
Iff z
~
"
0.
'""'
.....
)'
)1'
!1.
"z
;,
"'
g. ~
i!.
.8.
'I
r;;
ff
!i
$1
e.
,."'
p~
'il
11- ;j'
.:Ji!"
Assumed V
p
1t
.0
i::
"' 11l
~ & ~
~ 8. a-:
.@ ..... g
)'
~
0 " s::
w wg
~ "'
[ff
{'!)
-~
g,
c-.
" &."
II
'I
g "' S-
'f
g ~.,.
p.. " [
o~
~ 0
"'g!.~ ""'"
?- ffl
If~
I!..
.. "'
c-.
@!;" ~
l:l'
Assumed V
[~
'!'
p.."'
"
s13 " +
'l
E-:
~~
~ C"
g: " "'
"' p.. "'
('[)
[g
"'"o~"
s s
& 1:1" g.
C'D ro """"'
&:~~~~~L-~l.-~~
a.
__j
0ALCULA'l'ION FOR FIRST-STAGE SEPARATION
(35
PSIA,
40F)
METHOD A [Eo. (4-77)]
Com-
poncnt
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c.
c,.
Total
First assumption:
L -.0.5. V ... 0.5
Reservoir
fluid
analyeis
K, at
35 psia
"
40F4
YK1
0.3396
0.0646
0.0987
0.0434
0.0320
0.0300
0.3917
61.0000
9.000
2.2000
O.OIOOb
O.l570b
0.0350
0.0032
30.5000
4.5000
'"d
I.0000
0.3050
0.0785
0.0175
0.0016
+ rK1
31.0000
5.0000
1.6000
0.8050
0.5785
0.5175
0.5016
Second assumption:
L - 0.55, V "' 0.45
+"l'K;
= x;
0.0109
0.0129
0.0610
0.0539
0.0553
0.0579
0.7809
L+ VK;
----x,
L+"VK1
VK;
L+ VK;
27.4500
4.0500
28.0000
4.0600
1.5400
0.8245
0.620(1
0.5657
0.5514
0.0121
0.0159
0.0641
0.0526
0.0510
0.0530
0.7103
29.2214
4.3113
1.0539
0.2922
0.0752
0.0107
0.0015
28.0000
OJ.IOOO
0.2745
0.0706
0.0157
0.0014
0.9596
~From
b
Figs. 4-65 through 4-72 and 481.

Average of ieo nnd normal.
Equations used:
,,
"'
L+ VK;
i= 1
X;
=I
y, = K,:c,
1/io
Y
= -m--
,: ... 1
Final answer:
0.52096 mole liquid
0.47904 mole vapor
,,
VK;
1.0336
1.0000
Third assumption:
L 0.52096, V - 0.4790!
y;
48.3232
J.5748
0.8131
o.5961
0.5377
0.5224
Y1
-:1;;K;
L+VK;-x;
Q.0114
Q.0133
0.0627
0.0533
Q.0537
0.0559
0.7497
0.6965
0.1203
1.0000
1.0000
0.1379
0.0326
0.0084
0.0019
0.0024
CALCULATION FOR FIRS'I'-STAGE SEPARATION
(35
PSIA1
40F)
METHOD B [Eo. (4-78)]
J(,
Reservoir
fluid
Component
analysis z;
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
psia and
40F"'
L
-v +K.
61.0000
9.0000
2.2000
0.6100'
0.1570'
0.0350
0.0032
62.0000
10.0000
3.2000
1.6100
1.1570
1.0350
1.0032
0.3396
0.0646
0.0987
0.0434
0.0320
0.0300
0.3917
C;+
g]
L - 0.5, V - 0.5
at 35
0.0055
0.0065
0.0308
0.0269
0.0276
0.0290
0.3905
v, -
Total
a
z
L/V +K,
L - 0.55, V - 0.45
L K
v:+ '
z
L/V +IC.
62.2222
10.2222
3.4222
1.8322
1.3792
1.2572
1.2254
L
y+K,
0.0054
0.0063
0.0288
0.0237
0.0232
0.0239
0.3196
v-
0.5168
L - 0.52096, V - 0.47904
X;
z
L/V +K;
62.0875
10.0875
3.2875
1.6975
1.2445
1.1225
1.0907
0.0055
0.0064
0.0300
0.0255
0.0257
0.0268
0.3591
v-
0.4309
0.4790
y,
0.0114
0.0133
0.0627
0.0533
0.0537
0.0559
0.7497
1.0000
J(,x1
0.6965
0.1203
0.1379
0.0326
0.0084
0.0019
0.0024
1.0000
From Figs. 4-65 through 4-72 and 4-81.

Average of iso and nonnal.
Equations used:
i-1
z;
/.., L/V
+ K,
= J(;x;
- V
y,c
X;
Z;
-VL/V +K,
_}jj__
i"' I
Finu.l answer:
0.52096 1nole liquid
0.47004 1nolc vapor
_JI
CALCULATION FOR SECOND STAGE OF SEPARATION
METHOD
Reservoir
Component
fluid
analysis z;
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,.
Total
0.0114
0.0133
0.0627
0.0534
0.0537
0.0558
0.7497
K; at 35
psia and
40F"
145.0000
20.5000
5.1000
1.4000'
0.3750'
0.0750
0.0030
PSIA 1
40F)
First assumption:
Second assumption:
L - 0.95, V - 0.05
L - 0.9789, V - 0.0211
y;
VK.:
7.2500
1.0250
0.2550
0.0700
0.0178
0.0037
0.0001
1.0000
From Figs. 4-65 through 4-72 and 4-81.

"Average of iso and normal.
Final answer:
0.9789 mole liquid
0.0211 mole vapor
(15
+ VK,
8.2000
1.9750
1.2050
1.0200
0.9678
0.9537
0.9501
z
L + VK, - x;
0.0013
0.0067
0.0520
0.0523
0.0554
0.0584
0.7890
1.0154
VK,
3.0595
0.4325
0.1076
0.0295
0.0075
0.0016
0.0006
+ VK;
4.0384
1.4114
1.0865
1.0084
0.9864
0.9805
0.9789
=[(;Xi
+ VK,
0.0028
0.0095
0.0577
0.0529
0.0544
0.0569
0.7658
1.0000
Y
corrected
X;
0.4103
0.1941
0.2942
0.0741
0.0194
0.0043
0.0023
0.0087
0.4109
0.1944
0.2945
0.0742
0.0194
0.0043
0.0023
1.0000
-----~=-
---------------
1
352
In addition to the compositions and the mole fractions of the mixture

which exist in the liquid and vapor phases, three additional parameters are
of interest to the engineer. These are the API gravity of the stock-tank
liquid, the gas-oil ratio, and the oil-formation volume factor .. The API
gravity can be calculated from the density of the stock-tank liquid deter~
mined from the composition by the procedure of Standing and Katz"
discussed earlier in this chapter.
The gas-oil ratio is defined as the volume of gas in standard cubic feet
per barrel of stock-tank oil. Gas is removed from each stage of the separation process so that the gas-oil ratio can be calculated for each stage or
combination of stages. Total gas-oil ratio refers to the sum of the gas volumes in standard cubic feet from all stages divided by the volume in barrels
of stock-tank oil.
In equilibrium (flash) calculations it is customary to solve the equilibrium relations for each stage on the basis of 1 mole of feed to that stage.
Thus, if n 1 moles of feed enter the first stage, the moles of liquid entering
the second stage
n2 = Lin1
and
n3 = L2n2 = L21n1
where n is the moles of feed and the subscripts refer to the stage. If the
third stage is the stock tank, then
nat = L3n3 = LiL2L1n1
where n~t is the moles of liquid remaining in the stock tank for n, moles
into the first separator. In general terms,
n1Il Li
and from the third stage,

n113 = V 3na = V :L:L1n1
In general terms the total gas off all stages
m
nuT
ln
0i
n1
i=l
il
j=l
l Vi if L;
1
n1 - n.,
Ifni= 1, then
ii,,,- =
i-1
V,
i=l
Il L;
:i=l
where n,,,- is the mole fraction of total gas in the feed, such that n, =
cubic feet by multiplying the number of moles by the molal volume v m

from Table 4-5 for the desired standard conditions. Thus the total gas
Volume per mole of feed = n,T V m
The volume of stock-tank oil per mole of feed can be calculated from
the density and molecular weight of the stock-tank oil as follows:
(v8l ) m
_ ii,,M.,
-
p.,
(4-89)
i=l
and ii., is the mole fraction of stock-tank oil in the feed.

In a similar manner the number of moles of gas can be evaluated. Let
n,; be the moles of gas off stage i. Then
n"1
V1n1
nl12
V2n2 = V2L1n1
(4-92)
where (V.i)m = volume of stock-tank oil per mole of feed, bbl

M., = molecular weight of stock-tank oil
ii,, = moles of stock-tank oil per mole of feed
P = density of stock-tank oil at 60F and atmospheric pressure, lb/bbl
(4-93)
If ni = 1, then
The moles of gas off the second stage
n,, +
n,T. The number of moles of gas can be readily converted to standard
i=l
=II L,
(4-91)
(4-88)
where m = number of stages

L; = mole fraction of liquid off ith stage
n 1 = moles of feed to first stage
fi.t
(4-90)
The total gas-oil ratio is given by
nat
353
where RT is the total gas-oil ratio.

If it is known from other data that the feed to the first-stage separator
exists as a single-phase liquid at its point of entry into the production
stream, then an oil-formation volume factor Bo can be calculated from the
data obtained. The analysis of the feed can then be treated as the reservoir fluid, and its density calculated by the method of Standing and Katz.
Let
p~
be the density of the feed in pounds per barrel. Then

(4-94)
where (V,~)m is the volume occupied by 1 mole of feed at reservoir conditions and M = is the molecular weight of the feed. By definition, the
oil-formation volume factor
354
(V res),,. =
(Vst)m
Mres
Pst
Prea .Llfdnst
(4-95)
The calculation of API gravity, total gas-oil ratio, and oil formation volume factor is illustrated in Example 4-16.
The application of equilibrium calculations to the determination of the
optimum first-stage separator pressure in a two-stage system (one separator
and the stock tank) is illustrated by the data of Table 4-17 and the graphs
in Fig. 4-87. The optimum pressure is defined as that pressure at which
33.6
:0
33.4
:t-
t:; 33.2
~
:i2 560 r--~11----,~-t----t----t----r----r--....,.----i 1.32 ~

-;;;
a_
gt
33.0
~
~
(2)
(3)
Mole fraction
in liquid
Mole wt,
Component
lb/molel>
phase at
15 psia, 40F"
(4)
(I)
Cr+
Total
16.042
30.068
44.094
58.120
72.146
86.172
263'
0.00283
0.00947
0.05768
0.05292
0.05441
0.05690
0.76579
1.00000
Relative wt,
lb/mole
(2) x (3)
(5)
Liquid.
density
at 60F,
14.7 psiab
(6)
Liquid
volume
cu ft/mole
(4) + (5)
31.64
35.7ld
39.08d
41.36
55.28
0.0803837
0.0861302
0.1004468
0.1185490
3.6433207
4.0108304
0.045399
0.284744
2.543342
3.075710
3.925464
4.903187
201.402770
216.180616
.g
;:
540 t---tt\---t----t----t----r----t---1.30
,E
" From Example 4-15.

c From Table 4-13.
From Table 4-4.

Average of iso and normal.
.g
580
.g
:;,
u
<D
Example 4-16. Calculation of Stock-tank Gravity Separator and Stocktank Gas-Oil Ratios and Formation Volume Factor.
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
c,
600 l-.J---r--1---i:;::=::i::::-1--T-lu 6
355
32.8
eu
.
Density of C"+
520
of c"+
215.850
8 7 lb/ f
= wt
l f Cs+ = 4 .Ol 1 = 53. I
cu t
VO - O
u;
32.6
32.4
g. 500
"'
4800
First-stage separator pressure, psi
FIG. 4-87. Effect of separator pressure in a two-stage separation process.
the maximum liquid volume is accumulated in the stock tank per volume
of reservoir fluid produced. This pressure corresponds to a maximum in
the API gravity and a minimum in the gas-oil ratio and oil formation volume factor. The optimum first-stage separator pressure for the system
evaluated in Table 4-17 and Fig. 4-87 is 75 psia. The effect of additional
stages can be evaluated in a similar manner.
Equilibrium, or "flash," calculations can be used in many other applications. The applications of the methods to calculating the perlormance of
reservoirs containing condensate fluids or volatile oils are becoming incnasingly important. Many of these applications will be reviewed latoc
in this text.
Wt
% 0 2 in
C'+
21 ~;::217 X 100 = 0.132
Wt
% C, in
C,+
2~~~~ 1 X 100
0.021
Density of system including C, and 0 2 = 53.5 lb/cu ft at 60F and

14. 7 psia (from Fig. 4-50)
Pressure correction from 1-1.7 to 15 psia is negligible. No temperature
correction required.
Density = 53.5 lb/cu ft at 60F and 15 psia
Specific gravity = 0.8588
API gravity = 33.26
Separator GOR (gas-oil ratio)
(380.69V;)p,,
M,,1L1L2
380.69(.47904) (53.5) (5.61}
216.181 (.52096)(.9789)
= 496.47 cu ft/bbl
l
356
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEEBL.'iG
380.69Vz,o,,(5.61)
mol wt ST liq. XL,
Stock-tank (ST) GOR
REFERENCES
= 380.69(0.0211)(53.5)(5.61)
216.181(.9789)
=
Total GOR
11.35 cu ft/bbl.
separator GOR
+ stock-tank GOR
= 496.47 + 11.35 = 507.82 cu ft/bbl
Snmple calculation of formation volume factor:
B _ bbl res liq/mole res liq

-
(4-95)
ST bbl/mole res liq
Reservoir bbl/mole res liquid
M,~
P=
122.1748
46.6(5.61) = 0.4 57
Stock-tank vol/mole stock-tank oil =
=
5~-~~;-~~)
0. 72027792 bbl/mole
Stock-tank bbl/mole res fluid = bbl/mole ST liq X L 1L 2

= 0.720(0.52096)(0.9789)
= 0.367
0.467
= 0.367 = 1.2723
TABLE 4-17. EFFECT OF SEPARATOR PREssURES ON FLUID PROPERTIES
Separator pressure,
psiaa
Gas-oil ratio, cu ft/bbl
!st stage
2d stage
(stock tank)
Separator
Stock tank
15
35
75
135
15
15
15
15
587.2
507.7
450.4
368.1
8.5
39.9
135.7
357
Total
Stock-tank
oil gravity,
0
API
582.2
516.2
490.3
503.8
32.58
33.26
33.58
33.12
"Separator and stock-tank temperature, 40F.

~Reservoir pressure, 3,614 psia; reservoir temperature, 200F.
B.,
oil formation
volume
factorb
1.340
1.283
1.265
1.276
1. Uren, L. C.: "Petroleum Production Engineering: Oil Field Exploitation," 3d ed.,

2. Daniels, Farrington: "Outlines of Physical Chemistry," John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, 1948.
3. Standing, M. B.: "Volumetric and Phase llehu.vior of Oil Field Hydrocarbon
Systems," Reinhold Publishing Corporation, New York, 1952.
4. Brown, G. G., D. L. Katz, G. G. Oberfell, u.nd R. C. Allen: "Natural Gasoline and
the Volatile Hydrocarbons," National Gasoline A:o;sociation of America, Tulsa, Okla.,
1948.
5. Katz, D. L., and Fred Kurata: H.etrogr-J.de <-Ondensution, Ind. Eng. Chon., vol. 32,
no. 6, June, 1940.
6. Clark, Norman: It Pays to J{now Your Petroleum, World Oil, March and April,
1953.
7. Thornton, 0. F.: Gas-condensate Reservoirs-A H.eview, Petrol. Bngr. Reference
Ann., 1947.
8. Beattie and Bridgeman: J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 49, 1027, and vol. 50, 1028.
9. Benedict, M., G. B. Webb, and L. C. Rubin: An Empirical Equation for Thermodynamic Properties of Light Hydrocarbons and Their l\'lixturPs, Chem. Eng. Progr.,
vol. 47, August, 1951.
IO. Kay, W. B.: Density of Hydrocarbon Gases and VapOT$ a.t High Temperatures
and Pressure, Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 28, p. 1014, 1936.
IL Sage, Bruce H., and William N. Lacey: "\Tolumetric n.nd Phae Behavior of
Hydrocarbons," Gulf Publishing Company, Houston, Tex., 1949.
12. Matthews, T. A., C. I-I. Roland, and D. L. Katz: High Pressure Gas l\'Iea.surement, Refine:r, vol. 21, June, 1942.
13. Eilerts, C. l{., H. A. Carlson, and N. B. fi'Iullcns: Effeet of Added Nitrogen on
Compressibility of Natural Gas, World Oil, June and July, 1948.
14. Olds, R. H., B. H. Sage, and W. N. Lacey: Partial ,rolumet,ric Behavior of the
Methane-Carbon Dioxide System, "Fundamental Research on Occurrence and ReC'overy
of Petroleum," American Petroleum Institute, 1943.
15. Reamer, H. H., R.H. Olds, B. H. Sage, and VV. N. Laeey: Methane-Carbon
Dioxide System in the Gaseous Region, "Fundamental Researeh on Occurrence and
Recovery of Petroleum," American Petroleum Institute, 1943.
16. Reamer, H. H., R. H. Olds, B. H. Sage, and W. N. Lacey: Volumetric Behavior
of Ethane-Carbon Dioxide System, "Fundamental Research on Occurrence and Recovery of Petroleum," American Petroleum Institute, 1945.
17. Keenan, J. H., and F. G. Keyes: "Thermodynamic Properties of Steam," John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1947.
18. McCarthy, E. I., W. L. Boyd, and L. S. Reid: The Water Vapor Content of
Essentially Nitrogen-free Natural Gas Saturated at Various Conditions of Temperature
and Pressure, Trans. AIZvIE, 1950, p. 189.
19. Carson, D. B., and D. L. Katz: Natural Gas Hydrates, Trans. AI~ME, vol. 146,
1942.
20. Katz, D. L.: Prediction of Conditions for Hydrate Formation in Nu.tural Gases,
Trans. AIME, vol. 160, 1945.
21. V~ndy, D., N. B. Zaremba, and L. L. Lawrence: "Lease Size Low Temperature
Gasoline Plants," Black, Sivalls and Bryson, Inc., Bulletin 3302.
22. Eicher, L. B., and D. L. Katz: Viscosity of Natural Gases, Trans. Al}l/E, vol.
155, 1944.
l
358
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERJNG
23. Carr, N. L., R. Kobayashi, and D. B. Burrows: Vho;co!'ity of Jiydrocarbon Gas~

under Pressure, Trans. Al111E, 1954, p. 201.
24. Heming, F., and L. Zipperer: Calculation of the Viscosity of Technical Cas 2\Iixtures from the Viscosity of the Individual (~ases, Ga;,;- u.. JVa.~.~erfach, vol. 79, IH36.
25. Natural Gasoline Supply Men's Association: "J<~nginecring Data Book," 6th Pd.,
Natural Gasoline Association of America, Tulsa, Okla., 1951.
26. Eshbn.ch, Ovid W.: "Handbook of Engineering Fundument:tls," John \Viley &
Sons, Inc., New York, 1952.
27. Standing, M. B., and J). L. l\:atz: Density of Crude Oil.s; Satur:ited with :\atural
Gas, Trans. AI1l1E, vol. 146, 1942.
28. Trube, Albert S.: Compressibility of Undersaturuted J-lydrocarbon H.eservoir
Fluids, Tran:-.. AllUE, vol. 210, 1957.
29. National Standard Petroleum Oil Ta.hies, 1Vatl. Bur. 8tandards Gire. C4IO, J!):~o.
30. "ASTM Standards on Petroleum Products and Luhrieant.s," A1nerican Society
for Testing Materials, 1953.
31. "Tag Manual for Inspel"'t.or;;; of Petroleum," :27th ed., C ..J. Taglinhu[ Corp.,
Newark, N.J.
32. ICutz, D. L., and W. Saltman: Surf:.u."e Tension of Hydrocarhons, lrul. En:1.
Chem., vol. 31, no. 1, January, 1939.
33. l(atz, D. L., R. R. lVIonroe, and R. IL Trainer: .Surf:tce Tension of Crndf' Oils
Containing Dissolved G:ises, Petrol. Technol., Sept.ember, HJ43.
34. Sugden: J. Chem. Soc., vol. 125, 1U24.
35. BrO'wn, G. G.: Continuous Tables, Petrol. Ji)ngr.
36. Sage, B. H., J.E. Sherborne, and W. X. Lacey: AP! Pror., Bull. 216, 1935.
37. Continuous Tables, Petrol. Engr.
_
38. Perry, J. H., "Chemical Engineers' Handbook," 3<l ed., MeGraw,Hill llook
I
39. Lewis, G. N., and :.\I. Randall: "Thermodynamics and the Free Energ;o.. of Chen1ical Substancr.s," McGra\v-Hill Book Company, Inc., Xew York, 1!)2:~.
40. Dodge and Newton: Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 29, HJ37.
41. Katz, D. L., and K. H. Hachmuth: V:iporiz:~tion Equilibrium Con~t.ants in a
Crude Oil-Natural Gas System, Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 29, p. 1072, Hl87.
42. Roland, C. H., D. E. Smith, and H. IL I\:a.vC'ler: Equilibrium Constants for :i
Gas-distillate System, Oil Gas J., vol. 39, no. 46, p. 128, ?>.far. 27, HJ-II.
4.1. "Equilibrium Ratio Data Book," Natur<tl Gasoline Association of Amerira, Tulsa,
Okla., 1957.
44. Rachford, H. H., and J. D. Rice: Procedure for Use of Elect.r()nic Digit:i.l Computors in Calculating Flash Vaporization Hydrocarbon Equilibrium, Trans. AIJ!E,
vol. 195, 1952.
45. Holland, C. D., and R. R. Davison: Simplify Flai:h Distillation Calculations,
Petrol. Refiner, March, 1957.
CHAPTER
DETERMINATION AND APPLICATION

OF RESERVOIR-FLUID PROPERTIES
INTRODUCTION
The volumetric behavior of reservoir fluids must be determined as a

function of pressure and temperature in order that the engineer can evaluate the product.ion performance of a reservoir. In Chap. 4, the fundan1entals of fluid behavior 1vere developed. The volumetric behavior was
sho\vu to be related to various physical properties of the hydrocarbons
con1posing the f.uid. l\Iixtures of hydrocarbons may be characterized by
specific gravity, molecular '''eight, compositional analyses, and other properties \vhich are readily subject to measurement.
The fluids must be identified by direct measurement of certain properties. These measurements involve securing samples of the fluids from the
field. 1'he simplest procedure is to make measurements of the properties
of the produced fluids. The AP! gravity of stock-tank oil and the producing ga:s-oil ratio are routinely determined. The gas-oil ratio is ordinarily
the ratio of the volume-, in standard cubic feet, of gas from the separator to
the volun1e of stock-tank oil both n1easured over the same time interval.
If good field practice- it-> follo1Yed, the gravity of the separator gas is detern1i11ed by the Ac-).Ie balance or similar device. These data, together with
estin1ates or observations of the reservoir pressure and temperature, can
be used to estinutte the properties of the reservoir fluids. Such estimates
may be of limited accuracy.
Improved esti1nates of the properties of the reservoir fluids can be made
by securing s:.unples \vhich are representative of the reservoir fluids and
subjecting these s:.unples to various laboratory analyses. The proper sampling of fluids is of greatest importance in securing accurate data.
Samples are usually collected by field or laboratory technicians especially
trained in performing the operation. Ho,vever, field and reservoir engineers
must be familiar "ith sampling techniques and the various laboratory
analyses available. The engineer involved must decide "hen a sample is
required, 1vhat sampling techniques should be used, and how the 1vell
should be prepared for sampling. Direct supervision of the preparation
and sampling of the 1vell is essential. The reservoir engineer must under359
360
stand sampling methods in order to evaluate the accuracy of reported

laboratory data.
SAMPLING RESERVOIR FLUIDS
There are essentially three sampling techniques for obtaining reservoirfluid samples for analysis of the pressure, volume, and temperature (PVT)
relations. These three techniques are commonly known as:
I. Bottom-hole sampling
2. Recombination sampling
3. Split-stream sampling
The general manner of preparing a well and obtaining a sample for each
of these three testing techniques is presented in the following sections.
Bottom-hole Sampling
A well must be selected and properly prepared before any of the sampling techniques can be applied. The engineer should select a well with a
high productivity so as to maintain as high a pressure as possible in the
formation surrounding the \Yell. It is suggested that the well be as new as
possible so as to minimize free gas saturation. The i.vell selected should not
be producing free water. If the only available well does produce water,
special care must be exercised in locating the sampling bomb. A,1Series of
productivity tests should be conducted on the well to deterfulne the
bottom-hole flo,ving pressures which exist at various rates of flow. These
tests aid in selecting the well which "~II have the highest flowing bottomhole pressure at the stabilized flow rate. The producing history of the wells
should be studied. The well selected for sampling should have been producing \Vith a stabilized gas-oil ratio. If a \Vell exhibits a rapidly increasing gas-oil ratio, the saturation conditions \vould probably prohibit the
collecting of a representative sample.
Once the \Yell to be san1pled has been selected and all necessary tests
performed, it must be properly prepared. The time required for well preparation is dependent upon the past history and the productivity of the
well. The well should be flowed at as low a stabilized rate as possible.
The stabilized rate of flow should be continued until such time as a constant gas-oil ratio is indicated on the surface. It is desired, but not al~vays
obtained 1 that the lo\V flow rates ,,;JI cause such a small pressure gradient
around the ""ell bore that the gas saturation in the surrounding area will
be reduced, by solution and compression, to an immobile state.
The length of time required to reach a constant producing gas-oil ratio
is dependent upon the free gas saturation when the well preparation began.
The well is then shut in to permit the pressure to build up in the formation
adjacent to the well bore. The duration of the shut-in period will be de-
RESERVOIR-FLUID PROPERTIES
361
pendent upon the productivity of the well. In some instances, the time
period may be 2 to 3 hr, whereas in others, it may be as high as 72 hr.
Fluid entering the well bore during the shut-in period enters under increasing back pressures. The fluid which is opposite the perforations after
the maximum well pressure is obtained should be gas-saturated at the
pressure and temperature at the bottom of the hole.
A tubing pressure survey is conducted to locate the gas-oil and wateroil interfaces. A special sampling bomb is run on a wire line. This bomb
is activated at the surlace so as to retrieve a bottom-hole fluid sample
under pressure. There are several
different types of bottom-hole sampTripping
ling devices on the market. In Fig.
arm
5-1 is a schematic drawing of a
sampler. The valves are locked open
at the surface, the bomb is located
at the desired sampling position, and
the valves are activated by dropping
a metal bar or by a preset clock
mechanism. Instruction for the operSpring ond
Locking
ation of these various devices will device for
quide for
normally accompany the instrument lower volve
closing bomb
and hence will not be discussed here.
If properly used, all the devices are
successful in obtaining appropriate
samples.
The foregoing well preparation
and sampling procedure can be used
\vith any normal gas-crude-oil system. This procedure is often modified
Lower valve
\Vhen reservoir fluid and well conditions meet special requirements.
'\Vhen, at a low stabilized flow rate, Fra. 5-L Schematic drawing of bottomhole fluid-sample bomb. (From Pirthe fiolving bottom-hole pressure of son.1)
the test well is thought to exceed the
bubble-point pressure of the reservoir fluid, a bottom-hole sample can be
collected with the well flowing. An additional step is added to the wellprep~ration procedure previously discussed. After the shut-in period, the
'vell 1s allowed to flow at a low stabilized rate. The sample bomb is run,
and the sample collected with the well flowing. The sample collected
s~ould be representative of the reservoir fluid. This is the ideal sampl~ng procedure, as the oil entering is fresh oil at all times and is representative of the reservoir fluid.
The bomb and its fluid sample are brought to the surface. The bomb is
----------
362
----
____ ________ _
____ .
checked at the surface for possible leaks. The pressure in the bomb at the
surface is rneasured to indicate whether or not the bomb was properly
activated in the hole. The pressure in the bomb should be slightly less
than the bottom-hole pressure at which the sample was collected. Normally, the saturation pressure of the collected sample at surface temperature is measured by pumping water or mercury into the sample and
observing the pressure-volume behavior. Once again, this pressure should
be less than the pressure at which the sample was collected. If it exceeds
the sampling pressure, then the sampling device either collected free gas
or leaked oil. To protect against possible leakage, at least t'vo fluid samples are collected and checked against each other.
If the reservoir were initially at its saturation pressure, the bottom-hole
sample obtained would probably indicate a solution-gas-oil ratio and
bubble-point pressure different from that of the original reservoir fluid.
The saturation pressure obtained from the bottom-hole fluid sample will
normally be lower than the bubble-point pressure of the original reservoir
fluid. As the pressure around the well declines with production, gas is
released from solution. This gas either remains in the reservoir or is produced. The oil that enters the well bore has a lower saturation pressure
than that originally existing in the reservoir. Any free gas that enters the
well will migrate upward in the tubing O\Ving to gravity. Hence the oil
collected by t.he bottom-hole sampler exhibits a saturation press-uf"e corre' initial
spending to the existing reservoir pressure rather than to the
reservoir pressure.
These inaccuracies in sampling can be corrected either by a mathematical
technique, which will be discussed later in this chapter, or by adding additional gas to the samples in the laboratories. Both methods have limitations but yield a sufficiently close approximation to the actual reservoir
fluid for use in reservoir calculations.
These checks may be over 2-hr, 4-hr, or longer time intervals if necessary
to oMain the desired stability of the producing gas-oil ratio. Once the producmg gas-oil ratio stabilizes, the well is ready for sampling.
Gas and liquid samples are collected from the same separator at the
same flow conditions. A larger quantity of separator gas must be collected
because of its high compressibility compared with the liquid. The manner
of collecting these fluid samples varies with company and individual preference. Pressure-control devices are attached to the separator to maintain
stabilized conditions. The sampling containers can be attached to the separator as indicated in Fig. 5-2. The oil-control valve should be regulated
Recombination Samples
A second technique used in obtaining fluid samples from which to deter1nine PVT relations is kno,vn as recombination sampling. For a recombination sample, the fluids are collected at the surlace. A sample of separator
oil and separator gas are collected, and these samples are recombined in
the laboratory in the proper proportions as determined by production characteristics measured at the surface during sampling operations.
The selection of the well from which to collect the sample is based upon
the san1e conditions specified for bottom-hole sampling. The same presampling tests are desired.
Once the '>vell is selected, it is flowed for a period of time sufficient to
stabilize the producing gas-oil ratio at the surlace. It is desired to have
the gas-oil ratio checked over at least three comparable time intervals.
363
Pressure
control
Gos
sampling
point
We!I fluid
Liquid
sample
point
Norma! liquid
Internally operated
oil-level control
Se po rotor
meosu rement
point
~-~
Stock-tank
FIG. 5-~. Schematic layout of production facilities with indicated sample poinUI for
recombined samples.
so that the oil sample outlet is always submerged. Regardless of the method
of collecting the fluid samples, the following data should be recorded:
1. A volume of oil in the separator compared with a volume of oil in the
stock tank. This information permits the field calculation of a shrinkage
factor for separator oil. The final shrinkage factor for separator oil is determined in the laboratory by flashing to stock-tank conditions.
2. The temperature and pressure of the separator.
3. The temperature and pressure of the stock tank.
4. The specific gravity of the stock-tank oil.
5. The amount of separator gas produced per stock-tank barrel (GOR
gas-oil ratio).
'
6. The gravity of the separator gas obtained in field or laboratory to
correct meter measurements.
7. The flowing bottom-hole pressure and temperature.
8. The shut-in bottom-hole pressure and temperatnre.
--------------------------
364
With these data it is possible to obtain an analysis of the fluid entering the
separator by properly recombining the separator liquid and separator gas.
The recombination method of sampling is just as good as the bottomhole sampling technique for reservoirs where the flowing pressure exceeds
the bubble-point pressure of the reservoir fluid. When the bottom-hole
flowing pressure is less than the bubble-point pressure, free gas is produced
from the reservoir. The bubble-point pressure for a recombination sample
may be in excess of the original bubble-point pressure of the reservoir
fluid owing to the excess gas. In most cases, these errors can be found and
corrections made by taking into account the other data measured while
collecting the sample.
Split-stream Sampling
The third method of sampling is split-stream sampling. This method is
primarily used in sampling of gas condensate wells. The same qualifications
and procedures are used in selecting and preparing a well for split-stream
sampling as were used for obtaining a recombination sample. In addition
to the data measured for recombination sample, it is necessary to note the
temperature and pressure of the flow stream of the point at which the sample is collected.
In split-stream sampling, a small-diameter tube is inserted into the
middle of the flow stream. Part of the flow is diverted throuiffe this tube
into either an auxiliary separator or sampling bottles. In most cases, this
sample is obtained by inserting the tube in tubing to 8 or 10 ft below the
surface well head connections or in the flow stream just upstream of the
separator. Precaution must be taken to center the tube properly in the
main flow stream. The velocity of fluid flow in the sampling tube should
be maintained equal to the velocity in the pipe. The quantity of fluid removed by the sampling tube should not exceed the quantity of fluid which
is flowing in a comparable area within the main flow stream. This method
is fast. and, if used in conjunction with a small, temperature-controlled
separator, will permit an analysis of the reservoir fluid in the field.
The sampling tube can be connected directly to the sample bottle. The
sample thus collected is comparable to a bottom-hole sample taken under
flowing conditions. The fluid from the sampling tube can be separated so
as to collect separate gas and liquid samples as in the recombination
method. Greater accuracy is obtained by separating the sample stream
and collecting individual gas and liquid samples. Any variations in instantaneous gas-liquid rates are usually averaged out during the period of
separation.
The split-stream method of sampling loses its accuracy with high-liquidcontent fluids. It is difficult to ensure the proper entry of gas and liquids
into the sampling tube for high flowing liquid-gas ratios. Much of the
I
I
I
365
liquids will be concentrated along the wall of the pipe owing to friction.
The sample tube located ill the middle of the pipe collects a greater proportion of gas than actually exists. More detailed information on sampling
techniques is available in the literature."'
Once the samples have been collected, they are shipped to a laboratory
for complete analysis. The type of laboratory analysis is dependent upon
the type of reservoir and the information desired.
LABORATORY ANALYSIS OF RESERVOIR-FLUID SAMPLES
Laboratory analyses are the same regardless of the method used in collecting the sample. Before any tests can be performed, it is necessary that
a certain amount of preparation be made on the field sample.
In the case of a bottom-hole sample it is necessary to raise the temperature and pressure of the field sample to reservoir conditions. The sample
is then transferred to an appropriate test cell for analysis.
The preparation of a recombination sample is more complex. The gas
and oil must be recombined in correct proportions to obtain a representative reservoir-fluid sample. The quantities which must be measured in the
laboratory prior to recombination are briefly enumerated. A mole analysis
of the separator liquid and gas sample are obtained usually by means of a
fractional distillation column. A small volume of the separator liquid is
raised to field separator test conditions and flashed to field stock-tank test
conditions. The volume of separator liquid and the resulting volume of
stock-tank liquid are used in calculating a separator shrinkage factor.
.
volume stock-tank oil
S, = separator shrinkage factor =
to .
(5-1)
vo1ume separa r 011
This shrinkage factor is used to determine the ratio of separator gas to
separator liquid. The separator gas-oil ratio is then calculated, and the
number of cubic feet of gas to be recombined with a given volume of separator liquid is determined.
R,,S, = R,.
(5-2)
where R, = separator GOR expressed with respect to stock-tank liquid

S, = separator fluid shrinkage factor
Rip = separator GOR expressed with respect to separator liquid
The separator liquid and gas samples are recombined in the proportion
dictated by R,,. The mole composition of the produced fluid can be calculated from the analysis of the separator liquid and gas. The procedure for
calculating the composition of the produced fluid from separator fluid
analyses is presented in Example 5-1.
When the fluids are recombined, the resulting fluid is equivalent to a
366
Example 5-1. Calculation of Composition of Produced Fluid Analysis

from Analyses of Separator Liquid and Gas.
1. Calculation of liquid density:
(1)
(2)
Mole
fractiona
Component
c,
c,
c,
0.0238
0.0069
0.0155
0.0230
0.0239
0.0329
0.0440
0.0610
O.i690
iC4
nC,
iC:;
nC,
c,
C7+
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Wt
Molwt
Relative wt,
lb/mole
(2) x (3)
Liquid
density,
16.042
30.068
44.094
58.120
58.120
72.146
72.146
86.172
188.00
0.38180
0.20747
0.68346
1.33676
1.38907
2.37360
3.17442
5.25649
144.57200
159.37507
fraction
(4)/1:(4)
lb/cu ft
(7)
(Liquid
i volume,
cu ft/mole
(4)/(6)
31.64
35.08
36.35
38.90
39.27
41.36
52.77
0.02160
0.03810
0.03821
0.06102
0.08084
0.12709
2.73966
3.10652
D ens1ty
. of C,. = 159.37507 - 0.38180
- 0.20747 =
_10
51 .11372
3 652
Wt % C1 in C,. = 0.239
159.37g0~0~4~.38180
2. Calculation of composition of produced fluid:

(8)
(9)
Mole
Comfraction
ponent
gas, Y>*
N
CO,
H,S
c,
c,
c,
iC4
nC,
iC5
nC,
c,
0.0088
0.0260
0.0140
0.6929
0.1401
0.0731
0.0119
0.0210
0.0049
0.0046
0.0010
0.0017
1.0000
(11)
(12)
Mole
fraction
liquid,
Component
in liquid,
(10)
Component
in gas,
lb-moles/bbl
325 x (9)
380.69
0.00751
0.02220
0.01195
0.59154
0.11960
0.06241
0.01016
0.01793
0.00418
0.00393
0.00085
0.00145
Xi*
0.0238
0.0069
0.0155
0.0230
0.0239
0.0329
0.0440
0.0610
0.7690
lb-moles/bbl
1.79672 x (11)
0.04276
0.01240
0.02785
0.04132
0.04294
0.05911
0.07906
0.10960
1.38168
(13)
(10)
+ (12)
(14)
Mole
fraction
composite,
(13)/1:(13)
Z;
0.00751
0.02220
0.01195
0.63430
0.13200
0.09026
0.05148
0.06087
0.06329
0.08299
0.11045
1.38313
2.65043
0.00283
0.00838
0.00451
0.23932
0.04980
0.03405
0.01942
0.02297
0.02388
0.03131
0.04167
0.52186
1.00000
* From laboratory and field data.
Number of moles of separator liquid/bbl of separator liquid

_ density of separator liquid, lb/bbl = 51(5.61) = 1.
79672
mo! wt of separator liquid
159.37507
Relative Total Volume
"From laboratory and field data.
Wt% C, inc,. =
Gravity of stock-tank oil* = 29.2API at 60F

GOR* = 338.5 cu ft/bbl
SG = 0.8289
density of stock-tank oil = 51.64 lb/cu ft
Separator shrinkage factor = 0.960
Separator-gas-separator-liquid ratio = 338.5 cu ft/bbl (0.960)
= 325 cu ft/bbl
Cr+
0.00239
0.00130
0.00429
0.00839
0.00872
0.01489
0.01992
0.03298
0.90712
1.00000
367
RESERVOIR-FLUID PROPERTIF.S
bottom-hole sample, and it is only necessary to raise the pressure and

temperature of the sample to reservoir conditions for further analysis.
The preparation of a split-stream sample is the same as a recombination
sample if it was separated and collected as gas and liquid. If the sample
was collected "dthout' separation, it is treated in the same manner as a
bottom-hole sample.
There are many analyses which can be made on a reservoir-fluid sample.
The amount of data desired determines the number of tests performed in
the laboratory. There are three laboratory tests which are measured on
all gas-crude-oil reservoir-fluid samples. These three tests determine the
composite or total formation volume factor by flash liberation, the differential liberation formation volume factors and solution-gas-oil ratio, the
gas-compressibility factor, and a study of the effect of surface separator
conditions on flash volume factors.
Density of separator liquid = 51.0 lb/cu ft
0.1304
The relative total volume is measured by an equilibrium, or "fl.ash,"

liberation process commonly called the pressure-volume, or PV, test. The
test is started with a sample of reservoir fluid in a high-pressure cell at
reservoir temperature and at a pressure in excess of the reservoir pressure.
The volume in the cell under these conditions is known. The pressure in
the cell is lowered by increasing the space available in the cell for the fluid.
Depending on the cell, the volume is increased by withdrawal of mercury
From laboratory and field data.
---------
368
- ----
---------------
----------
369
RESERVOffi-FLUID PROPERTIES
from the cell or the removal of a piston. A schematic representation of the

test is shown in Fig. 5-3. The cell pressure is lowered in small increments,
such as Fig. 4-6. The gas liberated from solution is the equilibrium vapor
phase which forms in the two-phase region.
and the volume change for each pressure increment recorded. This procedure is repeated until a large change in the pressure-volume slope is indicated. This change in slope occurs when gas is liberated from solution.
The pressure at which the large change in the pressure-volume slope occurs
is considered the bubble point (see Fig. 5-4). After gas is liberated, the
procedure is altered and the sample is brought to equilibrium after each
change in volume. To obtain equilibrium, the sample is thoroughly agiIncipient
for motion
of gos
Vi,
3
,,,.~
Oil
Oil
II
~
,,,.~
Oil
"
r
l
v,,
Differential Oil Formation Volume Factor and Gas in Solution

The differential formation volume factor and gas in solution test begins
in the same manner as the relative
total volume test. The sample is
placed in a high-pressure cell with
the pressure above the reservoir bubble-point pressure and the temperature of the cell at reservoir tempera- ~
ture. The pressure is lowered in
increments, and the volume change
in the cell noted. The pressure is
lowered until such time that free
P5 P4 P, Pz
f\
gas is liberated in the cell. Then for
predetermined pressure or volume
Pressure
increments, mercury is withdrawn FIG. 5-4. Determination of bubble point
from the cell, gas is released from from PV relations.
solution and the cell is agitated until
the libe;ated gas is in equilibrium with the oil. A schematic representation
of the test is shown in Fig. 5-5.
The total volume of the gas and oil is determined by the mercuryvolume changes during the test. All the free gas is ejected from the cell at
Temperature of test= reservoir temperature
Fia. 5-3. Schematic representation of equilibrium (flash) PV test.
tated, either with an internal mixing device or by shaking the test cell.
i
.,..,
0v
,,,.N
Oil
"
Oil
>.N
Hg
~=fb
of1
,,,..
j_
.,:>
,,,..,
Oil
>.-
The equilibrium pressure is recorded. This procedure is followed until the
volume capacity of the laboratory cell is reached. The resulting data are
expressed as the relative total volume. A procedure will be discussed later
for calculating the total formation volume factor using relative total volume data.
The pressure-volume test is conducted on a hydrocarbon mixture of
definite composition. As no hydrocarbon material is removed from the
cell during the test, the composition of the total hydrocarbon mixture in
the cell remains fixed at the original composition. The test is equivalent
to determining the volume relations along an isotherm of a phase diagram
,,,..,
,,,..
Hg
Hg
Oil
v
,,,.~
j_
Hg
Hg
f2<1
Pa<Po
Pa<fb
~<~<~
After
aqitation
Oisplacinq
qas at a
constant
pressure
All
After
agltatian
.displaced
'"
F1a. 5-5. Schematic representation of differential liberation test.
---
370
-------------~-
371
a constant pressure by injecting mercury. The volumes of the free gas

displaced and the oil remaining in the cell are thus measured at cell conditions. The free gas is also measured at standard conditions. Depending
upon future tests, either the free gas is analyzed at each stage of liberation
or all the gas is collected in a sample bottle. This procedure is repeated
for all the pressure increments until only oil remains in the cell at reservoir
temperature and atmospheric pressure. The gas which is liberated by a
differential process, from the bubble-point pressure to atmospheric pres-
The stock-tank gas-oil ratio

The total gas-oil ratio
The flash separation tests are essentially small-scale field separation processes. The results could be calculated from the composition of the reservoir
fluid as described in Chap. 4. However, the laboratory tests are easily
made and are preferred.
sure at reservoir temperature, can be calculated from these data.
A shrinkage factor for the oil, due to temperature change, is determined

by ejecting the oil out of the cell into a container so that its volume can
be measured at 60F. With the appropriate calculating procedures, the
differential formation volume factors at all the various pressure intervals
can be computed. If all the liberated gas is collected in one sample container, compressibility factors for the composite gas can be measured.
The differential liberation process as conducted in the laboratory is a

stepwise equilibrium process. At each pressure decrement vapor and liquid
phases are brought to equilibrium.

The essential difference between the equilibrium test and the differential
test is the removal of a portion of the fluid from the cell during the differential test. As a result the composition of the material remaining in 1,Jle
cell is progressively changed during the test. The materials removed are
predominantly lighter hydrocarbons, methane, ethane, and propane.
Flash Separation Test
Another test which is often performed as a routine test is that of determining flash separation data on a bubble-point fluid sample. A cell is
charged with a reservoir sample at a pressure above the original bubblepoint pressure of the reservoir. Then part of this fluid is ejected from the
cell into a stage separation system. The volume ejected is carefully measured and is flashed through the separation process, either one, two, or three
stages. The pressure and temperature of these stages are carefully controlled. The volume of gas from each stage of separation and the volume of
residue liquid remaining in the last stage of separation are measured.
Thus, an oil formation volume factor for flash separation of a bubble-point
sample and the flash gas-oil ratio off each stage of separation can be calculated.
This process is repeated for several first- and second-stage pressure combinations for a three-stage system. If a two-stage system is used, the
process is repeated for several first-stage separator pressures. The follo,ving data are reported as a result of these tests:
The oil formation volwne factor for the separator condition
The gravity of the stock-tank oil
The separator gas-oil ratios
Gas Compressibility
The compressibility of the liberated gas or of the separator gas can be
determined in much the same manner as the composite volume factor of
the oil. The gas sample is charged into an evacuated pressure cell, and
the mass of gas in the cell is calculated. The pressure of the gas is increased
by injecting mercury into the cell. The volume of gas in the cell, at the cell
pressure, is determined by the amount of mercury injected. From these
measurements it is possible to calculate the compressibility factor for the
gas by utilizing equations shown in Chap. 4.
The compressibility factor of the gas liberated at each pressure decrement during a differential liberation process can be calculated from the
volumes occupied by the displaced gas at cell pressure and at atmospheric
pressure as measured in a receiver.
The analysis or gas gravity of the gas liberated at each pressure decrement can be determined. Using the analysis or gravity of the gas displaced
at each pressure step, the compressibility factor as a function of pressure
is calculated by the use of pseudo-critical properties and compressibility
curves. The methods of calculation are presented in Chap. 4. A sample
calculation from the measured gas gravity for a sample is presented later
in this chapter.
There are numerous other laboratory tests which are often requested on
reservoir-fluid samples. These analyses are normally considered in addition
to conventional PVT analysis. Some of the more frequently requested
analyses are fluid viscosity, differential-flash formation volume factors,
equilibrium ratios, and fluid composition. Following are brief discussions
of the procedures used in performing some of these laboratory tests.
Fluid VIScosity
If the oil viscosity is desired at reservoir pressure and temperature, it is
necessary to use a high-pressure rolling-ball viscosimeter. This instrument
measures the time required for a precision steel ball to roll a given distance
in a tube filled with oil. The time of travel is converted to viscosity by
means of a calibration curve for the instrument. The clearance between
the ball and tube can be changed by changing the ball diameter. The lower
the fluid viscosity, the smaller the clearance used.
-------- ------------ -
372
In order to measure the reservoir-oil viscosity, the rolling-ball viscosimeter is charged with a reservoir-fluid sample at a pressure in excess of the
original reservoir pressure. The pressure in the viscosimeter is lowered by
differential separation of gas and liquid inside the viscosimeter. The viscosity of the liquid remaining from the separation is measured. To reduce
the pressure in the rolling-ball viscosimeter, the top valve of the viscosimeter is opened slightly, permitting some liberated gas to escape. The
pressure on the system is lowered, and more gas is liberated. The flow of
gas is stopped, and the viscosimeter is rotated, permitting the ball to travel
up and down the tube. This agitates the system and permits the oil and
gas to reach equilibrium. The pressure existing in the cell when equilibrium is reached is the pressure at which the liquid viscosity is measured.
A sample can be differentially liberated in a rolling-ball viscosimeter
provided the fluid shrinkage is not greater than approximately 50 per cent.
There is excess volume in the top of the viscosimeter for the accumulation
of the free gas, thus keeping the tube completely immersed in oil at all
times. Should the sample have a shrinkage greater than 50 per cent, it
would be necessary to perform the tests in two stages. The first stage
would be with a sample above the original bubble point. This sample
would be permitted to shrink approximately 50 per cent. The viscosimeter
would then be charged with a sample already differentially liberated 'to
some intermediate pressure. The viscosity of the liquid phase over the
remaining pressure range would then be measured.
The rolling-ball viscosimeter can also be used for measuring gas viscosities. It is rather difficult, as the clearance between the ball and the
tube must be extremely small. Any impurities or any small obstruction
causes the ball to hang, yielding inaccurate readings. In most cases, the
gas viscosity can be calculated from the gas analysis and the curves presented in Figs. 4-40 through 4-45. Thus, the engineer is able to calculate
a gas viscosity at each pressure at which he has the analysis of the liberated
gas. This is cheaper, easier, and perhaps more accurate than measuring
these data in the laboratory.
Differential-Flash Oil Formation Volume Factors and Gas in Solution

The differential formation volume factor is not the same as the flash
formation volume factor. Nor are the differential and flash gas-oil ratios
the same. Thus, regardless of the testing procedures-flash or differentialsome correction must be made on the resulting data to approximate the
fluid behavior in the oil-production process.
Another type of test has been suggested by Dodson' which represents
a combination of differential and flash liberation processes. Thus, this
method is called composite liberation. The test is more difficult to perform and requires collection of larger reservoir-fluid samples. The sample
---------- --
373
is differentially liberated to a pressure. The oil resulting from this differential liberation is then flashed to stock-tank conditions. The gas liberated
by the flash is the gas in solution, and the oil volume discharged from the
cell compared with the resulting oil volume is the formation volume factor.
The differential process is continued to a lower value of pressure. The resulting liquid at this lower pressure is flashed to stock-tank conditions,
yielding data as in the previous flash. The process is repeated over a number of pressure steps to secure the complete analysis. The above laboratory
procedure can be utilized to obtain a more accurate representation of the
actual separation imposed upon an oil-gas system in the production process.
This behavior will be discussed more thoroughly later, where means of
approximating combination formation volume factors will be discussed.
These tests are more expensive and time-consuming than the conventional
tests. The question arises, Does the reservoir warrant such an expenditure,
or is it necessary for the type of calculations desired? This question
must be answered by the engineer.
Equilibrium Ratios
One of the more expensive laboratory tests is the determination of equilibrium ratios (K values) for a reservoir fluid. This particular type of test
is a modification of the flash test previously described. The test is performed in the following fashion: A cell is charged with a reservoir-fluid
sample above its saturation pressure and at reservoir temperature. The
sample is then flashed by dropping the pressure in the cell until gas is
liberated within the cell. The oil and gas are agitated until a state of
equilibrium is reached. The oil and gas are both removed individually
from the cell at the cell pressure, and each analyzed by means of a Podbielniak fractional distillation column. The equilibrium ratios at this particular value of pressure and temperature can be calculated from these
analyses. The cell is recharged with another sample of oil above the original saturation pressure. This sample is flashed to a lower pressure than
the previous sample. Once again the gas and liquid are removed individually at this sampling pressure, and the analysis of each phase determined.
Equilibrium ratios at another pressure and at reservoir temperature are
thus obtained. This procedure is continued over a desired range of pressure. The equilibrium ratios obtained by this procedure apply only to a
material having the composition of the bubble-point fluid and do not necessarily apply to the gas-liquid systems which actually exist in the reservoir
after fluid has been produced.
Fluid Composition
The composition of hydrocarbon fluids is normally determined by frationation. A low-temperature fractionating column is used for gases, and
---
374
--------~---
----~----~-----
a high-temperature column is used for liquid hydrocarbons. These columns

are essentially pressure- and temperature-controlled fractionating to\ven:
in which the components are removed in decreasing order of their vapor
pressures at the temperatures of the column. This type of analysis is
accurate and requires small sample volumes. Impurities such as C02, etc.,
must be removed and determined by other means such as an Orsat absorption analysis.
An alternate systen1, the mass spectrometer, is available for gas analysis.
The advantages of the mass spectrometer are that it is extremely fast and
requires a very .small sample. The mass spectrometer will measure other
components such as hydrogen sulfide (H2S), carbon dioxide (C02), and
nitrogen (N2), as \vell as the hydrocarbonfi in the system. For a gas sample which is to be analyzed by the mass spectrometer, it is necessary that
it be collected in a glass- or ceramic-lined container to prevent a reaction
between the sample and the walls of the retaining vessel. Analysis by
means of the mass spectrometer is inexpensive. The disadvantage of this
method is that a calibration or test sample must be made to permit quantitative as well as qualitative analysis, and as the number of components
increase, the calculations required increase, so that for n components n
simultaneous equations must be solved. Therefore for many analyses highspeed computing equipment is desirable to reduce costs and calculat-km_
time.
Chromatography is another means of determining fluid composition. A
special column is used which separates the components on molecular weight
and structure. This method is fast, requires a small sample, and is inexpensive. Chromatography is becoming a standard means of gas or liquid
analysis.
Presentation of a Fluid Analysis for a Gas-Crude-oil System
The form in which data from a laboratory analysis of a gas-crude-oil
system are reported is dependent upon the requirements of the individual
' company or. laboratory which analyzed the fluid. There are two basic
means of expressing the reservoir volume: (1) as a ratio of the surface volume and (2) as a ratio of some reference reservoir volume.
There are essentially six methods of referring the oil volume in the reservoir to surface or stock-tank volumes.
The most common of these is the differential oil formation volume factor.
This volume factor is obtained by dividing the volume occupied by the
liquid, at some reservoir pressure, by the volume that liquid would yield
if it were differentially liberated to stock-tank conditions. Expressed in
equation form, this would be
Differential FVF = B., = :,,.
375
(5-3)
where V Rd = volume resulting by a differential process to stock-tank conditions

V = volume of liquid at some given pressure and temperature
B.,, = differential formation volume factor .
The second way of expressing reservoir volume relationships is essentially the same as the first, except that the standard surface volume is obtained by a flash liberation process. This quantity is referred to as a flash
formation volume factor (FVF); it represents the ratio of the liquid volume
at some pressure and temperature in the reservoir compared 'vith the volume resulting from a fl.ash liberation of that reservoir volume to some
standard condition. This relation is expressed in Eq. (5-4).
Flash FVF = Bo = -
(5-4)
VRf
were V Rf is the residual volume resulting from a fl.ash liberation process

and B 0 is the formation volume factor by fl.ash liberation.
Another means of expressing volume changes for reservoir fluids is commonly referred to as the shrinkage factor. The shrinkage factor is the
ratio of the volume of residual fluid resulting from a liberation process to
the volume at reservoir pressure and temperature required to yield that
residual volume. There are two shrinkage factors, one resulting from a
differential liberation process and another resulting from a flash liberation
process. These two shrinkage factors are expressed in equation form as
Differential shrinkage factor = VVRa =
Flash shrinkage factor =
V:i
1
Boa
(5-5)
The last means of expressing reservoir volumes "'-ith respect to surface

volumes is the percentage shrinkage of the reservoir crude. As previously
indicated for the other two expressions, there are two percentage shrinkage
values dependent upon the type of liberation process involved. The percentage shrinkage is an expression of the change in volume from reservoir
pressure and temperature to some standard pressure and temperature. The
change in volume is compared with the resulting volume at the standard
pressure and temperature. Expressed in equation form they are
% shrinkage differential=
VRa X 100 = (Boa - 1)100
(5-7)
Rd
% shrinkage flash= V ~ VRf X 100 = (Bo - 1)100

Rf
(5-8)
The change in reservoir liquid volumes is often referred to some volume

base other than surface volumes. The base to which it is most frequently
---------------
-------
376
referred is to the volume occupied by the liquid phase at the bubble-point

pressure and reservoir temperature. This relationship is normally referred
to as the relative oil volume and expressed in equation form is
i,
= relative oil volume
(5-9)
where V, is the liquid volume at bubble-point pressure and reservoir temperature.

As would be expected, two numerical values exist for any one fluid dependent upon the means of liberation used in obtaining the resulting' volumes. The volwne V in the above equation can take on two values
dependent upon the liberation process, resulting in relative oil volume b;
differential liberation and a relative oil volume due to flash liberation.
At times it is convenient to express reservoir volume relationships in
terms of total volume, that is, the reservoir oil volume and its original
complement of dissolved gas. These volumes, as in the case of the liquid
volume, are referred to either stock-tank volumes or bubble-point volumes.
The total volume ratios are expressed as
Total vol factor = B, = -V'

Rf
vol of oil and its complement of liberated gas at P

vol of stock-tank oil resulting from oil vol at p
and
Relative total vol = V,
v,
= vol of oil and its complement of gas liberated at P
vol of bubble-point oil required to yield vol P

As in _the case of the other expressions of fluid volume, different values
are obtamed for different liberation processes .. Most laboratory fluid analy. ses report only the relative total volume by the flash process. As the other
total volume relationships must be calculated, their discussion is deferred
to the section on correcting laboratory fluid-analysis data.
Other than expressing comparative volumes of reservoir fluids with respect to some standard measure, as either bubble-point liquid or stock-tank
liquid, there also must be a means of expressing the gas in solution and the
gas liberated from the oil O~ng to pressure changes. Liberated gas is that
gas which is formed as the pressure is dropped below original bubble-point
pressure. The gas in solution normally refers to the total amount of gas
that has been liberated in bringing the liquid existing at the elevated
temperature and pressure to stock-tank conditions and is reported in standard cubic feet per stock-tank barrel. The gas liberated at bubble-point
377
pressure is zero, whereas the gas in solution is a maximum at the bubblepoint pressure.
The numerical values obtained for the gas in solution and gas liberated
will depend upon the process of liberation, flash or differential. In most
cases the gas liberated by a differential liberation process is reported
as the pressure is progressively decreased. Most engineers consider
that the liberation process in the
reservoir more closely approaches a 80
differential process than a flash
1.1 t---;;,...C-,,""--'--'--r---j
process. The fluid produced from
Bubblj point
the reservoir to the surface is con1.0r--~~The=rm~o~!_s~h~'~'"~'~~~---i
sidered to undergo a flash process,
as it is felt that the liberation in
0
the tubing and in the surface equipReservoir pressure-, psig
ment closely approaches a true
FIG. 5-6. Idealized comparison of flash
flash liberation system.
and differential formation volume facIdealized flash and differential
tors.
formation volume factors Bo and
solution-gas-oil ratios R11 are presented in Figs. 5-6 and 5-7. It is noted
that the flash liberation values are less than those of the differential
process. This relationship between the two processes may occur as shown
or in reverse. The exact relation of the two processes depends on the
composition of the fluid, reservoir
temperature, and the surface separation process.
An illustration of one form in
which the results of a laboratory
analysis of a crude oil-gas sample
I
are reported is shown in Tables 5-1
I
through 5-3 and Figs. 5-8 through
R
II
5-11. The pressures at which the
laboratory measurements were
Bubble point
-~
pressure
made are listed in Table 5-1,
column 1. The relative total vol150~'------------....J
umes resulting from a flash liberReservoir pressure+-, psig
ation process are listed in Table
F1a. 5-7. Idealized comparison of flash
5-1, column 2, and are presented
and differential solution-gas-oil ratios.
graphically in Fig. 5-8. It is noted
that a marked change in slope occurs in the relative volume curve at the
bubble-point pressure. The viscosities of the reservoir liquid resulting from
a differential liberation are reported in Table 5-1, column 3. It will be noted
s,
---
TABLE
(1)
Pressure,
psi
5-1.
(3)
Pressure-volume
relation at 220F,
relative volume of
0.9739
Q.9768
~:
(4)
(5)
(6)
Differential liberation 220F

Viscosity
of oil at
220F, cp
Gas-oil ratio Gas-oil ratio

in solution
liberated
per bbl of
per bbl of
residual oil residual oil
v
v,.,
1.355
1.359
that the viscosity decreases with pressure until the bubble point is reached
and that above the bubble point the viscosity increases with pressure. The
volumes reported in columns 4, 5, and 6 of Table 5-1 were all measured
during.one laboratory test, a differential liberation of the reservoir sample
from pressures above the bubble point to stock-tank conditions of 14. 7 psia
and 60F. The gas liberated from solution expressed as standard cubic
feet per stock-tank barrel of oil resulting from the differential liberation is
1.004
4.0
1.363
1.367
0.9799
Q.9829
379
RESERVom-FLu1n SAMPLE TABULAR DATA8
(2)
oil and ga.s
5,000
4,700
4,465
4,400
4,100
3,970
3,800
3,600
3,530
3,400
3,200
3,130
3,000
2,900
2,820
2,800
2,695
2,663
2,607
2,560
2,512
2,503
2,358
2,300
2,197
2,008
2,000
1,960
1,773
1,702
1,550
1,470
1,351
1,315
1,180
1,010
992
940
711
705
540
450
410
405
289
150
0
-------
0.968
0.9862
0.9886
0.9909
0.9934
Q.9960
Q.9972
0.9985
1.0000
1.0038
1.0101
1.372
1.375
0.931
1.378
1.382
0.908
1.385
1.387
0.889
0.880
1.389
1.391
638
42
596
l.3n--.
89
549
1.351
2.0
1.0
1.0727
~-
150
488
1.323
213
425
1.295
200
348
1.260
351
287
1.232
Fro. 5-8. Volumetric behavior of hydrocarbon sample. (Courtesy of Core Laboratories, Inc.)
412
226
1.205
474
164
1.175
539
638
99
0
l.141
1.066a
reported in column 4. It is noted that as the pressure is progressively decreased, the amount of gas liberated progressively increases. The gas differentially liberated is shown as a function of reservoir pressure in Fig. 5-9.
The gas in solution in the reservoir liquid at reservoir pressure and temperature is tabulated in Table 5-1, column 5, and illustrated graphically
in Fig. 5-10. The differential formation volume factors are presented in
Table 5-1, column 6, and Fig. 5-9.
The results of flash liberation of a bubble-point oil sample through various combinations of stage separation are indicated in Table 5-2 and Fig.
5-11. These data were obtained by flashing bubble-point oil through a
0.997
l.1814
1.2691
0.890
J.0233
1.0447
1.1160
3.0
1.124
1.3792
0o
1,000
2.000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
Pressure, psig
1.5117
1.7108
I.300
2.2404
2.8606
1.570
3.7149
5.1788
2.872
V Ra = residual oil volume at 14. 7 psi a

and 60"F
Gravity of residual oil = 28.8API at
60F
Specific gravity of liberated gas = 1.0626
0
At 60F ~ I.ODO
V = volume at given pressure
Vb =volume at saturation pressure at
specified temperature
378
380
381
separator system where the first-stage separator operated at 0, 50, 100,

and 200 psig and the second stage of separation was always at 0 psig. The
separator temperature (column 2) remained fairly stable in the neighborhood of 74 to 77F. The first-stage separator gas-oil ratio (column 3)
progressively decreased as the first-stage separator pressure increased. The
second-stage separator gas-oil ratio (column 4) progressively increased.
stage separator system. The flash separation values reported in Table 5-2
are used in conjunction with the values in Table 5-1 to calculate the fluid
properties needed for reservoir calculations. The procedure for calculating
the required fluid characteristics is discussed later in this chapter.
The last major part of a standard fluid analysis is the composition of
the bubble-point liquid expressed as both weight and mole per cent. The
sample analysis is indicated in Table 5--3. In all such analyses the liquid
1.70
3.20
1.60
"'
2.80
1.50
2.4 0
1.40 0>
c
~
0
1.30
-~
0
"'
c
;:.
.e
;;;
>
"'
c
1.20 1'
2.00
:;:
1.60
1.20
\,
""
iS
1.10
o c......--~--:-=':-:,.---"::--::'::c,.----::::'::-::----:~ 1.00
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
Pressure, psig
Sotvrotlon pressure
I
0.80
f,000
"'-...
2poo
3,000
Pressure, psig
4,000
5,000
Fxa. 5-9. Analysis of hydrocarbon sample; (o) measured data.
FIG. 5-10. Viscosity of liquid hydrocarbon.
The t0tal gas-oil ratio, which is the sum of the gas liberated in the separator and stock tank (sum of columns 3 and 4), reached a minimum value
for a separation pressure of approximately 100 psig, after which it began
to increase. The gravity of the stock-tank oil reached a maximum value
for a first-stage separator pressure of approximately 100 psig. The shrinkage factor, which is the reciprocal of the flash formation volume factor,
also reached a maximum at a first-stage separator pressure of 100 psig.
The specific gravity of the flashed gas is reported as 0.9725 for the single-
density, the molecular weight, and the API gravity of the heptanes-plus
fraction are reported. The reporting of these properties is necessary in
choosing satisfactory pseudo-critical properties and equilibrium ratios.
A fluid analysis where the values are reported in terms of a unit volume
of oil at the bubble-point pressure and reservoir temperature is presented
in Table 5--4.
It is important that the engineer analyze the form in which the fluidanalysis data are reported. The engineer must convert the reported fluid
382
TABLE 5-3. HYDROCARBON ANALYSIS OF RESERVOIR-FLUID 8A.'1PLE5
f .39
32.0
640
:;;
~
:::
~~'.;..--
0 31.5 ~-62 0 .
(I)
".;:
a:
~\
>
=
-
0
0
:: 30.5: 58 0
0
u
_e
E
-'
I
:
2300256
0
(I)
__
f .37 ~
2
//
..
I .36 ~
0
I .35
~~ _
:';
~
54 00
29.5
._
Component
I .38
.'
x'
:- 31.0 'f'so
---
l - - - - ~--
0,,it1----
I
--1-"-4--1--1-
1.34
Toto/ gos-oil ratio
_Formation volume foc_f!!. --~
L33
200
150
fQO
Separator pressure, psig
Fra. 5-11. Effect of separator pressure on physical properties of crude oil.
analysis to the basis of field operating conditions. For example, the gas..
production is normally that liberated at the separator with no record of
the gas liberated from the stock-tank oil. In the standard analysis, no
data are reported which relate liberated and solution-gas-oil ratios with
respect to separator conditions. If differential data were used, an error
(1)
Separator
pressure,
psi
0
50
100
200
(2)
5-2-
SEPARATOR TESTS OF RESERVOIR-FLUID 8AMPLE
(3)
Sep aSeparator
gas-oil
rater
ratioa
temp, F
i4
75
76
77
620
539
505
459
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes
Heavier
Hydrogen sulfide
Weight
4.45
1.59
3.56
0.63
1.43
0.74
1.14
2.12
84.20
0.14
100.00
Mole%
33.78
6.42
9.82
1.33
2.99
1.25
1.93
2.99
38.97
0.52
100.00
Density at 60F,
gm/cc
0.8859
0
API
at 60F
28.l
Mol wt
263
50
TABLE
383
(4)
Stocktank
gas-oil
ratioa
23
49
98
(7)
(6)
(5)
StockFlash
Shrinkage formation
tank
factor,~
gravity,
volume
API at VR1/Vb
factorc
60F
0
29.9
31.5
31.9
31.8
0.7236
0.7463
0.7491
0.74i9
1.382
1.340
1.335
1.337
(8)
Specific
gravity
of
flashed
g!l.'l
0.9725
a Separator and stock-tank gas-oil ratio in cubic feet of gas at 60F and 14.7 psia per
barrel of stock-tank oil at 60F.
b Shrinkage factor: VR1/Vb is barrels of stock tank oil at 60F per barrel of saturated
oil at 2,695 psig and 220F.
c Formation volume factor: Vb/V Rf is barrels of saturated oil at 2,695 psig and 220F
per barrel of stock-tank oil at 60F.
approaching 20 per cent for high separator pressures may be made in certain calculations.
In the next section the correction of the reported laboratory data for
fallacies in technique in obtaining samples, for technique of measuring
properties in the laboratory, and for field measurement practices are
presented.
PREPARATION OF FLUID-A.."l"ALYSIS DATA FOR USE
IN RESERVOIR CALCULATIONS
The manner in which fluid samples are collected, analyzed, and reported
has been discussed. It was mentioned that certain corrections of reported
data were required before application to a field problem. The type of corrections required will be dependent upon the state of depletion at which
the fluid sample was collected and the sampling method used. It is desirable to obtain a fluid sample as early in the life of a field as possible so
that the sample will closely approximate the original reservoir fluid. Collection of a fluid sample early in tbe life of a field reduces the chances of
free gas existing in the oil zone of the reservoir.
There are three series of calculations which must be made on laboratory
fluid-analysis data so that they can be used in reservoir calculations. First,
the laboratory data as reported must be smoothed. This smoothing is to
reduce any errors which might have been introduced in laboratory measurements. The smoothing is applied to the relative total volume and
differential oil volume data.
The second series of calculations involves the computation of combination (often called flash) formation volume factors and gas-oil ratios. These
parameters are calculated assuming that differential liberation occurs in
---------
384
the reservoir and that flash liberation occurs between the reservoir and
the stock tank.
The other corrections which are necessary depend upon the sample and
when it was obtained. If, from field data, it is apparent that the bubble
point of the laboratory sample is in error, it becomes necessary to alter all
the values reported in the fluid analysis to fit observed field conditions.
There are several field conditions which might be used to indicate the
accuracy of a fluid analysis. These conditions will be discussed in more
detail when the correcting procedures are amplified.
Smoothing Laboratory Data
The smoothing of laboratory data is accomplished by two means. The
total relative volume is fitted to a dimensionless compressibility curve
which is referred to as the Y function. The Y function usually is linear with
pressure when plotted on rectangular coordinate paper. The relative oil
volume factor is fitted to a dimensionless volume change function. This
function is referred to as the AV or Hurst' function. The logarithm of AV
is usually linear with the logarithm of the difference in pressure and the
bubble-point pressure.
In determining the best line which will fit the laboratory data points,
two methods are recommended: the mean least-squares method and ~
method of averages.
Relative Total Volume Data. The pressure-volume relationship of a
crude-oil-dissolved-gas system is a flash liberation process. A given mass
of the reservoir fluid is expanded in a cell maintained at reservoir tempera-
ture, and the equilibrium pressure and volume observed. The laboratory
data are usually expressed as relative total volume V,/V,. These data
frequently require smoothing to correct for laboratory inaccuracies in
measuring small volume changes. A dimensionless compressibility func-
tion is used to smooth the values reported by the laboratory. This function is defined as
(5-10)
Pb = bubble-point or saturation pressure

P = reservoir pressure for which Y is being calculated
v,;v, = relative total volume at the pressure p
The Y function either is a straight-line function of pressure or has only

small curvature. To smooth the relative total volume data, the Y function
is computed and plotted as a function of the pressure P. The Y data will
be erratic near the bubble-point pressure owing largely to difficulties associated with measuring small changes in volume in the laboratory pressure
cell.
3.000 o
/
0. I
I ;:
a:~ wooo
;;::'
_, .....
-"
_.,.
'
.....
'
II
o BHS- 46 C {.Jan., !946)
>.
1.000 o
oo
800
1,600
2,400
3,200
4,000
Pressure, psia
FIG. 5-12. Smoothing of relative total volume data. Bottom-hole sample BHS-46C.
. Calculation of Best Y Curve. Straight-line relationships are conveu1ently expressed mathematically in the form
Y = a + bx
(5-11)
where b is the slope and a the intercept.
Several methods are available for fitting an expression such as Eq. (5-11)
to an array of data point. Two of these methods will be considered here.
Fitting an equation to a given set of data implies determining the cou-
P,-P
Y =p
-=-=-[<""v~,;""v'""',J~--.,,1J
where
385
4.000o
stants a and b such that the resulting straight-line equation will closely
express the relationship throughout the range of the data. The method of
least squares and m~thod of averages can be used to obtain the equation
of the best curve which can be fitted to the measured data points.
The least-squares fitting method can be applied to the Y function regardless o.f its curvature. If the data points approximate a straight line,
the equation t? be fitted is Y = a + bP. A value of Y corresponding to
each pressure .IS calculated and then plotted as a fun~tion of pressure.
The curve which best fits these points can then be calculated using the
method of least squares. The laboratory relative volume data in Table 5-4
are srr_ioothed by means of the least-squares method in Example 5-2. The
resultmg least-squares fit is shown in Fig. 5-12.
TAilLE
5-4.
BIIS-46C
SAMPLE ANALYSIS OF
AT
224F
Fla.!!h liberation
....
Pres~ure,
5,010
4,910
4-,810
4,710
4,610
4,510
4,410
4,310
4,260
4,228
4,210
4,185
4,120
4,060
3,998
3,885
3,810
3,780
3,590
3,410
3,215
3,010
2,930
2,610
2,415
2,210
1,938
1,810
1,578
1,410
1.380
1,200
1,010
976
826
716
630
616
670
246
(3)
(2)
(!)
p~
- P,
pei
(4)
Relative
total
volume
.!'.!
L _1
v.
Differential liberation
p~
Relative
oil
- p
y - P[(V1/V~) - 1]
volume~
r..
v.
v.
0
18
43
108
168
230
343
410
448
638
818
1,013
1,218
1,298
1,618
1,813
2,018
2,290
2,418
2,650
2,818
2,848
3,028
3,218
3,253
3,403
3,513
3,598
3,618
3,058
3,Q83
0.9859
0.9875
0.9893
0.9909
0.9028
0.9946
0.0066
O.ll985
0.9905
l.0000
I.0014
1.0036
1.0077
1.0124
1.0172
1.0268
0
O.OII4
0.0036
0.0077
0.0124
0.0172
0.0268
3.0639
2.8541
3.4043
3.3373
3.3446
3.2013
l.0363
1.0555
0.0363
0.0555
3.2649
3.2021
1.1038
0.1038
3.0355
1.1524
0.1524
2.9068
1.2794
0.2794
2.6869
1.4757
0.4757
2.48a9
1.7220
0.7220
2.3259
l.IH9fi
2.1663
0.9105
l.1663
2.2444
2.1635
2.6111
3.0561
3.5012
3.9464
1.6111
2.0561
2.5012
2.9464
2.0709
2.0062
1.9644
1.9383
4.3918
3.3918
1.8021
(8)
(7)
(6)
(6)
D.V - 1 -
L
v.
Gae expaneion
factor v,
cu ft at S.C.
per cu ft at P
and 227F
compreesibility
factor Z
gravity
0.9286
0.9245
a..
a ..
(12)
(11)
a ..
Relative
libera~d,
volume~
cu It
at S.C .
per bbl
eatun.ted
oil
0.0863
102.7
I.0000
0.0474
0.0526
212.2
0.9050
0.0950
196.0
0.8991
0.9070
0.0782
188.5
0.8709
0.1291
175.8
0.8855
0.9080
0.0770
264.3
331.1
0.8386
0.1614
152.9
0.8832
0.0046
0.0779
0.8091
0.1909
129.1
0.8852
0.8956
0.0858
393.4
0.7812
0.2188
105.4
0.8885
0.8972
0.1002
452.9
0.7552
0.2448
80.7
0.9029
0.9064
0.1231
508.4
0.7307
0.2693
54.8
0.9532
0.9333
0.1709
561.2
0.7039
0.2961
32.8
0.9604
1.0052
0.2945
015.6
0.6735 /
0.3205
12.6
l.0061
1.2272
0.7005
071.7
TABLE
6-4 (Continued)
__ or t.e5W
Separato:
(10)
(9)
Fluid analysis
(13)
Separator
prenure, psig
(14)
Separator
g11e-oil ratio,
OU ft/bbl
(15)
Shrinkage factor,
bbl STO/bbl
saturated oil
(16)
Separator
gas gravity
(17)
STO
gravity, 0 API
100
76
50
30
16
0
1,017
1,054
1,0&1
I,lOQ
1,154
1,202
0.6207
0.6160
0.6130
0.60QO
0.5Q84
O.fi920
0.7447
0.7570
0.7776
0.8015
0.8260
0.8643
38.75
38.65
38.33
37.96
37.42
36.81
(18)
(19)
Components
Separator gas
N,
0.20
1.73
76.39
10.22
7.63
1.04
1.77
0.27
0.38
0.37
co,
c.
c,
c.
iC~
nc,
iC
nC,
c,
c ..
Oil volume at pressure P per volume of saturated oil.

Gu volume liberated at preesure P; in dropping the r.reasure from P;-1 to P1 per volume of saturated oil.
Standard cubic feet of gae per barrel of etock-tank oi
Compressibility of oil = 18,0 X 10--t ~
Field teat conditions:
P"
Separator gas-oil ratio = t.085:1
Re&ervoir oil density at P - 0.0313 gm/oe
Separator pressure = 78.5 psig
Mol wt C1+ = 218
Separator temperature = 76F
Dcnaity C1+ ... 0.8472 1m/cc at 60F
Tank gas-oil ratio ... 40 cu ft/bbl
Tank shrinkage = 2.26 %
(20)
Separator oil,
mole%
0.0
0.0
2.01
1.71
4.40
1.98
4.01
2.17
2.49
5.62
75.61
(21)
Reeervoir fluid
0.13
I.II
49.05
7.16
6.47
1.38
2.57
0.95
1.14
2.26
27.18
----------
388
RESERVOIR,..FLU!D PROPERTIES
P.ETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
Method of Least Squares. The method of least squares for a straight

line can be expressed for practical purposes as follows:
For each data point, write an equation of the form y, = a + bx,, where
a and bare unknowns to be determined. For example, with four data points
(x1,y1), (x 2 ,y2 ), (x.,y,), (x,,y,) the array of Eqs. (5-11) becomes
y,=a+bx1
y,=a+bx,
y,=a+bx,
y,-a+bx,
(5-12)
(5-19)
To verify the goodness of fit of the calculated line, the standard deviation is computed (see Example 5-2). The standard deviation is calculated
by the following equation:
Summing the above equations, obtain the first normal equation:

4
where n
y; = 4a
+b
i=l
(5-13)
X;
i=l
To obtain the second normal equation multiply each equation by the

coefficient of b, so that
y1x1 = ax1 + bx12
y2x.i = ax2 + bz.i2
(5-14)
ysXa = ax~ + bxa2
2
y4X4 = ax4 + bx4
Summing Eqs. (5-14) yields the second normal equation

4
y,x, = a
i=l
+b
x;'
na
i=l
+b
i=l
and
Xi!!< = a
x, + b
(5-16)
x;'
(5-17)
i=l
i=I
Equations (5-16) and (5-17) are the generalized normal equations for
two dimensions. The constants a and b are evaluated by solving Eqs.
(5-16) and (5-17) simultaneously, so that
I !
x,
i=l
i=l
y, - n
(xm,)
i=l
nix;-(Ix.)'
ii'.=l
i=l
(5-18)
(5-20)
number of data points
The standard deviation has the same units as the data. From Fig. 5-12 it
is noted that several points near the bubble point were omitted from the
calculations. These were eliminated on the basis of possible errors as
previously mentioned.
Example 5-2. Smoothing of Relative Volume Data. A calculation of
the best-fitting line by the method of least squares follows ( Y function,
BHS-460):
(2)
(3)
(4)
'" - p
P[(V,/Vo) - l]
Pressure
P,psia
yp
P'
3.4043
3.3373
3.3446
3.2943
3.2649
3.2021
3.0355
2.9068
2.6869
2.4839
2.3259
2.2444
2.22-07
2.0709
2.0062
1.9644
1.9383
1.8921
47.6235
4,120
4,060
3,998
3,88.5
3,780
3,590
3,215
2,930
2,415
1,938
1,578
1,380
1,200
975
825
715
630
570
41,804
14,025.72
13,549.44
13,371.71
12,798.35
12,341.32
11,495.54
9,759.13
8,516.92
6,488.86
4,813.79
3,670.27
3,097.27
2,664.84
2,019.13
1,655.12
1,404.54
1,221.13
1,078.49
123,971.57
16,974,400
16,483,600
15,984,004
15,093,225
14,288,400
12,888,100
10,336,225
8,584,900
5,832,225
3,755,844
2,490,084
1,904,400
1,440,000
950,625
680,625
511,225
396,900
324,900
128,919,682
(1)
Y*
x,
i=l
i~I
(yo; - y")'
yo; = value of y from the data

Yci = value of y calculated from the equation of the curve
(5-15)
Generalizing Eqs. (5-13) and (5-15) so that they apply ton points
y,
= S = [ ~ '~'
x,
i=l
]1/2
Standard deviation
* Ta.ble 5-4, column 5.
390
391
where (Pi, Y,) = first average point

(P,, Y,) = second average point
k = number of data points used in evaluating first point
n = total number of data points
The normal equations (1) and (2) are

~y =
(1)
47.6235
+ b~P
+ 41,804b
na
18a
47.6235 - 41,804b
18
a=
+ bU"
~YP = a~P
(2)
123,971.57
+ 128,919,682b
b = Y, - Y 1
41 804
'
b + 128,919,682b
The value of a can readily be calculated once the value of b is obtained

by inserting into the basic equation Y = a + bP the value of b and the
value of Y and P for one of the average points calculated. The result of
the value of a will then be given by Eq. (5-23).
41,804a
From the foregoing equation which defines the coordinate points I and 2,
it is possible to calculate the slope of the straight-line curve by the following equation:
Substituting for a in (2)

47 6235
123,971.57 = 41,804
123,971.57 = 110,602.933 - 97,087,467b
+ 128,919,682b
31,832,215b = 13,368.64
b = 0.00041997
then
- 47.6235 - (41,804)(0.00042)
a 18
+ bP =
1.6703
= 30.0658 = 1 6703
18
+ 0.000420P
Method of Averages. The method of averages is the second means of

calculating the equation of a straight line which describes a set of data
points. The data are divided into two groups with approximately equal
numbers of data points. The arithmetic average coordinates for each
group are obtained. The equation which describes the line passing through
these two average coordinate points would represent a fitted curve to the
over-all group of data points. Mathematically these can be expressed as
P1 =
l P,
-1
k
= Y, - bP, = Y 1
bP,
(5-23)
The method of averages is more appropriately applied when there is

more than one fluid sample; hence an illustration of the procedure is presented in Chap. 7 where several fluid analyses are involved.
Smoothing Differential Liberation Oil Volume Data. The flash total
volume data were fitted to a straight line by means of a dimensionless compressibility term expressed as a function of reservoir pressure. Hurst5
found that the differential oil volume data could be smoothed hy the use
of a dimensionless volume difference term as a function of the pressure
difference. The dimensionless volume difference term is denoted as AV
and is expressed as
t.V = V, - V = 1 - .!:'._
v.
v.
(5-24)
where V /Vb is the relative oil volume, volume of oil at P per volume of oil
at the bubble-point pressure. The pressure difference term is denoted as
AP and is expressed as
!!J' = p, - p
(5-25)
where Po = bubble-point pressure
P = reservoir pressure at which V /Vb is determined
Y, =
(5-22)
P, - p,
y,
i-1
(5-21)
Hurst found that the logarithm of t. V and logarithm of t.P should plot as
a straight line. The equation of the resulting straight line is
log t.V = B +Clog t.P
n1
Y,=1-
.l
n-k i=k+l
y,
or
where
t.V
D t.P 0
D =JOB
C = slope of resulting curve
B = value of log t. V when t.P
(5-26)
= 1, log !!J' = 0
392
393
The previously discussed !east-squares or averaging methods can be used

to determine the best values of the constants B and C. Once the equation
of the best straight line has been determined. the engineer can calculate
the relative oil volumes for the smoothed data. The relative oil volumes
are expressed as
liberation of a bubble-point sample through various separator systems. In

the standard fluid-analysis report the effect of producing differentially liberated oil through a separator system is not considered.
-=1-DAJ'C
v,
(5-27)
The smoothed differential formation volume factors can be computed

from the relative oil volume by the following equation:
B 00
v v,
= -
=
v, VRd
C\
B,,., (1 - D AP
Correction of Laboratory Sample Data for Separator Conditions

As indicated earlier, laboratory data are reported for differential liberation from the bubble-point pressure to standard conditions and for flash
1
"
/.
log (P, - P)
[Jog (P, - P)]'
av
logD. V
log a V log( p, - P)
410
818
1,218
1,618
2,018
2,418
2,818
3,218
3,618
3,983
2.612784
2.912753
3.085647
3.208979
3.304921
3.383456
3.449941
3.507586
3.558469
3.600210
32.624746
6.826640
8.484130
9.521217
10.297546
10.922503
11.447774
11.902093
12.303160
12.662702
12.961512
107.329277
0.0526
0.0950
0.1291
0.1614
0.1909
0.2188
0.2448
0.2693
0.2961
0.3265
-1.279014
-1.022276
-0.892451
-0.792096
-0.719194
-0.659953
-0.611189
-0.569764
-0.528562
-0.486117
-7.560616
-3.341787
-2.977637
-2.753789
-2.541819
-2.376879
-2.232922
-2.108566
-1.998496
-1.880871
-1.750123
-23.962889
-7.560616 = lOa
32.624746b
-23.962889 = 32.624746a + 107.329277b
a=
-23.962889
32.624746
- 32 62474~~ -
7 560616
-23.962889 = -24.666317 - 106.437405b

0.891872b = 0.703428
b = 0.788709
A.
Jog flV: -3.320536
+(0.786052) log(.O,-Pl
a=
0.01
1,000
6P, psi
1.0,000
F1a. 5-13. Smoothing laboratory-determined differential volume data; (o) BHS-46C.
-32.624746(0.788709) - 7.560616
10
-3.329301
log LiV
=a+
blog (P, - P)
0.788709 log (P, - P)
= -3.329201
+ 107.329277b
+ 107.329277b
~~
100
-32.624746b - 7.560616
10
Substituting for a in (2),
<l
'
Pi,-P
Solving for a in (1),
""
:l:log Li V = an + b:l: log (P, - P)

:l:[log Li V log (P, - P)] = a:l: log (P, - P) + b:l: [log (P, - P)]'
(I)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(5-28)
An illustrative example of this type of calculation for bottom-hole sample 46C, Table 5-4, is shown in Examples 5-3 and 5-4, and the resulting
graphical plot is shown in Fig. 5-13.
0.1
Example 5-3. Calculation of Best-fitting Line by Method of Least

Squares (relative oil volume difference curve, BHS-460).
N orrnal equations
- - - - - --
-------------
394
- - - - "---------- - - - - -
Example 5-4.
for BHS-46C.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
0.788709
p,, - p log (P, - P)
log (P, - P)
4,228
3,690
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
0
538
818
1,218
1,618
2,018
2,418
2,818
3,218
3,618
3,983
Calculation of Smoothed Relative Oil Volume Data
2.73078
2.91275
3.08565
3.20898
3.30492
3.38346
3.44994
3.50759
3.55847
3.60021
2.15379
2.29731
2.43367
2.53095
2.60662
2.66856
2.72099
2.76646
2.80659
2.83951
(5)
(6)
log 6.V
Positive
mantissa
of
log 6.V
AV
0.82459-2
0.96830-2
0.10447-1
0.20176-1
0.27742-1
0.33936-1
0.39179-1
0.43726-1
0.47739-1
0.51031-1
0.06677
0.09296
0.1272
0.1591
0.1894
0.2185
0.2465
0.2737
0.3002
0.3238
-1.17541
-1.03170
-0.89553
-0.79825
-0.72258
-0.66064
-0.60821
-0.56274
-0.52261
-0.48969
(7)
(8)
Smoothed
relative
oil
volume
v;v,
1.00000
0.93323
0.90704
0.8728
0.8409
0.8106
0.7815
0.7535
0.7263
0.6998
0.6762
il.V = 1 - .!'._
v.
log il.V =log D +Clog (P, - P)*

= 0.788709
log D = -3.32920 = 7.67946 - 10
The normal practice is to consider that differential liberation occurs in

the reservoir. It is necessary, then, that any expression of liberated gas
should yield the same values as are obtained on the differential liberation
test. These values should be expressed as standard cubic feet liberated per
' barrel of bubble-point oil or per barrel of flash stock-tank oil.
Flash liberation is considered to occur between the reservoir and the
separator. The oil that leaves the reservoir is flashed to the separator,
necessitating that the solution-gas-oil ratio and formation volume factor
be determined by a flash process. To compensate for the simultaneous
operation of both liberation processes, combination solution gas, liberated
gas, and formation volume factor values are required.
The required data can be measured in the laboratory by the technique
indicated by Dodson. 4 The purpose here is to show how a combination
liberation system can be approximated by use of the differential and flash
* C and log D obtained from curve-fitting calculation
in Example 5-3.
395
liberation data contained in a conventional fluid-analysis report. In order

to calculate the combination fluid-analysis properties from standard analysis data, certain assumptions are required. These assumptions are:
1. Standard cubic feet of gas in solution per barrel of bubble-point oil is
defined by the flash liberation test to separator pressure and temperature.
2. The standard cubic feet of gas liberated per barrel of bubble-point
iiquid is defined by a differential liberation process at reservoir conditions.
3. The standard cubic feet of gas remaining in solution at reservoir conditions which will be liberated upon producing that liquid to the separator
by a flash liberation process is the difference between the original gas in
solution and the differentially liberated gas corrected for the reservoir
shrinkage of the fluid.
4. The relationship between the formation volume factors of flash and
differential separated samples remains constant over the entire pressure
range of interest.
.5. The formation volume factor of the bubble-point liquid is determined
by the flash liberation process to separator conditions and then to the
stock tank.
The preceding assumptions limit the range of application of the calculating procedure to pressures above 500 psia. Assumptions 3 and 4 above
are thought to be the more limiting. It is known that excess produced gas
will affect the separator gas-oil ratio, composition of produced liquid and
gas, and hence the formation volume factor and gas in solution values.
The effect of excess gas production is not normally considered even when
measuring combination fluid properties in the laboratory.
Correction of Solution-gas-Oil Ratios. First, consider the calculation
of the gas in solution. As stipulated in the first assumption above, the total
gas in solution is determined by flash liberation of a bubble-point fluid
sample. The engineer will have to select the separator conditions which
most closely approximate field operating conditions. This means that the
engineer must convert the gas-oil ratio reported in the analysis to the basis
of I bbl of bubble-point oil to apply the following procedure.
The conversion from a stock-tank base to a bubble-point base requires
that the gas-oil ratio be multiplied by the shrinkage factor (the reciprocal
of the formation volume factor). In equation form this can be stated as
1
(R,1), = R,. B-
(5-29)
where (R,1), = gas in solution per barrel of bubble-point oil, scf

R,. = gas liberated at the separator per stock-tank barrel of oil by
flashing bubble-point oil, scf
B.1, = bubble-point oil required to yield 1 bbl of stock-tank oil
when flashed through the separator system, bbl
396
397
The standard cubic feet of gas liberated by a differential process can be

reported with respect to stock-tank or bubble-point conditions. If the
values are reported with respect to stock-tank oil, it is necessary to refer
them to bubMe-point oil. This conversion can be expressed as
where B,1b = bubble-point oil required to yield I bbl of stock-tank oil

when flashed through the separator to stock-tank conditions, bbl
Boob = bubble-point oil required to yield I bbl of stock-tank oil
when differentially liberated to stock-tank conditions, bbl
B,,. = oil at reservoir pressure P required to yield I bbl of stocktank oil when differentially liberated to stock-tank conditions, bbl
B, = oil at reservoir pressure P required to yield 1 bbl of stocktank oil when flashed through the separator, bbl. This term
is often referred to as simply the flash formation volume
factor
(5-30)
where (RL). is the standard cubic feet liberated by differentially lowering

the pressure from the bubble-point pressure Pb to some other reservoir
pressure P referred to a barrel of bubble-point oil, (RL),,. is the standard
cubic feet of gas liberated by differentially lowering the pressure from the
bubble-point pressure to some other reservoir pressure referred to a barrel
of liquid at standard conditions, and Boob is the barrels of bubble-point oil
required to yield 1 bbl of differentially liberated stock-tank oil.
The gas in solution at any reservoir pressure P with respect to a barrel
of bubble-point liquid is the difference in the gas originally in solution and
the gas differentially liberated. This can be expressed as
Example 5-5. Gas in Solution Corrected for Field Separation Conditions of 50 Psig and 76F.
R, = R,. - (RL)o B,fb
(5-31)
Bo1b*
where (R,). is the standard cubic feet of gas in solution at P per barrel of
bubble-point oil.
Multiplying (R,). by the flash bubble-point formation volume factor
converts the gas in solution per bubble-point barrel to gas in solution per
stock-tank barrel of oil, so that
R.,* = 1,083 scf/STB
R. = (R,),,J3,1b
= [(R.1J. = R,. -
(RL).JB,fb
(5-32)
[(RL),,] BBofb
oob
Calculations illustrating the conversion of the differential liberation gas

data to field operating separation conditions is illustrated using fluid sample BHS-46C (Table 5-4) in Example 5-5.
Correction of Oil-volume Relations. It was assumed previously that
the relationship between the flash and differential liberation processes
would be constant at any reservoir pressure. In this case, the combination
flash-differential formation volume factor can be calculated from the differential formation volume factor data and the flash formation volume
factor for bubble-point oil.
The combination formation volume factor can be expressed as
(5-33)
= 0. 6130 = 1.63132
Pressure
(RL)i,*
(RL),,Bof'
R,
4,228
3,810
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
0
102.7
188.5
264.3
331.l
393.4
452.9
5-08.4
561.2
615.6
671.7
0
167.54
307.50
43Ll6
540.13
641.76
738.82
829.36
915.5-0
1,004.24
1,095.76
1083.0
915.46
775.50
651.84
542.87
441.24
344.18
253.64
167.50
78.76
-12.76
*Table 5-4.
Example 5-6. Determination of Combination Formation Volume Factors for 50 Psig and 74F Separator Conditions (BHS-46C).
B
* BQ1i,
o.
Bo1b
od Bodb
VB
Vb
ofb
1/0.6130 == 1.63132 (from Table 5-4, column 15).
398
Pressure
v;v,t
Bo
4,228
3,810
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
1.00()0
0.9474
0.9050
0.8709
0.8386
0.8091
0.7812
0.7552
0.7307
0.7039
0.6735
1.63132
1.54551
1.47634
1.42072
1.36802
1.31990
1.27439
1.23197
1.19201
1.14829
1.09869
399
Table 5-5 and Figs. 5-14 and 5-15 present a comparison of Iaboratorymeasured differential and composite volume factors and solution ratios
and values calculated by the methods described previously. The calcu. lated values closely agree with the measured values to approximately 500
psia.
TABLE 5-5. COMPARISON OF MEASURED AND CALCULATED COMPOSITE VOLUME
FACTORS AND SoLU""'TION RATIOS
Composite liberation data'

Reservoir data
t Table 5-4, column 6.

Calculations on the fluid sample of Table 5-4 illustrating the computation of combination formation volume factors are shown in Example 5-6
on page 394.
The calculation of combination volume factors and solution-gas-oil ratios is in close agreement with composite data measured in the laboratory.
100~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Gas-oil ratios, cu ft/bbl
Pressure,
psig
Temp, F
Separator
Stock tank
Total
2,730
1,986
511
140
140
140
566.3
403.3
136.8
36.7
40.6
58.5
603
443.9
195.3
Formation volume
factor Ba
1.2552
1.1752
1.0776
Differential data'
Pressure, psig
Gas liberated, cu ft/bbl
Formation volume
factor B"d
2,730
1,986
511
0
180.86
501.0
1.3442
1.2733
1.1430"
Calculated composite
"'
~
-.._
~ 4001-~~-+~~~1-~~-,j'~79'-.,i;f'-~~-t-~~--j
Gas-oil ratio, cu ft/bbl

Pressure, psig
Separator
Total
566.3
397.4
98.5
603
434.1
135.2
2,730
1,986
511
Computed separator (flash l
Oo'---~~,..L,,~~~~~-..,.l~~~l-~~-'-~~-'
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
Pressure, psig
1.2552
1.1890
1.0722
Read from curve of Dodson.
Observed separator (flash)
Formation volume
factor Bo/
2,500
3,000
F1a. 5-14. Comparison of measured and calculated composite solution-gas-oil ratios.
Total Volume Factors

As mentioned previously, the total volume factor B t is the reservoir volume of liquid and gas required to yield I bbl of stock-tank oil. Frequently
the total volume factor is referred to as the reservoir volume occupied by
one stock-tank barrel of oil and its complement of gas. The total volume
factor is a function of the fluid shrinkage and volume of gas liberated. For
this reason there are three distinct ways in which the total volume factor
----
---- -----------
400
can be computed. The three total volume factors result from the different
gas liberation processes: flash, differential, and a combination of the two
processes.
Flash Total Volume Factor. The total volume factor for flash liberation
is computed from data in the fluid-analysis report. The total relative vol-
Differential Total Volume Factor.
401
The second means of computing the
total volume factor is to assume a complete differential process of liberation.
This volume factor can also be calculated from data in the fluid-analysis
report. The differential total volume factor is expressed by the following
relation:
ume (pressure-volume relation) is an expression of the total volume occu-
pied by the liquid and gas originally comprising 1 bbl of bubble-point

liquid. The volume of bubble-point oil required to yield a barrel of stocktank oil (flash formation volume factor) is used to convert the total relative
(5-35)
where
g
'0>
:
i.4 f---+----+---l-----\,_ _
_,,_,+----'
~
~
~
B"' = total volume factor at pressure P

Bod = differential formation volume factor at pressure P, bbl
reservoir oil per bbl of stock-tank oil
(RL)., = gas liberated by differential liberation from bubble point
to pressure P per stock-tank barrel of oil, scf
B 9 = gas formation volume factor, reservoir cu ft/scf
5.61 = conversion factor, cu ft/bbl
= bubble-point oil required to yield 1 bbl of oil at stock-tank
conditions by differential process, bbl
V /V, = relative oil volume, volume of oil at P per volume of oil at
bubble-point pressure
(RL). = gas liberated from P, to P by differential process with
respect to 1 bbl of oil at bubble-point pressure, scf
B,,.,
-~ 1.3f----+----+---+---l--~><;;,+--,,---l
Combination Total Volume Factor.

1.0'o"---5-,-o'-o---,,o~o-o--1.-5'-oo--2,-o~o-o--2...J5'-oo--3,-'ooo
Pressure, psig
Flo. 5-15. Comparison of measured and calculated composite oil ,,.olume factors.
(Adapted from Dodson.4 )
volume to the total volume factor. The flash total volume factor is given
by the following relationships:
B
where
Vt
V,
V Rf
V, V,
<!
V, B
v, VRJ = v, "1'
V,
v, (SH).
(5-34)
reservoir volume occupied by gas and liquid
volume occupied by bubble-point liquid

stock-tank volume resulting in flashing bubble-point oil
through separator to stock-tank condition
B4, = bubble-point oil required to yield one stock-tank barrel of
oil when flashed to separator conditions, bbl
(SH). = shrinkage factor, bbl of stock-tank oil per bbl of bubblepoint oil
=
=
Generally it is considered that
differential liberation occurs in the reservoir and flash liberation from the
reservoir to the surface. For the computation of a more realistic total volume factor, the two liberation processes should be combined. The combination total volume factor is dependent upon the same assumptions used
in calculating the combination fluid relationships previously discussed. The

total volume factor can be expressed as
B,
B.1 B,
(RL )"B,,.,
5.61
B.
B.r [ ;,
(RL). B6l 5.61]

5
(5-36)
where B. is the reservoir liquid volume at P required to yield 1 bbl of

stock-tank oil by a flash process from P to separator and stock-tank conditions and (RL)st, B9 , B 01b, and Boo.o are as previously defined.
It is noted that the conversion from surface to reservoir volumes is dependent upon a flash process only. But as indicated in prior discussion of
the combination analysis, the relationship between the oil and gas volumB
at P and the bubble-point oil volume is essentially a differential process.
The total volume factors for the fluid analysis presented in Table 5-4
------------------
402
are calculated by all three methods iu Example 5-7. The results of Example 5-7 are graphically compared iu Fig. 5-16.
Example 5-7. Calculation of Flash, Differential, and Combination
Total Formation Volume Factors for BHS-46C. Separator conditions,
50 psig and 74F. (See table, page 403.)
B,"
B,,,,, =
I
0.6130
1.63132 from Table 5-4, column 15
vb vR1
(2) B., = B,,,,, ; ,
"2;
"'
-..,;-
,_
vb
"
"'-'
"'
-'
"'
.;
"'
"""'
-'
;:i
-'
-'
",_
:':
,_
"'
"'
8 "'
,_
"'"'"' "'"'
"' "'
"'
.."'"'"'
...-
00
,_
"'
"'"'
"'
-'
"-'
-'
"'$"'
..
"'~ 00
,,;
"' ,,;"'
0
. -"'"' "'"'
"'
- "-"'
"'
"'"' 0"'
"'-' "'
00
00
00
,_
"'
"'
q
"'
"'"'
"'
00
-'
..""'
,_
00
,_
"
00
-.. "'..
.... - ..
s
,_
0
0
0
0
"'"' "'"'0
-'
"'-'
00
,_
"'"' "'
'-:
"'
00
"'"'"l
,_
,_
00
0
0
"'
V, B,,,,,,
"'
"'
-"'
_
= 1.52671
0 655
V, .!'.'...
"';:i
,_
;;;
&;
"'
00
"'
,_
"'
oi
,,;
.;
;::
""',_ ,_
"'
0
..
"'"'
"'
"'
00
0
-0
"'
!::.
(RL)o B6I
5
.;
"'
"'
"'000
"'
e;;
Correcting Fluid-analysis Data to Reservoir Bubble-point Pressure
Sampling procedures sometimes are in error, so that the samples obtained have an erroneous bubble-point pressure. In partially depleted
fields or iu fields which originally existed at the bubble-point pressure, it
is difficult to obtain a fluid sample which actually represents the original
oil in the reservoir at the time of discovery. In these cases it is necessary
to utilize other field data to determine the actual bubble point of the oil
in the reservoir and correct the bubble-point pressure of the sample to
this value.
In correlating laboratory bubble-point pressures with field data there
are generalities in behavior 'Yhich will aid in the determination of the actual
, bubble-point pressure. If the reservoir contained an initial gas cap, it is
ordinarily assumed that the reservoir liquid was saturated at the original
gas-cap pressure. Exceptions to this rule occur when there is great structural relief. Often, the oil in the lower segments of these reservoirs is undersaturated.
If the reservoir fluid was a single-phase system, it can be assumed that
either the reservoir fluid was undersaturated or the bubble-point pressure
was the original reservoir pressure. In most fields the production data and
pressure behavior can be used to determine whether the fluid is undersaturated or not. If the producing gas-oil ratio remains stable and the
reservoir pressure declines very rapidly for small changes in cumulative
production, it would be suspected that the reservoir fluid was undersatu-
'"
~
;;:
,_
0
0
0
e<:l
C':)
~
lQ
t-
0
0
C:O<C<:e<C
,...:; ,..; ,.....; ,.....;
>OO"""'CO
CJO-<:O
Cl 0 0
C'l
Cl 0 0 0
0,...:;,...:;,...:;
00
. "'
"' 00
o
-
"'....i,...:;,_"'
0"'
"'
0
00
-'
oi
"'"'
,_
"'
00
-'
"'
"'0
00
- "'...
"0
00000.00
C:O N .-< 00 INNINCOOO

"""'- """'- """'- M- M
00
r-_
0 0><':1 0
Cl
~ ...:<_
C't
o_
MMMMM
::::l
00
,_
"'
- -
"'
,_
"'
"'
,_
0
,_
"'
"'
"'
"'
"'
"'
"' "
"' eQ"" 00"""'
"'"' "'
-'
,_
"'"'
,_
,_
,_
00>.0000
M
M
Cl<O"':t'C'lCl
C'\1- C'I- C'l- <N- - -
403
-'
,_
,_
"'
"'
,_
"
0
"'
.....
"'0
....
-- "'"' "',_.. -..""'
-. :e
"' ""' "'
"' "' .."'"' ""'
"'--
,_
00
"'
!'i
"' "'
,_
"'
::i
<Xi
;:i
00
"'
~
&;
00
0
00
"'"'
oi
'-:
.;
::::l
.. ..
:s"' "' .."'
- - -"'
00
" "' s"'

"'"' "'
"'
55
-'
00
"'
"000
"' i2"'
"'
"'
0
CllNO...i<
'<!' M C:O 0
M
:e
-"' .
00
"'
"'0
"'
::::i.
:s"'
"'
,_
."'"' .."""
"'- "
,_
"'
"'
."'""' ""- .."' .."'"' "'..

"
"'
<Xi
-"'
...
"'"'0
00
"'
"'
,_
':;\
~
"'
"0
.;
,,;
..
..""' "'"'"'
:e
0
0
00
"'
::i
a:.
;:;-
00
,...:; c-4
----
000000
t- co 0
CO_ >.q_ ''_ ~- IN_
......
" ' 00
~<:.6
,.:
c-4 e<:.i
"'
OIOOOOlQ
-t-M-1'-'<!'
3~ c:o c:o lO C'1
- - - - - - - - - - --------------- ----
404
--------
7.6
7.2
6.8
Flosh
Differential
Combination
6.4
x
6. 0
\\
5. 6
5. 2
.6
1\
~\,\
3. 8
3,4
3.0
2.6
\, ~
""'-""" "u.
~
2.2
"-x....... ~ 1-o-..~
"-.....
1.8
00
800
1,200
1,600
2,000
2.400
----
2,800
~-
3,2.00
-x
3,600
4PQO
4,400
Pressure
FIG. 5-16. Comparison of methods of calculating total formation volume factors.
405
rated. If the gas-oil ratios tend to increase early in the life of the field and
the reservoir pressure does not decline at a very rapid rate, it could be concluded that the original reservoir pressure was the bubble-point pressure
of the fluid. If there is no evidence from field data that the oil is undersaturated, the normal procedure is to consider the original reservoir pressure to'_be the bubble-point pressure of the oil in the reservoir.
It was mentioned previously that the sample analysis could be corrected
to agree with field-observed data by changing the volume of gas recombined with the separator liquid sample. A calculation procedure can be
used \~thich assumes that the error in the laboratory-measured values is
due to an inaccurat.e solution-gas volume.
The calculating procedure assumes that the gas required to correct the
analysis can be added or subtracted according to the laboratory gas liberation data. All the other fluid factors required in reservoir computations
are corrected using the above assumption.
Correction of Liberated Gas-Oil Ratio. The laboratory reports the gas
liberated with respect to a barrel of fluid at the bubble-point or stock-tank
conditions resulting from differential liberation. A set of total liberated
gas-oil ratio values is reported with respect to a stock-tank barrel of oil
resulting from flash liberation of a bubble-point sample through various
separator conditions.
Consider first the necessity of correcting the differential liberation data
to the field-observed bubble-point pressure. Assume that only differential
liberation of the solution gas occurs in the reservoir. Also, assume that the
reason the bubble-point pressure of the reservoir is in error is that too much
or not enough of the liberated gas was collected in the sample. If this is
the case, then the sample data can be corrected by removing or adding the
quantity of gas required to satisfy the true bubble-point conditions. Before
the required quantity can be calculated, it is necessary to assume that the
solution behavior exhibited by the reservoir sample "~II be valid for correcting the liberated gas data.
The simplest way to make the desired correction is on a differential solution-gas-oil ratio curve such as Fig. 5-17. If the field-determined bubblepoint pressure is greater than the sample bubble-point pressure, the new
quantity of gas in solution is obtained by extrapolating the curve to the
field-determined bubble-point pressure. When the field-determined bubblepoint pressure is less than the sample bubble-point pressure, just stop the
solution-gas--oil ratio curve at the field-determined value.
The differential liberated gas-oil ratio is corrected by adding or subtracting the difference observed between the total solution-gas-oil ratio at
the sample and the field bubble points. When the field-determined bubble
point is_ greater than the sample bubble point, add the observed difference
to the sample liberated gas data. If the field bubble-point value is less than
406
t~e ~mple value, ~ubtr~ct the observed difference from the sample values.
Altenng the gas hberat10n data when the bubble point is changed from
4,228 to 3,690 psia is illustrated in Example 5-8. Liberated gas is used in
1,200
I
1,000
!"-....
"'
800
~ 600
F'-.
"J'l'<a._ "
400
_/
200
f,200
'
o Gas in solution for BHS - 46 C

c Gas liberated for 8HS-46C
./
2,000
J
x
log
v, V,- v =log t.V =log D +Clog (P, -
tion process.
400 ~
"'b I'..
4POO
0
5,000
Example 5-8. Correction of Differentially Liberated Gas Data for

Change in Bubble Point (BHS-46C).
4,228-sample BP
3.690-field BP
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
130
188.5
264.3
33L!
393.4
452.9
508.4
561.2
615.6
671.7
v, = D(P, -
P)C
I - -
200
this example, as differential solution-gas-oil ratios are not available to

stock-tank conditions.
(RL)b~*
AV
Rewriting in tenns of the relative oil volume factor, the following is obtained:
v
v,
liberated gas-oil ratios as determined by a differential libera-
Pressure P, psia
(5-26)
terms as defined previously.

The above equation will reduce to
Pressure, psio
1:1G. 5-17. Solution and
P)
__,,
600 ~
3,000
Correction of Differential Relative Oil Volume. To correct the differential relative oil volume to bubble-point conditions other than those
measured in the laboratory it is necessary to assume that the dimensionless
volume change quantity AV used in smoothing the laboratory data will
define the new fluid system. In smoothing the differential liberation data
it was shown that
1,000
1,000
800
[.;
I/
407
(RL)" - (RL).,j
(RL).!
-130
0
58.5
134.3
201.1
263.4
322.9
378.4
431.2
485.6
541.7
62.7
143.9
215.5
282.3
346.1
405.6
462.2
520.5
580.6
* (RL)b. is the gas liberated per barrel of bubble-point oil for the laboratory sample.
t (RL)ab is the gas liberated from the sample bubble-point pressure to the observed
field bubble-point pressure per barrel of sample bubble-point oil.
t (RL)b is the gas liberated per barrel of field bubble-point oil. (RL)b =
[(RLh - (RL).b] Vb/V~b, where Vb/Vb is the relative oil volume of the field bubblepoint oil to the sample bubble-point oil.
1 - D(P, - P)c
(5-27)
The values of C and D are determined from the smoothed sample data.
The field-determined bubble-point pressure is now used as Po. The new
value of the relative oil factor at any reservoir pressure P can be calculated
with this relationship.
The preceding equations must be used to calculate at least one relative
oil volume if the field bubble-point pressure is greater than the sample
bubble-point pressure. If the field value is less than the sample value of
the bubble-point pressure, the relative oil volumes can be calculated from
the existing sample data.
Equation (5-37) is required to calculate the differential oil fonnation
volume factor at the field-determined bubble-point pressure when that
pressure is above the bubble-point pressure reported for the laboratory
sample. The formation volume factors reported for the laboratory sample
are still valid for the reservoir fluid sample at all pressures below its reported bubble point.
The differential oil formation volume factor
for field determined
bubble-point conditions can be calculated using corrected oil volume data
and the sample differential oil volume factor as follows:
B,,,
AV-1-
B,,,
v, - v VRd = VRd V,
VRd
v.
408
RESERVOIB-FLUID PROPERTIES
v v;v.. v;v..
v, = v,;v.. = 0_93301
v
v
B., = Vo. B.,, = Vo. (1.52671)
B,,,,,
""' =
1 - dV
B,,,,,
1 - D(P, - P)C
B.,,,
v;v,
(5-371
where B.,, is the laboratory-reported differential formation volume factor

at pressure P and V JV, is the relative oil volume factor at pressure p corrected for the change in bubble-point pressure.
The c~rrected relative oil volume can be calculated by dividing the sample relative 011 volume at each pressure by the sample relative oil volume
at the corrected bubble-point pressure. This relationship is stated as
v v;v...
v, = v,;v,,
(5-38)
This relationship is valid because in a differential liberation process the

gas 1s ::emove? a~ each_ pressure step. Thus the liquid volumes resulting
from differential hberat1on actually evolve from the liquid volume existing
at each preceding pressure. This method of correcting the relative oil
volume is demonstrated in Example 5-9 for the bottom-hole sample in
Table 5-4.
Correction of Flash Formation Volume Factors for Changes in Bubblepoint Pressure. The asswnptions made in calculating the combination
differential-flash system are used in calculating the new flash formation
volume factor and solution-gas-oil ratio. In the case of the combination
system it was shown that
Bo= Bod Bofb
B,,,,
Re~Titing
the above equation to solve for

B."
4,228
3,810
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
l,_410
1,010
610
245
Sample
relative oil
volume
V*/Vb
1.0000
0.93301
0.90687
0.8727
0.8408
0.8106
0.7817
0.7538
0.7267
0.7004
0.6768
Adjusted
relative oil
volume
v;v,
1.0000
0.9720
0.9354
0.9012
0.8688
0.8378
0.8079
0.7789
0.7507
0.7254
*Bod remains unchanged from the sample data.
Adjusted
differential
formation
volume
factor B""*
1.42444
!.38453
1.33236
1.28366
I.23755
1.19343
1.15083
1.10946
1.06931
1.03328
BB. B.,,
"'
(5-33)
Bofb
results in
(B.rol. VV,
(5-39)
where B. and B., = flash and differential formation volume factors at a

given reservoir pressure, usually sample bubble-point
Bodb =
V 0/V"
Example 5-9. Adjustment of Relative Oil Volume and Differential
Formation Volume Factors for BHS-46C.
Pressure,
psi a
409
pressure
corrected differential formation volume factor at new
bubble-point pressure
relative oil volume reported in sample for fluid at
field bubble-point pressure
The new value of gas in solution is calculated by the same equations used
in calculating the gas in solution for the combination system. It is
(5-32)
where R,. is the gas in solution from the sample analysis and (RL),, is the
standard cubic feet of gas added to or subtracted from the sample liberated
gas values to correct for the change in bubble-point pressure. The flash
formation volume factor and solution-gas-oil ratio for the fluid sample of
Table 5-4 are corrected in Example 5-10.
Example 5-10. Correction of Adjusted Sample for Surface Separator

Conditions of 50 Psig and 74F.
Pressure,
psia
4,228
3,690
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
B,1,
R,t
Adjusted
relative oil
volume V/Vb
B,t
870.9
775.5
651.8
542.9
441.2
344.2
253.6
167.5
78.8
-12.8
1.0000
0.9720
0.9354
0.9012
0.8688
0.8378
0.8079
0.7789
0.7507
0.7254
1.52207
1.47945
1.42374
1.37169
1.32237
1.27519
1.22968
1.18554
1.14262
1.10411
(RL).(B,1,),
212.!
307.5
431.2
540.l
641.8
738.8
829.4
915.5
1,004.2
1,095.8
= (B,1,).(V,jV,,) = (1/0.6130)0.93301
= 1.52207
(RLJ.(B,1),
! R, = Ru - (RL).(Bo1b)o = 1,083 l B, = (V /V,)B,1 = (V /V,)I.52207
Correction of Total Volume Factors for Different Bubble-point Pressure.

The only total formation volume factor which requires additional corrections is the flash total formation volume factor. This factor is calculated
from the relative volume factor as reported. in the fluid analysis. In order
to correct the total volume factor, it is necessary to correct the total relative volume.
The original total relative volume data were smoothed by means of the
Y function. If it is assumed that the slope and the intercept of the fitted
Y function curve are valid, the new relative total volume can be calculated
from the equa,tion of the Y function.
The Y function is defined as
y
a+ bP
P,-P
P(V,JV,) - 1
Rewriting the above equation:for the relative total volume results in

V, = 1 - p, - p = 1 + 1 - (P,/P)
(5-40)
V,
aP + bP'
a+ bP
where a and b are defined from the Y curve fitted to laboratory data, P,
is the new bubble-point pressure, and Pis the reservoir pressure at ,mich
v.;v. is desired.
The corrected flash total volume factor can now be calculated using the
definition of the flash total volume factor,
Bt1
~: Botb
411
provided both the relative total volume v.;v. and the formation volume
factor Both refer to the new bubble-point conditions. The above correcting procedure was applied to the fluid sample in Table 5-4. The calculations are presented in Examples 5-10 and 5-11.
FLUID-ANALYSIS DATA ON GAS-CONDENSATE SYSTEMS
Gas-condensate systems are analyzed by a technique different from that

discussed for a gas-erude-oil system. The methods used in analyzing such
a sample will be discussed in the succeeding section.
As was mentioned earlier, a bottom-hole sampling technique cannot be
used on a gas-condensate well because of the accumulation of liquid in the
bottom of the hole. Thus, all reservoir fluid samples used for the analysis
of gas-condensate fluids are of either the recombination or split-stream
variety. In most cases, gas and liquid are collected from a high-pressure
separator. The same field measurements are made as previously discussed
in the collection of a recombination separator sample. The quantities collected are brought to the laboratory and carefully analyzed and recombined
to represent the reservoir fluid. The same precautions apply for a gascondensate fluid that applied for a gas-erude-oil fluid with respect to recombination sample.
Laboratory Measurements
In the laboratory a standard analysis consists of measuring the pressurevolume relationship, a pressure depletion history, the analysis of the well
stream effluent at various stages of the pressure depletion, a volume-pressure depletion relationship, and compressibility factors for the produced
gas. There are other analyses and special calculations which an engineer
may desire. These extra analyses must be requested in addition to the
standard fluid analysis. As these extra analyses are special, they will not
be discussed in great detail in the following text.
Relative Volume. In measuring the relative volume relationship the
same procedure is used as was used in the gas-crude-oil system. The difference in the two fluid-measuring systems is that for a gas-condensate
system, the pressure cell has a glass window covering its entire length.
This glass window permits visual observation of sample changes resulting
from changing the pressures. The relative volume relationship does not
behave as does the crude-oil-natural-gas system. A sharp change normally
does not exist in the shape of the pressure-volume curve at the dew point
as occurred at the bubble point of a gas-erude-oil system. Relative volume
data for a condensate fluid are illustrated in Table 5-6 and Fig. 5-18. It is
noted that the dew point had to be determined by visual observation and
not by the change in the slope of the relative volume curve.
-----"-----
Example 5-11. Adjusting Relative Total Volume to New Bubble Point

and Calculation of Adjusted Total Flash Formation Volume Factor.
TAJ3Llil
5-6.
413
PRESSURE-VOLUME RELATIONSHIP FOR CONDENSATE FLUID 8AMPLE6
Pressure, psi
Relativ~
volume
5,000
4,800
4,600
4,400
4,300
0.8293
0.8509
0.8753
0.9034
0.9186
4,200
4,100
3,900
3,830 (dew point)
3,797 (reservoir pressure)
0.9340
0.9513
0.9880
1.0000
1.0094
3,600
3,200
2,803
2,400
2,000
1.0552
1.1662
1.3185
1.5325
1.8424
1,622
1,200
932
756
2.2886
3.1160
4.0870
5.0572
Pressure Depletion Study. Another part of a standard laboratory

analysis is a pressure depletion relationship for the fluid system. During
this study the volume produced is measured and the well stream effluent
is sampled at various stages of depletion. These samples are used to determine the composition and compressibility of the well stream effluent. The
depletion test is performed in the completely windowed cell. When the

laboratory test is made, the cell is charged with a known volume of reservoir fluid. The pressure in the cell is lowered by bleeding gas from the top
of the cell, simulating a well producing only gas with the liquid remaining
in the reservoir. The volume of gas produced is measured and expressed
in standard units. At predetermined pressures, the produced well stream
is sampled so that an analysis of the producing stream can be obtained.

_..\Jso, compressibility factors are determined on these well stream samples.
From these data, volume per cent produced at any stage of pressure depletion is calculated by dividing the volume produced by the volume originally in the cell, both at standard conditions. The results of a pressure
depletion study for a gas-condensate fluid are illustrated in Tables 5-7 and
5-8 and Figs. 5-19 to 5-21.
From a study such as reported in Tables 5-7 and 5-8, it is possible to
design the proper gas facilities for the well stream effluent. It is also possible to determine the advisability and economics of a cycling project to
recover fluids that would condense during pressure depletion.
412
-------------------
414
---- -
TABLE 5-7. DEPLETION STUDY OF CONDENSATE FLUID SAMPLE6
Reservoir pressure, psig
Heptanes plus,
mol wt
gpMM:
Propane plus
Butanes plus
Pentanes plus
3,830
3,797
3,500
2,800
2,100
1,400
600
84.80
5.95
2.55
0.47
84.81
5.95
85.61
5.97
86.07
5.95
85.94
6.08
2.57
0.47
0.70
0.28
0.21
0.34
1.48
2.37
2.55
0.48
0.72
0.27
0.21
0.35
1.03
2.37
0.48
0.73
0.29
0.24
0.41
0.88
2.38
85.41
5.99
2.68
0.49
I 100.00
100.00
100.00
119
119
0.75
0.75
0.30
0.21
0.37
2.24
2.36
0.30
0.21
0.37
2.23
2.36
84.95
5.97
2.60
0.44
0.74
0.29
0.21
0.35
2.09
2.36
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
128
128
126
124
2.55
0.47
2.554
1.855
1.465
1.771
1.384
2.57
121
1.929
1.227
0.843
2.144
1.442
1.061
2.470
0.75
0.31
0.25
0.48
1.20
2.44
1.883
1.178
0.791
TABLE 5-8. DEPLETION STUDY OF CONDENSATE FLUID SAMPLE

DEVIATION FACTOR AND VOLUME PRODUCED 6
2.124
1.403
1.007
ILLUSTRATING
Deviation factor Z
Volume % produced
3,500
2,800
2,100
0.9430 0.9351
6.490
0
0.9245
23.571
0.9210
42.462
600
1,400
0.9397 0.9771
6l.730
S.'l.535
99.06()4
Ideal expansion
Deviation factor Z / 0.943 / 0.931
Volume % produced 0
6.602
a
0.907
23.216
0.905
42.174
0.923
62.096
-------
415
tion are reported in Fig. 5-21 and Table 5-8. A calculated compressibility
factor where no condensation is considered is also reported in Table 5-8
for comparison. From this comparison it is noted that the compressibility
factors where no liquid condensation is- considered are smaller than the
compressibility factors for the pro4.0
duced gas. This is as would be
expected, as the condensed liquid
occupies less space than the same
number of moles of gas would oc3.0
cupy if it were under like pressure
\
conditions.
Use of Condensate Analysis. A E,
careful study of the condensate g
\
fluid analysis that is reported in
2.0
Dew point
Tables 5-6 through 5-8 enables the
\
engineer to evaluate better the be- "'
1'.
havior of a gas-condensate system.
I'-,
It also enables him to gain an un1.0
,._
derstanding of fluid behavior as
affected by composition and changes
in pressure and temperature. As
an example, observe the change in
f,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
well stream composition as affected
Pressure, psig
by retrograde condensation. It is
FIG. 5-18. Pressure-volume relationship
noted that the fraction of the well
for a gas-condensate fluid. (Courtesy
stream comprised of methane and
of Core Laboratories, Inc.
ethane changes very little regardles~ of the pressure of the reservoir. It becomes quite apparent that only
minute volumes of methane and ethane are retained in the condensate in
the reservoir. The prima:r,,--component which changes with changing
pressures is the heptanes plus (C7+)- It is- noted that as the pressure
continues to decline, the heptanes-plus (C1+) fraction in the well stream
effluent goes through a minimum. If the pressure depletion study were
carried to an ultimate abandonment pressure of 14.7 psia, it would be
found that all the heptanes plus would not be vaporized. All the heptanes
plus do not revaporize because most of the lighter components, methane
and ethane, have been produced. Thus, insufficient quantities of volatile
constituents remain to cause the heptanes-plus fraction to revaporize.
~
Reservoir prel'!sure, psig

3,797
Component:
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes
Heptanes plus
Carbon dioxide
----
0.961
84.182
1.000
100.000
Residual liquid:
Gallons at 60F per MMscf of original fluid = 426.6
Mol wt= 159
Density at 60F = 0.8344
APPLICATIONS OF FLUID-ANALYSIS DATA
Gas Compressibility. The compressibility factor for the produced gas

is measured in the same fashion as was reported for the gas of a gas-crudeoil system. The compressibility factors for the sample used as an illustra-
The data reported in conventional fluid-analysis studies have 1nany applications in reservoir engineering. Perhaps the application with which
416
417
most engineers are familiar is the use of fluid-analysis data in reservoir

material-balance studies. The application of these data to material-balance
studies are discussed in Chap. 8 and a companion volume. Of course, in
the case of a gas-condensate system they are also used as an aid in the design of suiface separation systems as well as the evaluation of reservoir
analysis of the depletion study as was reported in the standard gas-condensate fluid analysis. The method of making the necessary calculations
for the determination of the above-mentioned quantities was discussed in
Chap. 4.
FITTING PUBLISHED EQUILIBRIUM-RATIO DATA TO
LABORATORY FLUID-ANALYSIS DATA
iOO
c,
ao
60
There are essentially two methods for using fluid-analysis data to calculate or determine the appropriate equi1ibrium ratios for use in reservoir
calculations. One method uses the laboratory bubble-point or dew-point
50
40
30
iOO
20
iO
80
c,
6
5
--
....._
to
,.
c,
co,
'
0.8
:g
L----- Vc;;
0.6
i-C4
0.3
n-C5
1,600
2,000
2,400
2,800
\...
\.
1,000
2,000
3,000
Pressure, psig
3,200
40
'
4,000
FrG. 5-20. Cumulative produced well

stream volume as a function of pressure decline for a gas-condensate fluid.
(Courtesy of Core Laboratories, Inc.6 )
0.2
i,200
\.
"\.
' '
800
.,.
,g" 0.96
20
c,
400
0.98
n-C 4
0.5
0.4
~,
'
'\
too
\.
3,600
4,000
Pressure, psig
FrG. 5-19. Variation in well stream composition with pressure decline for a gas-condensate sample. (Courtesy of Core Laboratories7 Inc.fl)
performance. Evaluation of surface separator conditions, for condensate

and gas-crude-oil systems was illustrated in Chap. 4.
One other important application of fluid-analysis data is the calculation
of equilibrium-ratio data which can be applied at reservoir pressures and
temperatures. The data resulting from these equilibrium ratios can be
used to calculate combination volume factors and to make mass materialbalance studies. Equilibrium ratios can also be used to calculate the entire
0.900
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
Pressure, psig
Fra. 5-21. Variation in compressibility

factor of well stream with pressure decline for a gas-condensate fluid. (Courtesy of Core Laboratories, Jnc.11 )
analysis to select a set of published equilibrium curves which satisfy the

dew-point or bubble-point condition at reservoir temperature and pressure.
The other method calculates four equilibrium-ratio points for each component in the reservoir fluid and then smooths in curves to these four points
using published equilibrium-ratio data as a guide.
Consider first the case where the fluid analysis is used in selecting an
appropriate set of published equilibrium ratios. In order to select the
proper set of curves it is necessary to evaluate the flash equations discussed
in Chap. 4, using published equilibrium-ratio data at bubble-point or dewpoint conditions. The equilibrium-ratio curves which satisfy the flash
equations at bubble- or dew-point pressure and rese:rvoir temperature are
the ones selected. Curves similar to those shown in Figs. 4-63 through 4-81
------------
418
10
'
%
~?~
Jll
~.
!'\.~'
,;_~~
.:;,
1\1 )(.. '
'
.,,_.
...
?~"'
"d
:?_..,
~<" ~1'-.r-.\..
~o~
?
"""+
~-Q?
....
?'
-:>
~""'
11"(.o:::-C" ~-::>
_,
'
""'
~~
::-:;;
?~!~ '~~ I
? :
?,"'"'<> ,.
""
~ " f::: ........
~~-Q?~
- """
ht"" '
10
,~~
Q?
Q?
,/
1111~
10-2
10
/-,
0V''
/
--
_,
10
100
1,000
10,opo
Pressure, psi a
P'IG. 5-22. Equilibrium vaporization ratio K at 220F for converg7nce . press ur;~ls~f
5,000 and 10,000 psi. (From school taught by M. J. Rzasa at University o
,
!948.)
or Fig. 5-22 can be used as a basic group from which to select the equilibrium-ratio curves to be tested.
.
. This
An apparent convergence pressure must be estrmated for the fluid.
convergence pressure must be at least 10 per cent greater than the de,vp oint or bubble-point pressure reported in the fluid analysis. The NGAA
f mg apparent
"Equilibrium Ratio Data Book" 7 presents a chart f or estrma
419
convergence pressures. Crude-oil and gas-condensate fluids usually have

apparent convergence pressures in the 5,000-psia range. Select a convergence pressure, and then read the equilibrium ratios corresponding to the
bubble-point or dew-point pressure and reservoir temperature. Using the
appropriate set of flash equations, Chap. 4, determine the equilibrium
ratio to be used for the C, + fraction.
It is usually necessary that an arbitrary curve be drawn to represent the
heptanes-plus fraction. The actual location of this curve will be determined
by the behaviors of the heavier components in the system.
Consider the case of a condensate sample whose composition is that
given in Table 5-7. When this material is tested to select proper equilibrium ratios, the apparent convergence pressure of 5,000 lb per in. is chosen.
Tests were made wherein heptane plus was represented by normal nonane
and by normal decane. With data for normal nonane, the calculations
yielded results which indicated that the heptanes-plus fraction had the
characteristics of a heavier constituent. Normal decane was then tried
for the heptanes-plus fraction, and the results indicated that a lighter fraction should be used. A fit was tried using an apparent convergence pressure
of 6,000 psia. The results indica;ted that a convergence pressure of 6,000
psia was too high. The values to be used t') represent the system are equilibrium ratios for a 5,000-psia convergence pressure with the heptanes-plus
fraction fitted to a curve between the curves of n-nonane and n-decane.
The value of the equilibrium ratio required for the heptanes plus to balance
the system is calculated. Using the calculated heptanes-plus equilibrium
ratio at the dew point or bubble point, a curve can be constructed lying
between the n-nonane and n-decane curve so as to represent the heptaneplus fraction in the system. This type of curve fitting can be applied both
to crude-oil-gas systems and gas-condensate systems.
Example 5-12 illustrates the selection of a set of published data to describe a particular fluid which has a dew point of 3,810 psia at a temperature of 220F.
The second method of determining equilibrium ratios from reservoir
fluid-analysis data is by the use of published equilibrium ratios and empirical correlation charts. The method is a little more laborious but can
yield very satisfactory results.
Four equilibrium ratios are determined for each component in the fluid.
Each component has two pressure points at which the equilibrium ratios
are equal to 1. The equilibrium ratios when plotted at a constant temperature apparently converge at an equilibrium ratio of I. The pressure at
whiCh this convergence occurs is dependent upon the analysis of the fluid
under consideration. As in the preceding method the apparent convergence pressure must exceed the bubble-point or dew-point pressure by at
least IO per cent. The equilibrlum ratio of each component is one at the
420
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERiNG
Pressure for minimum K
Minimum K
0I
10
02
05
10
1,000
002
005
Of
001
800
;;"
'' '
I
~-~'
400
'
~ ~ I
'~ \'.:; '::i
~.,-
'
100
w
"-'
'
40
, I
-w
0
~
I/
0
~>
"'
'
'
10
10,000
8,000
'::i
'::i~o;:::.
-i-----~t--<;::i "5 (;:) s:::i ~
I
I
11
10
'IA A I; I
Q:)'io
6,000
~ &r;::,~- ~
'<'J~,G:-'::io;:::.
"'i'1,-~ ~
4,000
,_
:1
6
6,000
.=+&"<>'
- I-- ~()- \l(j Cl

~
() ()
JI
11111
, I 11
0.5
'/
0.1
0.05
Pressure for minimum .K
Apparent convergence pressure
0.2
2,000
1,000
0.01
F1a. 5-23. Correlation of the pressure at \Vhich minimum equilibrium ratio occurs
with the ratio of apparent convergence pressure to the vapor pressure of the component. (From Standing.10 )
ro?()O
4,000
2,000
,, 11
.ii I,, '' 0'/ r//

0.05
0.02
/.
7
7 >.1\~ .,
17
I/ 17 7 , ~ i900 0
0
1/r/ /. '/1
,,,?
10,000
8,000
,"'
r,1,1/ I/
1,1,1, 11]1 I/
,,
1'
'
II
(,
-------- sr
-~q
I'
I/
00
'?
C7
'
,,,
. J
ti
'
~ ;;.. 20
w
w ,>
0u
11
80
-~
~E
u
'
:; ~ 60
w
~
I/ ~\91
:g,o
"
...'?,,
10 0
'I
ti
t-,.,.,
\'?,, ~~ \:1():0() ri
~l~~~9.?oooooo
20 0
'::i-"
001
,,
::i.'?.~"A
O~'?,,'
c.~\ c:Pti'1
Clc::l ri
II
o;:::.
\~\O
t ~ '<l~~~~-~
ii?
" "
,, I
-"
200
40 0
002
80 0
' I'
0 -"
1.,~~(;:)~
005
60 0
600
;; -;
02
05
f,O oo
Apparent convergence pressure
421
0.02
0.01
Minimum K
0.005
0.002
1poo
0.001
FrG. 5-24. Correlation of minimum equilibrium ratio with the ratio of apparent convergence pressure to the vapor pressure of the component. (From Standing.' 0 )
vapor pressure of that component, thus yielding the second set of equilibrium-ratio points. A third equilibrium ratio, the minimum value for
each component. is determined empirically from Figs. 5-23 and 5-24 using
the vapor pressure of the components and the apparent convergence pres-
----------------------
422
- ------ - - - -
..
sure. The fourth equilibrium ratio is calculated by fitting published data

to the bubble-point or dew-point fluid analysis.
Katz and Hachmuth;8 Roland, Smith, and Kaveler;9 or some other appropriate set of published data can be used for the calculation of the equi
librium ratio 1't the fluid bubble-point or dew-point pressure. The engineer
should select the published data which have a composition nearest his fluid
system. Calculate the dew-point or bubble-point pressure using the flash
equations defined in Chap. 4, the analysis of the reservoir fluid, and the
selected equilibrium ratios. No consideration need be given the value of
pressure at which the equilibrium ratios are obtained from the literature.
Whenever the desired set of values are obtained, they are said to exist at
the bubble-point or dew-point pressure and reservoir temperature.
Equilibrium-ratio curves are drawn for each component using the four
calculated points. Equilibriun1 ratios form the litera.ture are used as an
aid in drawing smooth curves. These data are plotted and used as extra
data points and guide lines in connecting the calculated points.
The calculation procedure for determining a set of equilibrium ratios is
illustrated in Example 5-13 for the fluid sample of Table 5-1. The results
of these calculations are sho,vn in Fig. 5-25.
Example 5-13. Detennination of Correct K-value Data at Reservoir

Temperature. It has been shown that when a hydrocarbon mixture has a
large weight per cent of heptanes plus and a small weight per cent of melh
ane (Fig. 4-4), the critical point would be to the right of the cricondenbar
and the system would essentially be a gas-crude-oil system; hence, this
example system will be classified as a gas-crude-oil system. Katz and
Hachmuth' published one of the better sets of equilibrium-ratio data for
10
,,
'
'
1.0
~O;
"'""'
"
"
~44)~
.
1'
~,
""
~'?
" ""'
'
"-,
'I.
~
"\
Reservoir pressure 3,810 psia
Component
Mol
wt
Analysis
Corrected
analysis
z,
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexanes
Heptanes plus
16
30
44
58
58
72
72
86
128
0.0223
0.0077
D.0031
0.0022
D.0038
0.0228
Carbon dioxide
46
0.D236
0.0000
I.ODDO
l.ODOD
D.8481
0.0595
0.0255
D.8686
0.06D9
D.0047
O.D075
D.D048
0.0030
O.DD2l
D.OD37
D.0261
Ci+
0.01
Zi/Ki
1.550
0.840
0.650
0.535
0.480
0.405
0.355
0.275
0.56038
0.07250
0.04Dl5
D.00897
O.Dl604
0.00765
O.D0619
O.llD!
D.Dl38l
0.20727
0.082t
0.27804
" - 0.93296 f
" - l.DD373t/
*From Fig. 5-22. K. required for

5,000 - 0.08603.
t Using n-nonane for heptane plus.
t Using n-decane for heptane plus.
"'
Apparent conver- Apparent convergence, 5,000 psia gence, 6,000 psia
K*
K;
1.60
0.81
0.56
0.42
D.35
0.21
0.19
0.125
0.070!
0.059t
"
"::-'~
I>
1~
Example 5-12. Selection of Published Equilibrium-ratio Data.

Reservoir temp 220F
423
Z;/K,
0.54280
0.07518
D.0466D
0.01142
0.02200
0.01476
0.01157
0.03D40
0.32571
0.38644
" ~ 1. 08044t
l: = l.14117t
for apparent convergence pressure of
'
0.00 1
10
100
1,000
10,000
Reservoir pressure, psio

FIG.
5-25. Adjusted equilibrium ratios for a crude-oil sample.
this type of system. Therefore, their data will be used here except for
methane, where Brown's11 data will be used.
Step 1. Roughly sketch the 200F equilibrium-ratio data presented by
Katz (Fig. 4-63) on a log plot of K, against reservoir pressure.
Step 2. From Katz's data, detennine a set of K values which will satisfy
the bubble-point conditions that
y,
= z;K,
J;y,
= 1
L -> 1
V-> 0
Regardless of the pressure indicated by Katz's data, it will be assumed
424
425
that these data apply at the bubble-point pressure of 2,695 psig. The calculations are presented in tabular form below.
exists. With the use of the same ratio, the magnitude of the minimum K
value is obtained from Fig. 5-24.
When the four K values determined by the previously discussed methods
for each component and the K values detenhined by Katz at pressures less
than 1,000 psia were used, equilibrium-ratio curves were constructed for
the fluid at reservoir temperature. The curves constructed for this fluid
are sho"n in Fig. 5-25.
A sample calculation for determination of minimum K value appears on
page 426.
Mole
Component
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Isobutane
n-Butane
Isopentane
n-Pentane
Hexane.<>
Wt%
K, 8 at
%
Mole hydro- 200F,
% carbons 3,000
only
psi a
(C,+)
ZiK;,
at
zaK,
K;, 3 at
200F,
2,450
psia
z,K,
- - - --- ---
4.45
1.59
3.56
0.63
1.43
0.74
1.14
2.12
33.78
6.42
9.82
1.33
2.99
1.25
1.93
2.99
33.96
6.46
9.87
2.10
0.95
0.66
0.71316 2.75
0.06137 1.10
0.06514 0.64
0.83542
0.93390 2.46
0.07106 0.995 0.06428
0.06317 0.650 0.06416
4.34
0.43
0.01866 0.38
0.01649
3.20
3.00
0.30
0.22
0.00960 0.225 0.00720 0.246 0.00787

0.00660 0.15 0.00450 0.162 0.00486
84.20
38.97
39.17
0.024
0.00940 0.015 0.00588 0.017 0.00666
0.14
0.52
0.00
Heavier
Hydrogen
sulfide
K,8
200F,
2,000
psia
-100.00 100.00 100.00
--0.88393
OTHER METHODS OF DETERMINING HYDROCARBON

FLUID PROPERTIES
0.395 0.01714
---
---
1.10220
1.00039
Density of C,+ = 0.8859 gm/cc at 60F

0
API gravity of C,+ = 28.l at 60F
Mol wt of C,+ = 263 lb/mole
Reservoir bubble-point pressure = 2,695 psig
Reservoir bubble-point temperature = 200F
The values at 2,500 psia on Katz's curve are sufficiently close to satisfy
present conditions and therefore will be used to represent the K values of
this sample at 2,695 psig and 200F.
The vapor pressure of the ith constituent at 200F is obtained from the
.literature. The heptanes-plus vapor pressure must be estimated either by
selecting a fluid of comparable molecular weight or by letting nonane or
decane represent the heptanes plus.
Katz's data at 200F has an apparent convergence pressure of 5,000 psia.
As this pressure is sufficiently greater than the observed bubble point, it
will be tried as the first apparent convergence pressure, thus yielding a
third set of equilibrium ratios.
The fourth K value for each component is the minimum value of K, at
200F. These values are obtained by using Figs. 5-23 and 5-24. Determine
the ratio of the apparent convergence pressure to the vapor pressure of
each constituent, and read the pressure at which the minimum K value
The calculation of reservoir volume factors by means of fluid analysis

and the assumption of modified ideal solutions was discussed in Chap. 4.
Earlier in this chapter the laboratory measurement of fluid properties was
presented. As laboratory analysis or all the information required by the
calculation method is not always available, other methods for approximating reservoir fluid properties have been developed.
Modified Ideal Solutions
In the ideal-solutions method presented in Chap. 4, the information required was the stock-tank fluid analysis, total produced gas analysis, producing gas-oil ratio, reservoir temperature, and reservoir pressure. Modifications of this method have been devised requiring less information.
These modified methods are presented in order of decreasing data requirements.
No Analysis of Stock-tank Liquid. If it is assumed that the stock-tank
liquid is comprised of nothing lighter than propane, then the apparent
density of the propane-plus fraction of the total produced fluid can be calculated from the gas analysis, producing gas-oil ratio, and stock-tank-oil
gravity. The calculating procedure is the same as in the case of the idealsolution method presented in Chap. 4 except that the apparent density of
propanes plus is defined by Eq. (5-41).
m
350-y,.
Pc3+
(R,/380)
i=3
5.61
(R,/380)
[y;M;/(p;)LJ
i=3
where
y; = mole fraction of ith component in total produced gas

M, = molecular weight of ith component, lb
(5-41)
427
specific gravity of stock-tank liquid at 14.7 psia and 60F

total produced gas-oil ratio, scf per stock-tank barrel
liquid density of ith component at 14.7 psia and 60F,
lb/cu ft
= apparent density of propanes plus at 14.7 psia and 60F,
lb/cu ft
'Y" =
R, =
(p;)L =
Pco+
The weight per cent of ethane in the ethane plus and weight per cent of
methane in the system are defined by Eq. (5.42).
Wt
01
10
C . C
(R,/380)y,M,
2+-
2IIl
(5-42)
350-y,,
(R,/380)
y;}d,
i=2
>O 00
c<llNMl'-"<l"
Wt
CO'<t'~IN-0
000000
01
10
C . C
1 In
(R,/380)y,M,
i+ -
350-y,.
(R,/380)
y,M,
i=l
The apparent density of the total mixture at 14. 7 psia and 60F is determined from Fig. 4-50. Corrections for reservoir pressure and temperature are made with the use of Figs. 4-51 and 4-53. Oil formation volume
factors are calculated by Eq. 5-44.
No Surface Liquid or Gas Analysis. Katz" further simplified the idealsolution method by the use of an empirical correlation. These correlations
eliminate the necessity of knowing the gas analysis. The engineer need
know only the total gas-oil ratio, the stock-tank liquid gravity, and the
total produced gas gravity. Using the gas gravity and stock-tank gravity,
the apparent gas density is determined from Fig. 5-26. Knowing the apparent gas density, the total produced gas-oil ratio, and the gas gravity, it
is possible to calculate the apparent liquid density of the produced gas.
Thus the apparent total density at surface conditions can be obtained by
use of the following equations:
Lb of gas
:so
'Y,
x 28.96
35(}y,. + (R,/380)', X 28.96

5.61 + (R,/380)-y,[28.96/(p,),,,]
where
(5-43)
'Y, = specific gravity of gas (air = 1)

'Yot = specific gravity of stock-tank oil at 60F and 14.7 psia
(p,),,, = apparent liquid density of produced gas as obtained from
(p,),,,
Fig. 5-26
apparent density of stock-tank oil and its dissolved gas expressed at 14.7 psia and 60F
429
The apparent density at surface conditions having been obtained, the procedure is the same as in the previous method, where the density at reservoir conditions is calculated by the use of Figs. 4-51 and 4-53. The density
at reservoir conditions having been obtained, the formation volume factor
corresponding to this produced gas-oil ratio and the given reservoir temperature and pressure can be calculated with the following equation:
be used in making preliminary economic studies prior to the time that complete fluid-analysis data are either warranted or available.
428
B. = (350)-y,,
+ (R,/380)-y,(28.96)
5.61 (p.),.,
( -44)
5
where (p,,)res is the density of the reservoir liquid in pounds per cubic foot
and B,, is the formation volume factor. In all the preceding calculations
Empirical Methods
Empirical methods differ from the modified ideal-solution methods in
that they depend on curves or equations derived from correlations of laboratory analysis. The empirical methods usually depend on gas gravity,
stock-tank gravity, reservoir pressure, and tem~rature.
.
Katz's Curves. Katz 12 prepared a correlatron from data on MrdContinent crudes for calculation of the reservoir formation volume factor.
The use of these charts requires the reservoir temperature, reservoir pressure, gas in solution, and API gravity of the crude. These two curves are
a
-
LL
15
~$
0
v
e,
10
~~
="
.S ::5_
.C E
<:J>
v 0E
""'
u
""
o"
60
Gas gravity, cir= 1
Fla. 5-26. Correlation of apparent density of dissolved gas and gas gravity. (From
Katz. 12 )
it should be pointed out that the gas-oil ratio represents the total gas produced per stock-tank barrel and would be the sum of the gas from each
stage of separation. The gas gravity is the gravity of all the gas produced
and if not measured as such would have to be calculated from the gravity
of gas off each individual stage of separation.
All the preceding means of calculating formation volume factors are
accurate within approximately 3 per cent provided the producing gas-oil
ratio actually represents the total solution gas. Of course, if the wells are
producing at excess gas-oil ratios, then the volume factors as calculated
cannot be expected to correlate with the formation volume factor resulting
from a laboratory analysis. These calculating and correlating procedures
are invaluable in obtaining a first estimate of formation volume factors to
100
150
200
250
300
Temperature, F
FIG. 5-27. Fluid-volume correction factor for temperature of residual oil. (From
Katz. 12 )
presented in Figs. 5-27 and 5-28. If the gas-oil ratio required in Fig. 5-28
is considered to be the producing gas-oil ratio, then these curves can be
used to get an estimate of the formation volume factor at that point. These
two curves can be used in conjunction with a correlating curve presented
by Beal" (Fig. 5-29), in which the gas in solution is correlated with stocktank gravity and saturation pressure. If the gas in solution is determined
from Fig. 5-29 as a function of stock-tank gravity and reservoir pressure,
Figs. 5-27 and 5-28 can be used to calculate the formation volume factor
for the reservoir oil. These three curves will then permit the calculation
of a complete formation volume factor and solution-gas-oil ratio curves
by using various pressures and assuming the stock-tank gravity to remain
constant.
The procedure for calculating formation volume factors using Beal's and
Katz's empirical curves-is illustrated in Example 5-14.
----
----------
430
431
Ex~ple 5-14. Calculation of Formation Volume Factor and Solutiongas--011 Rat10s by Beal and Katz Charts.
1. Knowing the API stock-tank oil gravity assume a saturation pressure

and determme the solution-gas-oil ratios from Fig. 5-29.
2. Fi:om Fig. 5-27 determine the fluid shrinkage due to the change from
reserv01r temperature to 60F. Denote this shrinkage value by the
term S,.
3. From Fig. 5-28 determine the fluid shrinkage due to the liberation of
the solu~1on gas as the pressure decreased from saturation pressure to atmosphenc. Denote this shrinkage value by S,.
p,
R,'
s,t
4,228
1,202!
1,150
1,035
910
790
670
0.620
0.585
0.515
0.445
0.385
0.325
0.265
0.205
0.150
0.100
0.057
3,810
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
* From Fig. 5-29.

t From Fig. 5-28.
t Not from Fig. 5-29.
~
~
"
1,000
v
~
550
425
310
210
120
+s'P
1.620
1.585
1.515
1.445
1.385
1.325
1.265
1.205
1.150
1.100
1.057
Bo
1.7415
1.7039
1.6286
1.5534
1.4889
1.4244
1.3599
1.2954
1.2363
1.1825
1.1363
Value is the initial solution ratio from :field data.
.I'
1i
:0
Standing's Correlation. Another empirical correlation has been presented which requires the total gas-<>il ratio, the gravity of the stock-tank
oil and produced gas, and the reservoir temperature. This correlation was
presented by Standing" for California fluids. The formation volume factor
is expressed by the following equation:
'
'Y o.::;
Bo = GOR -'7o
30
40
50
60
70
Shrinkage based on residual oil
corrected for temperature,
0/
0
F 1a. ~28. F!uid-volume correction factor for solubility (corrected for temperature
o1 residual otl). (From Kat.z.1 ~)
. 4. The oil formation volume factor at the saturation pressure of Step 1

then defined by the following equation:
lS
(1
+ S,)(l +Sp)
vvhere Si and SP are expressed as fractions.

A calculation of formation volume factor from data compiled by Beal
and Katz follows:
R,. = 1,202
Gas gravity = 0.8643
Oil gravity= 36.81API
Separator pressure = 0 psi
Reservoir temperature = 224F

S, = 0.075 (from Fig. 5-27)
Bo= (1 + S,)(1 + S,)
+ l.25t
(5-45)
where all the symbols are as defined previously except t, which is defined
as the reservoir temperature expressed in degrees Fahrenheit.
Standing further amplified the correlation to permit the calculation of
bubble-point pressures and total volume factors. It is expected that the
results obtained from these correlations would be more accurate than those
obtained from Beal's and Katz's data, as these charts account for the gas
gravity. These charts are presented in Figs. 5-30 and through 5-32. Figure
5-31 represents a graphical solution of Eq. (5-45). If it is assumed that
the producing gas-oil ratio represents the solution ratio, the formation volume factor can be determined from Fig. 5-31. Working with Fig. 5-30, it
is possible to take these same parameters, gas-oil ratio, gas gravity, tankoil gravity, and reservoir temperature, and determine the pressure at which
a given amount of gas would be in solution. This curve essentially accomplishes the same results as the data presented by Beal but includes more
variables; therefore, it is felt to be more accurate. By combining Figs. 5-30
and 5-31 it is possible to determine the formation volume factor and solution-gas-oil ratio pressure relationships. If various gas-oil ratios are assumed and either a constant gas gravity and :constant stock-tank oil gravity
or some predetermined variation with pressure, the pressure and formation
-----------------------
432
volume factor corresponding to each value of gas-oil ratio can be determined. Thus, formation volume factors as a function of pressure and gas
in solution as a function of pressure can be approximated from these two
600
60
,;t1 ;z:. 55
, t grO,,,,,
50
Ap1ot__..
45
500
400
40
300
200
100
--
-~
~
~
c
~ ~
200
400
600
800
Pressure, psi
1,000
t:
1,200
2,000
1,800
,,
,o
l,600
~\ ~
"'
35
30
25
20. t-,5:::
10
-~
"''
1,400
1,200
\,0
1,000
.,o
.o
800
'
30
600
400
---lt&e\~\'e
o"
200 --
:?~1?,0
20
10
7:..-.,i
l,000
2,000
3,000
Saturation pressure, psi
4,000
5,000
FIG. 5-29. Prediction of solubility from saturation pressure and gravity of crude oil.
Represents average conditions for 508 observations from 164 samples taken from 151
oil fields. Average deviation, 22.0 per cent. (From Beal.13 )
curves. The total formation volume factor can be estimated from Fig. 5-32.
This volume factor represents the reservoir volume occupied by I bbl of
oil and its complement of liberated gas. It is actually a combination of
Figs. 5-30 and 5-31 which permits the calculations of the expansion of the
433
------------------~------------
---~
---------------------
~
~
=
"'
:3'
435
liberated gas. An example problem is not included, as the charts presented

by Standing incorporate example problems.
A comparison between laboratory data and empirical calculated data is
presented in Table 5.9 and Fig. 5--33. In this particular case the fluid sam
pie used is tending toward a high-shrinkage crude, so that the empirical
.D
PROPERTIES OF NATURAL HYOROCARSON MIXTURES OF GAS ANO ll()U!O
.D
FORMArlON VOL/JM OF GAS PLUS LJ()V!O PHASES
-s
~
.a
>
=
-~
'
s
0
::::
-.,,g
3 ::::
.;,
~
~
EXAMPLE'
RE'OUIRE'D:
Formatiotl volumll al' th/I ga$ plW liquld

ph11s11s of' a 1,500: cu ff/bbl mh:tur11, gas
gravity: 0.80, tanft oil grwfly =40 "AP!, al'
200 "F qnd 1,000 psia.
PROCEDURE:
Starting at th11 laft 8ide af 'ff111 chart,
proc118d horiZ~tolly altmg the 1,500 ='cu ft/bbl.
lin11 to tbs 0.80 gv.s grovify liM. r,...,,.. this poifrl'
drop v11rfir:ally to tbs 40 "AP/ !Ina. Pmcnd
harir<mtolly to 200 F and frqm thul' point
drop to ftf8 1,000 =psia pussur11 line. 1'h8
('6quirU 'krmation r/Olume 1$ 'Found to be
s.o bbl/bbl of' tank ail.
00
-"'
d
00
i=
.,,e
0
.D
d
0
-"
Bd
Ci
-_.,,"'
--"'
00
.S:l~
~
"
g..~
0.. 0
;;\ E
0
0 -
~~
434
F1a. 5-32. Properties of natural hydrocarbon mixtures of gas and liquid; formation
volume of .gas plus liquid phases. (From Standing.H)
correlations do not give so good agreement throughout the pressure range

as one might expect. In most cases, these empirical correlations yield values
which are comparable within 3 or 4 per cent to measured laboratory data.
Calculating Reservoir Volumes for Gas-condensate Systems
Gas-condensate systems are most frequently treated as gas systems.
Correlations are employed to recombine the condensed liquid resulting
-------------------~------------------------======
436
from surface separation with the separator gas. These correlation procedares convert the produced gas gravity to a reservoir gas gravity. In all
the calculations which follow, it is assumed that the produced material is
a gas in the feservoir and that no liquid was produced from the reservoir.
This does not mean that there cannot be liquid existing in the reservoir,
simply that none of that liquid is produced and included in the calculations.
Recombination with Equation of State. The first method for converting
surface volumes to reservoir volumes requires that the following data be
1. 8
,V;
1.7
c:i
.e
/~/
~
1.6
V/7
/],/ /
Ir.
,E
t5
l.P /
p'
1.4
/
,.,.
1,-/4
Ir.
1.3
1.2
# ,,,
'.P
/
//
~Y
/' /
1J..- -
1,000
1,500
2,000
Standing's correlations
Bea/ (Int/ Kutz' correlation
2,500
3,000
. 3,500
5-9.
COMPARISON OF MEASURED AND CALCULATED FORMATION VOLUME

FACTORS AND SOLUTION-GAS-OIL RATIOS*
Bubblepoint
pressure,
psi
4,228
3,810
3,410
3,010
2,610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
Calculated from data

compiled by Beal and Katz
Calculated using
Standing's correlations
4,000
Corrected
laboratory data
B,
R,
B,t
R~t
B,,
1.7415
1.7039
1.6286
1.5534
1.4889
1.4244
1.3599
1.2954
1.2363
1.1825
1.1363
1,202
1.740
1.655
1.595
1.520
1,202
1,090
950
830
700
570
450
335
225
127
41
1.6892
1.6003
1.5287
1.4711
1.4165
1.3667
1.3196
1.2757
1.2343
1.1890
1.1376
1,150
1,035
910
790
670
550
425
310
210
120
1.442
1.366
1.310
1.242
1.189
1.139
1.100
=
R.~
1,202
1,028.5
883.6
755.6
642.7
537.5
437.0
343.2
254.0
162.1
67.4
36.81API, separator pressure
lated from their respective analyses. The moles of fluid produced per day
can be calculated from the gas-oil ratio and daily gas production. The
reservoir voidage per day is then given by
Reservoir voidage = (mole produced/day) (cu ft/mole reservoir gas) (5-46)
~--~ ,,,,.-500
TABLE
*Rn = 1,202, gas gravity = 0.9643, oil gravity

0 psi, and reservoir temp = 224F.
t From Fig. 5-31.
t From Fig. 5-30.
B,,, = Bod(Botb/Bodb).
~ R, ~ 1,202 - (RL)o(B,,./Bo,.).
- - Corrected lob dalo (80 ,J
c---
437
'\500
Pressure, psi
Fra. 5-33. Comparison of measured and calculated oil formation volume factors.
known: analysis of the produced gas, analysis of the condensate, the total
gas-oil ratio, and the reservoir temperature and pressure. Using these data
it is possible to calculate the composition of the reservoir gas by the methods indicated with respect to recombined samples in an earlier section of
this chapter. By means of the recombined composition, the compressibility factor can be determined through the use of reduced temperatures
and pressures. When the value of the compressibility factor is known, the
actual volume in the reservoir can be calculated by use of the equation of
state PV = ZnRT. This would give the volume in the reservoir per mole
of fluid. The mclecular weight of the surface gas and liquid can be calcu-
Correlation Charts and Equation of State. Another method of converting surface volumes to reservoir volumes is similar to the one previously
discussed except that correlation charts are used for obtaining the gravity
of the reservoir gas. In order to use the correlation charts presented by
Standing, 10 it is necessary that the following data be known: the produced
gas gravity, the barrels of condensate per million cubic feet, and the condensate gravity. From the correlating chart shown in Fig. 5-34, it is possible to calculate the gravity of a single-phase fluid which would result
from the recombination of the surface gas and liquid. The correlating
chart refers to this single-phase fluid as the well fluid. When the well fluid
gravity is used, pseudo-critical properties and compressibility factors for
the fluid are obtained from the fluid property charts in Chap. 4. When the
compressibility factor is known, the solution is the same as in the preceding
example, where the equation of state is used to calculate the reservoir voidage per day or per standard cubic foot produced. Example 5-15 illustrates
the calculating procedure.
438
439
TABLE 5-10. VALUES OF COEFFICIENT A USED TO CALCULATE FORMATION

Relation of molecular weight
and gravity of condensofe
~\
.~
} 0.60
VOLUME OF GAS-CONDENSATE SYSTEMS BY METHOD OF SAGE AND 0LDs1
gos gr.
(B
AR,T/P)
.fj
1.4
"'
i:
- 5
100
45
50
0
.:t ~
->
>
60
55
API
4<f_
gas gr.
} o.~gr..
go~
"'
(,~
~~ 1.2
Pressure,
psi a
100F
130F
160F
190F
220F
250F
600
800
1,000
1,250
4.58
4.46
4.35
4.21
4.09
3.99
3.93
3.89
3.88
3.89
3.92
4.67
4.57
4.47
4.35
4.25
4.17
4.11
4.08
4.06
4.07
4.10
4.75
4.67
4.59
4.49
4.41
4.34
4.29
4.26
4.25
4.26
4.29
4.83
4.76
4.69
4.62
4.55
4.50
4.46
4.43
4.42
4.44
4.47
4.89
4.83
4.87
1,500
1,750
2,000
2,250
2,500
2,750
~,..
=~
'I-~.,
,...,
1.3
A(lO)'
} 0.70
~- 150
~~
u~
$$
3,000
Example 5-15.
20,000
10,000 CFB
100
80
60
40
Bbl condensate per mmd
F1G. 5-34. Effect of condensate volume on the ratio of surface gas gravity to well
fluid gravity. (From Standing .1)
Sage's and Olds's Correlation. An empirical method for calculating

reservoir volumes for gas-condensate systems was presented by Sage and
Olds,15 'vhere the volume relations depend on the volume of condensate

rather than the volume of produced gas. This relation is expressed as
B - AR,T
-
where B
A
R,
T
P
(5-47)
= formation volume factor reservoir, bbl/stock-tank bbl

= empirical correlating constant, Table 5-10 and Fig. 5-35
= producing gas-oil ratio, scf/stock-tank bbl
0
= reservoir temperature, R
=
reservoir pressure, psia
To apply this calculating procedure it is necessary to know the producing

gas-oil ratio and the reservoir pressure and temperature and to have access
to the table of correlating factors. The calculating procedure is illustrated
in Example 5-15.
4.77
4.8?
4.71
4.66
4.62
4.59
4.57
4.57
4.58
4.61
4.7i
Calculation of Daily Reservoir Voidage.
Liquid gravity, 53.3API

Separator gas-oil ratio, 40.795 Mcf/bbl
Stock-tank gas-oil ratio, 2.780 Mcf/bbl
Separator gas gravity, 0.6174
Stock-tank gas gravity, 1.0900
Reservoir temperature, 190F
Reservoir pressure, 2,900 psia
Separator gas rate, 3.130 MMscf/day
Stock-tank gas rate, 0.213 MMscf/day
Condensate rate, 76.725 bbl/day
1. Using Katz-Standing correlations
.
3.130(0.6174)
Av gas gravity =
3.130
+ 0.213(1.0900)
+ 0.213
- 0 6475
-
Bbl cond/MMscf = l,OOO_ = 22.949 bbljMMscf

43.57b
From Fig. 5-34,
'Yw =
1.125
')'.
Well fluid gravity = 1.125(0.6475) = 0.7284
4.9~
4.W
4.71
4.69
4.68
4.68
4.69
4.71
----
- -------- - - - - - - -
440
From Fig. 4-30,
3. Using Standing's correlation chart

From Fig. 5-32,
B = 44.5
650
T, = 391 = 1.662
Daily res voidage
= 0.847
Res vol/mole of composite = ZRT = 0.847(10.71)(650)

p
2,900
= 2.03316 cu ft/mole
Moles gas produced/bbl condensate = total GOR = 43,575

380
380
=
0f
Ii
"d
qui
114.6711 moles gas/bbl
141.5
141.5
+ 131.5 = 53.3 + 131.5 = 0 7657
= API
0
From Fig. 5-34,

Mo! wt of liquid = 121
Moles liquid produced _ 350 X (sp gr)
Bbl of condensate mo] wt
350(0.7657)
121
= 2.2148 moles liquid/bbl

B =
bbl res space
- bbl of condensate
= (moles liquid/bbl
+ moles gas/bbl) (res cu ft/mole of composite)
- 2.03316(114.6711
5.61
+ 2.2148)
5.61
= 42.36145
Daily res voidage = 76.725B = 3250.182 bbl/day

2. Using Sage's and Olds' s correlation
B = AR,T
p
From Table 5-10,
4.458
4
44.5(76.725)
= 3414.263 bbl/day
From Fig. 4-25,
p gr
441
= 3340.634 bbl/day
p - 2,900 - 4 367
, - 664 -
RESERVOm-FLUID PROPERTIES
Daily res voidage = 43.54036(76.725)
,,P, = 664
,T, = 391
-------~----------
.453 C;~~5lC550)
Standing's Correlation. A method of converting surface volumes to

reservoir volumes was presented by Standing for condensate systems.
This is the same correlation (Figs. 5-30 to 5-32) used in the estimation of
the PVT relationship for a gas-crude-oil system.
By correlating field data Standing developed correlation charts which
are dependent upon the gas-oil ratio, the gas gravity, reservoir temperature
and pressure, and stock-tank oil gravity. These curves can be used for gascondensate systems because at high gas-oil ratios, the tank oil gravity becomes insignificant. Figure 5-32 is the empirical chart to be used with a
condensate. This chart permits a rapid calculation of the formation volume factor for a condensate system. The formation volume factor is expressed as barrels of reservoir fluid per barrel of stock-tank liquid. An
example calculation using this chart for a gas-crude-oil system is incorporated with the figure. For the crude and condensates systems from which
this chart was prepared, the accuracy was approximately 3 per cent. It is
expected that the accuracy for other systems should still be within 3 to 5
per cent.
Review of Correlations. It should be pointed out that these empirical
procedures are not meant to supplant or replace laboratory analysis of
reservoir fluids. Empirical relationships are presented as an aid to the
engineer so that he can estimate the physical properties of the reservoir
fluids in order to determine the best means of obtaining a reservoir sample
and whether a reservoir sample is warranted and to obtain estimates of
fluid performance prior to collecting a sample. These correlating devices
can also be used as a check against fluid analysis. If the results obtained
by using these empirical relations and the laboratory analysis results are
extremely far removed, then in all probability some error was made in collecting the sample, and the engineer should feel justified in requesting a
new sample.
Correlations for Fluid Viscosities
= 43.54036
Viscosity of Oils. Beal13 presented empirical correlations for the determination of reservoir fluid viscosities dependent upon the stock-tank
-----
442
443
gravity, reservoir pressure, and temperature. The viscosity of a gas-free

crude oil is presented as a function of API gravity and temperature in
Fig. 5-35. The,,,gas in solution, dependent on reservoir pressure and stocktank gravity, can be obtained from Fig. 5-29. The viscosity of the reservoir liquid is then read from Fig. 5-36 or 5-37, depending on whether the
that the reservoir oil viscosity is 0.8 centipoise. Figure 5-37 pennits the
calculation of the oil viscosity for undersaturated crude oils.
These three curves were used to calculate the viscosity of the reservoir
fluid presented in Table 5-1. A comparison of the empirical and measured
viscosity values are shown in Fig. 5-38. It is noted that the viscosities calculated by Beal's correlation are slightly greater than the viscosities actually measured in the laboratory. Exact agreement cannot be expected, as
10,000
8,00 0
6,000
4,00 0
2,000
Q,)
g_
'.
~
.,,-=
.
~
1,00 0 \ \
80 0
60
0 ' '
400
\ \
o''' \.
20
0 ,\ \ \
10
80
60
40
'
'
20
0
8
6
.,,
'\..r>~.
' \ ' '\' '\
"'o"'
'" ~"""~~
~o
''
3
2
,...o0
-G:
.,
,,.
~ /~!:2
" ~""- ~
0.8
0.6
0.4
0. 3
0.2
1
;.><v..-~
f--.._
~
20
Crude-oil gravity
30
0
40
.,
'-
------
50
60
API at 60 F and atmospheric pressure
5-35. Gas-free crude viscosity as a function or reservoir temperature and stocktank crude gravity. (From Beal.13 )
FIG.
oil is saturated or undersaturated. Take, for example, the case when the
crude-oil gravity is 32} 0 API at stock-tank conditions and reservoir temperature is 175F. Then from Fig. 5-35 it is found that the viscoity of the
gas-free crude oil at reservoir temperature is 2.3 centipoises. From Fig.
5-36 entering with the gas in solution, 500 scf at 2,000 psia from Fig. 5-29
and reading to the gas-free crude-oil viscosity from Fig. 5-35 1 it is found
]
q
0. 2
0.
'0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
l,000
t~OO
l,200
1,300
f.,400
Gos in solution at reservoir pressure, cu ft/bbl
FrG. 5-36. Reservoir crude-oil viscosity from gas-free crude-oil viscosity and gas in
solution. Correlation based on 351 viscosity observations from 41 crude-oil samples
representing average conditions for 29 oil fields. Average deviation, 13.4 per cent.
(From Beal.' 3 )
Beal's correlations have an accuracy of approximately 80 per cent. These

correlations are useful in flow calculations when laboratory fluid data are
not available.
It is noted in Fig. 5-35 that for a constant API gravity the viscosity of
a gas-free crude oil decreases with increasing temperature. From Fig. 5-36
it is seen that for a constant gas-free viscosity at a fixed reservoir temperature the reservoir viscosity decreases with increasing solution gas (increasing pressure). In Chap. 4 it was stated that increasing the pressure on a
liquid increases the viscosity of that liquid. The effect of gas entering solu-
________ _________
,.,
444
PETROLEU11 RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
(1)
p
-
445
(2)
(3)
Mo!
Gravity*
wt
(4)
(5)
I ,P,t
pTct
0.9245
0.9070
0.9080
0.9046
0.8956
0.8972
0.9064
0.9333
1.0052
1.2272
26.81
26.30
26.33
26.23
25.97
26.02
26.29
27.07
29.15
35.59
* From Table 5-4,

t From Fig. 4-30.
T,
--- - - -
-Exfrapolafed
3,810
3,410
3,010
2.610
2,210
1,810
1,410
1,010
610
245
(6)
460
454
454
453
451
451
656
657
657
657
658
658
657
656
653
638
454
462
483
555
1.487
1.507
1.507
1.510
1.517
1.517
1.507
1.481
1.416
1.232
(7)
(9)
(8)
(10)
P,
/it
5.808
5.190
4.581
3.973
3.359
2.751
2.146
1.540
0.934
0.384
------ --2.3
2.1
1.92
1.75
1.6
1.4
1.29
1.19
1.08
1.02
0.0118
0.0119
0.0119
0.0119
0.0120
0.0120
0.0119
0.0118
0.0116
0.0110
0.0271
0.0250
0.0228
0.0208
0.0192
0.0168
0.0154
0.0140
0.0125
0.0112
column 10.
t From Fig. 4-45.

From Fig. 4-43.
3.20
.,
~
2.80
0 (For more occurote values see i11sert above)
0
l,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
Undersoturoted pressure, psi
2 3 4
Pressure,
mpirico/
thousands psi
Fro. 5-37. Viscosity of crude oil above the bubble-point pressure. Average deviation,
2.7 per cent. (From Beal. 13 )
Measured
2~0
~
0
~
~ 2.00
tion so far outweighs the effect of pressure that the viscosity of the reservoir fluid decreases with increasing pressure.
Viscosity of Gases. The gas viscosity can be calculated by the procedures of Carr" outlined in Chap. 4. The application of the procedure to
calculation of the viscosity of the liberated gas from sample analysis BHS46C is presented in Example 5-16.
;;
~
;;; 1.60
0
>
1.20
0.80
Example 5-16.
Calculation of Gas Viscosity (BHS-46C).
\.,\~
"'- ' ~
....,
Reservoir temp = 224F or 684R

1,000
= (;,) 1
1--..
--
2,000
3,000
4,000
5.000
Pressure, psig
FIG. 5-38. Comparison of measured and empirical values of liquid viscosity.
446
California Oils and Gases, Drilling and Production Practice, 275, American Petroleum
0.030
Institute, 1947.
>: 0.022
.;;;
0
<II
0
..,
15. Sage, B. H., and R.H. Olds: Volumetric Behavior of Oil and Gas from Several
San Joaquin Valley Fields, AIME Petrol. Trans., vol. 170, 1947.
16. Carr, N. L., R. Kobayaski, and D. B. Burrows: Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Ga...~
under Pressure, AIME Petrol. Trans., vol. 201, 1954.
0.026
;;:
>
447
0.018
../""'
0.014
/""'
500
t,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
Pressure, psi
3,000
3,500
4,000
FIG. 5-39. Calculated gas viscosity, BHS-46C.
REFERENCES
1. Pirson, S. J.: "Oil Reservoir Engineering," 1st ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company,
Inc., 1950.
2. Reudelhuber, F. 0.: Petroleum Technology, AIME Con!- Proc. of 1956, Texas
A and M College.
3. Frank Purdum Co.: "Laboratory Procedures for Testing Samples."
4. Dodson, C. R., D. Goodwill, and E. H. Mayer: Application of Laboratory PVT
Data to Reservoir Engineering Problems, Al1l!E Petrol. Trans., vol. 198, 1953.
5. Hurst, W., Personal Communication.
6. Core Laboratory Example Reservoir Crude Oil Analysis Trade Literature, Core
Laboratories, Inc.
7. "Equilibrium Ratio Data Book," Natural Gasoline Association of America,
Tulsa, Okla., 1957.
8. Katz, D. L., and K. H. Hachmuth: Vaporization Equilibrium Constants in a
Crude Oil-Natural Gas System, Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 29, 1937.
9. Roland, C. H., D. E. Smith, and H. H. Kaveler: Equilibrium Constants for a
Gas-distillate System, Oil Gas J., vol 39, no. 46, Mar. 7, 1941.
10. Standing, M. B.: "Volumetric and Phase Behavior of Oil Field Hydrocarbon
Systems," Reinhold Publishing Corporation, New York, 1952.
11. Brown, G. G.: Charts presented in "Natural Gasoline Supply Men's Association
Technical Manual," 5th ed., Natural Gasoline Supply Men's Association, 1946.
12. Katz, D. L., Prediction of the Shrinkage of Crude Oils, Drilling and Production
Practice, 137, American Petroleum Institute, 1942.
13. Beal, C.: The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and Its Associated
Gases at Oil Field Temperatures and Pressures, AIME Petrol. Trans., vol. 165, 1946.
14. Standing, M. B.: A PressureVolume-Temperature Correlation for Mixtures of
PROPERTIES OF WATER
CHAPTER
PROPERTIES OF WATER
INTRODUCTION
The petroleum engineer is concerned with and must have a knowledge

of the physical and chemical properties of water because petroleum accumulations are found associated with water and rarely is petroleum production obtained without accompanying water production. In fact, in many
cases the volume of water associated with petroleum reservoirs exceeds
that of the petroleum accumulation and the total volume of water production far exceeds that of petroleum.
The petroleum engineer is directly concerned with water because of the
necessity for observing and predicting its location, direction of movement,
rate of movement, and association with other fluids both at the surface
and in the reservoir. More specifically, the petroleum-reservoir engineer is
charged with the study, evaluation, and prediction of the volume of water
in the reservoir, the rate of movement of the water through the reservoir,
the water influx into the reservoir, and the accompanying problems which
develop in petroleum production, such as water coning. He may also use
water data as an exploratory tool to find petroleum through chemical composition and electrical resistivity correlations between fields or producing
zones within a field. Also, water data are useful in determining the entrance of extraneous fluids into the reservoir and for determining the effectiveness of any completion operation or 'vater shutoff procedure. In water
flooding practices, water data are used for the reasons cited before and a~o
to ascertain the possibility of formation plugging due to reaction of injected waters with the reservoir water and to predict fluid injectivity rates.
In order to make a complete and comprehensive petroleum-reservoir
engineering study, it is necessary to have a complete water analysis, including both physical and chemical property data. Perhaps the most
frequently used physical properties are compressibility and viscosity.
However, it is quite often desirable, if not necessary, to include gas solubility, density, volume factor, and salinity data.
A chemical property analysis should be available on the water in every
petroleum reservoir. The analysis should be of such scope and completeness as to permit calculations to predict and solve future problems arising
448
449
from the characteristics of the water. The analysis should show the total
solids and the parts per million of each positive and negative ion and/or
radical. From this information it will be possible to represent the analysis
graphically and to calculate reacting values, products, and properties of
reaction.
Whenever possible it is recommended that representative samples of
the particular reservoir water be obtained and their physical and chemical
properties determined through the services of a reputable laboratory.
Quite often this procedure is not feasible owing to timing, economics, or
other reasons. If circumstances are such, the petroleum-reservoir engineer
may then find it expedient to resort to empirical data or correlation charts.
The majority of this chapter is devoted to the consideration of solution of
water problems through use of these data and correlations. Prior to the
discussion of the use of these correlations it is appropriate to consider the
scope of the research on which the correlations were developed and the
limitations of their utility.
Historically much confusion exists in the early petroleum-reservoir engineering literature regarding identification and classification of reservoir
waters. In an effort to alleviate this difficulty, the American Petroleum
Institute, in 1941, acting through its Subcommittee on Core Analysis, conducted a study on reservoir waters. Questionnaires submitted to petroleum technologists requesting reservoir water classifications yielded some
300 different types and terminology, the majority of which have appeared
in the literature. Although there was considerable difference of opinion,
the subcommittee was successful in establishing widespread and common
usage of such water terms as connate, interstitial, residual, and free, to
name only a few. The discussions which follow in this chapter are applicable to all types and classifications of reservoir 'vaters.
Since reservoir pressures as high as 15,000 psi and temperatures as high
as 350F have been encountered in vastly different geologi~al environments, reservoir waters exhibit widely varying physical and chemical
properties. As a result, salinities in the hundreds of thousands of parts
per million, gas solubilities of 50 cu ft per bbl, water-formation volume
factors exceeding 1.20 bbl per bbl, compressibilities of 4 X 10- bbl per
bbl per psi, and viscosities of less than 0.10 centipoise have been observed.
In this chapter all the gas volumes are expressed at 14.73 psia and 60F
and the water volumes are expressed at 60F unless designated otherwise.
Furthermore, reservoir waters are assumed to be saturated with natural
gas at the reservoir conditions unless specified otherwise.
The physical properties of water are dependent upon its chemical compoSition, temperature, and pressure. Water may be pure or may contain
dissolved, entrained, or suspended salts; inert materials; or gases.
There is much information in the technical literature on the properties
450
PROPERTIES OF WATER
of pure water at or near atmospheric conditions. The calculations which

the petroleum-reservoir engineer will be called upon to make will be expedited through his knowledge of these properties of pure water, since the
empirical data usually employed in the solution of problems concerning
reservoir water are referred to pure water properties.
There are fairly complete data in the literature showing the effect of
temperature and pressure on the properties of pure water over a temperature range from 32 to 250F at pressures ranging from 0 to 6,000 psia.
Literature relative to the effect of composition on the properties is meager
and is limited to gas-solubility data within the aforementioned tempera-
451
where R,w, = solubility of natural gas in pure water, cu ft/bbl

R,w = solubility of natural gas in reservoir water, cu ft/bbl
Y = salinity of water, ppm
X = salinity correction factor
22
ture and pressure ranges. There are very few data in the literature on the
effect of pressure, temperature, and composition on the physical properties
of pure or reservoir waters at pressures exceeding 5,000 psia, temperatures
.&1zr--~~-t-~--=,,,,.~~~~2~,o~o~o'==F====::::...J
exceeding 250F, and salinities exceeding 30,000 ppm.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIBS OF WATER
Solubility of Natural Gas in Water

The solubility of natural gas in pure water has been studied' and has
been shown to be dependent upon the temperature and pressure of the
water as illustrated in Fig. 6-la. The solubility is expressed in cubic feet
of gas at 14.7 psia and 60F per barrel of water at 60F. It should be noted
that at 5,000 psia and 260F, the solubility of natural gas in pure water
may be greater than 20 cu ft per bbl. At even higher pressures and temperatures, it would be expected that higher gas solubilities would be obtained, probably owing to the effect of pressure on gas solubility.
Example 6-1. Determination of Solubility of Natural Gas in Pure
Water. A relatively shallow petroleum reservoir is known to have a pressure of 5,000 psia and a temperature of 200F, and the connate water produced from the reservoir is known to be relatively pure. Estimate the
probable gas solubility in the water.
From Fig. 6-la read the gas solubility in pure water as 20 cu ft per bbl.
The solubility of natural gas in reservoir water has been found to be dependent upon the pressure, temperature, and salinity of the water. Saline
reservoir water has a lower gas solubility than does pure water at the same
temperature and pressure. Dodson prepared the graph shown in Fig. 6-Ib
for the purpose of correcting gas-solubility values of pure water obtained
from Fig. 6-la for the effect of salinity. Using Dodson's data, Jones' proposed the following empirical relationship for the same purpose:
R,w
Rwp ( 1 -
;,{ )
1 00
(6-J)
.sc 10
0 8
1,500
~~~~::::,,,._'-f::::::===:t=.1~.o~o~o~--:;~:-:-:-::-=J
Pressure, 500 psio
100
140
180
The correction factor X is primarily dependent upon the temperar.ure

of the water, and the following values have been suggested by Jones:'
Temperature, F
Corredion factor X
100
150
200
250
0.074
0.050
0.044
0.033
452
----
-----
PROPERTIES OF WATER
From these data it can be shown that a reservoir water with a salinity
of 50,000 ppm will contain about 75 per cent as much dissolved natural
gas at 5,000 psia and 200F as pure water at the same conditions of temperature and pressure.
Gas-solubility calculations are important in estimating reservoir vol~
umes of water and are of particular significance in petroleum reservoirs
which have low initial rnlubility of gas in the oiL
of pure water at 6,IJOO psia and 200F is approximately 2.9 X 10- bbl per
bbl per psi. Since with increasing depth higher pressures and temperatures
are encountered, it is expected that the compressibility v,r:ill increase but
the magnitude will be dependent upon the relative increases in pressure
and temperature.
Example 6-2. Determination of Solubility of Natural Gas in Reservoir

Water. If the connate water in Example 6-1 had a salinity of 50,000 ppm,
estimate the probable gas solubility in the water.
From Fig. 6-la read the gas solubility in pure water as 20 cu ft per bbl.
This value can be corrected to account for salinity using Eq. (6-1) and
the correction-factor data as follows:
Read the correction factor at 200F as 0.044, substituting the known
value in Eq. (6-1).
R.w
= R,wp
453
Si 3.6[---t---+---t---t--;;.--t
~3.4
Cw=-(~)(~~)T
.e 3.2 r-----,----t---_,r----bi
0 3.0
(I - 1 ;,~0 )
R,. = 20 [ 1 - 0.04l~,~OO)] = 20(1 - 0.220) = 20(0. 780)

= 15.60 cu ft/bbl
Approximately the same gas solubility will be obtained by extrapolating
the data of Fig. 6-lb.
Compressibility of Water
The compressibility of pure \Vater has been sho"'"I1 1 to be dependent upon
the pressure, temperature, and gas in solution in the water. The compressibility for pure water with no gas in solution is shown in Fig. 6-2, \vhere
compressibility is expressed in barrels per barrel per degree Fahrenheit.
.The compressibility of pure water at constant temperature is expressed as
follows for this particular application:
Cwp
-v
(~~)T
10
15
20
Gas-water ratio, cu ft/ bbl
25
lb)
(6-2)
where c,,,P = compressibility of pure tvater, 1/psi

17 = volume of pure water, bbl
!:. lT = change in volume of pure water, bbl
tiP = change in pressure, psi
It should be noted that there is a \vide range of compressibilities. Increasing presRures have the effect of reducing the value, whereas increasing
temperatures have the effect of producing an increase. The compressibility
FIG. 6-2. Effect of dissolved gas upon the compressibility of water. (From Dodson
and Standing .1 )
At a given pressure and temperature, the effect of gas in solution in pure

water is to increase the compressibility over that of pure water at the same
pressure and temperature. Dodson1 prepared the graphical method of correction for gas solubility shown in Fig. 6-2b. Using Dodson's1 data, Jones2
proposed the following empirical method of solution:
(6-3)
R,w
Cwp
= solubility of gas in reservoir water, cu ft/bbl

= compressibility of pure water, 1/psi
Cw =
compressibility of reservoir water, I/psi
The effect of gas solubility on the compressibility of water is considerable, as a reservoir water containing 20 cu ft of natural gas per barrel 'vill
have a compressibility approximately 18 per cent greater than that of pure
water at the same pressure and temperature.
Since reservoir watera contain salts and the salinity affects the gas solubility, it is evident that this correction must be applied to the gas solubility
prior to its use in Eq. (6-3). The procedure for making this correction is
described under the section on Solubility of Natural Gas in Water in an
earlier part of this chapter.
The compressibility of a reservoir water is useful in estimating reservoir
fluid volumes and in predicting the mobility of invasion of water into the
oil-producing zone.
455
PROPERTIES OF WATER
454
Knowing the gas solubility in the connate water R,w to be 14.7 cu ft per
bbl, use Fig. 6-2b and read a correction factor of 1.13.
To obtain the compressibility of the connate water, multiply the com'
pressibility of pure water by the correction factor.
c,, = (2.9 X 10-')(l.13) = 3.27 X 10-' bbl/(bbl)(psi)
Thermal Expansion of Water

The thermal expansion of pure '\vater can be illustrated in a number of
different ways, but it is believed that the method shown in Figs. 6-3 and
Example 6-3. Determination of Compressibility of Pure Water. A

petroleum reservoir is knov.rn to have a reservoir pressure and temperature
of 4,000 psia and 140F, respectively, and the connate water in the reservoir is believed to be relatively pure. Estimate the probable compressibility factor for the water.
From Fig. 6-2a read the compressibility of pure water as 2.8 X Io-< bbl
per bbl per psi.
Example 6-4. Determination of Compressibility of Reservoir Water.
If the connate water in Example 6-3 is !mown to have a salinity of 30,000
ppm, compute the compressibility factor for the water.
From Fig. 6-2a read the compressibility of pure water as 2.9 X IO-' bbl
per bbl per psi.
This value must be corrected for salinity. Hence, the gas solubility for
pure water is read from Fig. 6-la as 17 .6. This value can be corrected to
connate-water salinity through use of Fig. 6-lb or Eq. (6-1) and the X
factor. Using Eq. (6-1),
R.w
XY ) _
( _ 0.055 X 30,000) = !4.7
R.w. ( I - 10,000 - 17.6 1
10,000
= 14.7 cu ft/bbl
+ 0.0088(Rrn)]
x 10-'(1 + 0.0088(14.7)]
= Cwp[l
= 2.9
0.98
100
200
Temperature, "F
300
400
F1a. 6-3. Water-formation Yolume factor. (From Keenan and Keyes3 ; and Dodson
and Standing.1 )
fl-4, in \Vhich the volume factor is plotted versus temperature, is the most
Then using Eq. (6-3),

Cw
1.00
= 3.27 X Io-< bbl/(bbl)(psi)
A similar answer can be obtained through use of Fig. 6-2b.
convenient. The thermal expansion of pure water is the slope of the curve
at any given set of conditions. The thermal expansion is expressed in
harrels per barrel per degree Fahrenheit temperature. The thermal expansion of pure ~ater at constant pressure can be expressed as follo\vs:
fl=
!...(t:.V)
V t:.T
(6-4)
456
where
f3
V
aV
457
PROPERTIES OF WATER
= thermal expansion coefficient of pure water, l/F
that for practical purposes the slope is identical with that obtained in
Example 6-5 and hence the thermal-expansion coefficients are approximately equal.
= volume of water, bbl

= Change in volume of water, bbl
AT = Change in temperature of water, F
The curve in Fig. 6-3 for pure water at its vapor pressure indicates that
with an increase in temperature from 60 to 250F an increase of approximately 6 per cent in water volume results. The other curves indicate the
relative importance of pressure and gas solubility on thermal expansion.
In general, over most of the range of pressures and temperatures found in
petroleum reservoirs, the pressure and gas solubility have a negligible
effect upon the thermal expansion of
water. From practical considerations,
it is obvious that the pressure would
:c
~ 1.0501---+--+--+be important only in so far as it in:c
fluences the gas solubility.
~ 1.040 I--+--+--+
Ho\vever, at low temperatures (32
to J25F), consideration must be
given to the effect of pressure and
gas solubility on thermal expansion.
Consequently, the salinity of the
"'ater must be considered, since it
has an effect on the gas solubility of
the water.
~
"'
a. 990
Example 6-5. Determination of

50
100
150 200 250 300 Thermal Expansion of Pure Water.
Temperature, oF
A relatively pure connate water is
FIG. 6-4. Formation volume factor of known to exist in a reservoir at 5,000
water saturated with natural gas. (From
psia and 200F. Estimate the thermalDodson and Standing.1 )
expansion coefficient for this water.
Using curve C in Fig. 6-3 locate the point corresponding to the reservoir
conditions. Construct a line tangent to the curve at this point, and determine the slope as follows:
/3 = aBw = _l_ (1.055 - 0.986) = 0.00469

Bw aT
1.02
300 - 100
Example 6-6. Determination of Thermal Expansion of Reservoir Water.
If the connate water in Example 6-5 is known to be saturated with natural
gas at the reservoir conditions, compute the probable thermal-expansion

coefficient for the water.
Using curve B (Fig. 6-3), locate the point corresponding to the reservoir
conditions. Construct a line tangent to the curve at this point, and note
Water-formation Volume Factor

The volume factor for pure "'ater is dependent upon its pressure and
temperature, and the relationship is illustrated in Fig. 6-5 and in Tables
6-1 and 6-2. It is obvious that in accordance with the compressibility and
1.06
"'
'1.05
:c
.i 1.04
u
"'
~ f.03
200'
: 1.02
:8
0
~ 1.0t
f50J
1.00
''
1001
0.99
1/)00
2POO
3,000
4,000
5,000
Pressure, psio
FIG. 6-5. Water-formatiop. volume factor for pure water (dashed lines) and pure
water saturated with natural gas (solid lines) as a function of pressure and temperature. (From Dodson and Standing.1)
thermal-expansion characteristics discussed previously, an increase in pressure produces a decrease in the volume factor whereas, at constant pressure,
an increase in temperature produces an increase in the volume factor. At
a pressure of 5,000 psia and 250F the volume factor for water is 1.042
relative to a volume factor of 1.000 at 14.73 psia and 60F. From Fig. 6-5
it is seen that a change in temperature from 100 to 250F produces a
much greater effect on the water-formation volume factor than a pressure
change from 0 to 5,000 psia.
Pure water at elevated pressures and temperatures often contains dissolved gas. In Fig. 6-5 data are presented for pure water saturated with
458
459
PROPERTIES OF WATER
TABLE 6-1. WATER-FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR FOR PURE WATER SATURATED

WITH NATURAL GAS1
four temperatures illustrated and these values plotted versus temperature.

Interpolation of this graph will yield the desired water-formation volume
factor at the reservoir temperature.
Water-formation volume factors are used in estimating reservoir volumes
of water and find particular applicability in material-balance calculations.
Saturation
pressure,
psia
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
Water-formation volume factor, bbl/bbl, at F
100
150
200
250
1.0045
1.0031
1.0017
1.0003
0.9989
1.0183
1.0168
1.0154
1.0140
1.0126
1.0361
1.0345
1.0330
1.0316
1.0301
1.0584
1.0568
1.0552
1.0537
1.0522
Example 6-7. Determination of Formation Volume Factor for Pure

Water. Estimate the water-formation volume factor for a relatively pure
connate water at a reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia and a temperature
of 250F.
From Fig. 6-5 read the formation volume factor for pure water as 1.044
bbl per bbl.
TABLE 6-2. WATER-FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR FOR PURE WATER1.3
Water-formation volume factor, bbl;bbl, at F
Pressure,
psi a
200
600
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
32
100
150
200
250
300
0.9982
0.9967
0.9953
0.9920
0.9887
1.0050
1.0037
1.0025
0.9995
6.9966
0.9938
0.9910
0.9884
1.0207
1.0193
1.0153
1.0125
1.0095
1.0067
1.0039
1.0031
1.0363
1.0349
1.0335
1.0304
1.0271
1.0240
1.0210
1.0178
1.0617
1.0599
1.0560
1.0523
1.0487
1.0452
1.0418
1.0402
1.0872
1.0852
1.0835
1.0792
1.0749
1.0707
1.0666
1.0626
0.9855
0.9822
0.9791
400
1.1592
1.1566
1.1498
1.1433
1.1371
1.1311
1.1254
natural gas. Naturally, at a given pressure and temperature, gas-saturated

pure water has a higher volume factor than pure water.
In addition to dissolved gas, most reservoir waters contain salts. As explained in an earlier part of this chapter, gas solubility in water is decreased
with increasing salinity. Hence, at a given pressure and temperature, an
increase in the salinity of water produces a decrease in the volume factor.
The volume factor for a reservoir water can be computed with aid of
graphs as follows: (1) At the given pressure and temperature the volume
factors for pure water and pure 'vater saturated wit4 natural gas ar~ read
from Fig. 6-5, (2) the gas solubility for pure water is read from Fig. 6-la
and corrected for salinity using Fig. 6-lb or Eq. (6-1), (3) assuming the
effect of gas solubility on the volume factor to be linear, the volume factor
at the desired pressure and temperature is computed by interpolation using
the gas solubility of gas-saturated pure water and the gas solubility of the
reservoir water as the basis for the interpolation.
In the case that the reservoir temperature does not correspond to those
for which curves have been illustrated on Fig. 6-5, it is recommended that
at the reservoir pressure, water-formation volume factors be read at the
Example 6-8. Determination of Formation Volume Factor for Reservoir Water. Estimate the water-formation volume factor for a connate
water, salinity 50,000 ppm, at a reservoir pressure of 5,000 psia and a temperature of 250F.
From Fig. 6-5 read the following: formation volume factor of pure water
saturated with natural gas = 1.054 bbl/bbl, formation volume factor of
pure water = 1.044 bbl/bbl.
t From Fig. 6-la read the gas solubility in pure water as 21 cu ft per bbl.
Correct this value for salinity using Fig. 6-lb or Eq. (6-1), factor X. In
this case, use Fig. 6-Ib and extrapolate the 250F curve to obtain a correction of 0.84. Hence, the gas solubility in 50,000 ppm connate water is estimated as
21 x 0.84 = 17.64
Since the pure water saturated with 21 cu ft of natural gas per barrel of
water had a water-formation volume factor of 1.054, the formation volume
factor for the 50,000 ppm connate water having 17.64 cu ft of gas dissolved
per barrel can be estimated as follows:
1.044
(1.054 - 1.044)
17.64
:n-
1.052 bbl/bbl
Example 6-9. Determination of Formation Volume Factor for Reservoir Water by Various Methods. The following production data are available for a field in which the oil-producing zone is at 5, 750 ft. The reservoir
pressure is 2,675 psia, and the reservoir temperature is 193F.
Method 1. Correct the total quantity of water production to its equivalent volume at reservoir conditions, assuming that the reservoir pressure
remains constant and that the water has a specific gravity of 1.10 at
60F/60F. Assume that the average annual surface temperature is 60F
and the pressure 14.73 psia.
From curve A (Fig. 6-7) read a salinity of 143,000 ppm corresponding to
a specific gravity of 1.10.
-------------
-------
460
(1)
(2)
Year
Average
oil-production
rate, bbl/day
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
(3)
(4)
Water-oil
ratio, bbl/bbl
Gas-oil ratio,
cu ft/bbl
0.25
0.28
0.38
0.60
0.66
0.81
1,903
2,822
3,252
4,579
5,952
240
!30
84
54
43
36
461
PROPERTIES OF WATER
A similar result can be obtained using Fig. 6-lb as follows. Assuming the
relationship to be linear, the extrapolated value of the ratio would be 0.350.
This value can be obtained by reading the value of the ratio at 28,600 ppm
(143,000/5) and 193F as 0.870, multiplying the difference between
unity (1) and this value (0.870) by 5, subtracting this result from unity,
and thereby obtaining 0.350[1 - (1 - 0.87)5]. Then
14 x 0.350 = 4.90 cu ft/bbl
Although either result is sufficient for use in practice, the value obtained
From Fig. 6-4 (as estimated from Table 6-1) read a volume factor of
1.0365 bbl per bbl for pure water at its vapor pressure.
66
"
"">
.i 64
"
63
1.04
Salinity, ppm x 10-3
1.06
1.oe
1.10
\12
1.14
Specific gravity
FrG. 6-6. Effect of salt concentration and temperature on water density. (From
Rowe.$)
Fra. 6-7. Reservoir water salinity represented as a function of specific gravity.

(From Jones.~)
From Fig. 6-la read 14 cu ft per bbl as the solubility of natural gas in
pure water at reservoir conditions.
Using Eq. (6-1) and the correction factor compute the solubility of
natural gas in 143,000 ppm reservoir water as follows:
through use of the equation is the more accurate. Hence, it will be used in
succeeding calculations.
From Fig. 6-5 the change in volume factor at 193F per cubic foot of gas
solubility can be estimated as follows:
R,., ( 1 - 1 ;,~)
1.0345 ~ 1.0305 = o.~ = 0.000286 bbl/ (bbl) (cu ft)
14
4.98 cu ft/bbl
R,.
(i - 0.04510,000
x 143,000)
From Fig. 6-2a read a compressibility factor of 3.10 X lo-' bbl per bbl
per psi for pure water. This value can be corrected for the effect of solubility and salinity effects through use of Eq. (6-3).
462
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR :ENGINEERING
Cw = Cwp(I
0.0088R,w)
= 3.10 X IQ-6(1
0.0088 X 4.98)
= 3.24 X 10-s bbl/(bbl)(psi)
A similar result can be obtained using Fig. 6-2b. At a gas-water "ratm of
4.98 cu ft per bbl read 1.04. Hence the compressibility for the reservoir
water is
3.10 X 10-'(I.04) = 3.22 X 10__, bbl/(bbl)(psi)
Here again either result can be used in practice, but the result obtained
through use of the equation is the more accurate and will be used in succeeding calculations.
Hence, since the formation volume factor for pure water at 193F was
found to be 1.0365 bbl per bbl and the correction for compressibility was
3.22 X 10-s bbl per bbl per psi, the formation volume factor for the reservoir water is
Bw = 1.0365 - 3.22 X 10__, X 2,675 + 0.000286 x 4.98

= 1.0365 - 0.0086 + 0.0014
= 1.0293 bbl/bbl
Method 2. From the data of Fig. 6-5 obtain the following information
at 2,675 psia and 193F by interpolation.
Volume factor for pure water saturated with natural gas= 1.032
bbl/bbl
Volume factor for pure water = 1.028 bbl/bbl
From Method I the gas solubility in pure \Yater at the reservoir conditions was found to be 14 cu ft per bbl and the gas solubility for the saline
water at the reservoir conditions was found to he 4.98 cu ft per bbl.
Hence, the water-formation volume factor for the reservoir water is
4 8
(1.032 - 1.028) = 1.0294 bbl/bbl
Bw = 1.028 +
j!
This value compares favorably with that obtained by Method I.

Hence the production data can be corrected as follows:
463
PROPERTIES OF WATEB
Therefore, the equivalent reservoir volume of this quantity of water is

79,700
x 1.0294 =
82,000 bbl
Density, Specific Volume, and Specific Gravity

The density of water is expressed in mass per unit volume; the specific
volume, in volume per unit of mass and specific gravity, relates the observed density to the density at some set of conditions ordinarily referred
to as base conditions. The base conditions to which all values are referred
in this chapter are 14.73 psia and 60F.
The magnitude and units of the more common methods of expression of
these properties for pure water at 14.73 psia and 60F are as follows:
0.999010 gm/cc
8.334 lb/gal
62.34 lb/cu ft
350 lb/bbl (U.S.)
0.01604 cu ft/lb
The aforementioned quantities can then be related as follows:
'I =
where
'Y
(6-5)
= specific gravity
Pw =
Vw
Pw
1
0.01604
62.34 = 62.34Vw = 0.01604pw =
Vw
density, lb/cu ft
= specific volume, cu ft/lb
The relative density and relative volume of pure water over a range of
temperature from 0 to 400F are given in Table 6-3.
TABLE 6-3. RELATIVE DENSITY AND VOLUME OF PURE WATER
Temperature, F
Property
0
JOO
150
200
250
300
350
400
-----Year
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
Annual
oil production,
bbl
87,700
45,500
30,700
19,750
15,700
13,200
Water-oil
ratio,
bbl/bbl
Annual
water production,
bbl
0.25
0.28
0.38
0.60
0.66
0.81
21,900
13,300
11,650
11,850
10,350
10,650
79,700
Relative density,
gm/ml
0.99987 0.99306 0.98026 0.96301 0.9426 0.9184 0.8900 0.8571
Relative volume,
ml/gm
1.00013 1.00699 1.02014 1.03715 1.0610 1.0890 1.1243 1.1669
The petroleum-reservoir engineer often needs to determine the densit,v

of reservoir water. This value can be obtained readily by observing that
the density of the reservoir water is related to the density of pure water
at base conditions in the following manner:
~ =
Vwb
Pwb
Pw
:::::::'.'Bw
(6-6)
----------------
464
where
= specific volume of water at base conditions, lb/cu ft

Pw = density of water at base conditions, lb/cu ft
TABLE
Bw = formation volume factor for water, reservoir volumes per unit

volume at base conditions
Therefore, if the density of water at base conditions and the volume factor
for the water are available from either direct measurement or use of empirical correlations, the density of the water at reservoir conditions can be
calculated.
Quite often it is necessary for the reservoir engineer to make calculations
in which the density is required. In the absence of appropriate laboratory data Figs. 6-6 and 6-7 can be used to estimate the magnitude of this
property.
Example 6-10. Determination of Density of Pure Water. A connste
water is known to be relatively pure and exists in the reservoir at 5,000
psia and 200F. If it is assumed that the water is saturated with natural
gas, what is the density of the water at reservoir conditions?
Read Bw from Table 6-1 or Fig. 6-5 (1.0301 bbl/bbl).
Hence, the density is
p.
i;;: = i6~3 0~ = 60.51 lb/cu ft

3
Example 6-11. Determination of the Salinity of Reservoir Water. A

connate water is found to have a specific gravity of 1.04 at standard conditions. What is the probable salinity of the water?
Read salinity from curve A of Fig. 6-7 (55,000 ppm).
Viscosity of Water
Few data have been published on the viscosity of either pure or reservoir
waters. The paper of Beal' in which the work of Bridgman' on pure water
4
and others was compiled is perhaps the most comprehensive. These results
are presented in Tables 6-4 and 6-5 and in Fig. 6-8.
The viscosity of pure water at its vapor pressure decreases from 1.79
centipoises at 0.0886 psia to 0.174 centipoise at 89.6 psia. The viscosity
of pure water decreases from 1.4 to 0.3 centipoise with an increase in temperature from 50 to 200F. Bridgman's results show very little change in
viscosity of pure water over a range of 14.2 to 7,100 psia.
The other curve in Fig. 6-8 is that which was presented by Jones' for a
reservoir water containing 60,000 ppm of salt. Unpublished data indicate
that brine viscosity increases with salinity over a temperature range of 32
to 300F at pressures not exceeding 5,000 psia.
There is a real need for information relative to the effect of salinity and
465
PROPERTIES OF WATER
Vwo
6-4. VISCOSITY OF WATER AT VARIOUS TEMPERATURES AND

V .A..POR PREssURE&
Temp, "F
Viscosity, cp
32
50
1.79
1.31
1.00
0.801
0.656
0.549
0.469
0.406
0.357
0.316
0.284
0.256
0.196
0.174
68
86
104
122
140
158
176
194
212
230
284
321
AT
Vapor pressure,
psia"
0.0886
0.180
0.339
0.616
1.07
1.79
2.89
4.52
6.87
10.18
14.7
20.8
52.4
89.6
.. Pressure is that of the saturated vapor at the indicated temperature.

TABLE
6-5.
VISCOSITY OF WATER AT HIGH
Pressure,
psi a
14.2
7,100
14,200
21,300
28,400
PREsstJRES
AND TEMPERATURES6' 7
Absolute viscosity, cp, at F
32
50.5
86
166.6
1.792
1.680
1.65
1.67
1.71
1.40
1.35
1.33
1.33
1.35
0.871
0.895
0.921
0.950
0.986
0.396
0.411
0.428
0.443
0.461
gas solubility on the viscosity of reservoir waters at elevated pressures and

temperatures.
Example 6-12. Determination of the Viscosity of Pure Water. A connate water is relatively pure and is found in a reservoir having a pressure
of 1,000 psia and a temperature of 150F. Estimate the viscosity of the
water.
. . )
Read the viscosity from Fig. 6-8 (approximately 0.5 cent1p01se .
Example 6-13. Determination of the Viscosity of Reservoir Water.
If the connste water in Exam.pie 6-12 had a salinity of 50,000 ppm and was
found at a reservoir pressure of 7,000 psia and a temperature of 150F,
estiniate the probable viscosity of the water.
__
--_-
---------
466
467
PROPERTIES OF WATER
From Fig. 6-8 it is seen that salinities up to 60,000 ppm and pressures
up to 7,000 psia have very little effect on the viscosity. Hence, the viscosity would be 0.5 centipoise.
tionship between the solubility of pure water in natural gas and the pressure and temperature developed by Dodson' is illustrated in Fig. 6-9a. A
method for correcting the pure-water-;;olubility data for salinity is presented in Fig. 6-9b. Water-solubility data are limited to a maximum pres-
Solubility of Water in Natural Gas

The solubility of water in natural gas is an important physical property,
iAf.nce it influences the treating, processing, and transporting of natural gas.
4~,.-,-r~~rr~-r~~-rrr...-i-rrTO
3~~-+~~+--1-~-t'-?''lh?'-;~
2!----+--
'
.8
1. 6
: 1.4
;;;
0.
~
~
1. 2
0.8~=~i71~
0.7 !----f-~'-''--"'-''-H
QG f----;'j--t-cf--,fH'-717'7'<:
~
1. 0
OAf-~c_,,_,,'-/-7'-J~ij---t~~-+~~1
Q3f-~--Plf--f-f-/-A'./f-~--t~~-+~~1
~~
-"'
o~
-~
;;
-s
QS!--~-l-+-l'--f-'--f-..J'-,~'h'+---+-----1
<;:;;
;:
;t
-.,---"
0.8
.,,
~\
~ 0.6
0.4
~-
~ .......
,_
.~
0.2
,._
Q01'--'--'-'~:'-:o'--'-''--'--,'-,'~'--'-~~'-':=::~-'-7!
50
50
100
150
200
250
300
100
Hence, in many operations it is necessary to exert strict control of this

property. The theoretical principles and laws upon which this property
are dependent are presented in Chap. 4. Among other considerations, a
detailed discussion of the factors influencing the formation of hydrates is
included.
The solubility of water in natural gas is dependent upon the pressure,
temperature, and composition of both the water and natural gas. The rela-
200
250
300
(a)
Temperature, F
FrG. 6-8. Viscosity of water at oil-field temperature and pressure; ( ~- ) saline

water (~0,000 ppm) at 14.7 psia pressure,(-) at 14.2 psia pressure, (0---0) at
7,100 ps1a pressure, (.6..) at vapor pressure. (From Van Wingen.8 )
150
Temperature, F
350
FrG. 6-9. Effect of pressure and temperature upon the solubility of water in natural
gas. (From Dodson and Standing.1)
sure of 5,000 psia and a temperature of 300F, indicating the desirability

of additional data.
Example 6-14. Determination of the Solubility of Water in Natural
Gas. What is the solubility of a brine having a salinity of 20,000 ppm in
natural gas at 3,000 psia and 250F?
From Fig. 6-9 read the solubility of pure water in natural gas at the specified conditions as 2 bbl per 1,000 Mcf of gas.
468
From Fig. 6-9 the correction factor for the salinity of the water is found
to be 0.95, and hence, the solubility of the 20,000 ppm brine in the natural
gas at the reservoir conditions is
2 X 0.95 = 1.90 bbl/Mcf of gas
{UO!~n1os JO wf:u.6/Jd.J,OM U!
0
0
o_
Electrical Resistivity of Water

The electrical resistivity is an important physical property of water and
is utilized in electrical logging of wells to identify and correlate formations
as well as to locate contacts between water and oil.
The resistivity (specific resistance) of water is a measure of its electro-
.t::> ON
SWOJ.60J::>JW)
~-
r~
I/,
/
0
(6-7)
where R = resistivity, ohn1-meters

r = resistance, ohms
A = cross-sectional area of the conductor, meters squared
L = length of the conductor, meters
The resistivity of water is dependent primarily upon the temperature

and chemical composition of the water in the manner illustrated in Fig.
6-10. Pure water has a relatively infinite resistivity as compared with a
water having a very low salinity. It is seen from the figure that for a water
of a given salinity, the resistivity decreases as the temperature increases.
Since reservoir temperatures in excess of 350F and reservoir water salinities in the hundreds of thousands of parts per million have been encountered, it is evident that the range of resistivities of waters found in
petroleum reservoirs is even greater than that indicated in Fig. 6-10.
Recent investigations have indicated that not only the quantity of salt
present in the water but its cJ:iemical composition has a marked effect upon
the resistivity. Furthermore, pressure has an effect upon resistivity, since
it influences gas solubility, which in turn is dependent upon the salinity of
the water. The effect of gas solubility on water resistivity at elevated pressures and temperatures has not been defined.
In view of these uncertainties it is recommended that at high pressures,
temperatures, and salinities the correlation of Fig. 6-10 be used only if
laboratory data for the particular reservoir water sample are unavailable.
lytic conduction and is directly proportional to its cross-sectional area and
0
120
12
inversely proportional to its length. Hence,
wdd 1 UO!~OJ~Ud::lUO:)
.,,<>
~
.:::;~
~~
12
~~
'::,!:::!
~
~~
~<
'-- ~:
-!! ~
~
~
N
i:,
"'""""
:=
;;
~
;;
~
0
0
Example 6-15. Determination of the Resistivity of Reservoir Water.

A connate water, salinity of 50,000 ppm, is found in a reservoir having a
pressure of 5,000 psia and a temperature 100F. Determine the resistivity
of this water at reservoir conditions.
T'ie resistivity, estimated from Fig. 6-9, is 0.1 ohm-meter.
469
;;;
ii!.
470
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF WATER
The early analyses" 10 of oil-field waters reported only specific gravity

and total solids concentrations. However, Such analyses were known to
have limited value and application, and soon chemical water analyses were
employed. Since 1920, major petroleum companies have accumulated such
data, and through the efforts of the U.S. Bureau of Mines AIME API and
' to
AAPG, much of these data have been assembled and' efforts' made
correlate and interpret the data on geographical, regional, and areal bases.
Ho:wever, great difficulty has been experienced in this effort, since it is
desired to represent a great deal of data concerning a water sample in a
simple manner. The most recent effort11 has been directed to the use of
graphic methods for presenting the analytical data. It is believed that the
method proposed by Stiff11 is the simplest, has maximum utility, and,
hence, is the most popular.
In this graphical method, illustrated in Fig. 6-11, horizontal lines extending right and left from a centrally located vertical line form the graph.
~i:1: :; :1::: :1::
10
!I:!!
:1::::1::::1:~
Scale: meq/liter
471
PROPERTIES OF WATER
!O
FrG. 6-11. Essential feature of the water pattern analysis system. (From Stifj.u)
the method is that the pattern maintains its characteristic shape upon dilution of the sample, thereby permitting a qualitative determination of the
total salt concentration. Another advantage of this method is that the
~oice of scale can be made to exaggerate or.minimize a particular chemical
~
"
~~~
..
,_
"'
""
"o'
"
""
"
"'
"
'"'
v
~
~
"'
HC'5
'-
,,'
~.
"
"
"
FIG. 6-12. Method of constructing water analysis pattern. (From Stiff.u)
characteristic of the water, thereby facilitating identification of such a

characteristic in future samples.
This method has been employed in many practical applications for correlating producing formations as illustrated in Fig. 6-13. The characteristic
,----, <J>
"''""' ~-\;:~~ <::I>
----J
1--+---Elj;_w~t~
1.,0:!9~:-i._
The positive ions are plotted to the left of the vertical line, while the negative ions and/or radicals are plotted to the right. Characteristic positions
are designated for sodium, calcium, magnesium, iron, chloride, bicarbonate,
sulfate, and carbonate ions and/or radicals. In case there is a difference
between the positive and negative ions, the difference is represented as
sodium. Although various scales can be employed, most reservoir waters
may be plotted with sodium and chloride on a scale of 100 m.illiequivalents
and a scale of 10 milliequivalents for the others. The chemical unit of milliequivalents per liter is employed in the graphs presented here, but these
units can be converted to parts per million by multiplying by the equivalent weight in milligrams. If other units are desired, appropriate conversion factors can be found in a standard chemical handbook.4
When the water-analysis data are plotted on the graph and the adjacent
points are connected by straight lines, a closed "pattern" is formed as illustrated in Fig. 6-12. The resulting "pattems11 have many different sizes and
shapes but, to the experienced eye of the specialist in this field, characterize
t~e water. Characteristic shapes are observed for fresh water, sea water,
01!-field brines, etc. Stiff observed that one of the distinctive features of
"
""'
Stoltenberg field
Bloom" t;e!d
<]> ~I~io,
St. John field
Drach field
~og
r84
Fe
3
Scale; 10
10
co
meq/liter
FrG. 6-13. Course of Arbuckle formation through Kansas shown by water patterns_
(From Stiff.11 )
pattern of the Arbuckle is evident. The method has also been used in
tracer studies in water Hooding and in conjunction with drill-stem testing
to identify the source of water. In Fig. 6-14 an application for detecting
foreign water encroachment and locating its source is illustrated. Through
this study the water leak was eliminated expeditiously and at a minimum
of expense.
- - - - - --------
472
-------------------
___ ______
_,
Y<Jl
Normal pattern
well #1
formation A
Normal pattern
well #2
formation B
Changed pattem
well #1
showing entrance
qJ'"W \P
25/o A 75/o 8
50/o A 50/o B
1~8!fJo
Co
HC03
~a
Pattern of well #1
ofter workover
DATA EVALUATION
FOR RESERVOIR CALCULATIONS
75/o A 25/o 8'
Patterns produced by various mixtures of waters from formations A and B.

lt con be seen that the abnormal pattern in well #f results from o mixture of approximately 25/o A and 75/o B.
Mg
CHAPTER
10
504
10
~o
Fe
-10
C03
10
Scale: Meqjliter
Fra. 6-14. Detection of foreign water and determination of its source. (From Stiff."-)
REFERENCES
1. ~odson, C.R., and M. B. Standing: Pressure-Volume-Temperature and Solubility
Relations for Natural Gas-Water Mixtures, Drilling and Production Practice, American
Petroleum Institute. 1944.

2. Jones, Park J.: "Petroleum Production," Reinhold Publishing Corporation, 1946.
3. Keenan, J. H., and F. G. Keyes: "Thermodynamic Properties of Steam" John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1936.
,
4. Hodgman, C. D.: "Handbook of Chemistry and Physics" Chemical Rubber
Publishing Company, 1951.
'
5. Rowe, W. E.: Effect of Salinity on Physical Properties of Water, "Secondary
Recovery of Oil in the United States," American Petroleum Institute, 1950.
. 6. Beal, Carlton: The VIScosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and Its Associated Gases at Oil Field Temperatures and Pressures, Trans. AIME, vol. 165, 1946.
7. Bridgman, D. W.: 11The Physics of High Pressure," The Macmillan Company
New 1'.-ork, 1931.
'
8. Van Wingen, N.: Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, and Crude Oil at Varying
Pressures and Temperatures, "Secondary Recovery of Oil in the United States "
'
9. Tickell, E. G.: "Report of the California .State Oil and Gas Supervisor," 1921.
10. Reistle, C. E.: U.S. Bur. Mines Tech. Paper 404, 1927.
11. Stiff, H. A., Jr.: The Interpretation of Chemical Water Analysis by Means of
Patterns, Trans. AIME, vol. 192, 1951.
12. Schlumberger Well Surveying Corporation: Document 4.
INTRODUCTION
The fundamental concepts of reservoir rock and fluid properties werP

presented in the preceding chapters. The reservoir engineer utilizes these
concepts, together with field and laboratory data, to describe petroleUIJ>
reservoirs and reservoir processes. It is the putj>ose of this chapter to rPview methods of formation and data evaluation to provide the engineer
with the average parameters describing the physical characteristics of re1'ervoirs which enable him to make volumetric estimates of the quantity of
hydrocarbon originally in place.
Guthrie1 presented an outline of a data-processing procedure for petroleum-engineering data. This outline (Fig. 7-1) summarizes the sources of
data and the general evaluation process required to reduce the data tc>
descriptive parameters to be used in reservoir calculations. Basic data
are obtained from both the laboratory and field and can be grouped in two
broad categories: (1) reservoir-fluid and production data and (2) formation evaluation data.
In the top row of Fig. 7-1 are listed the primary types of data which
normally are obtained from a hydrocarbon reservoir. The remaining block
titles represent common means of consolidating, reducing, and presenting
the data from the various sources .
Sources and taking of data are discussed in this chapter only to the extent necessary to identify the characteristics of the data. Emphasis is
placed on the reduction and preparation of the data for engineering calculations.
Hydrocarbon reservoirs are tapped by wells, and the wells are basically
the source of all information concerning the reservoir. Formation evaluation data are obtained during the drilling and completion of the well.
Data of this type must be obtained during particular phases of the drilling
and completion operation. If not obtained at the appropriate time, certain
types of data (i.e., core samples) may be lost to the records.
Reservoir-fluid and production data are obtained largely after the wells
473
.---------
DATA EVALUATION FOR RESERVOIR CALCULATIONS
475
are completed, and consequently the operator of the wells has greater latitude in taking such data.
FIELD RECORDS
"
0
-~
"'~
~
"'-
.;i
d
-0
'"'
.5
~
;;,
d
=
d
~o;
"
~
.8
~
Completion and W orkover Records

Completion and workover records are primarily inventories of the physical equipment (casing, tubing, etc.) in a well and of the condition of the
well bore. The completion record is also a check list of the tests and other
observations taken during the progress of initially drilling and completing
the well. On occasion after the original completion, mechanical equipment
must he replaced, repaired, or altered or the well must be drilled deeper.
An operation to effect these changes is termed a "workover." A supplementary workover record is made and included in the well file .
Completion and workover records are invaluable sources of information
for both engineering and opera ting personnel. These records should be
kept as accurately as possible and should be consulted in planning additional tests or evaluating data. Example 7-1 is an example of a completion
record on a well. Although this record includes the major components of
any completion record, it is not intended as a suggested form. The record
includes casing and tubing setting depths; perforation (completion) interval; intervals cored, tested, or logged; and other pertinent data. Some
of the observations mentioned will be discussed in succeeding sections of
this chapter.
.g
0
0
s.
'"'
;;i
gl-----'
c
e
0.
g:
~
>
w
9(1)
o~t:~
-a:cnw
~~
-g~~
=>~1-----l ~~8~
,.!.
ci
1-----------------...J
[~--....,~-~----------1~
ccg
;:g:
'3
474
<:
.I
----------~-1
Production Records
The engineer is interested in the oil, gas, and water production from the
reservoir and the gas and water injection into a reservoir. The manner of
fluid accounting may vary among companies and among fields, but the
records are all based on the same measurements.
Oil Production. The volume of oil produced from a reservoir is measured by volumetric vessels or positive displacement meters. The volumetric methods may be a large storage tank or a measuring tank used ip.
a lease automatic custody transfer unit. In either case, the liquid volume
is measured at the pressure and temperature of the vessel according to a
calibrated volume scale for the vessel. Positive displacement meters measure the volume of fluid flowing at flowing temperature and pressure. Like
volumetric vessels, positive displacement meters must be calibrated. against
some standard.
Usually oil production from the wells on a lease is collected and measured at one or more central locations at which lease storage tanks are
erected. A group of tanks is referred to as a "tank battery." Several wells
476
Example 7-1.
Individual Well Record.
Date
a.-ks
Company _ _ _ _~A~m"'oo~tc__ _ _ L<- ------"S~ta~te~---- Well No. --~"---
2-26--54
Moved on location. Rigging up
Completion dat.a
2-27-54
Ran 163.26 ft of 9% in. c.sg. cmtd w/82 sx. (3 jts., 36 lb on bottom w/Baker.guide shoe.
2-28-54
Drilled to 1,055 ft
Elev.
498ft
K.B._~4~9~6~f~t- D.F.
486ft
Comm. _ _~2-=26-54=~-- Comp.
3-14-54
Prod. from zone._ _ _ _ _ Perfs.
Total depth
5.415 ft
Gr.
Reworked _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
--~53~9~1~-~53~~=&~53=9~8-~5404=~- Sub8e8.. _ _-=4893-l=~89=8~&~-
4900-4906
42.6
TP
690 lb
I.P. _ ___!1~06,_,,B~O~P~D,___ _ CK __>~i2i~n'-- GOR _2885=~'1'-- Grav.
Prod. from zone _ _ _ _ _ Perfs.
Sub.sea--------
I.P. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CK _ _ _ _ _ GOR _ _ _ _ Grav. _ _ _ _ _ CP - - - - Logs run _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

~
Mechanical equipment in well
Ca11ing reeoni
8_2_ sx.
9%in. set at _ _ _ft_ with _ _
5.415 ft of ~ set at _ _ _f_t with
sx.
_ _ _ft_ of
_l!!:_ set at _ _ _ft_ with - - - sx.
~of
_ _ _ft_ of
_l!!:_
.....
---
_ _ _ft_ with
Bollller Packer (N. 1) at 5.375 ft
3 jts. 32.30 lb H-40 on top)
3-1-54
Cored 1,055 ft to 1,094 ft. Drld 1,094 to l,410 ft. Cored 1,410 to 1460).i ft
3-2-54
Drld 1,46014 to 1,81814 ft to 1,864 ft 30 in. DST 1,859).i-l,864 ft (See Core Record)
3-3-54
Cored 1,864 to 1,892 ft 30 in. DST 1,882-1,892 ft (See Core Record)
3-4-54
Drlg ahead at 3,717 ft
(See Core Record)
3-8-54
Drld to 5,354 ft
3-941
Cored 5,354 to 5,415 ft 30 in. DST 5,390-5,415 ft (See Core Recrod)
3-10-04
Ran Halliburton Log to TD 5,415 ft. Took 14 side-wall cores. {See Core Record)
3-12-54
Ran 5,415 ft of 5~i-ft casing. 2 cement jobs-from 5,415 ft up 150 sx. From DV Tool 2440
3-13-54
Ran tbg. Hit bottom plug at 5,381 ft. Drld. cmt to 5,415 ft. Continm>d mud measured
3-14-54
Perf: 5391-96 & 5398-5404. Set Bonner Pkr. at 5,375 ft. Ran 5,369 ft 2 in. tbg
3-15-54
Swbd. well until it made pipeline oil. Tubing or Pkr developed leak. Ca.sing showed
3-16-54
Set Bonner Packer No. 2 at 5,365 ft. Swabbing well at 5,000 ft 1003 oil. Released rig.
3-23-54
Gelfraced w/1,000 gal. (1 lb sand per gal.} Broke formation at 2,500 IL. Well brought
up 313 sx common cmt w/78 s:x stratacrete
- - - sx.
--- sx.
___
ft_ of ----1!!:..._ set at _ _ _ft_ with
5,369 ft of tubing <Un with pk.. at 5,369 (2 in.)
out of bole. Ran gamma-ray neutron
Casing perforation record
PerforatioD.S
Date
Actual depth
From
3-14-54
3-16-54
3-2341
vacuum. Made mud & died. Prep. to reset pkr
Shot.s
Zo=
na=
Sub.sea depth
To
Number
-4,893
-4,898
40
-4,900
-4,906
48
To
From
5,391
5,396
5,398
5,404
477
Well hiatory
Kind
Production
teats and
squeeze data
Pkr at 5,375 ft.
Leak developed.
Well flowing into tank at 10 PM making 35 bbl/day. 75 lb pre:isure

back into potentiating 106 BOPD ~lb ck. 1,075 lb pressure
Set Pk:r No. 2

at 5,365 ft.
Swbd well.
Prod. 30.8 bbl
in 24 hr. 80 lb
sur press.
in.
ck. (1.28 bbl/hr)
-----
-----
Flowed into
tank making 35
BPD 75 lb pre&sure.
Gelfrac::ed
w/1,000 gal.
Broke formation at 2,500 lb.
Well brought
back in Pot.
106 BOP J.* in.
ck 1,075 lbpr~
normally produce into a single tank battery, and frequently the oil is commingled before measurement. This is particularly true if oil production is
gauged volumetrically. Even when positive displacement meters are used,
the oil is frequently collected in central storage and a volumetric gauge
taken. The records from the displacement meters are used to allocate the
volumetrically gauged production to the wells. Thus, the basic oil-production measurement is for the group of wells connected to the tank battery.
If positive displacement meters are not used, individual well oil production
is allocated from battery records based on periodic well tests.
Regardless of how the oil volume is measured, there are essentially
three production values reported. The first value reported is the volume
actually produced, not corrected for temperature and B.S. and W. (noni;alable content). The second set of production records are those which
give the actual volume of salable oil produced at the standard temperature
of 60F. The third set of records indicates the amount of oil sold. The
---~-----------
478
corrected amount of oil produced minus the amount in storage should equal
the amount sold.
The question arises as to which of these three sets of records to use in
making an engineering study of a reservoir. The one most frequently used
is the actual salable oil production corrected to 60F. Although this oil
volume does not account for all the hydrocarbon liquids and solids removed
from the reservoir, it is perhaps the most accurate value available. Some
of the nonsalable products (B.S. and W.) actually were produced from the
reservoir. These unsalable products are primarily water, dirt, and solidified hydrocarbons (paraffin). It is impossible using standard field procedures to determine the exact volume of dirt and paraffin comprising the
B.S. and W. fraction. Therefore, it is not possible to evaluate the hydrocarbon volume produced in the solid state. In most cases, the solids volume
is so small as to be negligible in any engineering calculation.
Gas Production. In the process of stabilizing a reservoir fluid into
storageable or salable quantities, it is necessary to remove the more volatile
constituents. These volatile constituents combine to form the gas production. In order to maximize the volume of stable liquid, the gas can be removed in several stages at different pressures and temperatures. The number of stages in the separation and the pressure and temperature of these
stages have a great effect on the economics of producing an oil reservoir
and on engineering calculations pertaining to the reservoir.
The amount of gas obtained during the process of separation is usually
expressed at standard conditions with respect to the volume of oil produced.
The actual volume of gas produced can be determined from two sets of
records. If gas is being sold to a gasoline plant or gas-transmission line,
records will be available on the gas sales volume. The engineer must determine in each field how much of the produced gas is represented by plant
records. Seldom is the gas sold that is liberated from the liquid in the
stock tank. In some cases, the gas from the low-pressure separators is not
sold. If plant records are used to determine the gas production, then the
reservoir-fluid properties (see Chap. 5) should be corrected to the prevailing conditions.
As in the case of oil production, the gas is frequently collected and
measured at a tank battery after the production of several wells has been
commingled. If individual well-production records are required, the gas
production must be allocated to the wells on the basis of well tests.
.
The second method of obtaining gas-production records IB through penodic well-production tests. These tests should be conducted under normal
operating conditions, measuring the gas production from all separators
but not the stock tank. The oil volume produced during the period should
be corrected for tank temperature and B.S. and W. The total gas produced
is divided by the corrected total stock-tank oil production to give the pro-
1'ATA EVALUATION FOR RESERVOIR CALCULATIONS
479
duclng gas-oil ratio for this particular well. It is usually assumed that this
gas-oil ratio applies to half of the time period between the last production
test and the present test and to half of the period between the present test
and the next production test.
The total gas production is calculated using the gas-oil ratio for a prescribed time period and the oil volume produced during that period.
Water Production. The water produced from oil reservoirs is usually
unpalatable and unsuitable for irrigation and hence has no economic value.
For this reason records of water production are usually not sufficient for
most engineering purposes.
Water-production data can usually be compiled from monthly wellproduction tests required by most companies and some state regulatory
bodies. The accuracy of the water production reported on these tests depends on the individual performing the test. The water production obtained on the monthly well-production test is reported as either a water-oil
ratio or a. "water cut." The water-oil ratio is the barrels of water produced
per corrected barrel of stock-tank oil. The water cut is the fraction or
percentage of water in the total liquid production.
The cumulative water production is calculated in the same manner as
was the cumulative gas production from gas-oil ratio test data. The cumulative water production must be calculated for each well, using the oilproduction records of the well.
In some fields, excellent water-production records are available. The
produced. water is measured, using positive displacement meters, weirs, or
some other metering device. These data are usually found on fields under
pressure maintenance or secondary recovery operations or with severe
water-disposal problems. In this case, the water-production records are
maintained in the same fashion as the oil-production records. It is to the
engineer's advantage to have these complete records available.
An example calculation of individual well-production records based on
production test data and tank-battery production records is pre"Sented in
the section on well tests.
Well Tests
There are many types of well tests. Some are performed before the well
is completed or even before a formation is known to be productive; others
are performed during the life of a producing well. From these well tests
many important pieces of information are gathered. Some of the most
important information is whether the formation is or is not productive of
oCl or gas, the capacity or capability of the well to produce, the permeability of the rock adjacent to the hole, and the average permeability of
that part of the formation which constitutes the drainage area. The approximate drainage characteristics of the formation and an estimate of
480
the rate of decline of the individual well are obtained from periodic tests.
Some of these tests aid in the determination of the gas-oil and oil-water
contacts.
Drill-stem Tests. In drilling and completing wells with rotary tools,
the mud-laden fluid normally exerts a hydrostatic pressure in excess of the
formation pressure. The formation fluids are thus sealed off from the well
bore. To determine the producible fluid content of the formations and
estimate the productivity of the formation, it is necessary to relieve the
formation of the hydrostatic pressure of the mud column. This can be
done by completing the well and displacing the mud fluid. Completing
the well is expensive. Therefore, it is desirable to determine the producible
fluid content by some other means. The drill-stem test provides such a
means of evaluation, aS it is in essence a temporary completion.
A packer and valve assembly are lowered on the drill pipe to a position
opposite the formation to be tested. The valve assembly is so constructed
as to prevent fluid entry into the drill pipe during placement. The packer
is set above the formation to be tested and expanded to seat against the
wall of the well bore, thus excluding the mud fluid in the annular space
from the test interval. The valve assembly is then opened so that the formation is subjected to the reduced pressure existing in the drill pipe. The
formation fluids, if mobile, can then flow into the drill pipe and subsequently be recovered by closing the valve assembly and withdrawing the
drill pipe.
Drill-stem tests can be run in either open (uncased) hole or cased hole
and are normally referred to as open-hole and perforation tests, respectively. There are two general open-hole testing programs or methods in
field use:
1. Test possible productive zones as the zones are penetrated by the
drill. This type of program is usually conducted in conjunction with mud
logging and/or coring programs. The hydrocarbon shows are determined
from examination of the mud, cuttings, and the cores.
2. Test possible productive zones after drilling through to greater depths
or to total depth. In this method, side-wall cores, mud logs, and other well
logs aid in selecting test intervals. To test in this fashion, it is necessary to
use straddle packers or to set successive cement plugs to isolate the intervals.
Perforation tests are conducted in cased holes on intervals defined by
perforations in the casing. Casing must be set and cemented prior to testing by this method. While the perforation test yields valuable information
with respect to positive evidence of oil or gas, production of salt water or
no production must be viewed in general as nondefinitive. The possibjlities
of leaks behind the pipe, nonpenetration of bullets, and other similar prob-
481
!ems must be carefully evaluated in interpreting the data. The mechanical

procedure of drill-stem testing is more satisfactory in cased than in open
hole.
A schematic drawing of conventional drill-stem test tools is presented
in Fig. 7-2.
The results of a drill-stem test are interpreted from pressure data observed at the surface chokes during the test, the recovery obtained on
withdrawing the drill pipe or circulating out the entrapped fluid, and the
pressure data recorded by a recording pressure gauge located in the tool.
The pressure may be recorded either at the surface or on a chart within
the instrument in the tool.
The detailed interpretation of a drill-stem test is rather involved. However, the following general rules apply:
1. Formation productive of gas if high surface pressures are observed
and little or no liquid is recovered in drill pipe
2. Formation productive of oil if moderate surface pressures are observed and liquid recovery is oil free of water
3. Formation productive of water if low surface pressures are observed
and water is recovered in drill pipe
Many tests cannot be interpreted by these elementary rules. The more
advanced techniques of interpretation are beyond the scope of this chapter.
Drill-stem tests yield valuable information on gas-oil and oil-water contacts as well as on the potential productivity of the formation. In many
instances a contact will occur within a test interval. A gas-oil contact is
evidenced by a high surface pressure and a small to moderate recovery of
oil. A water-oil contact is evidenced in beds having permeabilities in excess
of about 100 millidarcys by recovery of both oil and water. In beds of
lower permeability, capillary phenomena create transition zones of appreciable extent from which both water and oil may be produced, thus obscuring the location of the contact by a drill-stem test. Further discussion
of the use of drill-stem tests for determining fluid contacts for a field is
presented in a later section of this chapter.
A subsurface pressure record and other pertinent data on a drill-stem

test are presented in Fig. 7-3. The pressure record reflects the operation
of the tool.
In some test tools, an initial "shut-in" or "closed-in" formation pressure
is obtained prior to allowing the formation to produce into the drill pipe.
This initial closed-in pressure is valuable in interpreting test data and is
an aid in estimating original formation fluid pressures.
Production Tests. Routine production tests are made periodically on
oil wells. The tests may be of a few hours' or several days' duration, depending on the well characteristics and the desired results. Most frequently
482
483
the well is tested for 24 hr or less and the data corrected to a 24-hr basis.
The tests are conducted by means of a portable test separator or a test
separator and test tank provided at the tank battery. Oil, water, and gas
production are gauged over the test period. The gas and water production
are used to calculate gas-oil ratios and water-oil ratio or cuts.
Production tests are required by state regulatory bodies as well as for
operational purposes. In Table 7-1 is presented a modified G0-2 form as
required by the Texas Rfillroad Commission's Oil and Gas Division. The
last three columns are added to provide for recording additional pertinent
data.
Closed in
pressure valve
Tester valve
Closed in
pressure valve
By-poss choke
500
Equalizing valve
A"\
~ 1,500
~ 2,000
t 2,500
\
'
3,500
4,000
" "-
3,000
Packer
~J
\/
1,000
Choke,-Lj;;;:;;;Jlj~
c;;l1+-'- Safety joint
""
\
el
c'
1hr
,E
'
I'-. .J
VG
j'I
J
I
1hr
1hr
1hr
Time-
FtG. 7-3. Descriptive data of time tool open, where located, recovery, and pressure.
A, test started; B, reached packer seat; C, packer seated; D, test opened; E, flowing
pressure; F, test closed; G, build-up pressure; H, packer unseated; I, started out of
hole; J, reached surface. Interval tested: 6,356 to 6,380 ft. Time open: 1 hr 20 min.
Time shut: 30 min. Recovery: 62 joints oil, 2 joints oil-cut mud, no water. (Halliburton Oil Well Cementing Company.)
Perforated anchor
Pressure- recordin9 devices
Schematic drawing
nof fo scale
Arrows indicofe visible

fop port of each assembly
FIG. 7-2. Conventional drill-stem test tools. (From Black.2 )
The allowable is the permissible rate of production per producing day.

The allowable is assigned to a particular well and must be produced from
that well unless transfer to another well or wells is permitted by state rules.
A total monthly allowable for a field or well is set by state regulatory
bodies after hearing nominations of purchases of crude oil by major oil
buyers. Allowables are based on a number of factors including the depth
of the well, the ability of the well to produce, gas-oil ratio of the well, and
tield conditions. Most states have tables for determining the allowable
for producing wells. Table 7-2 presents the discovery allowable and 1947
amended schedule for producing wells in the state of Texas. Wells producing at gas-oil ratios in excess of 2,000 scf per bbl are normally penalized.
485
TABLE 7-2
Amended 1947 yardstick
(effective Apr. 1, 1950)
Discovery allowable schedule

(effective Mar. 20, 1950)
>r.I <:O '<ti 0
e<:l<:O~<:O<:O
o.or--:~oo
<;O
co
lQ tC ~
--
----
00000
00000
ooooao
<;O"<t!OOOO
Interval of
depth
Daily well
allowable, bbl
0- 1,000
1,000- 2,000
2,000- 3,000
3,000- 4,000
4,000- 5,000
5,000- 6,000
6,000- 7,000
7,000- 8,000
8,000- 9,000
9,000-10,000
10,000-10,500
10,S00-11,000
11,000-11,500
ll,50(}-12,000
12,000-12,500
12,500-13,000
13,000-13,500
13,500-14,000
14,000-14,500
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
210
225
225
290
330
375
425
480
540
SOURCE:
----- -----
Co:)~
>r.I
<71'?tiCf
NNNNN
~~~Jieti
~"'
0
<s "
Depth
0- 1,000
1,000- 1,500
1,500- 2,000
2,000- 3,000
3,000- 4,000
4,000- 5,000
5,000- 6,000
6,000- 7,000
7,000- 8,000
8,000- 8,500
8,500- 9,000
9,00(}- 9,500
9,500-10,000
10,000-10,500
10,500-11,000
11,000-11,500
11,50(}-12,000
12,000-12,500
12,500-13,000
13,000-13,500
13,500-14,000
14,000-14,500
10
acres
20
acres
40
acres
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
91
103
112
127
152
190
28
37
46
55
57
66
75
64
84
73
82
91
101
113
122
137
162
210
225
255
290
330
375
425
480
540
93
102
111
121
133
142
157
182
230
245
275
310
350
395
445
500
560
Railroad Commission of Texas.
(The allowable is reduced in proportion to gas production in excess of 2,000

cu ft per bbl.)
In Table 7-3 are presented production data for a lease having two tank
batteries. The entries enclosed on the tabulation are from gauged volumes
at the battery corrected for temperature. The remaining quantities are
calculated from well test data and the battery production data as shown in
Example 7-2.
The utilization of test data in computing gas production and the allocation of observed battery oil and water production data to individual wells
are illustrated in Example 7-2.
Individual well oil production was allocated in the example both on the
basis of test rates of production and on the basis of allowable. Water and
gas prcxluctions were computed from average water-oil and gas-oil ratio
data from well tests. The computed water production was used to allocate
TABLE 7-3. PRODUCTION DATA
Previous cumulative production

Lease and battery
Amcot no. 1
Well
No.
1
3
4
5
Amcot no. 2
Oil,
Water,
bbl
bbl
1154,225
36,110
34,153
29,418
28,727
25,817
12,338
1,503
671
1,214
Gas,
Mcf
8,950
I 91,164 =1
16,410
0
2
7
8
9
IO
11,851
19,144
23,703
20,056
Current month production
0
0
0
0
Oil,
Water,
bbl
bbl
92,535
21,810
20,003
17,650
18,098
14,974
1 9,264
1,929
1,871
1,947
1,966
1,551
151,495
44,307
36,738
42,117
14,033
13,400
j 1,022
Gas,
Mel
Oil,
Water,
bbl
bbl
5,730
1,161
1,188
1,178
1,288
915
1163,489
38,039
36,024
31,365
30,603
27,368
13,138 1
1,586
715
1,301
13,393
3,534
3,670
3,718
1,183
1,288
198,186
~
83
44
87
586
1,116
786
1,499
1,792
1,829
Current cumulative production
0
0
0
0
0
17,526
12,637
20,643
25,495
21,885
9,536
Gas,
Mcf
98,265
22,971
21,191
18,828
19,386
15,889
164,888
47,841
40,408
45,835
16,116
14,688
0
0
0
0
0
" Gross volumes measured at battery.
Example 7-2, Calculation of Gas Production and Allocation of Oil, Water, and Gas Production to Individual Wells.
Previoua teat
L<~
Well
battery No.
'"'
Gaaoil
ratio,
cu rt/bbl
Average test data
Current test
FraeWarer- Gas-oil Water- Gas-oil Watertional

T"I
oil
oil
oil
rat.e,
rate
ratio,
ratio,
ratio, cu ft/bbl ratio, euft/hbl ratio, bbVdaY
bbl/bbl
bbl/bbl
bbl/bbl
Allow- Fractional
able,
bbl/day allowable
Production blll!ed on
average test rate
Production baaed on
allowable
Md
Oil,
bbl
543
1,161
1,188
1,l7S
l,288
010
1,1130
1,1130
1,930
1,930
1,li44
741
li,730 11,264
3,534 1,109
3,670
73'
3,718 t.478
1,183 t.848
1,288 1,848
Oil,
bbl
Water,
bbl
1,929
1,871
1,947
1,966
l,lilil
77
G~.
Water,
bbl
Gas,
Md
Blllled on
average test rate
Frac
tional
Correllted
wattt,
bbl
Based on
allowable
Fractional
water
Corrected
water,
bbl
45
- -- - - - --- --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -""'- - - - - - - Am cot

no. 1
Am cot
no. 2
604
3
4
5
6
620
'
8
10'
7
600
630
580
3,000
4,340
2,460
630
698
0.032
0.024
0.040
o.330
0
0
0
600
660
610
680
600
3,333
5,000
2,500
690
710
0.048
0.020
0.042
0.370
0
0
0
602
'"
605
- 65/i
590
3,167
4,670
2,480
660
704
0.040
0.022
0.041
0.350
100
103
104
82
0.2082
0.2020
0.2102
0.2122
0.1674
100
80
o.20830.2083
0.2083
0,2084
0.1667
190
1.0000
480
I.0000 11,264
"
60
40
100
0.15811
0.l120
0.2135
0.2552
0.2604
80
100
100
0.1530 l,!16
0.1053
780
0.2105 1,499
0.2631 1,792
0.2631 1,82!1
384
1.0000
380
1.0000 7,022
102
"
41
80
87
0.1043
0.0669
0.1071
540
1,162 0.10311
1,226 0.0553
1,168 0.1080
1,264
91 I 0.7328
586
0.7317
738
li,731
800
1.0000
3,512
3,451
3,665
1,220
1,301
77
42
79
83
44
83
"
"'
- - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - -
43
0
0
IOO
IOO
82
98
- - - - - - - - - - --
-- -13,393 7,022
--13,H!l
l.0000
800
488
the gauged water production to the wells. The computed gas production
was summed to yield the battery gas production.
The computed water production differed from the gauged production
by about 7 per cent. The computed gas production based on an oil allocation from allowables differed by about 1.5 per cent from that based on an
oil allocation from test rates. Frequently greater discrepancies in computed
gas production may occur. Gas production metered at the battery has
been observed to differ from that computed from production test gas-oil
ratios by as much as 15 per cent. Well test and production records must
be carefully taken and recorded to provide data of sufficient accuracy for
489
G,,. = gradient of heavier fluid, determined from next lower interval, psi/ft
G,. = gradient of lighter fluid determined from upper interval,
psi/ft
/iH = distance between poirits of measurement of P, and P., ft
Because of restrictions in the tubing such as crossover valves and chokes,
it may be impossible to measure the pressure opposite the well perforations.
engineering purposes.
Pressure Tests. Pressures are measured in wells for three primary
purposes. The average reservoir pressure is calculated using bottom-hole

shut-in pressures. Well performance is determined by measuring flowing
and shut-in bottom-hole pressures as functions of time. The position of
the fluid level in a well, needed for equipment design, is determined from
well pressure surveys.
The pressures are measured by inserting a pressure element and recording mechanism in the well. As the pressure bomb descends, the pressure
inside the bomb increases because of the fluid head. The bomb is stopped
at predetermined depths for a short period oftime. The pressure bomb is
removed after reaching final depth, and the recording of the extensions of
the pressure element is converted to units of pressure. The results of such
a well survey, flowing and static, are shown in Fig. 7-4.
It is not possible for the operator to determine a water level in the well
from measurements made at the surface, whereas with some instruments
he can determine the approximate oil level in the well. Actually, it is not
necessary for the operator to locate the oil and water levels mechanically,
as they can be calculated from the data obtained while lowering the pressure bomb in the hole. As gas usually has a gradient of 0.1 psi per ft or
less, oil has a gradient ranging between 0.38 and 0.28 psi per ft, and water
has a gradient ranging between 0.465 and 0.43 psi per ft; it is possible to
select the intervals in which the fluid column changes from gas to oil or oil
to water. Once the interval is selected, the location of the interface can be
calculated by Eq. (7-1).
Pt = pressure at top of interval, psi

P, = pressure at bottom of interval, psi
?.00 o~~-5~0~0,--~1~.o~o~o,--~1~,50~0=---=2~p~o~o~~2c-:,5oo
Pressure, psio
Fie. 7-4. Static and flowing tubing pressure survey.
When the pressure cannot be measured at the perforations, it is necessary
(7-1)
where H, = depth to interface, ft
H, = depth to top of interval in which interface occurs, ft
Wafer
to calculate the pressure from the other measurements. In this calculation

it is assumed that the fluid existing at the last pressure point in the tubing
exists between that point and the perforations. This assumption can easily
be in error in the cases where the last pressure point must be located high
in the tubing string because of obstructions. The pressure_ at the perforation is calculated by Eq. (7-2) (see Example 7-3).
490
Po - Pb-1
P. = Po+ H
H
(H. - Ho)
.
where
b -
(7-2)
b-1
PP = pressure opposite top of perforations, psi

Po = pressure at lowest depth of survey, psi
P0-1 = pressure at next to lowest depth of survey, psi
Ho = depth of lowest measured pressure P., ft
H 0-1 = depth of P0-1, ft
H = depth of perforations, ft
No correction procedure has been described for adjustment of pressure

measurements made in gas wells. The same procedure and equations apply
to gas wells as to oil wells.
Example 7-3. Pressure Adjustments Made from a Well Pressure Survey.
Measured data
If a fluid interface exists between the next to last and the last pressure
point as indicated by the gradient in that interval, the gradient of the
denser fluid is assumed from experience with other wells in the area. This
assumed gradient Gd, is then used in Eq. (7-2) as follows:
P. =Po+ Gd,(H. - Ho)
(7-2a)
In analyzing reservoir performance, it is often necessary to determine

some average pressure for the oil zone, the gas cap, and the water zone.
As the majority of the pressure measurem_ents are made in oil wells, it is
necessary to adjust these measurements to values which would exist at the
pressure datum in the oil zone, at the gas-oil contact, and at the water-oil
contact. In calculating pressures at these three points it is assumed that
the fluid in the reservoir is in a state of static equilibrium. It is also assumed
that a continuous oil column exists from the well perforations to all three
points. The equations for calculating the pressure at the oil datum, usually
the volumetric mid-point of the reservoir, is
Pd = P.
where Pa
PP
+ G,.(Hd -
H.)
491
(7-3)
pressure at datum, psi

pressure at perforations, psi
G,. = oil gradient, psi/ft
Hd = depth to datum, ft
H = depth to perforations, ft
The pressure at the gas-oil contact can be calculated by Eq. (7-3) by

replacing the depth of the datum by the depth of the gas-oil contact. The
same substitution is made to calculate the pressure at the water-oil contact.
Once production begins, a reservoir is never in static equilibrium. For
this reason only the wells which penetrate the gas cap or water zone or are
in close proximity thereto should be used to calculate the pressure at the
gas-oil and water-oil contacts. If wells far removed from the gas cap are
used for calculating- the pressure at the gas cap, transient pressure variations will be introduced which will cause the average gas-cap value to be
in error.
Depth
Pressure
0
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
6,200
800
900
1,000
1,140
1,470
1,800
2,220
2,310
Calculated data
Pressure
difference
Pressure
gradient
100
100
140
330
330
420
450
0.1
0.1
0.14
0.33
0.3~
0.42
0.45
Top of perforations at 6,300 ft

Surface elevation, 200 ft
Gas-oil contact at 6,050 ft subsea or 6,250 ft from surface
Water-oil contact at 6,150 ft subsea or 6,350 ft from surface
Oil-zone datum at 6,125 ft subsea or 6,325 ft from surface
1. Depth of gas-oil interface:
From Eq. (7-1)
H, = H,
= 2,000
2 000
'
(Po - P,) - Gd, /!Jl

Gaz - Gdh
(l,140 - 1,000) - 0.33(1,000)

0.1 - 0.33
+ 140 -
330
-0.23
= 2,863.6 ft
2. Depth of oil-water interface:
'
=
5 000
'
5,000
+
+
(2,220 '- 1,800) - 0.450(1,000)

0.33 - 0.45
420 - 450
0.12
= 5,230.7 ft
.-----------
492
3. Calculation of pressure at perforation:

From Eq. (7-2)
P, = p,
(H
+ HP,-p.._,
H b-1
'
b -
= 2 310
+ 2,310
Q, = rate of production, stock-tank bbl/day

k = effective permeability to oil, darcys
h = sand thickness, ft
p., and Pia = pressures at effective radius of drainage- r., and the
well radius rw, respectively, psi
0
H)
'
- 2,220 (6 300 - 6 200)
6,200 - 6,000
where
493
0 = oil viscosity, centipoises
B = oil formation volume factor at P,

0
= 2,310
90
From the definition of productivity index (PI)
+ 200 (100)
PI _
Q,
=
Q,
=
7.082k,h
- P 8 i - Pi
Pe - Pw
Boo ln (re/rw)
= 2,355 psi
4. Calculation of pressure at gas-oil contact:

From Eq. (7-3)
p GOO = pp
+ G,. (H GOO
H ,) = 2355
+ 0.33 (6,250 -
where shut-in pressure P,, is assumed to be equal to P, and the well pressure flowing P1 and P. are equal by definition.
If In (r,/r.) is assumed to be equal to 7.082, for an r. of 4 in. r, is 386 ft
and for an r w of 6 .in. re is 540 ft. For 20-acre well spacing re is frequently
taken as about 417 ft (half the distance between wells), and for 40-acre
well spacing r, is about 660 ft. Thus for wells of between 20- and 40-acre
6,300)
= 2,338.5 psi
5. Calculation of pressure at oil datum:

Substituting in Eq. (7-3)
p, = 2,355
+ 0.33 (6,325 -
6,300) = 2,355
(7_5)
spacing, evaluated as f1P and Q approach zero:
+ 0.33(25)
(7-6)
= 2,363.2 psi
where B 0 and
o are defined at Pe.

The bottom-hole pressure after the well has been shut in for some extended period of time, 24 to 72 hr, is usually the first value determined in
6. Calculation of pressure at water-oil contact:
Substituting in Eq. (7-3)

Pwoc = 2,355
+ 0.33 (6,350 -
6,300) = 2,355
+ 0.33(50)
performing a productivity test on an oil well. The actual time of
~hut In
will be dependent upon the characteristics of the wells. The well 1s then
opened to some small choke size and pennitted to flow with the. rate of
= 2,371.5 psi
Productivity Tests on Oil Wells. The productivity of an oil well is determined by a series of flow and pressure tests. The static or shut-in
bottom-hole pressure is measured, and the flowing bottom-hole pressure is
measured for various rates of oil production. The pressure difference is

plotted as a function of the flow rate in stock-tank barrels per day. The
slope of the resulting curve is the productivity index with units of barrels
per day per pound per square inch.
In theory this quantity can also be equated to the permeability and
thickness of the producing formation. To eliminate as many of the variables as possible it is suggested that the equation be evaluated in the limit
as t;,p and Q both approach zero, so that the slope of the curve as it approaches the ordinate would be used for the evaluation of the permeability
and thickness of the formation. From Eq. (2-34):
Q
0
= 7.082k,h(P, - P .)
Boo In r.,/rw
(7-4)
production being recorded as a function of time. When the rate is stabi-
lized then the bottom-hole pressure at that time is recorded. In order to

obtain these bottom-hole pressures, a pressure bomb is usually run into the
hole and left there during all the production tests. Once the stabilized rate
has been obtained and the time recorded, so that a correlation can be made
with the bottom-hole pressure recorded by the bomb, the choke is opened
to increase the flow rate. When the flow rate once again ha...;; become stabilized, the pressure and time are again noted.
.
.
This procedure is followed for three or four different production rates.
The materials are then reduced to a graphical form similar to that shown
in Fig. 7-5. Here it is noted that the bottom-hole pressure continues to
decline until it approximately stabilizes for some given rate, and then when
t-he production rate is changed, it rapidly declines again and begins to stabilize at the new rate. The values read are at the same time. Actually
many values can be calculated from these decline curves where both the
rate and pressure are recorded as functions of time.
---------------
494
495
The productivity test data are correlated and the selected rates and their
correspqnding tlP's are plotted as shown in Fig. 7-5. This curve is extrapolated to the zero ordinate, where the slope of the curve is the reciprocal
of the productivity index. This is the value used to calculate the permeability and net thickness of the formation. It must be pointed out here
that the calculated permeabilities apply to the immediate volume around
the well bore. The calculated values are sensitive to \Yell completion and
This decline, unless remedial operations have affected the immediate vicinity of the well bore, indicates the declining production capabilities of
the individual well. The decline is caused by several factors, one of which
is the increased viscosity of the oil with decreased reservoir pressure. An-.
other factor causing a decline is the- decreased oil saturation in the vicinity
of the well bore which in turn decreases the oil productivity of the formation. A PI decline curve can be extrapolated to jndicate the productive
life of a well and the reservoir pressure at which it will no longer be economical to operate (Fig. 7-6).
These curves can also be used in conjunction with other data to indicate
the probable reservoir pressure at which this well will no longer be capable
of flowing its prorated allowable; hence, at this time artificial lifting equipment will have to be installed .
Pressure
i
~
1,750
f
I
"':0
I
Jj
1,500
i:8
,._
',..,
I '-
',
1300
f ' .......... ___ j",.__Rote

,,_
E
I
200 .!?
Complete wafer drive
<.;.
_____ J I
100
Time, hr
Rafe
300
s"'
~
Time-
11
~:
200
7-6. PI decline of oil well under

"arious drive mechanisms.
'FIG.
/--J'
<;
i
a:
Slope
I
Time in hours
7-7. Theoretical pressure drawdown and build-up performance.

FIG.
100
I
Flow rote, bbl/day
F1G. 7-5. Productivity measurement of an oil well. (After Evinger antl Mu.~kat.3 )
damage or improvement brought about at the well bore during drilling

and completion operations. If the formation is plugged, then low values
of permeability will be indicated. If the formation has been fractured or
acidized, then high values of permeability will be calculated.
Productivity tests can be run at various states of depletion of the reservoir, and the productivity at some given shut-in bottom-hole pressure will
be obtained. If these productivities are plotted as a function of shut-in reservoir pressure, the decline in productive capacity will be noted (Fig. 7-6).
Build-up and Draw-down Tests on Oil Wells. In the field of reservoir

engineering certain equations have been adapted from electrical and heat
How dealing with unsteady-state flow systems. Through the years various
authors have adapted these equations to special applications in reservoir
engineering. One of these applications is in the evaluation of the drainage
volume of a well by what is normally referred to as a build-up or drawdo.wn test. A build-up curve is nothing more than shutting a well in and
measuring the bottom-hole pressure as a function of time (Fig. 7-7).
Through the use of transient pressure equations, the build-up data, and
the performance history of the well, it is possible to calculate the permeability of the formation and obtain some idea as to the fOrmation damage
by completion practices. Such analyses are beyond the scope of this chapter.
A build-up test can be run prior to a productivity test simply by running
the bomb in the well before it is shut in to allow for the 24- to 72-hr pres-
496
497
sure build-up required for establishing the shut-in pressure for the productivity test. From these data, the shut-in pressure can be calculated as if
reciprocal of the slope of the curve as plotted in Fig. 7-8, and C is the intercept of that curve when the difference in the squares of the pressures i
equal t;; l. The quantity C can be related to the permeability and net
thickness of the productive section. These tests are used to classify gas
wells. They can be extrapolated and used to estimate the ability of the
well to produce against any given surface pressure. They can also be used
to estimate the rate of decline of the well with declining reservoir pressure.
A value determined from these curves known as the absolute open flow
(the flow capacity when atmospheric pressure is imposed at the face of the
formation) is used in allocating allowables among wells within a field by
most state regulatory bodies. As an example in a particular field, the rules
the well were left shut in for infinite time, and under certain conditions the
drainage area of a formation can.also be determined.

The procedure for running a build-up test is relatively simple. First,
the production of a well prior to starting the test must be determined.
Second, it is best to flow the well at some given rate for a period of 5 to
IO days prior to shutting in so as to establish a fairly stable pressure distribution within the drainage area of the well. The well is shut in, and the
bottom-hole pressure recorded as a function of time. Knowing the past
production, the elapsed time, the average flow rate during the time prior
to shut-in, the time of shut-in, and the pressure history during the shut-in
period, it is possible to calculate the permeability of the formation, the
damage or improvement around the well bore denoted as "skin effect,"
and the actual shut-in bottom-hole pressure. Similar quantities can be
10,000,000
calculated by starting from shut-in conditions and measuring the pressure
decline with production.

There are certain limitations to this procedure which must be understood before its application and interpretation. The calculating procedure
assumes that only one fluid is flowing and that for all practical purposes,
only one fluid occupies the pore space in the reservoir. Hence, if excessive
volumes of free ga..~ are involved, errors will be obtained in the results. If
both water and oil are flowing, then different results will be obtained.
In gas wells, the spread of measured pressures is limited, so that gas can
essentially be treated as a slightly compressible fluid. If large pressure
drops occur, the method cannot be applied. Primarily, its greatest value
is in the initial testing of wells and their classification. This type of data
can be collected on a drill-stem test and interpreted to give the relative
magnitudes of formation permeability and possibly the drainage area of
the well.
Back-pressure Tests on Gas Wells. A back-pressure test on a gas well
measures the bottom-hole pressures of the well at shut-in conditions and
for three different stabilized flow rates. The recommended procedure is to
use four flow rates, but a minimum of three is required.
Figure 7-8 illustrates the results of plotting the difference in the squares
of the pressures against the measured flow rates. Normally this set of data
should form a straight line when plotted on logarithmic paper. The intercept of this straight line is a measure of the productivity or producing
capacity of the formation. The equation which defines this line is given
as Eq. (7-7) where
(7.!7)
Q ~ C(P.' - P/)
the quantity P1 refers to the bottom-hole pressure corresponding to flow
rate Q, P, refers to the shut-in bottom-hole pressure, the quantity n is the
I/
1/1
'.:J
1,000,GOO
,
~
t---0 = C (tiP 2 )n
/
100,000
100
10,000
1,000
100,000
0, Mcf
FIG. 7-8. Characterization of gas well's productivity by means of a back-pressure test.
may specify that no well can produce at a rate greater than one-fourth of
its absolute open flow. Thus a limiting rate is applied to all wells within a
field. If its prorated share of the production of the field exceeds its ability
to produce, then it is limited to the minimum quantity.
AVERAGE FLUID PROPERTIES
In Chaps. 4 and 5 of this volume properties of hydrocarbon fluids were

discussed. Fluid samples and analyses are relatively expensive; therefore,
the data are taken sparingly as compared with other tests such as production and pressure tests. However, multiple fluid samples and analyses are
desirable if only to confirm the accuracy of sampling and analysis. The
498
GAS
Field A
problem then arises as to how to utilize the additional data obtained by

multiple sampling and analysis. It is the purpose of this section to present
methods of developing average properties for use in calculations.
Reservoir Fluids Existing in the Gaseous State
Gas reservoirs and the gas caps of associated oil and gas reservoirs contain mixtures of hydrocarbons which exist in the gaseous state at reservoir
conditions. The most common test performed on such reservoir fluids is a
fractional analysis of a recombined sample. The analysis is usually reported in mole per cent or mole fraction by components through hexanes
or heptanes plus and including impurities such as carbon diC?xide, hydrogen sulfide, and nitrogen. The hydrocarbon components heavier than ethane are considered to be condensable; therefore, the liquid content of the
gas is calculated in terms of gallons of condensable liquid per thousand
standard cubic feet of the gas (see Example 7-4). Physical properties of
the reservoir fluids are usually calculated from the fractional analyses.
Example 7-4.
Calculation of Liquid Content of a Natural Gas.
Component
Methane
Ethane
Propane
i-Butane
n-Butane
i-Penta.ne
n-Pentane
Hexane
Heptanes plus
Mole
Equivalent liquidt
%*
volume, gal/Mel
94.35
3.80
0.29
0.26
0.34
0.23
0.09
0.18
0.46
Liquid
content,
gal/Mcf
TABLE 7-4. HIGH-PRESSUUE
Sand sequence
Component, mole %
Methane
Ethan
Propane
iButane
nButa.ne
iPentane
n--Pentane
H~m
Heptanes plus
Tot.l
0.0794
0.0847
0.1068
0.0837
0.0325
0.0737
0.2190
*Analysis of sand 2, Table 7-4.

t From Table 4-4.
t 0.3155 M ~ 0.3155(120) ~ 47.60
0.7954
where .i\f = molecular weight = 120
S = specific gravity = 0. 7954
----
In Table 7-4 are reported gas analyses obtained from a field containing
a number of separate gas sands. Eleven sands are identified in numerical
order of increasing depth. Single gas samples were obtained from eight of
the sands. Multiple samples were obtained from three of the sands. For
each sand having more than one analysis an arithmetic average analysis
""'"'"
i-Butane
n--Butane
i-Penta.ne
n--Pent:e.ne
Hexa.nes
Heptanes plus
Total:
Propane plus
i Butane plus
i-Pentane plu:i
94.35
91.43
3.llO
1.08
0.38
0.32
0.29
4.38
1.66
0.50
0.54
0.20
0.16
0.33
0.80
{o.as
0.47
0.44
026
0.34
023
0.09
0.18
0.46
SAMPLE ANALYSES"
92.38
3.29
1.69
91.66
0.70
{ 1.44
100.00
100.00
0.469
0.176
0.126
0.163
0.246
0.377
0.4774
0.1498
0.1667
0.1058
0.50
0.44
0.50
0.50
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
0.296
0.124
0.101
{ 0.138
0.193
0.080
0.085
0.107
0.4-054
0.1631
0.1699
0.0730
0.0678
0.1354
0.464
0.200
....
0.163
0.138
0.181
0.032
0.074
0.219
.,906
0205
0.330
1.052
0.756
0.531
0.681
0.601
0.409
1.4452
0.9898
0.6568
1.481
1.017
0.716
1.557
1.088
0.786
Perforations
4;3.54,545
4,7584,764
4,8244,842
5.0505,058
5~36-
5,246
Date sampled
8-15-40
6-2-45
4-9-49
8-7-40
7-27-40
"-"'
Ttal
Gpm:
Propane
i-Butane
n-Buta.ne
i-Pentane
nPentane
Hexa.nes
Heptanes plus
Tot:e.l:
Propane plus
i-Butane pllll!
iPent:e.ne plus
Well number
Perl<ll'ations
Dat.e sampled
4.48
1.74
0.4'
0.53
Q.29
0.20
90.96
4.53
91JJO
4.35
1.74
1.76
0.34
0.58
0.30
0.43
0.54
.,1
O~l
0.21
0.40
0.94
0.35
1.05
0.477
o.uo
0.182
0.109
0.076
0.163
0.505
0.4829
0.0722
{o.6764
0.1401
0.1698
0.1131
0.0758
0.1434
0.5119
--- --------------- ------
i-But:e.ne
11-Butane
i-Pentane
n--Pentane
He= es
Heptanes plus
--- - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - --100.00

100.00
Ethane
,.,,
3.84
1.71
0.54
0.40
0.45
0.60
O.llO
Well number
Component. mole %:
Methane
- - - --- - - - ------ - - -
93.57
3.36
Gpm:
Sa.Dd sequence
27.38
32.57
31.41
36.41
36.07
40.94
47.60t
499
91.12
91.06
90.87
4'0
3.94
1.72
0.42
0.58
0.>2
0.72
1.04
4.60
1.74
0.44
. .1
{ 0.49
{ 1.40
1.82
0.40
0.65
0.23
0.17
1.37
.,,
.,,
90.60
90.78
4.35
2.01
1.80
0.47
0.74
0.54
023
0.24
0.25
1.04
0.28
023
0.37
1.18
1.6483
1.1709
0.8544
1.622
1.14S
0.853
1.6370
1.1541
~8442
5,382-
5,343-
5~95
MB2M95
5.355
7-30-48
HQ-48
10-2-48
90.83
4.29
1.84
90.53
4.58
1.94
0.45
0.63
Q48
0.43
0.60
038
1.49
026
1.15
0.23
90.97
4.15
1.72
0.34
0.57
{ 0.45
0.60
1.20
----- - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - -100.00

100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
0.4766
0.1440
0.1611
0.472
0.137
0.182
0.188
0 295
0.491
0.499
0.130
0.551
0.169
0.233
0.084
0.087
0.102
0.510
0.4938
0.1531
0.1698
0.1022
0.0830
0.1518
0.5040
0204
0.084
0.061
0.656
OB344
1.765
1.293
0.974
1.634
1.135
0.801
1.736
1.185
0.783
11
13
{ 0.1787
{"""
1.6161
1.1395
0.5954
0.7003
1.7491
1.7211
1.2171
0.8726
0.532
0.140
0.189
0.102
0.084
0.107
0.472
0.111
0.180
0.163
0.246
0.590
0.566
1.744
I.212
1.738
0.975
- - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - -
14
1.2'53
U66
16
23
19
'"
8
5,6905,700
5,7805,790
5.9805'88
12-3-48
7-2-40
6-2Q-40
0.9324
5,560
5,6265,632
5.7605,772
5,6545,661
5,6905,700
7-15-40
>-18-45
7-19-4.5
10-13-48
6-8-45
5.5'0-
0.1473
0.1972
0.1723
500
PETROLEUM RESERVOIB EN-G1Nb1ERI.NU

'fABLE
Sand Sllqnenee
-Component. mole %;
Carbon diollide
Methane
,,,.,....,
Eth~
i-But.ane
n-Butane
i-Penta.ne
n-Pen~
"'~ plus
Heptanes
To"1
samples. Seldom is it necessary to average the results from such tests, as

more than one such analysis on a fluid is rare. Arithmetic averages of
corresponding results are usually satisfactory if multiple tests are available.
7-4. .HIGH-PRESSURE GAS SAMPLE ANALYSEs-
Field A (Continued)
9
92.92
2.73
1.44
0.3'
10
92.35
3.03
11
....
90.69
1.74
0.41
1.58
1.60
o.so
0.48
0.44
{ 0.38
0.40
0.47
122
"'
O>l
1.44
0.45
1.56
10000
100.00
100.IJO
0>95
0.433
0.127
0.157
0.145
0.127
0.664
0.46
11
91.71
3.29
a39
--
11
I 11
- ----- - - - - -
0.49
0.29
0.23
11
90.SS
4.40
0.56
021
90.27
4.44
1.8'1
0.36
0.54
0.35
0.16
O>O
1.7.4
0.40
0.49
90~1
3.8'
11
0.10
90.77
4.97
1.72
1.73
0-38
0.52
0.22
0.18
0.41
O.Sl
0.46
1.38
0,4
1.71
0.46
1.51
0.15
us
0.34
1.61
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
0.439
0.4774
0.157
0.139
0.1336
0.5130
0.1173
0.1698
0.1277
0.472
0.124
0.163
0.4757
0.1058
0.477
0.130
0.176
0.077
0.0830
0."'8
0.42
- - - - - - - - - ---- - -- - - ---
Gpm:
"""""
i-Butane
n-Butane
i-Pent.ane
n-Penta.ne
H-~
Heptanes plus
Total:
Propane plus
i- Butane pb111
i- Penta.De plwi
0.117
0.145
{0.138
0.152
0.008
0.170
0.1541
0.0722
0.1885
0.8375
1.555
1.160
0.898
1.653
1220
0.936
0.1324
0.1604
0.1677
0.185
0.1721
0.098
0.780
0.7624
0.945
1.8884
1.961
1.484
2.0260
1.987
1.9465
1.5130
1.178
1.2259
1.515
1.228
1.4708
1.1780
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - 1.870
1-431
1.135
1.4110
1.1233
Well number
21
28
32
35
f'erforatiom
6,1106,120
6.2706.275
6,5006.524
6,5936,598
6,8<IO6,870
6,9186.923
&-15-40
5-29-40
3-25-49
6-7-45
10-20-48
7-16-45
ate sampled
0.080
0.065
0.061
1.022
501
0.1409
0.8694
"Where required, data. in eomputation were taken from Natural Gasoline &soeiation of Ameriea. Standard Table o
Physical Constants for ~he Paraffin Hydrocarbons, NGAA Standard 2145, adopted 1942, revised 194S.
by components was calculated. The average analyses were used to develop

the physical properties, such as volume factors, for the reservoir fluids in
these reservoirs.
r From inspection of Table 7-4 it may be noted that the percentage of
heavier components increase in the deeper sands. This is most evident in
the gpM data, where the propanes-plus content increases from 1.052 in
sand 1 to 1.9465 in sand 11. This is a common phenomenon in multisand
fields where the sands are of the same geologic age. The variation is usually
of sufficient uniformity that plots of composition as a function of depth can
be used to verify the accuracy of single samples from a sand. Also, the
composition of gas in a sand from which a sample is not available can be
estimated from correlations of composition with depth.
More elaborate laboratory tests of gas-phase reservoir fluids can be partially verified by comparing the composition of the fluid tested with other
samples on which only fractional analyses were obtained. Depletion and
pr~ssure-volume tests are frequently performed on condensate gases. As
these tests are usually performed on recombined samples, the compositions
can be closely controlled to reflect the average values obtained from other
Reservoir Fluids Existing in the Liquid State

Physical properties of hydrocarbon mixtures which exist in the liquid
state at initial reservoir conditions are determined from PVT tests of samples of the reservoir fluids. As discussed in Chap. 5 these PVT tests consist of a group of tests including pressure-volume- relations at reservoir
temperature, a differential liberation test at reservoir temperature, separator tests from the bubble-point conditions to various surface separator
conditions, oil-viscosity measurements at reservoir temperature, and other
related measurements. Although fractional analysis of the bubble-point
fluid is frequently reported in connection with such tests, the analysis is
seldom used to compute physical property data. Confirmation of sampling
and analysis requires consideration of the various physical property measurements from two or more samples. In many instances the samples will
differ substantially in bubble-point pressure and in composition, but the
physical properties may check when compared on a proper basis.
Data from a PVT analysis of BHS-46C were discussed in Chap. 5. In
Tables 7-5 and 7-6 are presented data from PVT tests of BHS-47 and
BHT 1-155a, respectively. The three tests were conducted on samples
taken from the same oil reservoir at different times during the early producing life of the reservoir. BHS-46C and BHS-47 were recombined samples, while BHT 1-155a was a bottom-hole sample. The bubble-point pressures of the samples ranged from 3,599 to 4,451 psia. The reservoir-fluid
compositions were reported on BHS-46C and BHS-47. The concentration
of methane for BHS-47 was 52.5 mole %, while that for BHS-46C was
49.65. BHS-47 also had the higher bubble-point pressure, 4,451 psia, compared with 4,228 psia for BHS-46C. It is evident that further comparisons
must be made to define the physical properties.
Volume measurements in PVT tests are commonly reported as relative
volume referred to either the volume at the bubble point or the volume at
some specified residual condition. The residual condition can be chosen
from differential liberation or separator tests. In the samples of Tables 5-4,
7-5, and 7-6, the relative total volume, relative oil volume, and the gas
liberated are referred to a barrel of saturated oil at the sample bubble
point. The data are presented graphically in Figs, 7-9 and 7-10, The
curves do not coincide but do exhibit parallel trends, indicating that the
data may become coincident on adjustment of the reference volume.
The relative total volume can be expressed in terms of the Y function,
a dimensionless compressibility function. The data from the three samples
TAel,E 7-5. FLUID-ANALYSIS REPORT ON RECOMBINED SAMPLE llHS-47 4
Reservoir temperature 227F'

Fl!lllb. liberation
(I}
Pressure,
paia
(2)
(3)
Pb -P,
psi
Relative
total
volume
V1/Yb
----- ---4,813
4,713
4,613
4,513
4,461
4,413
4,343
4,273
4,198
4,148
4,075
3,988
3,693
3,863
3,768
3,673
3,538
3,293
3,088
3,008
2,773
2,638
2,423
2,193
2,163
1,889
1,674
1,414
1,204
1,234
1,204
1,030
870
816
755
670
600
415
"'
38
IOS
178
253
303
376
77&
913
1,158
l,363
1,443
1,678
1,813
2,028
2,258
2,288
2,502
2,777
3,037
3,247
3,217
3,247
3,421
3,681
3,636
3,696
3,781
3,851
4,036
4,236
(6)
.!'!
(6)
Pb- P
y,..
v.
P!(V1/V6)
0.9934
0.99113
0.9972
0.9992
1,0000
l.0027
1.0076
I.0124
l.0183
1,0221
1.0270
0.0027
0.0076
0,0124
0.0183
0.0221
0.0270
3.111069
3.31693
3.36912
3.29341
3.30533
3.41818
1.0378
1.0476
1.0675
1,0673
0.0378
0.0476
0.0575
0.0673
3.25768
3.19774
3.15724
3.14737
1.1167
0.1167
3.01334
463
488
688
683
(4)
1.1663
1.2164
0.1663
0.2\64
2.88467
2.79634
1.3166
0.3ta6
2.64372
1.4170
1.5631
1.7144
1.9669
0.4170
0.5631
0.7144
0.0669
2.53667
2.408157
2.32208
2.22!02
2,2703
2.6245
3.0802
1.2703
1.6245
2.0802
2.12305
2.04483
1.9787
3.5369
3.9919
4.4478
2.5359
2.9919
3.4778
1.93042
1.88619
1.86157
I)
Relative
oil
volumea
V/Vb
(8)
(7)
V~l-I.
v,
0.06180
(JO)
Gas-expansion
factor ~. scf
/cu ft at P compressibility
and 227F
factor Z
Oil
density,
gm/cc
0.6111
0.618
0.617
0.616
0.616
1.0000
0.9382
(9)
""
(11)
(12)
o..
Rclativo
{13)
gravity
volume
,...
Gas liberated,
scf/bbl
0.922
0.0972
121.S
saturated oil
- - - - - - ------- ------ - - - - -----
0.634
224.1
0.920
0.89115
0.10860
0.650
204.4
0.894
0.917
0.0854
219.8
0.8602
0.14980
0.666
187.2
0.852
0.901
0.079
303,6
0.8147
0.18530
0.680
164.9
0.880
0.896
0.0876
379.8
0.7834
0.21660
0.693
131.3
0.862
0.890
0.0936
448.8
0.7600
0.24040
0.708
97.2
0.899
0.894
0.1324
1521.1
0.7224
0.27700
0.721
69.0
0.021
0.911
0.11599
683,0
0.6974
0.30260
0.734
44.8
0.934
0.955
0.2151
037,1
0.6698
0.6516
0.33020
0.34840
0.749
0.768
22.0
10.9
0.965
1.000
1.067
1.279
0.4446
0.5377
692.0
725.0
TABI,1'J 7-5 (Continued)
Separator tests
(14)
Separator
prea~ure,
ps1g
{lli)
Se11arator
gas-oil ratio,
cu It/bbl
0
15
30
50
1394
1331
1209
1253
1211
1172
75
JOO
Oil volume at
/~reESurc
(16)
Shrinkage faetor,
bbl STO/bbl
saturated oil
0.661
0.077
0.590
0.590
0.597
0.600
P per volume of saturated oil.
Compressibility rfi reservoir ftuid = 18.02 X 10-t 1/pai at

4,613 psi, 2241''
Mol wt Cr+= 218
Density Ci+ = 0.8487 gm/cc at 60F
(17)
Separntor
,
gravity
..
(18)
Tank oil
gravity,
0
API
0.84-4
0.819
0.790
0.773
0.756
36.85
37.68
38.14
38.53
38.72
38.90
0.145
(19)
Component
"'
co,
c,
c.
c,
iC,
.c.
iCs
,c,
c.
c,
b Gas volume liberated at pre&11ure P1 in dropping the J ressure from l'; - 1 to P;per volume of saturaWd oil.
Fluid compooitlon, mole
(20)
(21)
(22)
Separator
Separator
oil
Reservoir
fluid
'"
0.28
1.82
78.33
8.86
6.86
1.14
1.65
0.42
033
0.31
2.21
J.81i
4.66
I.38
4.59
2.31
2.27
6.11
74.62
0.19
1.20
52.60
6.48
6.11
1.22
2.65
1.06
"
2.28
25.32
Standard cubic feet of ga.a per barrel of stock lank oil.
Field lest condilfona:

Separator gas-oil ratio= 1,198:1
Separator prellSure = 88 psig
Scpal'ator temperature = 78F
Tank gas-oil ratio= 41 cu ft/bbl
Tank shrinkage % = 2.56
TABLE 7-6. FLUID ANALYSIS OF BoTrOM-HOLE SAMPLE BHT l-155a 4
Reservoir Temperature 226F

Flash liberation
(I)
(2)
Pressure, psig
4,1100
4,300
4,100
3,9110
3,700
3,584
3,566
3,630
3,511
3,481
3,450
3,424
3,3117
3,100
3,000
2,1183
2,001
2,683
2,485
2,400
2,280
2,121
2,008
l,{111
1,700
1,682
1,517
1,607
1,333
1,135
1,002
1,000
830
660
497
"'
'"
"'
Pb - P, psi
0
18
"
73
103
134
160
187
484
'"
601
683
''
1,090
1,184
1,304
l,463
1,576
1,673
1,884
1,902
2,067
2,077
2,251
2,300
2,582
2,584
2,764
2,934
3,087
3,166
3,288
3,336
3,584
(4)
(3)
Relative
total volume
Yi/Vb
Ii
v. -
(6)
Relative
oil volume
(6)
Y= _f1.=. .f_
P((V1/Vb) - I]
0.9848
0,9881
0.9914
0.00110
0.9980
1.0000
1.0019
1.0046
1.0074
1.0101
1.0127
1.0155
1.0182
1.0&!0
O.OOlll
0.0046
0.0074
0.0101
0.0127
0.0155
0.0182
0.0510
2.64554
2.75256
2.70774
2.91705
3.04507
3.00162
3.01134
3.04661
1.0787
1.1136
1.1561
0.0787
0.1136
0.1561
2.07617
2.03971
2.81614
1.2058
1.2559
0.2058
0.2559
2.76089
2.67663
1.3350
0.3350
2.69295
1.4507
0.4607
2.48680
1.6668
1.7123
1.9457
0.5668
0.7123
0.9457
2.40764
2.34435
2.20586
2.5308
3.1051
1.5308
2.1051
2.12906
2.09587
4.5720
6.6267
3.5720
5.6267
1.99444
1.871129
(7)
V/Ybo
Oil viscosity, eP
(8)
(9)
Af.., 1-.r_
Gaa in solution,
cu ft/bbl
saturated oi
v,
0,31
0.30
1.0000
''
O.OliliO
476
114
0.0020
'"
193
0.1290
313
277
0.841
0.1690
"'
"'
0.810
0.1900
"'
"'
0.2240
103
487
0.2410
0.3120
64
'"''
0.36
0.945
0.908
0.44
0.871
0.56
0.71
0.776
0.700
0.688
at 60F = 0.631
TABLE
(10)
Sepll!'at-Or
pressure,
paig
(11)
(12)
Separator
11as"il ratio,
cu ft/bblb
Stock-tank
gas-oil ratio,
cu rt/bb
1,093
10
'"''"'
7
21
Oil volume at pressure P per volume of tmlurated oil.

b Standard cubic feet of gas per barrel of stock-tank oll.
(13)
Stock-tank
gravity,
0
API
36.3
37.1
37.6
7-6 (Continued)
Separator- test.a
30
Gas liberated,
acf/bbl
i;aturated oil
Analyaea of separator gaa 0, psi

(14)
Sbri!lk~e
factor
bbl s 0/bbl
tmturaWI oil
0.546
0.619
0.636
(15)
Formation
volume
factor
1.835
1.616
1.676
{16)
Components
Mole%
Oaa gravity
0.853
c.
c.
c.
iC.
83.31
5.46
4.86
1.16
2.04
1.05
c.
c,.
0.64
0.68
iC'
,c,
Reservoir oil compreiisibility - 16.59 X IO-t l/psi
Oil density at Pb - 0.680 gm/co
Bubble point "" 3,584 paig at 226F
,c.
''
\ii0.
\''\
'1
~Relative
\~
Q,\,
....
--~---BHS-47
,_
-,
are plotted in Fig. 7-11. The data once again are essentially parallel but
not coincident. The data of BHS-46C and BHS-47 are considered to be
sufficiently in agreement that the data can be averaged.
As the Y function is essentially linear with pressure, the data can be
fitted by a straight line. The points indicated as omitted were in the proximity of the sample bubble points-a region in which the data are frequently unreliable. Two procedures can be used to determine the average
line passing through the data points of both BHS-46C and BHS-47. The
first procedure consists of fitting straight lines to each set of data and then
............ ~...:::;..,_
averaging the coefficients. The second procedure is to fit a straight line to
""'-=--:--&-
--o--BHS 1-15511
total volume
---o---BHS-46C
~
~.,..-.
-- --
===
the data points of the samples considered together.
~.!'::~... I.._
-~"tr.O==:.
---."":.
~~
,n'.""-"!~ ill.~-~
--
4. 0
'Relative oil volume

500
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
BHS-46C Y=i.6703
3,000
3,500
4,000
3.0 ~ Average curve for

BHS-46C and BHS-47
y ~ 1.6r3 + 0.000419\
Fro. 7-9. Pressure-volume relations of crude oils, field B. (Courtesy of Shell Oil
2.0
,~
...gt
,,.sf._
'
~_;;;:-JI
~~:.
l~:::( ~;r: j:
\'~ ,} )~i
,d~--
\_\_
_..
Enclosed points omitted
;-;--t;-
..
in calculating straight-
line equations
BHS-47 Y =1.61955
~~~
o . ........
0.000418P
o BHS l-!55A
t:. BHS-47
oBHS-46C
"
;;,
._ <~
'
:;o;;;---
a ,.:;1>-
Company.')
600
+ 0.00042
5,000
Pressure, psia
507
500
1.0
.: 400
400
soo 1,200 1,Goo 2,000 2,400 2,soo 3,200 3,Goo 4,ooo 4,400 4,800
Pressure, psio
Fro. 7-11. Correlation of Y function for three reservoir-fluid analyses, field B.
::::
~
..;
The method of averages is used in Example 7-5 to fit lines to both the
individual sample data and the combined data. The method of averages
300
.l"
0
consists of determining the average coordinates of two groups of the data

and using these average coordinates to determine the slope and the inter-
" 200
cept of the line. The groups should be essentially of equal size.
"'
In general terms to fit an equation of the form
100
Y
00
=a+ bP
k
1,000
2,000
3,000
Pressure, psio
Fro. 7-10. Gas liberated by differential liberation, field B. (Courtesy of Shell Oil
Company.)
506
let
y 1 --
Y;
i=l
(7-8)
508
PETROLE'GM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
509
Y=a+bP
Y;
(7-8)
Y'2 = j=k+l
n-k
b=
where
where Y'1 and P1 are the average coordinates of group I, which contains k
pairs of data points Y; and P,-, and Y2 and P2 are the average coordinates
of group II, which contains n - k pairs of data points Y; and P;. Then
Example 7-6. Determining Equation of Average Y Function.

1. Fitting equations to individual sample data:
BHS-46C
4,120
4,060
3,998
3,885
3,780
3,590
3,215
2,930
2,415
BHS-47
31,993
28.4767
Yi = 3.1641
1,938
1,578
1,380
1,200
975
825
715
630
570
2.4839
2.3259
2.2444
2.1635
2.0709
2.0062
1.9644
1.9383
1.8921
II
P,.
9,811
= 1,090
Pressure P,
19.0896
Y, - 2.1210
psia.
4,148
4,075
3,963
3,863
3,768
3,673
3,293
3,008
2,773
2,423
3.4043
3.3373
3.3446
3.2943
3.2649
3.2021
3.0355
2.9068
2.6869
P, - 3555
Slope
b - 3.0821 - 2.1313
- 3,499 - 1,228
= 0.000418
= 0.00042
and
a = Y, - bP1
(7-9)
The conventions on signs are properly considered if group I is assigned to
the data having the higher values of the abscissa.
a= Y, - bP,
For BHS-47
Slope b - 3.1641 - 2.1210

- 3,555 - 1,090
p, - P,
Pressure P,
psia
and
For BHS-46C
b = Y, - '!',
Group
Y, - y,
P, - P,
34,987
= 3499
Pi
2,163
1,899
1,674
1,414
1,204
1,030
870
755
670
600
12,279
P2 = 1,228
3.3053
3.4182
3.2577
3.1974
3.1572
3.1474
3.0133
2.8847
2.7963
2.6437
30.8213
= 3.0821
Y1
2.5367
2.4086
2.3221
2.2210
2.1231
2.0448
1.9787
1.9304
1.8862
1.8616
21.3131
Y, - 2.1313
a= 3.1641
a= 3.0821
- 0.00042 (3,555)
- 0.000418 (3,499)
= 1.6710
= 1.6196
Y
=
1.6196 + 0.000418P
Y = 1.6710 + 0.00042P
2. Average coefficients from coefficients of equations for the individual
samples:
b
= 0.00042 ~ 0.000418 = 0.000419
= 1.6710 + 1.6196 = 1.6453

2
Therefore the equation for average properties is

Y = 1.6453 + 0.000419P
3. Average coefficients from combined data:
Group I (combined)
p 1 = 31,993 + 34,987 = 66,980 = 3 525

9
+ 10
19
y 1 = 28.4767 + 30.8213 = 59.2980 = 3.1209

9 + 10
19
Group II (combined)
.,., - 9,811 + 12,279 = 22,090 = 1163
,, 9 + 10
19
'
y2 =
19.0896 + 21.3131
9+10
= 40.4027 = 2.1264
19
Thus
- y, - y, -
b - p1
a
p, -
3.1209 - 2.1264 = 9,945 = 0 000421

3,525 - 1,163
2,362
.
= Y, - bP, = 3.1209 - 0.000421(3,525) = 1.6369
therefore
Y = 1.6369 + 0.000421P
510
The equations developed by either procedure used in Example 7-5 are

satisfactory representations of the data. The choice of procedure depend
on whether it is desired to place equal weight on each data point or on each
sample. The procedure of averaging coefficients places equal weight on
the sample.
The method of least squares or a simple balancing of points visually in
drawing an average line on the graph paper can also be used in fitting average lines to an array of data.
The relative oil-volume difference, or .6. V function, can be used to aver-
Example 7-6.
Group
Pressure
'
""
1/~
Pressure
~v
log
~P.
log
psia
~v
2.6128
2.9128
3.0858
3.2089
3.3049
8.7210-10
8.9777-10
9.1109-10
9.2079-10
9.2808-10
2.6656
2.9605
3.1345
3.2584
3.3532
8.2089-10
9.0355-10
9.1756-10
9.2679-10
9.3357-10
15.1252
45.2983-50
15.3722
45.0236-50
l
, D = 15.1252 + 15.3722 _ 3 0447
og '-'-'"l
10
- .
J<
log
log !lP, psia
BHS-47
Group I (combined):
i -Ji'
'.:!..j~
Determining Equation of Average AV Function.

BHS-46C
1.0
'
511
..,4'0
d7 0
0
log AV, = (45.2983 - 50) ~ (45.0236 - 50) = _ 0. 9678
0.1
II
,,
<l
L-<
~"'
/
I
I
'
l'-1og l>V= -3.6061 + (0.8651) log (P,-P)
V'
0.01
100
I
1,000
~P, psi
3.3834
3.4499
3.5076
3.5585
3.6002
9.3401-10
9.3888-10
9.4303-10
9.4714-10
9.5139-10
3.4404
3.5072
3.5606
3.6070
3.6269
9.3969-10
9.4434-10
9.4809-10
9.5188-10
9.5421-10
17.4996
47.0445-50
17.7421
47.3821-50
Group II (combined):
I
10,000
FIG. 7-12. Relative oil-volume difference by differential vaporization, field B.
age relative oil-volume data. This function was also discussed in Chap. 5.
In Fig. 7-12 are presented the data for the three samples BHS-46C, BHS47, and BHT l-155a. The data for BHS-46C and BHS-47 once again coincide satisfactorily. The fitting of an average line to the data is presented
in Example 7-6.
As pointed out earlier in this section, the bubble-point pressures from
the three samples differ substantially. The correlations of the Y and AV
functions were made without adjusting the bubble-point pressure. The
equations of the average data can be adjusted to any selected bubble poinl
by the methods presented in Chap. 5.
lo AP _ 17.4996 c:i-: 17.7421

g
2 10
"r _
1og.u.r2 -
(47.0445 - 50)
3 .5242
+ (47.3821
- 50)
10
-U.5573
Therefore the coefficients for the combined data are

b - -0.9678 - ( -0.5573) - -0.4105 - 0 8
3.0497 - 3.5242
- -0.4745 - . 651
a= log AV - blog AP,= -0.9678 - 0.8651(3.0497)

a= -3.6061
o.nd the equation is
log AV = -3.6061
+ 0.08651 log AP
----
512
-----~---------~--
----------------
PETROLEUM RESEBVOffi ENGINEERING
DATA EVALUATION FOR RESERVOffi CALCULATIONS
The correlation of the gas liberated from several samples requires the
adjustment of the data to the basis of common bubble-point pressure or
to the basis of residual oil. To adjust the gas liberated to a new bubblepoint pressure requires the correction of the data for the excess gas liberated between the sample bubble point P,, and the field bubble point P,,
and for the shrinkage due to the evolution of the excess gas. The equations
for this adjustment are as follows:
nificant, as they represent the gas in solution from the 30-psi separator
tests on each sample. The dashed line drawn through those points and
visually balanced between the trend of data points is an acceptable average
curve.
The oil formation volume factor based on a selected separator condition
can be calculated for each sample as in Example 5-6. A plot of data calculated for BHS-46C, BHS-47, and BHT l-155a is presented in Fig. 7-14.
The data are based on a 30-psi separator. Values for BHS-46C and BHS-47
check very closely, and a curve fitted visually to these data is a satisfactory
average curve. The data from BHT l-155a do not check with sufficient
accuracy to be included in the average.
v..
(RL). = [(RL)., - (RL),, l V,
(7-10)
where (RLh is the standard cubic feet of gas liberated per barrel of saturated oil at the field bubble point, (RL).. is the standard cubic feet of gas
liberated per barrel of saturated oil at the sample bubble point, (RL),, is
the excess gas liberated between the sample bubble point and the field
bubble point in standard cubic feet per barrel of saturated oil at the sample
bubble point, and V .,;v, is the volume of sample bubble-point oil per volume of field bubble-point oil.
If the field bubble point is greater than the sample bubble point, the
curves of gas liberated (Fig. 7-10) must be extrapolated to the:field bubblepoint pressure. (RL) 8 o is then negative, so that the excess gas is, in effect,
added. The quantity V.,/V, is the relative oil volume calculated using..the
field bubble-point pressure as p, in the av equation. If the field bubblepoint pressure is less than the sample bubble-point pressure, the quantity
(RL),, is positive and the excess gas is subtracted. The quantity V .,/V, is
the reciprocal of the relative oil volume calculated using the same bubblepoint pressure as Po in the LlV equation.
The correction of the gas liberated from a higher sample bubble-point
pressure to a lower field bubble-point pressure is shown in Example 5-8.
With the data converted to the same bubble-point conditions, an average curve can be fitted to the resulting data.
Rather than correlating the liberated gas data from several samples, the
most expedient approach is to correlate the gas in solution based on residual
oil. Many laboratories report gas in solution and gas liberated data based
on residual oil obtained from the differential liberation. If the data are expressed on the basis of residual oil, the data from the several samples can
be plotted on the same graph and an average curve fitted to the data.
If the data are reported as in Tables 5-4, 7-5, and 7-6, the data can be
converted to gas in solution based on a selected separator pressure. An
example of this correction is shown in Example 5-5. The data of the three
samples were converted to gas in solution based on a 30-psi separator pressure. The converted data are presented in Fig. 7-13. The data for BHS-47
and BHT l-155a check very closely, while the data of BHS-46C are approximately 50 cu ft per bbl low. The shaded points are particularly sig-
513
i,200
o BHS-f 155A
L:.8HS-47
CJBHS 46C
800
~
~ 600
400
200
~-
0 ~~
0
~ ''
'
'' '
'' '
1POO
2,000
Pressure, psio
3,000
4,000
FrG. 7-13. Separator gas in solution based on 30-psi separator, field B.
Separator test data can be correlated with separator pressure, bubblepoint pressure, and other parameters. In Fig. 7-15 are presented correlations of separator data. with separator pressure. The values of separator
gas-oil ratio and shrinkage factor differ because of the different bubblepoint pressures of the samples. The data for BHS-46C and BHS-47 show
parallel trends. The sample having the. higher bubble point has the higher
gas-oil ratio and lower shrinkage factor as would be expected.
Correlations of gas gravity, compressibility factor, and gas-expansion
factor l/B, are shown in Fig. 7-16. The data correspond closely and can
he fitted by balancing a curve through the data points.
In the foregoing discussions, the reservoir fluid was assumed to have a
bubble-point or saturation pressure which was invariant with position in
the reservoir. The variation in bubble-point pressure among the samples
514
BHS-46C, BHS-47, and BHT l-155a was assumed to be a result of sampling

rather than a variation of fluid properties in the reservoir. In fact, the
samples BHS-46C and BHS-47 were obtained from the same well having
the same completion interval at the time of sampling.
Variations in fluid properties with depth usually occur in fields having
separate accumulations in several different formations. The variations are
similar to those discussed with respect to the gas sands of Table 7-4. The
bubble-point pressure and solution-gas-oil ratio normally increase with
depth in formations of similar geologic age on the same structure.
.7
o BHS-f-!55A
t:..BHS-47
oBHS-46C
f. 4
f. 3
- -- ......
-- - -- ..... ,_ -- -- - -~
-1--
I'..
_V ' /
v
~
,k /
'---
-,,__
--
-- --
'',
~ 0.6 -;
--- - ' - --- ---
.e
.!I
"
:
-1- --- ---
'" ' --,

,-
(/) 0.4
v,- ~
0
__
~-
20
30
-I
___i __
L-
--
1-
-----T-- '--_1= =-=-=-=-..:.

- -- -- -
--- -
:.___
-:.--c----
10
__,__
--.:i.- -
50
60
Seporotor pressure, psia
BO
70
~
~
'1'
"'
38 ~
8HS-46C
~
~
BHS 1-155A ! BHS-47
! - 37
I I I I I I
I
I
40
39
90
-!;0
36 tl
100
FIG. 7-15. Laboratory fl.ash separator tests of bubble-point oil, field B.
\4
.0
..
v
I/
fl
f.
t2
1.0
1,000
--L
~-.
I!'
./
f. 5
1.2
:; 0.5
.6
515
2,000
3,000
Pressure, psio
4,000
FIG. 7-14. Oil formation volume factor based on 30-psi separator, field B.
300
...."
,,,,,
In reservoirs having low relief within the oil column, the oil usually exhibits a uniform bubble-point pressure. However, in reservoirs of high
relief, variations in fluid properties may occur: within the oil column of a
single reservoir.
.An example of such variations in bubble-point pressure is shown in Fig.
7-17. The data are from the Weber sandstone reservoir of the Rangely oil
field of Colo.mdo. 5 The reservoir contained an original gas cap with a gasoil contact at 320 ft below sea level. The original water-oil contact was
found at 1,160 ft below sea level. The oil column was continuous over an
---
-fct:i""
200 ~
l""1i'
Q4
o.2
BHS-47
BHS-46C
[/"
ff vi
1,000
2,000
4,080
Pressure, psia
FIG. 7-16. Gas gravity, gas-expansion factor, and gas-compressibility factor by differential liberation, field B.
516
517
interval of 840 ft. Careful sampling and analysis provided the data presented in Fig. 7-17. It can be noted that the original reservoir pressure
is normal; it increases with depth as a result of increasing fluid head.
The bubble-point pressure and oil formation volume factor decrease with
depth, while the oil viscosity increases with depth. This variation indi-
ervoir of the Elk Basin oil field. Their hypothesis for the variation in
physical properties was that an oil and gas accumulation existed in the
region prior to the final deformation of the rock beds in the area. The
deformation caused increased hydrostatic pressures in the trap, thus compressing the gas cap and confining the oil in a smaller area 'vith a greater
thickness of oil column. The compressed gas tended to diffuse into the oil
column, thus increasing the bubble-point pressure of the oil. It was presumed that the reservoir was discovered before equilibrium could be obtained; thus the lower portions of the reservoir coritained oil which was
little affected by the diffusion of gas downward from the gas cap. The
variation in bubble-point pressure with depth can be attributed to the
extent to which the oil achieved equilibrium. The oil nearest the top of
the structure would be in equilibrium or nearly so, while that lower in the
column would be the furthest removed from equilibrium.
In some fields of great areal extent, variations in physical properties may
be found in oil columns of moderate relief. The Scurry County area of
West Texas exhibits variations of bubble-point pressure with depth. Cook
et al. 8 investigated the variations and proposed a procedure for evaluating
such variations with a limited number of PVT tests.
The Scurry County Canyon Reef reservoir contained oil which was
initially undersaturated throughout the reservoir. Thus, producing gasoil ratios, accurately determined, reflect the gas in solution in the oil at
the depth at which the well was completed. A number of wells were tested
under carefully controlled separator conditions, and the resulting gas-oil
ratios plotted as a function of the depth of the mid-point of the completion
interval. The gas-oil ratio data and completion intervals are shown in
Fig. 7-18.
Bottom-hole samples were obtained from a limited number of the wells
tested. The bubble-point pressure and separator gas-oil ratios of the samples were determined in the laboratory. The correlation of bubble-point
pressure and gas-oil ratio from the laboratory data is presented in Fig. 7-19.
The data of Figs. 7-18 and 7-19 were combined to yield a correlation of
bubble point pressure with depth, which is presented in Fig. 7-20.
LS
I -
~.,,.
I
I
_/Viscosity
--. ._
......__
~I
~I
2
8 ::hi
4 "
;; 2,80 0
";
... 2,400
~
ct
2,000
f,600
----
-'-
-I
I
:~I
<'s I.
'
:
.I '-
~rigino/ reservoiF pressure
!
1saturotion
pre!sure-.._
"
0
~~
1,fOO
"
Well No. I JI lII llr

1ZI
1ZlI lZilI
:ix: x
So urce of s ubsurfoFe oil so~ples
1
-f, 2 00
".
''
&r
---~I
Relative oil volume,
-~
6 ~I
--r-
~ 3,200
'
~l
I
I
"'
c ~
3,600
ll I
~
~I
..
:xr
XII
- f,000 - 900 - 800 -700 - 600 - 500
400
- 300
-200
F1a. 7-17.
Characteristics of Weber oil at original reservoir conditions correlateci

with the elevation of the top of Weber sandstone, Rangely Field, Colo. (From
Cupps et al.5 )
EVALUATION OF ROCK VOLUME
cates an increasing proportion of heavy components with depth. The data

suggest gravitational segregation of components within the oil column.
Sage and Lacey' investigated such phenomena in the laboratory and suggested a procedure for calculating the segregation of components. Cupps
et al.' applied the procedure of Sage and Lacey to the Weber data and found
that the observed segregation was much greater than that calculated.
Espach and Fry' presented similar data on the Tensleep sandstone res-
Once the drill has found an oil-productive formation, the accumulation

must be evaluated as to areal extent and hydrocarbon content. The evaluation of any hydrocarbon storage represents the accumulation and analysis
of data gathered during the drilling of the wells. It will be assumed here
that the reader is familiar with the data gathered during the drilling of
oil wells, so that only illustrative examples need be presented.
518
Areal Extent
The projected surface area of a hydrocarbon deposit can be completely
defined only by the drill. Correlation of the information on the producing
formation from all wells, producing and nonproducing, must be used. Fron1
drillers logs, mud logs, electric ~d radioactive logs, such as Figs. 7-21 and
7-22, the lithologic top and bottom of the formation can be determined
4,080----------,---------~
I
I
4,160
: - 4,200
II
~
u
..g
4,240
.!?.
c
w
4,280
In Chap. 1, several types of reservoir traps were discussed. It was stated

that hydrocarbon reservoirs are essentially bounded in four ways: (1) by
"pinchout" or disappearance of the formation, (2) by facies change or loss
of permeability, (3) by faulting, and (4) by water. The limits can be defined by any one or a combination of all these four factors.
Areal limits defined by a disappearance of the formation would become
apparent during the construction of the structural contour map. The
cause for disappearance of the formation is determined by a detailed study
of the formations above and below. Such detailed studies usually indicate
unconformities or lenticular formations.
Limits resulting from facies change or loss of permeability are determined from a study" of well logs, core analysis, and drill-stem tests. Usually
3,600
2,200
-;;_
4,360
1 70
; ?oo
4,400
~ 4,000
,
"'
4,200
/.,.
4,400
/
aoo
soo
1,000
f,100
1,200
Production gas-oil ratio, cu ft/bbl
-g
"'
""
3,800
"' 4,320
519
4,600
1,700
1,800
1,900
2,000
2,100
2,200
Saturation pressure of
4,440
I
4,480
4,520
FIG. 7-19. Relationship of saturation

pressure of reef reservoir oil with production (solution) gas-oil ratios as determined from fluid sample analyses,
Kelly-Snyder area, Scurry County,
Texas. (From Cook et al.a)
reservoir oil, psio

Fie. 7-20. Relationship of saturation
pressure of reef reservoir oil with
depth, Kelly-Snyder area, Scurry
County, Texas. (From Cook et al.8 )
7sLo~~.o~o~s~~o~s~s~o~9~2~0~9~s~o~1,ooo,.,-~1,o40"'=~,,o~s~o_,..,1120
Production (solution) gas-oil ratio, cu ft per bbl
(Separator pressure : 40 psi and separator temperature =60 F)
F10. 7-18. Variation in solution-gas content of reef reservoir oil with depth (showing
thickness of exposed zone), Scurry County, Texas. (o) data from Kelly-Snyder
area; vertical lines show reef rock exposed in well bore. (From Cook et al.~)
for each well. The values obtained from the logs are converted to subsea
measurements and plotted on an areal map. Lines representing points of
equal depth are drawn (Fig. 7-23) to repreEent contour maps of the top
and bottom of the formation. These maps alone do not define the areal
extent of the reservoir. They define only the structure of the formation.
Other information must be considered to determine the limits of the hydrocarbon portion of the reservoir.
these changes are also noted during the construction of the structural map.
A fault boundary is often hard to define. To define the boundary requires a detailed study of the formations above and below. If the displacement of the fault is small, it is difficult at times to determine if the
fault plane is a closed boundary without the aid of pressure surveys and
production history. Once the fault has been located, its position is indicated on the structural map of the top and base of the formation.
The final means by which the hydrocarbon-bearing portion can be limited
is by the absence of hydrocarbons. Because of the conditions under which
most formations were deposited, if they do not contain a hydrocarbon,
they contain water. Hence, the limiting boundary is the point at which
water completely fills the pore space in the formation.
The depth at which any given well ceases to produce oil and produces
-- --~~-CO...,
'"'-9CICll:llftC0""Cl9r;lll.UIDOlll'
llWIACllldSl1CJ
'~
f
!i
.
!5' . !'
l
6.-
.., '
'
i..:NO-
; ~~
!.'
Oll':-RDITllf
8.8
.....
- --... --
_____.........
"'
....
Self-potential
ill
1111
1111
~-
--==-
"
_-=...":,..""::.
-r~
~-:=
'
8.8
Cf1B
II
II
21
Gas-oil cont_g_ct
--
....
----I.:.::
~-7::----:.=...-:.
. g-=
-
oter oil contact
,_
NOB
10.1
.8
...,.
II
8.0
-rl
21=
I
"
.,
2200
0
0
::f
0
::f
~r\~. . . ..
.....
r-..
....
....
... -
:0
:-
0
'"
0
0
::f
&
m
.,;
rnmi
11
"
~
"'
(a)
(b)
Fla. 7-22. (a) Electric log; (b) r.adioactive log.
The oil-water contact is selected on the core log as the point at which
the oil saturations of the samples decrease and the water saturations increase. This is the water-oil contact defined as the level be/,ow which the
fluid production is 100 per cent water .
-111111'
FIG. 7-21. Mud log and drilling time log. (Adapted from Core Laboratories, lnc.
520
:-
""
f..- -
.:-=
Neutron gamma
----
Gomm a
Ill
Resistivity
~-
-=-=--~
21~
&
:;;
~----f~~
111
521
only water can be determined from drill-stem tests or core analysis (Fig.
7-24). The depth at which the formation becomes saturated with water
can be determined from the resistivity curve of the electric log. As was
mentioned in Chap. 3, there are two water-oil contacts, both of interest to
the engineer.
~,RB
'"--~
.a/IT
10
6.6 3 8.
.. '"' __ .;
9
)
Unfortunately not all wells drilled penetrate the water-bearing portion

of the formation. It thus becomes necessary to determine the limits of the
CORE AHAlYSIS AMI

INTUl'ftflAllON
.,.
"""
"
6Bo:t."'i
'.
"'
~
.,,~
.....2!L..1.
- 6
22.l
..
12.
"'"'
6616."'
POIOSITT x--x
Ii:'"
I -
:~:
OA--
...
,., ..,
- . r.
2:i.6
2.0
o;o.~
cam.
)~,.~ ~liT~-~ '60~ ~2'.li~~i~~'8i.~~Ci"'~i~~~~
-=
""
0
-;;
Ul
-0
0
0
s.o
-lL<
111.
...
22.0
c.-.
20.'<
"8
""'.a
"18
5Q
21."'
22."i
2"i
22.6 16.2
'." OT?
20.l. 16.
68.2
6o
23.5
li;J.8
21.7 16.l "2 OIL
,._
62
~.'I
i'6
21.2 16.o taa.-
-~
t,o;
P..CI
-.,_ -
:;i
Ol SATURATION :i-x
nl<DIT-
llOClotr
2.0 I ...... 0
2.'
I -
l." I ...,_.
22.0
..
TOTAL WATBI 0--0
- - I
".ti
oe.
n...
500 2'
0204060
. ... ...
.-.
"
1000 7'0
..:.
... "'"'-"..
i'
-~
......._
--'
.........
-- --
____,
COMPUTIOll COllEGIAPll
PllMUlllllY 0--0
I 18
I..
-:-
.
li;A -
I-
==~...
Goft!&.oil
:- :-: / -
---W!o-~
"'l"
Ll1l1J
utJ..a
::.
.. .:.
.~.
Ul
w
0
0
0
"
...,
-0
0
-"'
"
0
.
0
0
Ir
/j
0
0
0
0
)!
//
55
!/
+ (
,;
"I
II
//
~
s
""
'
""
&t>,O<
522
FIG. 7-24. Core log of an oil-producing formation iustrating selection of gas-oil and
524
525
water-oil contact from a meager set of data. The normal procedure is to

assume the water-oil contact to be a horizontal plane. Thus, if the subsea
level of the contact can be determined in several wells, it is possible to
establish the contact for the reservoir.
There are cases when the wateroil contact in a reservoir cannot be
assumed to be a horizontal plane.
The water table may be tilted if the
water zone is in a dynamic state, if
the formation is highly variable in
:-------l
permeability, or it may be two horiFIG. 7-25. Idealized model of tilted con- zontal planes if an impermeable bartact. (From Yuster.
rier exists in the oil zone.
A water table is changed from its
static horizontal state by flow of the water. The change in the height of
the water-oil contact from its static level h. is illustrated in Fig. 7-25.
The tilt of the contact is related to the pressure drop in the water by
Darcy's law where
complete water saturation is caused by differences in capillary-pressure

behavior of the rock for the variation in permeability.
At least three possible reasons for a water table not being horizontal
have been presented in previous discussions. The engineer inust analyze
~~~1~1
: - - - - - -1
-
11
Vw
0.00624 ;(Pwl~Po):
(7-11)
dh
144VwJL
dx = 0.00624k (pw - p,)
or
where
x =
Pw =
p, =
Vw =
dh/dx =
distance along horizontal axis, ft

density of water, lb/cu ft
density of oil, lb/ cu ft
velocity of water, ft/day
slope of contact
From an analysis of the above equation, it may be noted that the greater
the velocity of the water, the greater the slope of the water-oil contact.
The effect of increased velocity is illustrated in Fig. 7-26, where the velocity
increases from a to c. If the water velocity is great enough, the oil zone
can be shifted from the top of the structure to the flank.
Another cause of a water table not being a continuous horizontal plane
is the presence of an impermeable barrier in the oil zone. For a barrier
in the oil zone to be effective, there must be a gas cap and water zone
which are continuous around the barrier. An idealized structural map
(Fig. 7-27) with superimposed gas-oil and water-oil contacts illustrates
the effect which a large impermeable barrier may have.
Mention was made in Chap. 3 of a horizontal permeability variation
which could cause a tilted water table. The tilt in the level of the zone of
F10. 7-26. Types of hydrocarbon oil and gas accumulations in gently folded thick
sand. (a) Gas entirely underlain by oil; (b) gas partly underlain by oil; (c) gas and
oil traps separated. (From Hubbert.1~)
all available data to determine the nature of the water table in any given
reservoir. To aid in determining the position of the water-oil contact
it is suggest-ed that all open-hole drill-stem tests, production and completion tests, core analysis, and log data be plotted on the structural map of
the top of the formation. A portion of the required data is plotted on Fig.
526
PE'TROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
---5.000
Gas
II
Gas/oil contoct-5 300

Oil
Water/ oil contact - 5 440
-- -
--5,500
Water/oil contact-5 600

I
Water
----
--6,000
FIG. 7-27. Idealized contour map showing difference in r.ontacts across a shaled-out
area. Gas gradient = 0.06 psi/ft; oil gradient ::::::: 0.30 psi/it; water gradient ::::::: 0.45
psi/ft.
7-28 illustrating the placement of the contour line representing the intercept of the gas-oil and water-oil contacts with the top of the formation.
From a study of the data presented in Fig. 7-28, it is seen that the wateroil contact is defined by only two wells, one a drill-stem test and one a
CORES
GAS SAND
OIL SANO
i SALT WATER SANO
OPEN
H~CE ORICL-STEM TESTS
::::
E]
SALT WATER
y:::;~1~0/~
' / ------------- - -.'-.. _
PRODUCTION TESTS ANO COMPLETIONS
filj
"
~o,!:r;fl
GAS
C Oil
[j
SALT WATE:R
G WELL CO'-fPLHED IN
""
5,000-FDOT
,,,~
FIG. 7-28. Graphical representation of water-oil contact data on a structure map.

Imaginary field. Structure contours on top of "5,000-ft" sand. Contour interval, 20
ft. (From Alexander.' 8 )
527
production test. The drill-stem test indicates the contact to be between

5,069 and 5,073 ft subsea while the production test indicates it to be between 5,067 and 5,075 ft suhsea. A horizontal contact was assumed to
exist at 5,070 ft subsea, and its intercept with the top of the sand drawn as
the 5,070-ft subsea contour. Figure 7-28 does not have the log data plotted
which could also be used as an aid in selecting the water-oil contact,
especially in those wells which penetrated but did not test the sand.
Isopach Maps
To evaluate the amount of hydrocarbon volumetrically in an underground reservoir, it is usually necessary to construct an isopach map. Any
isopach map indicates the rock volume between limiting boundaries. There
are four basic isopach maps which can be constructed: (1) gross isopach
map, (2) total net thickness map, (3) net oil isopach map, and (4) net gas
isopach map.
Gross Isopach Maps. Gross isopach maps are constructed using the
top of the formation, the bottom of the formation, the water-oil contact,
and any pinchout, fault, or facies change as the limiting boundaries. In a
case involving only the top and bottom of the formation and the water-oil
contact, it is possible to construct the isopach from the two structural maps.
The water-oil-contact intercept should be plotted on both of the structural maps.
The effect of gas-oil and water-oil contacts on the location of the isopach
lines for two different types of structures is shown in Figs. 7-29 and 7-30.
Figure 7-29 shows the placement of isopach contour lines for a domal-type
trap. The maximum areal extent (zero isopach line) of the accumulation
is defined by the contact of the water table with the top of the formation.
This figure demonstrates the existence of the oil-water wedge in the formation caused by the horizontal attitude of the water-oil contact and the dip
of the bed. It is noted that the isopach lines are equal to the total thickness
of the formation when the hydrocarbon-bearing portion is not underlain
by water. Figure 7-30 shows the location of the isopach lines in a formation which is limited by a pinchout updip and water underneath. In this
case the areal extent is limited on one side by the pinchout and on the other
side by the intercept of the water table with the top of the sand. Wedging
vf the hydrocarbon zone is caused by both the pinchout and the water
table and formation dip.
Net Isopach. The gross section must be corrected for two factors in
order to obtain the net thickness values to use in the construction of a net
isopach map. The first correction is to deduct from the gross thickness
that part which is of a lithology not normally considered hydrocarbonbearing. In sands this may be shale lenses which must be deducted. In
limestones there may be chert or calcite lenses which would not contain
528
529
hydrocarbons. The presence and thickness of these zones of different lithology can be determined from logs or core analysis. Figure 7-31 illustrates
the correction of gross sand thickness for the existence of a shale stringer.
The thickness value obtained after correcting for shale lenses, etc., is sometimes referred to as net sand thickness.
The second correction made on the gross section to determine the net
formation which would not be considered net pay because of its low permeability. This core log also indicates the presence of shale stringers the
thicknesses of which are deducted from the gross section. A detailed analysis of the core log of Fig. 7-32 is presented in Example 7-7. A more detailed illustration of the selection
Resistivity
of productive pay is included in
Self-potential
the discussion of averaging permeability and porosity.
A procedure for constructing a
net isopach map is first to construct
a total net thickness map which includes the water-saturated zone
(Fig. 7-33a).
The projections of the intercepts
of the water table with the top and
Sand thickness = Ji + Tz
bottom of the formation are superimposed on this map. The total FIG. 7-31. Total thickness as indicated
on an electrical log for a sandstone connet values within the line defined taining a shale break. (From Vance.14 )
by the intercept of the water table
and the bottom of the sand represent the net values for the hydrocarbon
isopach. The net hydrocarbon thickness lines between the two water-oil
contact contours are then constructed. Therefore the contours from the
total net thickness map can be traced in this region. The final two steps
of this procedure are illustrated in Fig. 7-33b and c. A complete net
hydrocarbon isopach map for the Jones Sand, Shuler Field, Arkansas, is
shown in Fig. 7-34. This reservoir has a water-oil contact only at the
extreme limits. The location of the zero-thickness contour had to be
estimated from extensions of the top of formation map, as no wells were
available on the edges for complete definition.
Gross gos sand, isopochous mop
Gross gos sand, isopochous mop

I
I II I
I
I I
059
950
I II
11 I
Gross hydrocarbon sand, isopochous mop

I
I I
I I
I
0
7
7
I II
II
lO
20
10
I I I II
Gross oil sand, isopochous mop
Gross oil sand, isopachous mop

I
r 'f r
Gross hydrocarbon sond, isopachous mop

I
rr ,
1
r r
Cross section
Cross section
I
Formotion or
permeability
"pinchout"
FIG. 7-29. Sketch showing relationship

between the subsurface cross section and
isopach lines in the vicinity of the cross
section for a reservoir containing oil and
free gas. Extent of the reservoir limited
by the oil-water contact and the bottom
of the sand. (From Vance.1')
FIG. 7-30. Sketch showing relationship

between the subsurface cross section and
isopach lines in the vicinity of the cross
section for a reservoir containing oil and
free ga.s. Extent of the reservoir limited
in one direction by the oil-water contact
and in the other direction by a formation or pernleability "pinchout." (From
Vance.u)
thickness values depends on the productivity of the formation. Dense sections of essentially zero permeability would not be considered as "pay,"
since any hydrocarbons which they may contain cannot be produced at
economic rates. In limestones, zones of extremely low porosity can be considered as not connected and hence be treated as "nonpay." The existence
of dense stringers can be determined from a study of logs and core analysis.
The core-analysis log in Fig. 7-32 has a 3-ft section of sand at the top of the
Example 7-7. Typical Core Analysis of the Dakota J Sand from Core
Log Shown in Fig. 7-32, Specimen Core Analysis* (Smith No. I Well File
UAP-1).
This core analysis has been selected to demonstrate a number of interesting and
important points. It represents the J Sand of the Dakota series in the northeastern
portion of the Denver-Julesburg Basin.
Coring was commenced in the shale section overlying the J Sand, the coring
point probably having been picked from stratigraphic markers present in other
wells in the general area. The actual top of the J Sand is at 4,805.0 ft, but from
that depth to 4,808.5 ft, the formation is shaly and tight as shown by the permeability values measured.
Development of permeability at 4,808.5 ft indicates the top of the pay section.
* Courtesy of Core Laboratories,
Inc.
530

DATii: OH
9l-S2
-U---~~~-~------- OATlt ~ 2-tl>-S2

~CU)
WIUlCAT
FOlllMATSO.._ o.uar J SIJID
....
SDlVlct: Ill). 5
Rll:llU.RKS
TAIUlAI DATA ... 1Nrm1JAJION
1000
~~
600 400 :zoo
SQ)
l:U:v.
T!ll ao:;e J1W CORCS
~-~-"~.=~~---STATE~ gm_<;.~
l.OCATION
lo277' l l
Qil!IJM!
I!5 Net oil sand
18 Net oil sand
28 Net water send
~
V....Ucal Fnt.cutr-Vl
~~
''
''
'
~,
"
" "n.s
~~
"
"
"'u
~-'
"
,,
,,
'M
=
m
n
'~
'~
u,,
17.0
~
19.l
,,
~-
' "
,,,
,,
"
''
u.
"
19.S
a.>
tt.>
~-'
(o)
(bl
~o+
le)
"
FIG. 7-33. (a) Isopach map drawn on total net sand; (b) isopach map of net oil sand
with dashed lines showing location of total net sand contours, inner edge of oil-water
wedge shown by dashed curve; (c) completed isopach map of oil reservoir. (From
Wharton. 15 )
~-
n.>
M'
m
"
"
19.6
17.7
~-'
"'
u.o
'
''
u.,
~_,
Sl.S
'' '' ''

'' "'
"''' '' ''
"' '' J.6 w
F1G. 7-32. Core log illustrating gas-oil and water-oil contacts and permeability data
with which to determine net productive sand. (Courtesy of Core Laboratories, lncJ
FIG. 7-34. Productive sand thickness, Jones Sand, Shuler Field, Ark.
Kaveler.' 0 )
531
(From
533
The porosity is typical of J Sand, ranging from 15 to 20 per cent. Fluid saturations
mdicate the zone from 4,808.5 to 4,829.0 ft to be dry-gas productive. The absence
of any measurable reSidual oil saturation combined with low total water saturations
offers conclusive evidence that the zone is dry-gas productive. The permeability
and productive capacity (average permeability X thickness) of the 20.5-ft section
would assure high-volume gas production if a completion were made in this zone.
At 4,829.0 to 4,830.0 ft, the first residual oil saturatioJ:!. is observed, marking the
point at which the productive characteristics of the J Sand are beginning to change.
The residual oil saturation of 6.2 per cent pore space would indicate a transitional
interval over which liquid hydrocarbon saturation is developing, and flow of both
a free-gas and liquid phase would be expected from this foot. The gas-oil contact
containing hydrocarbons. The interval 4,850 to 4,851 is considered to consist of

one-half permeable effective sand and one-half noneffective sand based on the con.
trast in the permeability and porosity value.
532
is shown by the core analysis to be at 4,829.0 to 4,830.0 ft.

From 4,830.0 to 4,846.0 ft, the residual oil and total water saturations are indicative of an oil-productive zone. High permeability and excellent porosity show
the interval to ha.ve a large potential and to contain substantial volumes of recoverable oil in place. Both this oil zone and the gas rone above showed vertical
fractures in addition to the high permeability of the rock itself. These factors
present completion problems discussed later.
From 4,846.0 to 4,847.0 ft, a shale barrier is present, followed by 1 ft of isolated
oil sand, which in turn is underlain by 1 ft of sandy shale at 4,848.0 to 4,849.0 ft.
The presence of the shale streaks will be helpful in completing the well as a waterfree producer.
Two feet of permeable water sand are present from 4,849.0 to 4,851.0 ft. The
lack of residual oil saturation combined with high water saturation is conclusive
evidence that this 2-ft interval is wet.
Completion should be made near the base of the section, say from 4,840.0 to
4,843.0 ft, in order to diminish the possibility of gas coning from above. The shale
streaks underlying the sand should, if laterally continuous, prevent water coning,
and completion a few feet above these streaks would be suggested. Here the inter-
Gross Rock Volume. The rock volume containing hydrocarbons can

be determined for gross or net sections. The rock volume of the gross section can be determined by planimetering the contour ma.ps or the isopach
maps. The net rock volume is determined by planimetering the net isopach
map.
The areas enclosed by contours of the structure maps based on the top
and bottom of the formation are determined by planimetering. These
areas (Fig. 7-35) are plotted as a function of depth. The area enclosed by
4,950
----
5,000
5,050
A VERA GE
Top of net effective sand, ft

Base of net effective sand, ft
Gas-oil contact, ft
Water-oil contact, ft
Gross sand thickness, ft
Total net effective sand thickness, ft
Net effective ga.'l sand thickness, ft
Net effective oil sand thickness, ft
Permeability capacity kh
Weighted average permeability, millidarcys
Porosity capacity q,h, ft
Weighted average porosity, %
PROPERTIES*
4,807
4,851
4,829
Between 4,848 and 4,849

44
41
21.5
18
13,362 md. ft.
326
724.9%
17.7
* Additional interpretation by authors.

vals 4,805 to 4,807, 4,808 to 4,808.5, 4,846 to 4,847, 4,848 to 4,849, 4,850.5 to 4,85?
are considered to be of such physical character as to be nonproductive even ii
'A.
...........
.....
A,
......
...........
From sand-fop
~
mop_D
"-...
5,100
'I',.
5,150
From sond-bose map
5,200
I
1,000
......
A,
'
~ -;--1------ -----~
Ao
~----lo...
Oil-wufer confocf,,.
5,2500
INTERPRETATION AND
Pfonilefer colsfonf:
f uni! = 250,000 ocr~ft
___LIGos-oN lconfocf
""'
i-..
3,000
Area enclosed by contour, acres
2,000
.........
4,000
~
5,000
Fro. 7-35. Idealized volume graph for computing gross rock volume.
the two resulting curves represents the gross acre-feet of hydrocarboncontaining rock. The gross rock volume is determined by a graphical integration of the area between the two curves or by planimetering.
In some instances it is desirable to know the rock volume distribution
as a function of depth. This can be calculated by dividing the area between the two curves into small segments and calculating the area of each
little segment (Ao, A,, A,, etc., of Fig. 7-35). The cumulative volume distribution with depth can then be expressed in terms of rock volume above
some given depth or rock volume below a given depth. The system chosen
depends on whether a gas cap or water drive is to be the predominant
source of energy. The gross volume distribution for the data of Fig. 7-35
is shown in Fig. 7-36, cumulating the volumes from the bottom.
534
5,000
": 5, 100
_v
~
~
5,150
5,200
The gross rock volume can also be obtained by plotting a graph of area
enclosed by each contour as a function of the thickness represented by
that contour (Fig. 7-37). The plotted points are connected by a smooth
curve. The rock volume is represented by the area under the curve. This
area can be determined by graphical or numerical integration or planimetering. This is probably the most desirable method, as it does not assume
any fixed relationship between each contour as is done in the trapezoidal
or pyramidal relations.
The rock volume depends on the determination of the thickness of the
formation and the areal extent of the reservoir, so that uncertainties in
sand thickness are reflected directly in the magnitude of rock volume. An
uncertainty of 10 per cent in estimating net effective sand thickness from
logs results in an uncertainty of 10 per cent in rock volume. Uncertainties
_/
5,050
,.,,.-
v ---
5,250
0
50
100,000
200,000
300,000 350,000
Cumulative volume, ocreft
40
FIG. 7-36. Reservoir rock-volume distribution with height above the water level,
field A.
1;;
~
\_
'-..........._
'
30
.:
Gross or Net Rock Volume from lsopach Maps. Three methods can
be used to calculate the rock volume from planimeter data of an isopach
map. The volume can be calculated by the trapezoidal rule which is stated
in Eq. (7-12).
Volume =
where
535
2 (Ao + 2A 1 + 2A 2 + + 2A~1 + A.) + h.A.
(7-12)
h = isopach contour interval

Ao = area enclosed by the zero thickness contour
Ai.2,3 = areas enclosed by each successive contour
A. = area enclosed by the contour line representing the greatest
thickness
hn = average thickness above the top contour
The gross volume of the isopach map can be calculated from successive
calculations of the volwne between each contour, as of a frustum of a cone,
by use of the pyramidal rule. The volume between any two contour lines
is given by Eq. (7-13).
V O-n =
3 (Ao
+A,
+ v'A,A.)
where V 0-n = volume between 0 and n contours

h = difference in thickness between two contours
A.. = area enclosed by n contour
Ao = area enclosed by 0 contour
(7-13)
r--- .......__
20
-~
<.)
Volume, 993 acre ff
10
0
\
20
30
40
Area enclosed, acres

FIG. 7-37. Typical volume graph for determining reservoir bulk volume from isopach
maps.
in determining the productive area from interpretation of contact data

enter in a more complex fashion and may contribute substantial uncertainties, particularly if the entire oil productive area is underlain by water.
To illustrate further the effect of uncertainties involved in obtaining
volumes from an isopach map (considering the map to represent the rock
volume accurately), the data from which Fig. 7-37 was prepared can be
analyzed with respect to the calculating procedure used:
Contour,
ft
Area enclosed,
acres
0
10
20
30
39.83
36.21
27.09
12.80
2.75
40
49 (maximum thickness)
536
537
From the volume graph of Fig. 7-37 a rock volume of 993 acre-ft is obtained. By application of the trapezoidal rule a volume of 972.5 acre-ft is
obtained, and by application of the pyramidal rule a volume of 1,000 acre-ft
is obtained. Using the volume graph as a base, the vdlume from the trapezoidal rule is 2 per cent lower while that from the pyramidal rule is 0.7
per cent high.
Agreement between the trapezoidal rule and the pyramidal rule depends
on the ratio of the area of a contour to the next higher contour, for example:
rock. The determination of these values requires a statistical treatment

of core-analysis data.
Ratio of volumes
pyramidal
A.(Ao
trapezoidal
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
1.002
1.011
1.033
1.093
1.169
HYDROCARBON VOLUME
The calculation of the volume of rock containing hydrocarbons is in itself insufficient. The actual volume and type of hydrocarbons saturating
the rock must be determined. The volume of space occupied by hydrocarbons is defined by Eq. (7-14) or (7-15).
(7-14)
where Vn = reservoir hydrocarbon volume

Vn = bulk rock volume containing hydrocarbons
</> = mean porosity of hydrocarbon-bearing rock
Sw = mean water saturation of hydrocarbon-bearing rock
H
Depth, ft
3,690-3,691
3,691---13,693
3,693-3,694
3,694-3,697
3,697-3,698
3,698-3,700
1
2
1
3
1
2
Weighted average
2{:
1
:~o
4>k
Permeability,
m.illidarcys
kh
20
23
21
26
18
22
20
46
21
78
18
44
10
100
50
200
70
120
10
200
50
600
70
240
20130
20227
20550
:El,170
Arithmetic average =
Weighted average k
V;</>;(l - S.;)
Porosity rp,
Arithmetic average k =
In evaluation of the permeability and porosity of individual wells, the

weighted average permeability and porosity values are computed. That
is, each value of porosity or permeability is assurned to represent the interval from which the sample was taken. If all the intervals sampled from
a well are of uniform thickness, the weighted average and the arithmetic
average are identical. If the intervals differ in both thickness and value
of the variable, then the two averages differ. An example calculation of the
weighted average porosity and permeability is presented in Example 7-8.
Example 7-8. Calculation of Arithmetic and Weighted Average Porosity and Permeability.
where Ao is the lower contour and An is the next higher. Differences af!
high as 5 to 15 per cent exist when the thickness is converging rapidly
VH = VB</>(l - S.)
Evaluation of Porosity and Permeability
= 21.7 per cent
= 91.7 millidarcys
22.7 per cent

=
117 millidarcys
(7-15)
j=l
where V; is the rock volume of porosity </>; and water saturation Sw;
and n is the number of segments of different porosity and water saturation
required to define the hydrocarbon volume.
Equation (7-15) can be expressed in terms of gross rock volume or net
rock volume. The manner of expressing the volume depends on the data
used in calculating the porosity and water-saturation values. To solve
either of the volumetric equations it is necessary to determine the values
of porosity and water saturation corresponding to some fixed volume of
The weighted average porosity is 4 per cent higher than the arithmetic
average, and the weighted average permeability is 22 per cent higher
than the arithmetic average. It will be noted that the weighted average
permeability is equivalent to considering the intervals to be an array of
beds in parallel. The summation of kh is referred to as the permeability
capacity, and the summation of <t>h is the porosity or volume capacity of
the section.
Tho weighting of porosity and permeability as described above is satisfactory if the samples are representative of the intervals from which they
539
538
are obtained. However, in describing the average properties of a reservoir
~he
from a large number of samples, statistical methods reduce the work involved and provide additional information with which to describe the
physical properties of the system under consideration. Jan La\v16 and
A. C. Bulnes" have contributed greatly to the application of statistical
express the arithmetic mean as a summation, Eq. (7-16).
methods to evaluation of core analysis.
where ~a
Statistical data are ordinarily classified into classes or ranges of the
total number of such values. For classified data it is convenient to
q,,F,
(7-16)
i=l
=
q,,
variable under consideration and the number of occurrences of the variable
in each range tabulated. A sample classification of porosity data is shown

in Table 7-7. The number of occurrences in a particular range is referred
TABLE 7-7, CLASSIFICATION OF POROSITY DATA INTO RANGES OF
"ef). ~
arithmetic mean porosity
class mark (value of porosity at mid-point) of ith-class interval
Fi
or range
number of class intervals
frequency for ith-class interval, fraction
{20
30
2 PER CENT POROSITY FOR ALL SAMPLES
No. of
samples
Frequency F,
%
Less than 10
10-12
12-14
14-16
16-18
18-20
20-22
22-24
24-26
26-28
28+
Totals
161
257
398
493
608
636
623
447
340
176
117
4,256
3.78
6.04
9.35
11.58
14.28
14.94
14.63
10.50
7.99
4.13
Porosity range,
2.75
Cumulative
frequency Fe
3.78
9.82
19.17
30.75
45.03
59.97
74.60
85.10
93.09
97.23
100.00
99.92
to as the frequency. The sum of the frequencies over the number of ranges
representing the data is equal to the total number of data points. Frequency, in many applications, is more conveniently expressed as a fraction
of the total number of samples permitting comparison of distributions

containing different numbers of data points.
Figure 7-38 is a porosity histogram and distribution (cumulative frequency) curve for the data presented in Table 7-7. The histogram is
relatively symmetrical as are most porosity distributions. Two statistical
measures of central tendency (average values) are shown: (1) the median
at a porosity of 17.8 per cent and (2) the arithmetic mean at a porosity of
18.6 per cent. The median is by definition the value of the variable corresponding to the 50 per cent point on the cumulative frequency curve. The
median divides the histogram into equal areas. The value of the arithmetic
mean depends on the treatment of the data. For unclassified data the arithmetic mean is the sum of the individual values of the variable divided by
25
~
20
~ ~
"~ ''' , ,
10
,/
,____
----,
10
.'
,,
,,
er
---
, /r
I
I
!.
,,.
,/
/;"
v'
60
'
14
40
'
!
18
20
Porosity, 0/o
22
24
~
;
'';
II I
''
16
~
~
'
.I''
...__
12
100
80~
' '
/
,,
~-
26
28 +
20
FIG. 7-38. Porosity histogram and distribution for all samples from field A.
This definition is equivalent to the usual statistical definition. For the

data presented in Fig. 7-38, the arithmetic mean computed from the classified data using Eq. (7-16) is.18.62 per cent, while that computed from the
unclassified data is 18.65 per cent.
Other Statistical Measures. In addition to the measures of central
tendency discussed above, three additional measures are encountered at
times. These are (1) the mode, (2) the harmonic mean, and (3) the geometric mean. Of these the geometric mean is of greatest importance with
respect to statistical evaluation of reservoir rock properties.
The mode is difficult to describe mathematically but can be roughly de-
540
DATA EVALUATION FOR RESERVom CALCULATIONS
fined as the value of the variable which occurs most frequently. Therefore,
the mode would fall in the class interval having the greatest frequency
and is approximated by the class mark of the interval. The mode is of
little quantitative significance in evaluation of engineering parameters.
The harmonic mean of an array of numbers is defined as the reciprocal
of the arithmetic mean of the reciprocals of the numbers, or
For purposes of mathematical analysis it is convenient to replace the

histogram by a continuous curve which can be more readily manipulated.
The resulting continuous curve is called the normal curve. The normal
curve is a symmetrical bell-shaped curve which is completely defined by
the arithmetic mean and the standard deviation. The frequency function
for a normal distribution is given by
x.= __1_ _
(7-17)
i=l
x,
where
is the harmonic mean, and X; is the class mark (value of the
variable at the mid-point) of the ith-class interval or range, and the other
terms are as previously defined. The harmonic mean is analogous to the
mean permeability defined for beds in series.
The geometric mean of an array of L numbers is defined as the Lth root
of their product, or
X, = (X, X2 ... XL)l/L =
L ]l/L
[JI X;
Taking logarithms of both sides,

log X,
f(log X,
(7-18)
log X;
log X, = <~i L
~ ~ e-)![(X-X )/S)'
A normal curve can be fitted to data conveniently by plotting the variable against the cumulative frequency on arithmetic probability paper.
If the data approximate a straight line, then a normal curve is a reasonable
fit of the data. The distribution data of Fig. 7-38 plotted on arithmetic
probability paper are shown in Fig. 7-39. The dashed line is a smoothed
curve through the points. It will be noted that the porosity distribution
of field A closely approaches a normal distribution. The equation of the
I I I I I I I I
Standard deviation =5.2%
34
(7-19)
30
or for classified data can be approximated by
X,
;.-
Iv
F; log
X;
(7-20)
S = ,_, (X; - X.)'F;]"
(7-21)
where s is the standard deviation and Xa is the arithmetic mean. Note

that the standard deviation is in the same units as the variable.
50%pt
mean =17.8%
i-1
where the class interval or range is defined on a logarithmic scale. The

geometric mean is required to represent exponential distributions. Its application is illustrated in the evaluation of permeability.
Standard Deviation and Frequency Function. The standard deviation
is another important concept in statistics. In effect, it is a measure of the
dispersion of the data about the arithmetic mean and for classified data is
defined by Eq. (7-21).
[.!
84.f%pt
=23%
26
log
(7-22)
Sv2.,,-
where S = standard deviation

e = base of natural logarithm, 2.71828
X = value of the variable
Xa = arithmetic mean
+ log X, + + log XL)

L
Therefore
f(X) =
541
)/
i;'
14
_V
10
~
6
/
i5
'""":~
~oo
V! .,....
Cumulative frequency, lo
FIG. 7-39. Field A porosity distribution on probability paper.
/'
li42
normal curve has been shown to be defined completely by the arithmetic

mean and the standard deviation of the distribution. The standard deviation and mean of a distribution can be estimated from a plot on probability paper in the following manner: The mean is the intercept of the line
drawn between the 15.9 and 84.1 per cent values of the curve and the 50
per cent cumulative frequency line. On Fig. 7-39 this value is shown to be
17 .8 per cent, which corresponds closely to the median value noted in Fig.
7-38. At the 84.1 per cent cumulative frequency in Fig. 7-39, the porosity
<P is 23 per cent. The standard deviation is the difference between the
porosity at the 84.1 per cent point and the porosity at the 50 per cent point
of the cumulative frequency curve. This relation arises from the property
of a normal curve that 68.2 per cent of the observations are within one
standard deviation of the mean. The standard deviation for this distribution is 5.2 per cent.
In some reservoirs the net productive sand can be determined by a
porosity distribution. A "cutoff" value of porosity is selected, so that
only samples with porosities greater than the cutoff value are considered
"net pay." The cumulative volume capacity for the classified data of
field A is calculated in Example 7-9 and plotted in Fig. 7-40. For field A,
98.171 per cent of the storage capacity is represented by samples having
porosities of 10 per cent or greater. Thus a cutoff value of 10 per cent
porosity could be used to determine net pay and still include at least 98
per cent of the producible hydrocarbons.
Example 7-9. Calculation of Porosity Distribution from Classified
Data for Determination of Net Pay Sand.
Porosity
range
Mid-value
of range, 3
Less than 10
10-12
12-14
14-16
16-18
18-20
20-22
22-24
24-26
26-28
28+
Average porosity
Frequency
fraction
F,
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
1 =
0.0378
0.0604
0.0935
0.1158
0.1428
0.1494
0.1463
0.1050
0.0799
0.0413
0.0275
"2q,,F,
;F;
0.34020
0.66440
1.21550
1.73700
2.42760
2.83860
3.07230
2.41500
1.99750
1.11510
0.79750
18.62 per cent.
q,,F,
.,,
0.01827
0.03568
0.06527
0.09328
0.13037
0.15244
0.16500
0.12969
0.10727
0.05988
0.04283
Cumulative
capacity
.p;F,
i=l
t/>t
0.99998
0.98171
0.94603
0.88076
0.78748
0.65711
0.50467
0.33967
0.20998
0.10271
o.04283
543
Water Saturation
In Chap. 3 the methods for determining the initial water saturation of
a small volume of rock were discussed. It was stated that one of the better
methods available to the engineer was the use of capillary-pressure data.
As capillary-pressure data are measured on extremely small samples, it
1.0
/~
is possible to have a large number of capillary-pressure curves for the ~ 0.8
same reservoir. It was suggested in ~
06
Chap. 3 that the water saturation

at several values of capillary pres- 8~ 0.4
7
sure be correlated with the permeability of the samples on which the
capillary-pressure curves were meas0
ured. A straight line for each value
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
of capillary pressure is generally
Porosity, 0/0
obtained as was shown in Fig. 3-27. FIG. 7-40. Field A distribution of porosOnce this family of curves has been ity capacity.
constructed, the engineer need only
calcula~e the value of permeability and capillary pressure in order to
detennme the corresponding water saturation.
Classification of Permeability Data. The permeability data obtained
f:o~ core analysis must be studied and classified before application of statistical methods for its reduction to an average value. In the discussion
of porosity it was shown that the samples resulted in a normal-type distribution, so that all the samples could be treated together. The engineer
must also analyze the permeability data in the same manner.
The first step in analyzing the porosity data was determining whether
or not the. samples fitted a normal distribution. This same procedure is
fo~~wed with the permeability data except in the selection of the permeability ra.nges. The permeability ranges are selected on equal intervals of
the loganthm of permeability in accordance with the recommendation of
Law." A histogram of all permeability samples for field A is shown in Fig.
7-41, where the range limits are
k
j = log, J;'.
or
where
k, = 2ik,
} = 1, 2 1 3 1 4, ...
k1 = range limits
k, = initial permeability
and the initial value of k was selected to be 1.2.

544
From a study of the permeability histogram and the cumulative frequency curve for field A it is seen that the sample data do not have a normal clistribution, as the histogram is unsymmetrical. Statistically the type
of data for field A is said to have a skewed distribution. This skewed distribution indicates either that insufficient samples have been taken or that
more than one normal distribution exists.
To investigate the data further, it is suggested that the permeability data
be plotted on probability paper. Unlike porosity, the logarithm of permeability must be plotted as a function of cumulative percentage samples.
The data for field A are presented in Fig. 7-42. The curved line is the
545
Thus the average permeability of each region must be determined and

weighted in accordance with its respective sand volume to determine the
field average permeability.
If the classification suggested by Law, log2 (k;/k,) = j, j = 1, 2, 3, etc.,
yields a normal distribution, then the frequency function [Eq. (7-22)] can
be used to express the variation of permeability with frequency or number
of samples. Muskat" has reported that permeability distributions may not
fit a true normal distribution but may be exponential. He suggested that
the permeability of each sample or sample range be plotted on semilog
paper as a function of the cumulative number of samples having a lesser
4,50 0
For oil samples: medlon::f30md
meon=283md
80
i!,,::
For samples q/Jove f.2 md:
, ,'--All samples
'
---Samples above
-+--,'rt-
1.2 md
4,01 0
20
3,500
median= 145 md
meon::32f md
~ so'-----~--+----+-----!J.~~-+----+---+---l
U
15
i5-
NoO
~-J---j---lfO ~
~ 3,000
:g'"
--
2,500
;:
B:
0
1,500
~
1,000
--
FrG. 7-41. Permeability histogram and distribution for samples from field A.
.,,
2,560
>
,280 ~
640
'
'20
'60
,'
,
5,120
80
500
Permeability range, millidorcys
2,000
,-r
-' --
.,
40
20
'0
5
2.5.
'.2
~~N
Cumulative o/o
FIG. 7-42. Field A permeability distribution on probability paper.
conventional plotting procedure, whereas the two straight lines result from
plotting the logarithm of permeability. These two straight-line segments
indicate that two distribution systems are being treated as one. Hence,
the permeability data should be further classified.
Two possible permeability variations of interest to the engineer exi~t:
(1) the effect of vertical variations or zoning of different types of matenal
and (2) the effect of areal variations. A closer study of the core, electnc,
and radioactive logs should indicate if there are two or more d1st1_nct
permeability systems in the vertical plane of the reservoir. If no vertical
variations are indicated, then the core data should be analyzed on an areal
basis. In the case of field A it was found that there were two nonnal ?"rmeability systems. The permeability variation was areal and not vertical.
permeability. The same plot would result if the permeability were plotted
as a function of the cumulative frequency. This plot should yield a straight
line of the type
log10k=mN+b
where k = permeability
N = number of samples having a lesser permeability
m = slope of curve
b = intercept value of log k when N is zero
N could be replaced by the cumulative frequency F, and the only change
would be in the magnitude of the slope of the curve.
546
The cumulative number of samples is plotted against the log10 k for the
respective samples of field A in Fig. 7-43. Note that the data can be fitted
by three straight-line segments. The dashed curve represents the bes\,
single straight line that can be
drawn
through the data.
10,000
The exponential-type variation
for a field can, for evaluation
purposes, be broken into several
"
straight-line segments such as the
three segments shown in Fig. 7-43.
1,00 0
The exponential distribution is defined by the stratification ratio r,
'
which is defined as the ratio of the
maximum permeability to the mini"
mum permeability of a straight-line
.
~ 100
segment. Normal and exponential
:ac
expressions
fitted to permeability
,
~
distributions are useful not only in
J
~
I :
classifying the data but also in describing permeability stratification
10
in gas cycling and \Vater flooding.
Calculating Mean Permeability.
To obtain a statistical average permeability which will describe the
if
over-all performance of a reservoir,
1
oo
it is necessary to determine 'vhich
50
1,000
2poo
3,ooo
4,000
0
'
cumulative samples
statistical averaging procedure is to
be used. In the classification of the
FIG. 7-43. Field A permeability distripermeability data, it was indicated
bution on semilog paper.
that the permeability should be
classified on a logarithmic scale. Since the wate: satura~ion correlates
with the logarithm of permeability, the geometric mean is the average
to use with such correlations. . . .
.
( _ ).
The geometric mean permeab1hty is defined m Eq. (7-19) or 7 20
..
..
/:'
f!
"
!l
_l
log k;
(7-19)
j=l
k, = permeability of sample i
("Ii.); = arithmetic average permeability of logarithmic class interval j
L = total number of samples
F1 = cumulative frequency of j interval, fraction
n = total number of classified intervals
For comparison, average permeabilities are calculated for field A by
both the geometric and arithmetic mean procedures. These calculations are
presented in Examples 7-10 and 7-11. The arithmetic mean procedure is
applied to all the samples and to those samples having a permeability
greater than 1.2 millidarcys. The geometric procedure is applied only to
those samples having a permeability greater than 1.2 millidarcys.
Permeability, like porosity, can be and is used to determine the net sand
to be used in volumetric calculations. A cutoff value of permeability
can- be selected from a permeability capacity curve, so that net sand will
be selected on the basis of the samples which have a permeability equal to
or greater than the cutoff value. The cumulative permeability capacity
for all samples in field A is shown in Fig. 7-44. Eighty per cent of the producing capacity of field A is represented by samples having a permeability
greater than 450 millidarcys. Ninety-five per cent of the capacity is represented by samples having permeabilities greater than 100 millidarcys.
Thus it would appear that a permeability cutoff value of 1.2 millidarcys
\vould include essentially all the productive sand.
Using a permeability cutoff value of 1.2 millidarcys for field A, the geometric mean permeability calculated in Example 7-11is101.29 millidarcys.
100
_g
..e
80
I/
:ac
./
E 20
0
3,500 3,000
log "Ii,
kg = geometric mean permeability
log "Ii, = ;-1 L
or
\vhere
F; log ("Ii.);
(7-20)
547
L---'
2,500 2POO
1,500
1.000
500
Permeo bi l ity, md
F1a. 7-44. Field A di:,;tribution of pcrn1eability capacity.
549
Example 7-11. Geometric Mean Permeability for All Samples of Field

A with a Permeability Greater Than 1.2 Millidarcys.
Permeability range,
millidarcys
1.3-2.5
2.6-5.0
5.1-10.0
10.1-20.0
20.1-40.0
40.1-80.0
80.1-160.0
160.1-320.0
320.1-640.0
640.1-1,280.0
1,280.1-2,560.0
2,560.1-5,120.0
Average
permeability
of range
(k.);
1.9
3.7
7.5
14.2
30.2
58.8
119.C
234.0
462.0
878.0
1,663.0
3,120.0
logJo (Ea)i
Cumulative
frequency
fraction
F; log10 ('f,.) 1
of range
F;
0.27875
0.56820
0.87506
1.15229
1.48996
1.76938
2.07555
2.36922
2.66464
2.94349
3.22089
3.4945
0.0392
0.0585
0.0650
0.0533
0.0600
0.1070
0.1330
0.1470
0.1860
0.1005
0.0380
0.0075
0.010927
0.033239
0.056878
0.061417
0.089397
0.18932
0.27604
0.34827
0.49562
0.29582
0.12239
0.026206
101.29
548
The arithmetic mean permeability for samples with a permeability greater

than 1.2 is 320.63 millidarcys.
Calculation of Average Water Saturation. In Chap. 3 the water
saturation was shown to be a function of capillary pressure. It was also
suggested that capillary pressure could be correlated with permeability
and water saturation. The capillary-pressure data reported for a reservoir
are obtained on small core samples, each \Vith its own value of porosity
and permeability. A series of capillary-pressure curves can be drawn from
these data. To reduce the data to one average curve, it was suggested in
Chap. 3 that the capillary-pressure data be plotted against water saturation and the logarithm of permeability. A plot of this nature (Fig. 3-27)
should yield straight lines for each value of capillary pressure. This series
of lines should converge at high permeabilities and low water saturations
and diverge at low permeabilities and high water saturations.
There are essentially four approaches to the determination of the water
content in a reservoir. In brief the four methods are:
1. Consider the geometric mean permeability to exist throughout the
reservoir, and evaluate the water saturation as a function of height above
the free water table.
2. Consider the geometric mean permeability to exist throughout, and
evaluate the water saturation at a height above the free water table corresponding to the volumetric center of the reservoir.
550
DATA :F;VALUATION FOR RESERVOIR CALCULATIONS
PETROLEUM HESERVOIR ENGINEERING
3 Evaluate the water saturation of each permeability rang;e at the

hei~ht above the free water table of the volumetric center and weight w1th
respect to the frequency associated 'vith each range.
.
.
4 Divide the reservoir intb segmental volumes, evaluating the geoi:ietnc
b"l"t f each segment and determine the water saturatwn of

11 Yo
'
d"
h
that segment at a height above the free water table correspon mg to t e
mean permea
volumetric center of the segment.

.
The ,vater saturation as a function of height above the free water ta~le is
read from the reduced capillary-pressure data ?f the field or can be obtam~d
from a correlation of oil-base core data. With the use of the geometnc
600
90
500
70
Calculated from qeometric -
me/ermeabHifY' IOI. 29 md
"1i
3 300
0
0
~
"' 200
~
duced capillary-pressure data. The average water saturation is defined by

Eq. (7-23).
30
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
segmental volumes as a function of the height of these volumes above the

free water table.
The second method of calculating the mean water saturation is to calculate the capillary pressure at the volumetric mid-point of the hydro-
The fourth procedure is much more detailed. The incremental volumes

selected can be as small as desired. The sample data from each incremental
volume are analyzed, and an average permeability and mid-point height
determined. A corresponding water saturation is then read from the re-
:e
pressure is converted to height by use of the capillary-pressure equation

and the fluid densities. The resulting water-saturation distribution curves
for the data of field A are shown in Fig. 7-45. Water-distribution curves
are shown for the arithmetic and geometric mean permeabilities of field A.
The geometric mean permeability yields water-saturation values approximately 10 per cent greater than the arithmetic mean permeability. The
water-distribution curve is used to assign water-saturation values S,,,i to
The third procedure is mathematically identical to the second method

provided that the plot of the logarithm of permeability versus water saturation yields a straight line. If this is not the case, the third method should
be employed in the solution. The water saturation for the mid-point capillary pressure at the class permeability of each logarithmic range is then
read from the field-reduced capillary-pressure data. A water saturation of
42.2 per cent is obtained for field A in Example 7-12 by application of this
method.
Ca/cutofed from arithmetic

mean permeability: 320.63 md
----~
mean permeability, the corresponding values of capillary pressure and

water saturation are read from a plot similar to Fig. 3-27. The capillary
carbon reservoir. Using this capillary pressure and the geometric mean
permeability, the -..vater saturation is read directly from the reduced capillary-pressure data. For field A the mid-point capillary pressure is 25 psia,
the geometric mean permeability is 101.29 millidarcys, and the water saturation from Fig. 3-27 is 42.3 per cent.
80
.g
551
'
20
\ \
10
"r----~ r-....
20
60
40
Water saturation, 0/0
(7-23)
V;
i=l
80
100
the geometric and

FIG. 7-45. Comparison of calculated water distribution from
arithmetic mean.
An even further refinement of this procedure is to treat each core sample

as being representative of some finite reservoir volume. The volume represented by the samples can be weighted according to the frequency of
sampling in a particular area. A water-saturation value is determined for
each sample according to its height above the oil-water contact and its
552
permeability. The average water saturation is calculated in Eq. (7-24).
s.; ~
W;S.;
(7-24)
or
j=l
where
W;
S.;
total number of samples

weighting factor of jth sample and is defined as ratio of rock
volume represented by sample to total rock volume of hydrocarbon reservoir
water saturation of jth sample
Example 7-12. Weighted Average Water Saturation Based on Average

Permeability of Each Logarithmic Range, Field A.
Permeability range,
millidarcys
1.2-2.5
2.&-5.0
5.1-10.0
10.1-20.0
20.1-40.0
40.1-80.0
80.1-160.0
160.1-320.0
320.1--640.0
640.1-1,280.0
1,280.1-2,560.0
2,560.1-5,120.0
Average
permeability
Tii> millidarcys
1.9
3.7
7.5
14.2
30.2
58.8
119.0
234.0
462.0
878.0
1,663.0
3,120.0
553
Surface volume ~ (FVF) V R.P(l - S.;)
Frequency
of range
fraction
F;
Average
water
saturation
0.0392
0.0585
0.0650
0.0533
0.0600
0.1070
0.1330
0.1470
0.1860
0.1005
0.0380
0.0075
0.865
0.775
0.712
0.641
0.560
0.485
0.419
0.342
0.255
0.182
0.115
0.100
F1S,,,;
s,,,i*
0.03391
0.04534
0.04628
0.03416
0.03360
0.05189
0.05573
0.05027
0.04743
0.01829
0.00437
0.00075
0.422
*From Fig. 3-27, 25-psi curve.
Calculation of Hydrocarbon Volume

Several methods have been discussed by which the water saturation in
a hydrocarbon reservoir could be determined. The rock volume of the
reservoir, both gross and net, can also be calculated by several different
procedures. It is desirable to calculate the hydrocarbon volume on the
same basis upon which the rock volume is determined.
If the rock volume is on a net sand (not net productive sand) basis, then
the porosity and permeability values used must include all sand samples.
The water saturation can be determined by any of the four procedures
previously described. The hydrocarbon volume is defined by
. = (FVF)
2:
VR;.;0(1 - S.;);
(7-25)
i=l
where
FVF = formation volume factor (B,. B., etc.) depending on

the hydrocarbon present at the initial pressure
V R = net hydrocarbon sand volume
.P = statistical average porosity of the hydrocarbon sand
volume
stlli = average water saturation detennined from geometric
mean permeability of all samples
_VRi = net hydrocarbon sand volume of some segment j
(I - S.;); = fraction of the pore space not occupied by water in
the volume segment j, where Swi is determined from
height distribution curve constructed using geometric
mean permeability of all samples
When the net productive sand volume is used to calculate the hydro-
ca~~on volume, it is necessary to reevaluate either the mean perme~b1lity ?r !;1?an porosity. If, as in the example of field A, a permeability
cut pomt is used to d:termine the net productive sand, then the porosity
da~ for all sample_s "'1th a permeability greater than the cutoff permeability must be stat1st1cally averaged for determination of the hydrocarbon
volume.
Two procedures for determining average porosity values are available
to the _engineer. He can obtain the arithmetic average porosity of all samples. '':th a permeability greater than the cutoff permeability. The same
statistical procedure is used as in the calculation of the porosity for all
samples. The second_ app~oach is to determine the porosity corresponding
to each of the loganthmw permeability ranges. This procedure entails
more work, as t?e sam?le data have to be sorted according to permeability
and then the anthmetw average porosity calculated. An example of some
of the results of such a procedure is shown in Figs. 7-46 and 7-47. Some
?f th_e porosity distribution curves within the permeability ranges are shown
m Fig. 7-46. The arithmetic mean porosity of each range is plotted as a
function of the mean permeability of the range in Fig. 7-47. The data
presented in Fig. 7-47 were prepared from data subdivided into smaller
permeability ranges than the permeability ranges shown in Fig. 7-46.
Therefore, there are minor -discrepancies in average values shown between
the two figures. It is interesting to note that the straight-line segments
mtersect at a permeability of approximately 60 millidarcys. For values
of permeability below 60 millidarcys, the change in porosity is small. For
permeabilities above 60 millidarcys1 porosity increases with increasing per-
I.
!
100
80
~ ~
>: 60
g 40
.::
./
Permeability
range:
0-2.5 md
: '
! '
7
-10
~
v
c
60
.::
26+
Porosity, /o
" "r
60
y:
;
40
I
20
14
,I
'I1'"1i
.,,"
80
:~
I~
Y!
l
l
I
'i.'
I
I
!
I
i'
'
/j
g 40
.::
I
,I
20
i:.J
/-
-12
16
4-10
,
L
~
'
I
'I
I!
~ ~/Permeability
~ 60
.P.
I
I
24
20
Porosity, 0/o
28+
1/
-~
range:
v~ 640.1-5120
20
I L '--
1.......
" ~
~ 40
' '
I;..l_
I
""I \1
80
26+
22
14
18
Porosity, 0/.:,
..
'
I I''
I ''
.'
l<::
160J-640.0
md
40J - !60.0 md
,,I~ '
range:
~100
I yt Permeab//dy
>. 60
lj
26+
~~I
"',
---
100
. <:::
l'i
',,
~ 60
20
22
18
Porosity, 0/o
100
I'
"'
g- 40
.::
:'
..
.,, " 1
fT1 range:
Permeabitity
80
-10
fO.t-40.0 md
26+
22
18
-~ <:::
--,___
1r
i
.LJ
/
--
i--,
14
-10
100
I 'I
M:
; !
Porosity, 0/o
~ ~/ Permeobilify
I Y range_
,
g
.::
.t> <::::
80
'
iLJ
1,000
I :'
I
I
100
Z6-f0.0 md
'
/
-"
22
Permeability
range:
I '
g40
555
meability at a much faster rate. The change in slope at 60 millidarcys may

be indicative of the difference between data obtained from two different
areas of the field as previously mentioned, or it may reflect the effect of
interstitial clay on porosity and permeability measurements. If the lowpermeability rock has essentially the same grain size and grain structure
--
.,{:
h_
18
14
20
'--
I ''
"',
c:::
""
~~
.I :' ,
80
I '''
I
I
100
,f" l'
20
t)
~ ~,
1
I 1!r
' '
1/
-~ <::::
"l;j
"'.
,
iU
DATA EVALUATION FOR Rl!:SERvom CALCULATIONS
PETROLEU~I RESERVOIR ENGINEERING
554
-14
18
'
md
22
15
16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25 26
Average porosity, "lo
':
I:.1:
i:
1
1; 14
IL
26
Porosity, "'/o
FIG. 7-46. Field A porosity distribution by permeability range.
Fro. 7-47. Field A correlation of the average porosity with the average permeability
of a permeability range.
~
;o+
as the high-permeability but differs only in that it contains a great deal of

interstitial clays, then certain laboratory techniques for measuring porosity
would give erroneously high values of porosity for the low-permeability
materials. On the other hand, if the lower permeability resulted simply
from decreased grain size, the small variations in porosity could be attributed to a more uniform grain size in the low-permeability materials.
Once suitable porosity values have been determined, it is only necessary
557
DATA EVALUATION FOR RESERVOIB CALCULATIONS
to combine the porosity, water-saturation, and rock-volume terms together

to obtain the volume of hydrocarbon in the reservoir. The manner in \Vhich
the values are combined depends on how each of the values were calculated.
All methods of calculating the reservoir hydrocarbon volume can be expressed as
The manner in which V R; is defined determines in part the values of

porosity and water saturation to be used. A value V R; can be assigned to
every core sample. Some height above the water table can also be assigned
t.o every core sample, in which case each core sample would represent a
term in the summation of Eq. (7-26).
556
Reservoir hydrocarbon volume ~ K
vR;.P;(l - s.,);
(7-26)
i=l
where
K = unit conversion factor dependent upon units of V Ri and

volume units desired
V Ri = net productive sand volume
; = average porosity of sand volume V Ri
(S i); = average water saturation of sand volume V Ri
Example 7-13. Calculation of Hydrocarbon Volume for Field A by

Classification of Porosity and Water Saturation by Permeability Ranges.
I
Permeability
range,
millid.arcys
10
1.3-2.5
2Jh5.0
5.1-10.0
10.1-20.0
20.1-40.0
40.1-80.0
80.1-160.0
160.1-320.0
320.1-640.0
640.1-1,280.0
1,280.1-2,560.0
2,560.1-5,120.0
300
o Arifhmetic
Geometri'c
:;;
D
250
-~
.;
u
0
200
"'""-
Average
No. of Frequency permeability
samples fraction
of range,
millidarcys
145
216
240
197
222
396
493
544
692
386
142
28
0.0392
0.0585
0.0650
0.0583
0.0600
0.1070
0.1330
0.1470
0.1860
0.1005
0.0380
0.0075
1.9
3.7
7.5
14.2
30.2
58.8
119.0
234.0
462.0
878.0
1,663.0
3,120.0
Average Average
porosity
water
of range saturation F;i(l -Sttti)i
fraction of range*
0.158
0.162
0.165
0.161
0.166
0.171
0.186
0.203
0.218
0.234
0.243
0.253
* From Fig. 3-27 for
0.641
0.560
0.485
0.419
0.342
0.255
0.182
0.113
0.100
the 25-psi capillary-pressure curve.
0.00084
0.00214
0.00308
0.00308
0.00435
0.00942
0.01435
0.01961
0.03017
0.01922
0.00814
0.00171
0.11611
-e
e
0.865
0.77.5
0.712
150
Reservoir hydrocarbon volume = rock volumet
;~i F;</;;(l - s.,);
= 7, 758(350,000) (0.11611)
>
~
"
100
= 315,273,483.00 bbl
Mean porosity
q; of net productive sand
0.1862
10
50
Reservoir hydrocarbon volume= 7,758
Vn;(l - s.,);if,
i=l
= 7, 758(32,432.28)
0'L-~~-1,,-~~~,,-~-:::--::-_:_;~
5,000
5,050
5,100
5,200
= 251,609,628.24
Depth, ft
Fro. 7-48. Hydrocarbon space distribution for arithmetic and geometric mean perm~
abilities of field A.
t Using the cumulative volume data of Fig. 7-36 as net productive sand volume.
"d'!"d"OOO
0000
OOIN<:O"d"e<:l"d"Ot-->r.i"d"
i.ciO~i.de<:ieciOOO~oO
Oe<:l>r.it--00).t--INOOO
>OOOe<:i000.,...>00<:0
cfeti..,j"d"-"d"-..,;eti~IN-
V R; can be defined by the permeability ranges and their respective frequencies. A calculation for this definition of V R; is shown in Example 7-13.
The water saturation was determined for each permeability range by the
average permeability of the range and the height of the volumetric midpoint of the reservoir above the water table.
The incremental volume V R; can be determined as a function of height.
A single value of porosity is generally used to apply to all incremental volumes. The use of a constant porosity permits its removal from within the
summation of Eq. (7-26). The reservoir volume of hydrocarbons for field A
is calculated by this procedure in Example 7-14. The reservoir hydrocarbon
volume distribution can be calculated as a function of depth by this procedure. The volume distribution for field A is shown in Fig. 7-48.
The reservoir hydrocarbon volume, calculated by any method, can be
converted to surface units by means of suitable fluid-volume conversion
factors such as B,, B., or B,. It should be stressed that the values obtained
for hydrocarbon volume can be no more accurate than the core-analysis,
capillary-pressure, and rock-volume data. If any of these factors is in
error by 10 per cent, the hydrocarbon volume will be in error by approximately 10 per cent.
I;
I
10
l.Q>O>O
101N
!Nt---C\l
"d"INe<:IOO<:OlO"d"e<:!ININ
oq~
559
...~~~~~~~"'=
0000000000
REFERENCES
O
lOU":l>OO>OO
OOO<:OOt--->O"d"e<:le<:llNN
..... co>0>0"<ft"d""d""d""d"...,.....,..
0000000000
000000000000
.,...IN"d"<:OOOOl:N"d"<:OOOO
.,... .... .,....,...,.....,N
558
1. Guthrie, R. K.: Machine Methods for Computing and Data. Processing as Applied
to Petroleum Engineering and Production Problems, Drilling and Production Practices,
2. Black, W. Marshall: A Review of Drill Stem T~ting Techniques and Analysis,
J. Petrol. Technol., June, 1956.
3. Evinger, H. H., and M. Muskat: Calculation of Theoretical Productivity Factor,
Trans. AIME (reprinted), vols. 146 and 151, 1942 and 1943.
4. Data furnished in private communication from Shell Oil Company.
5. Cupps, C. Q., P.H. Lipstate, and J. Fry: Variance in Characteristics of the Oil in
the Weber Sandstone Reservoir, Rangely Field, Colorado, U.S. Bur. Mines Rept.
lrwest. 4761, 1951.
6. Sage, B. H., and W. N. Lacey: Gravitational Concentration Gradients in Static
Columns of Hydrocarbon Fluids, Trans. AIME, vol. 132, 1939.
7. Espach, Ralph H., and Joseph Fry: Variable Characteristics of the Oil in the
Tensleep Sandstone Reservoir, Elk Basin Field, Wyoming and Montana, U.S. Bur.
Mines Rept. Irwest. 4768, 1951.
8. Cook, A. B., G. B. Spencer, F. P. Bobrowski, and Tim Chin: A New Method of
Determining Variations in Physical Properties of Oil in a Reservoir, with Application
to the Scurry Reef Field, Scurry County, Texas, U.S. Bur. Mines Rept. Irwest. 5106,
1955.
9. Brochure by Core Labortories, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
10. Kaveler, H. H.: Engineering Features of the Schuler Field and Unit Operation,
Trans. AIME (reprinted), vols. 155 and 160, 1944 and 1945.
11. Yuster, S. T.: Some Theoretical Considerations of Tilted Water Tables, Tram.
AIME, 1953.
- - - - - - - - - - - ---------
560
12. Hubbert, M. King: Entrapment of Petroleum under Hydrodynamic Conditions,

BvJ,l. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, August, 1953.
13. Alexander, C. I.: Graphic Representation of Reservoir History, Bull. Am. Assoc.
Petrol. Geologists, 1950.
14. Vance, Harold: "Petroleum Subsurface Engineering," Education Publishers, St.

Louis, Mo., 1950.
15. Wharton, Jay B., Jr.: Isopachous Maps of Sand Reservoirs, Bull. Am. Assoc.
Petrol. Geologists, vol. 32, no. 7, 1948.
16. Law, Jan: A Statistical Approach to the Interstitial Characteristics of Sand
Reservoirs, Trans. AllJ:E (reprinted), vols. 155 and 160, 1944 and 1945.
17. Bulnes, A. C., and R. U. Fitting: An Introductory Discussion oi the Reservoir
Performance of Limestone Formations, Trans. AlME (reprinted), vols. 155 and 160,
1944 and 1945.
18. Muskat, M.: "Physical Principles of Oil Production." McGrawHill Book
CHAPTER
THE MATERIAL BALANCE
INTRODUCTION
As has been mentioned previously in this book, the petroleum engineer

must be able to make dependable estimates of the initial hydrocarbons in
place in a reservoir and predict the future reservoir performance and the
ultimate hydrocarbon recovery from the reservoir. This chapter is concerned with the estimation of the initial hydrocarbons in place in the
reservoir.
Numerous procedures have been proposed and employed for estimating
hydrocarbons in place by volumetric methods (Chap. 7). However, it has
become both practical and popular to confirm such estimates by materialbalance calculations. The type of material balance used in such estimates
is similar to that used in many other fields of engineering for quantity and
quality estimate and control. However, custom has established that the
material balance be written on a volumetric basis, although this is not
necessary. In the simplest form the material-balance equation can bt::
written as initial volume = volume remaining
volume removed.
Since oil, gas, and water are present in petroleum reservoirs, it is seen
that the material balance can be written for the total fluids or for any one
of the fluids present. Furthermore, there are numerous ways of expressing
the physical properties of the fluids present and the relationship among
these properties. The petroleum literature contains numerous material
balances which, to the neophyte engineer, may appear to be different but
upon critical examination will be found to be identical.
A concept of material balance for the estimation of hydrocarbons in
anderground reservoirs was presented by Schilthuis. 1 This work was followed closely by that of Katz' and later by Miles.' Although much progress
has been made in petroleum technology during the past quarter of a cenr,ury, the material-balance equation of Schilthuis has continued to serve
"he purpose for which it was intended. The principal improvements in
:tpplication of the equation to practice have been made possible through
refinements in measurements and the continuing efforts of reservoir engineers to expand the equation to encompass the reservoir rock and its
contents.
561
jiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiio--iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii=====---- - - -
562
R,., = initial solution-gas-water ratio, scf/bbl at standard conditions
DERIVATION OF MATERIAL-BALANCE EQUATION
R, = producing gas-oil ratio, scf/stock-tank bbl
R, = G,/N,, scf/stock-tank bbl

R,. = G,,/N,, scf/stock-tank bbl
The material balance will be developed in this section to illustrate the

various relationships existing among variables and the various forms which
the balance may take. The derivation presented is based on the total pore
volume and its content.
Before deriving the material balance, it has been found expeditious and
convenient to denote certain terms by symbols for brevity. The symbols
used conform where possible to the standard nomenclature adopted by the
Society of Petroleum Engineers in 1956.
So = oil saturation, fraction of pore space
sg
Sw
Swi
Swio
Swig
W
We
W
Wi
= oil formation volume factor = volwne at reservoir conditions
per volume at stock-tank conditions
Bu = gas formation volume factor = volume at reservoir conditions

per volume at standard conditions (used to denote solutiongas volume when more than one type of gas is present)
B 111 = water formation volume factor = volume at reservoir conditions per volume at standard conditions
B 11,, = gas-cap gas formation volume factor = volume at reservoir
conditions per volume at standard conditions
B~ = injected gas formation volume factor = volume at reservoir
conditions per volume at standard conditions
B, = B, + (R,, - R,)(B,/5.61) = composite oil or total oil formation volume factor = volume at reservoir conditions per
volume at standard conditions
B,w = Bw + (R,w; - R,w)(B,/5.61) =composite water or total water
formation volume factor = volume at reservoir conditions per
volume at standard conditions
c1 = formation (rock) compressibility = pore volume per pore
volume per psi
G = initial gas-cap gas volume, scf
Gi = cumulative gas injected, scf
GP = Gps + Gpc = cumulative gas produced, scf
Gps = cumulative solution gas produced, scf
G,,,,, = cumulative gas-cap gas produced, scf
m = GBgi/5.6INB 0 , = ratio of initial gas-cap-gas-reservoir volume
to initial reservoir oil volume
N = initial oil in place, stock-tank bbl
N = cumulative oil produced, stock-tank bbl
P = reservoir pressure, psia
P = initial reservoir pressure, psia
R, = solution-gas-<.>il ratio, scf/stock-tank bbl
R,, = initial solution-gas-<.>il ratio, scf/stock-tank bbl
R,,, = solution-gas-water ratio, scf/bbl at standard conditions
563
= gas saturation, fraction of pore space

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
water saturation, fraction of pore space

initial water saturation, fraction of pore space
initial water saturation in oil zone, fraction of pore space
initial water saturation in gas cap, fraction of pore space
initial water in place, rese;voir bbl
cumulative water influx, bbl at standard conditions
cumulative water produced, bbl at standard conditions
cumulative water injected, bbl at standard conditions
Using the resei:voir-engineering terms defined previously and establishing a reservoir volumetric system such as that illustrated in Fig. 8-1,
G"
G"
Gas zone
Gos zone
-----------coniioit~ot~-~--------
---------c-;;;n~t;;Qter---------
Oil
Oil zone
'
'''
'
:""'
I
''
'
--------------------------LConnote water
(aJ
--
oil
Oil zone
Gos
''
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J _____ _
----~~..!:._wot~---
Encrooched water
Rock ex
(b)
i;:1a.
8-1. Idealized zonal saturation and fluid-distribution changes caused by production from a hydrocarbon reservoir. (a) Initial conditions; (b) conditions after producing N, bbl of oil, G,~ and G,e cu ft of gas, and W, bbl of water.
volumetric balance expressions can be derived to account for all volumetric changes which occur during the natural productive life of the reservoir.
When a reservoir is discovered, it may contain water, gas, and oil,
intermingled or segregated into zones. A general material balance should
be capable of handling any type of fluid distribution. Therefore, the
material or volume balance presented herein will be derived with gas
and water in a gas zone; free gas, oil, and water in an oil zone; and a water
zone contiguous to the oil zone. The initial reservoir pressure is denoted
by P ;, and the total pore space in which hydrocarbons are located is denoted by V ,4>. The volumes of the various other fluids and their location
are given below;
-------------
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii=======~---
564
------- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PETROLEUM_ RESERVOIB ENGh"'fEERING
Gas-zone pore volume (bbl) = free gas volume (bbl)

(bbl)
GB,.
1
= GB,, + GB,,
Sw'u
. 5.61 1 - Swig
5.61
5.61 1 - Swig
+ water volume
(8-1)
+ free gas volume (bbl) +
Oil-zone pore volume (bbl) = oil volume (bbl)

water volume (bbl)
Therefore,
Initial pore volume in which hydrocarbons are contained = gas-zone
pore volume + oil-zone pore volume
V ,.q, = GB,,
1
5.61 1 - Sw,u
NB"
= (GB,,
1 - S,, - Sw,.
5.61
+(NB"+
NB"S"
S,,,io
1 - S 0 ,.
NB,;Sw;.
G~) :ITT
- (G -
S,,,.,,NBi
B.,,,
1 - S,.;, - S,; B,,.;
- [(N - N,)B,]
volume of
injected gas
+1 -
S ., (R,., - R ) B,.
5.61 1 - S,;,
B,.,
5.61
J!.
(8-5)
+ 1f (N -
N,)B,
JI,,_)
s.,,
S.,, _!!_,,_+GB,,;
R,.,-R,.
5.61 1-SunuBtun 5.61 l-Sunu
Bt<Di
5.61
5.61
pore space occupied by fluids

of initial oil zone
+ [ 1 - S,,;NB"
~ + NRn
S,,,;o - Sgi Bui
S,.;,;NB" R,,.; - R,. - (N - N,)R, - G,.] _!!_,__

1 - s<Di - sgi
B1wi
5.61
S.,.NB"
B.
+1-S-S-B
.+ (We- W ., )B ...
UPlO
g>
tUI
}
+ WB
i"'
(8-6)
Subtracting Eq. (8-6) from Eq. (8-3) yields the change in initial pore volume. If, by definition,
V ,,p - (V,,p)' ~ t>(V ,,p)
and
'
(8-7)
t>(V ,,p)
(V,,p)(P; - P)
c,(V,,P)(P, - P) - c,(P; - P)
(8-4)
c,(P; _ P) (
NB"
1 - s,,,.o -
_ [<G _ G~) B,.

5.61
volume of remaining free
+ [ 1 _8;1:._B~ S,; ~~~ + NR.;
S.,.NB"
1 (R
R )] B,
S,,,;o - Slli Biw> """ - ""' 5.61
watel'
(8-8)
(1 - :.~"- S,; +~!i's~,)
(8-9)
Thus from the difference of Eqs. (8-3) and (8-6)
+ GB"
gas and gas evolved from solution
,)B.
+ G,B; +GB,;
v.., - (V,,p)' -
GJJ;,
5.61
injected
then the change in pore volume can be expressed in terms of the original
pore volume or in terms of the oil and gas volumes initially in place. Hence
Pore space occupied by fluids in initial oil zone

remaining
oil volume
+ (W,
pore space occupied by flltids of initial gas zone
volume change of eonnate water
GB,; S.,,
B.
5.61 1 - S.,, B,.,
contig11ous
water zone
Remaining pore volume
(8_3 )
Pore volume occupied by fluids in initial gas zone

remaining initial
free gas volume
volume of
initial watel:'
(V,,p)' _ (G-G~) ( B,.

5.61
At some time t after discovery, the reservoir pressure will decline to a

pressure P as the result of the fluid productions, injections, and encroachments. It will be assumed that at this time, NP volumes of oil, GP volumes
of gas, and W, volumes of water have been produced. The produced gas
will be distributed as G,, volumes of gas-cap gas and G,, volumes of solution gas. Furthermore, it will be assumed that Gi volumes of gas and Wi
volumes of water have been injected to retard the pressure decline and
that We volumes of water have encroached into the oil zone.
The pore space available for the fluids remaining is (V,-</>)',and the volumes occupied by the fluids wben allocated to zones are as follows:
The expression for the pore volume occupied by fluids in the original oil
zone assumes that the water produced \Vas the result of water movement
from the adjoining water zone. For this reason no allowance is made for
gas evolution or free gas production from the encroached or produced water.
The sum of the pore volumes occupied by the fluids remaining at pressure P and those added between pressures P, and P must equal the volume
at pressure P of the initial pore volume.
GB,;Swiu )
5.61 (1 - Sw,,)
1 - Sui - Swio
565
water from
- (N - N,)R. - G,.
sv>
+ GB,; _l_)
5.61 stai11
_ (GB,;
+ GB,; ___,,;,____)
5.61
:5.61 1 - s,.,.
11
+ G,B; + GB,;___,,;,____ .!!_,,__ + GB,; __&;,___ R,.; 5.61 1 - S,.,;. 11 Biw>
5.61
+ (NB"+ 1 - NB"S"
+ NB"S,,,., )
st&oi - sg, 1 - sgi - S,,,;"
+[
S,;NB 0 5.61
1-S,,,;o-S11 ; Bv>
+ NR _+
"
B.
+ 1 - S.;,NB"
sgi - Sw00 Bi.n
+ (W
f (N
B1,,,.
R,. B,.
5.61
_ N,)B,
S,.;,NB" R,.,-R,. _ (N _ N,)R, _ G,.] _!!,__

1-S.a>,,-Slli B 1""
5.61
)
5.61 1 - S,.,;. 11
W:11 B,.,
+ WB}
"'
(8-10)
-iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii------==== -----
566
The terms in Eq. (8-10) can be collected to solve for oil in place N 01
\\ater encroachment We. The equation also can be written utilizing certain
notations which represent a collection of terms such as
The material-balance equation is employed to estintate the volume of

oil initially present in a hydrocarbon reservoir when appropriate geologic,
production, and laboratory data are available. More specifically, adequate
geologic data must be available to perniit estintation of the relative size of
the gas cap and the oil zone. Field production data including cumulative
oil, water, and gas production and reservoir pressure as functions of time
are also necessary. Appropriate laboratory data or empirical relationships
for the physical properties of oil, water, and gas are also needed to make
accurate estimates. The physical-property data needed are primarily volume factors and gas solubilities.
In addition to these data, although it is not necessary, it is highly desirable to know the type of reservoir mechanism which is operative in order
to expedite estintation of the volume of the initial hydrocarbons in the
reservoir. If the type of reservoir mechanism is not known, lengthy and
tedious trial-and-error calculations are necessary. A study of field data,
including geologic and well completion information, workover reports,
pressure surveys, production data, and decline curve analyses, may give
an indication of the type of reservoir mechanism.
The general approach to the estimation of the initial hydrocarbon volume of the reservoir by the material-balance method is to assemble the
necessary data and decide what is the probable type of reservoir mechanism.
The geologic, field, and laboratory data are substituted in the equation,
and the value of the initial oil volume N is computed for each pressure and
time observation. If the data and geologic calculations are accurate and
the reservoir mechanism is identified properly, the value of 1V calculated
for each observation will remain approximately constant. In the event
that the initial oil volume N is observed to change in one direction with
increased cumulative withdrawals from the reservoir, it is probable that
the reservoir mechanism has been identified incorrectly or production,
pressures, and/ or laboratory data are incorrect. Ordinarily, it is a relatively simple matter, although time-consuming, to assume another type
of reservoir mechanism and repeat the calculations for N. If the newly
assumed mechanism does not give constant values of N, the procedure can
be repeated or the data reevaluated.
It should be noted that the material-balance equation does not take into
consideration the rate of production of the various fluids. Furthermore, it
is obvious that the equation contains three quantities which may not be
measured directly: (1) initial oil in place N, (2) initial gas in place G, and
(3) the cumulative water influx W,. As the material-balance equation has
a low power of resolution, it is necessary to define at least two of the aforementioned quantities independent of the material-balance equation.
or
B,
~ B. + (R.;
and
- R.) 5B61
(8-11)
Collecting terms, substituting Eq. (8-11), and assuming that all free
gas in the reservoir at the time of discovery is in the gas zone Sui = 0, the
general material balance reduces to
N(B1 - Bii)
(B'"
+ NB.,S.,.
1 _ S.,,.,, Btw>
- I)
+ GB
+ 1 NB,;
_Sun,, CJ (P
S., 0
0,
5.61 I - Swio
~ N, [ B.
+ (R,,, -
B.
R,) 5.61
J+
G,J3~
5.61 -
P)
i -
(B'" _ 1)
B,,,,,
G,B;
5.61 -
(W
+ 5 G_61
(B uc - B oi)
GB,,;
5.61(1 - S,,,;g)
W )B
'
CJ(P, _ P)
WB
'
(8-12)
Equation (8-12) will hereafter be referred to as the general materialbalance equation.

Another approach to the derivation of the material-balance equation
can be made through consideration of the following relationship expressed
at reservoir conditions.
Change in the volume of all reservoir fluids
+ volume of extraneous fluids entering t"he reservoir = voidages
This approach can be shown expeditiously as follows, using the information shown in Eq. (8-11) and the relationship between gas-zone gas volume
and oil-zone oil volume m:
Change in
volume oI
initial oil
and its
associated
solution
change in
volume
ehange 1n volume of
initial connate water
~--
mb~-
N(B, -B .. ) +mNB .. (B~ -1)+NB ..s_.(B .. - B-)+ mNB,;S_, (B. - B,-)

Bfll
1 - S,,,.o
Bi,,,,.
1 - S,,,.IJ
Btun
cumulative
~~
influx
inj~on
G,B',,
5.61
solution-
d::C1:I:n prod~tion
.,
cumulative
cumulative
injection
WJJ.
gas produced
1
change in
volume of
formation pore
volume
+ ( 1 NB,.
+ mNB,. )
- Sw>o
1 - Sw>g
Cf i;.P
gas-cap
prod~tion produ~~n
_ N ,B. +G
~,,,.B='---'N"-'"'R",B='-+'-G~~~B=" + W ,B.
1!.t>lu;tfn
5.61
(8-13)
567
568
Further assume that the following conditions are applicable:
Many times the early pressure history of an oil reservoir is meager or

not known. In such a case the material-balance equation will yield very
erratic results. By writing the material-balance equation at several time
intervals and then obtaining difference equations, it is possible to eliminate
as much of the early pressure history as desired. The procedure for deriving a series of difference equations is presented here for a reservoir system
with no gas cap, zero initial gas saturation, and no water or gas injection:
N(B,, - B.,) =
N(B,, - B,,) =
5 ~ 1 (B,
1 -
5 ~ 1 (B,, -
B,;) - N , 1 [ B,1
B,;) - N,, [ B,,
+ :;,; (R,1 - R,1)

+ (W,, +
:::i.
(R,, - R,,)
5 ~ 1 (B,, -
B,1)
+ N,,
[s,, + :;,; (Roi -
R.i)
N,, [ B,,
J+
+ff,~
(W,, - w,,)B., -
J
J
+Np, [ B,,
5 ~ 1 (B,, -
+ :B~ (R,, -
B,2)
R, 2)
J+
N,, [ B,,
+ :;,~ (R,,
(W., - Wp3 )B., -
Swio
B iw
w. =
Swig
W; = 0
Sui= 0
c1 is treated as zero
m = 0
G=O
G, = 0
N(B - B ) = N "
'
"
,,_..,
N = N p[B,
hence
since
B, = B,
+ N,R"B'
5.61
- N,R,B,
5.61
(R., - R,) (B,/5.61)]

Bt - Ba
(8-16)
(R,; - R,) 5BBI
Eq. (8-16) is frequently expressed as follows:

N = Np[B,
+ (R,.
(W.i - W,,)B.,
- R,,)
B twi is treated as zero
w, =0
so
(8-14)
N(B,, - B.,) =
Swi =
W,,)B.1
(W,, - W ,,,)B.,
(R,, - R,,)
Bu= Bae= B~
If the equation for time 1 is subtracted from the equation for time 2, a
difference expression is obtained which includes N, We, and G but does not
include any terms dependent on the initial pressure.
N(Bn - B.,) =
569
(W., - W ,,,)B.,
(8-15)
- R,;)(B,/5.61)]
Be - Bu
(8-17)
Solution-gas-Gas-cap Drive
A somewhat more common case is the one in which there is a combination
solution-gas-gas-cap drive mechanism. Equation (8-12) or (8-13) is simplified for a solution-gas-gas-cap drive reservoir by assuming that water
encroachment We and injection w . are zero, the change in connate water
and pore volume is such a small fraction of the total volume change that
it can be treated as zero, and further the fluid properties of the gas cap and
solution gas are the same. Symbolically the proceeding assumptions are
These equations can be continued for as many time intervals as desired to

evaluate the problem completely.
BQ =Bae
We= 0
W; = 0
Solution-gas Drive
Fortunately, many reservoirs are not nearly so complex as the one to
which Eq. (8-12) or (8-13) is applicable in its entirety. The simplest type
of reservoir mechanism is the solution (dissolved) gas drive. Equation
(8-13) can be reduced to this form assuming that there is no initial gas
cap (G = O) or the production from the gas cap GP equals the gas-cap
expansion G(B,, - B,;) and there is no water encroachment (W. = O) or
injection (W; = 0). To simplify the equation further let it be assumed that
the change in pore and water volumes is so small compared with the oil and
solution-gas expansibility that they can be neglected.
s,, =
WP= 0
G,
B:w -
Btwi
is treated as zero
Substituting the above assumptions in Eq. (8-13) yields

N(B ' - B)
"
then
+ m NB "
N =
B,
)
N"
( B,; - 1 = ,,_,,
N,R,B,
+ 5.fil -
N,[B, + (R, - R,)(B,/5.61)]

B, - B,.[1 - m(B, - B,,)/B,,]
N,R,B,
5.61
(8-18)
570
l'E'l'ROLEUM REsEl<Vom l!l>IG!NllERING
Simple Solution-gas-Gas-cap-Water-drive Reservoirs

Often petroleum reservoirs are found which have a combination solution.gas-gas-cap-water drive. Equation (8-13) simplifies to Eq. (8-19) whenever the conditions enumerated for the solution-gas-gas-cap drive.prevai1
with the exception that the water influx W, is finite. The reduced form of
Eq. (8-13)
N(B, - B.,)
+ mNB., (BB,_,, -
1) + W,Bw
N,,B,
+ N'!A'f'
.
N,!l,B,
5.61
when solved for initial oil in place gives
N = N,[B, + (R, - R,)(B,/5.61)] - W .Bw

B, - B.,[l - m(B, - B,,)/B,;]
(8-19)
If there is a good measure of initial oil in place by volumetric methods,

the previous equation is frequently rearranged and employed to estimate
the water influx into the reservoir as follows:
W,Bw = N, [ B,
and gas zones and that initially no free gas existed in the oil zone 1 Eq. (8-12)
reduces to
+ 5~1 (B,. -
N(B, - Bu)
B,,) = N, [ B,
+ GpcBoc
5.61 -
[s"+CR
N= N p
R,)
R) B,
- N
{B. - B., [ 1- m (B, ;,,B'')]}
Solution-gas-Gas-cap-Water Drive with Fluid Injection

In view of the emphasis on the conservation of reservoir energy, a constantly increasing number of hydrocarbon reservoirs are being pressuremaintained through injection of various fluids including gas and i,vater.
Hence, it is quite appropriate to have a material-balance equation for a
combination solution-gas-gas-cap-water-drive type of reservoir in which
provision is made to account for the injected fluids.
The expansion of the hydrocarbons in the gas and oil zone and the expansion of water in the v;ater zone will be extremely large compared with
the expansion of the connate water and shrinkage of the pore space, so
that the terms involving changes in volume of the rock and connate vrater
can be treated as zero in the general material-balance equation. If it is
further assumed that the connate water saturation is the same in the oil
(8-21)
]+G"B"
G
G.B'
"""5fil-5.fil(Bge-Bgi)-5.fil-<W~-Wp)B..,-W.B,..
f\N'
[s, + (R., -
R.)
(8-20)
5~51 ]
w.Bw
~- $5.fil
Bii
.!!,_] + ~
- N(B
5.61
5.61
+ (R, -
5~61]
Equation (8-21)_ can be rearranged to solve for the oil in place Nor the
cumulative water mflux W,. The oil in place N is obtained by solvin E
(8-22), and the water influx is obtained from Eq. (8-23).
g q.
W,
(W, - W,)Bw = N, [ B,
R,)
G,B;
5.61 - (W, - W,)Bw -
B:
and if there has been some water production from the reservoir, the net
water influx can be calculated as follows:
+ (R., -
where Swi = S.,,io = S.,,io

Soi= 0
B tw - B twi i_s treated as zero
(R, - R,) B6 ]
5 1
-N{B, -B.,[1 - m(B, ;,,B")]}
571
T:lrn MATERIAL BALANCE
(8-22) '
B )
t -
G.B'} I
- 5 61 (B" - B,,;) - 5.61

=
B,..
W'
+W
(8-23)
Slightly Compressible Hydrocarbon Reservoirs

. .1:he ~e~eral material-balance equation can also be used to estimate the
1mtial oil_ m place in a reservoir for the conditions in which the reservoir
IS .well
pressure When thi s cond"t"
pressure
i
. above the saturation
.
I Ion prevaI s, the oil IS undersaturated With gas and it is reasonable to assume that
t~e connate water is also undersaturated. If the oil is undersaturated, there
will be r:o gas cap (G = 0), no free gas in the oil zone (S,, = O), and the
cumulat1v: p~oduced-gas-oil ratio Rt:. is equal to the solution-gas-oil ratio
R,. Subst1tutmg the above quantities in Eq. (8-13) reduces it to
N(B ' - B " )
+ 1 NB.,
_ S
. [Sw,
B-
(B,w - B,w,)
tun
wi
+ c1 (P,
- P)
= N ,,B, - (W, - W,)Bw
(8-24)
All the fluids are above their respective bubble-point pressures (B, = B,
and Biw = B.,,), and hence each can be defined in terms of a compressibility
~actor for a slightly compressible fluid. The volume factors are expressed
m terms of the bubble-point volume by Eq. (8-25).
B,
B,,[l
B. = Bw,[l
+ c.(P + Cw(P
P,)]
- P,)]
(8-25)
iiiiiiiiiii---======~------
------- -
6.
Boi -
Bob
6.
Bwi -
Bwb
c -- B.,(P, - P.)
where
and
= B,,(P; -
Cw
Po)
at. reservoir temperature.

Substituting the equations for the volume factors into Eq. (8-24), an exnression for the. oil in place is obtained in terms of oil produced; the rock,
oil. and water compressibility factors; the cumulative net water influx; and
the total pressure drop.
NB.,,c.(P - P,)
~ iV,B.,[1
+ 1 N__BS., [S.,B.oeB~ -
+ c.(P -
P;)
+ c1(P, -
P,)] - (W, - W,)B,,[l
P)
+ c.(P -
P,)]
(8-26)
The only variables in Eq. (8-26) are pressure P, oil production N,, and
net water influx We - Wii, since N, Boo, B,,,o, Co, C!J Cw, F'o, Pi, and Swi are
all c:onstants for a particular reservoir.
Rearranging the terms of Eq. (8-26) to solve for oil in place gives the
following:
i\T = N,B.,[1 + c.(P - P.)] - (W, - W,)B,,[l + c.(P - Po)]
S., B
)
(8-27)
Bo.;(I'i -
[ 1 (
1 - Swi
T')
Cf -
Bwi
wbCw
Co
B.,J
Boi
B., [
I
s., (c1 - S.,c~)
- c. ~::J
= A
Bwi
Bo&Co = E
B,,[l - c.P,]
(IC
-B)-~
5.61
Eq. (8-27) reduces to

N (D
N =
+ EP)
- (W, - W,)(F
(P, - P)A
+ B.oe.P)
Qi
Rearranging terms gives

(8-30)
From Chap. 4 the gas formation volume factor B, will be recalled as,
_ 0.00504TZ
B
p
-
G = G,. [ 1 _
c,,,Bwb
_Q_(B
5.61
and since it is assumed that the reservoir remains at constant temperature

T, Eq. (8-30) becomes
werecw=-h
B.,(l - c.Po)
Gas Reservoir
The petroleum engineer must also estimate the hydrocarbon volume in
place when only free gas exists in the reservoir. The general materialbalance equation can be reduced to a form which will permit the calculation of the initial gas in place. Since there is no liquid petroleum concerned in this evaluation, the oil in place N is zero, the solution-gas production is
zero, and the gas-cap production G,. is the total gas production G,. For a
small pressure difference the change in gas volume is so large in comparison
with the changes in rock and connate-water volumes that the change in
water and rock volume can be treated as zero. For simplification, it is
assumed that the water influx, water production, and water and gas injection are all zero. Inserting the above assumptions into Eq. (8-12), it
becomes
(IC
By collecting together all constant terms such as

1
573
572
(8-28)
which is an expression in terms of the water influx, cumulative oil and water
production and the reserv:oir pressure.
If the re~ervoir has no 'vater influx and no water production, Eq (8-28)
reduces to
N _ N,(D + EP)
(8-29)
- (P, - P)A
(P/.~)(Z,/P,J
(8-31)
which can be solved with limited production and laboratory data. In the
event that there is fluid influx into the reservoir or fluid-condensation phenomena exhibited during the production history, these factors must be
taken into consideration and the preceding equation modified appropriately.
Equation (8-31) can be rearranged to express the ratio of reservoir pressure and its compressibility factor as a linear function of the cumulative
gas production.
G
(8-32)
Z = - GZ, "'
p ( p,)
p,
+ z,
Equation (8-32) indicates that the gas reserves can be estimated from a
graphical plot of P /Z and the cumulative gas production G,.. Extrapolation of the resulting curve to P = 0 represents the initial gas in place.
whereas extrapolation to the appropriate P /Z ratio corresponding to abandonment indicates the gas reserves.
-----------
--------
575
574
DATA FOR MATERIAL BALANCE
Comparison of Drives
The general ,material,balance equation can be a':""anged to permit ~he
tion of the fractional part of the total expansion that can be attnb1
ca cula
.
R
. E
uted to each type of expansion or energy mecharusm.
earrangmg q.
(8-12) so that it equals unity gives
{N(Bt - Bi;)+
5 ~ 1 (B" -
(NB,.Sww +GB,;
1-
Swio
Bq;) + (W, - W,)Bw

Swig
5.61 1 -
Swig
(B,Btw~. - 1)
GB,,
+ NB//
c,(P, _ P) +
[ (1 - s.,,)5.61
1 - wio
~:i: +
W,B.}
~ {N.[B, + (R., - R,) 5B;1] + G;:t}
a relation which is nearly identical with that proposed by Pirson' to illustrate the fractional energy attributed to each phase. He showed that
N,[B.
N(B, - B,,)
(R., - R,)(B,/5.61)]
(G/5.6l)(B., - B,;)
(R., - R,)(B,/5.61)] + (G,,B,./5.61)
is the fraction of the total energy derived from the expansion of the gas in
the gas cap.
N,[B,
+ (R., -
(W, - W,)B.
R,)(B,/5.61)]
+ (G,,B"/5.61)
fl ux, and
is the fraction of the total energy obtained from the net water in
W,B. + (G,B,/5.61)
R,)(B,/5.61) + (G,,Jl"/5.61)
is the fraction of the total energy derived from any flUl'ds W h'ICh
N ,B,
+ (R., -
ht be
IDlg
injected into the reservoir.
1)
Fluid-production Data
The methods of mea.suring and reducing fluid production (oil, water,
and gas) to field average values were discussed in Chap. 7. All production
data should be recorded with respect to the same time period. If possible,
gas-cap and solution-gas production records should be maintained separately.
Gas and oil gravity measurements should be recorded in conjunction
with the fluid volume data. Some reservoirs require a more detailed
analysis and the material balance is solved for volumetric segments. The
produced fluid gravities will aid in the selection of the volumetric segments
and also in the averaging of fluid properties.
(G,,B"/5.61)
represented the fraction of the total energy derived from the expansion of
the oil and its dissolved gas.
N,[B,
The variables in the previously derived material-balance equation can

be grouped according to source or method of measurement. There are
essentially four groups: (1) fluid-production data, (2) reservoir pressure
and temperature data, (3) fluid-analysis data, (4) core analysis and laboratory rock data. Each group consists of several variables; some are functions of terms in other groups or variables with time.
-)J c1(P, -
+ [ NB,; . + 6lgB,; S
NB.,S,,,;, +GB,;___,,;,__.) (B,. ( 1 Su:i,, 5.61 I
S,,,, 11
Bi,,,
1
S.,,,
,.,.,
N,[B, + (R,, R,)(B,/5.61)] + (G,,,B,,/5.61)
P)
f the conis the fraction of the total energy derived from the expansion o
nate water and the rock in the gas cap and oil zone.
Reservoir Temperatures
Measurements of temperatures in well bores are made in connection
with a number of tests and operations conducted on the well. Some of
these temperature observations, such as those made in connection with
static pressure tests and well logging, are recorded by maximum-reading
thermometers which record-the maximum temperature encountered. This
maximum temperature i usually that temperature existing at the greatest
depth to which the instruments were run. Other temperature observations
are made with recording subsurface temperature gauges yielding a continuous record which can be correlated with depth below sea level. Temperature logs or surveys, as discussed earlier, can be used to locate the top
of cement behind pipe or to measure the fonnation temperatures with
depth.
The petroleum-reservoir engineer requires an accurate determination of
reservoir temperature and frequently the temperature gradient within a
formation or group of formations.
Temperatures determined by means of maximum-reading thermometers
in general are not of sufficient accuracy for reservoir-engineering purposes.
Temperature logs run to detect the top of cement are obviously of little
value, as the heat released by the setting reaction of the cement elevates
the well-bore temperature. Even if the temperature log is run in open hole
576
prior to setting and cementing casing, errors may occur unless sufficient
time is allowed for the mud to attain temperature equilibrium with the
formation.
After completion of a well, accurate formation temperature surveys can
be made with recording subsurface temperature gauges provided that the
4,000
577
Readings made by lowering the instrument to the depth of the completion interval in a well are generally considered to be the most accurate
records. The results of a group of such observati~ns are presented in
Fig. 8-2. These -0bservations were made in six different sands in a multisand field. It may be notOd that the trend of temperature within a sand
is similar to that within the total section.
The reservoir temperature is considered to be constant over the life ot
a reservoir, and all reservoir processes except that of in situ combustiou
-.<
4,500 ~
~
~
~~
~~''
~
;;i
<
i~"<;
-rx>
'
:::: 5,000
''
..
C;/J~~~{~
~~~~
'"
"
: 5,500
.~
' s"
~ fl"'
" 0-,:~:,\
h
~
0
"
..
~ 6,000
'
.~
..
' s"
6,500
'
so{'. -
' --
'
7,000
150
160
170
JSO
Temperature, F
190
200
' 210
Frc. 8-2. Average temperature gradient, field C.
fluid in the well bore is static and is in thermal equilibrium with the surrounding formations. To satisfy these requirements the well must be closed
in for approximately 24 to 48 hr and must be free of casing leaks. Furthermore the recording instrument must be allowed to come to equilibrium
with the surrounding well fluid. Equilibrium between the instrument ~d
well fluid is attained more rapidly in a well bore containing liquids than Ill
one containing gas.
Fra. 8-3. Contour map of geothermal gradients in South Central United States.
Contour values are in degrees per 100 ft. Mean surface temperature = 74"F. Estimated subsurface temperature (F) =(depth in 100 ft) X [(geothermal gradient
F)/100 ft from map]+ 74F. (After Earl A. Nicho'ls.6 )
(a recovery stimulation process) are considered to be isothermal processes.

Average reservoir temperatures in low-relief reservoirs are determined
by reading from curves similar to Fig. 8-2, the temperature at the volumetric mid-point of the reservoir. In reservoirs of considerable relief the
effect of temperature variations can be taken into account by assigning
average temperatures to segments of the reservoir defined by depth
intervals.
If measured temperature data are not available, regional geothermal
temperature gradients can be used to calculate the reservoir temperature.
In Fig. 8-3 are presented contours of the geothermal gradients observed in
PEI'BOLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING

578
the South Central United States. The temperature can be calculated from
the data by the following relation:
t = 74F YT(h)
where t = formation temperature at the depth h, F

h = depth from surface, hundreds of feet
YT = geothermal gradient and is read from the contour map of
Fig. 8-3, F per 100 ft
If the reservoir under consideration is near salt intrusions such as salt
domes the geothermal gradient may be altered by the effect of the heat
condu~tivity of the salt. Care must be exercised in using geothermal
gradient data where such disturbances may occur.
.
. .
.
Reservoir temperature is an important parfil?-eter m deternurung fluid
volume factors. The temperature is thus an implicit parameter of materialbalance and volumetric calculations.
Reservoir Pressures
Pressure measurements on wells were discussed briefly in Chap. 7. Like
the reservoir temperature the reservoir pressure is an important parameter
in determining fluid volume factors. Unlike reservoir ten:p~rat~e,_ reservoir pressure is a variable in most reservoir processes .. A dIStmct1on lS t~us
made between initial reservoir pressure and those attained after production
from the reservoir.
Initial Pressure. Initial reservoir pressure must be determined from
measurements made early in the development of a reservoir. The wells in
which the observations are made must be closed in to eliminate the effect
of pressure gradients around the well bore. The closed-in period .must .be
of sufficient duration to eliminate transient effects of any production pnor
to the pressure test. It is desirable that accurate pressure ob~rvations be
made prior to substantial fluid withdrawals from the reservmr. .
.
The earliest pressure observations are usually made in connection wi~h
drill-stem tests. Drill-stem test pressure records may include a closed-m
pressure observation made prior to the flow test. These observations a~e
an excellent source of data on initial reservoir pressure. The closed-in
pressure recorded after the flow test is frequently unreliable unless corrected for the disturbance created by the flow test.
The most reliable initial pressure records are obtained from pressure
build-up tests on early wells which are produced until cleaned of completion fluids, then closed in for pressure testing.
Initial reservoir pressures can be verified and, in some instances, determined from correlation of the pressure and production history of the
reservoir. For a gas reservoir, it has been shown [Eq. (8-3?)] that ~ p~t
of P /Z is linear with cumulative gas production. In an oil reservoir t e
579
relation between reservoir pressure and cumulative oil production is approximately exponential. The relation between pressure and cumulative
oil production for a field is presented in Fig. 8-4. Production-pressure data
can be extrapolated to zero production for an estimate of initial reservoir
pressure.
Initial subsurface fluid pressures are substantially equal to that of a
head of water from the surface to the depth of the oil-water contact of the
particular accumulation. Observed pressure gradients range from about
0.43 to nearly 1.0 psi per ft. In the Gulf Coast of Louisiana and Texas
the normal gradient is 0.465 psi per ft. Pressure gradients in excess of
0.465 psi per ft are considered abnormal. In many areas, below a limiting
5,000
~
4,000
'II
~
3,000
.0
............._
~
2,000
!'--. ....
0
/g
12
18
Cumulative oil production
millions of stock-tank barrels
24
FIG. 8-4. Reservoir pressure decline as a function of oil production, Shuler Field,
Ark. (From Kaveler.')
depth for the area, abnormal pressures become quite common. Two explanations of abnormal reservoir pressures are commonly presented.
If, for example, a reservoir having a closure of 1,000 ft contains gas, the
pressure in the gas at the top of the structure will be about 400 psi greater
than would be expected for that depth. This is a result of the gas and water
being at the same pressure at the gas-water contact but having different
densities. The excess pressure in the gas at the top of the structure can be
estimated as follows:
llP, =
I~ (Pw
p,)
where tl.Pz = excess pressure in gas at top of structure

ho = closure of the structure, ft
Pw = density of water, lb/cu ft
p, = density of gas, lb/cu ft
A similar relation holds for oil or oil and gas reservoirs.
(8-33)
580
If a reservoir exists at great depth in a sequence of sands .and shales,

the reservoir fluids may support a part of the overburden load. The hydrostatic equivalent of the overburden load is about 1 psi per ft of depth.
Thus, fluid pressures may approach 1 psi per ft, particularly if the reservoir
is relatively small and is completely enclosed in a thick incompetent shale
formation.
The initial reservoir pressures for a multisand field are plotted as a function of depth in Fig. 8--5. The curve represents the "normal" pressure
variation for the area. An increase in gradient with depth is apparent.
Average Reservoir Pressures. During the producing life of a hydro4,500
'
.2
' '
' '
5,000
5,500
'
f0_Q9
*
~
~ 6,000
"'
...
.
,,
'
18 ~19
Q
"
6.500
-24
" ""
"' " "'
7{JO0
2,200 2,400 2,600 2,800 3,000 3,200 3,400 3,600 3,800 4,000 4;200
Pressure, psia
FrG. 8-5. Variation of initial reservoir pre&:;ure in field C with depth of measurement.
_carbon reservoir the reservoir pressure normally declines. The reservoir

pressure must be determined periodically as a function both of time and
of production from the reservoir, as most engineering analyses of reservoir
performance require a knowledge of the reservoir pressure history.
Fluid volume factors are functions of reservoir pressure. The principal
use of reservoir pressure data is to define fluid volume factors for variolli!
calculations. Thus the reservoir pressure must be averaged in such a man
ner as to provide the appropriate fluid volume factors from correlations of
fluid properties with pressure.
.
As discussed in Chap. 2, a producing well can be represented as a radial
flow system. Thus, when the well is producing, a large pressure drop occurs
in the immediate vicinity of the well bore. The flowing well-bore pressure
581
is not representative of the pressure prevailing in the drainage area -of the
well. As the desired pressure observation is for determination of the volumetric behavior of the fluids, it is necessary to shut in the well and allow
the well-bore pressure to build up to that prevailing in the drainage area.
Pressure observations are normally made after the well has been shut in
24 to 48 hr. Such shut-in pressure tests were discussed in Chap. 7.
Pressure surveys in a reservoir are conducted periodically on a group of
wells selected to provide adequate areal coverage of the field. The frequency of pressure-survey periods depends on the rate of pressure decline
in the field. Semiannual or annual pressure surveys are sufficient if the
rate of decline is of the order of a few pounds per square inch per month.
The number of wells required depends on the area of the reservoir and the
pressure distribution in the reservoir:. Large areal pressure -differen_ces require a more dense measurement pattern in the pressure survey than more
uniform pressure -distributions. Pressure observation wells should be selected from the wells with the simplest mechanical equipment, preferably
single completions.
In a large field, several days or weeks may be required to conduct a pressure survey. The observed well pressures should be corrected to a common
survey da-te before averaging or for other treatment.
The well pressures are corrected (as in Chap. 7) to various datum depths
depending on the use to be made of the pressure data. In reservoirs of low
relief, the pressures corrected to the volumetric mid-point of the reservoir
are used in determining fluid volume factors to be used in material-balance
calculations. This is true of both oil and gas reservoirs. In reservoirs containing oil and an associated gas cap, the pressure data corrected to the
gas-oil contact can be used for both the gas-cap area and the oil zone. A
more accurate procedure is to correct the oil-zone pressures to the volumetric mid-point of the oil zone and to correct gas-cap pressures to the
volumetric mid-point of the gas cap.
An arithmetic average pressure is usually determined from the pressure
survey data. If the r.eservoir is uniform in thickness and the pressure
variation in the reservoir is not large, the arithmetic average pressure is
satisfactory. Most frequently the above conditions do not prevail, and
therefore, other averaging techniques are required. The arithmetic average
should always be determined to provide a simple check of the more involved
procedures.
Pressure data from a single survey are posted to a map on which the
limits of the reservoir have been drawn. For an oil reservoir the limits are
defined by the zero contour lines of the oil isopach and any delineating
faults. The type of boundary, gas-oil contact on the base of sand, oil-water
contact on the top of sand, formation pinchout or fault should be indicated
on the map. The pressures are contoured following the general rules of
- - - - - - - - - ------
-------
--~-----
I.
582
583
contouring but bearing in mind that only an injection well can be at a

higher pressure than all the drainage area about it. Thus a well or group
of wells is at a lower pressure than any contour completely enclosing them.
Pressure continuity exists among the oil zone, the gas cap, and water zones.
A pressure contour does not have to close within the oil zone, but it 'vill
close if mapped through a water zone or gas cap. Formation pinchouts,
_permeability barriers, and sealing faults constitute boundaries across which
no flow can occur. For this reason pressure contours may be closed against
::ouch a boundary.
A pressure contour or isobaric map of the Shuler Field is shown in Fig.
8-6. The oil accumulation is bounded by an oil-water contact. The arith-
AJ'AR
A"P" +(A, - A,,) p" ~ Pmin
t;p
+2
(A.,,
+ 2A,, + 2A,, + + 2A_1 + Arn)
+ A = Pmax 2-
Pen
(8-35)
where At and PAR are as defined above; Aci is the area of the reservoir
existing at pressures greater than the lowest contour pressure Pei; Pmin
is the minimum well pressure on the map and is less than Pci; Ac2 is the
area existing at pressures greater than P c2, the next higher pressure contour; Arn is the area existing at pressures greater than Pen, the highest
contour pressure; Pmax is the maximum well pressure on the map' and is
greater than Pen; 8P is the pressure contour interval. An example calculation of areal weighting is presented in Example 8-1.
Example 8-1. Areal Weighting of Reservoir Pressures (total oil-productive area, 1,890 planimeter units; Pmm = 1,345 psi; Pmo.x = 1,520 psi).
Area wi,th pres8'Ures
greater than, psi
Planimeter units
1,350
1,375
1,400
1,425
1,450
1,475
1,500
1,878
1,808
1,517
1,439
1,320
977
297
1,878 (1,350)
metic average pressure is 1,461 psi. Two other techniques of averaging
the pressure data are (1) areal weighting and (2) volumetric weighting.
In areal weighting, average reservoir pressure is determined by summing
the product of pressure and area and dividing the sum by the total area.
In mathematical notation,
1
PAR= 1890
'
[1,878
+ 2(1,808) + 2(1,517)
+ 2(1,435) + 2(1,320) + 2(977) + 297]
+ 297 1,520 -
1,500
(8-34)
where PAR is the areal weighted pressure, Pi is the pressure prevailing in
the area A,, and A, is the total area.
.
In practice, the values of A, and A, are determined by planimetenn~
The area of the reservoir enclosed by the reservoir boundary is plarumetered. The areas at a greater pressure than each contour are then successively measured. The average pressure can be determined by a formula
similar to the trapezoidal rule for isopachs.
+ 2;
(1,890 - 1,878) l, 350 ~ l, 345
= 1 90 (2,741,900) = 1,451 psi

'
In volumetric weighting, the average reservoir pressure is determined

by summing the product of pressure and volume and dividing the sum by
the total volume.
In mathematical notation,
.,.,
:ZP;V,
rvL= - -
V,
(8-36)
---------
584
where PvL is the volumetrically weighted pressure,. Pi is pressure prevail-
depending on the accuracy or' the data available.

Volumetric weighted pressures ean be determined l>y superimposing the
isobaric map on an isopach map and determining the sand volume between successive pressure contours. A somewhat simpler method-involves
preparing a grid overlay subdivided into squares of convenient size. The
boundary of the reservoir is traced to the overlay from an isopach map of
the same scale as the isobaric map. The average thickness of each square
is estimated from the isopach and recorded on the square. If a square is
only partially underlain by the reservoir, the fraction of the square overlying productive area is also estimated and recorded. The volume underlying a square is
(8-37)
where f, = fraction of square underlain by productive formation
h; = average thickness of square
Ak = conversion constant, area of a square, acres
The total volume is the sum of the volume of the squares underlain by
productive information:
V, = :!:V,
(This scheme can be used to determine volumes in lieu of planimetering.)
The grid is then superimposed on an isobaric map, and the average pressure p, for each grid estimated. From these data and Eq. (8-36), the
volumetrically weighted pressure is calculated. An example calculation is
presented in Example 8-2 and Fig. 8-7. The conversion constant A..1:: 'vas
omitted, as the data were used only for determining volumetrically

weighted pressures and A, divides out.
Although the preceding discussions were in terms of lateral variations
in pressure and volume, similar procedures can be used to determine volumetric weighted pressures where vertical variations in pressure and volwne
must be considered.
If the reservoir contains both a gas cap- and an oil zone, the pressure
data can be corrected to the gas-oil contact and both the oil-zone pressure
data and the gas-cap pressure data contoured on the same map. As pressure continuity prevails, the oil-zone pressure data provides additional
control on pressure contours in the gas cap. The pressure in the gas cap is
evaluated in a manner similar to that previously described.
For evaluation of the expansion of the aquifer, the pressure at the original
oil-water contact is required. The average pressure can be weighted by the

length of perimeter at various pressure levels as follows:
585
+ h~~
144 Po
(o "8)
ing over the volume V;, and V, is the total volume. Volume weighting
may be on the basis of sand volume, pore volume, or hydrocarbon volume
o-w
= :!:P;L,
Lt
o-o
where P_ = weighted pressure along oil-water contact

P, = pressure of a segment of perimeter of length L,
L, = total length of oil-water contact
ho-111 = distance oil-zone datum is above original oil-watercontact,ft
p, = density of the oil, lb/cu ft
This_ metho_d of weighting pressures at the oil-water contact is particularly
applicable m reservoirs having thin sands where the water is essentially
2.5
U3>-
<5
"
O.<
15io
3.;
0;5
1510
0.,5
1505
"
1~~
''
35
5.0
2.5
U3
i~O !49040
1
1470
35
1
1465
60
1
1460
23
0.9
1490
55
1
1
1445
1485
67
71
73 '
1
1
1
1
1470
1475 1'90
52
70
1
1
1
1
1490 1. .5 1. .5 1495
50
62
61
60
1
1
1
1
1505 1503 1507 1507
42
50
" 7
0.5
1
1
1
1
15o'i.. 1505 1505 1507 1500
16
18
~-!'
25
0.3, r-0.75
1
O.
1500 1505 1507 1490
U9
1515
30
1
1510
30
1
15l0
30
1
1505
25
1
1510
1
1490
53
1
147.5
"
"
"'
"
"
.
..
15
0.2
1495
21 3.3
O. "'-3
1495 1495
39
20
1
0.9
1. . 5 1485
29
1
1
1485 1480
,5
62
1
1
1470 1462
57
55
1
1
1460 1440
34
35
1
1
1
1478 1460 1437
-1- ~ ~5
12
1
1440 1435
-<2
0.75
149.5
40
1
1493
67
1
14'10
73
1
1490
60
1
1490
50
1
1488
"
"
o,
1
,0.2
1480
22
1
1462
45
1
1446
"
"
1
1425
1
1410
10
1
1'112
,1
0.6"
1427
"
,_
17 >,6
1
1410
46
1
1380
0.9
1365
37
1
23
15
1
13$0
0.5
1350'
22
1
0.9
1370 1370
"
"'
15
1
1
1390 1385 1385 1385
4
2.5
2
0.8 -~-6- r0.3'
1390"" 1385 1385 1385
'3.5
o.
1375
7
1
1385
;is- ~~;_.
1
'12
1385
1:
0.3
~85
Fra. 8-7: Overlay method of averaging pressures using square grid. Top figure in
each group rep_resents the sand thickness h in feet; middle figure the fraction f of
square underlain by an oil-productive area; bottom figure estimated presmire p of
square.
all edge water. If the reservoir is completely underlain by water, the

average oil-zone pressure is simply corrected to the oil-water contact.
Example 8-3 illustrates peripheral weighting of pressures to determine the

average pressure at the oil-water contact.
The determination of appropriate average pressures is always of concern
to the reservoir engineer. Every effort should be made to evaluate the

data by the procedure or procedures most appropriate to the conditions
which exist.
--------
,,'
586
Example 8-2. Determination of Areal and Volumetrically Weighted

Pressures by Overlay Method.
(5)
Pfh
(2)
(3)
(4)
fh
0.33
0.4
0.3
0.9
1
2.5
5.0
2.5
15
35
0.83
2.0
0.75
13.5
35
1,500
1,500
1,490
1,515
1,490
1,245
3,000
1,118
20,452
52,150
1
1
0.9
0.75
0.2
40
35
23
12
1.5
40
35
20.7
9.0
0.30
1,470
1,465
1,490
1,495
1,495
58,800
51,275
30,843
13,455
488
0.4
1
1
1
1
3.5
30
53
58
60
1.4
30
53
58
60
1
1
0.9
0.3
0.5
55
40
21
3.3
3.5
55
40
18.9
0.99
1.75
1,485
1,493
1,495
1,495
1
1
1
1
1
30
52
67
71
73
30
52
67
71
73
1,510
1,510
1,475
1,445
1,460
(4)
2,114
45,300
78,175
83,810
87,600
(4)
495
600
447
1,354
1,490
1,470
1,465
1,341
1,121
299
604
1,510
1,475
1,445
1,460
1,485
1,493
1,345
448
1,510
1,510
1,470
1,450
1,475
1,490
45,300
76,440
97,150
104,725
108,770
1,510
1,470
1,450
1,475
1,490
1,490
1,485
1,490
1,485
1,337
296
452
1,490
1,485
1,485
1,495
1
1
0.9
0.2
0.3
67
39
20
1
6
67
39
18
0.2
1.8
1,485
1,480
1,505
1
1
1
1
1
30
52
63
68
70
30
52
63
68
70
1,505
1,490
1,485
1,485
1,495
45,150
77,480
93,555
100,980
104,650
1,490
1,485
108,770
81,675
42,920
32,164
5,993
0.3
1
1
1
1
(1)
81,675
59,720
28,255
1,480
2,643
99,830
57,915
26,730
296
2,709
1
1
1
1
0.6
73
55
29
22
7
73
55
29
22
4.2
1,480
1,462
1,427
3
25
50
62
61
0.9
25
50
62
61
1,505
1,510
1,505
1,503
1,507
Example 8-2. (Continued)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
fh
(6)
Pf
{l)
(3)
587
1,354
37,750
75,250
31,186
91,927
755
1,505
1,490
1,485
1,480
1,462
856
452
1,510
1,505
1,503
1,507
(6)
Pf
(5)
Pfh
(3)
(4)
(1)
(4)
9,0420
89,400
91,140
80,410
65,070
1,507
1,490
1,470
1,462
1,446
46,530
99,665
1,410
1,229
675
753
1,505
63,210
72,336
75,000
74,400
83,220
1,505
1,507
1,500
1,488
1,460
79,200
75,525
1,425
63,480
51,060
30,140
1,380
1,380
1,370
1,233
1,505
1,507
14,796
1,855
3,600
18,060
24,413
25
26
34
35
33
1,490
1,478
1,460
1,437
1,410
37,250
38,428
49,640
50,295
46,530
1,490
23
15
13
15
7
23
15
13
15
7
1,390
1,385
1,385
1,390
1,385
1,385
1,385
0.2
0.8
1
1
0.8
1
3.5
12
10
4
0.2
2.8
12
10
3.2
31,970
20,775
18,005
20,775
9,695
277
4,032
17,220
14,120
4,448
0.6
0.3
0.25
0.75
0.3
75.33
2.5
2
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
60
60
62
55
45
60
60
62
55
45
1,507
1,490
1,470
1,462
1,446
1
0.9
0.5
0.5
1
33
17
6
7
33
33
15.3
3.0
3.5
33
1,410
1,365
1,350
1,505
1,505
1
1
1
1
1
42
48
50
50
57
42
48
50
50
57
1,505
1,507
1,500
1,488
1,460
1
1
1
1
1
55
53
46
37
22
55
53
46
37
22
1,440
1,425
1,380
0.9
0.4
0.3
0.75
0.9
12
3.5
8
16
18
10.8
1.4
2.4
12.0
16.2
1
1
1
1
1
25
26
34
35
33
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
0.60
0.25
3.0
3
2691.87
1,380
1,370
1,370
1,325
1,500
1,385
1,385
1,385
1,440
1,435
1,412
1,390
1,385
1,385
1,385
1,385
1,385
20,884
4,050
5,268
2,078
831
347
4,155
416
3,899,506
1,440
530
450
1,129
1,356
1,478
1,460
1,437
1,410
1,385
277
1,152
1,435
1,435
1,112
831
416
346
1,039
416
109,141
588
~P(h)(f)
~h(f)
VL -
_ 3,899,506
- 2,691.87
~P(f) _ 109,141 =
AR -
~f
75.33
1449 si
p
1' 449 PSI.
where P is the estimated pressure of a square determined from the isobaric

map, f is the estimated fraction of the square underlain by oil-productive
formation determined from the oil isopach, and h is the estimated oil sand
thickness of the square determined from the oil isopach.
Example 8-3.
Water Contact.
Peripheral Weighting of Pressures for Pressure at OilPressure interval,
Distance along
psi
contact, units
1.4
1,345-1,350
1,350-1,375
1,375-1,400
1,400-1,425
1,425-1,450
1,450-1,475
1,475-1,500
1,500-1,520
p
=
1 1
48 2
{ [
I
96
]}
1.4(1,345 + 1,350) + 2.3(1,350 + 1,375)
+ 10.9(1,375 + 1,400) + 2.2(1,400 + 1,425)
+ 2.4(1,425 + 1,450) + 2.2(1,450 + 1,475)
+ 13.1(1,475 + 1,500) + 13.5(1,500 + 1,520)
(139,580.5)
h-w = 100 ft
P-w =
1,454
Therefore, P _w
2.3
10.9
2.2
2.4
2.2
13.1
13.5
48.0
p0 =
1,454 psi
43.2 lb/cu ft
+ i~ (62.4 -
= 1,454 +
43.2)
Pw =
62.4 lb/cu ft
= I,454 + 15
JOO
(62.4 - 43.2)
144
= 1,454 + 15
= 1,469 psi
Fluid Analysis
The fluid data are a function of reservoir pressure, temperature, and
surface separation conditions. If the surface operating conditions are not
589
altered, then the fluid data need be defined only once. But the fluidproperty data should be adjusted for all major changes in surface operating
conditions.
The procedure for obtaining and analyzing fluid-property data was discussed in Chap. 5. A method of reducing laboratory fluid data to the basis
of a reservoir average was presented in Chap. 7.
Core Analysis and Laboratory Rock Data
Two terms enter the material balance which are dependent on rock properties. The initial water saturation Swi must be defined so as to account
for its expansion. Various procedures for obtaining suitable average watersaturation values for use in the material balance are presented in detail in
Chap. 7.
The second term in the material-balance equation is the rock compressibility. This value is a function of reservoir pressure and may be defined
graphically or by some average compressibility factor. The magnitude of
the rock-compressibility factor Ct is measured in the laboratory on core
samples from the reservoir. If no laboratory data are available, approximate values can be obtained from Fig. 2-21.
CALCULATION OF OIL IN PLACE
USING THE MATERIAL-BALANCE EQUATION
In the previous sections of this chapter the material-balance equation

was derived and methods used in reducing field data for substitution into
the material balance were discussed. It was also mentioned that the material balance could be used to evaluate the initial oil in place, the water
influx, or the size of the gas cap. The remainder of this chapter is devoted
to illustrations of the use of the material balance in determining the initial
oil in place for different reservoir mechanisms. The types of reserv-oirs that
are discussed are solution gas, slightly compressible fluid, and a gas reservoir.
Estimation of Oil in Place for a Solution-gas-Drive Reservoir

A reservoir in which fluid productions are obtained solely as the result
of the liberation and expansion of gas from solution in the oil is known as a
solution-(dissolved) gas type of drive. In this type of drive no fluid influx
into the reservoir is assumed, and hence the reservoir is considered to produce under volumetric control.
Since no free gas exists in the oil zone initially and there is no fluid influx
or injection into the reservoir, the general material-balance equation reduces to
590
N = N,[B,
+ (R., -
R,)(B,/5.61)]
Bt-Bti
+ W ,B.
which is essentially Eq. (8-16).

A typical example of the estimation of the initial oil in place using the
material-balance equation and assuming a solution-gas type drive is presented in Example 8-4. It will be noted that both field and laboratory data
are required. The field data include fluid production (oil, water, and
gas), fluid-production ratios, and reservoir-pressure data at various times.
In the case illustrated in Example 8-4 there was no water production from
this reservoir for the time interval under consideration. Laboratory data
include the fluid physical properties for oil and gas, primarily formation
volume factors and solution ratios. In this particular case, these properties
are represented by appropriate equations based on the laboratory investigations.
160
<<1> 140
vo;
E~
ci._g 120
'
rJnifia/ oil in place, 123,000,000 stock-tonX barrels

-
Ol
I
"'
1 o-=''"'qoo..,.ooo
1:1::
~;e~g:::g;;s~~:E~SS
e J
OOOt-q:> .... 0
s ...g
~~
o-r 100
:+
~
.... 0 0 0 0
II :e~~~~S8~~~~
-'-'-'-'
I
II
o;
...jol
o;
-~
~~ BO
~~
cw
~~
~
12
10
8
6
4
Cumulative oil production, millions of stock-tank barrels
2
Fro. 8-8. Material-balance calculation for initial oil in place for a solution-gas-drive
reservoir. Data points calculated in Example 8-4.
For the sake of expediency these calculations are ordinarily made in

tabular form. Once the field and laboratory data are available, it is a
simple matter to arrange the data and calculations in tabular form like
that shown in Example 8-4. Once the form of the table is established, a
calculation for initial oil in place N is made for each time at which the
necessary data are available. The results shown in Example 8-4 are typical.
In order to evaluate the results, a plot of the estimates of oil in place
N versus the respective cumulative oil productions N 'Pis prepared. Such
a plot is shown in Fig. 8-8. If the resulting calculated values of oil in
.1
..
~1
.::1
...+
~
~
!l0
"
" "'
n
14
.;
593
place are fairly constant, then an average horizontal line can be drawn
through the data indicating the average value for initial oil in place. This
also indicates that the type of reservoir mechanism has been identified
properly. If the calculated values of oil in place increase with increasing
cumulative oil production, this indicates that the reservoir mechanism has
not been identified properly and probably energy is being derived from a
source other than that assumed. If the calculated values of oil in place
decrease with increasing cumulative oil production, this indicates that a
greater reservoir voidage is occurring than that which is measured. This
result may be due to loss of production to "thief" zones or inaccurate production or laboratory data.
In Figore 8-8 it is seen that the average value of initial oil in place
N is 123 million stock-tank barrels. However, it is seen that early in the
producing life of the reservoir there was considerable differences in the esti.
mates. This result is not uncommon, since the greatest effects of transient
pressure behavior are evident during this period.
place are lower than the remaining calculated values. The engineer should
expect the initial points in a solution to show the greatest variation because
of transient pressure behavior during the early life of the reservoir.
592
Estimation of Oil in Place for Slightly Compressible Fluids

A reservoir which contains only oil and water, both at a pressure such
that large pressure drops are possible without evolving gas, is defined as
a slightly compressible fluid reservoir. For such a reservoir it is necessary
to account for the changes in rock and interstitial water volume as well as
the hydrocarbon volume. The expansibility of water may be the order of
1 X 10--< to 4 X 10- vol per vol per psi. The expansibility of the rock or
decrease in pore volume may be of the order of 5 X 10-7 to 4 X 10--< vol
per vol per psi. The volume of water available for expansion usually ranges
from one-fourth to one times the hydrocarbon volume, while the volume
of pore space available for shrinkage ranges from one and one-fourth to
two times the hydrocarbon volume.
As no free gas exists in either the oil zone or a .contiguous gas cap, the
general material-balance equation reduces to Eq. (8-28).
An initial trial set of solutions of Eq. (8-28) can be made assuming no
water influx. If the resulting calculated values of oil in place N are consistent and yield a horizontal line when plotted versus cumulative production, then it can be assumed that there is no water influx. When the calculated values of oil in place continually increase with increasing production, then additional energy is being derived from a source not accounted
for in the solution.
The procedure for solving the slightly compressible fluid material balance
when there is no water influx is demonstrated in Example 8-5. The resulting calculations are plotted in Fig. 8-9 from which the initial oil in place
was determined to be 375 million stock-tank barrels. It is noted in the
plot of the calculated data of Example 8-5 that the initial values of oil in
Estimates of Gas in Place from Material Balance

Reservoirs containing only free gas are termed gas reservoirs. Such a
reservoir contains a mixture of hydrocarbons 'vhich exists wholly in the
gaseous state. The mixture may be a "dry," "wet," or "condensate" gas,
depending on the mixture and the pressure and temperature at which the
accumulation exists.
Gas reservoirs may have water influx from a contiguous water-bearing
portion of the formation or may be volumetric (i.e., have no water influx).
The general material balance applied to a volumetric gas reservoir has
been shown [Eq. (8-30)] to reduce to
G,,,, = G
(1 - B,,
B,;)
(8-30)
Furthermore for a dry or 'vet gas reservoir, as no liquid condensation occurs

in the reservoir, Eq. (8-30) simplifies to Eq. (8-32):
P,
p,) G,,
Z = z, + - GZ,
(8-32)
The form of Eq. (8-32) is linear; thus a plot of P /Z versus G,,,, is linear on
rectangular coordinate paper.
For condensate gases, liquid condensation occurs in the reservoir so that
B0 cannot be replaced by a simple relation of pressure and compressibility
factor. However, Eq. (8-30) is linear in G,,,, and the reciprocal of B". A
plot of G,,,, as a function of 1/B" is linear and when extrapolated to l/B,,
= 0 will intersect the gas-production axis at the value of G.
In the event that liquid production is obtained at the surface, the liquid
volumes must be converted to equivalent gas volumes and added to the
measured gas production.
An example calculation of the gas initially in place for a volumetric dry
gas reservoir is shown in Example 8-6. As shown in the example the gas
in place can be calculated from the data using the slopes or from a graphical analysis as shown in Fig. 8-10. The gas in place can also be calculated
from a least-squares fit of the data when substituted in Eq. (8-30).
Example 8-5. Calculation of Oil in Place by Material Balance for a

Slightly Compressible Fluid Reservoir with No Water Influx. The reser-
--------------~---------~---
1::1
O;j
lg:
- f ~to
"--"'
II II II 11 H. 11 II
I !'""' !'""' !'""' !'""' :---' t-"
~ ...
~~ oo ;::~xooxo
"
I
,... ,...
SXs:;+I0?1 "' ~
o~
p-- .1.r:;
0...
J.0
ol"d-1
x
1'"
"' c..;- "',...,. x
,._,,
J.
'l
0
....... ~Cli+:::.-..P..c.ni-Pi
CO-lCOCOOOOO
!;l)
.......
<O
" "00
... .......
J.
"
II
~.
'1j
" I
I to
'i:I
.:::...,
~.
II
.....
II II II
ff:>. ip.. iv
~~
"........"
~Co
g;;
ii
""'10
""~
""
"' ~
I
s
"'~
II II
0 ~
0
"
J. J. p;-
"'gii "'~i
g s0
"
~2
f;lx
s P"
~:a
"'
"' er
" 0
o" "
""
E.
~o..
'""trj >!
"
"'00. ....~
~
' "
~"
:e"'
.
".
Calculated oit in place,

millions of stock-tonk barrels
0 ::::
@~
00
"'"
~ ~
i5
t'l
g g
"'00
< ...
E[
~
::2
g~
~
3
0
"
m
,, " ~
"',,.
"~
~
2 ~2
- ~o a
s~
""0 ~
~; '
"
"'
~
"'"'~
'O
.Cl
"1
ti'" ~~
~
'<-
'
"'"'
o
-o
"''1,
.,.
~ ~
;r
<ii
~:
"~ ;.
"' g~
[;. ~~
""~
,,.. g sq.
"'f!l,l
~~
:::..: CD
"~
'l
O;j
~.@
I '1l " 0...

f.l
~+ "" ...
"'
'l
"'8 g-
""""''"
&.~
~
..,,. '"""
-- ""
0
2 ~tf
\:;'
" .
g 'I'
" &
"'
~o
s"'~
~~
'1j ~
,...
"'
,...
x,...
'x
"' x x
~~
~.,
..,"'I"'""
"'"""'
"
1-&1-10t.:>N1
~o
to to t>J "
g.~.! .....
t<lo
"0
"s
s..,
..,ro,... m
"ro
~--~"
il.
'<-
0~o
"'
"
~;;;
'
'I
I
I
~
I"
'1'2
~it
Example 8-6 (Continued). Calculation of Oil in Place.

Time since
discovery,
days
t
1il
0
91.2
182.4
273.6
364.8
456.0
547.2
638.4
729.6
820.8
912.0
1003.2
1094.4
1185.6
Cumulative
oil
production,
stock~tank
bbl
N,
0
14,045
35,731
51,127
70,958
88,656
108,032
143,938
173,630
207,985
239,178
275,556
306,533
336,996
Average
reservoir
Cumulative
pressure
pressure,
psi a
drop, psi
p
4,934
4,926
4,913
4,907
4,897
4,889
4,846
4,859
4,844
4,824
4,809
4,792
4,780
4,760
EP
P,-P
Cumulative
expansion per unit
volume,
A(P; - P) X 10-
0
8
21
27
37
45
58
75
90
110
125
142
154
174
6.070
15.935
20.488
28.076
34.146
44.010
56.910
68.292
83.468
94.850
107.750
116.855
132.031
0.0978
0.0976
0.0974
0.0972
0.0971
0.0968
0.0965
0.0962
0.0958
0.0955
0.0952
0.0949
0.0945
Oil volume
factor B,,
EP+D
Cumulative
voidage, bbls
N,(EP + D)
1.4802
1.4804
1.4806
1.4808
1.4809
1.4812
1.4815
1.4818
1.4822
1.4825
1.4828
1.4831
1.4835
20,789
52,896
75,699
105,075
131,291
160,017
213,244
257,285
308,275
354,581
408!594
454,619
499,934
Oil in place,
M
stock-tank
bbl
N
342,490
331,950
369,480
374,250
384,500
363,590
374,700
376,740
369,330
373,830
379,200
389,040
378,650
596
PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGL.""IBERING
5,000~----------------------~5,000
4,000f---+--+-----l-- - - - P or P/Z
- - - Exfrapo/oted pressure curve
t fl
4,000
- - - Exfropo/ofed pressure curve (2)
597
2
~
~
~ 3.oool---'""'"~~+-----l--+--+---+--+----l---13,ooo
2,000
+
e
~
G,.
P,
P/Z
D.(P/Z)
D.(P/Z)/D.G,.
0
10
20
30
40
50
2,538
2,381
2,223
2,085
1,940
1,801
3.83
3.59
3.37
3.14
2.93
2.72
0.742
0.739
0.739
0.742
0.747
0.755
3,420
3,223
3,021
2,811
2,597
2,385
.:.197
-202
-210
-214
-212
-19.7
-20.2
-21.0
-21.4
-21.2
-103.5
From Eq. (8-32)
Av= -20.7
1,000
~ = ~: + (-Ji,) G,.
;;;
~
.:;
-;;:.
0
180
differentiating with respect to G,,,,

d(P/Z)
P,
dG,,,, = -GZ,
Cumulative gos produced, billions of standard cubic feet
FIG. 8-10. Graphical solution of material balance for a volumetric gas reservoir.
(Adapted from Gruy .s)
Fitting a horizontal line to a plot of cumulative oil production (N ,) and

calculated oil in place (Fig. 8-9) yields a value of oil in place of 375 million
stock-tank barrels.
Example 8-6.
Gas Reservoir.
Determination of Gas Initially in Place for a Volumetric
Therefore, !l(P/Z) =
aGpe
thus
= (-
p,)
D.G,,,,
z, D.P/Z
G,.
10
20
30
40
50
Data:
Gas gravity = 0.80
Reservoir temperature = 149F or 609R
Initial reservoir pressure = 2, 778 psia
Cumul,a,tive gas
produdion G~, 'billion scf
Reservoir pressure,
0
10
20
30
40
50
2751
2381
2223
2085
1940
1801
Calculations:
,T, = 420R (from Fig. 4-30)
,P, = 663R (from Fig. 4-30)
T, = 609 + 420 = 1.45
P, = P + 663
psia
Average slope
-20.7
165.2
173.6
169.3
162.9
159.8
161.3
Since Eq. (8--32) is linear, a plot of P /Z as a function of G,, is a straight

line. This is illustrated in Fig. 8--10. When
P
=0
P/Z
=0
and from Eq. (8-32)
G = G,,,,
Therefore the extrapolation of the line through the data points to P /Z = 0
intersects the G,,,, axis at the value of G. From Fig. 8--10, G = 165 billion
standard cubic feet.
Figure 8-10 is a plot of reservoir pressure as a function of cumulative
gas production. The solid pressure line represents the actual variation of
598
reservoir pressure with production throughout the life of the reservoir. It

will be noted that the line is curved, lying below the P /Z line at all points
except at zero pressure, where the two lines must intercept. If the gas
were ideal (r.e., Z = 1), the pressure would be linear with production. An
extrapolation of the pressure-production curve as a straight line may lead
to overestimates (extrapolated pressure curve 1) or underestimates (extrapolated pressure curve 2) of the gas initially in place.
Water influx into a gas reservoir will cause the P/Z curve to deviate
from linearity with production. Inaccuracies in pressure or production
data will also cause irregularities.
REFERENCES
1. Schilthuis, R. J.: Active Oil and Reservoir Energy, Trans. AIME, vol. 118,
p. 33, 1936.
2. Katz, D. L.: Methods of Estimating Oil and Gas Reserves, Trans. AIME, vol. 118,
p. 18, 1936.
3. Miles, A. J.: Private report, 1936.
4. Kaveler, H. H.: Engineering Features of the Shuler Field and Unit Operation,
Trans. AIME, vol. 155, p. 58, 1944.
5. Gruy, H. J.: "A Critical Review of Methods Used in the Estimation of Natural
Gas Reserves," Thesis, A and M College of Texas, 1956.
6. Nichols, E. A.: Geothermal Gradients in Mid-Continent and Gulf Coast Oil Fields,
Trans. AIME, vol. 170, p. 44, 1947.

7. Pirson, S. J.: "Oil Reservoir Engineering," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company,
NAME INDEX
Alexander, C. I., 526, 560
Allen, R. C., 357

Archie, G. E., 111, 116, 119, 125, 131
Barnes, K. B., 66, 67, 130, 209
Bartell, F. E., 134, 135, 209
Beal, Carlton, 429-432, 436, 437, 441444, 446, 464, 472
Beattie, J. A., 236, 357
Beeson, C. M., 52, 130, 131
Benedict, M., 357
Benner, F. C., 134, 135, 209
Eicher, L. B., 279-281, 357
Black, W. Marshall, 482, 559
Blair, P. M., 210
Blum, H. A., 210
Bobrowski, F. P., 518, 519, 559
Botset, H. G., 131, 176, 177, 179, 181,
204, 205, 210
Boyd, W. L., 273, 357
Brantly, J. E., 27, 35
Bridgeman, 0. C., 236, 357
Bridgman, D. W., 464, 472
Brown, G. G., 215-217, 219, 237-242,
249-251, 258, 259, 310, 326-337, 357,
358,423,446
Brown, Harry W., 146, 147, 149, 150,
156, 157, 209
Bruce, W. A., 144, 151, 156, 162, 209,
210
Bulnes, A. C., 179, 180, 204, 205, 210,
538, 560
Burdine, N. T., 168, 172-174, 197, 199,
200, 210
Burrows, D. B., 358, 447
Calhoun, John C., Jr., 165, 166, 205, 210
Caraway, W. Hodge, 209
Carlson, H. A., 357

Carman, P. C., 99, 131
Carpenter, Charles B., 59-62, 130

Carr, N. L., 282-285, 358, 444, 447
Carson, D. B., 276, 357
Chambers, Adele, 209
Chin, Tim, 518, 519, 559
Clark, N. J., 33, 35, 224-226, 357
Cook, A. B., 518, 519, 559
Cornell, D., 114, 131
Croft, H. 0., 130
Cupps, C. Q., 516, 559
Daniels, Farrington, 212, 287, 288, 357
Davis, D. H., 96, 131

Davison, R.R., 344, 358
de Witte, A. J., 122--124, 131
Dodge, B. F., 318, 358
Dodson, C. R., 372, 394, 399, 400, 446,
450, 451, 453, 455, 457, 467, 472
Dotson, B. J., 56, 130
Drake, L. C., 172, 210
Dykstra, H., 197, 198, 210
Eilerts, C. K., 261, 262, 264, 265, 269,
357
Emdahl, Ben A., 102, 110, 131
Eshbach, Ovid W ., 358
Espach, Ralph H., 516, 559
Evinger, H. H., 494, 559
Fancher, G. H., 66, 67, 130, 140, 209

Fatt, I., 59, 62-64, 96, 130, 131, 197,
198, 201, 204, 210
Fitting, R. U., Jr., 179, 180, 204, 205,
210, 538, 560
Fraser, H. J., 37, 129
========---- - -
600
-------
-------------
NAME INDEX
NAME INDEX
Freeman, M. L., Jr., 47, 130
Kelton, Frank C., 56, 57, 90, 130
Nichols, E. A., 577, 598
Saltman, W., 306, 358
Fry, J., 516, 559
Kennedy, H. T., 106-109, 131

Kerver, J. K., 210
Nuss, W. F., 41, 130
Schilthuis, R. J., 561, 598

Shearin, H. M., 131
Sherborne, J. E., 312, 358
Gardner, G. H. F., 115, 131

Gates, George L., 150, 209
Geertsma, J., 57, 58, 62, 130
Geffen, T. M., 186, 201-203, 210

Gillingham, W. J., 132
Goodwill, D., 399, 446
Gournay, L. S., 210
Graton, L. C ., 37, 129
Greenburger, M. H., 159, 210
Gruy, H. J., 596, 598

Guerrero, E. T., 132
Guthrie, R. K., 155, 159, 210, 474, 559

Hachmuth, K. H., 319, 320, 340, 341,
358, 422, 423, 446
Hafford, J. A., 185, 186, 210
Hager, Dorsey, 2, 3, 5, 6, 11, 35
Hall, Howard N., 60, 61, 130
Berning, F., 285, 358
Hill, H. J., 122, 123, !3i
Hodgman, C. D., 470, 472
Holland, C. D., 344, 358
Hopper, R. H., 132
Hubbert,M. King,68,69, 130,525,560
Hurst, W., 384, 391, 446
Jakosky, J. J., 125, 127, 132

Johnston, Norris, 131
Jones, Park J., 450, 451, 453, 461, 464,
. 472
Jones, R. G., 106-109, 131
Katz, D. L., 114, 131, 223, 276, 279-282,

296, 298-300, 305-308, 319, 320, 324,
341,352,353,357,358,422-425,427431, 436, 437, 439, 446, 561, 598
Kaveler, H. H., 321, 340, 358, 422, 446,
522,531,559,579,582,598
Kay, W. B., 245, 357
Kaye, Emil, 47, 130
Keenan, J. H., 357, 455, 472
Keyes, F. G., 357, 455, 472

Klinkenberg, L. J., 91, 92, 130
Knutsen, Carroll F., 205, 206, 210
Kobayashi, R., 358, 447

Kraemer, A. J., 9, 35
Krumbein, W. C., 57, 58, 130

Krynine, P. D., 16, 17, 35
Nutting, P. G., 45, 130

Oberfell, G. G., 357
Olds, R.H., 261, 267, 357, 438-440, 447
Osoba, J. S., 185, 195, 210
Owen, Joe D., 122, 131, 152
Owens, W. W., 210
Kurata, Fred, 223, 357
Parrish, D. R., 210

Lacey, William N., 248, 261, 265, 267,
270, 290, 293, 312, 357, 358, 516, 559
Lane, E. C., 9, 35
Law, Jan, 538, 543, 545, 560
Lawrence, L. L., 357
Leas, W. J., 99, 131, 196, 210
Leverett, M. C., 125, 127, 131, 139, 142,
143, 145, 180-184, 209
Patnode, H. W., 123, 128, 131

Perry, J. N., 314, 358
Pirson, S. J., 16-20, 35, 117, 127, 131,

361, 446, 574, 598
Plateau, J. A. F., 139, 209
Prehn, W. L., Jr., 209
Purcell, W. R., 145, 147, 148, 168, 170-
172, 196, 197, 209
Lewis, G. N., 318, 358

Lewis, J. A., 66, 67, 130, 182-184, 209
Lewis, W. B., 210

Lipstate, P.H., 516, 559
McCardell, W. M., 141, 209
McCarthy, E. I., 273-275, 357

McCreery, P. N., 130
McCurdy, R. C., 130
Martin, M., 125, 127, 132
Masson, P.H., 131
Matthews, T. A., 256, 257, 357
Mayer, E. H., 399, 446
Mechen, 0. E., 130
Milburn, J. D., 122, 123, 131
Miles, A. J., 561, 598
Monroe, R. R., 358
Morris, Frank C., 209
Morse, R. A., 125, 127, 132, 210
l\fullens, N. B., 357
Murray, G. H., 132

Muskat, M., 69, 95, 130, 131, 494, 545,
559, 560
Slawinski, A., 119, 131
Stichter, C. S., 37, 129

Slobod, R. L., 130, 146, 149, 166, 167,
209, 210
Sloss, L. L., 57, 58, 130
Smith, D. E., 321, 340, 358, 422, 446
Spangler, M. B., 113, 131
Spencer, G. B., 59, 60, 130, 518, 519, 559
Spurlock, James W., 130
Standing, M. B., 213, 261, 296-301, 303,
352, 353, 357, 358, 420, 421, 431, 433439, 441, 446, 451, 453, 455, 457, 467,
472
Stevens, A.. B., 48, 49, 51, 87-89, 101,
130
Stiff, H. A., Jr., 471, 472
Sugden, 306,358
Sundberg, Karl, 116, 131
Rachford, H. H., 343, 344, 358

Rall, C. G., 50, 130
Randall, M., 358

Rapoport, L.A., 99, 131, 196, 210
Reamer, H. H., 270, 357
Reicherty, P. 0., 210
Reid, L. S., 273, 357
Reistle, C. E., 470, 472
Reudelhuber, F. 0., 365, 446
Rice, J. D., 344, 358
Richardson, J. G., 186, 187, 189, 194,
195, 210
Ritter, H. L., 172, 210
Roland, C. H., 320, 321, 340, 341, 357,
358, 422, 446
Rose, Walter, 156, 210
Rowe, W. E., 460, 472
Rubin, L. C., 357
Taliaferro, D. B., 50, 130

Thornton, O. F., 227, 357
Tickell, F. G., 39, 40, 130, 470

Tixier, ~L P., 124, 131
Trainer, R. R., 358
Trube, Albert S., 300, 302, 358
Uren, L. C., 16, 23, 27, 35, 211, 357
Van Meter, 0. E., 106-109, 131

Van Wingen, N., 466, 472
Vance, Harold, 17, 35, 528, 529, 560
Vondy, D., 277, 357
Russell, W. L., 45, 130

Rust, C. F., 118, 125, 126, 131
Sage, Bruce H., 248, 261, 265, 267, 270,
Nanz, Robert H., Jr., 38, 39, 130

Newton, R. N ., 318, 358
601
290, 293, 312, 357, 358, 438-440, 447,

516, 559
Webb, G. B., 357

Welge, H.J., 143, 144, 151, 162, 190,
209, 210
"\Vharton, J. B., Jr., 531, 560
Whiting, R. L., 41, 125, 127, 130, 132
'!'
602
NAME INDEX
Wilhelm, 0., 2, 12, 13, 20, 35

Williams, Milton, 125, 131, 132
Winn, R. H., 112, 123, 131
Winsauer, W. 0., 116, 120, 131
Woody, L. D., Jr., 160, 161, 210
Wright, H. T., Jr., 160, 161, 210
Wyckoff, R. D., 125, 127, 131, 176, 181,
210
Wyllie, M. R. J., 98, JOO, 113, 115, 119121, !28, 131

Young, R. M., 132
Yuster, S. T., 166, 210, 524, 560
Zaremba, N. B., 357
Zipperer, L., 285, 358
SUBJECT INDEX
Absolute temperature, 230
Adhesion tension, 134-138
Amagat's law, 243, 247
Angle of contact, 134, 135, 154, 155,
165-167
API gravity, 4-7, 295
Apparent convergence pressure, 418
Apparent gas densities, 427, 428
Average molecular weight of a gas,
250-252
Average water saturation, 543
calculation of, 549--552
from capillary pressure, 153, 549
Avogadro's law, 230, 239
Beattie-Bridgeman equation, 236

Benedict-Webb-Rubin equation, 236
Binary hydrocarbon systems, behavior
of, 218
effect of composition on, 218, 219
Bottom-hole pressure, 481, 488
flowing, 489
gradients, 488
static, 489
Bottom-hole sampling, 360
bomb, 361
Boyle's law, 229, 234
Bubble point, calculation of FVF at,
355
equilibrium equation at, 323
specific volwne at, 292
Bubble-point curve, 214, 217, 220
Bubble-point-pressure calculations, 341
Build-up and draw-down tests on oil
wells, 495
Bulk modulus, 291
Bulk volume, 43, 536
methods of determining, 45
Cable-tool drilling, 22
Capillary pressure, 134
calculation of permeability, 167
centrifuge, 143
correlation of, 549
desaturation, 143
displacement, 143
drainage, 142
dynamic, 144
evaporation, 144
imbibition, 142
laboratory measurements, 142
mercury injection, 144
methods of measuring, 143
water saturation from, 153, 549
Carbon dioxide, compressibility chart
for, 267
effect of, on compressibility factors of
hydrocarbon mixtures, 265
Carbonate rocks, 16, 19
permeability measurement, 91
porosity measurement, 56
Cementation factor, 117
Charles and Gay-Lussac_law, 229, 234
Chip coring, 24, 106
Coefficient, of isotherm.al compressibility, 288
effect of temperature on, 290
of thermal expansion, 288
effect of pressure on, 293
Composite liberation, 372, 398
Compressibility, isothermal coefficient
of, 291
pore, 57
rock bulk, 57
rock matrix, 57
Compressibility factor, 236
charts, n-butane, 240
carbon dioxide, 267
604
SUDJECT INDEX
Compressibility factor, charts, ethane,

238
of gas liberated, 371
hydrocarbon mi'\."ture, 249-251
hydrogen sulfide, 270
methane, 237
nitrogen, 262
propane, 239
Compressible fluids, steady flow of, 72
Condensation, retrograde, 221
Conductive solids, effect of, 120
Connate water, 100
measurement of, 102
use of capillary pressure, 153, 549
Contact angle, 134, 135, 154, 155,
16&-167
Convergence pressure, 324
apparent, 418
Conversion factors for darcy, 78, 79
Core analysis, example of, 523, 529
tracers in, 108
Core barrel, cable-tool, 24
pressure, 27
rotary, 27
~re flushing, 106
{~or~, fluid saturations, 105
pel:"meability measurement of, 86
porosity measurement of, 43
Coring, cable-tool, 24
chip, 24
with oil-base mud, 108
Coring devices, rotary, 'l:l
bottom-hole type, 27
side-wall type, 27
Cricondenbar, 221
Cricondentherm, 220
Critical locus, 219
Critical point, 213, 220
Critical pressure, 220
Critical temperature, 220
Crude oil, 1
classifications, 7
Bureau of Mines, 8
physical properties, 4
Dalton's law, 317

Darcy, unit of permeability, 70
Darcy's law, conversion of units, 78

generalized forms, 68
Density, of gas, 254
of hydrocarbon mixtures in liquid
state, 295
of liquid, 295
reservoir, calculation of, 304
stock-tank, calculation of, 298
Dew point, calculations of, 341
Dew-point curve, 214
Differential liberation of gas, 377
example of, 380
Differential oil volume data, 383
Drill-stem tests, 207, 480, 519
Drive, solution-gas, 32, 568
solution-gas-gas-cap, 32, 569
water; 32, 570
Effective permeability, 175
of fractures, 84
Effective porosity, 39
Electrical logging, water-saturation determination by, 124
End effects, 180, 193
Energy production, total mineral, 1
Equation of state, ideal gas, 231
Beattie-Bridgeman, 236
Benedict-Webb-Rubin, 236
van der Waals', 234
Equilibrium constants, 318
charts of, 319, 320, 325-341
Equilibrium problems, separator, 349
solution of, 340
Equilibrium-ratio data, fitting of, to
laboratory fluid-analysis data, 417
Equilibrium ratios, 320, 324, 373
Equilibrium saturation, 176
Estimation, of gas in place from material balance, 593
of oil in place, for slightly compressible fluids, 592
for solution-gas-drive reservoir, 589
Extensive properties, 220
Fanning's equation, 64
Field-data analysis, production, 475
SUBJECT INDEX
Field-data analysis, pressure, 488, 578

well tests, 492
Flash liberation of gas, 377, 400
Fluid analysis, gas-condensate system,
413
gas-crude-oil system, 37 4
Fluid-analysis-data preparation for use
in reservoir calculations, 383
applications of, 415
gas-condensate systems, 413
gas-crude-oil system, 37 4
Fluid contents of reservoir rocks, 100
by distillation, 103
of flushed cores, 108
interpretation of data for, 109
measurements of factors affecting, 105
by retorting, 100
Fluid distributions in reservoirs, 139,
142, 152, 549
Fluid fl.ow in space, tilting of interface,
524
Fluid-flow formulas, horizontal, 71
ideal gas, 77
radial, 76
slightly compressible, 77
vertical, 73
Fluid injection, 34, 570
Fluid properties, average, 497
Fluid-saturated rocks, electrical conductivity of, 110
Fluid saturation, methods of determining, 100
Fluid viscosities, correlation charts,
280-285, 442-444
of gas, 280-285, 444
of liquids, 441--444
Formation factor, 111
Formation volume factor, gas-, 257
sweet-..and sour, 261
oil-, 317
differential, 369, 374
fla.sh, 375
total, 317
water-, 457-459
Formatioa volume factors, combination,
computation of, 383
empirical method~ 429
605
Formation volume factors, ideal-so.

lution method, 425
laboratory measurement, 368
Fractures, effective permeability of, 84
Frequency function, normal distribution, 541
Friction factor, chart for, 67
Fugacity, 318
Gas, associated free, 14
material balance, 568
material-balance solution, 589
non.associated free, 14
solution, 14
Grus cap, 15
isopach map of, 527
material balance \vith, 569
Gas constant, universal, 231
Gas-formation volume factor (see Formation volume factor)
Gas gravity, 8
definition of, 251
Gas law, Arnagat's, 243
Avogadro's, 230
of corresponding states, 245
Dalton's, 317
ideal (perfect), 229
&oult's, 317
van der Waals', 234
Gas mixtures, 234
compressibility of, 247, 250
impurities in, 260
pseudo properties of, 256
viscosity of, 278
volumes of, 243
water vapor in, 271
Gas-oil contact, example of, 520, 523,
526, 530
pressure at, 492
use of, 526, 528, 533
Gas-oil ratio, adjustment of, 395
effect of separator pressure on, 382
example of, 377
example calculation, 484
field average, 478
separator, 370
solution-, 369
606
SUBJECT INDEX
Gas properties, compressibility factor,

247, 249, 250
critical pressure, 220
critical temperature, 220
effect of impurities on, 260
pseudo-critical pressure, 256
pseudo-critical temperature, 256
retrograde condensation, 221
theorem of corresponding states, 245
viscosity, 279
water content, 271
Gas reservoir, 573
Gas solubility, in oil, 369, 397
in water, 451
Gas wells, back-pressure tests on,
496
Gases, kinetic theory of, 232
physical constants of hydrocarbons,
244
Geometric mean, 539
Geothermal gradient, 577
Grain volume, 43
Gravity, API, conversion table for, 5
correlation with, 7
definition of, 4
Gravity flow, 74
Group formulas, 2
Harmonic mean, 539

lieptanes-plus fraction, 255
equilibrium ratio for, 319, 320, 341
pseudo-critical pressure of1 255
pseudo-critical temperature of, 255
High-shrinkage oil, phase diagram of,
226
Hydrocarbon, names of, 2
Hydrocarbon system, 212
Hydrocarbon volume, calculation of,
552
Hydrocarbons, series of, 2
Hydrogen sulfide, compressibility factor for, 270
effect of, on compressibility factor of
natural-gas mi},.'iures, 270
equilibrium ratios for, 339
Ideal gases, isothermal flow of, 73

Ideal solutions, additive volumes, 261,
296
modified, 425
Imbibition, 142, 201
Intensive properties, 220
Interfacial tension, 134
Interstitial water, 101, 150
(Irreducible) minimum water saturation, 163
Isobaric retrograde vaporization, 221
Isobaric thermal expansion, 288, 292
Isopach maps, gross, 527
het gas, 527
net oil, 527
total net thickness, 527
Isothermal compressibility, 288
Isothermal retrograde condensation, 221
J function, 155
K values, 320, 324, 373
Kinetic theory of gases, 232
Klinkenberg effect, 91
Kozeny equation, 99, 129
Law of corresponding states, 245

Liberation process, differential, 370
equilibrium or "fl.ash," 367
Linear flow, series combination of beds,
81
Liquids, volumetric behavior of, 288
Logging, core, 523, 530
electric, 521
mud and drilling time, 520
radioactive, 521
Low-shrinkage oil, phase diagram, 225
Material balance, 562

data for, 575
core-analysis and laboratory-work,
575
fluid-analysis, 575
SUBJECT INDEX
Material balance, data for, fluid-production, 575

reservoir-pressure, temperature, 575
Material-balance equation, 561
derivation of, 562
drive, solution-gas, 568, 589
solution-gas-gas-cap, 569
solution-gas-gas-cap-water, with
fluid injection, 570
reservoirs, gas, 573, 593
simple solution-gas-gas-cap-waterdrive, 570
slightly compressible hydrocarbon,
571, 592
Method, of averages, 385, 390, 507
example solution, 508
of least squares, 385, 388
Minimum (irreducible) water saturation, 163
Mode, 539
Multicomponent systems, 220
Multiple phase flow, 174
Natural gas, 1
composition of, 8
Natural-gas hydrate, 274-278
Natural gases, behavior of, 234--239
compressibility-factor charts, 249-251
pseud()-{!ritical properties, 258, 259
water content, 271-278
Nitrogen, compressibility facfo~ for, 262
effect on volumetric behavior of natural gases, 261-265
Nomenclature of hyd'rocarbons, 2-4
Ohm's law, 85, 86, 118
Oil-base cores, 106-108
Oil density, 295-305
Oil field, 31
Oil-formation volume factor, 317, 353356, 369, 370, 374-377, 396-399,
408-410, 428, 43D-434, 513, 514
Oil in place, estimate methods for, material-balance, 589
volumetric, 553
volumetric evaluation of, 554
(See also Estimation)
607
Oil volume, relative, 376, 391-394, 407,

408, 510, 511
Oil-well production system, 29
Packing of spheres, 37, 38

Parachor, 306, 307
Per cent shrinkage, differential, 37 5
fla.sh, 375
Perfect gas law, 230, 231
Permeability, 64
classification of data, 543
effect of reactive liquids, 93
effective, 175
of fractures, 84
geometric mean, 546
relative (see Relative permeability)
weighted average, 537
Permeability measurements, 71, 96
effect of gas slippage on, 91
Permeability ranges, 543
Permeability-water-saturation relationships, 150, 151, 160, 161, 549
Petroleum, 1
accumulation of, 10
origin of, inorganic theory; 10
organic theory, 10
Phase defined, 212
Phase diagrams, for dry gas, 224
for high-shrinkage oil, 226
for: low-shrinkage oil, 225
natural-gas-natural-gasoline mixture,
223
nomenclature, 221
for wet gas, 224
Phase equilibrium, 320
Poiseuille's equation, 64, 83, 84, 97, 169
Pore compressibility, 57
Pore volume, 43
methods of measuring, 51, 52
Porosity, classified., 36
cubical packing, 37
defined, 36
effective, 39, 52
measurement of, 43
precision of, 53
rhombohedral, 37
608
SUBJECT INDEX
Porosity, total, 39, 48

weighted average, 537
Porous rocks, compressibility 9f, 57
Pressure, areal weighted, 582, 583
average reservoir, 580
bottom-hole, 488
capillary (see Capillary pressure)
convergence, 324, 418
critical, 220
initial reservoir, 578
pseudo-critical, 247
pseudo-reduced, 248
reduced, 247
saturation, 362
volume-weighted, 583, 584
Pressure-depletion study for condensate gases, 413, 414
Pressure-temperature diagram, for binary mixtures, 219
for ethane, 213
for ethane-n-heptane system, 217
(See also Phase diagrams)
Pressure tests, 488
Pressure-volume diagram of ethane, 215
Production tests, 481
Productivity index, 492, 493
Productivity tests on oil wells, 492

Pseudo-critical pressure, 247
Pseudo-critical properties, of hydrocarbon liquids, 256, 257
of natural gases, 259
Pseudo-critical temperature, 247
Pseudo-reduced pressure, 248
Pseudo-reduced temperature, 248
Pycnometers for determination of bulk
volume, 45
Radial flow, 76
ideal gases, 77
incompressible fluids, 77
parallel combination of beds, 80
series combination of beds, 82
slightly compressible fluids, 77
Raoult's law, 317, 318
Records, completion and workover, 475
production, 475
Reduced pressure, 247

Reduced temperature, 247
Reduced volume, 247
Relative oil volume, 376, 391-394, 407,
408, 510, 511
Relative permeability, 176
calculation of, 195-199
effect of viscosity ratio on, 181
factors affecting, 199-202
of gas, and oil, 180
and water, 177
measurement of, 184-192
three-phase, 181-184
Relative-permeability ratio, 202, 203
Relative total volume, 367, 376, 382,
384, 410, 501
Reservoir fluids, bubble-point pressure,
341
critical temperature and pressure, 220
differential liberation of, 377, 380
flash liberation of, 377, 400
retrograde condensation and vaporization of, 221
sampling, bottom-hole, 360
saturation determination, 150-153
shrinkage, 365, 37 5
viscosity of, 372, 441--445
Reservoir pressures, 578
average, 580
Reservoir rocks, classification of, 16-22
wettability of, 165-167
(See oJ,so Fluid contents of reservoir
rocks)
Reservoir temperatures, 575-578
Reservoirs, structural classification of,
12, 13
Resistivity of rocks, 110-129
Resistivity index, 113, 124-128
Retrograde condensation, 221
Retrograde region, 221
Rock volume, evaluation of, 517-536
Rotary drilling, 25
Rotary drilling fluids, 26
Sampling, bottom-hole, 360

recombination, 360, 362
SUBJECT INDEX
Sampling, of reservoir :fluids, 360

split-stream, 360, 364
Saturation in reservoir fluids, determination of, 150-153
Saturation pressure, 362
Secondary recovery, 34
Sedimentary rocks, 16
Separator problems, application of equilibrium calculations, 345
Shrinkage factor, differential, 375
flash, 375
separator, 365
Single-component systems, 212-217
Slightly compressible hydrocarbon reservoirs, 571
Slippage phenomena, 91
Solution-gas drive, 568
Solution-gas-gas-cap drive, 569
Solution-gas-gas-cap-water drive with
fluid injection, 570
Solution-gas-gas-cap-water-drive reservoirs, 570
Specific volume, of ethane, 215
of water, 463
Standard conditions, 29
Standard deviation, 540
Steady-state flow, horizontal, 71
radial, 76-78
vertical, 73-75
Surface tension, 134
mixture of hydrocarbons, 305
Symbols, 562
Systems, binary, 217
heterogeneous, 212
homogeneous, 212
multicomponent, 220
single-component, 212
two-phase, 315
Thermal expansion, coefficient of, 288

isobaric, 293
for water, 455--457
Tilting of interface, 524-526
Tortuosity, 99, 129
Total volume factor, 376, 400-403
combination, 401
609
Total volume factor, differential, 401

flash, 400
Tracers in core analysis, 108
Transition zones, 153
Traps, classification system, 12
Triple point, 287
Two-phase formation volume factor (see
Total volume factor)
Two-phase region, 220
van der Waals' equation, 234, 235, 245247

Vapor-pressure curve, 213
Vapor pressures of light hydrocarbons,
312
Viscosity, absolute, 7
of gas, 278-286
of hydrocarbon liquids, 309, 310
kinematic, 7, 309
reservoir-oil, 372, 441-445
Saybolt Universal, 7
of water, 464-466
Volumeters, Russell, 45
Volumetric evaluation of oil in place,
554
W ashbum-Bunting porosimeter, 51
Water, chemical properties, 470
compressibility, 452
connate (see Connate water)
electrical resistivity, 468
formation volume factor, _457-459
interstitial, 101, 150
physical properties, 449
solubility in natural gas~ 466
solubility of natural gas, 450
thermal expansion, 455
viscosity, 464
Water-formation volume factor, 457459
Water influx, 467
Water-oil contact, 521
water tables, 205-209
Water saturation (see Average water
saturation)
--------------------------------------------
610
SUBJECT INDEX
Well, completion of, 28

first commercial, 1
Well tests, 479
build-up and draw-down, on oil wells,
495
drill-stem, 480
pressure, 488
production, 481
productivity, on oil wells, 492
Wettability, 134
of reservoir rocks, 165-167
Y function, 384-391
average for field, 507-510
Z factor, 236
for natural gas, 249-251
Zones, transition, 153

Amyx-Petroleum Reservoir Engineering

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amyx-Petroleum Reservoir Engineering

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amyx-Petroleum Reservoir Engineering

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the topics covered in the textbook?

What are some of the topics covered in the textbook?

What methods are discussed for evaluating rock and fluid properties?

What methods are discussed for evaluating rock and fluid properties?

PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING

McGraw-Hill Classic Textbook Reissue Series

McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

PETROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING

This book, the first of two volumes on petroleum-reservoir engineering,

The California Standard Company, Canadian Seaboard Company,

Single-component Systems-Binary Systems-Multicomponent Systems.

8. The Material Bale.nee .

constant in equation of state

ENGLISH LETTER SYl-fBOLS

fraction (such as the fraction of a flow stream consisting of a particular phase)

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

relative permeability to oil

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

tubing pressure, flowing

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

critical water saturation

GREEK LEITER SYMBOLS

(beta) thermal expansion coefficient

ENGLISH LETTER SYl\.IBOLS

(gamma) oil specific gravity (water ~ 1)

SUBSCRIPT LETTER SYMBOLS

bulk (used with volume only)

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

bottom hole, flowing (used with pressure only)

ENGLISH LETTER SYMBOLS

(sigma, capital) summation

degrees on the American Petroleum Institute modified Baume

thousands of standard cubic feet

standard cubic feet

average, or mean, value of a quantity x

PETROLEUM RESERVOm ENGINEERING

Mineral tar (asphaltum)

TABLE 1-1. HYD:aocARBON SERIES FoUND IN PET:aoLEtJMf

C,.Ht and C,.H21>+2

c ..~ and C,.H2n-'

Mineral wax (ozocerite)

ists in unsaturated hydrocarbons, the ending is modified to indicate the

Olefin (alkene), C.H,,.

PEI'ROLEUM RE.SERVOm ENGINEERING

Polymethylene (cycloalkane), C,.Hin

Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons

OAP! = 141.5 - 131.5

is the specific gravity and 0 API is the API gravity. It may be

SPECIFIC GRAVITY, A.ND WEIGHT

PER GALLON OF CRUDE On}

TABLE 1-3. RELATION OF

Benzene (aromatic), C..H!n-1

SAYBOLT UNIVERSAL Vrscos1TY2

tion of temperature and pressure, it is necessary to designate standard

of efflux, in seconds, of a known volume of liquid through a standardized

NOTE: To obtain the Saybolt Universal viscosity eauivalent to a kinematic viscosity

to the kinematic viscosity, which is usually expressed in centistokes. The

PEI'ROLEUM RESERVOIR ENGINEERING